Siemens Switchboard and Protection Manual

Application Manual
Totally Integrated Power TM Application Manual

Connecting the worlds
of building construction and power distribution
with integrated solutions for commercial and industrial buildings
www.siemens.com/tip
totally integrated
The information provided in this brochure contains merely general descriptions or charac-
teristics of performance which in actual case of use do not always apply as described or
which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to
provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of
contract.
Siemens AG
power
Automation and Drives Power Transmission and Distribution Siemens Schweiz AG Nominal charge: 30.00 euro
Gleiwitzer Straße 555 Paul-Gossen-Straße 100 Building Technologies Group Order no.: E20001-A70-M104-X-7600
D-90475 Nuremberg D-91052 Erlangen International Headquarters
Gubelstrasse 22
CH-6301 Zug 2nd Edition
Conversion Factors and Tables
Volume Volume flow rate Pressure
Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric

SI unit unit SI unit SI unit
unit unit
1 in3 16.387 cm3 1 gallon/s 3.785 l/s 1 in HG 0.034 bar
1 ft3 28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3 1 gallon/min 0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h 1 psi 0.069 bar
1 yd3 0.765 m3 1 ft3/s 101.941 m3/h 1 lbf/ft2 4.788 x 10-4 bar =
1 fl oz 29.574 cm3 1 ft3/min 1.699 m3/h 4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2
1 quart 0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l 1 lbf/in2 0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2
Non-metric
SI unit
1 pint 0.473 dm3 = 0.473 l unit 1 tonf/ft2 1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2
1 gallon 3.785 dm3 = 3.785 l 1 l/s 0.264 gallons/s 1 tonf/in2 154.443 bar =
1 barrel 158,987 dm3 = 1.589 m3 1 l/h 0.0044 gallons/min 157.488 kgf/cm2
= 159 l 1 m3/h 4.405 gallons/min =
Non-metric
0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s SI unit unit
Non-metric
SI unit unit 1 bar 29.53 in Hg =
= 105 pa 14.504 psi =
1 cm3 0.061 in3 = 0.034 fl oz
= 102 kpa 2088.54 lbf/ft2 =
1 dm3 61.024 in3 = Force
14.504 lbf/in2 =
=1l 0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quarts = 0.932 tonf/ft2 =
Non-metric
2.114 pint = 0.264 gallons unit SI unit 6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2
1 m3 0.629 barrels (= 1.02 kgf/cm2)
1 lbf 4.448 N
1 kgf 9.807 N
1 tonf 9.964 kN
SI unit Non-metric Energy, work, heat content

unit
Velocity
1N 0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf
Non-metric
unit SI unit
Non-metric 1 kN 0.100 tonf
unit SI unit
1 hp h 0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J
1 ft/s 0.305 m/s = 1,098 km/h = 2.737 x 105 kgf m
1 mile/h 0.447 m/s = 1,609 km/h 1 ft lbf 0.138 kgf m
Torque, moment of force
Non-metric 1 Btu 1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J
SI unit
unit Non-metric (= 0.252 kcal)
unit SI unit
1 m/s 3.281 ft/s = 2.237 miles/h Non-metric
1 lbf in 0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m SI unit
1 km/h 0.911 ft/s = 0.621 miles/h unit
1 lbf ft 1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m
1 kWh 1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m
Non-metric = 3.6 x 105 J
SI unit unit
1J 3.725 x 10-7 hp h =
1 Nm 8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft
0.738 ft lbf =
Mass, weight (= 0.102 kgf m)
9.478 x 10-4 Btu
(= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)
Non-metric SI unit 1 kgf m 3.653 x 10-6 hp h =
unit
7.233 ft lbf
1 oz 28.35 g Moment of inertia J
1 lb 0.454 kg = 453.6 g GD2
Numerical value equation: J= = Wr 2
1 sh ton 0.907 t = 907.2 kg 4
Non-metric
SI unit Non-metric unit SI unit
unit
1 lbf ft2 0.04214 kg m2 Btu = British thermal unit
1g 0.035 oz Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour
1 kg 2.205 lb = 35.27 oz SI unit Non-metric
unit lbf = pound force
1t 1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb tonf = ton force
1 kg m2 23.73 lb ft2
Conductor cross sections Temperature Linear measure

in the Metric and US System
Metric cross American Wire Gauge °F °C Non-metric

sections acc. (AWG) unit SI system
to IEC
1 mil 0.0254 mm
Conductor Equivalent AWG or MCM 320° 160° 1 in 2.54 cm = 25.4 mm
cross metric CSA
section 1 ft 30.48 cm = 0.305 m
305°
150° 1 yd 0.914 m
[mm2] [mm2] 290° 1 mile 1.609 km = 1,609 m
140°
275° Non-metric
SI system unit
130°
0.653 19 AWG 260°
0.75
0.832 18 1 mm 39.37 mil
245° 120°
1.040 17 1 cm 0.394 in
1.310 16 1m 3.281 ft = 39.370 in
230° 110°
1.50 = 1.094 yd
1.650 15
2.080 14 212° 100° 1 km 0.621 mile = 1,094 yd
2.50 2.620 13 200°
12 90°
3.310
4.00 185°
4.170 11 80°
5.260 10 170° Square measure
6.00
6.630 9 70°
155°
8.370 8
10.00 10.550 7 140° 60° Non-metric SI unit
unit
13.300 6
125°
16.00 5 50° 1 in2 6.452 cm2 = 654.16 mm2
16.770
21.150 4 110° 1 ft2 0.093 m2 = 929 cm2
40°
25.00
26.670 3 1 yd2 0.836 m2
95°
33.630 2 1 acre 4046.9 m2
35.00 30°
42.410 80° 1 mile2 2.59 km2
1
50.00 53.480 1/0 20° Non-metric
65° SI unit
67.430 2/0 unit
70.00
50° 10°
95.00 85.030 3/0 1 mm2 0.00155 in2
107.200 4/0 1 cm2 0.155 in2
120.00 250 MCM 32° 0°
126.640 1 m2 10.76 ft2 = 1,550 in2
150.00 152.000 300 20° = 1.196 yd2
185.00 –10°
202.710 400 1 km2 0.366 miles2
5°
240.00 253.350 500
–20°
300.00 304.000 600 –10°
354.710 700
400.00 800 –30° Btu = British thermal unit
405.350 –25°
500.00 506.710 1000 Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour
625.00 –40° –40° lbf = pound force
tonf = ton force
Electrical power Examples of decimal multiples and

fractions of metric units
Non-metric SI unit
unit
1 hp 0.746 kW = 745.70 W = 1 km = 1,000 m;
76.040 kgf m/s 1 m = 100 cm = 1,000 mm
(= 1.014 PS) 1 km2 = 1,000,000 m2;
1 ft lbf/s 1.356 W (= 0.138 kgf in/s) 1 m2 = 10,000 cm2;
1 kcal/h 1.163 W 1 cm2 = 100 mm2
1 Btu/h 0.293 W 1 m3 = 1,000,000 cm3;

1 cm3 = 1,000 mm3
SI unit Non-metric
unit 1 t = 1,000 kg; 1 kg = 1,000 g
1 kW 1.341 hp = 1 kW = 1,000 W
101.972 kgf m/s
(= 1.36 PS)
1W 0.738 ft lbf/s = 0.86 kcal/h =
3.412 Btu
(= 0.102 kgf m/s)
Specific steam consumption
Non-metric SI unit
unit
1 lb/hp h 0.608 kg/kWh
SI unit Non-metric
unit
1 kg/kWh 1.644 lb/hp h
Temperature
Non-metric SI unit
unit
°F °C 5 (ϑ – 32) = ϑ
9 F C
°F K 5 ϑ + 255.37 = T
9 F
SI unit Non-metric
unit
°C °F 5 ϑ + 32 = ϑ
9 C F
K °F 5 ϑT – 459.67 = ϑ
9 F
Note:
Quantity Symbol Unit
Temperature in ϑ F* °F
Fahrenheit
Temperature in degrees ϑC* °C Btu = British thermal unit
Celsius (centigrade) Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour
Thermodynamic T K lbf = pound force
temperature (Kelvin) tonf = ton force
* The letter t may be used instead of ϑ
Contents
1 Introduction 1/2 6 Low Voltage 6/2
2 Power Distribution Planning for 6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems 6/3
Commercial and Industrial Buildings 2/2 6.1.1 SIVACON 8PS – Busbar Trunking Systems 6/6
6.1.2 SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear 6/11
2.1. Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems 2/2
6.1.3 SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC
2.1.1 Requirements to Electrical Power Systems in Buildings 2/3
for the Switchgear Manufacturer 6/19
2.1.2 Network Configuration 2/4
6.1.4 Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal and
2.1.3 Power Supply Systems 2/6
ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards 6/22
2.1.4 Routing/Wiring 2/8
6.1.5 Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/160, ALPHA Universal and
2.1.5 Switching and Protective Devices 2/8
ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards 6/24
2.1.6 Planning Aid 2/11
6.1.6 ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution Cabinets for Germany 6/27
2.2 Power System Planning Modules 2/12 6.1.7 SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards 6/29
6.1.8 SMS Rapid Mounting System 6/31
3 System Protection / Safety Coordination 3/2
6.1.9 8HP Insulated Distribution System 6/34
3.1. Definitions 3/2
6.2 Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems 6/36
3.1.1 Protective Equipment and Features 3/3
6.2.1 Circuit-Breakers 6/38
3.1.2 Low-Voltage Protection Equipment Assemblies 3/4
6.2.2 Fuse Systems 6/41
3.1.3 Selectivity Criteria 3/4
6.2.3 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors 6/49
3.1.4 Preparation of Current-Time Diagrams
6.2.4 Miniature Circuit-Breakers 6/54
(Grading Diagrams) 3/6
6.2.5 Residual-Current-Operated Circuit-Breakers 6/61
3.2 Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems 3/9 6.2.6 Lightning Current and Surge Arresters 6/71
3.2.1 Circuit-Breakers with Protective Functions 3/9 6.2.7 3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches 6/88
3.2.2 Switchgear Assemblies 3/16
6.3 Modular Devices 6/89
3.2.3 Selecting Protective Equipment 3/20
3.2.4 Miniature Circuit-Breakers (MCB) 3/27 6.4 Maximum-Demand Monitors 6/102
3.3 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems 3/33 6.5 Switches, Outlets and Electronic Products 6/104
3.3.1 Selectivity in Radial Systems 3/40
6.6 SIMOCODE pro – Motor Management System 6/110
3.3.2 Selectivity in Meshed Systems 3/49
7 Communications in Power Distribution 7/2
3.4 Protection of Capacitors 3/51
8 Protection and Substation Control 8/2
3.5 Protection of Distribution Transformers 3/52
3.5.1 Protection with Overreaching Selectivity 3/52 8.1 Power System Protection 8/11
3.5.2 Equipment for Protecting Distribution Transformers 3/58 8.2 Relay Design and Operation 8/16
8.3 Relay Selection Guide 8/25
4 Medium Voltage 4/2
8.4 Typical Protection Schemes 8/29
4.1 Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear
9 Power Management 9/2
for Primary Power Distribution 4/3
4.1.1 Withdrawable Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, Air-Insulated 4/4 10 Measuring and Recording Power Quality 10/2
4.1.2 Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, SF6-Insulated 4/26
10.1 Overview 10/2
4.2 Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear 10.2 SIMEAS Q 10/3
and Substations 4/44 10.3 SIMEAS R 10/8
4.3 Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range 4/72 11 Meters and Measuring Instruments 11/2
4.4 PQM® – Power Quality Management and 11.1 SIMEAS P Power Meter 11/2
Load Flow Control 4/84 11.2 SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities 11/14
11.3 Meters / Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices 11/20
4.5 Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power
11.4 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers 11/28
Distribution Exemplified by the Automotive Industry 4/87
12 SIMARIS design – the Program for
5 Transformers 5/2
Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution 12/2
13 Appendix 13/2
TIP_Kap_01_Engl 11.08.2005 18:35 Uhr Seite 1
totally integrated
power
1 We focus your energy…

… and everything components such as medium-voltage
gets so easy switchgear, transformers, low-volt-
age switchgear and low-voltage dis-
Totally Integrated Power is more than
tribution boards to the power con-
mere planning of the power distribu-
sumer. Costs, whether for new sys-
tion in buildings or industrial plants.
tems or extensions, are always
Totally Integrated Power encom-
transparent and controllable.
passes the philosophy to render you
support with our advice, with a serv- The majority of the electrical power
ice that is focused on you. A new consumers belongs to the facilities
project is under way: planning for a for supply management, in particular
complete power distribution system those for heating, ventilation and air
– for a hospital, an office or industrial conditioning systems, drinking water
building. You know what this means: supply and lighting. The latter is to
the system has to be designed not be seen in a functional relation to
just to meet the needs of today but integrated room automation, includ-
the future as well. Thus, cost calcula- ing sun protection, daylight control
tions and construction timetables are technologies and motion detection
kept under control, and expensive re- (i.e. presence of persons in a build-
work is avoided. This is where we of- ing). Air conditioning technology is
fer you our support. in a functional relation to smoke
detection and fire alarm systems.
But this is not enough: the require-
Safe power supply must be
ments of building contractors go far
ensured for all operating
beyond this. They demand cross-sys-
modes.
tem thinking and integral concepts
right from the project start. The goal
is an optimization of building services
realized by customer-focused overall
solutions. To respond to this de-
mand, Siemens has developed a
portfolio which features total func-
tionality. The optimized interplay of
all functions creates benefits for
everyone involved in the project: the
building contractors, the users and
building operators, the consulting en-
gineers and, last but not least, the
installation company.
Totally Integrated Power, a concept
which offers electrical consultants
and installation companies integrated
and coordinated power distribution,
from medium voltage to low voltage
with load feeder right down to the fi-
nal outlet – the best foundation for
quick and easy planning. Integrated
project planning combines individual
1/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Totally Integrated Power makes Take advantage of our focused

everything so easy for distribution know-how
board manufacturers and electricians:
When all the components fit together
C Designing TTA systems, for exam- smoothly, safe and secure power dis-
ple, is no problem: the components tribution is guaranteed. And your sys-
are completely compatible tem will be economical. Now you can
make use of a system that offers you
C Minimum integration expense
a complete range of products with in-
when installing: the distribution
tegrated solutions from hardware
board manufacturers and electri-
with bus interfaces to easy-to-use
cians simply use the data from the
software.
planning tools
Your partner also offers you profes-
C Saving time and money all around
sional expertise and tailored solutions Safety
by a simplification of the workflow technology Information
for monitoring, automation, service technology
C They make use of the evolution of optimization and operational man-

technical and system know-how by agement of the entire building instal-
Siemens and benefit from it – and lations – of course utilizing planning Building Totally Automa-
they will have a partner for the tools for efficient project manage- control
systems
Integrated
Power
tion tech-
nology
future ment.
C Optimum cross-functional system Totally Integrated Power takes into
tuning, coordination of all require- consideration the demands of the lib- Heating,
ventilation
ments and support from Siemens eralized energy markets as well as air conditio- ………
ning
as the leading technology manufac- simple and secure configuration, thus
turer in the field of automation and creating the foundation for economi-
alarm technologies cal operation. These developments
call for a new way of thinking when Progressive, holistic operation and
planning. Low energy import costs building management is implemented
are now more than ever a focus of at- with systems by Siemens. These
tention. The basis for this is knowl- systems communicate with each
edge of the load profiles, the key other on the basis of globally stan-
loads and consumption-based dardized communication protocols,
billing. Here, the indi- such as BACnet, KNX/EIB, ASi and
vidual solutions and PROFIBUS. System integrations are
systems from Totally proficiently carried out using interna-
Integrated Power and tionally accepted open methods like
Total Building Solu- OPC, LonMark, Modbus and M-Bus.
tions bring trans- Functions such as consumption
parency, and thus op- recording, cost center allocations or
timization possibilities load management can thus be per-
within reach. Totally formed, which renders a comprehen-
Integrated Power inte- sive power management system.
grates systems and
components together
with a functional soft-
ware package for op-
erator control and
monitoring.
1/3 1
Advantage: operators can optimize A building automation and control DESIGO RX integrated room automa-
their installations in terms of mainte- system comprises: tion comprises application-specific de-
nance expense, power consumption vices and functions for zone or
C Field devices (sensors, signal
and availability. Of course, you ex- single-room control. This includes an in-
sources, switches and actuating
pect the optimum solution for every tegrated monitoring, control and opti-
devices such as butterfly and control
investment you make, and it is only mization of room-related building
valves, or sensors and actuators)
natural that system costs are increas- equipment which is interconnected
ingly being determined by operating C Local priority control units through their communication functions.
costs. But what people are often not
C Cabling, data networks and commu- DESIGO PX ensures that the opera-
aware of is the fact that data net-
nication units tion of the building, i.e. of its techni-
works and the data they generate
cal installations, is performed in a
can be used to achieve the optimiza- C Control panels, variable speed drives
safe, ecological and economically op-
tion of electrical power distribution (SED 2) and automation stations (PX),
timized manner which is also a low-
processes. Electrical power supply is or room controllers (RX)
expense mode of operation. The
the fundamental basis of all
C Management and server stations, in- building automation and control sys-
processes and control procedures,
teractive operator terminals and tem reliably implements control
and most of the things we take for
computer terminals strategies regarding HVAC. It has
granted today would not function
been optimized for the performance
without electrical energy. This is why C Software for functions, communica- of operating time optimization, maxi-
it is important to make use of infor- tions, data management and opera- mum-load limiting and the calculation
mation networking in the field of tion (rights of use, licenses) of enthalpy and heating curves. It in-
electrical power distribution. Siemens
C Services and tools for the installation forms the operator about trends and
can implement this because we are
of a BACS system (engineering) present and previous operating states.
completely at home in this field. To-
tally Integrated Power offers electri- C Web services and system mainte- The building automation and control
cal power distribution for all functions nance system provides the data required for
in a building: heating, ventilation, air operating cost controlling and the
conditioning, production and manu- documentation of an ecological audit
facturing processes, and information system. It is possible to demonstrate
technology with clearly defined com- no-fault operation. Technical equipment
munication interfaces. This ensures data and statistics which are relevant
reliable power supply, safe working for maintenance are made available
conditions, appropriate sizing, trans- through the building automation and
parent system status and consump- control system. It can also be em-
tion-based cost structures. ployed as a tool for management
tasks such as analysis, adjustment
and continuous optimization of the
1.1 Total Building modes of operation.
Solutions
DESIGO
building automation
Building automation includes all facili-
ties, software and services for auto-
matic control, monitoring and load opti-
mization as well as operation and man-
agement aimed at energy-efficient,
economical and safe operation of all
technical building installations.
Fig. 1/1 Systems of the technical building equipment

Introduction
1.2 Life Safety and Differences from the user's

point of view
Operators of life safety and security
management systems need simple,
Security Management guided operator interfaces with re-
Control and optimization stricted choices of action to be able
While building automation mainly to respond fast, safely and efficiently
deals with the data of HVAC and One aspect is the control and opti- even in a panic situation.
electrical subsystems, which create mization of the performance of tech-
the basis for process optimization, nical building installations to supply Support from Siemens
the information rendered by protec- both the technical conditions for
tive and security installations is often which buildings have been designed Total Building Solutions by Siemens fo-
vitally important. Life safety and se- and to ensure their users' productiv- cus on the performance of the tasks
curity management means the limita- ity by providing appropriate ambient detailed above and the surplus value
tion and containment of a multitude conditions. to be gained by the customer.
of risks and encompasses taking rig-
Operator tasks are only carried out The type of building control defines
orous action against the most diverse
under high time pressure and psy- both the complexity of the building au-
hazardous events that might occur.
chological stress in the event of a tomation and control system and its
This guarantees the protection of hu-
fault, as they normally deal with long- life safety and security management,
man life and property and the mainte-
term trends and system performance and the structure of the organizations
nance of operations within a building.
analyses. Such management func- involved in its operation.
The main task of life safety and secu-
rity management is the easy and safe tions do not require any permanent Total Building Solutions enables prod-
handling of critical alarms and events. support in commercial and industrial uct and service offers to be adapted to
The purpose is to fight hazards im- buildings. real customer needs, thus optimizing
mediately and with the most suitable Those who operate these functions benefits for the user.
means to prevent greater damage. need adaptive graphic displays that Detailed descriptions of the available
Life safety and security management facilitate the user's intuitive orienta- building solutions can be obtained at:
is typically associated with the spe- tion and enable actions to be per-
formed which are typical for monitor- www.sbt.siemens.de
cific tasks of security systems. It
must, however, be extended to any ing a complex system. A good opera-
potential hazard that may be inherent tor interface provides a broad range
in any other technical installation. Ex- of options with functions for generat-
amples are for instance the tempera- ing status reports and user-specific
ture and humidity limits in museums, statistics and data views.
critical faults in the power distribution
system of a hospital, elevator alarms, Signaling and alarms
etc. The other – often crucial – aspect
deals with sudden system malfunc-
tions. Normally, those events do not
represent any hazard to the building
or its users. In some cases, however,
human life, infrastructure elements or
manufacturing processes might be
put at risk. The treatment of those
cases is the objective of life safety
and security management. It means
the limitation and control of various
hazards in the building and a rigorous
treatment of different potential emer-
gency cases in a building.
1/5 1
SIMARIS Planning Software

SIMARIS into consideration the respective
standards and rules of the country
With the SIMARIS range of software
where they are to be used. The lan-
products, Siemens offers integrated
guage can also be freely selected –
tools for fast and effective planning
both for working with the program
and calculation of power distribution
and for planning results.
systems for commercial and indus-
trial buildings. The tools are de-
signed for international use, taking
SIMARIS design and needn’t spend hours looking up

product data in catalogs. Per down-
Thanks to its Windows look and feel,
load from our homepage, you can
SIMARIS design is easy to operate and
easily keep up to date the product
can be used without any extra soft-
data contained in the SIMARIS
ware training. From its contents, this
design database. Every configuration
software offers a scope of functional-
of an electric power distribution is
ity that facilitates sizing considerably.
subject to many changes and adapta-
In the planning stage, for example,
tions both in the planning and imple-
you can dimension the entire supply
mentation stage. SIMARIS design in-
circuit with SIMARIS design on the
tegrates each modification into the
basis of real products. In the imple-
supply concept and automatically rately be documented in SIMARIS
mentation stage, this helps to avoid
checks it for compliance with the design, exactly following the specifi-
extra costs arising from badly coordi-
relevant standards and regulations. cations you have defined.
nated systems. Suitable components
Selectivity, for example for installa-
and distribution systems are se-
tions in the safety power supply sys-
lected automatically. You can focus
tem, data can also be easily verified
on what’s important in planning your
with SIMARIS design. All of these
electrical power distribution system
steps will automatically and accu-
SIMARIS SIVACON SIMARIS design can also be used

directly by this program. In addition,
The SIMARIS SIVACON® software
the forwarding of order data to the
tool supports the sales and manu-
Siemens Mall on the Internet, for ex-
facturing process for the SIVACON
ample, is completely trouble-free.
8PT low-voltage switchboard sys-
tem which was specially designed
for franchise switchgear manufactur-
ers. The project-planning data from

Introduction
Power Management
Energy distribution at a glance loads. An invaluable opportunity to
keep on top of the condition of your
The actual status of the power
power distribution system – and, if U
I
distribution system can be displayed cos o
required, to control it from a remote P
W
online. This enables you to easily
location.
keep a check on all important param-
eters: every breaker position, every
power requirement, every upper and
lower limit as well as possible over-
Perfect records by other programs. Selected status Status

signals can also be transmitted di-
All changes in power distribution are
rectly by SMS via mobile phone, al- central ON
recorded by the system. Regardless OFF
lowing faults to be rectified by the local ON

OFF
of whether they were remotely con-

technical staff as quickly as possi- tripped
trolled or were performed locally, all

ble.
events are precisely recorded, to-
Event logs
gether with their date and time. The Time Status signal
event log created is archived in a 22:59:03

23:16:24
local OFF local incoming circuit breaker off
local ON local incoming circuit breaker off
01:12:45 Power > 20 A
database and can then be evaluated 03:35:02 Power < 1600 A
Optimum energy flow egy involving Load curves Load management Prognoses
continuous pur-
The utilization of a power distribu-
chasing con-
tion system can be determined by
tracts or the buy-
the measurement of the energy
ing of power on
flows. This analysis is the basis for
the energy mar-
the optimization of power consump-
kets. To ensure
tion or the system structure. Future demand values become too high,
optimum utilization of current con-
power requirements can also be cal- can automatically add extra capacity
tinuous purchasing contracts, power
culated by studying the load curves: that is not directly required for oper-
management monitors the con-
the ideal prerequisite for any strat- ation.
sumption values and, if maximum
Maintenance planning Extensive information such as

Frame: Installation
personnel requirements and
The information required for mainte- Distribution
necessary spare parts is also given. Maintenance measure
nance is gathered from the system.
The user of the system is always
All evaluations that can be derived
informed of the maintenance meas- Hall 1 check HVAC
from operating cycles, runtimes or Distribution 3 change ACB contacts
ures currently being carried out or
scheduled times are contained Feeder II change meter
which are due to be carried out,
within the module. Maintenance
and can therefore plan both staff
measures, current status and
and material requirements well in
maintenance due dates are shown.
advance.
1/7 1
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl 11.08.2005 18:40 Uhr Seite B
2 Power Distribution Planning for

Commercial and Industrial Buildings
2.1 Basics for Drafting Electrical
Power Distribution Systems
2.2 Power System Planning Modules
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl 11.08.2005 18:41 Uhr Seite C
Power Distribution Planning for

chapter 2
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl 11.08.2005 18:41 Uhr Seite 2
2 Power Distribution Planning for

2.1 Basics for Drafting
Electrical Power Framework parameter
analysis:
Distribution Systems Power system concept:
– Analysis Building
Totally Integrated Power comprises – Selection of the network Rooms, type of use
products, systems and services from configuration Operation
– Type of connection to ground
Siemens for a homogenous imple- – Technical features
mentation concept for power distri-
bution from a medium-voltage swit-
chgear station to the transformer and Network calculation: Lists of consumers
from there to the floor distribution – Load flow Temperatures
– Short-circuit calculation ...
board or final circuit. – Energy balance
With Totally Integrated Power,
Siemens responds to customer
requirements, such as Rating: Priorities and
– Transformers prognoses for
C Simplification of operational mana- – Cables the electrical
gement by transparent, simple po- – Protective/switching devices power system etc.
– Provisions for redundant supply
wer system structures
C Low power loss costs, e.g. by me-
dium-voltage-side power transmis- Fig. 2/1 Power system planning tasks
sion to the load centers
C High supply and operational safety C Good quality of the power supply, Siemens supports your power sy-
of the installations even in the i.e. few voltage changes due to stem planning with service offers
event of individual equipment failu- load fluctuations with sufficient vol- and tools such as SIMARIS design.
res (redundant supply, selectivity of tage symmetry and few harmonic
The following design aids can be
the power system protection, and distortions in the voltage
obtained from Siemens:
high availability)
C Compliance with IEC/EN/VDE spe- C Application manual
C Easy adaptation to changing load cifications and project-related stipu- C SINCAL
and operational conditions lations for special installations C SIGRADE
C Specific product catalogs
C Low operating cost thanks to The efficiency of a power supply
equipment that is easy to maintain system rises and falls with good
planning.
C Sufficient transmission capacity of
the equipment under normal opera- For this reason, power supply con-
ting conditions as well as in fault cepts must always be evaluated in
conditions to be handled the context of their framework para-
meters and project goals. When focu-
sing on power supply in the field of
building infrastructure, the spectrum
of reasonable options can be narro-
wed down.

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts
2.1.1 Requirements on Investment Installation Operation

Electrical Power Systems
in Buildings Implementation cost minimum maximum irrelevant
Implementation time minimum minimum irrelevant
When planning electrical power sy-
stems, the largely ambivalent require- Technology/equipment low-cost easy installation flexible operation
ments of the three project stages, Space requirements for equipment minimum maximum irrelevant
Investment – Installation – Operation,
must be taken into consideration. Period of use maximum irrelevant maximum
Fire load irrelevant irrelevant minimum
Further influencing factors
Operating cost irrelevant irrelevant minimum
The main characteristics of a power (e.g. insurance rates)
system are determined by the follo-
Table 2/1 Project stages
wing requirements:
C Use/consumers or purpose of po- Type of use Features Requirements Action
wer distribution, i.e. energy ba-
lance, power density and load cen- Residential Many small Low nominal currents at Back-up protection
consumer devices comparatively high line
ters
short-circuit power
C Architecture, e.g. low building or
high-rise building Users are Protection against direct Residual current-
C Operating and environmental condi- no electrical and indirect contact operated circuit-
engineering breakers are
tions
experts mandatory!
C Legal provisions, stipulations by pu-
blic authorities, e.g. building autho- Offices Many Voltage stability and
rities, safety at work regulations PC workstations reliable power supply
C By the supplying public utilities High proportion of Counter action in the Inductor-type
company capacitive loads event of harmonics compensation
– Technical specifications regarding General escape Safety power supply Generator supply
voltage, short-circuit power, routes
agreed maximum connected load,
DP server Communications Good electromagnetic TN-S system to
permissible equipment
rooms equipment compatibility (EMC) minimize stray fault
– Use of power management to (network) currents
operate the power system econo-
mically within the agreed electric Medical Life-saving High reliability of supply Redundancy, selective
machines grading, powerful safety
rates options.
power supply (SPS)
Intensive care, Good electromagnetic TN-S system to minimize
EKG compatibility (EMC) stray fault currents
Local limitation of fault IT system
currents
Industrial Mainly motor High power quantities Busbar trunking
loads required per area systems
Minimize High reliability of supply Redundant supply,
downtimes meshed electrical
networks
Different Selective grading
processes
Table 2/2 Examples for different types of building use and their impact on electric power
systems/equipment
2/3 2
IEC 2.1.2 Network Configuration

Regional America Europe Australia Asia Africa
As detailed above, the supply task
PAS CENELEC
determines the configuration of a po-
wer system. Buildings featuring diffe-
National USA: ANSI DE: DIN VDE AUS: SA CN: SAC SA: SABS rent power densities can therefore be
CA: SCC I: CEI NZ: SNZ J: JISC distinguished according to the type
BR: COBEI F: UTE … of their configuration.
... GB: BS
An optimum configuration should par-
ANSI American National Standards DIN VDE German Industrial Standard, ticularly meet the following require-
Institute Association of German Electrical ments:
BS British Standards Engineers C Simple structure
CENELEC European Committee for Electro- IEC International Electrical Engineering C High reliability of supply
technical Standardization Commission
C Low losses
(Comité Européen de Normalisation JISC Japanese Industrial Standards
Electrotechnique) Committee C Favorable and flexible expansion
CEI COMITATO ELETTROTECNICO PAS Pacific Area Standards options
ITALIANO Italian Electrical SABS South African Bureau of Standards The following characteristics shall
Engineering Committee be selected accordingly:
SA Standards Australia
COBEI Comitê Brasileiro de Eletricidade, C Type of meshing
Eletrônica, SCC Standards Council of Canada
Iluminação e Telecomunicações SNZ Standards New Zealand C Number of feeder points
SAC Standardisation Administration of UTE UNION TECHNIQUE DE L’ELECTRI- C Type of feed
China CITE ET DE LA COMMUNICATION
Technical Association of Electrical Meshing
Engineering & Communications
Low-voltage-side power distribution
shall preferably be designed in a ra-
Table 2/3 Interdependencies of national, regional and international standards for electrical en-
gineering dial topology.
The clearly hierarchical structuring
Standards now been agreed upon that drafts offers the following advantages:
shall be submitted at the central (IEC) C Easy monitoring of the power
To minimize technical risks and/or to
level and then be adopted as regional system
protect persons involved in handling
or national standards. Only provided C Fast fault location
electric equipment or components,
that IEC is not interested in dealing C Simple power system protection
major planning rules have been com-
with the matter or, if there are any C Easy operation
piled in standards.
time constraints, a standard shall be
Technical standards are desired con- drafted regionally.
ditions stipulated by professional as-
The interrelation of the different
sociations which are however made
standardization levels is illustrated
binding by legal standards such as
in Fig. 2/2.
safety at work regulations. Further-
more, the compliance to technical A complete list of IEC members and
standards is crucial for any approval links to more detailed information can
of operation granted by authorities or be obtained at www.iec.ch q struc-
insurance coverage. ture & management q iec members.
While in the past, standards were
mainly drafted at a national level and
debated in regional (i.e. European,
American etc.) committees, it has Fig. 2/2 Unmeshed power system (radial)

Simple radial network Radial network with changeover reserve
a) Partial load reserve b) Full load reserve

- transformers not fully utilized
- Use transformers with forced-air cooling
T1 T1 T2 T1 T2 T3
LV- LV- n.c. LV- n.o. LV- n.c. LV- n.c. LV- n.c.
MD GPS MD1 SPS MD2 MD1 MD2 MD3
n.c. n.o. n.o.
K1 K1 K2
2 2 3
Complete power failure Continued operation of selected Continued operation of all consumers
consumers
SN,T1 ≥ Ptotal / cosϕ (n-1) 8 SN,i ≥ PSV / cosϕ (n-1) 8 ai 8 SN,i ≥ Ptotal / cosϕ;
a: Utilization factor
Fig. 2/3 Radial topology variants
As the operation of a meshed system combination with high-current busbar Number of feeder points
places high demands on the equip- trunking systems, as these systems
The availability of the radial power
ment, the radial system is generally have the advantage of safe and fle-
system can be optimized by means
preferred at the infrastructure level xible supply for the consumers. They
of its infeed configuration.
for economical reasons. Ring-type are also used for public supply sy-
systems are mainly used in highly stems at the > 1 kV level. Fig. 2/3 shows an optimization of the
consumptive industrial processes in radial network assuming one fault in
the infeed.
2/5 2
Type of infeed
Type Example
Electrical energy can be fed into the
General power Supply of all installations and consumer devices
power system in different ways, de-
supply (GPS) available in the building
termined by its primary function.
Safety power Supply of life-protecting facilities in cases
For general power supply (GPS) by
supply (SPS) of danger
C Direct connection to the public grid:
C Safety lighting
normally up to 300 kW at 400 V
C Elevators for firefighters
C Supply from the medium-voltage
C Fire-extinguishing equipment
system (up to 52 kV) via distribu-
tion transformers up to 2 MVA Uninterruptible power Supply of sensitive consumer devices which must be ope-
supply (UPS) rated without interruption in the event of a GPS failure:
For redundant power supply (RPS),
C Emergency lighting
power sources are selected in depen-
C Servers/computers
dency of the permissible interruption
C Communications equipment
time.
C Generators for safety power supply Fig. 2/4 Supply types
C Second independent system infeed
with automatic changeover for
safety-supply consumers
C Static uninterruptible power supply
(USP) from a rectifier/inverter unit T-1 T-2 T-3
or storage battery G UPS
C Rotating USP consisting of motor
and generator set
A constellation as described in Fig. 2/4
has proven itself for the building
infrastructure level. GPS
system RPS system
2.1.3 Power Supply Systems
Electric systems are distinguished GPS consumer SPS consumer UPS consumer
as follows:
C Type of current used: DC;
AC ~ 50 Hz Fig. 2/4 Type of infeed
C Type and number of live
conductors within the system:
The type of connection to ground From experience, the best cost-bene-
L1, L2, L3, N, PE
must be selected carefully for the fit ratio for electric systems within
C Type of connection to ground:
MV or LV system, as it has a major the general power supply is achieved
low-voltage systems: IT, TT, TN
impact on the expense required for with
medium-voltage systems: isolated,
protective measures. It also determi- C Low-resistance neutral for
low-resistance, compensated
nes electromagnetic compatibility re- medium-voltage applications
garding the low-voltage system. C TN-S systems for low voltage

Section A Section B
3*
3*
Transformer
Generator
1* 2* 1* 2*
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 1* L3
PEN (isolated) PEN (isolated)
PE PE
Central grounding
4* point dividing 4*
bridge
L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE
Branches Branches
Circuit A Main equipotential Circuit B
bonding
1* The PEN conductor must be wired isolated 3* There must be no connection between the and 4-pole switching devices may be used.
along the entire route, this also applies for its transformer neutral to ground or to the PE If N conductors with reduced cross sections
wiring in the low-voltage main distribution conductor in the transformer chamber. are used (we do not recommend this), a pro-
(LVMD) tective device with an integrated overload
4* All branch circuits must be designed as TN-S
protection should be used at the N conductor
2* The PE conductor connection between systems, i.e. in case of a distributed N con-
(example: LSIN).
LVMD and transformer chamber must be ductor function with a separately wired N
configured for the max. short-circuit current conductor and PE conductor. Both 3-pole
that might occur (K2S2 ≥ Ik2tk).
Fig. 2/5 EMC-friendly power system, centrally installed (short distances)
The advantage of a TN-S system lies When TN-S systems are used, resi- As according to IEC 60364-5-54, a
in the fact that the short-circuit cur- dual currents in the building can be TN-S system is only permissible in
rent generated in the event of a fault avoided because current flows back a central arrangement of the feed
is not fed back to the voltage source via a separate N conductor. Magnetic system, we recommend to always use
via a connection to ground but via a fields depend on the geometrical ar- the TN-C-S system as shown in Fig. 2/5.
conductor. The comparatively high rangement of the connections.
In case of distributed infeed, 4-pole
1-pole ground fault current enables
switching/protective devices must be
rather simple protective devices to
provided at the infeeds and changeover
be used, such as fuses or circuit-brea-
equipment (parallel operation inhibited).
kers tripping in the event of a fault.
2/7 2
t a (s)
Ir
IrN
1000 Ik min
tr
Ik max
100
2.1.4 Routing/Wiring
Nowadays the customer can choose 10 Ig
between cables and busbars for power Isd
distribution. Some features of these
different options are listed below: 0
C Cable laying
+ Lower material costs
+ When a fault occurs along the 0,1 tg Ii
tsd
line, only one distribution board
including its downstream
subsystem will be affected
0,01
– High installation expense
– Increased fire load
C Busbar distribution
+ Rapid installation 0,5 1 5 10 50 100
+ Flexible in case of changes x In
or expansions
Instantaneous
+ Low space requirements L Overload release
2
„L“ I
short-circuit release „I“
Standard I t
+ Reduced fire load Standard On
Optionally I 4t
– Rigid coupling to the building Short-time delayed Optionally Off
geometry S short-circuit release „S“ Neutral conductor protection
Standard tsd
N
Standard 0.5-1 x Ir
These aspects must be weighted in Optionally I 2t Optionally Off
relation to the building use and Ground fault release
G
specific area loads when configuring Standard t g
a specific distribution. Optionally I 2t
Connection layout comprises the

following specifications for wiring Fig. 2/6 Characteristic curve variants
between output and target
distribution board 2.1.5 Switching and Types of protective equipment
C Overload protection Protective Devices
Ib ≤ Ir ≤ Iz and Iz > I2/1.45 Protective equipment can be divided
C Short-circuit protection S2K2 >= I2t As soon as the initial plans are draf- into two categories, which can how-
C Protection against electrical shock ted, it is useful to determine which ever be combined.
in the event of indirect contact technology shall be used to protect the C Fuse technology
C Permissible voltage drop electric equipment. The technology + Good current-limiting properties
that has been selected affects the + High switching capacity up
behavior and properties of the power to 120 kA
system and hence also influences + Low investment cost
certain aspects of use, such as + Easy installation
C Safety of supply + Safe tripping, no auxiliary
C Mounting expense power required
C Maintenance and downtimes + Easy grading between fuses

Protective tripping
Above all when fuseless technology
P = I 2* R Q1
is employed, the selection of the trip-
ping unit is crucial for meeting the
This energy (area below the defined objectives for protection.
curve) is also transported in
the contacts and hence in
the switch In power systems for buildings, se-
lective tripping is gaining more and
I Q2 Trip Q3
more importance, as this results in a
higher supply safety and quality.
Current flow when While standards such as DIN VDE
zero-current 0100 Part 710 or DIN VDE 0108 de-
interrupters are used
mand a selective behavior of the pro- Fig. 2/8 Selective tripping
Current flow when tective equipment for safety power
current-limiting circuit-
breakers are used supply or certain areas of indoor in-
stallations, the proportion of buildings
4 ms 10 ms t where selective tripping is also desi-
red for the general power supply is ri- Trip Q1
Fig. 2/7 Current limiting
sing.
– Downtime after fault Generally speaking, a combined solu-

– Reduces selective tripping in tion using selective and partially sel-
connection with circuit-breakers ective network sections will be ap-
plied in power systems for buildings Q2 Trip Q3
– Fuse ageing
– Separate protection of personnel when economic aspects are conside-
required for switching high red.
currents In this context, the following device
Fig. 2/9 Back-up conditioned fault tripping
C Fuseless technology properties must be taken into
+ Clear tripping times for overload account:
Back-up protection:
and short circuit Current limiting: The provision is that Q1 is a current-
+ Safe switching of operating and A protective device has a current-li- limiting device. If the fault current is
fault currents miting effect if it shows a lower let- higher than the rated breaking capa-
+ Fast resumption of normal through current in the event of a fault city of the downstream device in the
operation after fault trip than the prospective short-circuit cur- event of a line shorting, it will be
+ Various tripping methods rent at the fault location. protected by the upstream protective
adapted to the protective task
Selectivity: device. Q2 can be selected with
+ Communications-capable:
When series-connected protective Icu Ikmax, Q2. This results in partial
signaling of system states
devices cooperate for graded trip- selectivity.
– Coordination of the protection
concept requires a calculation ping, the protective device which is
of short circuits closest upstream of the fault location
– Higher investment costs must trip first. The other upstream
devices remain in operation. The
temporal and spatial effects of a fault
will be limited to a minimum.
2/9 2
Supply section
800 kVA ACB
≥ 1,250 A
LSI
Supports the
priority of
selective fault
tripping
Supply section MCCB Fuse
400 kVA ≤ 630 A ≤ 400 A
LSI
Supply section
30 kVA Fuse Fuse
63 A 80 A
Supports
MCB MCB the priority
≤ 16 A ≤ 25 A of cost
minimization
Fig. 2/10 Grading for a supply section of 800 kVA
Grading in the supply section

Smax in kVA < SN in kVA n ukr Ikmax in kA
Starting from the smallest supply unit
1260 630 2 6% 30
in a building, e.g. a household or a
1600 800 2 6% 40
shop, different protective devices are
1890 630 3 6% 45
preferably suited to meet the require-
2400 800 3 6% 60
ments of power supply and protec-
2520 630 4 6% 65
tion.
3000 1000 3 6% 75
TIP: If an 800 kVA supply section is 3200 800 4 6% 80
fed by a transformer and if selective
Table 2/5 Proven transformer constellations for buildings
tripping is a major requirement, a cir-
cuit-breaker with definite-time over-
current-time protection must also Power requirements are voltage stability and safe shutdown
be selected for the medium-voltage established by in the event of a fault. Consequently,
system. transformers shall only be selected
Smax = Pmax /cosϕB,
for outputs up to 400 kVA, in order
For more detailed information in par- With Pmax = Σ(Pi 8 ai) 8 g to increase the short-circuit current.
ticular regarding the tripping charac- cosϕB Power factor, purchased
teristics, please refer to For building power supplies, econo-
quantity
C Chapter 3 Power System Protec- mical transformer outputs are bet-
a Utilization factor
tion and Safety Coordination ween 630 and 1,000 kVA. Table 2/5
g Simultaneity factor
C Chapter 4 Medium Voltage shows useful constellations for trans-
(demand)
C Chapter 6 Low Voltage formers connected in parallel per
in the Application Manual. When the dimensioning rule Icu ≥ Ik“ supply section. Higher outputs must
is applied, a minimization of the therefore be divided into several (>2)
Power requirements purchased power results in a mini- separate supply sections to gain ma-
The power requirements of the entire mization of the short-circuit strength nageable power system data and
distribution largely determine the lay- for the operating equipment. This hence economical solutions.
out of the main distribution as well as means cost savings in investment
the transformer and/or generator ra- and operation.
ting. This equipment then determines Transformer:
the amount of investment involved. 100 %
Ik, max ≈ Σ u IrTransformer, i
kr, i
Please note that the lower limit for
the short-circuit current is at ~15 kA ,
in order to ensure both a sufficient

2.1.6 Planning Aid

Different individual decisions made regarding the power supply of buildings can be combined as follows:
Functional areas:
Commercial
building? Offices
Meeting rooms
Computing center
yes Catering kitchen and
canteen
Heating–Ventilation–
Radial system Air Conditioning
with partial load Fire protection
reserve Logistics
TN-C-S system,
LVMD with
central
grounding point
no
Tip: i < 5?
Given ground area = a2
Length l ≤ 100 m = 2 8 a;
max. no. of floors
i ≤ 100 - 2a/h High-rise
Low building
building
no no
A ≤ 2000 m2 ? i ≤ 10?
Separation into several

supply sections per area, no
Tip: i.e. number of floor i ≤ 20?
distribution boards ≥ 2
Smax = P/cosϕ
Smax < 630 kVA; ukr 4% yes
Smax ≥ 630 kVA; ukr 6% no
Smax yes
≤ 2 MVA?
Central utilities Centralized MV Distributed MV

room, supply- supply, distributed supply to
transformer- transformers to transformers to
LVMD LVMD LVMD
Interlocked
changeover with
4-pole devices
Low building, Low building, High-rise building, High-rise building, High-rise building, High-rise building, High-rise building,
type 1 type 2 type 1: centralized, type 2: centralized, type 3: transformers type 4: distributed, type 5: distributed,
cables busbar at remote location cables busbar
yes yes
yes
Tip:
Use busbar trunking systems
if requirements are mainly set no
for ease of use, such as good Cables? Busbars?
expandability, fire load
minimization
Fig. 2/11 Overview of power supply concept modules
2/11 2
2.2 Power System

Planning Modules
The following modules may be used
for an easy and systematic power
distribution design for typical building
structures. Elevators
These are schematic solution con- HVAC
cepts which can then be extended to FF elevators
meet specific customer project requi-
rements. When the preplanning HVAC-SPS
stage has been completed, the po-
UPS4.2
GPS4.2
GPS4.2
wer system can easily be configured
and calculated with the aid of the
4th floor
SIMARIS design software.
UPS3.2
GPS3.2
SPS3.2
Up-to-date, detailed descriptions on a
variety of applications can be obtained
3rd floor
on the Internet at www.siemens.com/tip
UPS2.2
GPS2.2
Low building, type 1: SPS2.2

One supply section 2nd floor
UPS1.2
SPS1.2
GPS1.2
1st floor
LVMD
GPS SPS
1 2 G UPS
3~
MVD
z
Basement
From PCO
GPS General power supply

FD Floor distribution boards
PCO Power company or system operator
FF Firefighters
HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning
MVD Medium-voltage distribution
LVMD Low-voltage main distribution
SPS Safety power supply
UPS Uninterruptible power supply

Building type Low building
Number of floors 4
Ground area / total area 2,500 m2 / 10,000 m2
Segmentation of power 85% utilized area, 15% side area

required
Power required 1,000 to 2,000 kW
Supply types 100% total power from the public grid

10 – 30% of total power for safety power supply (SPS)
5 – 20% of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Power system protection Selectivity is aimed at
Special requirements Good electromagnetic compatibility, high safety of supply and operation
Proposal for concept finding
Feature Our solution Advantage Your benefit

Network Central transformer supply Supply at the load center, Low costs,
configuration close to load center short LV cables time savings during
Smax = 1,200 kVA, low losses installation
cosϕ = 0.85
Radial network Transparent structure Easy operation and fault
localization
Transformer module with 2 x 630 kVA, Voltage stability Optimized voltage quality,
ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik ≤ 30 kA lighter design economical
Redundant supply unit: Supply of important consumers on Increased safety of supply

– Generator 400 kVA (30 %) all floors in the event of a fault, e.g.
(the smaller the generator, during power failure of the public grid
the greater the short-circuit
Safety power supply Safety power supply acc. to
current must be compared to
DIN VDE 0108
the nominal current)
Supply of sensitive and important Uninterruptible supply of
consumers consumers, e.g. during power
– UPS: 200 kVA (15 %)
failure of the public grid
Medium-voltage SF6 gas-insulated Small switchgear station Minimized space requirements for
supply station independent of climate electric utilities room;
no maintenance
Transformer GEAFOL cast-resin with Low fire load, Economical

reduced losses indoor installation
Low-voltage SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system Protection from
main distribution grounding point q splitting of PEN electromagnetic interference
in PWE and N to the TN-S system (e.g. to prevent lower transmission
rates at communication lines)
Wiring/ Cables Central measurements of current, Cost transparency

main route voltage, power, e.g. for billing,
cost center allocation
2/13 2
Low building, type 2:

Two supply sections
Elevators
HVAC
FF-elevators
HVAC-SPS
UPS4.1
UPS4.2
GPS4.2
SPS4.1
GPS4.1
SPS4.2
4th floor
UPS3.1
UPS3.2
GPS3.1
GPS3.2
SPS3.1
SPS3.2
3rd floor
UPS2.1
UPS2.2
GPS2.1
GPS2.2
SPS2.1
SPS2.2
2nd floor
UPS1.1
UPS1.2
SPS1.1
GPS1.1
SPS1.2
1st floor GPS1.2
LVMD
GPS SPS
1 2 G UPS
3~
MVD
z
Basement
From PCO
GPS General power supply

FD Floor distribution boards
PCO Power company or system operator
FF Firefighters
HVAC Heating – Ventilation – Air conditioning
MVD Medium-voltage distribution
LVMD Low-voltage main distribution
SPS Safety power supply
UPS Uninterruptible power supply

Building type Low building
Number of floors 4
Ground area / total area 2,500 m2 / 2 x 10,000 m2
Segmentation of power 85 % utilized area

required 15 % side area
Power required > 2,000 kW
Supply types 100 % total power from the public grid

10 – 30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS)
5 – 20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Special requirements Good electromagnetic compatibility

Network Two supply sections per floor Supply at the load center, Low costs, no extra utilities
configuration short LV cables room necessary, time savings
Smax = 2,400 kVA low losses during installation
cosϕB = 0.85
localization
Transformer module with 3 x 800 kVA, Minimization of voltage fluctuations; Optimized voltage quality,
ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik ≤ 60 kA low static requirements on building cost minimization in the
structures building construction work

– Generator 730 kVA (30%) all floors in the event of a fault, e.g.
(the smaller the generator, during power failure of the public grid
the greater the short-circuit
current must be compared to
DIN VDE 0108
the nominal current)
Supply of sensitive and important Uninterruptible power supply,
consumers e.g. during power failure of the
– UPS: 400 kVA (15 %)
public grid
Medium-voltage SF6 gas-insulated Small switchgear station Minimized space requirements

supply station independent of climate for distribution board room;
no maintenance

Low-voltage main SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system Protection from
distribution grounding point q splitting of electromagnetic interference
PEN in PE and N to the (e.g. to prevent lower
TN-S system transmission rates at
communication lines)

main route voltage, power, e.g. for billing, cost
center allocation
Two outgoing distribution board Shorter cable routes, lower Economical

feeders per floor voltage drop
2/15 2
High-rise building, type 1:

Central power supply
Elevators FF elevators
HVAC HVAC-SPS
nth floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
(n-1)th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
5th floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
3rd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
GPS General power

supply 2nd floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
FD Floor distribution
boards
PCO Power company or 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
system operator
FF Firefighters
HVAC Heating – Ventilation
– Air conditioning LVMD
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS SPS
LVMD Low-voltage main 1 2 G UPS
distribution 3~
MVD
SPS Safety power supply z
UPS Uninterruptible Basement
power supply
From PCO

Building type High-rise building
Number of floors ≤ 10
Ground area / total area 1,000 m2 / ≤ 10,000 m2

Power required ≤ 1,800 kW


High safety of supply and operation

Network Central transformer supply Simple network configuration, Only one electric utilities room
configuration close to load center low power losses required, easy and low-cost
operation of electric system
Smax = 1,000 kVA
Transformer module with 2x 630 kVA, Voltage stability, Optimized voltage quality,
cosϕ = 0.85
Ukr = 6%, i.e. Ik ≤ 30 kA lighter design economical
Floors: 8
(the smaller the generator, the during power failure of the public grid
greater the short-circuit cur-
rent must be compared to the
DIN VDE 0108
nominal current)
Supply of sensitive or important Uninterruptible power supply
– UPS: 200 kVA (15 %) consumers during power failure of the
public grid

localization
Medium-voltage SF6 gas-insulated Compact design, Minimized space requirements for

supply station independent of climate utilities room; no maintenance
Transformer GEAFOL cast-resin with Compact design, Economical

reduced losses independent of climate
Low-voltage main SIVACON 8PT with central EMC-friendly power system Protection of telecommunications
distribution grounding point q splitting of equipment from interference (e.g.
PEN in PE and N to the to prevent lower transmission rates
TN-S system at communication lines)
Wiring/ Cables Central measurements of current, Cost center allocation at

main route voltage, power, e.g. for billing, minimum expense
central recording
Cost savings
2/17 2

Transformers at remote location
HVAC HVAC-SPS
3 4
GPS General power

boards
PCO Power company 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
or system operator
FF Firefighters
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS SPS
distribution 3~
MVD
power supply
From PCO

Number of floors 10 to 20

Power required ≥ 1,500 kW; for 2 MW or higher, a relocation of the transformers should be considered even
if the number of floors is less than 10



Network Splitting into two supply Short LV cables, low power losses, Economical, eased fire
configuration sections reduction of fire load protection
Smax = 1,800 kVA
2 transformer modules with Voltage stability, Optimized voltage quality,
cosϕ = 0.85
(2 + 1) x 630 kVA, lighter design economical
Floors: 20
Ukr = 6% i.e. Ik ≤ 45 kA

greater the short-circuit cur-
rent must be compared to the
DIN VDE 0108
nominal current)
public grid

localization
Medium-voltage SF6 gas-insulated Small switchgear station, Minimized space requirements for

distribution grounding point q splitting of PEN equipment from interference
in PE and N to the TN-S system (e.g. lower transmission rates
(4-pole switches in the feeding for communication lines)
lines and at the changeover point)
Wiring/ Cables Central measurements of current, Central data processing

centrally per floor in LVMD
2/19 2

Distributed supply
G
4 5 6 3~ UPS
HVAC HVAC-SPS
GPS General power

boards
PCO Power company 1st floor FD-GPS FD-SPS FD-UPS
or system operator
FF Firefighters
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS SPS
LVMD Low-voltage main 1 2 3 G UPS
distribution 3~
MVD
power supply
From PCO

Number of floors > 20
Ground area / total area 1,000 m2 / > 20,000 m2

Power required ≥ 2,000 kW

10–30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS)
5–20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS)


Network Splitting into two supply Short LV cables, Economical solution,
configuration sections low power losses, simplified fire protection
Smax = 3,600 kVA reduction of fire load
cosϕ = 0.85
2 transformer modules with 3 x 630 kVA, Voltage stability, Optimized voltage quality,
Floors: 25
Ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik ≤ 45 kA lighter design economical

– Generator 2 x 500 kVA (30 %) all floors in the event of a fault, e.g.
greater the short-circuit current
must be compared to the nomi-
DIN VDE 0108
nal current)
– UPS: 2 x 250 kVA (15 %)
consumers during power failure of the
public grid

localization
Medium-voltage SF6 gas-insulated Small switchgear station, Minimized space requirements;

supply station independent of climate no maintenance
Transformer GEAFOL cast-resin with Low fire load, indoor installation Economical
reduced losses without any special precautions
(4-pole switches to connect to for communication lines)
the low-voltage main distribution)

cost center allocation
Cost savings
2/21 2

Central busbars
HVAC HVAC-SPS
GPS General power

boards
system operator
FF Firefighters
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS SPS
distribution 3~
MVD
power supply
From PCO

Number of floors ≤ 10

Power required ≤ 1,800 kW



Network Central transformer supply Simple network configuration, low Only one electric utilities room
configuration close to load center power losses required, easy and low-cost
Smax = 1,500 kVA operation of electric system
cosϕ = 0.85
Transformer modules with 2 x 800 kVA, Optimized voltage quality Operation that is gentle on the user's
Floors: 8
Ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik ≤ 40 kA equipment, economical equipment

greater the short-circuit cur- Safety power supply Safety power supply acc. to
rent must be compared to the DIN VDE 0108
nominal current)
public grid

localization
Transformer GEAFOL cast-resin with Low fire load, indoor installation Economical
reduced losses without any special precautions
for communication lines)
Wiring/ Busbars to the subdistribution Low fire load, flexible power Safety, time savings at
main route boards distribution restructuring
Few branches in the distribution, Minimized space requirements for

small distribution for electric utilities room
Small, minimized rising main busbar Less space requirements for

supply lines
2/23 2

Distributed busbars
G
4 5 6 3~ UPS
HVAC HVAC-SPS

System discon- System discon- System discon-
necting point necting point necting point
GPS General power

boards
system operator
FF Firefighters
– Air conditioning
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS SPS
LVMD Low-voltage main 1 2 3 G
3~ UPS
distribution
LVMD MVD
power supply
From PCO

Number of floors > 20
Ground area / total area 1,000 m2 / ≥ 20,000 m2

Power required > 2,000 kW



Network Splitting into two supply Short LV cables, Lower cost
configuration sections low power losses,
Smax = 4,000 kVA reduction of fire load
cosϕ = 0.85
2 transformer modules with 3 x 800 kVA, Voltage stability Optimized voltage quality,
Floors: 21
Ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik ≤ 60 kA lighter design economical

– Generator 2 x 630 kVA (30 %) all floors in the event of a fault, e.g.
greater the short-circuit current
must be compared to the nomi-
DIN VDE 0108
nal current)
consumers during power failure of the
– UPS: 2 x 300 kVA (15 %)
public grid

localization

(4-pole switches in the feeding for communication lines)
lines and at the changeover point)
Wiring/ Busbars to the subdistribution Low fire load, flexible power Safety, time savings when
main route boards distribution restructuring work is carried out
Few branches in the distribution, Minimized space requirements for

small distribution for electric utilities room
Small, minimized rising main busbar Less space requirements for

supply lines
2/25 2
Appendix
Short-circuit currents Calculated acc. to DIN VDE 0102 EN 60909, dated 07-01-2002
Rated power HV voltage LV voltage Rated current Ir Impedance Reduced power Max. secondary-side
oltage Ukr losses Pk short-circuit current
[kVA] [kV] [V] [A] [%] [kVA] [kA]
400 10 400 577 4 4.3 16

630 10 400 909 4 6.4 25
800 10 400 1,155 4 7.8 31
1,000 10 400 1,443 4 8.9 39
400 10 400 577 6 4.3 10

630 10 400 909 6 6.4 17
800 10 400 1,155 6 7.6 21
1,000 10 400 1,443 6 8.5 26
1,250 10 400 1,804 6 10.5 33
1,600 10 400 2,309 6 11.4 42
400 20 400 577 4 3.9 16

630 20 400 909 4 6.0 25
800 20 400 1,155 4 7.5 31
1,000 20 400 1,443 4 8.7 39
400 20 400 577 6 4.1 10

630 20 400 909 6 6.4 17
800 20 400 1,155 6 7.9 21
1,000 20 400 1,443 6 9.6 26
1,250 20 400 1,804 6 10.5 33
1,600 20 400 2,309 6 12.3 42

2/27 2
TIP_Kap3_E 11.08.2005 18:43 Uhr Seite B
3 System Protection and Safety Coordination

3.1 Definitions
3.2 Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems
3.3 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems
3.4 Protection of Capacitors
3.5 Protection of Distribution Transformers
TIP_Kap3_E 11.08.2005 18:43 Uhr Seite C
System Protection / Safety Coordination
chapter 3
TIP_Kap3_E 11.08.2005 18:43 Uhr Seite 2
3 System Protection and Safety Coordination

System configuration quirements for medium voltage are advance with the network planners,
dealt with in Chapter 4 “Medium installation companies and system
While in building and industrial power
Voltage” and in Chapter 8 ”Substa- operators involved. The system inter-
systems star-type system configura-
tion Control and Protection Sys- connection together with the 5 rules
tions are normally used for medium
tems”. of circuit dimensioning must also be
voltage, radial system configurations
taken into account. Some terms and
are normally preferred for the low-
definitions shall be described in this
voltage side (radial systems, double
spur systems). A number of
3.1 Definitions chapter for a better understanding of
the issue. If you wish to obtain more
switchgear stations and distribution Electrical installations in a power sys-
detailed information regarding further
boards are required for distributing tem are protected either by protec-
applications, please contact your
power from the infeed to the load. tive equipment allocated to the instal-
Siemens representative.
The protective equipment of these lation components or by combina-
devices is connected in series. tions of these protective elements. Full selectivity
To maintain the supply safety of
Rated short-circuit breaking
Objectives of system protection power distribution systems, full se-
capacity
lectivity is increasingly demanded. A
The objective of system protection is The rated short-circuit breaking ca-
power system is considered fully se-
to detect faults and to selectively iso- pacity is the maximum value of the
lective, if only the protective device
late faulted parts of the system. It short circuit that the protective de-
upstream of the fault location discon-
must also permit short clearance vice is able to clear according to
nects from supply, as seen in the di-
times to limit the fault power and the specifications. The protective device
rection of energy flow (from the in-
effect of arcing faults. may be used in power systems for
feed to the load).
rated switching capacities up to this
High power density, high individual Note:
value.
power outputs, and the relatively Full selectivity always refers to a
short distances in industrial and build- Back-up protection dead, three-phase, i.e. maximum,
ing power systems mean that low- If a short circuit, which is higher than fault current at the mounting location.
voltage and medium-voltage systems the rated switching capacity of the
Partial selectivity
are closely linked. Activities in the LV protective device used, occurs at a
In certain situations, partial selectivity
system (short circuits, starting cur- particular point in the system, back-up
(up to a particular short-circuit cur-
rents) also have an effect on the MV protection must provide protection
rent) is sufficient. The probability of
system. If the situation is reversed, for the downstream installation com-
faults occurring and the effects of
the control state of the MV system ponent and for the protection device
these on the load must then be con-
affects the selectivity criteria in the by means of an upstream protective
sidered for unfavorable scenarios.
secondary power system. device (grading).
Selectivity
Mutual system interference
Selectivity, in particular, has become
It is therefore necessary to adjust the a topic for discussion in the previous
power system and its protection years. Partly, it has become a general
throughout the entire distribution requirement in tender specifications.
system and to coordinate the protec- Due to the complexity of this issue,
tive functions. information about proper selection
and application is often insufficient.
This chapter basically comprises the
These requirements as well as the
installation of electrical equipment in
effects of full or partial selectivity in
LV systems. Therefore, also when
power distribution systems within
dealing with network protection, the
the context of the relevant standard,
emphasis lies on the low-voltage 1) For descriptions and modes of operation of
industry, country, system configura- low-voltage protection devices, controlgear
side. Specific network protection re- and switchgear, please also refer to the
tion or structure should be clarified in
Siemens handbook ”Switching, Protection
and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks”,
published by Publicis MCD, Erlangen.

Inverse time-delay
t t Inverse
Definite
time-delay
I 2 . t = constant Instan-
Definite taneous
release
Instan-
taneous
LV circuit-breaker HV HRC fuse
LV HRC fuse with releases MV circuit-breaker with
time-overcurrent protection
I I
Variable characteristic Variable operating zones
curves and setting ranges and setting ranges
Fig. 3/1 Protective characteristic of LV HRC fuse and Fig. 3/2 Protective characteristic of HV HRC fuse and
LV circuit-breaker with releases MV time-overcurrent protection
3.1.1 Protective Equipment the appropriate release. Releases can is generally used to ensure a higher
and Features be divided into thermo-magnetic re- degree of selectivity (inverse time;
leases (previously also called electro- similar to the inverse-time
Low-voltage protective devices1) mechanical releases) and electronic delay function in medium voltage)
tripping units (ETU). C Ground fault protection
Low-voltage high-rupturing- C Overload protection Designation: ”G” (previously also
capacity fuses Designation: “L” or earlier “a” called ”g” release). Besides the
Low-voltage high-rupturing-capacity (“L” for long-time delay). Depend- standard function (definite-time),
(LV HRC) fuses have a high breaking ing on the type of release, inverse there is also an optional function
capacity. They fuse quickly to restrict time-delay overload releases are (I 2 t = inverse-time delay).
the peak short-circuit current to the ut- also available with optional C Fault current protection
most degree. The protective character- characteristic curves. Designation: RCD (= residual cur-
istic is determined by the selected uti- C Short-circuit protection, instanta- rent device). To detect differential
lization category of the LV HRC fuse neous fault currents up to 3 A, similar to
(e. g. full-range fuse for overload and Designation: “I “ (previously also the RCCB function for the protec-
short-circuit protection, or partial range called ”n” release), e.g. solenoid re- tion of persons (up to 500 mA).
fuse for short-circuit protection only) leases. Depending on the applica- In addition, electronic releases also
and the rated current (Fig. 3/1). tion, I-releases are also offered with permit new tripping criteria which are
Low-voltage circuit-breakers, a fixed settable or OFF function. not possible with electromechanical
IEC 60947-2 C Short-circuit protection, with delay releases.
Circuit-breakers for power distribu- Designation: “S”, previously also
tion systems are distinguished ac- “z” release (“S” for short-time Protective characteristics
cording to their type design (open or delay). For a temporal adjustment
The protective characteristic curve is
compact design), mounting type of protective functions in series
determined by the rated circuit-
(fixed mounting, plug-in, withdraw- connections. Besides the standard
breaker current as well as the setting
able), rated current (maximum nomi- curves and settings, there are also
and the operating values of the re-
nal current of the switch) method of optional functions for special
leases (see Table 3/5).
operation (current limiting: MCCB; or applications.
non-current-limiting: ACB), protective Definite-time-delay overcurrent re-
Low-voltage miniature circuit-
functions (see releases), communica- leases: For this “standard S-func-
breakers (MCB)
tion capability (capability to transmit tion,” the desired delay time tsd is
data to and from the switch), utiliza- set to a definite value when a set Miniature circuit-breakers are distin-
tion category (A or B, see IEC 60947- current value (limit-value Isd) is ex- guished according to their method of
2). ceeded (definite time; similar to the operation – either high or low current
DMT function in medium voltage) limiting. Their protective functions
Releases / protective functions Inverse-time-delay overcurrent re- are determined by electromechanical
The protective function of the circuit- lease: For this optional S-function releases:
breaker in the power distribution sys- applies I 2 t = constant. This function
tem is determined by the selection of
3/3 3
Releases C Circuit-breaker with downstream C Combination of time and current

miniature circuit-breaker grading (inverse time grading)
C Overload protection by means of
C Circuit-breaker with downstream
inverse time-delayed overload Power direction (directional protec-
fuse
releases, e.g. bimetallic releases tion), impedance (distance protec-
C Fuse with downstream circuit-breaker
C Short-circuit protection by means tion) and current difference (differen-
C Fuse with downstream miniature
of instantaneous overload releases, tial protection) are also used.
circuit-breaker
e.g. solenoid releases.
C Several parallel infeeds with or
Requirements for the selective be-
Medium-voltage protection without coupler units with down-
havior of protective devices
equipment stream circuit-breaker or down-
stream fuse Protective devices can only behave
High-voltage high-breaking-
selectively if both the highest and the
capacity fuses Current selectivity must be verified in
lowest short-circuit currents for the
High-voltage high-breaking-capacity the case of meshed LV systems.
relevant system points are known at
(HV HRC) fuses can only be used for
The high- and low-voltage protection the project planning stage.
short-circuit protection. They do not
for the transformers feeding power
provide any overload protection. A As a result:
to the LV system must be harmo-
minimum short-circuit current is C The highest short-circuit current
nized and adjusted to the additional
therefore required for correct opera- determines the required rated
protection of the secondary power
tion. HV HRC fuses restrict the peak short-circuit switching capacity
system. Appropriate checks must be
short-circuit current. The protective Icu/ Ics of the circuit-breaker.
carried out to determine the effects
characteristic is determined by the Criterion: Icu/ Ics > IKmax
on the primary MV system.
selected rated current (Fig. 3/2). C The lowest short-circuit current is
In MV systems, HV HRC fuses are important for setting the overcur-
Medium-voltage circuit-breakers
normally only installed upstream of rent release; the operating value of
Circuit-breakers can provide time-
the transformers in the LV infeed. this release must be less than the
overcurrent protection (definite and
With the upstream circuit-breakers, lowest short-circuit current at the
inverse), time-overcurrent protection
only time-overcurrent protection de- end of the line to be protected,
with additional directional function or
vices with different characteristics since only this setting of Id /Isd
differential protection. Distance pro-
are usually connected in series. Dif- guarantees that the instantaneous
tection is rarely used in the distribu-
ferential protection does not affect, overcurrent release can carry out
tion systems described here.
or only slightly influences the grading its personnel and system protec-
Protective characteristics of the other protective devices. tion functions.
Secondary relays, whose characteris- Note: With these settings, the ad-
tic curves are also determined by the 3.1.3 Selectivity Criteria missible tolerance limit of ± 20%
actual current transformation ratio, must be observed!
In addition to factors such as rated
are normally used as protective de- Criterion: Isd ≤ IKmin – 20 %
current and rated switching capacity,
vices in medium-voltage systems.
a further criterion to be considered C The observance of specified trip-
Static numerical protection devices
when implementing a protection de- ping conditions determines the
are increasingly preferred.
vice is selectivity. Selectivity is im- maximum conductor lengths or
portant because it ensures optimum their cross sections.
3.1.2 Low-Voltage Protection
supply reliability. The following crite- C Selective current grading is only
Equipment Assemblies
ria can be applied for selective opera- possible if the short-circuit currents
Protection equipment assemblies tion of series-connected protection are known.
With series-connected distribution devices: C In addition to current grading, par-
boards, it is possible to arrange the fol- tial selectivity can be achieved us-
C Time difference for clearance
lowing protective devices in series (rel- ing combinations of carefully
(time grading)
ative to the direction of power flow): matched protective devices.
C Current difference for operating
C Fuse with downstream fuse
values (current grading)

TIP_Kap3_E
a 11.08.2005
Fig. 3/3
L
S
L
S
M
Q2
Q1
18:43 Uhr
Ik
t d2 ≈150 ms
to1 = 3 to 30 ms
depending on
Seite 5
circuit-breaker type
and magnitude of
short-circuit current
a
ta2
ta1
to1
tg1
te1
td2 ≈ tst2
tL1
Time sequence for the breaking operation of two graded

LV circuit-breakers in the event of a short circuit
C The highest short-circuit current

can be both the three-phase and
the single-phase short-circuit
current.
C With infeed into LV power sys-
tems, the single-phase fault current
will be greater than the three-
phase fault current if transformers
with the Dy connection are used.
C The single-phase short-circuit cur-
rent will be the lowest fault current
if the damping zero phase-se-
quence impedance of the LV cable
is active.
With large installations, it is advisable
to determine all short-circuit currents
using a special computer program.
Here, our SIMARIS design® planning
software comes as the optimum so-
lution (see Chapter 12).
to2
tg2
Safety
margin
te2
Grading the operating currents

with time grading
t
tL2
Grading of the operating currents is

also taken into consideration with
time grading, i.e. the operating value
of the overcurrent release of the
upstream circuit-breaker must be at
least 1.25 times the operating value
of the downstream circuit-breaker.
Scattering of operating currents in
definite-time-delay overcurrent
releases (S) is thus compensated
(≤ ±10%).
Plotting the tripping characteristics of
the graded protective devices in a
grading diagram will help to verify
and visualize selectivity.
Time sequence for circuit-breakers

When grading the operating currents,
the time sequence of the breaking
operation of the circuit-breakers must
also be taken into consideration.
ta1
ta2
te1
te2
td2
to1
to2
tL1
tL2
tg1
tg2
Operating time of breaker Q1
Operating time of breaker Q2
Disengaging time of breaker Q1
Disengaging time of breake Q2
Delay time of breaker Q2
≈ grading time tst2
Opening time of breaker Q1
Arcing time of breaker Q1
Arcing time of breaker Q2
Total clearance time of breaker Q1
Total clearance time of breaker Q2
(tg = to+tL)
Fig. 3/3 illustrates the individual

time-related terms using two graded
LV circuit-breakers as an example.
Grading time, delay time

The grading time tsd is the interval
required between the tripping charac-
teristics of two series-connected
protection devices to ensure correct
operation of the protective device
immediately upstream of the fault.
The delay time to be set at the cir-
cuit-breaker tsd is obtained from the
sum of the grading times.
3/5 3
Q1 Q2 Ik1 Ik2
120
100
40
t 20
min 10
4 L (cold)
2
1
20
s 10
3.1.4 Preparation of Current- 4
Time Diagrams (Grading Di- 2
agrams) 1
400
Manual preparation 200
100 s
t st2 ≈150 ms t d2 ≈180 ms
General notes ms i
40
When characteristic tripping curves 20 to1 < 30 ms
are entered on log-log graph paper, 10
the following must be observed: 2
C To ensure positive selectivity, the 101 2 3 4 6 102 2 3 4 6 103 2 3 4 6 104 2 3 4 6 105
Current I (r.m.s. value)
tripping curves must neither cross
nor touch.
C With electronic inverse-time delay Fig. 3/4 Grading diagram with tripping curves of the circuit-breakers Q1 and Q2 shown in Fig. 3/3
(long-time delay) overcurrent re-
leases, there is only one tripping
Grading principles Tools for preparing grading
curve, as it is not affected by pre-
Delay times and operating currents are diagrams
loading. The selected characteristic
graded in the opposite direction to the
curve must therefore be suitable C Standard forms with paired current
flow of power, starting with the final
for a motor or transformer at oper- values for commonly used volt-
circuit.
ating temperature. ages, e. g. 20/0.4 kV, 10/0.4 kV,
C Without fuses, for the load breaker
C With mechanical (thermal) inverse- 13.8/0.4 kV, etc.
with the highest current setting of
time delay overload releases (L), the C Templates for plotting the tripping
the overcurrent release.
characteristic curves shown in the curves
C With fuses, for the fused outgoing
manufacturer catalog apply for cold
circuit from the busbars with the Fig. 3/4 shows a hand-drawn grading
releases. The opening times to are
highest rated fuse-link current. diagram with tripping curves for two
reduced by up to 25% at normal op-
series-connected circuit-breakers, not
erating temperatures. Circuit-breakers are preferred to
taking into account tolerances. The
fuses in cases where fuse links with
Tolerance range of tripping curves time sequence for the breaking oper-
high rated currents do not provide se-
C The tripping curves of circuit-breakers ation illustrated in Fig. 3/3 was used
lectivity vis-à-vis the definite-time-de-
given in the manufacturer catalogs are here (time selectivity). When the
lay overcurrent release (S) of the
usually only average values and must SIMARIS design planning software is
transformer feeder circuit-breaker, or
be extended to include tolerance used, a manual preparation of grading
only with very long delay times tsd
ranges (explicitly shown in Fig. 3/4, diagrams is no longer necessary.
(400 to 500 ms). Furthermore, circuit-
3/20 and 3/24 only).
breakers are used where high system
C With overcurrent releases – instanta-
availability is required as they help to
neous (I) and definite-time delayed
clear faults faster and the circuit-
releases (S) – the tolerance may be
breakers’ releases are not subject
±20% of the current setting (accord-
to aging – especially with consumers
ing to EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2 /
with very long infeed distances.
VDE 0660 Part 101).
Procedure with two or more volt-
Significant tripping times
age levels
For the sake of clarity, only the delay
In the case of selectivity involving
time (td) is plotted for circuit-breakers
two or more voltage levels (Fig. 3/39 ff.),
with definite-time-delay overcurrent
all currents and tripping curves on the
releases (S), and only the opening
high-voltage side are converted and
time (to) for circuit-breakers with in-
referred to the low-voltage side on
stantaneous overcurrent releases (I).
the basis of the transformation ratio.

TIP_Kap3_E
a 11.08.2005
Low-voltage time grading

Grading and delay times
a
18:43 Uhr
Only the grading time tgt and delay

time tsd are relevant for time grading
between several series-connected
circuit-breakers or in conjunction with
LV HRC fuses (Fig. 3/5).
The delay time tgt2 of breaker Q2 can
be equated approximately with the
grading time tgt2 ; the delay time tgt3
of breaker Q3 is calculated from the
sum of the grading times tgt2 + tgt3.
The resulting inaccuracies are cor-
rected by the calculated grading mar-
gins. In the interests of simplicity,
only the grading times are added.
Proven grading times tgt
Series-connected circuit-breakers:
Those so-called "proven grading times"
are guiding values or rules of thumb.
Precise information must be obtained
from the device manufacturer.
C Grading between two circuit-break-
ers with electronic overcurrent
releases (Q1 and Q2) should be
Fig. 3/5
L
S
L
S
L
I
M
Q3
td3
Q2
td2
Q1
to1
t o1
Seite 7
t d2 ≈ t gt2
Safety
margin
about 70-80 ms
C Grading between two circuit-break-

ers with different release types
(Q2 = ETU and Q3 = TM) should
be about 100 ms
C For circuit-breakers with ZSI (zone-
selective interlocking, i.e. short-time
grading control) the grading di-
stance has been defined as 50 ms
Irrespective of the type of S-release
(mechanical or electronic), a grading
time of 70 ms to 100 ms is neces-
sary between a circuit-breaker and a
downstream LV HRC fuse.
Between an LV HRC fuse and a
downstream circuit-breaker, a grad-
ing time tgt (safety margin) of at least
1 s must be maintained from the
prearcing-time/current characteristic
of the LV HRC fuse to the point at
which the tripping curves L and I or S
intersect, in order to allow for the
scatter band of the L-release (Fig.
3/6).
t d3 ≈ (t gt2 + ttgt3)
ttgt3
Time grading for several series-connected circuit-breakers

Grading
margin
t
to1
td2
td3
L
S
I
tgt2 Grading time of breaker Q2
tgt3 Grading time of breaker Q3
Inverse-time delay, Ir
Definite-time delay, Id, td
Instantaneous, Ii
3/7 3
Back-up protection
Current I
According to the Technical Supply Time setting for back-up protection
Conditions of the power supply com- Short-circuit
Time setting
for protection Grading time t gt
panies (see ”Electrical Installations current
Command time tc
Handbook”), miniature circuit-break-
ers must be fitted with back-up fuses Operating
Spread of Spread of Spread of
current
with a rated current of 100 A (max.) protection circuit-breaker protection
response time clearance time response time
to prevent any damage being caused
by short-circuit currents. Load current
The DIN VDE and IEC standards also

permit a switching device to be pro-
t
tected by one of the upstream pro- Clearance time
of circuit-breaker Release Grading
tective devices with an adequate time margin
rated short-circuit switching capacity
if both the feeder and the down- Total clearance time t g
stream protective device are also of circuit-breaker
protected (back-up protection).
Fig. 3/6 Time grading in medium-voltage switchgear
Bibliography
Literature on LV installations Medium-voltage time grading Since a spread of time intervals,
For more information about low-volt- which depends on a number of fac-
Command time and grading time
age switching and protective devices, tors, has to be expected for the pro-
The following must be observed
please refer to the Siemens publica- tective devices (including circuit-
when determining the grading time
tion “Switching, Protection and Dis- breakers), a safety margin is incorpo-
tgt on the medium-voltage side: Once
tribution in Low-Voltage Networks” rated in the grading time.
the protective device has been ener-
and the ”Electrical Installations Hand-
gized (Fig. 3/6), the set time must Whereas grading times tgt of less
book”, published by Publicis MCD
elapse before the device issues the than 400 to 300 ms are not possible
Verlag, Erlangen.
tripping command to the shunt or un- with protective devices with mechan-
dervoltage release of the circuit- ical releases, the more modern elec-
breaker (command time tc). tronic and digital releases permit
grading times of only 300 or 250 ms.
The release causes the circuit-
breaker to open. The short-circuit cur-
rent is interrupted when the arc has
been extinguished. Only then does
the protection system revert to the
normal/rest position (release time).
The grading time tgt between succes-
sive protective devices must be
greater than the sum of the total clear-
ance time tg of the breaker and the re-
lease time of the protection system.

3.2 Protection Equip- 3.2.1 Circuit-Breakers with

Protective Functions
C Circuit-breakers used in motor star
ters acc. to EN 60947-4-2/
ment for Low-Voltage IEC 60947-4-2 / DIN VDE 0660-102
Power Systems Protective functions of
LV circuit-breakers
C Miniature circuit-breakers for cable
and line protection acc. to
Tables 3/1 and 3/2 provide an EN 60898/ IEC 60898 /
overview of the protection equip- Circuit-breakers are used, first and
DIN VDE 0641-11
ment for LV systems. The protection foremost, for overload and short-cir-
equipment in the MV system of out- cuit protection. In order to increase
their protective functions, they can also Zero-current interrupters /
going transformer feeders has also
be equipped with additional releases, current limiters
been listed in Table 3/2.
e.g. for clearance with undervoltage,
Depending on their method of opera-
Overcurrent protection for or with supplementary modules for
tion, circuit-breakers are available as:
lines and cables detecting fault/residual currents (also
C Zero-current interrupters or
see Chapter 6).
C Current limiters (fuse-type
Overcurrent protection devices must
The circuit-breakers are distinguished current limiting).
be used to protect lines and cables
according to their protective function: When configuring selective distribu-
against overheating which may result
C Circuit-breakers for system protection boards, zero-current interrupters
from operational overloads or dead
tion acc. to EN 60947-2/ IEC 60947- are more suitable as upstream pro-
short circuits (”Electrical Installations
2/DIN VDE 0660-101 tection devices and current limiters
Handbook”, Publicis MCD Verlag,
C Circuit-breakers for motor protec as downstream protection devices.
Erlangen, Section 1.7).
tion acc. to EN 60947-2/
The protective switching devices and IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101
safety systems dealt with in this
chapter are further described in
Chapter 6.
Overcurrent protection devices Standard Overload Short-circuit See Section

protection protection
Fuses gL EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636 × × Section 6.2.2
Miniature circuit-breakers EN 60 898/IEC 60 898/DIN VDE 0641-11 × × Section 6.2.4
Circuit-breakers with overload EN 60 947-2/IEC 60 947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 × × Section 6.2.1

and overcurrent releases
Switchgear EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636 – × Section 6.2.2

fuses aM
Switchgear assemblies
with back-up fuse, utilization EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636 – ×
category gL or aM, and
contactor with overload relay EN 60 947-4-1/IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 × –
or
starter circuit-breaker and EN 60 947-2/IEC 60 947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 – ×
contactor with overload relay EN 60 947-4-1/IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 × –
× Protection provided – No protection provided.
Table 3/1 Overview of line and cable overcurrent protection devices discussed in this manual together with their protection ranges
3/9 3
Protection devices MV Switch-disconnectors, Circuit-breakers, Switch-disconnectors,

HV HRC fuses transducer, time- HV HRC fuses
overcurrent protection
LV Circuit-breakers or Tie breaker Circuit-breakers Network circuit-breakers

LV HRC fuses and network master relays
Cost Low Justifiable High Low
Medium-voltage side
Transformers with thermal I>

HV HRC I>>
release or full thermal HV HRC
protection MV MV
MV
LV LV
Low-voltage side with LV
Individual Individual
various series-connected and parallel Optional and parallel Only S
protection devices in operating operating parallel
customary ≤ 630 A customary operation
radial systems, and customary
parallel-connected LV HRC
fuses in interconnected LV
systems HRC
(interconnected
system)
≤ 50 A, ≤ 100 A
HV or LV HRC fuses Circuit-breaker
I> Definite-time-overcurrent protection, two-

I>> level I> and I>>, via current transformer Drawout circuit-breaker (with safe clearance)
Network master relay (directional power relay)
S via current transformer and system voltage
Power-factor correction controller Contactor
Switch-disconnector Overload relay
Table 3/2 Overview of protection grading schemes discussed in this manual for outgoing transformer and LV feeders

Overload and overcurrent protection

Protective Siemens Time-delay Graphical symbol acc. to
Tables 3/3 and 3/4 provide an function symbol characteristics EN 60 617/DIN 40 713
overview of releases and relays in LV of release
circuit-breakers. Table 3/5 contains Circuit diagram Block
the operating ranges of the overcur- or diagram
rent releases. According to the stan-
Overload L Inverse-time
dards specified in Table 3/1, the oper-
protection delay
ating value at which the releases trig-
ger may deviate by ± 20% from the
set value.
Selective S1) Definite-time
Overcurrent releases I>
I>
short-circuit delay by
The instantaneous electromagnetic
protection timing element
overcurrent releases have either
or
fixed or variable settings, whereas
inverse-time
the electronic overcurrent releases
delay
used in Siemens circuit-breakers all
have variable settings. Fault current/ G1) Definite-time
residual current/ delay I
Modules
earth fault or
The overcurrent releases can be inte-
protection inverse-time
grated in the circuit-breaker or sup-
delay
plied as separate modules for retro-
fitting or replacement. Possible ex- Short-circuit I Instantaneous
I>>
I>
ceptions are indicated in the protection
manufacturer specifications.
Overload releases 1)For SENTRON 3WL and SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers, protection also includes
Mechanical (thermal) inverse-time-de- “zone-selective interlocking” (ZSI)
lay overload releases (L-releases) are In the following, combinations of releases will be referred to by their code letters
not always suitable for networks with only (L-, S- and I-releases).
a high harmonic content. Circuit-
breakers with electronic overload re- Table 3/3 Symbols for releases according to protective functions
leases must be used in such cases.
Short-circuit protection with
Function Release Relay
S-releases
In the case of circuit-breakers with Overload Overload release Overload relay
definite (short-)time-delay overcur- protection Inverse-time delay or Thermal delay or
rent releases (S) used for time-grad- electronic delay electronic delay
ing short-circuit protection, it should Thermistor protection release devices
be noted that the circuit-breakers are
Short-circuit Overcurrent release Overcurrent relay
designed for a specific maximum per-
protection Instantaneous electromagnetic Instantaneous electromagnetic
missible thermal and dynamic load.
or electronic release
If, in the event of a short circuit, the
time delay results in this load to be Selective Overcurrent release –
exceeded, an I-release must also be short-circuit Instantaneous electromagnetic
used to ensure that the circuit- protection or electronic
breaker is opened instantaneously
with very high short-circuit currents.
Table 3/4 Circuit-breaker releases and relays with protective functions
The information supplied by the
3/11 3
Applications Time-delay Operating ranges of

(primarily for characteristic inverse-time-dealy overcurrent
short-circuit release as multiple of set
current clearance) value Ir
Circuit-breaker Instantaneous or Approx. 3 to 6 · Ir

for generator short-time delay
protection
Circuit-breaker for Instantaneous Approx. 6 to 12 · Ir

line protection
manufacturer should be consulted
when the release type is selected. Circuit-breaker for Instantaneous or Approx. 8 to 15 · Ir
motor protection short-time delay1)
Reclosing lockout after
short-circuit tripping 1) Poss. short-time delay for rush current shunting
A number of circuit-breakers can be
fitted with a mechanical and/or elec- Table 3/5 Operating ranges of the overcurrent releases (acc. to EN 60 947 / IEC 60 947/DIN VDE 0660)
trical reclosing lockout which pre-
vents reclosing to the short-circuit
MCBs with fault-current tripping C Test button ”T” for testing the
after short-circuit tripping.
These circuit-breaker assemblies are circuit-breaker assembly
The circuit-breaker can only be closed available as compact factory-built de- C Status display for the current leak-
again after the fault has been elimi- vices or may be assembled from a age / residual current I∆ in the
nated and the lockout has been reset miniature circuit-breaker as the basic downstream circuit, e. g. by means
manually. device and an add-on module. of colored LEDs:
– green: I∆ ≤ 0.,5 I∆n
Circuit-breakers with fault-current/
Fault-current/residual-current – yellow: 0,25 I∆n < v∆ ≤ 0.5 v∆n
residual-current tripping
protection – red: cA > I∆ > 0.5 I∆n
The assembly comprising a circuit-
IA = Tripping current of
The global importance of fault-current breaker and add-on module has es-
additional residual-
protection devices has grown in the tablished itself for circuit-breakers
current module
field of protection technology due to with rated currents In of up to 400 A
C Disconnection of the electronics
the high level of protection they pro- and fault-current/residual-current trip-
overvoltage protection prior to insu-
vide (protection of human life and ping.
lation measurement in the installa-
property) and their extended scope Technical features tion
of protection (alternating and pulsat- The add-on module for residual-cur- C ”Remote tripping”
ing current sensitivity). rent tripping used in system protec- C ”Auxiliary switch (AS)”
Apart from residual-current-operated tion applications includes such tech-
nical features as: Interface to bus systems
circuit-breakers, miniature circuit-
C Rated residual current I∆n, ad- With appropriate interfaces, the
breaker assemblies, e. g. miniature
justable in steps, e.g. 30 mA/ circuit-breaker assemblies can be
circuit-breakers with fault-current trip-
100 mA/300 mA/500 mA/1,000 equipped to bus systems to enable
ping, are being used to an increasing
mA/3,000 mA the exchange of information and in-
extent for commercial and industrial
C Tripping time ta, adjustable in teraction with other components in
applications.
steps, the electrical installation.
e. g. instantaneous/60 ms/ 100 AC/DC sensitive circuit-breaker
ms/250 ms/500 ms/1,000 ms assemblies
C Operation depends on system In industrial applications, circuit-
voltage breaker assemblies which are sensi-
C Sensitivity: tripping with alternating tive to AC/DC currents are required
and pulsating DC fault currents for electrical installations in which
C Reset button ”R” for resetting smooth DC fault currents or currents
after residual-current tripping with a low residual ripple occur in the
event of a fault.

Rated short-circuit Power factor Minimum value n

breaking capacity Icn cos ϕ short-circuit making capacity
n=
(r.m.s. value) kA short-circuit breaking capacity
4.5 < I ≤ 6 0.7 1.5

6 < I ≤ 10 0.5 1.7
10 < I ≤ 20 0.3 2.0
20 < I ≤ 50 0.25 2.1
50 < I 0.2 2.2
Rated operating voltage Ue

Table 3/6 Correlation n between rated short-circuit making and breaking capacity
and the respective power factor (for AC circuit-breakers)
The rated operating voltage Ue of a
circuit-breaker is the voltage value to
which the rated short-circuit making
and breaking capacities and the short-
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is indicated using two values:
circuit performance category refer.
Switching capacity Icu Ics
Short-circuit current
Rated ultimate Rated service
The maximum short-circuit current at
short-circuit short-circuit
the installation location is a crucial
breaking capacity breaking capacity
factor for selecting the circuit-breakers
Test sequence O-t-CO O-t-CO-t-CO according to
C Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics , as well
Test of • ultimate short-circuit • service short-circuit
as
breaking capacity breaking capacity
C Rated short-circuit making Icm and
Testing Testing
breaking capacities Icn.
• the overload tripping • the overload tripping
• the insulation resistance • the insulation resistance
Dynamic short-circuit strength
• the overheating • the overheating
The permissible dynamic short-circuit
O Opening (O = Open) strength is indicated as the peak short-
CO Opening and closing (C = Close) circuit current. It is the highest permis-
t Interval (t = time) sible instantaneous value of the
prospective short-circuit current along
Table 3/7 Switching performance categories acc. to EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660 the conducting path with the highest
and IEC 157-1 load.
Standards C Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics and Thermal fault withstand capability
The standards EN 60947-2/ rated short-circuit making (Icm) and (1-s current)
IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101 breaking capacity (Icn) The permissible thermal short-circuit
apply for circuit-breakers with add- C Rated and maximum load currents strength is referred to as the rated
on fault-current or residual-current short-time current Icw . It is the maxi-
The system voltage and system
modules. mum current which the breaker is ca-
frequency are crucial factors for
selecting the circuit-breakers pable of withstanding for X s without
Selection criteria for circuit-
according to any damage occurring. Generally, the
breakers
C Rated insulation voltage Ui Icw current refers to 1 s. Other time
When selecting the appropriate cir- values can be converted assuming
and
cuit-breaker for system protection, Icn = constant.
C Rated operating voltage Ue.
special attention must be paid to the
Rated switching capacity
following characteristics:
Rated insulation voltage Ui The rated switching capacity of the
C Type of circuit-breaker and its re-
The rated insulation voltage Ui is the circuit-breakers is specified as the
leases according to the respective
standardized voltage value for which rated short-circuit making capacity and
protective function and tasks
the insulation of the circuit-breakers rated short-circuit breaking capacity.
C Rated voltages
and their associated components is
rated in accordance with HD 625 /
IEC 60664 / DIN VDE 0110, Insulation
Group C.
3/13 3
Circuit-breaker type Rated current Application example Tripping characteristic
Air Protection of distribution systems, motors, L

circuit-breaker (ACB) 630A to 6,300 A transformers and generators
S
SENTRON 3WL1 – High rated short-time current for time selectivity I
G
– Two series, SENTRON WL1 and SENTRON WL6
with high and medium rated switching capacity
– Electronic, microprocessor-based overcurrent
releases independent of external voltages
– Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) with total delay
time of 50 ms
Current-limiting Designed and tested in compliance with L

circuit-breaker EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660
(MCCB) Possible applications: S
SENTRON 3VL I
TM release: For system protection up to 1,600 A

16 A to 630 A Optional adjustable overload and overcurrent release:
ETU release: Precise adaptation to protection requirements L
63 A to 1,600 A I
ETU release: For motor protection up to 500 A

63 A to 500 A Electronic overload release with adjustable time-lag class:
L
Effective protection when motor is under full load
I
M release: For starter combinations up to 500 A

63 A to 500 A Unsusceptible to inrush currents:
Breaker not tripped by direct-on-line motor starting I
M release: As isolating circuit-breaker (load interrupter) up to 2,000 A

100 A to 1,600 A with integrated overcurrent releases,
no back-up fuse required I
Circuit-breaker 0.16 to 100 A 3 RV1 circuit-breaker for motor protection

L
3RV1 with overload and overcurrent protection
L Overload tripping S Short-time delay overcurrent tripping I Instantaneous overcurrent tripping G Ground fault tripping
Table 3/8 Application examples for modern Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics

Rated short-circuit making Rated circuit-breaker currents Application examples and tripping
capacity Icm The rated duty, e.g. continuous curves
The rated short-circuit making capac- operation, intermittent operation or
Application examples for circuit-
ity Icm is the short-circuit current short-time operation, plays a decisive
breakers with protection
which the circuit-breaker is capable role in selecting the switchgear
The principal application examples
of making at the rated operating volt- according to its rated currents.
and typical tripping curves of modern
age +10%, rated frequency and a
The following rated currents are dis- circuit-breakers currently available
specified power factor. It is ex-
tinguished according to the thermal from Siemens are specified in
pressed as the maximum peak value
characteristics: Table 3/8.
of the prospective short-circuit cur-
rent, and is at least equal to the rated C Rated thermal current Ith
short-circuit breaking capacity Icn , C Rated continuous current Iu
multiplied by the factor n specified C Rated operating current Ie.
in Table 3/6.
Conventional rated thermal
Rated short-circuit breaking current Ith , rated continuous
capacity Icn current Iu
The rated short-circuit breaking capac-
The conventional rated thermal cur-
ity Icn is the short-circuit current which
rent Ith or Ithe for motor starters in
the circuit-breaker is capable of break-
enclosures is defined as an 8-h cur-
ing at the rated operating voltage
rent in accordance with EN 60947-1,
+10%, rated frequency and a speci-
-4-1, -3 / IEC 60947-1, -4-1, -3 /
fied power factor cos ϕ. It is ex-
DIN VDE 0660-100, -102, -107.
pressed as the r.m.s. value of the al-
ternating current component. It is the maximum current which can
be carried during this time without
Switching capacity category
the temperature limit being ex-
Switching capacity categories, which
ceeded. The rated continuous current
specify how often a circuit-breaker
Iu can be carried for an unlimited
can switch its rated making and
time.
breaking current as well as the condi-
tion of the breaker after the specified With adjustable inverse-time-delay
switching cycle, are defined for releases and relays, the maximum
circuit-breakers in EN 60947 / current setting is the rated continu-
IEC 60947/ DIN VDE 0660 and in ous current Iu.
accordance with IEC 157-1 (Table
3/7). The rated short-circuit breaking Rated operating current Ie
capacity Icn is based on the test
The rated operating current Ie is the
sequence O-t-CO-t-CO. The rated
current that is determined by the op-
service short-circuit breaking capacity
erating conditions of the switching
Ics can also be specified on the basis
device, the rated operating voltage
of the shortened switching sequence
and rated frequency, rated switching
O-t-CO (see Table 3/7 for explanation
capacity, the rated duty, utilization
of O, t, and C).
category1), contact life and the de-
gree of protection.
1) The utilization category describes the

switching devices’ application and stress,
see device standards EN 60947 /
IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660.
3/15 3
L Inverse-time-delay
Circuit- Fuse overload release
breaker
t Fuse I Instantaneous
electromagnetic
L overcurrent release
Circuit-
A breaker Icn Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity
A
Ik Prospective sus-
Ik tained short-circuit
I current at mounting
3.2.2 Switchgear Assemblies Icn Ik location
A Safety margins
Switchgear assemblies are series-
connected switching and protection
Operates I
devices which perform specific tasks L release I release Fuse
for protecting a system component; Clears Circuit-breaker Fuse
the first device (relative to the flow + circuit-breaker
of power) provides the short-circuit
protection. Fig. 3/7 Switchgear assembly comprising fuse and circuit-breaker
Switchgear assemblies with fuses

Fuse, contactor, and thermal Type a Destruction and replace-
Fuses and molded-case circuit-
inverse-time-delay overload relay ment of individual compo-
breakers
The contactor is used to switch the nents or complete switch-
If the prospective short-circuit cur-
motor on and off. The overload relay ing device
rent Ik exceeds the rated short-circuit
protects the motor, motor supply
breaking capacity Icn of the circuit- Type b Welding of contacts and
conductors and contactor against
breaker at its point of installation, the permanent change in
overloading. The fuse upstream of
latter must be provided with up- characteristic values of
the contactor and overload relay pro-
stream fuses (Fig. 3/7). overload relay
vides protection against short cir-
Protection and operating ranges cuits. For this reason, the protection Type c Welding of contacts with-
Defined protection and operating ranges and characteristics of all the out permanent change to
ranges are assigned to each device in components (Fig. 3/8) must be care- operating values of over
the switchgear assembly. The L-re- fully coordinated with each other. load relay.
lease monitors overload currents,
The switchgear assembly comprising
while the I-release detects short-cir- Protection and operating ranges of
contactor and overload relay is re-
cuit currents up to the rated short-cir- equipment
ferred to as a motor starter or, if a
cuit breaking capacity of the circuit-
three-phase motor is started directly, Grading diagram for motor starter
breaker.
a direct-on-line starter. The protection ranges and the rele-
The circuit-breaker provides protec- vant characteristics of the equipment
Specifications for contactors and
tion against all overcurrents up to its constituting a switchgear assembly
motor starters
rated short-circuit breaking capacity used as a motor starter are illustrated
The standards EN 60947-4-1 /
Icn and ensures all-pole opening and in the grading diagram in Fig. 3/8.
IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN VDE 0660-102
reclosing. The fuses are only respon-
apply for contactors and motor
sible for short-circuit clearance with
starters up to 1,000 V for direct-on-
higher short-circuit currents Ik . In this
line starting (with maximum voltage).
case too, the circuit-breaker discon-
nects all-pole almost simultaneously When short-circuit current protection
1) The standards EN 60 947-1 / IEC 60 947-4-1/
via its I-release, triggered by the let- equipment is selected for switchgear DIN VDE 0660-102 comprise modified de-
through current ID of the fuse. The assemblies, a distinction is made be- scriptions for short-circuit behavior as
fuse must, therefore, be selected follows:
tween various types of protection ac-
such that its let-through current ID is cording to the permissible degree of Coordination type ”1”:
Destruction of contactor and overload relay
less than the rated short-circuit damage as defined in EN 60947-4- / are permissible. The contactor and/or over
breaking capacity Icn of the circuit- IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN VDE 0660-1021): load relay must be replaced if necessary.
breaker. Coordination type ”2”:
The overload relay must not be damaged.
Contact welding at the contactor is, however,
permissible, given the contacts can easily be
separated or the contactor can easily be
replaced.

1 Tripping characteristic
of (thermal) inverse-
time-delay overload
Assembly relay
t comprising
LV HRC fuse, 2 Destruction character-
contactor, and istic of thermal overload
thermal relay
1 overload relay
1 min (motor starter) 3 Rated breaking capacity
of contactor
2
4 Characteristic of contac-
tor for easily separable
B welding of contacts Therefore, in both cases, the fuse
A 4 (Depends on must respond in good time. The total
current limiting 5 Prearcing-time/current
by fuse) characteristic of fuse, clearance time characteristic of the
5 utilization category aM fuse (6) must lie in margin C below
3 C 6 Total clearance-time the characteristic curve of the contac-
6 characteristic of aM tor for easily separable contact weld-
1 ms fuse ing (4) (total clearance time = prearc-
I
ing time + extinction time).
A, B, C Safety margins for reli-
able short-circuit pro- Selecting fuses
tection
LV HRC switchgear fuses
Fig. 3/8 Switchgear assembly comprising fuse, contactor, Fuses for motor starters are selected
and thermal inverse-time-delay overload relay according to the aforementioned criteria.
Compared with LV HRC fuses of uti-
The fuses in this assembly must Protection of overload relay lization category gL used to protect
satisfy a number of conditions: In order to protect the overload relay, lines and cables, LV HRC switchgear
C The time-current characteristics of the prearcing-time/current character- fuses of utilization category aM pro-
fuses and overload relays must al- istic of the fuse (an LV HRC vide the advantage of weld-free
low the motor to be run up to switchgear fuse of utilization cate- short-circuit protection for the maxi-
speed. gory aM was used in this example; mum motor power which the contac-
C The fuses must protect the over- refer to the following section ”Select- tor is capable of switching.
load relay from being destroyed by ing fuses”) must lie in margin A be-
currents approximately 10 times low the intersection of the tripping Owing to their more effective current
higher than the rated current of the curve of the overload relay (1) with limiting abilities (as compared with
relay. its destruction curve (2). those of line-protection fuses), they
C The fuses must interrupt overcur- are very effective in relieving contac-
Protection of contactor tors of high peak short-circuit cur-
rents beyond the capability of the
In order to protect the contactor rents ip since they respond more
contactor (Ie currents approximately
against excessively high breaking cur- rapidly in the upper short-circuit
10 times higher than the rated oper-
rents, the prearcing-time/current range as shown in Fig. 3/9.
ating current Ie of the contactor).
characteristic curve of the fuse, start-
C In the event of a short circuit, the It is therefore preferable to use
ing from the current value which cor-
fuses must protect the contactor to switchgear fuses rather than line-
responds to the breaking capacity of
such an extent that any damage protection fuses with relay settings
the contactor (3), must lie in margin B
does not exceed the specified de- > 80 A at higher operating currents
below the tripping characteristic of
grees of damage mentioned above with correspondingly lower short-
the overload relay (1).
(depending on the rated operating circuit current attenuation.
current Ie, contactors must be able In order to protect the contactor
to withstand motor start-up cur- against contact welding, time-current Table 3/9 shows the classification
rents of between 8 and 12 Ie with- characteristic curves can be specified of the fuses based on functional
out the contacts being welded). for each contactor indicating which features.
load currents can be applied as maxi-
To satisfy these conditions, the fol- mum currents so that
lowing safety margins A, B and C C contact welding is avoided, or else
must be maintained between certain C welded contacts can easily be sep-
characteristic curves of the devices: arated (characteristic curve 4 in
Fig. 3/8).
3/17 3
Functional category Utilization category

t s Prearcing time for fuse
Designation Rated continuous Rated breaking Designation Protection of 104
s
current ≤ current
t s 103
Full-range fuses
g In ≥ Ia min gL/gG Cables and 102 Utilization category

gL
lines aM
gR Semiconductors 101
gB Mining
installations 100
Back-up fuses 10-1

a In ≥ 4 In aM Switchgear
≥ 2.7 In aR Semiconductors 10-2
8
Ia min Minimum rated breaking current 10-3
4 102 103 104 5
I [A]
Table 3/9 Classification of LV HRC fuses based on their functional characteristics defined in Fig. 3/9 Comparison of prearcing-time/
EN 60269-1/ IEC 60269-1/DIN VDE 0636-10 current characteristics of LV HRC
fuses of utilization categories gL
and aM, rated current 200 A
Classification of LV HRC fuses and times the rated current. These fuses stalled at a location where the possi-
comparison of characteristic are thus only intended for short-circuit ble short-circuit current exceeds its
curves of gL and aM utilization protection. For this reason, fuses of rated switching capacity.
categories functional category a must not be
Protection and operating ranges of
used above their rated current. A
LV HRC fuses are divided into func- the circuit-breakers
means of overload protection, e.g. a
tional and utilization categories in ac- Fig. 3/10 shows the single-line dia-
thermal time-delay relay, must there-
cordance with their type design. They gram and Fig. 3/11 the principle of a
fore always be provided.
can continuously carry currents up to cascade connection. The rated cur-
their rated current. Comparison of characteristic rent of the upstream circuit-breaker
curves for utilization categories gL Q2 is selected in accordance with its
Functional category g
and aM rated operating current. The circuit-
(full-range fuses)
The prearcing-time/current character- breaker Q2 can, for example, be used
Functional category g applies to full-
istics of LV HRC of utilization cate- as a main circuit-breaker or group cir-
range fuses which can interrupt cur-
gory gL and aM for 200 A are com- cuit-breaker for several feeders in
rents from the minimum fusing current
pared in Fig. 3/9. sub-distribution boards. Its I-release
up to the rated short-circuit breaking
is set to a very high operating cur-
current.
Switchgear assemblies without rent, if possible to the rated short-cir-
Utilization category gL/gG fuses (fuseless design) cuit breaking capacity Icn of the
This category includes fuses of uti- downstream circuit-breakers.
Back-up protection (cascade-con-
lization category g/gG used to protect
nected circuit-breakers)
cables and lines.
If two circuit-breakers with I-releases
Functional category a of the same type are connected in
(back-up fuses) series along one conducting path, Circuit-breaker
Functional category a applies to they will open simultaneously in Q2 with I-release
backup fuses which can interrupt the event of a fault (K) in the vicinity
currents above a specified multiple of of the distribution board and
their rated current up to the rated (Fig. 3/10, 3/11). Circuit-breaker
Q1
short-circuit breaking current. with L I-release
The short-circuit current is thereby
Utilization category aM detected by two series-connected
This functional category applies to interrupting devices and effectively K
switchgear fuses of utilization cate- extinguished. As a result, the down-
gory aM, the minimum breaking cur- stream circuit-breaker with a lower
Fig. 3/10 Single-line diagram of a back-up
rent of which is approximately four rated switching capacity can be in- circuit (cascade connection) in a
sub-distribution board

The outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 pro- was an overload or short circuit ac-

vides overload protection and also cording to whether, via the overload ip
clears autonomously relatively low relay, the contactor or the starter cir-
short-circuit currents which may be cuit-breaker has opened. Further ad- i
caused by short circuits to exposed vantages of the starter circuit-breaker i D1
conductive parts, insulation faults or following short-circuit tripping are
short circuits at the end of long lines three-phase circuit interruption and i D(1+2)
and cables. The upstream circuit- immediate readiness for reclosing.
breaker Q2 is only involved at the
The switchgear assemblies with the
same time if high short-circuit cur-
starter circuit-breaker are becoming
rents occur as a result of a dead
increasingly important in fuseless
short circuit in the vicinity of the out-
control units. t
going circuit-breaker Q1 (restricted
selectivity).
Switchgear assemblies with ther-
mistor motor-protection devices
Circuit-breakers with L- and u ue
I-releases and contactor Overload relays and releases cease u B(1+2)
to provide reliable overload protec-
Protection and operating ranges
tion when it is no longer possible to u B1
of devices
establish the winding temperature
The circuit-breaker provides overload
from the motor current. This is the
and short-circuit protection also for t
case with:
the contactor, while the contactor
performs switching duties (Fig. 3/12). C High switching frequencies
The requirements that must be ful- C Irregular, intermittent duty
filled by the circuit-breaker are the C Restricted cooling and
same as those that apply to the fuse C High ambient temperatures
in switchgear assemblies comprising
In these cases, switchgear assem-
fuse, contactor and overload relay ip Maximum asymmetrical short-
blies with thermistor motor-protec- circuit current (peak value)
(see Fig. 3/8).
tion devices are used. The
i D1 Let-through current Q1
switchgear assemblies are designed
Starter circuit-breaker with i D (1+ 2) Actual let-through current
with or without fuses depending on
I-release, contactor, and overload (less than i D1)
the installation’s configuration.
relay (a) ue Source voltage (opening
Temperature sensor in motor winding voltage)
Readiness for reclosing
The degree of protection that can be u B (1+ 2) Sum of arc voltages of up-
Overload protection is provided by
attained depends on whether the stream circuit-breaker Q2 and
the overload relay in conjunction with outgoing circuit-breaker Q1
motor to be protected has a ther-
the contactor, while short-circuit pro-
mally critical stator or rotor. The oper- u B1 Arc voltage of outgoing
tection is provided by the starter cir- circuit-breaker Q1
ating temperature, coupling time con-
cuit-breaker. The operating current of
stant and the position of the
its I-release is set as low as the start-
temperature sensor in the motor
ing cycle will permit, in order to in-
winding are also crucial factors. They
clude low short-circuit currents in the
are usually specified by the motor
instantaneous breaking range as well
manufacturer.
(Fig. 3/13). The advantage of this
switchgear assembly is that it is pos-
sible to determine whether the fault
Fig. 3/11 Principle of a back-up circuit
(cascade connection)
3/19 3
Circuit-breaker
Circuit- with I-release for
t breaker with starter assemblies
li releases t
a
Contactor
L Contactor
Inverse-time-
delay overload
1 2 relay with
L-release
n
Setting range
I Icn
3 Icn
Trip L-release I-release I

Opens Contactor Circuit-breaker
I
1 Rated breaking capacity of L Characteristic of

contactor inverse-time-delay
2 Rated making capacity of overload release
contactor I Characteristic of instanta-
3 Characteristic of contactor neous electromagnetic
for easily separable con- overcurrent release L Characteristic curve of I Characteristic curve of ad
tact welding Icn Rated short-circuit (thermal) inverse-time-de justable instantaneous
breaking capacity of lay overload relay overcurrent release
circuit-breaker
Fig. 3/12 Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker and contactor Fig. 3/13 Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker, adjustable
overcurrent release, contactor, and overload relay
a) b) c) d)
Fuse Fuse
Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with

L- and I-releases L- and I-releases L- and I-releases
Contactor Contactor Contactor
Overload relay Overload relay

Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor
motor protection motor protection motor protection motor protection
M M M M
+ϑ +ϑ +ϑ +ϑ
Fig. 3/14 Switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices plus additional overload
relay or release (block diagram)
Motors with thermally critical Motors with thermally critical 3.2.3 Selecting Protective
stators rotors Equipment
Motors with thermally critical stators Motors with thermally critical rotors,
can be adequately protected against even if started with a locked rotor, Short-circuit protection of branch
overloads and overheating by means can only be provided with adequate circuits
of thermistor motor-protection de- protection if they are fitted with an Branch circuits in distribution boards
vices without overload relays. Feeder additional overload relay or release. and control units can be provided with
cables are protected against short cir- The overload relay or release also short-circuit protection by means of
cuits and overloads either by fuses protects the cabling against over- fuses or by means of circuit-breakers
and circuit-breakers (Fig. 3/14a) or by loads (Fig. 3/14a, c and d). without fuses. The level of anticipated
fuses alone (Fig. 3/14b). current limiting, which is higher in
fuses with low rated currents than in
current-limiting circuit-breakers with
the same rated current, may also be a

[kA] 100 2h
cos ϕ 0.25
ip t
ip , i D cos ϕ 0.3 a´
63 A i D 10 s
a, a´
cos ϕ 0.5 100 A
13 a
iD 63 A b
10
8 1 2 3
iD
cos ϕ 0.7
b B A
10 ms Icn
1 1.3 1.6 Ir,(Ie) Ik 100

1 1.05 1.2 I [kA]
1 10 22 100
Short-circuit current I k [kA] 1 Current limiting range B Test range for limiting
2 Overload range tripping currents of
iD Let-through currents e.g. where Ik = 10 kA: circuit-breaker
3 Short-circuit current range
ip Peak short-circuit current iD Fuse (100 A) 7.5 kA Icn Rated short-circuit
A Test range for fuse breaking capacity
iD Circuit-breaker 8 kA currents
Fig. 3/15 Current-limiting characteristics of circuit-breaker (63 A) Fig. 3/16 Characteristics and rated switching capacities of fuse
and LV HRC fuses (63 and 100 A) (a) and circuit-breaker (b) with I-releases
crucial factor in making a choice in C Clearance conditions in accordance Comparison between the tripping
favor of one or the other solution. with HD 384.4.41 / IEC 60 364-4-41/ curves and rated short-circuit
DIN VDE 0100-410, Section 6.1.3 breaking capacity of fuses with
Comparing the protective charac- ”Protection measures in TN sy- those of circuit-breakers with
teristics of fuses with those of stems” (see ”Electrical Installati- the same rated current and a high
current-limiting circuit-breakers ons Handbook”, Chapter 2). switching capacity
The following should be taken into Comparison of current-limiting Tripping curves and rated
consideration when comparing the characteristics short-circuit breaking capacity Icn
protection characteristics of fuses Current limiting with LV HRC fuses The prearcing-time/current character-
and circuit-breakers: and circuit-breakers istic curve a of the 63 A fuse link, uti-
C The rated short-circuit breaking Fig. 3/15 shows the current-limiting lization category gL, and the “I” trip-
capacity, which can vary consider- characteristics of a circuit-breaker ping characteristic b of a circuit-
ably; with rated continuous current of 63 A, breaker are, by way of example,
C The level of current limiting which, at 400 V and 50 Hz compared to an plotted in the time-current diagram in
with fuses of up to 400 A, is al- LV HRC fuse of type 3NA, utilization Fig. 3/16. The current setting for the
ways higher than for current-limit- category gL, rated currents 63 A and inverse-time-delay overload release
ing circuit-breakers with the same 100 A. Owing to the high motor start- of the circuit-breaker corresponds to
rated current; ing currents, however, the rated cur- the rated current of the fuse link.
C The shape of the prearcing rent of the fuse must be higher than Current limiting range (1)
time/current characteristic curves the rated operating current of the mo- The typical test range for fuse cur-
of fuses and the tripping curves of tor, i.e. a circuit-breaker with a mini- rents (A) is, for example, between
circuit-breakers; mum rated current of 63 A or a fuse 1.3 and 1.6 times the rated current
with a minimum rated current of while the test range for the limiting
100 A is required for a 30 kW motor. tripping currents of the overload re-
lease (B) is between 1.05 and 1.2
times the current setting. The ad-
justable overload release enables the
current setting and, therefore, the
limiting tripping current to be
matched more closely to the continu-
ous loading capability than it would
be possible with a fuse, the different
current ratings of which only permit
approximate matching.
3/21 3
Although the limit current of the fuse Extremely high rated switching The switchgear assemblies compris-
is adequate for providing overload capacity of LV HRC fuses ing fuse and circuit-breaker, which
protection for lines and cables, it is This results in an extremely high provide system protection, protect the
not sufficient for the starting current rated breaking capacity for fuses of lines to the sub-distribution board
of motors where a fuse with the over 100 kA at an operating voltage against overloads and short circuits.
characteristic a’ would be needed. of 690 V AC. The rated short-circuit The switchgear assemblies compris-
breaking capacity Icn of circuit-breaking fuse and circuit-breaker, which
Overload range (2)
ers, however, depends on a number provide motor protection, as well as
In the overload range (2), the prearc-
of factors, e.g. the rated operating fuses, contactor and overload relay
ing- time/current characteristic curve
voltage Ue and the type. protect the motor feeder cable and
of the fuse is steeper than the trip-
the motor against overloads and short
ping curve of the overload release. A comparison between the protec-
circuits.
Short-circuit current range (3) tion characteristics of fuses, circuit-
In the short-circuit current range (3), breakers and their switchgear assem- Distribution boards without fuses
the instantaneous release of the cir- blies can be found in Tables 3/10 (fuseless design)
cuit-breaker detects short-circuit cur- and 3/11. In distribution boards without fuses
rents above its operating value faster (Table 3/13), short-circuit protection
than the fuse. At higher currents, the Selecting circuit-breakers for is provided by circuit-breakers for
fuse trips more quickly and therefore, distribution boards with and system protection and for load
limits the short-circuit current more without fuses switching, furthermore circuit-break-
effectively than a circuit-breaker. ers fulfill motor protection tasks only
Distribution boards and control units
or protect starter assemblies to-
can be constructed with or without
gether with the contactor. The pro-
fuses.
tection ranges of the switchgear as-
Distribution boards with fuses semblies comprising circuit-breaker,
The standard design of distribution contactor and overload relay have al-
boards with fuses (Table 3/12) in- ready been dealt with in this chapter.
cludes switchgear assemblies com-
For further technical data, please
prising circuit-breakers and fuses,
refer to the literature supplied by the
whereby a specific task is allocated
manufacturer.
to each protection device.
The feeder circuit-breaker provides
overload protection and selective short-
circuit protection for the transformer
and distribution board. The Siemens cir-
cuit-breakers SENTRON WL and 3VL
are ideal for this purpose.

Characteristic Fuse Circuit-breaker
Rated switching > 100 kA, 690 V f (Ir Ue type1))

capacity (AC)
Current limiting f ( I r I k) f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
Additional arcing space None f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
External indication Yes No

of operability
Operational reliability With additional costs2) Yes
Remote switching No Yes
Automatic all-pole breaking With additional costs3) Yes
Indication facility With additional costs4) Yes
Interlocking facility No Yes
Readiness for reclosing after

clearing overload No Yes
clearing short circuit No f (condition)
Interrupted operation Yes f (condition)
Maintenance costs No f (number of operations and condition)
Selectivity No additional costs With additional costs
Replaceability Yes5) With unit of same make
Short-circuit protection
cable Very good Good
motor Very good Good
Overload protection
cable Adequate Good
motor Not possible Good
1) The term ”type” embraces: current 3) By means of fuse monitoring and
extinguishing method, short-circuit associated circuit-breakers
strength through internal impedance, 4) By means of fuse monitoring
type of construction 5)
2)
Due to standardisation
For example, by means of shockproof
fuse switch-disconnectors with snap-
action closing
Table 3/10 Comparison between the protective characteristics of fuses and circuit-breakers
3/23 3
Equipment to be Protection devices with fuses

protected and
switching rate
Fuse
Circuit-breaker
Contactor
Overload protection
Thermistor
motor protection
M M M M M M
3~ 3~
+ϑ +ϑ +ϑ +ϑ
Overload protection
– Cable ++ ++ + + ++ ++
– Motor (with thermally critical stator) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
– Motor (with thermally critical rotor) ++1) ++ + + ++ ++
– Cable ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
– Motor ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
Switching rate – ++ – ++ – ++
Equipment to be Protection devices without fuses

protected and
switching rate
–
Circuit-breaker
Contactor
Overload protection
Thermistor
motor protection
M M M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
+ϑ +ϑ +ϑ
Overload protection
– Cable ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ +
– Motor (with thermally critical stator) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++
– Motor (with thermally critical rotor) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++
– Cable ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
– Motor ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
Switching rate + + + + – –
1)
Protection with slight functional loss following failure of phase conductor
++ Very good + Good – Poor
Table 3/11 Comparison between the protective characteristics of different switchgear assemblies (block diagrams)

No. Type of Type Rated Type of release/relay Back-up Tripping

circuit- code short-circuit L S I fuse characteristic
breaker breaking Adjus- Fixed Adjus- Fixed Adjus-
↔
capacity table settable settable Icn Adjustable
Icn ting ting > 100 kA ↔ release
Feeder circuit-breaker
1 Circuit- 3W ≥ Ik1 × – × – × – Icn

breaker t
1 for selective
protection Ik1 I
Ik1
Distribution circuit-breaker
2 Fuse 3NA ≥ Ik2 – – – – – × Icn

and 3VF ≤ Ik2 – × – × – – t
circuit-breaker 3VL ≤ Ik2 – × – × – –
2
for system Ik2 I
protection
Ik2
Load circuit-breaker
4 3 Fuse 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – × Icn

and 3RV1 ≤ Ik3 × – – × – – t
3
circuit-breaker
for motor Ik3 I
protection
Ik3 Ik3
4 Fuse 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – × Icn
and 3ND ≥ Ik3 – – – – – ×
M M t
3~ 3~ direct-on-line 3TW ≤ Ik3 × – – – – –
starter Ik3 I
Table 3/12 Power distribution boards with fuses and circuit-breakers
3/25 3
No. Type of Type Rated Type of release/relay Tripping

circuit- code short-circuit L S I characteristic
breaker breaking Adjus- Fixed Adjus- Fixed Adjus-
↔
capacity table settable settable Adjustable
Icn ting ting ↔ release
Feeder circuit-breaker
1 Circuit- 3W ≥ Ik1 × – × – × Icn

breaker t
1 for selective
protection Ik1 I
Ik1
Distribution circuit-breaker
2 Circuit-breaker 3VF ≥ Ik2 – × – × – Icn

for system 3VL ≥ Ik2 – × – × – t
protection
2 3
Ik2 I
3 Circuit- SEN- ≥ Ik2 × – × – × Icn
Ik2 Ik2
breaker TRON t
for selective WL
protection Ik2 I
Load circuit-breaker
4 4 Circuit- 3RV1 ≤ Ik3 × – – × – Icn

5
breaker t
for motor
protection Ik3 I
5 Circuit- 3RA ≥ Ik3 – – – – × Icn
Ik3 Ik3 breaker 3TW – × – – – – t
and direct-on-
line starter Ik3 I
M M
3~ 3~
Table 3/13 Power distribution with circuit-breakers without fuses

3.2.4 Miniature Circuit- Ib Rated operating current to

Breakers (MCBs) 1st condition 2nd condition be expected, i.e. load-deter-
Ib ≤ In ≤ I z I2 ≤ 1.45 · Iz mined current during normal
Ib Iz operation
Task
Iz Permissible continuous load
Miniature circuit-breakers are mainly current for one conductor
designed for the protection of lines In I2 1.45·Iz I where the permanent tem-
perature limit for the insula-
and cables against overload and short tion is not exceeded
circuit, thus ensuring the protection time t
I1 I2 1.45 ·Iz Maximum permissible time-
of electrical equipment against ex- limited overload current
cessively high heating according to where a short-term exceed-
the relevant standards, e.g. ing of the continuous limit
temperature will not yet re-
DIN VDE 0100-430. sult in a safety-relevant re-
duction of insulation prop-
Under certain conditions, MCBs in a erties.
TN system also provide protection
In Rated current, i.e. the cur-
against electrical stroke at exces- I3
rent for which the miniature
sively high contact voltage due to circuit-breaker has been rat-
wrong insulation, e.g. according to ed and to which other pa-
rameters refer (set value)
HD 384.4.41/ IEC 364-4-41 /
DIN VDE 0100-410. I1 Small test current, i.e. the
current which does not re-
sult in tripping in defined
Application I3 conditions
Miniature circuit-breakers are used in I2 Large test current, i.e. the

current which is broken
all distribution networks, both for within one hour in defined
commercial buildings and industrial conditions (In ≤ 63 A)
buildings. Due to a wide range of ver- I3 Tolerance limiting
sions and accessories (e.g. auxiliary
I4 Seal-in current of the instan-
contacts, fault signal contacts, open- taneous electromagnetic
circuit shunt releases), they are able overcurrent release (short-
I4 I5 circuit release)
to meet the various requirements of
the most diverse areas of application. I5 Tripping current of the in-
stantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent release (short-
Tripping characteristics I
circuit release)
Four tripping characteristics A, B, C
and D are available for the actual type
of application corresponding to the
equipment being connected in the Fig. 3/17 Typical values of lines and protective devices
circuit to be protected.
C Tripping characteristic A is particu- DIN VDE 0100-4110.
larly suitable for the protection of
C Tripping characteristic B is the stan-
transducers in measuring circuits,
dard characteristic for wall-outlet
for long-line circuits and where dis-
circuits in residential and commer-
connection within 0.4 s is required
cial buildings.
in accordance with HD 384.4.41 S2 /
IEC 60 364-4-41/
3/27 3
C Tripping characteristic C is advanta- Versions By connecting the AS and the FC

geous wherever equipment with to an instabus®EIB® binary input,
MCBs are available in many different
higher inrush currents, e.g. the signals may also be read into an
versions: 1-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole,
luminaires and motors, is used. instabus EIB system. When using an
4-pole and with connected neutral
C Tripping characteristic D is adapted instabus EIB binary output, the MCB
1-pole+N and 3-pole+N. Correspond-
to highly pulse-generating equip- which is tripped via the open-circuit
ing to the preferred series according
ment, such as transformers, sole- shunt release (AA) can also be
to IEC 60898 and DIN 43880, MCBs
noid valves or capacitors. remotely tripped via instabus EIB.
are allocated the following rated
Operating method currents: Depending on the device type,
C Devices with 55 mm depth miniature circuit-breakers by
Miniature circuit-breakers are protec-
0.3 A to 63 A Siemens have the following features:
tive switches for manual operation,
C Devices with 70 mm depth C Excellent current limiting and se-
including overcurrent remote tripping
0.3 A to 125 A lectivity characteristics
(via thermal overcurrent instanta-
Depending on the device type, an C Identical terminals on both sides
neous release). Multi-pole devices
auxiliary switch (AS), fault-signal con- for optional infeed from the top or
are coupled mechanically at the out-
tact (FC), open-circuit shunt bottom
side via handles and simultaneously
release (ST), undervoltage release C Installation and dismantling with-
inside via their releases.
(UR) or residual-current-operated out the use of tools
circuit-breaker (RCCB module) can C Rapid and easy removal from the
Standards
be retrofitted. system
The international basic standard is C Terminals safe-to-touch by fingers
Auxiliary switches (AS) signal the
IEC 60898. The European standard or the back of the hand according
switching state of the MCB and indi-
EN 60 898 and the German national to VDE 0106-100 (VBG4)
cate whether it has been switched
standard DIN VDE 0641-11 are based C Combined terminals for simultane-
off manually or automatically. Fault-
upon it. Device sizes are described in ous connection of busbars and
signal contacts (FC) indicate tripping
DIN 43880. For the protection against feeder cables
of the MCB due to overload or short
personal injury, the disconnecting re- C Main switch characteristics accord-
circuit.
quirements according to the relevant ing to EN 60 204 / IEC 60204/
standards, e.g. HD 384.4.41 S2 / Open-circuit shunt releases (ST) are VDE 0113
IEC 60364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410 suitable for remote switching of C Separate switch position indicator
have to be met. MCBs. Undervoltage releases (UR)
protect devices connected in the cir- AC current type MCBs are suitable
cuit against impacts of insufficiently for all AC and three-phase networks
low supply voltage. up to a voltage of 240/415 V and all
DC networks up to 60 V (1-pole) and
By fitting an RCCB module to an
120 V (2-pole).
MCB, you will receive an RCBO
assembly, which – as a complete The MCB voltage rating is
system – can be used for line protec- 230/400 V AC.
tion as well as for protection against
AC/DC current type MCBs may also
electrically ignited fires and personal
be used for 220 V DC (1-pole) and
injury in the event of direct or indi-
440 V DC (2-pole).
rect contact voltages.

Rated cross Rated current In of the MCB when Iz (line)

section qn protecting Permissible continuous load current with
2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load
mm2 A A A A
1.5 16 16 19.5 17.5
2.5 25 20 26 24
4 32 32 35 32
6 40 40 46 41
10 63 50 63 57
16 80 63 85 76
25 100 80 112 96
35 125 100 138 119
Table 3/14 Allocation of miniature circuit-breakers to conductor cross sections

Example: flat-webbed cable, stranded cables on or in the wall, installation type C1) at an ambient temperature of 30°C
1) Installation type C acc. to DIN VDE 0298-4 and DIN VDE 0100-430, Supplement 1. Cables are fixed in such a way
that the spacing between them and the wall is smaller than 0.3 times the outer cable diameter.
In order to avoid damaging of the

conductor insulation in case of faults,
300 MCBs with
temperatures must not rise above tripping characteristics B, C, D acc. to
certain values. For PVC insulation, timet I1 I2 EN 60 898 / IEC 60 898 / DIN VDE 0641-11
1)
these values are 70 °C permanently A1) B C D Specifications in
60
I1 (t > 1h) 1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.13 x In compliance with
or 160 °C for a maximum of 5 s
minutes
I2 (t < 1h) 1.45 x In 1.45 x In 1.45 x In 1.45 x In DIN VDE 0100-410

(short circuit).
I4 (t > 0.1s) 2 x In 3 x In 5 x In 10 x In
10
For line-overcurrent protection, the I5 (t < 0.1s) 3 x In 5 x In 10 x In 20 x In
MCBs usually have two independent
releases. In the event of overload, a I3
bimetal contact opens inverse-time 1
delayed corresponding to the current
value. If a certain threshold is ex-
ceeded in the event of a short cir- 10
cuit, however, an electro-magnetic 5 Breaking condition
overcurrent release instantaneously acc. to
trips without delay. The tripping HD 384.4.41S2/
seconds
I3
range (time-current threshold zone) 1 IEC 60 364-4-41
of the MCB according to EN 60898 / DIN VDE 0100-410
0.4
IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11 is A B C D
defined via parameters I1 to I5 (Fig. I5 I5 I5 I5
0.1
3/18). The line parameters Ib and Iz I4 I4 I4 I4
(see Fig. 3/17) are related to it.
0.01
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
x rated current In
Fig. 3/18 MCB time-current limit ranges
3/29 3
When the IEC 60898 was published, Siemens MCBs are available with used at temperatures ranging from
new characteristics B, C and D were the tripping characteristics B, C and –25 °C to +55 °C. The relative hu-
defined internationally. They were D, bearing, among other things, the midity may be 95%.
also adopted in EN 60898 and VDE mark based upon the CCA pro-
DIN VDE 0641-11. cedure (CENELEC-Certification- Resistance to climate
Agreement).
The new tripping requirements of Miniature circuit-breakers by Siemens
MCBs facilitate their assignment to Figure 3/19 represents all tripping are resistant to climate according to
conductor cross sections. In the rele- characteristics. Due to the position IEC 68-2-30. They were successfully
vant German standards, e.g. of the tripping bands, the following tested in six climatic cycles.
DIN/VDE 0100-430, the following features vary in intensity with a ris-
conditions are listed: ing degree from curve A to D Degree of protection
C Current pulse withstand strength,
1st condition As MCBs are mainly installed in dis-
rising
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz (Rated current rule), tribution boards, their degree of pro-
C Permissible line and cable length
tection must meet the requirements
2nd condition for the protection of persons, de-
of the respective type of room.
I2 ≤ 1,45 · Iz (Tripping current rule). creasing
MCBs without an encapsulation can
The 2nd condition automatically be- Temperature impact reach IP 30 according to EN 60529/
ing fulfilled with the new characteris- IEC 60529 / DIN VDE 0470-1 pro-
The tripping characteristics are stan-
tic curves due the fact that these vided that they have sufficient termi-
dard defined at an ambient tempera-
curves have been defined (Iz = In), nal covers.
ture of +30 °C. At higher tempera-
the MCB merely needs to be se-
tures, the thermal tripping curve in All MCBs are equipped with a snap-
lected according to the simplified cri-
Fig. 3/18 shifts to the left, and to the on fixing for rapid fitting on 35-mm
terion In ≤ Iz .
right at lower temperatures. This wide standard mounting rails accord-
Resulting from this, a new allocation means that tripping becomes effec- ing to DIN EN 50022. Some versions
of rated currents for MCBs and con- tive even with lower currents present may additionally be screwed on
ductor cross sections can be given (higher temperatures) or only with mounting plates.
(see Table 3/14), related to an ambi- higher currents (lower temperatures).
ent temperature of 30 °C, as it is Installation
This has to be taken into account in
considered appropriate according to
particular for an installation in hot Moreover, some type series are
DIN VDE 0100-430, Supplement 1,
rooms, in encapsulated distribution available with a rapid wiring system
and in dependence of the type of
boards where, owing to the current- for manual handling without the use
installation and accumulation of
induced heat losses of the built-in of tools, which even enables the re-
equipment.
devices, higher temperatures may moval of individual MCBs from the
prevail and for distribution boards busbar system.
installed outdoors. MCBs can be
Standard Rated short-circuit breaking capacity classes

EN 60 898 / IEC 60 898 / 1,500 A
DIN VDE 0641-11 3,000 A
4,500 A
6,000 A
10,000 A
15,000 A
20,000 A
25,000 A
Table 3/15 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity classes for miniature circuit-breakers

[A2 s]
I2 t
Transformer Permissible value I 2 t of 1.5 mm2 cable
Fuse 50 A 1 2 3
Fuse
B 16
MCB
104
[A] Ik
i
i
Ieff
3 2 1
B 16 Sinusoidal semiwave
103
0 5 10 10-1 3 6 100 3 6 101
t [ms] Ik [kA]
Fig. 3/19 Selectivity of MCBs with current limiting classes1[ 2 and3 towards back-up fuses.
Curve B16 applies to 16 A Siemens breakers, tripping characteristic B.
Rated short-circuit breaking Current limiting classes Devices must be labeled

capacity 6000
As a selectivity indicator with regard 3
Besides a reliable adherence to char- to upstream fuses, miniature circuit-
acteristic curves, an important per- breakers with characteristic B and C
Selectivity
formance feature of MCBs is their up to 40 A are divided into three
rated short-circuit breaking capacity. current limiting classes according to Selectivity means that only that pro-
It is divided into short-circuit break- their current limiting capability. tective device will trip in the event of
ing capacity classes and indicates up a fault which is closest to the fault
For permissible let-through I 2t val-
to which level short-circuit currents location in the course of the current
ues, please refer to the standards
can be broken according to EN 60898 / path. This enables maintaining en-
EN 60898/ IEC 60898 / DIN VDE
IEC 60898/ DIN VDE 0641-11 (Table ergy flow in circuits which are con-
0641-11. For reasons of selectivity,
3/18). Depending on their design, nected in parallel. In the diagram in
only Class 3 MCBs with a rated
MCBs by Siemens have short-circuit Fig. 3/19, the current sequence in a
switching capacity of at least 6,000 A
breaking capacity ratings up to disconnection process is illustrated
may be used in distribution boards
25,000 A and VDE approval (VDE is with regard to current limiting
connected downstream of the meter
the Association of German Electrical classes. MCBs of type B16 by
for residential and commercial build-
Engineers). Siemens reduce the energy flow to
ings in compliance with the Techni-
much lower values than defined for
cal Supply Conditions of German
current limiting class 3.
power supply companies.
3/31 3
Figure 3/19 shows the selectivity Although circuit-breakers have a high

limits of MCBs with different current inherent rated breaking capacity,
limiting classes as the intersection of they do not switch sufficiently cur-
the MCB tripping curve with the rent-limiting in the range of the MCB
melting curve of the fuse. The highly switching capacity limit (6 kA/10 kA)
effective current limitation of the so that they cannot provide much
MCB also affects the high current support. Therefore, miniature circuit-
discrimination towards the upstream breakers with a rated current of 6 A
fuse. to 32 A are only protected by an up-
stream circuit-breaker (type 3VF1 to
Characteristic B16 relates to 16 A
3VF6 and SENTRON WL1/WL5) up
Siemens breakers, tripping charac-
to the defined rated switching capac-
teristic B.
ity of the MCB (back-up protection).
Back-up protection
A more detailed description can be
If the short-circuit current at the found in Chapter 6.1.2.
point where the MCB is installed
Further product information on
exceeds its rated switching capacity,
MCBs by Siemens is contained in
another short-circuit protecting de-
the Siemens Catalog ”BETA Built-in
vice has to be connected upstream.
installation devices”, Order No.
Without affecting the operability of
E86060-K8220-A101-A6-7600.
the breaker in such cases, the
switching capacity of such an assem-
bly will be increased up to 50 kA.
In some countries, circuit-breakers
rather than LV HRC fuses are con-
nected upstream instead, which –
depending on the type – reduces the
combined switching capacity consid-
erably.

3.3 Selectivity in Low- C Dynamic/energy selectivity

Selectivity based on the evaluation
All characteristic curves must – if not
already specified by the manufacturer
Voltage Systems of the let-through energy of the – be assigned a scatter band to deter-
downstream devices and the trip- mine selectivity reliably.
Selectivity and selectivity types ping energy of the upstream
In the case of switchgear, EN 60947–2 /
protective device.
With two series-connected protective IEC 60 947–2 / DIN VDE 0660–101
devices, full selectivity in the event of specify a scatter of ± 20% for the in-
Selectivity determination
a fault is achieved if only the protec- stantaneous overcurrent release. The
According to IEC 60947-2, Appendix
tive device directly upstream of the operating times, which are some-
A, the determination or verification of
fault location disconnects from supply. times considerably shorter at normal
the desired type of selectivity is di-
operating temperatures, must be
Selectivity types / selectivity limit vided in two time ranges.
taken into account for electro-
A distinction is made between two Time range > 100 ms:
mechanical overload releases.
types of selectivity: The time range above 100 ms can be
C Partial selectivity acc. to analyzed by a comparison of charac- Determination of the selectivity
IEC 60947-2, 2.17.2: teristic curves in the L- or S-range, limit
Overcurrent discrimination of two taking the tolerances, required pro- As a rule, all selectivity limits be-
series-connected overcurrent pro tective settings, curve representation tween two protective devices can be
tection devices, where the load- in identical scales etc. into account. determined by carrying out measure-
side protective device takes over Time range < 100 ms: ments or tests. These measurements
the full protection task up to a defi According to Fig. A2 in this standard, are virtually indispensable, particu-
ned overcurrent level without the selectivity in this time range must be larly when assessing selectivity in the
other protective device being verified by testing. Due to the fact event of a short circuit, owing to the
active. that the time and cost expense in- extremely rapid switching operations
C Full selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2, volved being very high, different de- when current-limiting protection
2.17.2: vices being used in the power distri- equipment is used.
Overcurrent discrimination of two bution system, selectivity limits can
The measurements can, however, be
series-connected overcurrent pro often be obtained from renowned
very costly and complicated, therefore
tection devices, where the load- equipment manufacturers only. In
many manufacturers publish selectiv-
side protective device takes over practice, let-through currents are
ity tables for their switchgear (see
the full protection task without the therefore often compared to the op-
Table 3/16). When using SIMARIS
other protective device being erating or pickup currents or, the let-
design, all criteria are automatically
active. through currents of the protective de-
considered.
Selectivity types vices are compared to each other.
C Current selectivity: The prerequisite being that the rele-
Selective disconnection by grading vant data is available from the equip-
the instantaneous short-circuit re- ment manufacturer and that it is ana-
leases. Circuit-breakers with LI lyzed thoroughly.
characteristics.
Comparing characteristic curves
C Time selectivity:
Three diagram types can be used for
Grading of the configurable tripping
comparing characteristics:
times (tsd in the S-part) of the
C Time-current diagram
short-circuit releases. This applies
C Let-through current diagram
to standard as well as to optional
C Let-through energy diagram
characteristic curves. Circuit-brea-
kers with LSI characteristics. It is Since these characteristic curves are
often required in main distribution compared over several orders of
boards and at transfer points using magnitude, they are usually plotted
devices of different manufacturers. on log-log paper.
3/33 3
Upstream circuit-breakers Type

System protection 3VL3 3VL4
TM TM
Characteristics In TM 160-200 200-250 160-200 200-250 250-315
li A 1,000-2,000 1,200-2,500 1,000-2,000 1,250-2,500 1,575-3,150
Icn 40-100 40-100 45-100 45-100 45-100
Downstream circuit-breakers [A] [A] kA Selectivity limits (kA)
Type 5SY4 6 B 10 T T T T T
10 B 10 T T T T T
Characteristics LI 13 B 10 T T T T T
16 B 10 T T T T T
20 B 10 9.2 T 9.1 8.8 T
25 B 10 8.6 T 8.6 8.0 T
32 B 10 7.5 T 7.6 6.4 T
40 B 10 7.7 T 7.6 6.4 T
50 B 10 6.7 T 6.6 6.4 T
63 B 10 6.2 9.0 6.2 6.1 8.0
6 C 10 T T T T T
10 C 10 T T T T T
Characteristics LI 13 C 10 T T T T T
16 C 10 T T T T T
20 C 10 8.6 T 8.5 7.1 T
25 C 10 8.5 T 8.5 8.1 T
32 C 10 8.5 T 8.5 7.8 T
40 C 10 7.5 T 7.6 6.9 T
50 C 10 6.6 9.7 6.5 6.5 T
63 C 10 6.2 8.7 6.1 6.1 8.0
Type 5SY7 6 B 15 T T T T T
10 B 15 T T T T T
Characteristics LI 13 B 15 T T T 12.9 T
16 B 15 T T T 11.5 T
20 B 15 9.2 T 9.1 8.8 T
25 B 15 8.6 T 8.6 8.0 T
32 B 15 7.5 14.3 7.6 6.4 12.4
40 B 15 7.7 11.1 7.6 6.4 11.8
50 B 15 6.7 11.1 6.6 6.4 10.7
63 B 15 6.2 9.0 6.2 6.1 8.0
6 C 15 T T T T T
10 C 15 T T T 14.3 T
Characteristics LI 13 C 15 T T T 11.1 T
16 C 15 T T T 11.1 T
20 C 15 8.5 T 8.5 7.1 T
25 C 15 8.5 14.7 8.5 8.1 13.7
32 C 15 8.5 14.7 8.5 7.8 13.4
40 C 15 7.5 13.0 7.6 6.9 12.0
50 C 15 6.6 9.7 6.5 6.5 10.2
63 C 15 6.2 8.7 6.1 6.1 8.0
Table 3/16 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn acc. to IEC 60898
Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2

3VL5 3VL5 3VL6 3VL7 3VL8

TM ETU 10/20 ETU 10/20 ETU 10/20 ETU 10/20
315-400 250-315 315-400 400-500 500-630 252-630 320-800 400-1,000 500-1,250 640-1,600
2,000-4,000 1,575-3,150 2,000-4,000 2,500-5,000 3,150-6,500 788-6,300 1,000-6,400 1,250-11,000 1,563-12,500 2,000-14,400
45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 45-100 50-100 50-100 50-100 50-100
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T = Full selectivity
T T T T T T T T T T up to
T T T T T 13.8 14.2 T T T Icn = rated short-
14.6 T T T T 13.0 13.3 T T T circuit breaking
capacity of the
T T T T T T T T T T
lower-rated protec-
T T T T T T T T T T
tive device
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T M = Electroma-
T T T T T T T T T T gnetic release
T T T T T T T T T T
TM = Thermoma-
T T T T T T T T T T
gnetic release
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T 14.2 14.6 T T T ETU = Electronic
13.4 T T T T 12.0 12.3 T T T tripping unit
3/35 3
Downstream circuit-breakers Upstream circuit-breakers

Type System protection
Series 3WL1
Characteristics ETU25/27
IR 1,000-2,500 1,280-3,200 1,600-4,000 2,000-5,000 2,520-6,300
li 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000
Icn 55-100 80-100 100 100 100

MCCB
[A] [A] [kA]
3VL1 Line Pro LI 16 300 40-70 T T T T T

TM 20 300 40-70 T T T T T
25 300 40-70 T T T T T
32 300 40-70 T T T T T
40 600 40-70 T T T T T
50 600 40-70 T T T T T
63 600 40-70 T T T T T
80 1,000 40-70 T T T T T
100 1,000 40-70 T T T T T
125 1,000 40-70 T T T T T
160 1,500 40-70 T T T T T
3VL2 Line Pro LI 40-50 300-600 40-100 T T T T T

TM 50-63 300-600 40-100 T T T T T
63-80 400-800 40-100 T T T T T
80-100 500-1,000 40-100 T T T T T
100-125 625-1,250 40-100 T T T T T
125-160 800-1,600 40-100 T T T T T
ETU 25-63 80-693 40-100 T T T T T
40-100 125-1,100 40-100 T T T T T
64-100 200-1,760 40-100 T T T T T
3VL2 Line Pro LI 160-200 1,000-2,000 40-100 T T T T T

TM 200-250 1,250-2,500 40-100 T T T T T
ETU 80-200 250-2,200 40-100 T T T T T
100-250 312-2,750 40-100 T T T T T
3VL4 Line Protect 160-200 1,000-2,000 45-100 T T T T T

TM 200-250 1,250-2,500 45-100 T T T T T
250-315 1,575-3,150 45-100 T T T T T
315-400 2,000-4,000 45-100 T T T T T
ETU 126-315 400-3,465 45-100 T T T T T
160-400 500-4,400 45-100 T T T T T
3VL5 Line Protect LI 250-315 1,575-3,150 45-100 T T T T T

TM 315-400 2,000-4,000 45-100 T T T T T
400-500 2,500-5,000 45-100 T T T T T
500-630 3,250-6,500 45-100 T T T T T
ETU 252-630 788-6,300 45-100 T T T T T
3VL6 Line Pro LI 320-800 1,000-6,400 50-100 T T T T T
3VL7 Line Pro LI 400-1000 1,250-11,000 50-100 41.4 41.4 41.4 41.4 41.4
ETU 500-1250 1,562-12,500 50-100 41.4 41.4 41.4 41.4 41.4
3VL8 Line Pro LI 640-1,600 2,000-14,400 50-100 41.4 41.4 41.4 41.4 41.4
Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2 (continued)

3LW1-3B
ETU45B
252-630 320-800 400-1,000 500-1,250 640-1,600 800-2,000 1,000-2,500 1,280-3,200 1,600-4,000 2,000-5,000
787.5-7560 1,000-9,600 1,250-12,000 1,562.5-15,000 2,000-19,200 2,500-24,000 3,125-30,000 4,000-38,400 50,000 50,000
50-65 100 100 100 100 55-100 55-100 80-100 100 100
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T = Full selectivity
T T T T T T T T T T up to
Icn = rated short-
T T T T T T T T T T
circuit breaking
T T T T T T T T T
capacity of the
T T T T T T T T T
lower-rated protec-
T T T T T T T T
tive device
T T T T T T T T T
M = Electroma-
T T T T T T T T T gnetic release
TM = Thermoma-
T T T T T T T
gnetic release
T T T T T T
ETU = Electronic
T T T T T tripping unit
3/37 3
Downstream circuit-breakers Upstream circuit-breakers

Type System protection
Series 3VL1
Characteristics TM
IR 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
li [A] 300 300 300 300 600 600 600
Icn 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70

Circuit-breaker for
motor protection [A] [A] [kA] Selectivity limits [kA]
3RV1.1 LI 0.70-1.00 12 100 T T T T T T T

0.90-1.25 15 100 T T T T T T T
1.10-1.60 19 100 T T T T T T T
1.40-2.00 24 100 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 T T T
1.80-2.50 30 100 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 T T T
2.20-3.20 38 100 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.80-4.00 48 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.2 1.2 1.2
3.50-5.00 60 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.2 1.2 1.2
4.50-6.30 76 100 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
5.50-8.00 96 50 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
7-10 120 50 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 0.8
9-12 144 50 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 0.8
3RV1.2 LI 0.70-1.00 12 100 T T T T T T T

0.90-1.25 15 100 T T T T T T T
1.10-1.60 19 100 T T T T T T T
1.40-2.00 24 100 T T T T T T T
1.80-2.50 30 100 T T T T T T T
2.20-3.20 38 100 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 T T T
2.80-4.00 48 100 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 T T T
3.50-5.00 60 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 20.0 20.0 20.0
4.50-6.30 76 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 6.0 6.0 6.0
5.50-8.00 96 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 3.0 3.0 3.0
7-10 120 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 2.0 2.0 2.0
9-12.5 150 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.5 1.5 1.5
11-16 192 50 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.2 1.2
14-20 240 50 1.0 1.0 1.0
17-22 264 50 0.8 0.8 0.8
20-25 300 50 0.8 0.8 0.8
3RV1.3 LI 11-16 192 50 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.2 1.2

14-20 240 50 0.4 0.4 1.0 1.0 1.0
18-25 300 50 0.4 0.8 0.8 0.8
22-32 384 50 0.6 0.6 0.6
28-40 480 50
36-45 540 50
40-50 600 50
3RV1.4 LI 11-16 192 100 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.2 1.2 1.2
14-20 240 100 0.4 0.4 1.0 1.0 1.0
18-25 300 100 0.4 0.8 0.8 0.8
22-32 384 100 0.8 0.8 0.8
28-40 480 50-100
36-50 600 50-100
45-63 756 50-100
57-75 900 50-100
70-90 1080 50-100
80-100 1140 50-100
Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2 (continued)

Disconnector System protection

3VL1 3VL2
M TM
80 100 125 160 100 160 40-50 50-63 63-80 80-100 100-125 125-160
1,000 1,000 1,000 1,500 1,800 1,800 300-600 300-600 400-800 500-1,000 625-1,250 800-1,600
40-70 40-70 40-70 40-70 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100 40-100
T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T 4.0 4.0 T T T T
T T T T T T 1.5 1.5 4.0 30.0 T T
8.0 8.0 8.0 T T T 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 5.0 T
3.0 3.0 3.0 T T T 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.5 5.0
2.5 2.5 2.5 8.0 30 30.0 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.0 4.0
1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 6 6.0 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0
1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 4 4.0 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0
1.2 1.2 1.2 2.5 4 4.0 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.5
T T T T T T 20.0 20.0 T T T T
T T T T T T 8.0 8.0 T T T T
T T T T T T 2.5 2.5 20.0 20.0 T T
20.0 20.0 20.0 T T T 1.5 1.5 6.0 6.0 40.0 40-50
15.0 15.0 15.0 T T T 1.2 1.2 4.0 4.0 25.0 30.0
5.0 5.0 5.0 10.0 30.0 30.0 1.2 1.2 2.0 2.5 5.0 5.0
4.0 4.0 4.0 8.0 12.0 12.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0
3.0 3.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 8.0 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.5 4.0
2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.2 2.0 2.5
1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 5.0 5.0 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.0
1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 4.0 4.0 0.8 1.0 1.5 1.5
3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.5 3.0 4.0
2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.2 2.0 2.5 T = Full selectivity
1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 4.0 4.0 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.0 up to
1.2 1.2 1.2 2.5 3.0 3.0 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 Icn = rated short-
1.2 1.2 1.2 2.0 3.0 3.0 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
circuit breaking
1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
capacity of the
2.0 2.5 2.5 0.6
lower-rated protec-
tive device
2.5 2.5 2.5 5.0 8.0 8.0 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.5 3.0
2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 M = Electroma-
1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 4.0 4.0 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.0 gnetic release
1.2 1.2 1.2 2.0 3.0 3.0 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2
TM = Thermoma-
0.6 0.6 0.6 1.5 2.0 2.0 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
gnetic release
0.6 0.6 0.6 1.5 2.0 2.0 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
1.5 2.0 2.0 ETU = Electronic
1.5 2.0 2.0 tripping unit
1.5 2.0
1.5 2.0
3/39 3
[s]
ts
200 A 100 A 200 A

(160 A) size 00 size 1
Ik =1300 A
1.4
3.3.1 Selectivity in
50 A 50 A 100 A 1.37 s
Radial Systems
0.03
Ik =1300 A
Selectivity between series-con-
nected fuses K1
101 102 103 104
The incoming feeder lines and the 1.3 I [A]
outgoing feeders of the busbar of a
a) Selective isolation b) Prearcing times where Ik =1300 A
distribution board carry different op- of short circuit K1
erating currents and, therefore, also
have different cross-sections. Conse-
Fig. 3/20 Selectivity between series-connected LV HRC fuses with
quently, they are usually protected by identical utilization categories (example)
fuses with different rated currents
which ensure selectivity on account
Selectivity between series- the I-release must generally be set to
of the different operating behavior.
connected circuit-breakers 4,000 A so that even very small short
Selectivity between series-con- circuits are cleared at the input termi-
Selectivity by grading the operat-
nected fuses with identical utiliza- nals of the downstream circuit-
ing currents of instantaneous over-
tion categories breaker Q1 within the specified time.
current releases
When fuses of the same utilization
(current grading) Only partial selectivity can be estab-
category (e.g. gL or gG) are used, se-
Selectivity can be achieved by grad- lished by comparing characteristic
lectivity is ensured across the entire
ing the operating currents of instanta- curves for current grading since the
overcurrent range up to the rated
neous overcurrent releases (I-re- increased appearance of broken lines
breaking capacity (absolute selectiv-
leases) (Fig. 3/21). Prerequisites for in the curve in the range < 100 ms,
ity) if the rated currents differ by a
this are: which result from the complicated dy-
factor of 1.6 or higher (Fig. 3/20).
namic switching and tripping opera-
The Joulean heat values (I 2t-values) Current grading with different
tions, does not permit conclusions to
should be compared in case of high short-circuit currents
be drawn with regard to selectivity.
short-circuit currents. In the example The short-circuit currents in the event
shown, a 160 A LV HRC fuse would of a short circuit at the respective lo-
Possible solution: dynamic
also have absolute selectivity with cations of the circuit-breakers are
selectivity
respect to a 100 A LV HRC fuse. sufficiently different.
Selectivity through circuit-breaker
Current grading with differently
coordination (dynamic selectivity)
configured I-releases
With high-speed operations, e.g. in
The rated currents and, therefore, the
the event of a short circuit, and the in-
I-release values of the upstream and
teraction of series-connected protec-
downstream circuit-breakers differ
tion devices, the dynamic processes
accordingly.
in the circuit and in the electro-
5-second breaking and line- mechanical releases have a consider-
protection conditions able effect on selectivity behavior,
In complying with the 5-second particularly if current limiters are
breaking condition specified in used.
HD 384.4.41 / IEC 60364-4-41 /
DIN VDE 0100-410 or the 5-second
line-protection condition specified in
DIN VDE 0100-430 (if line protection
cannot be provided in any other way),

[s]
Opening time t
Sr = 400 kVA 104
at 400 V, 102
50 Hz I II
min.
U kr = 4% 10 3
I r = 577 A
I k ≈ 15 KA 101
Q1 Q2
Ir = 600 A 102
(L-release) 100
Q2 Ie = 4000 A L L
I k = 10 kA (I-release)
101
I (6000 A)1)
II
100
Ir = 60 A
(L-release)
Q1 Ii = 720 A
4.8 kA I (720 A) I (4000 A)
(I-release)
10-1
I
2.1 kA 10-2
M
3~ 4
5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5
Current I [A]
a) Single-line diagram b) Tripping curves
Q1 Circuit-breaker for motor protection L Inverse-time delay overload release
(current-limiting)
I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Q2 Circuit-breaker (zero-current interrupter)
1)
Maximum setting range
Fig. 3/21 Current selectivity for two series-connected circuit-breakers at different short-circuit current levels (example)
Selectivity is also achieved if the Table 3/16 shows an example of a se- tivity provides a suitable possibility for
downstream current-limiting protec- lectivity table. The selectivity limit indi- establishing full selectivity without
tion device trips so quickly that, al- cated in the table may be well above having to use switchgear with short-
though the let-through current does the operating value of the instanta- time-delay overcurrent releases.
momentarily exceed the operating neous overcurrent release in the up-
value of the upstream protection de- stream circuit-breaker (see Fig. 3/22). Selectivity by means of short-
vice, the ”mechanically slow” re- time-delay overcurrent releases
Irrespective of this, it is important to
lease does not have time to trigger. (time grading)
check the selectivity in the event of
The let-through current depends on
an overload by comparing the charac- Time grading by short-time-delay
the peak short-circuit current and cur-
teristic curves and by means of trip- releases
rent limiting characteristics.
ping times in accordance with the If current grading is not possible on
Selectivity limits of two series-con- relevant regulations. account of the requirements listed on
nected circuit-breakers page 36 and cannot be achieved by
Generally speaking, only partial selec-
A maximum short-circuit value – the selecting the switchgear in accordance
tivity is possible in the case of dy-
selectivity limit – up to which the with the selectivity tables (dynamic se-
namic selectivity with short circuits.
downstream circuit-breaker can open lectivity), selectivity can be provided by
This may be sufficient (full selectivity)
more quickly and alone, i.e. selec- time grading short-time delay overcur-
if the prospective maximum short-cir-
tively, can be determined for each rent releases. This requires grading of
cuit current at the downstream pro-
switchgear assembly. both the tripping delays and the
tective device is lower than the es-
appropriate operating currents.
tablished selectivity limit.
With partial selectivity, which usually
arises with current grading owing to
the clearance condition (see Fig.
3/20), consideration of dynamic selec-
3/41 3
Power Time grading can be implemented to Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)

supply safeguard selectivity if the prospec- A microprocessor-controlled short-
Circuit- system Delay time t d tive short-circuit currents are almost time grading control, also called
breaker of S-release
identical. This requires grading of “zone-selective interlocking”, has
both the tripping delays and the been developed for circuit-breakers to
operating currents of the overcurrent prevent excessively long tripping
releases. times when several circuit-breakers
3WL1 220 ms are connected in series. This control
In addition to the diagram with the
function allows the tripping delay to
four series-connected circuit-break-
be reduced to max. 50 ms for the cir-
ers, Fig. 3/22 also contains the associ-
3WL1 150 ms
cuit-breakers located upstream of the
ated grading diagram. The necessary
3VL short circuit.
grading time, which allows for all
The method of operation regarding
scatter bands, depends on the operat-
zone-selective interlocking is illus-
3VL 80 ms ing principle of the release and the
trated in Fig. 3/24. A short circuit at
type of circuit-breaker.
K1 is detected by Q1, Q3, and Q5. If
Electronic S-releases ZSI is active, Q3 is temporarily dis-
3VL Instantaneous
3RV With electronic short-time-delay abled by Q1 and Q5 by Q3 by means
overcurrent releases (S-releases), a of appropriate communication lines.
M grading time of approximately 70 ms Since Q1 does not receive any dis-
to 100 ms from circuit-breaker to cir- abling signal, it trips after only 10 ms.
Fig. 3/22 Required delay time settings for cuit-breaker is sufficient to allow for A short circuit at K2 is only detected
electromagnetic short-time-delay all scatter bands. by Q5; since it does not receive any
S-releases for selective short-cir-
cuit protection disabling signal, it trips after only 50
Operating current
ms. Without "ZSI", tripping would only
The operating current of the short-
occur after 150 ms.
time-delay overcurrent release should
Time grading with virtually be set to at least 1.45 times (twice
identical short-circuit currents Selectivity between circuit-
per 20% scatter, unless other values
The upstream circuit-breaker is breaker and fuse
are specified by the manufacturer)
equipped with short-time-delay over- the value of the downstream circuit- When considering selectivity in con-
current releases (S) so that, if a fault breaker. junction with fuses, a permissible
occurs, only the downstream circuit- scatter band of ± 10% in the direction
breaker disconnects the affected part Additional I-releases
of current flow must be allowed for in
of the installation from the system. In order to reduce the short-circuit
the time-current characteristics.
stress in the event of a ”dead” short
circuit at the upstream circuit-break-
ers, they can be fitted with instanta-
neous electromagnetic overcurrent
releases in addition to the short-time
delay releases (Fig. 3/23). The value
selected for the operating current of
the instantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent releases must be high
enough to ensure that the releases
only operate in case of direct ”dead”
short circuits and, under normal oper-
ating conditions, do not interfere with
selective grading.

[s]
Sr = 1000 kVA Opening time t
at 400 V, 104
50 Hz
U kr = 6%
I n = 1445 A
I k ≈ 24.1 kA 103
Q1 Q2 Q3
102
t d3 = 150 ms
Q3 n (20 kA)
L L L
Main 101
distribution
board
Q2 t d2 = 80 ms
S S
100
I k = 17 kA t d3 =
Sub- t d2 = 150 ms
distribution 80 ms
board -1
10
Q1 n
I k = 10 kA
10-2
M 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105
~ Current I [A]
Fig. 3/23 Selectivity between three series-connected circuit-breakers with limitation of short-circuit stress by means
of an additional I-release in circuit-breaker Q3
[s]
Opening time t
104
t d = 150 ms
A t ZSi = 50 ms
Q5 E
Q1/Q2 Q3/Q4 Q5
103
K2
102
A t d = 80 ms A
Q3 E t ZSi = 50 ms Q4 E
t d = 10 ms 101
t ZSi = t d
td = 150 ms
100
td = 80 ms
A A tZSi
Q1 E Q2 E
10-1
t d =10 ms Icn
t ZSi = t d td =
10 ms
K1 10-2
Communication lines 102 103 104 105

Current I [A]
Fig. 3/24 Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) of series- or parallel-connected circuit-breakers (block diagram)
3/43 3
Absolute selectivity for circuit-break-

F1 Q1 F1 Fuse
ers without short-time-delay overcur-
Q1 Circuit-breaker
rent releases is achieved if the let-
overload delay through current of the fuse ID does
L Q1 t L
I I Instantaneous electromagnetic not reach the operating current of the
overcurrent release
instantaneous overcurrent release
tA Safety margin
(please refer to current limiting dia-
Ii Operating current of n release
tA gram for LV HRC fuses in ”Electrical
I The time-current characteristics Installations Handbook”, Section
F1 (scatter bands) do not touch 4.1.1). This is, however, only to be
expected for a fuse, the rated current
I of which is very low compared with
Ii I
the rated continuous current.
Overload range I
Selectivity ratios between LS-re-
leases and fuses with relatively
Fig. 3/25 Selectivity between circuit-breaker and downstream fuse in overload range
high rated currents
Due to the dynamic processes that
take place in electromagnetic re-
F1 Q1 L Overload release leases, absolute selectivity can also
S Short-time-delay overcurrent release be achieved with fuses, whose ID
tA Safety margin briefly exceeds the operating current.
L t Id Operating current of s release
Q1 Once again, selectivity can only be
S L ts Prearcing time of fuse
verified by means of appropriate
td Delay time of s release
measurements of Ii. Absolute selec-
tivity can be achieved by using circuit-
t A ≥ 100 ms breakers with short-time-delay over-
S
F1 current releases (S-releases) if the
safety margin for the operating cur-
ts td rent td between the upper scatter
Ik band of the fuse characteristic and
Id I the delay time of the S-release td is
selected so that tA ≥ 100 ms (Fig.
Fig. 3/26 Selectivity between circuit-breaker with LS-releases and
downstream fuse; short-circuit current range 3/26).
Selectivity between fuse and

Circuit-breaker with the tripping characteristic of the fully downstream circuit-breaker
downstream fuse preloaded instantaneous overcurrent
release and maintains a safety margin Selectivity ratios in the
Selectivity between LI-releases
of tA ≥ 1 s (Fig. 3/25). overload range
and fuses with very low rated In order to achieve selectivity in the
A reduction in the tripping time of up
currents overload range, a safety margin of
to 25% must be allowed for at normal
In the overload range up to the oper- tA ≥1 s is required between the lower
operating temperatures (unless the
ating current Ii of the delayed overcur- scatter band of the fuse and the char-
manufacturer states otherwise).
rent release, partial selectivity is acteristic curve of the inverse-time-
achieved if the upper scatter band of delay overload release (Fig. 3/27).
the fuse characteristic does not touch

Q1 F1 F1 Fuse
Q1 Circuit-breaker
t overload release
F1 I Instantaneous electromagnetic
L overcurrent release
tA ≥ 1 s tA Safety margin
Ii Operating current of I-release
I The time-current characteristics

L Q1 (scatter bands) do not touch
In case of short circuits, it is impor- I
tant to remember that, after the re-
leases in the circuit-breaker have I
tripped, the fuse continues to be I I
heated during the arcing time. The se- Overload range
lectivity limit lies approximately at the
point where a safety margin of 70 ms
between the lower scatter band of Fig. 3/27 Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; overload range
the fuse and the operating time of the
instantaneous overcurrent release or
the delay time of the short-time-delay
overcurrent release is undershot.
Short-circuit range Q1 Circuit-breaker
F1 (max. let-through value)
A reliable and usually relatively high
F1 Fuse (min. prearcing value)
selectivity limit for the short-circuit I 2t
F1 ISel Selectivity limit
range can be determined in the
I 2t- diagram. In this diagram, the maxi-
mum let-through I 2t value of the cir-
cuit-breaker is compared with the Q1
minimum prearcing I 2t value of the L Q1
I
fuse (Fig. 2/28). Since these values
are maximum and minimum values,
Ik
the scatter bands are not necessary.
ISel I
Selectivity range
Fig. 3/28 Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; short circuit
[s] Separate Parallel

t Q1 Q2 Q2+Q3 Base IkΣ
T1 Equal ratings T2 104
L L L
Ik Part
103
I r = 600 A
Q2 L I sd = 3,000 A Q3 L 102
S S
I k ≤ 10 kA I I k ≤ 10 kA
Ik Part 101
S
I r = 200 A 100
ttd2/3 ≈150 ms
Q1 L I i = 2,400 A Ii
I (≥ 70 ms)
-1
10
tö1
IkΣ 102
M 102 2 4 6 103 2 4 104 2 4
~ [A]
3 6 I
Fig. 3/29 Selectivity with two infeed transformers of the same rating and operating simultaneously.
Example with outgoing feeder in the center of the busbars.
3/45 3
T1 T2 T3
I k Part 1 I k Part 2
I kΣ Ik Ik Q1 Q2
< 30 kA <15 kA <15 kA
L Q3
Q1 S Q2 Q3
I
I kΣ Reduced selectivity with LV HRC

15 kA 15 kA
fuses with a rating of 630 to 1,000 A
near an infeed
This is particularly significant in the
event of fused outgoing circuits with
Fig. 3/30 Selectivity with three infeed trans- Fig. 3/31 Short-circuit distribution via the high current ratings, e.g. 630 to
formers operating simultaneously tie breaker Q3 with two infeeds 1,000 A. It is important to ensure that
Q1 and Q2
a safety margin of ≥ 100 ms between
the tripping characteristic of the S-re-
Selectivity with parallel infeeds Characteristic displacement factor lease and the prearcing-time/current
Since the total short-circuit current is characteristic of the LV HRC fuse is
Improving selectivity with provided not only with parallel opera-
ideally distributed equally among the
parallel infeeds tion, but also with individual trans-
two infeeds (ignoring the load cur-
With parallel infeeds to a busbar, the former operation.
rents in the other outgoing feeders)
total short-circuit current I K∑ that oc-
with the outgoing feeder located at When setting the releases of circuit-
curs in the faulted outgoing feeder
the center of the busbars, the tripping breakers Q1, Q2 and Q3, it must be
comprises the partial short-circuit cur-
curve of circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3 ensured that selectivity is also
rents I k Part in the individual infeeds
can be shifted optimally to the right achieved for operation with one
and represents the base current in
along the current scale by a character- transformer and for all short-circuit
the grading diagram (Fig. 3/29). This
istic displacement factor of 2 up to currents (single- to three-phase).
is the case for all fault types.
the line I k∑, which represents the
base current for this fault condition. For cost-related reasons, S-releases
Two identical infeeds
The result of this is selectivity both for the feeder circuit-breakers must
If a short circuit occurs in the outgo- with regard to time and also current. also be provided for low and medium
ing feeder downstream of the circuit- rated fuse currents as the resulting
breaker Q1, the total short-circuit If the characteristic curve of the indi- current selectivity of I-releases is
current I k∑ of e.g. ≤ 20 kA flows via vidual circuit-breaker is used instead insufficient.
this breaker, while the infeed circuit- of the shifted characteristic, the exact
breakers Q2 and Q3, with the out- short-circuit current (distribution) Three identical infeeds
going feeder connected centrally to which flows through the circuit-
breaker must be taken into considera- With parallel operation of three trans-
the busbars and incoming feeders of
tion. formers, the selectivity ratios will,
equal length, each carry only half this
owing to the additional current selec-
current, i.e. ≤ 10 kA. With asymmetrical configurations and tivity, be more favorable than with
with infeeds and outgoing feeders two units since the characteristic dis-
Parallel operation permits addi- located at the busbars, short-circuit placement factor is > 2 and < 3.
tional current selectivity by means current distribution will differ accord- Once again, LS-releases are required
of a shift in the tripping curve (I i) ing to the impedance ratio along the for the circuit-breakers in the infeeds
of the LS-releases of the infeed cir- incoming feeder lines. in order to achieve unequivocal selec-
cuit-breaker
tivity ratios.
Additional current selectivity with
parallel transformer operation
In the grading diagram, the tripping
curve of circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3
must, therefore, be considered in
relation to the base current of the
circuit-breaker Q1.

a) Fault at the outgoing feeder of the b) Fault at the outgoing feeder of the
centre busbar section outer busbar section
I k Part 1 I k Part 2 I k Part I k Part

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q1 Q2 Q3
Q4 Q5 Q4 Q5
With three infeeds and fault

With three infeeds, the ratios are
3 .I k 2 .I k Part
different according to which of the
I kΣ I kΣ
outgoing feeders shown in Fig. 3/32a
and b is faulted.
In the center busbar section
Fig. 3/32 Distribution of the short-circuit currents used in determining the settings for the over- If a fault occurs at the outgoing
current release in the tie breakers Q4 and Q5 with three infeeds and faults a and b feeder of the center busbar section
in the outgoing feeders of different busbar sections
(Fig. 3/32a), approximately equal par-
tial short-circuit currents flow through
Additional I-release necessary Selecting the circuit-breakers the tie breakers Q4 and Q5.
Furthermore, it is necessary to pro- The type of device used in the outgo- In the outer busbar section
vide additional I-releases to allow a ing feeders and the selectivity ratios If a fault occurs at the outgoing
fault between the transformer and depend primarily on whether feeder of the outer busbar section,
feeder circuit-breaker to be detected circuit-breakers with current-zero (Fig. 3/32b), two partial short-circuit
as shown in Fig. 3/30. For this pur- cut-off, i.e. without current limiting, currents flow through the tie breaker Q4.
pose, the S-releases of circuit-break- or with current limiting are used as
ers Q1 to Q3 must be set to a value tie breakers. Computer-assisted selectivity check
< I k and the I-releases to a value Precise values for the short-circuit cur-
Instantaneous, current-limiting tie rents flowing through the tie breakers
> I k, but < I k∑. The highest and low-
breakers relieve the outgoing circuits are required to permit optimum set-
est fault currents are important here.
of the effects of high unlimited total ting of the overcurrent releases. They
Due to the I-releases, only the
peak short-circuit currents I p and, provide information concerning selec-
faulted transformer infeed will trip
therefore, permit the use of less tive characteristics with a large num-
on the high-voltage and low-voltage
complex and less expensive circuit- ber of different fault currents and are
side. The circuit-breakers in the
breakers. determined and evaluated with the aid
”sound” infeeds remain operative.
of a computer program.
Note on setting the overcurrent
Parallel-connected infeeds via
releases in tie breakers Selectivity and undervoltage
tie breakers
The values set for the overcurrent protection
Protective functions under
releases must be as high as possible If a short circuit occurs, the system
fault conditions
in order to prevent operational inter- voltage collapses to a residual voltage
Tie breakers must perform the follow-
ference caused by the tie breakers at the short-circuit location. The mag-
ing protective functions in fault
opening at relatively low short-circuit nitude of the residual voltage de-
situations:
currents, e.g. in the outgoing feeders pends on the fault impedance. With a
C instantaneous release with faults
of the sub-distribution boards. ”dead” short circuit, the fault imped-
in the vicinity of the busbars and
C relief of outgoing feeders of the With two infeeds ance and, therefore, the voltage at
effects of high total short-circuit With two infeeds and depending on the short-circuit location drops to al-
currents. the fault location (left or right busbar most zero. Generally speaking, how-
section or feeder), only the associ- ever, arcs with arc-drop voltages be-
ated partial short-circuit current tween approximately 30 V and 70 V
(e.g. I k Part 2) flows through the occur with short circuits.
tie breaker Q3 as shown in Fig. 3/31.
3/47 3
a) Short circuit at sub-distribution board b) Short circuit at main distribution board
Q3 Q3
0.5.U e 0.13.Ue
Main distribution
board
Q2 Q2
td ≥
70 ms
80 m K2
3 x 95 mm2 Cu
0.13.Ue
Sub-distribution
board
Q1 Q1
td = 0 Ue Rated operating
K1 current
td Delay time
Fig. 3/33 Voltage ratios for short-circuited LV switchgear with a main and sub-distribution board
Ik1 F1 a F2 Ik2
Ik3
F3 Ik3 = Ik1+Ik2
Ik1+Ik2+Ik4 K1
Ik4
Ik Ik
b
Ik
Fig. 3/34 Short-circuited cable with its two Fig. 3/35 Example of a meshed system with multi-phase infeed
incoming feeder nodes a and b

This voltage, starting at the fault loca- Tripping delay for contactors Permissible current ratio
tion, increases proportionately to the and undervoltage releases Selectivity of the fuses at node ”a” is
intermediate impedance with increas- Undervoltage releases and contactors achieved if fuse F3, through which
ing proximity to the power source. with tripping delay are required to en- the total current I k3 flows, melts and
sure that the selective overcurrent pro- fuse F1 or F2, through which the par-
Fig. 3/33 illustrates the voltage ratios
tection is not interrupted prematurely. tial short-circuit current I k1 or I k2
in LV switchgear with a ”dead” short
This is not necessary if current-limiting flows, remain operative. In the case
circuit.
circuit-breakers with a maximum total of Siemens LV HRC fuses, the per-
If a short circuit occurs at K1 (Fig. 3/33a), clearing time of 10 ms are used. missible current ratio I k1 /(I k1 + I k2)
the rated operating voltage Ue drops for high short-circuit currents is 0.8.
to 0.13 Ue at the busbar of the sub- 3.3.2 Selectivity in
distribution board and to 0.5 · Ue at Meshed Systems Power transformers in meshed
the busbar of the main distribution systems
Two selectivity functions must be
board. The next upstream circuit-
performed in meshed systems: Feeder circuit-breaker with
breaker Q1 clears the fault. Depend-
network master relay
ing on the size and type of the circuit- 1. Only the short-circuited cable may
In multi-phase meshed systems
breaker, the total breaking time is be disconnected from the system.
(Fig. 3/35), i.e. infeed via several MV
30 ms for zero-current interrupters 2. If a short-circuit occurs at the ter-
lines and transformers, power feed-
and a maximum of 10 ms for current- minals of an infeed transformer,
back from the LV system to the fault
limiting circuit-breakers. only the faulted terminal may be
location shall be prevented if a fault
disconnected from the system.
If a short-circuit occurs at K2 (Fig. 3/33b), occurs in a transformer substation or
the circuit-breaker Q2 opens. It is MV line. A network master relay
Node fuses
equipped with a short-time-delay (reverse power relay) and a ”circuit-
overcurrent release (S). The delay The nodes of a meshed LV system breaker for mesh-connected sys-
time is at least 70 ms. During this are normally equipped with cables tems” are required for this purpose.
time, the rated operating voltage at with the same cross-section and with This is a three-pole circuit-breaker,
the busbar of the main distribution LV HRC fuses of utilization category possibly without overcurrent release,
board is reduced to 0.13 · Ue. gL of the same type and rated current but with a capacitor-delayed shunt re-
(Fig. 3/34). lease (open-circuit shunt release with
If the rated operating voltage drops to
memory).
0.7 – 0.35 times this value and the If a short circuit (K1) occurs along
voltage reduction lasts longer than ap- the meshed system cable, the short- If a short circuit occurs on the HV
proximately 20 ms, all of the circuit- circuit currents I k3 and I k4 flow to the side of the transformer (K1) or be-
breakers with undervoltage releases fault location. Short-circuit current I k3 tween the transformer and network
open. All contactors also open if the from node ”a” comprises the partial circuit-breaker (K2) or along the cable
rated control supply voltage collapses currents I k1 and I k2 which may differ (K3) (Fig. 3/36), the HV HRC fuse op-
to below 75% of its rated value for greatly depending on the impedance erates on the HV side; on the LV side,
longer than 5 to 30 ms. ratios. power flows back to the fault location
via the network circuit-breaker.
.
The open-circuit shunt release re-
ceives the tripping pulse from the
network master relay. The fault loca-
tion is thus selectively disconnected
from the power system.
3/49 3
Network circuit-breaker
without S-release
If the outgoing transformer feeders
are protected by network master re- 120
Ue
lays, no S-release is provided or the ms
value set for this release is so high K3 t 0.6.Ue
that the thermal overload capability of 100
0.3.Ue
the transformer can be fully utilized.
Network master relays 80
Network master relays are used in

conjunction with circuit-breakers for a 60
mesh-connected systems.
K1
In multi-feed LV power systems, they
ensure fast, selective disconnection 40
of a damaged MV cable from the
connected transformer substations. K2
The relay detects a reversal in the b S 20
flow of power if, in the event of a
short circuit in an MV feeder cable of
a HV HRC fuses
the meshed system, high currents 0
b Network circuit- 0 20 40 A 60
flow through the LV power system c breaker with network I
and the transformers of the damaged master relay
MV cable to the fault location. c Node fuses
To prevent errors, however, the net-

work master relay permits circulating Fig. 3/36 Single-line diagram showing the Fig. 3/37 Tripping characteristic of the net-
currents up to the same value as the infeed point of a meshed LV work master relay 7RM with stan-
power system dard setting (6 A)
rated current at the rated voltage
(setting can be varied between
2 A and 6 A using the spring bias). Circuit-breakers for The total short-circuit current may be
Fig. 3/37 shows the tripping charac- mesh-connected networks higher than the short-circuit current
teristic for the standard setting of of the relevant transformer.
6 A and for various other voltages. Circuit-breaker selection
Technical details regarding network
When selecting this circuit-breaker
master relays and circuit-breakers for
and its rated switching capacity, it is
mesh-connected networks can be
important to remember that the high-
found in the literature supplied by the
est short-circuit current must be ex-
manufacturer.
pected in the event of a short circuit
between the transformer terminals
and the circuit-breaker. In this case,
the total short-circuit current of all
the infeed points flows through the
meshed system and the circuit-
breaker to the short-circuit location.

3.4 Protection of Reactor-connected capacitors

The capacitors must be provided with
Harmonics suppression by
means of filter circuits
Capacitors reactors to prevent resonance (see An alternative solution would be to
”Electrical Installations Handbook”, use filter circuits to remove the ma-
According to IEC 60358 / VDE 0560
Section 1.6). An LC resonant circuit, jority of harmonics from the primary
Part 4, capacitor units must be suit-
whose resonance frequency is below system (see ”Electrical Installations
able for continuous operation with a
the lowest harmonic component Handbook”, Sections 1.6.3 and 1.6.4).
current whose r.m.s. value does not
(250 Hz) in the load current, is used The filter circuits are also series reso-
exceed 1.3 times the current which
instead of the capacitor. The capaci- nant circuits which, unlike the reactor-
flows with a sinusoidal voltage and
tor unit is thus inductive for all har- connected capacitors, are tuned pre-
rated frequency.
monic currents that occur in the load cisely to the frequencies of the har-
Owing to the above-mentioned di- current and can, therefore, no longer monic currents to be filtered. As a
mensioning requirements, no over- form a resonant circuit with the result, the impedance is almost zero.
load protection is provided for capaci- system reactance.
tor units in the majority of cases
Settings for overload relays LV HRC fuses with utilization cate-
Capacitors in systems with If thermal time-delay overload relays gory gL are normally used in capacitor
harmonic components are used to provide protection against units for short-circuit protection.
The capacitors can only be over- overcurrents, the tripping value can be
A rated fuse current of 1.6 to 1.7 times
loaded in systems with devices which 1.3 to 1.43 times the rated current of
the rated capacitor current is required
generate high harmonics (e.g. genera- the capacitor since, allowing for the
to prevent the fuses from tripping in
tors and converter-fed drives). The permissible capacitance deviation, the
the overload range and when the ca-
capacitors, together with the series- capacitor current can be 1.1 · 1.3 = 1.43
pacitors switch.
connected transformer and short-cir- times the rated capacitor current.
cuit reactance of the primary system,
With transformer-heated overload
form an anti-resonant circuit. Reso-
relays or releases, a higher secondary
nance phenomena occur if the natural
current flows due to the changed
frequency of the resonant circuit
transformation ratio of the transform-
matches or is close to the frequency
ers caused by the harmonic compo-
of a harmonic current generated by
nents. This may result in premature
the power converter.
tripping.
3/51 3
3.5 Protection of Current transformer rating for

protection purposes
3.5.1 Protection with
Overreaching Selectivity
Distribution Transformers Current transformers are subject to
Ideally, transformer feeders should
the standards DIN VDE 0414, Parts 1
The following devices are used for be protected by:
to 3, as well as IEC 185 and IEC 186.
protection tasks in medium-voltage
Current transformers with 5P or 10P HV HRC fuses
systems:
cores must be used for connecting High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity
HV HRC fuses protection equipment. (HV HRC) fuses used in conjunction
High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity with switch-disconnectors for rated
The required rated output and over-
(HV HRC) fuses usually used in con- transformer outputs of up to approx.
current factor must be determined on
junction with switch-disconnectors to 1,250 kVA for low switching rates, or
the basis of the information provided
protect radial feeders and transform-
in the protection relay descriptions. Circuit-breakers with protection
ers against short circuits.
Overcurrent protection Circuit-breakers with protection (see
Circuit-breakers with protection Overcurrent protection via current page 54) from approx. 800 kVA and
transformers for protecting cables for high switching rates; also when
Protection relays several circuit-breakers with S-re-
and transformer feeders can be either
Protection relays connected to cur- leases are arranged in series on the
two-phase or three-phase. The neu-
rent transformers (protection core) low-voltage side and selectivity is not
tral-point connection of the medium-
can be used to perform all protection- possible with upstream HV HRC
voltage network must be considered
related tasks irrespective of the mag- fuses.
here.
nitude of the short-circuit currents
and rated operating currents of the Relay operating currents with The anticipated selectivity ratios
required circuit-breakers. emergency generator operation must, therefore, be checked before
Care should be taken to ensure that the protection scheme is chosen and
Digital protection dimensioned.
Modern protection equipment is the operating currents of the protec-
controlled by microprocessors (digital tion relays provided for normal sys-
tem operation are also attained in the Protection by means of
protection) and supports all of the HV HRC fuses
protective functions required for a event of faults during emergency op-
medium-voltage outgoing feeder. eration using generators with rela- Dimensioning HV HRC fuses
tively low rated outputs. The rated current of the HV HRC
Protection as component of the fuses specified by the manufacturers
substation control and protection Three-phase time-overcurrent
protection for the rated output of each trans-
system former should be used when dimen-
Digital protection also allows operat- In the interests of future system
safety, it is advisable to configure the sioning the HV HRC fuses. The low-
ing and fault data, which can be called est rated current is dictated by the
up via serial data interfaces, to be col- time-overcurrent protection as a three-
phase system, irrespective of the rush currents generated when the
lected and stored. Digital protection transformers are energized and is
can, therefore, be incorporated in method of neutral-point connection.
1.5 to 2 times the rated transformer
substation control and protection currents.
systems as an autonomous
component.
Standards for protection relays
Static protection relays must comply
with the standards IEC 255 and
DIN VDE 0435-303.

HV HRC HV HRC HV HRC
Required
back-up
protection
zones LV HRC S
3WL
Minimum breaking current I a min
For the determination of the maxi- 3WL 400 V
a c
mum rated current it must be ob- LV HRC LV HRC
served that, with short circuits on a
LV HRC
transformer’s secondary side, the b
minimum breaking current I a min of
the fuse must be exceeded, affecting S 7RM network master relay
even the installation's busbar system.
Generally, the load on I a min is 4 to 5
Fig. 3/38 Protection zones of HV HRC back-up fuses necessary for various protection devices
times that of the transformer’s rated used on the low-voltage side
current. Between these limit values,
the fuse link can be chosen according
to selectivity.
40
Back-up protection with 10 kV
Base Ik < 9.5 kA

transmission range 20
tp
HV HRC fuses must ensure sufficient 10
400 A 630 A 100 A
F3 630 A
back-up protection in case of a possi- min 6
ble failure of the downstream protec- 400 kVA
4
tive device. The required transmis- Ukr 6%
sion range can be seen in Fig. 3/38, 2
F2 630 A
illustrated for three circuit diagrams.
1
The working range of the back-up
40 0.4 kV
protection increases with the de-
F1 ≤ 400 A
creasing protective rated current of 20
the fuse. F1 F2 F3
10 I k < 9.5 kA
s
Safety clearances between the 6
melting current characteristic of 4 >25% Safety margin
HV HRC fuses and other protective
2
devices Ia min
1
Rated currents of LV HRC fuses must
600
be selected in such a way that, be-
400
tween the established maximum
short-circuit current near the low-volt- 200
age side’s busbar system (converted
to the medium-voltage side) and the 100
ms
minimum breaking current I a min (cir- 60
cle in the melting current characteris- 40
tic), a minimum safety clearance of 20
25% is observed from I a min to the
transformer’s short-circuit current I k 10
(see Fig. 3/39 to 3/43). 6
A at 0.4 kV 1000 2000 3000 5000 7500 10000 20000 50000
A at 10 kV 40 80 120 200 400 800 2000
I
t p Prearcing time for fuses
Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse
Fig. 3/39 Example showing grading of HV HRC with LV HRC fuses in infeed circuits
3/53 3
current 630 A) are mainly used for

40 transformers with rated outputs of up
10 kV
20 to 400 kVA; circuit-breakers with
t k, t vs F1 F2 100 A overcurrent releases are used on the
630 A 100 A (160) A
Base Ik <15
10 F2 (optionally
160 A) low-voltage side for rated outputs
min 6 S n = 630 kVA ≥ 500 kVA.
4 Ukr = 6%
1000/ . . A
Ik max = 15 kA Tangent prearcing time/current
2 Ring inter- Ring inter- characteristics F2 (LV HRC) and F3
connection Q1 connection
S (HV HRC) – referred to 0.4 kV – and
1 630 A 630 A
Ik R.1 IkT Ik R.2 possible tripping of the switch discon-
40
Q1 0.4 kV nector on the medium-voltage side by
F1 630 A
20 the upstream HV HRC fuse are ac-
ceptable, since both fuses protect the
IkΣ=
10 Ik T+Ik R.1+Ik R.2 same system element and interrup-
s
6 ≈25% Safety margin tion will occur in all cases (restricted
Ia min required
4 selectivity). HV HRC fuses with higher
Scatter band rated currents (e.g. 160 A as shown
2
in Fig. 3/40) would not be suitable
Reverse
1 protection
here, since their minimum breaking
600 current I a min is 12 kA, i.e. well above
400 the short-circuit current I k which the
transformer can carry (max. 9.5 kA).
200
100
Grading of HV HRC fuses with
ms circuit-breakers for mesh-con-
60
40 nected systems and downstream
LV HRC fuses
20
Selecting the HV HRC fuse rating
10 In meshed systems with several
6 transformers and parallel system op-
A at 0.4 kV 1000 2000 3000 5000 10000 20000 50000 eration, the LV feeder circuit-breakers
A at 10 kV 40 80 120 200 400 800 2000 are not fitted with overcurrent re-
tk Command time for network master relay of circuit-breaker Q1
I leases (LS) but, instead, have sepa-
t vs Virtual prearcing time of fuses rate 7RM19 network master relays
Ik Short-circuit current with individual transformer operation which only respond to reverse cur-
Q1 Tripping characteristic for network master relay S set to 1.2 In transf. = 1,200 A rents.
Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse Given the absence of the LS-release
as a grading element, the back-up
Fig. 3/40 Example showing grading with HV HRC fuses – network master relay in the
protection range of the HV HRC fuse
infeed – and LV HRC fuses in the outgoing feeder; transformer rating 630 kVA
must be extended as shown in Fig.
3/38, case b. In Fig. 3/40, this is
Further data on safety margins for Grading of HV with LV HRC fuses achieved by selecting the HV HRC
gradings as shown in Fig. 3/38, case in infeed circuits fuse with the lower current rating.
b and c, for example, can be found in
Grading with LV HRC fuses
the following sections.
Example of a transformer with a rated
output of 400 kVA (Fig. 3/39): LV HRC
fuse switch-disconnectors or motor
fuse-disconnectors (maximum rated

The proximity of the characteristics

F1 and F2 does not have a detrimen-
40
tal effect on selectivity in this case, 10 kV
since the ring interconnections also 20 F1
Base Ik <15 kA
t s, td
function as infeeds in the event of a 400 A (630 A) 100 A
10 F2
fault, which means that selectivity is F2 (optional 160 A)
min 6
improved as a result of the total Not 100 A (160 A) 630 kVA
4 selective Ukr 6%
short-circuit current I k∑ in the feeder
3 WL1
being distributed among the infeeds 2 L 1000 A
Q1 S
(with the two ring interconnections in t d=220 ms
Fig. 3/40). This is possible because a 1 Q1
higher short-circuit current (I k∑) flows 40 0.4 kV
F1 400 (630) A
through the LV HRC fuse F1 than
20
through the HV HRC fuse F2 (I kT).
Selective I sd=6 kA Ik <15 kA
10
s
Grading of HV HRC fuses with low- ≈25% Safety margin
6 Ia min (requirement)
voltage circuit-breakers and down- 4
stream LV HRC fuses using a Scatter band
630 kVA transformer as an example 2
Setting
Requirements 1 range S
600 Q1
Selectivity is required between the
protection devices of the feeders and 400 td
Safety margin 100 ms
those of the infeed, which form a
200 Safety margin 100 ms
functional unit; a safety margin of at (required)
least 100 ms is necessary between 100
ms
the characteristic of an LV HRC fuse 60
and that of an S-release (Fig. 3/41). 40
Between LV HRC fuses and 20

S-releases
Thus, selectivity is achieved with the 10
400 A LV HRC fuse-link used in the 6

A at 0.4 kV 1000 2000 3000 5000 10000 20000 50000
example. The setting and delay time
A at 10 kV 40 80 120 200 400 800 2000
td must be adjusted with the S-re-
I
lease (6 kA setting). tn Prearcing time for fuses
t d Delay time for S-release
In such cases, selectivity can be Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse
achieved more easily using downstream
circuit-breakers, e.g. SENTRON WL
(Fig. 3/43), or using a considerably Fig. 3/41 Example showing the grading of HV HRC fuses F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 and
more powerful transformer, the associ- downstream LV HRC fuse F1 in the outgoing feeder
ated circuit-breaker enables the S-re-
lease to be set to a higher value.
3/55 3
Between HV HRC fuses

and S-releases 40
10 kV
Since the protection devices in the in-
20
Base Ik <15 kA
feed form a functional unit, a restric- t s, tv
F1 100 A
tion in selectivity in the upper short- 10 F2
630 A F2 (optionally 160 A)
circuit current range is accepted in min 6 not selective
100 A (160 A) 630 kVA
the case of faults in the vicinity of the (choose Q1)
4 Ukr 6%
busbars (as indicated by the circle in 3 WL1
the diagram) for the 100 A HV HRC 2 L 1000 A
Q2 S
t d2=220 ms
fuse in Fig. 3/42.
1 Q2
Safety margin between HV HRC 40 0.4 kV
F1 Q1 3 WL1
fuse and S-release 630 A
20 630 A
If, on the other hand, selectivity is re- td1=
quired, e.g. with different switching I sd =6 kA Ik <15 kA 100 ms
10
s Q2
priorities at the two voltage levels or ≈25% Safety margin
6 Ia min (required)
in order to avoid the medium-voltage 4
switchgear having to be switched off, Scatter band
for example, when HV HRC fuses are 2 “L“ characteristic Q1
not shown
replaced, there should be a safety
1 I sd =3.6 kA
margin of approximately 100 ms on
600 selective
the base line I k between the charac- 400
teristic curve of the S-release and the t d2=220 ms td2 Safety margin ≈100 ms
left-hand limit of the scatter band of 200 Safety margin
the prearcing-time/current character- ≥100 ms td1
100 t d1=100 ms
istic of the HV HRC fuse. ms
60
Scatter band of HV HRC fuses 40 More pronounced intersection of
According to EN 60 282-1/ DIN Q1 and F2 must be avoided if possible
20
VDE 0670-4, the scatter band width
of HV HRC fuse-links can be ± 20%. 10
Siemens HV HRC fuse-links have a
6
scatter band width of ± 10%. A at 0.4 kV 1000 2000 3000 5000 10000 20000 50000
Result: A at 10 kV 40 80 120 200 400 800 2000

I
When selecting circuit-breakers in- tn Prearcing time for fuses
stead of low-voltage fuses, selectivity t d1 Delay time for S-release (Q1)
can easily be attained, overlapping of t d2 Delay time for S-release (Q2)
Minimum breaking current Ia min
characteristics Q1 and F2 should be
avoided, as it could result in erro-
neous tripping. For such cases, HV Fig. 3/42 Example showing the grading of HV HRC fuses F2 with circuit-breaker Q2
HRC fuse-links with a higher rated and downstream circuit-breaker Q1 with LS-release in the outgoing feeder
current should be chosen.

Protection by means of circuit-

40 breakers with definite-time over-
Base IkT <15 kA (individual operation)

10 kV current protection (DMT)
20 630 A
t s, td,t o Q3 tI > ≈ 500 ms Requirement
F1
10 400 A The two feeder circuit-breakers (in
min I>
6 60/1 A Fig. 3/43) form a functional unit and
I>>
4 require selectivity with respect to
630 kVA
Q3 U kr 6% the protection devices on the low-
2 I> = 200 A 3 WL voltage side.
L 1000 A
1 L Q2 Q2 S
t d = 220 ms Outgoing feeders with
40 H.V.
LV HRC fuses
0.4 kV
20 F1 L If low-voltage fuses are connected
S = 6 kA I
Q2 400 A Q1 downstream, selectivity with circuit-
10 630 A
s breakers with mechanical releases
6 Ik <15 kA
(3WF) can only be achieved up to a
4 certain maximum fuse current rating;
Setting
2 range S in the example, Q2 with mechanical
S-releases (setting range 3 to 6 kA)
1 ≤ 400 A for F1. Larger LV HRC fuses
600 tc > ≈ 500 ms are also selective if SENTRON WL
400 Safety margin circuit-breakers with an S-release
t d ≈ 220 ms ≈ 300 ms
range of 2 to 12 · I r are used.
200 Q2
Safety margin
≥ 100 ms I>> = 792 A Outgoing feeders with mixed
100
ms Q3 components
60 tc ≈ 50 ms If outgoing feeders with mixed com-
40 I ponents are used, the safety margin
6 kA
20 of at least 100 ms relative to the
largest permissible LV HRC fuse-link
10 Q1 t o for F1 is the crucial factor in determin-
6 ing the setting for the S-release of
A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 10,000 20,000 50.000
Q2. In the case of mechanical S-re-
A at 10 kV 40 80 120 200 400 800 2,000 leases with the highest current set-
I
to Opening time of circuit-breaker (Q1) ting of 6 kA, this results in a delay
td Delay time of “S“ release (Q2) time td of 220 ms for the smallest
tvs Prearcing time of fuses F1 permissible safety margin of 100 ms.
tc Command time of DMT protection (Q3)
This determines the starting point for
all subsequent upward and down-
Fig. 3/43 Example showing the grading of circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), SENTRON ward gradings in the diagram.
WL circuit-breaker, 1000 A with LS-releases (Q2) and downstream outgoing feeders,
e.g. 400 A LV HRC fuse (F1) and 630 A distribution circuit-breaker (Q1) in a 630 kVA Outgoing feeders with
transformer feeder circuit-breaker
Since selectivity cannot be achieved
using LV HRC fuses with a higher
current rating (see Fig. 3/41), circuit-
breakers with time or, if possible,
current grading should be used.
3/57 3
Based on the assumption that verifi- Selecting current transformers

IrT · 100% __________
36,4 A · 100%
cation of the short-circuit currents for DMT protection I kT = _______ = = 606.6 A
would show that current grading The following points should be ob- ukr 6%
would be possible, a 630 A (Q1) dis- served when selecting current trans- Operating current = I kT · 1.2 = 728 A
tribution circuit-breaker with LI-re- formers for DMT protection (these
Operating current (in secondary circuit) =
leases was selected. considerations are applied in the ex-
ample shown in Fig. 3/43): 728 A
Intersection of the characteristics Q2 I p = ______ ≈ 12.1 A
Current transformers with a rating of 60/1
and Q3 in the middle short-circuit
40 to 200 A could be selected for rated
range is permissible because:
currents of 36.4 A on the high-voltage
C the L-release of the low-voltage side of the 630 kVA transformer, with 3.5.2 Equipment for Protect-
circuit-breaker Q1 (not shown in the characteristic Q3 I> at 200 A po- ing Distribution Transform-
Fig. 3/43) protects the transformer sitioned at the abscissa for 10 kV and ers (against Internal Faults)
against overloading, which only with the broad setting ranges. Here, it
The following signaling devices and
occurs in the range 1–1.3 times the is important to bear in mind the
protection equipment are used to
rated current of the transformer; higher investment costs for current
detect internal transformer faults:
transformers with lower rated primary
C there is a safety margin of ≥ 150 ms
currents. C Devices for monitoring and protect-
(≈300 ms in the example shown in
ing liquid-cooled transformers such
Fig. 3/43) between the I > tripping If, for example, 60/1 A current trans-
as Buchholz protectors, tempera-
value of the DMT protection and formers are selected, the current
ture detectors, contact thermome-
the LV HRC fuse characteristic F1 sensors must be set as follows:
ters, etc.
and selectivity is, therefore,
Setting the current sensors I>, I>>
achieved. C Temperature monitoring systems
and timing elements
for GEAFOL® resin-encapsulated
Higher rated transformer outputs Current sensor I >:
transformers comprising
and broader setting ranges for the The setting for a selected operating
S-release of Q2 make it easier for the value of 200 A is as follows: – temperature sensors in the
characteristic Q3 I > to be shifted to low-voltage winding and
200 A
the left of the characteristic Q2 s. I p = ______ = 3.3 A
60/1 – signaling and tripping devices in
This also provides a certain degree of
the incoming-feeder switch panel.
back-up protection with respect to Timing element for I > excitation:
the L-release of circuit-breaker Q2. The thermistor-type thermal protec-
ti> = 0.5 s
tion protects the transformer against
DMT protection
overheating resulting from increased
Nowadays, digital devices are used to Current sensor I>>: ambient temperatures or overloading.
provide DMT protection in practically The current sensor I>> should only re- Furthermore, it allows the full output
all applications. They have broader spond to faults on the high-voltage of the transformer to be utilized irre-
setting ranges, allow a choice be- side (in the shortest possible time). spective of the number of load cycles
tween definite-time and inverse-time Operating current I>> approximately without the risk of damage to the
overcurrent protection or overload I kT · 1.20 transformer.
protection, provide a greater and (safety margin relative to I kT)
more consistent level of measuring These signaling and protection de-
accuracy and are self-monitoring. vices do not have to be included in
the grading diagrams (e.g. Fig. 3/29).

3/59 3
TIP_Kap04_E 11.08.2005 18:47 Uhr Seite B2
4 Medium Voltage
4.1 Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear for Primary Power
Distribution
4.2 Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear and Substations
4.3 Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range
4.4 PQM® – Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control
4.5 Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power Distribution
Exemplified by the Automotive Industry
TIP_Kap04_E 11.08.2005 18:47 Uhr Seite B3
Medium Voltage
chapter 4
4 Medium Voltage
Standards Insulation Busbar Compartments Accidental Switching

system arc device 4)
qualification
Access Operational Compartme

option availability ntalization class
Type-tested Interlocking control LSC 2B PM IAC CB, SD,

indoor circuit-breaker/cable (three-compartment (metal-clad) (IEC 60298)
switchgear compartment, design + isolating
acc. to or tool-dependent distances to busbar
IEC 62271-200 busbar/cable CB, SD,
and cable) contactor1)
(IEC 60298) compartment
CB, SD,
contactor 2)
CB, SD,
contactor 2)
Single
CB
Interlocking control LSC 2A PM IAC CB, SD,

circuit-breaker/cable (two-compartment design (metal-clad) (IEC 60298)
compartment, + isolating distances to
Air- or tool-dependent
insulated busbar and cable) CB, SD,
busbar/cable
compartment contactor 1)
Interlocking control to LSC 1 (isolating distances – IAC CB, SD,

the high-voltage to busbar and cable)
compartment
Interlocking control LSC 2B PM IAC CB

Double circuit-breaker/cable (metal-clad) (IEC 60298)
compartment, (three-compartment
or tool-dependent design + isolating
busbar/cable distances to busbar CB
compartment and cable)
Busbar compartment: No restriction PM IAC CB, SD,

tool-based (metal-clad) (IEC 60298) contactor
Single Circuit-breaker
compartment: CB
not accessible
Cable compartment:
tool-based CB
Gas-
insulated
Busbar compartment: No restriction PM IAC CB, SD,
tool-based (metal-clad) (IEC 60298) contactor
Double Circuit-breaker
compartment: CB
not accessible
Cable compartment:
tool-based CB
Table 4/1 Medium-voltage switchgear

Medium Voltage
4.1 Medium-Voltage Every operator or user of medium-volt-

age primary distribution equipment,
dependence, maintenance-free design,
compactness, security of investment,
and Circuit-Breaker whether they be power supply or indus- cost-efficiency, serviceability and flexibil-
Switchgear for Primary trial companies or power stations,
places special demands on the
ity – to suit the demand.
Power Distribution switchgear. These include, for example,

You definitely make the right decision
with circuit-breaker switchgear from
high reliability, personal safety and low
Siemens. The complete range of
space requirements.
switchgear sets standards for the safe
In addition to appropriate voltage levels, and cost-efficient solution to your special
air or gas insulation, a differentiation is requirements.
made with respect to environmental in-
Isolating Switchgear Technical data

distance type
Maximum rated short-time Maximum rated Maximum rated

withstand current [kA], 1/3 s normal current of busbar normal current of feeder
[A] [A]
7.2 12 15 17.5 24 36 40.5 7.2 12 15 17.5 24 36 40.5 7.2 12 15 17.5 24 36 40.5
kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV
Withdrawable NXAIR 25/3 25/3 – – – – – 2,500 2,500 – – – – – 2,500 2,500 – – – – –

unit/truck
Withdrawable NXAIR M 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3 25/3 – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – –
unit/truck
Withdrawable NXAIR P 50/3 50/3 50/3 – – – – 4,000 4,000 4,000 – – – – 4,000 4,000 4,000 – – – –
unit/truck
Truck SIMOPRIME 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 – – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – – –
Truck 8BT2 – – – – – 31.5/3 – – – – – – 2,250 – – – – – – 2,000 –
Withdrawable NXAIR M – – – 25/3 25/3 – – – – – 2,500 2,500 – – – – – 2,500 2,500 – –

unit/truck
Truck 8BT1 25/1 25/1 – – – – – 2,250 2,250 – – – – – 2,000 2,000 – – – – –
Truck 8BT3 – – – – – 16/1 – – – – – – 1,250 – – – – – – 1,250 –
Withdrawable NXAIR M 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3 25/3 – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – –
unit/truck
Withdrawable NXAIR P 50/3 50/3 50/3 – – – – 4,000 4,000 4,000 – – – – 4,000 4,000 4,000 – – – –
unit/truck
Disconnector, NXPLUS C3) 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3 25/3 –/3 –/3 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – –
fixed-mounted
Disconnector, NXPLUS 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
fixed-mounted
Disconnector, 8DA 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
fixed-mounted
Disconnector, NXPLUS C3) 25/3 25/3 25/3 25/3 25/3 – – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – – 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 – –
fixed-mounted
Disconnector, NXPLUS 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 – 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 –
fixed-mounted
Disconnector, 8DB 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 40/3 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
fixed-mounted
1) up to 7.2 kV 3) The product ranges of single busbars and busbars can be combined with each other.
2) up to 12 kV 4) CB = circuit-breaker, SD = switch-disconnector
4/3 4
4.1.1 Withdrawable Circuit- Cost-efficiency of the switchgear switchgear, or in the fact that any
Breaker Switchgear, Decades of experience in the manu- customary cable sealing ends can
Air-Insulated facture of air-insulated medium-volt- be used.
age switchgear as well as type and
Service friendliness
NXAIR Family routine testing in accordance with
Switchgear maintenance intervals of
IEC 62271-200 ensure reliability. In-
Switchgear from the NXAIR family more than 10 years, minimized train-
ternal arc tests and self-explanatory
just makes solutions simpler, being expenses due to the self-explana-
operating symbols ensure personal
cause it brings security into all signifi- tory operating symbols, and modern
safety and operational reliability.
cant decisions for future planning. documentation guarantee service
Rapid re-availability is achieved by
friendliness over the entire life of
Security of investment through in- the modular design and selectivity.
the product.
novative technology Flexibility shows itself in the choice
The novel modular design of between truck-type or withdrawable
switchgear panels allows rapid re-
availability because the individual
compartments (connection, module
and low-voltage compartment) can
be replaced after a fault inside the
switchgear panel. The bushing-type
current transformer principle, to-
gether with the pressure-resistant
partitions, allows the selective dis-
connection of an internal fault up to
31.5 kA by means of the associated
circuit-breaker. A mimic diagram with
self-explanatory operating symbols
for optimum operator prompting is in-
tegrated into the equipment front as
a standard feature. The numerical bay
controller family integrates protec-
tion, control, communication, operat-
ing and monitoring functions into one
device.
Photo 4/1 NXAIR

Medium Voltage
Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12
frequency Hz 50 50
short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28 **
lightning surge withstand voltage kV 60 75
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25
short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 25 25

NXAIR features
short-circuit making current max. kA 63 63
The air-insulated, metal-clad NXAIR
switchgear is the innovation on the peak withstand current max. kA 63 63
distribution level up to 12 kV, 25 kA,
normal current of busbar max. A 2,500 2,500
2,500 A.
normal current of feeders:
C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad
with circuit-breaker max. A 2,500 2,500
(LSC 2B)
with switch-disconnector max. A 800 * 800 *
C Uniform panel structure for all
versions * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used
C Cable connection from the front ** Higher value on request
or rear
C Available as truck-type or with-
Table 4/2 NXAIR rating
drawable switchgear
C Bushing-type current transformers
permit selective shutdown of
feeders
C Panels resistant to internal arc
faults
C Exchange of the module and
connection compartment possible
C Switchgear modules with inte-
H2
grated interlocking and control

H1
board
W D
All panel types Dimensions in mm
Width W for all panels 800

(compartment)
Height H1 Standard, 2,000
H2 – with a high low-voltage cubicle 2,350

– with open-circuit ventilation
– with busbar fittings
Depth D for all panels 1,350
Photo 4/2 NXAIR switchgear panel Table 4/3 NXAIR dimensions
4/5 4
1 E
B
2 14
3
15 A
4 22
5
16
7 23
1234
8 17 24
9 D
10 18 25
26
19
11
12
C
20
21 28
29
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 14 Pressure relief duct A Module compartment

2 Protection equipment 15 Busbars B Busbar compartment
3 Option: capacitive voltage detection 16 Bushing-type insulator C Connection compartment
system for feeder and busbar 17 Bushing-type current transformer D Vacuum vacuum circuit-breaker
4 High-voltage door to module compartment 18 Make-proof grounding switch module
5 Door knob for opening high-voltage door 19 Cable connection for 4 cables per phase E Low-voltage cubicle
7 Mechanical switch position indication and 20 Cable sealing ends
actuating opening for withdrawable part
21 Cable support rail
8 “Closing spring charged“ indicator and
operating cycle counter 22 Low voltage plug connector
9 Mechanical switch position indication for 23 Withdrawable part

switching device 24 Combined operating and interlocking unit
10 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switching for circuit-breaker, withdrawable part and
device grounding switch
11 Mechanical switch position indication and 25 Vacuum interrupters

actuating opening for make-proof groun- 26 Contact system
ding switch 28 Grounding busbar
12 Mimic diagram 29 Option: truck
Fig. 4/1 NXAIR circuit-breaker panel 12 kV / 1,250 A, basic panel design (example)

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Spur panel
and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or
and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or
and/or or and/or or and/or or and/or
or or or or or and/or
and/or or and/or or and/or
and/or and/or
Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel
Circuit- Riser
breaker panel
panel
and/or and/or or or
or and/or or
or or
and/or and/or
Fig. 4/2 NXAIR product range
4/7 4
Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
short-duration power-frequency
withstand voltage kV 20 28 35 38 50
lightning surge withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25

NXAIR M features
short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
The air-insulated, cubicle-type or
short-circuit making current1) max. kA 80 80 80 63 63
metal-clad switchgear NXAIR M is
the consequent further development peak withstand current1) max. kA 80 80 80 63 63
of the NXAIR family for use on the
normal current of busbar max. A 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
distribution and process level up to
15 kV, 31.5 kA, 2,500 A or 24 kA, normal current of feeders:
25 kA, 2,500 A. with circuit-breaker max. A 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
with switch-disconnector max. A 800* 800* 800* 800* 800*
C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad or with vacuum contactor max. A 400* – – – –
cubicle-type (LSC 2A, LSC 2B)
* Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used
C Circuit-breaker, contactor and switch- 1)Values for 50 Hz
disconnector panels can be lined up
C Cable connection from the front Table 4/4 NXAIR M rating
or rear
drawable switchgear
permit selective shutdown of
feeders
C Panels resistant to internal arc faults
C Exchange of the module and con-
H3
nection compartment possible

H2

H1

board
W D

Width W Standard 800
(compartment) with 24 kV / 2,500 A 1,000
with vacuum contactor panel 400
Height H1 with standard low-voltage cubicle 2,200
H2 – with attached air guides (standard) 2,550
– with a high low-voltage cubicle
– with open-circuit ventilation
H3 with busbar fittings 2,770
Depth D Single busbar cubicle-type2) 1,454
metal-clad 1,554
Vacuum contactor panel 1,650
Double busbar with cubicle-type2) 2,958
back-to-back installation metal-clad 3,158
2) For 24 kV only
Photo 4/3 NXAIR M switchgear panel Table 4/5 NXAIR M dimensions

Medium Voltage
30 30
B
1 E
14
2
A
3 15
4 22
5
23
7
16
8 1234
24
D
9 25
17
10
26
18
11 C
19
12
20 27
28
21
29
Circuit-breaker panel Metal-clad version
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle transformer 30

2 Protection equipment 18 Make-proof grounding switch
3 Option: capacitive voltage 19 Cable connection for
detection system for feeder 4 cables per phase B E
and busbar 20 Cable sealing ends
4 High-voltage door to module 21 Cable support rail
15 A
compartment
22 Low voltage plug connector
5 Door knob for opening 22
high-voltage door 23 Withdrawable part
7 Mechanical switch position 24 Combined operating and 23

indication and actuating interlocking unit for circuit-
opening for withdrawable part breaker, withdrawable part 16 24
and grounding switch
8 “Closing spring charged“ D
indicator and operating cycle 25 Vacuum switching tubes 25
17
counter 26 Contact system
9 Mechanical switch position 27 Lower partition 26
indication for switching 18
28 Grounding busbar
device C
29 Option: truck
10 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for 19
switching device 30 Air guide
11 Mechanical switch position

20
indication and actuating A Module compartment
opening for make-proof B Busbar compartment 28
grounding switch 21
C Connection compartment
12 Mimic diagram 29
D Vacuum circuit-breaker
14 Pressure relief duct module
15 Busbars E Low-voltage cubicle
16 Bushing-type insulator Cubicle-type version
17 Bushing-type current (feature: common module and connection compartment)
Fig. 4/3 NXAIR M, basic panel design (example)
4/9 4
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Panels for double-busbar applications
Double-busbar switchgear is made up of
the product range of the single-busbar
panels, which are available as:
• vis-à-vis installation
• back-to-back installation
Vis-à-vis installation
• Panels from the product range of the
single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker
panel, bus sectionalizer and metering
panel)
• Connection of the two systems
with cables or bars below the panels
• Bus coupling, consisting of
– circuit-breaker panel
– disconnecting panel
and/or and/or and/or or and/or or Back-to-back installation
• Panels from the product range of the sin-
gle-busbar systems (circuit-breaker panel,
bus sectionalizer and metering panel)
and/or or and/or or and/or or • Connection of the two systems with bars
within the panels
– circuit-breaker panel with current and
and/or or and/or or and/or and/or voltage transformers
– disconnecting panel, optionally with
current transformers
Note
or or or and/or
Double-busbar switchgear with busbar
disconnector attachment on request.
and/or and/or and/or
Vacuum contactor panel (7.2 kV) Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel
and/or and/or and/or and/or or or
or
and/or or and/or and/or or and/or
and/or or or
or and/or
and/or
Fig. 4/4 NXAIR M product range

Medium Voltage
Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12 15
frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60
short-duration power-frequency
withstand voltage kV 20 28 35
lightning surge withstand voltage kV 60 75 95
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 50 50 50
NXAIR P features short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 50 50 50
The air-insulated, metal-clad short-circuit making current1) max. kA 125 125 125
switchgear NXAIR P is based on the peak withstand current1) max. kA 125 125 125
design principles of the NXAIR family
for use on the distribution and process normal current of busbar max. A 4,000 4,000 4,000
level up to 15 kV, 50 kA, 4,000 A. normal current of feeders:
with circuit-breaker max. A 4,000 4,000 4,000
C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad with switch-disconnector max. A 800* 800* 800*
(LSC 2B) with vacuum contactor max. A 400* 400* –
C Circuit-breaker, contactor and
* Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used
switch-disconnector panels can 1)Values for 50 Hz
be lined up
C Cable connection from the front Table 4/6 NXAIR P rating
or rear
drawable switchgear
permit selective shutdown of feed-
ers up to 31.5 kA
C Panels resistant to internal arc
faults up to 31.5 kA
H3
H2
C Exchange of the module and con-

H1
nection compartment possible

board
W1 D
W2
All panel types (except for vacuum contactor panel) Dimensions in mm

Width ≤ 2,000 A (standard) 800
(compartment) > 2,000 A (with panel ventilation) 1,000
H2 with attached pressure relief duct 2,550
H3 with forced ventilation (4,000 A) 2,710
Depth D Single busbar 1,635
Double busbar with back-to-back installation 3,320
Vacuum contactor panel

Width W1 Standard 400
(compartment)
H2 with attached pressure relief duct 2,550
Depth D Single busbar 1,650
Photo 4/4 NXAIR P switchgear panel Table 4/7 NXAIR P dimensions
4/11 4
1 14
E
2
3 15 A
4
16
5
23
6
17 B
26
8 25
D
9 24
18
22
10
19
31
11
20
C 28
12
21
13 29
Circuit-breaker panel Panel 3,150 A with open-circuit ventilation
32 32
Panel 4,000 A with forced ventilation
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 11 Mechanical switch position indication 24 Drive unit

2 Protection equipment and actuating opening for make-proof 25 Vacuum switching tubes
grounding switch
3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system 26 Contact system
for feeder and busbar 12 Mimic diagram
28 Grounding busbar
4 High-voltage door to module compartment 13 Ventilation duct
29 Option: truck
5 Mechanical lifting device for opening 14 Pressure relief duct
31 Interlocking unit for circuit-breaker
high-voltage door 15 Busbars and grounding switch
6 Locking device for high-voltage door 16 Bushing-type insulator 32 Fan unit with fan
8 “Closing spring charged” indicator, switch 17 Bushing-type current transformer
position indication for switching device 18 Make-proof grounding switch
and operating cycle counter A Module compartment
19 Cable connection for 6 cables per phase B Busbar compartment
9 “ON/OFF” pushbuttons for switching
devices 20 Cable sealing ends C Connection compartment
10 Mechanical switch position indication and 21 Cable support rail D Vacuum circuit-breaker module
actuating opening for withdrawable part 22 Low voltage connector E Low-voltage cubicle
23 Withdrawable part
Fig. 4/5 NXAIR P, basic panel design (example)

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Panels for double-busbar

applications
Double-busbar switchgear is
made up of the product range
of the single-busbar panels,
which are available as:
• vis-à-vis installation
• back-to-back installation
Vis-à-vis installation
• Panels from the product range
of the single-busbar systems
(circuit-breaker panel, bus sec-
tionalizer and metering panel)
• Connection of the two systems
with cables or bars below the
panels
and/or or and/or or and/or or – circuit-breaker panel
– disconnecting panel
Back-to-back installation
and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or • Panels from the product range
of the single-busbar systems
(circuit-breaker panel, bus sec-
tionalizer and metering panel)
and/or and/or and/or • Connection of the two systems
with bars within the panels
– circuit-breaker panel with
or or current and voltage transformers
and/or and/or
Vacuum contactor panel (7.2 kV, 12 kV) Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel
and/or and/or and/or or or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Fig. 4/6 NXAIR P product range
4/13 4
SIMOPRIME features
Rated
The air-insulated, metal-clad voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5
switchgear SIMOPRIME is a factory-
assembled, type-tested indoor frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
switchgear for use on the distribution short-duration power-frequency
and process level up to 17.5 kV, withstand voltage kV 20 28 35 38
31.5 kA, 2,500 A.
lightning surge withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
(LSC 2B)
C Circuit-breaker, contactor and short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
switch-disconnector panels can
short-circuit making current max. kA 80 80 80 80/82
be lined up
C Cable connection from the front peak withstand current max. kA 80 80 80 80/82
or rear normal current of busbar max. A 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
C Truck-type version
normal current of feeders:
C Use of block-type or ring-type
with circuit-breaker max. A 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
current transformers
with switch-disconnector max. A 630* 630* 630* 630*
C Panels resistant to internal arc faults
with vacuum contactor max. A 400* 400* – –
C All switching operations with
closed door * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used
C Logic interlocks
Table 4/8 SIMOPRIME rating
H1
H2
W D

Width W with circuit-breaker ≤ 1,250 A / vacuum contactor 600
(compartment) W with 2,500 A circuit-breaker, 800
disconnector truck or switch-disconnector
H2 with a high low-voltage cubicle 1,780
Depth D Standard 1,860
Photo 4/5 SIMOPRIME switchgear panel Table 4/9 SIMOPRIME dimensions

Medium Voltage
1
2
E
13
B
3 14
4
15
5 22
6 16
7
23
8 A
9
17
24
10
18
D
11
C
19
12
20
21
Circuit-breaker panel, 12 kV, 1,250 A
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 11 Openings for switch truck operation A Switchgear compartment
2 Opening for locking/unlocking the 12 Opening for grounding switch operation B Busbar compartment
low-voltage cubicle door 13 Pressure relief duct C Connection compartment
3 Option: capacitive voltage detection 14 Busbars D Vacuum circuit-breaker truck
system for feeder and busbar
15 Bushings E Low-voltage cubicle
4 High-voltage door to switchgear
compartment 16 Insulators
5 Inspection window for identifying 17 Option: ring-type or block-type current

the switch truck transformer
6 Opening for locking or unlocking the 18 Option: make-proof grounding switch

high-voltage door 19 Cable sealing ends
7 Actuating opening for the mechanical 20 Option: current transformer
charging of the closing spring of the 21 Grounding busbar
circuit-breaker
22 Low-voltage plug connector
8 Openings for manual circuit-breaker
operation (CLOSED/OPEN) 23 Vacuum switching tubes
9 Inspection window for reading off 24 Switch truck

the indicators
10 Door knob
Fig. 4/7 SIMOPRIME, basic panel design (example)
4/15 4
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Switch-disconnector panel Vacuum contactor panel
and/or or and/or or and/or and/or or
or
and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or
and/or and/or and/or and/or
and/or and/or
Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible) Metering panel
or and/or
Fig. 4/8 SIMOPRIME product range

Medium Voltage
8BT1 features
Rated 8BT1
The air-insulated, cubicle-type voltage kV 12
switchgear 8BT1 is a factory-assem-
bled, type-tested indoor switchgear frequency Hz 50
for the lower performance range, for short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28
use on the distribution and process
level up to 12 kV, 25 kA, 2,250 A. lightning surge withstand voltage kV 75
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25

C Metal-enclosed and cubicle-type
(LSC 2A) short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 25
C Circuit-breaker and contactor
short-circuit making current max. kA 63
panels can be lined up
C Cable connection from the front peak withstand current max. kA 63
C Truck-type version normal current of busbar max. A 2,250
C Use of block-type current trans-
formers normal current of feeders:
C Enclosure tested for resistance with circuit-breaker max. A 2,000
to accidental arcing or disconnector truck
with contactor max. A 400*
C All switching operations with
closed door * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used
C Logic interlocks
Table 4/10 8BT1 rating
H
W D
Photo 4/6 8BT1 switchgear All panel types Dimensions in mm

Width W ≤ 1,000 A circuit-breaker, disconnector truck, contactor 600
W 1,250 A, 2,500 A circuit-breaker, disconnector truck 800
Height H 2,050
Depth T 1,200
Table 4/11 8BT1 dimensions
4/17 4
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle

2 Protection equipment
3 Option: capacitive voltage detection
system for feeder and busbar 1
5 Door of high-voltage compartment 2
6 Inspection window for disconnector
position
7 Knob for high-voltage door
3
8 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for
switching device 5
9 Mechanical switch position 6
indication for switching device
7
10 Mechanical switch position indica-
tion “Spring charged“ and operating 8
cycle counter 9
tion and actuating opening of the 10
feeder grounding switch 11
12 Mechanical switch position indica- 12
tion and actuating opening for
establishing an isolating distance 13
13 Mimic diagram
14 Busbars
16 Block-type current transformer
17 Cable connection for 4 cables
max. per phase
18 Make-proof grounding switch 8BT1 switchgear
19 Cable sealing ends

20 Cable bracket
22 Vacuum tube
23 Contact system top/bottom
24 Switch truck
14
25 Voltage transformer E
A Busbar compartment
B Connection compartment
C Switchgear compartment A
E Low-voltage cubicle 21
22
23
C
16
17
24
B
18
19 25
20
Feeder panel
Fig. 4/9 8BT1, basic panel design (example)

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Spur panel Vacuum contactor panel (7.2 kW)
and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or
or
and/or or and/or or and/or and/or
and/or or and/or or and/or and/or
and/or and/or
Metering panel Bus sectionalizer Busbar termination panel
Switch Riser
truck panel
and/or panel
or and/or and/or or
and/or and/or
Fig. 4/10 8BT1 product range
4/19 4
8BT2 features
Rated 8BT2
The air-insulated, metal-clad voltage kV 36
bled, type-tested indoor switchgear frequency Hz 50/60
level up to 36 kV, 31.5 kA, 2250 A. lightning surge withstand voltage kV 170
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5

(LSC 2B) short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 31.5
C Cable connection from the front
short-circuit making current max. kA 80/82
C Use of block-type current peak withstand current max. kA 80/82
transformers normal current of busbar max. A 2,250
C Enclosure tested for resistance
to accidental arcing normal current of feeders:
C All switching operations with with circuit-breaker max. A 2,000
closed door with contactor max. A –
with switch-disconnector max. A –
C Logic interlock

H
W D

Width W 1,550
Height H 2,400
Depth D 2,450

Medium Voltage

system for feeder and busbar 1
4 Mimic diagram 2
5 Door of high-voltage compartment
6 Inspection window for disconnector 3
position
4
5
8 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for 6
switching device
tion for switching device, “Spring
charged“ and operating cycle 8
counter
11 Actuating opening of the feeder
9
grounding switch
12 Actuating opening for establishing 11
an isolating distance 12
14 Busbars
15 Bushing to busbar or feeder
max. per phase
18 Make-proof grounding switch
19 Cable sealing ends 8BT2 switchgear
20 Cable bracket
22 Vacuum tube
24 Switch truck
25 Voltage transformer 14 C E
26 Grounding bus
A Busbar compartment
B Connection compartment
21
C Switchgear compartment A
E Low-voltage cubicle 15
22
23
B
16
17
24
18 25
19
26
20
4/21 4
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnecting panel Spur panel
and/or and and/or and and/or
and/or and/or and/or and/or and/or
Metering panel Bus sectionalizer Busbar termination panel
Switch Riser
truck panel
and/or panel
or and/or
and/or or
and/or
and/or
Fig. 4/12 8BT2 product range

Medium Voltage
8BT3 features
Rated 8BT2
The air-insulated, cubicle-type voltage kV 36
bled, type-tested indoor switchgear frequency Hz 50/60
level up to 36 kV, 16 kA, 1,250 A. lightning surge withstand voltage kV 170
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 16

C Metal-enclosed and cubicle-type
(LSC 1) short-time withstand current, 3s max. kA 16
C Circuit-breaker panel, fixed-
short-circuit making current max. kA 40/42
mounted switch-disconnector
can be lined up peak withstand current max. kA 40/42
C Cable connection from the front normal current of busbar max. A 1,250
C Use of block-type current normal current of feeders:
transformers with circuit-breaker max. A 1,250
C Enclosure tested for resistance with contactor max. A –
with switch-disconnector max. A 400*
to accidental arcing
C All switching operations with * Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used
closed door
C Logic interlock
H
W D

Width W 1,000
Height H 2,400
Depth D 1,450
4/23 4

1
system for feeder and busbar
5 Door of high-voltage compartment 2
6 Inspection window for disconnector
position
3
8 “ON/OFF“ pushbuttons for switch-
ing device
tion “Spring charged“ and operating 5
cycle counter 6
tion “Spring charged“ and operat- 8
ing cycle counter
9
tion and actuating opening of the
feeder grounding switch 11
12
tion and actuating opening for
establishing an isolating distance 13
13 Mimic diagram
14 Busbars
max. per phase 8BT3switchgear
18 Make-proof grounding switch
19 Cable sealing ends
20 Cable bracket
22 Vacuum tube
14 E
24 Switch truck
25 Voltage transformer
D High-voltage cubicle
E Low-voltage cubicle D
21
22
23
16
17
24
18
25
19
20

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector truck panel Switch-disconnector panel
and/or and/or
Metering panel Busbar termination panel
or or
and/or and/or
Fig. 4/14 8BT2, 8BT3 product range
4/25 4
4.1.2 Fixed-Mounted NXPLUS C

Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, It is the first medium-voltage circuit-
SF6-Insulated breaker switchgear to make SF6 insu-
lation and vacuum technology cost-
NXPLUS Family efficient in its class – the compact
Switchgear of the NXPLUS family NXPLUS C for voltages up to 24 kV.
provides the plus in performance and Features:
is fit for any terrain. C Hermetically sealed pressure
Unique pressure system system with SF6 filling for the com-
This is the only switchgear world- plete service life
wide with hermetically sealed pres- C Type-tested switchgear – gets by
sure systems. This makes it inde- completely without any work on
pendent of external influences. the gas system during installation
Whether extreme climatic conditions and extensions
or most adverse conditions in conur- C Safe-to-touch enclosure and stand-
bations or industrial centers are ard connections for cable plugs of
concerned, our NXPLUS switchgear the outside-cone type
masters every environmental chal- C Three-pole SF6-insulated module
lenge. At the same time, no work for the three-position disconnector
on the gas system is required on and the circuit-breaker with panel
site, nor throughout the lifetime connection
of the system. C Single-pole-insulated and screened
busbars, plug-in system
Maintenance-free design C Operating mechanisms and trans-
Switchgear of the NXPLUS family re- formers easily accessible outside
quires no maintenance for life. This is the SF6 enclosure
achieved by the gas-tight enclosure C Reduced number of functional
of the high-voltage part, by using SF6 elements due to three-position Photo 4/9 NXPLUS C
as insulating medium and by mainte- disconnector used for isolating
nance-free operating mechanisms. and earthing the outgoing feeder
Insulation technology
Cost-efficiency C Dielectrically unstressed ring-type
Whether you decide for an NXPLUS current transformers C Switchgear container filled with
or an NXPLUS C – you opt for the C Make-proof grounding with vacuum SF6 gas
most compact dimensions, for the circuit-breaker C Characteristics of the SF6 gas:
highest voltages and switching C Measurements on the busbar pos- – nontoxic
capacities and thus certainly for sible without the need for additio- – odorless and uncolored
a cost-efficient solution. nal panels – non-flammable
C Aseismic version optionally – chemically neutral
available – heavier than air
– electronegative (high-quality
insulator)
C Pressure of the SF6 gas in the
switchgear container:
– Rated filling pressure: 150 kPa

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel (basic design)
1 1
15
2 16
17
18
– Design pressure: 180 kPa
Z 30
– Design temperature of the SF6 19
gas: 80 °C 20
– Operating pressure of the bursting
21
disc: ≥ 300 kPa 3
– Bursting pressure: ≥ 400 kPa 4 22
31
5 23
Panel configuration 6
24 32
C Factory-assembled, type-tested 7
C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad 25
C Switchgear container made of 33

26
stainless steel, hermetically tight 27
welded, without any sealings 34
28
C Single-pole busbars with solid
insulation, screened, plug-in type 29
C No maintenance required
C Degree of protection
– IP65 for all high-voltage sections
Front view Cable connection from the front
of the primary conducting path
– IP3XD for the switchgear enclosure Detail Z 14 Actuating opening for “READY TO
8 GROUND” function of three-position
C Vacuum circuit-breaker and vacuum disconnector
contactor 9
15 Option: busbar current transformer,
C Three-position disconnector for 10 plug-in type
isolating/grounding via the 11 16 Busbar, single-pole, fully insulated,
circuit-breaker 12
plug-in type, external surface grounded
C Three-position switch-disconnector 13
17 Option: busbar current transformer
C Make-proof grounding with the 14
18 Switchgear container, hermetically welded,
filled with SF6 gas
help of the vacuum circuit-breaker
19 Three-position disconnector
C Cable connection with outside
1 Low-voltage cubicle 20 OFF pushbutton for circuit-breaker
cone plug-in system acc. to
2 SIPROTEC 4 multifunction protection 21 Vacuum interrupter of circuit-breaker
DIN EN 50181
(example) 22 Pressure disc (bursting disc)
C For wall-mounting and stand-alone
3 Switch position indicator of circuit-breaker 23 Capacitive voltage detection system
installation
4 Actuating opening for the charging of 24 Locking device for “Feeder grounded“
C Installation and possible later ex- the circuit-breaker springs (suitable for locking with padlock)
pansions of existing panels without 5 ON pushbutton for circuit-breaker 25 Disconnecting device for feeder voltage
any gas works 6 “Spring charged“ indicator transformer
C Exchange of the switchgear con- 7 Counter for circuit-breaker 26 Bushing feeder voltage transformer
tainer without any gas works 8 Switch position indicator for “ISOLATING“ 27 Option: feeder voltage transformer
C Transformer can be removed without function of three-position disconnector 28 Option: pressure relief duct
any gas works since it is arranged 9 Ready-for-service indicator 29 Cable connection compartment
outside the gas compartment 10 Switch position indicator for “READY 30 Operating mechanism for three-position
TO GROUND” function of three-position
C Sheet-steel enclosure with sendzimir disconnector
disconnector
coating, front and end walls var- 31 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism
11 Preselection slide and locking device for
nished with the color „light basic“ “ISOLATING/GROUNDING” function of 32 Feeder current transformer
C Low-voltage cubicle can be disas- three-position disconnector 33 Cable connection with outside cone T-plug
sembled, pluggable ring circuits 12 Interrogation lever 34 Actuation for the disconnecting device of
the feeder voltage transformer
C Lateral, metal cable ducts for 13 Actuating opening for “ISOLATING“
function of three-position disconnector
control lines
Fig. 4/15 NXPLUS C circuit-breaker panel, SF6-insulated
4/27 4
SF6-insulated circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C
Rated voltage kV 7,2 12 15 17,5 24

Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28* 36 38 50
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 * 95 95 125
Rated short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
Rated short-time withstand current, 3 s kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
Rated short-circuit making current kA 80 80 80 63 63
Rated peak withstand current kA 80 80 80 63 63
Rated normal current max. A 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

of busbar
Rated normal current max. A 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,000 2,000

of feeders
Rated normal current of Depending on rated current

switch-disconnector panels with fuses of fuse (max. 100 A)
* 42 / 95 kV possible acc. to a number of
international specifications
Table 4/16 Electrical data
Width mm 600,1,200
Height mm 2,250
Depth
Single busbar mm 1,100, 1,225
Double busbar mm 2,370
Weight (approx.) incl. packing:

single busbar, 1 panel kg 900, 1,500
double busbar, 2 panels kg 1,800
Table 4/17 Dimensions and weights
For further technical data, please

refer to the NXPLUS catalog
(HA 53.41).

Medium Voltage
Single busbar panels
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector panel Switch-disconnector Metering panel

panel with fuses
Double busbar panels
Bus sectionalizer Circuit-breaker panel Bus coupling Incoming-feeder coupling
BB1 BB1 BB1

BB2 BB2 BB2
Panel variants of single and double busbars can be combined. BB1 = busbar 1
For further variants, please refer to the NXPLUS C catalog (HA 35.41) BB2 = busbar 2
Fig. 4/16 NXPLUS C panel versions
4/29 4
NXPLUS C Motor operating switching devices, C Dielectrically unstressed ring-type

interlocked electrically and, as an current transformers
NXPLUS is the gas-insulated
option, mechanically C Make-proof grounding with vacuum
switchgear for up to 40.5 kV with the
C Operating mechanisms and trans- circuit-breaker
benefits of vacuum technology – for
formers easily accessible outside C Measurements on the busbar
a high degree of independence in
the SF6 enclosure possible without the need for
operation.
C Reduced number of functional ele- additional panels
Features: ments due to three-position switch
C Hermetically sealed pressure used for isolating and grounding
system with SF6 filling for the the outgoing feeder
complete service life
C Type-tested switchgear – gets by
completely without any work on
the gas system during installation
and extensions
C Easy module replacement thanks
to self-supporting, individual modu-
les which are bolted together
C Safe-to-touch enclosure and stand-
ard connections for cable plugs of
the outside-cone or inside-cone
type
C Three-pole SF6-insulated modules
for the busbar with the three-posi-
tion switch and for the circuit-
breaker with the panel connection
C Single-pole-insulated and screened
couplings for interconnecting the
modules
Photo 4/10 NXPLUS

Medium Voltage
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle 7

2 Multifunction protection SIPROTEC 8
4 7SJ61/ 7SJ62 for control and 1 1
protection 9
3 Mimic diagram 10
4 EMERGENCY-OFF pushbutton, 11 17
mechanical
5 Door to mechanical control board 2 2
12 18
6 Cover of cable connection
compartment
13 19
7 Busbar cover and space for plug-
gable busbar current transformers
3 3
8 Busbar module, welded, SF6 -insu- 20
14
lated
4 4
9 Rupture diaphragm 21
9
10 Three-pole busbar system 5 5
11 Three-position disconnector, SF6 - 22
15
insulated, with the three positions: 6 6
CLOSED – OPEN – READY-TO- 23
GROUND 16
12 Module coupling between busbar
module and circuit-breaker module 24
13 Circuit-breaker module, welded,

SF6 -insulated, with integrated
cable connection Panel with integrated inside cone
14 Vacuum switching tube of
circuit-breaker
9
15 Pressure relief duct
16 Integrated cable connection as 13
inside cone 25 18
17 Low-voltage cubicle, standard: 26
935 mm high
27 23
Option: 1,100 mm high
24
18 Ring-core current transformer
19 Manual and motor operating me-
chanism of three-position switch
20 Mechanical control board Panel with outside cone
21 Manual and motor operating

mechanism of circuit-breaker
22 Voltage transformer connection
socket as inside cone
23 Cable connection compartment
24 Voltage transformer
25 Isolating device for feeder voltage
transformer
26 Voltage transformer connection
socket as outside cone
27 Cable connection as outside cone
Fig. 4/17 NXPLUS circuit-breaker panel with single busbar
4/31 4
SF6-insulated circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS
Rated voltage bis kV 24 40.5
Rated short-duration power-frequency Hz 50/60 50/60

withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 50 85
Rated short-circuit breaking current kV 125 185
Rated short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5
Rated short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5
Rated short-circuit making current max. kA 80 80
Rated peak withstand current max. kA 80 80
Rated normal current of busbar max. A 2,000 1) 2,000 1)
Rated normal current of feeders max. A 2,000 1) 2,000 1)
1) with double busbar 2,500 A possible
Table 4/18 Electrical data
Single Double
busbar busbar
Width mm 600 600

Width of bus sectionalizer panel ≤ 2,000 A (> 2,000 A) mm 900 600
(1,200) (900)
Bus coupler mm – 600/1,200
Metering panel mm – 300
Height mm 2,450 2,600
Depth mm 1,600 1,840
Weight per panel incl. kg 1,200 1,600

packing (approx.)
Table 4/19 Dimensions and weights

Medium Voltage
Busbar fittings
Fittings
upstream of circuit-breaker module
Fittings
downstream of circuit-breaker module 3)
1) Panel connection
fittings
Capacitive 1 x plug-in Voltage Current

voltage cable, transformer, trans-
detection interface plug-in type former
system type 2 or 3
or 1 x plug-in or 2 x plug-in
cable, cable,
interface interface
type 2 4) type 2 or 3
or Voltage or 3 x plug-in
transformer, cable,
plug-in interface
type 4) type 2 or 3
or Surge or 4 x plug-in
arrester, cable,
plug-in interface
type 4) type 2
and Busbar or Solid-

2) current insulated bar
transformer
1) Capacitive voltage detection

system acc. to the LRM or IVDS
Surge system
arrester,
plug-in type 2) Not possible with busbar voltage
transformer
3) Requires cable connection with
container for separate inside cone
4) With single busbar only
Fig. 4/18 NXPLUS panel versions with cable connection as inside cone
Single busbar / double busbar – rated short-circuit breaking current

circuit-breaker panel up to 31.5 kA
– rated normal currents of busbars
With cable connection as inside
and feeders up to 2,000 A
cone for
– rated voltage up to 36 kV/40.5 kV
(single busbar only)
4/33 4
Busbar fittings
Fittings
upstream of circuit-breaker module
Fittings
downstream of circuit-breaker module
1) Panel connection
fittings
Capacitive 1 x plug-in Voltage Current

voltage cable transformer, trans-
detection discon- former
system nectable
or 1 x plug-in or 2 x plug-in
cable, cable
interface
type 2 3)
or Voltage or 3 x plug-in
transformer, cable
plug-in
type 3)
or Surge
arrester,
plug-in
type 3)
and Busbar
2) current
transformer
Surge arrester
or limiter, 1) Capacitive voltage detection
to be plugged in system acc. to the LRM or IVDS
additionally system
2) Not possible with busbar voltage
transformer
3) With single busbar only
Fig. 4/19 NXPLUS panel versions with cable connection as outside cone
Single busbar and double busbar circuit-

breaker panel
With cable connection as outside cone for
– rated voltage up to 24 kV
– rated short-circuit breaking current up
to 25 kA (for 12 kV: 31.5 kA)
– rated normal currents of busbars up
to 2,000 A and feeders up to 1,250 A

Medium Voltage
Bus sectionalizer
for
– rated voltage up to 36 kV/40.5 kV
Busbar
– rated short-circuit breaking current fittings
up to 31.5 kA Fittings upstream of
circuit-breaker
– rated normal current of busbars module
up to 2,000 A
Capacitive Current
voltage trans-
detection former
system
Fig. 4/20 NXPLUS bus sectionalizer
4/35 4
Fixed-mounted circuit-
breaker switchgear, type
8DA and 8DB up to 40.5 kV,
SF6-insulated
Versions
Fixed-mounted circuit-breaker
switchgear
C 8DA10 for single busbar applications
C 8DA11/8DA12 (single- and double-
pole) for traction power supplies
C 8DB10 for double busbar applica-
tions are metal-enclosed, metal-
clad, SF6-insulated switchgear
for indoor installation
Features
Environmental independence
Encapsulation with modular standard
containers made of noncorrosive alu-
minum alloys make 8DA and 8DB
switchgear
C insensitive to aggressive ambient 8DA10 8DA11/8DA12 8DB10
conditions such as panel panel panel
– salt water for single busbar for traction power supplies, for double busbar
applications single- and double-pole ver- applications
– air humidity sions (example 8DA11)
– dust
– temperature
Photo 4/11 8DA/8DB panels
C hermetically tight against ingress of
foreign substances such as e.g.
– dust Nearly no maintenance required Innovation
– dirt Switchgear containers as hermeti- The use of digital secondary
C independent of the installation cally sealed pressure system, no- technology and combined protective
height maintenance switchgear and encap- and control devices results in
sulated cable plugs ensure C a clear integration into process
Compactness C highest security of supply control
The use of SF6-insulation results in C safety of the personnel C flexible, simple adaptations to
small panel width of only 600 mm up C reduced operating costs new system states and thus, in
to 40.5 kV. C economic efficiency of the economical operation
Thus, investment
C existing switchrooms become
effectively usable
C new buildings become more
cost-effective
C inner-city areas are used
economically

Medium Voltage
8DA10 panel for single busbar, 3-pole Panels for traction power supply
8DA11 single-pole 8DA12 double-pole
8DB10 panel for double busbar, 3-pole
1 Low-voltage cubicle
2 Electronic operating interface,
1 e.g. multifunction protection
3 Operating mechanism and interlock for
the three-position switch-disconnector as
2 well as mechanical switch position indica-
tion of the three-position switch discon-
nector and circuit-breaker
4 Pressure gage for gas monitoring of the
4 8 feeder gas compartments
5 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism
3 6 Operating shaft for vacuum switching
tubes
5 7 Voltage detection system
8 Operating shaft for three-position
6 switch-disconnector
Fig. 4/21 Panel design (examples)
4/37 4
Single busbar
1 Busbar container
4 2 Busbar
3 Three-position switch-
5 disconnector
4 Gas-tight bushing be-
6
tween three-position
switch-disconnector and
7
circuit-breaker
8 5 Circuit-breaker container
6 Vacuum interrupter
9 7 Current transformer
8 Pole support plate
9 Panel connection
Double busbar
1
10
4
11 12
5 Pos. 1 to 9, see above
6 switch-disconnector or
switch-disconnector and
busbar
7
8 switch-disconnector
(busbar 1) and switch-
disconnector (busbar 2)
9 12 Busbar switch-discon-
nector for busbar sys-
tem 2
Fig. 4/22 Single-pole design

Medium Voltage
8DA10 8DB10 8DA11/8DA12

3-pole 3-pole single-/double-
Rated values Rated values pole
Rated Rated
-voltage max. kV 12 24 36 40.5 12 24 36 40.5 -voltage acc. to kV 15 25
-frequency 50 Hz1) 50 Hz1) EN 50163 and IEC 60850
-short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50 70 85 28 50 70 85 -isolation voltage max. kV 17.5 27.5
-lightning surge withstand voltage kV 75 125 170 185 75 125 170 185 -frequency Hz 16.7 50/60
-short-circuit breaking current max. 40 kA max. 40 kA -power-frequency to ground kV 50 95
-short-time withstand current, 3s max. 40 kA max. 40 kA withstand over isolating kV 60 110
voltage distance
-short-time making current max. 100 kA max. 100 kA
-peak to ground kV 125 200
-peak withstand current max. 100 kA max. 100 kA withstand over isolating kV 145 220
-normal current of busbar max. 4,000 A max. 4,000 A current distance
-normal current of feeders max. 2,500 A max. 2,500 A -short-circuit breaking current max. 31.5 kA
Dimensions in mm -short-circuit making current max. 80 kA
Compartment (width) -normal current of max. 2,500 A
Circuit-breaker panel 600 600 busbar
Switch-disconnector panel 600 – -normal current of feeders max. 2,000 A
Transverse coupling – 600 Dimensions in mm
Longitudinal coupling (2 panels) 2 x 600 2 x 600 Compartment (width)
Longitudinal coupling for connection 2 x 600 2 x 600 Incoming-feeder panel 600
in the cable basement (2 panels) Section feeder panel 600
Switchgear termination (end wall) Switchgear termination end wall
for left and right switchgear cabinet side 152 152 for left and right 152
Depth switchgear side
for all panel types 1,625 2,660 Depth
Height (switchgear front) for 8DA11, single-pole 865
Standard 2,350 2,350 for 8DA12, double-pole 1,245
with high low-voltage cubicle 2,700 2,700 Height switchgear front
with make-proof busbar 2,700 2,700 Standard 2,350
grounding switch Height switchgear rear side
Height switchgear rear side Standard 1,850
Standard 1,850 2,100
with make-proof busbar 1,960 2,210
grounding switch
with busbar isolation without 2,320 2,570
additional panel loss
Busbar module without disconnection option:
With voltage transformer up to 24 kV 2,220 2,390
36/40.5 kV 2,470 2,640
With cable connection for
– 1 connector, connection type 2 2,050 2,300
– 2 or 3 connectors, connection type 2 2,110 2,360
– 4 to 6 connectors, connection type 2 2,250 2,500
With connection for all-insulated bar2) 1,930 2,180
Busbar modules with disconnection option:
With voltage transformer up to 24 kV 2,420 2,590
36/40.5 kV 2,670 2,840
With cable connection for
– 4 to 6 connectors, connection type 2 2,380 2,630
With connection for all-insulated bar2) 2,130 2,380
1) 60 Hz on request
2) The busbar supplier must be consulted about the dimensions
Table 4/20 Electrical data, dimensions
4/39 4
Circuit-breaker panel Busbar fittings
Fitting at the
circuit-breaker housing
Fitting over the
panel connection
1) Fitting at the
Panel connection panel termination
variants
Ohmic
voltage
1) Capacitive voltage Voltage 2) Current divider
detection system transformer, Plug-in cable transformer
fixed or dis-
2) – For plug-in cable connec- connectable
tion with inside cone acc.
to EN 50181 or all-insulated bar,
– Max. of 6 connections or Make-proof solid or gas
grounding insulation
per conductor possible, switch
depending on the con-
nector size 3)
Inductive
3) The use of these modules Cable or voltage
or
reduces the possible num- busbar connec- transformer
ber of connectable plug-in tion, fixed or
cables by 1 piece each disconnectable and/or 3)
Inductive voltage
transformer,
or Longitudinal connected via cable
disconnection
without additional and/or 3)
space require- Ohmic
ments voltage divider
or Busbar current
transformer
and/or 3)
Surge arrester
Switch-disconnector panel Busbar fittings
Fittings and connection

options same as for Fitting at the
riser housing
circuit-breaker panel
Fitting over the
panel connection
1)
Panel connection
variants
Longitudinal coupling
Busbar fittings
Consisting of 2 panels
(circuit-breaker arranged
optionally in the left or
right panel)
Fitting at the
1) riser housing
Busbar Current
current transformer
transformer
Fig. 4/23 8DA10 single busbar panels, 3-pole (panels 8DA11, single-pole and 8DA12, double-pole on request)

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel Busbar fittings

BB1
BB2
Fitting at the
circuit-breaker housing
Fitting over the
panel connection
1)
Fitting at the
Panel connection panel termination
variants
Ohmic
current
Voltage 2) Current divider
or Plug-in cable
transformer, transformer
fixed
BB1 BB2
or All-insulated
or Voltage bar, solid or
transformer, gas insulation
BB1 BB2 disconnec-
table
and/or 3)
Inductive
Make-proof voltage
or
grounding transformer
switch
BB1 BB2
and/or 3)
Inductive voltage
transformer,
or Cable or bar connected via cable
BB1, connection,
fixed and/or 3)
BB1 BB2 BB2 Ohmic voltage
divider
or BB1, Cable or bar

BB2 connection,
HA35-2444 eps
BB1 BB2 disconnectable

and/or 3)
Surge arrester
or Busbar
current
BB1 BB2 transformer
or BB1 Longitudinal
BB2 disconnection
without additional
space require-
ments
Abbreviations
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2
1) Capacitive voltage detection system
2) – For plug-in cable connection with inside cone acc. to EN 50181
– Max. of 6 connections per conductor possible, depending on the connector size
3) The use of these modules reduces the possible number of connectable
plug-in cables by 1 piece each
Fig. 4/24 8DB10 double busbar panels, 3-pole
4/41 4
Transverse coupling Busbar fittings

BB1
BB2
1) Fitting at the
riser housing
or Voltage Current
transformer, transformer
fixed
BB1 BB2
or Voltage
tranformer,
or Make-proof
grounding
switch
BB1 BB2
or Cable or bar
BB1, connection,
BB1 BB2 BB2 fixed 1)
or BB1, Cable or bar

BB2 connection,
or Busbar
current
BB1 BB2 transformer
or BB1 BB2 Longitudinal

disconnection
without additonal
space require-
ments
Abbreviations
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2

Medium Voltage
for busbar 1 and 2 Busbar fittings BB1
BB2
consisting of 2
assembled panels
1) 1)
Busbar current Current

BB1 transformer at transformer
BB1
oder Busbar current

transformer at
BB2 BB2
Busbar fittings
for connection in the BB1
BB2
cable basement
consisting of 2
Fitting at the
separate panels circuit-breaker housing
1) 1) 1) 1)
Fitting above the
panel connection
Busbar Ohmic
BB1 current voltage
transformer divider
at BB1 Panel connection
variants:
or Busbar or Single plug-in cable,
current sizes 1 to 3 or bar (solid
BB2 transformer or gas insulation)
at BB2
Fitting per panel at

the circuit-breaker or
riser panel termination
Current
transformer
Abbreviations
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2
4/43 4
Generator level
G
Primary
distribution level
4.2 Secondary Utilities

Secondary
Distribution Systems, distribution level, Utilities
Utilities cus-
tomer transfer
distribution
substation,
substation substation industrial plant
Switchgear and with switchgear of
the 8DJ and 8DH
types
Substations
General information
In its basic version, the secondary
distribution system consists of con-
sumer substations with ring-main
feeders and directly fed transformer
feeders.
In order to minimize transmission
losses and attain an economical solu-
Low-voltage
tion for switchgear and transformer distribution
substations, the system configuration
and switchgear technology should be
optimally designed and dimensioned. Further
To limit transmission losses, the utilities
substations
packaged transformer substations/
consumer substations must be Fig. 4/27 Secondary distribution system
located directly in the load center.
Therefore, switchgear and substa- Furthermore, the large number of Block-type switchgear are ring-main
tions with a high degree of safety substations within the distribution units available with various schemes.
and reliability and, at the same time, system asks for a cost-effective solu-
minimum dimensions are to be Medium-voltage ring-main units and
tion, e.g. switchgear made of cli-
preferred. switchgear in secondary distribution
mate-independent, maintenance-free
The large number of substations systems must reliably meet the oper-
switching devices, making mainte-
installed in the distribution system ational requirements regarding:
nance work unnecessary throughout
requires a high degree of stand- C Various layouts of the different
the entire service life of the substa-
ardization and the application of switchgear types for optimum ap-
tions in operation. Block-type ring-
technically mature products. The plication in the different substation
main units (non-extendable) and mod-
switchgear types described below sizes
ular switchgear (extendable) have
fulfill these quality requirements in C Personal safety
been developed for such packaged
every respect. C Operational reliability
transformer substations. Extendable
C Maximum possible environmental
The packaged transformer substa- switchgear consists of switch-discon-
independence
tions consisting of medium-voltage nectors, optionally with or without
C Cost-efficiency
switchgear, transformer and low- HV HRC fuses, circuit-breaker panels,
voltage distribution are available as metering panels and bus section-
factory-assembled units or as single alizer panels.
components and can be installed in
any building and room at the site of
installation.

Medium Voltage
Siemens has developed switchgear The 8DJ secondary distribution

Standards
which complies with all the afore- switchgear and 8DH switchgear are
mentioned requirements. type-tested, factory-assembled, The 8DJ, 8DH10 and SIMOSEC
metal-enclosed switchgear with switchgear correspond to the following
8DJ secondary distribution SF6 gas insulation. They have been standards and specifications:
switchgear and 8DH switchgear proven to reliably comply with all
IEC VDE
requirements of operation with
are metal-enclosed, gas-insulated standard standard
regard to:
switchgear for indoor installation.
IEC 60694 VDE 0670 Part 1,000
C 8DJ type as ring-main units in
Maximum personal safety
block-type construction, extension IEC 60298 VDE 0670 Part 6
installation not possible C Arc-fault-tested stainless-steel
IEC 62271-100 VDE 0671 Part 100
C 8DH type as modular switchgear vessel and cable connection com-
“line-up and extendable type“ in partment tested on the resistance IEC 62271-102 VDE 0671 Part 102
panel-type construction to accidental arcs
IEC 60265-1 VDE 0670 Part 301
C Logic interlockings
More than 400,000 8DJ/8DH-type
C Guided operation IEC 62271-105 VDE 0671 Part 105
switchgear panels are in operation
C Capacitive voltage indication
worldwide. IEC 61243-5 VDE 0682 Part 415,
integrated in switchgear
DIN EN 61243-5
C Isolation from supply can be safely
Application areas
tested on the closed switching IEC 60529 VDE 0470 Part 1
8DJ/8HD switchgear is used in front
IEC 60071 VDE 0111
secondary distribution systems, e.g. C Locked and grounded covers for
substations, customer transfer sub- the fuse section and the cable
stations and distribution substations terminal compartment Instrument transformers (e.g. for
of power supply companies and 8DH or SIMOSEC switchgear)
municipal utilities or industrial plants.
Further information can be IEC VDE
Typical application areas are obtained at: standard standard
C Wind power stations
www.siemens.com/ptd Current transformers
C High-rise buildings
C Airports IEC 60044-1 VDE 0414 Part 1
C Lignite open-cast mining
Voltage transformers
C Underground stations
C Sewage plants IEC 60044-2 VDE 0414 Part 2
C Docks
Combined transformers for 8DH
C Traction power supplies
switchgear
C Automobile industry
C Oil industry IEC 60044-3 VDE 0414 Part 5
C Chemical industry
C Cement industry Table 4/21 Standards
4/45 4
Specifications Insulation Type of Busbar Compartments

construction, system
installation
Access Operational Type of

option availability compartment
LSC 2A
Cable connection
Medium-voltage Gas-insulated Non-extendable
indoor Single Accessible
switchgear,
type-tested HV HRC fuse
according to compartment
IEC 62271-200,
IEC 60298
Busbar
Not
accessible
Switching devices
LSC 2A/B
Cable connection
Gas-insulated Extendable
Single Accessible Busbar
HV HRC fuse
Switching devices
Not
accessible
Air-insulated Extendable LSC 2A/B

Single Accessible Busbar
Circuit-breaker
Cable connection
Disconnector
Not
accessible
LSC2 A/B Busbar
1)
LS = circuit-breaker Accessible HV HRC fuse
2)
LTS = switch-disconnector
3)
LST = circuit-breaker with disconnecting function
4)
PM = partition of metal Cable connection
Switch-
Not disconnector and
accessible
grounding switch
Circuit-breaker
Table 4/21a Secondary distribution systems – selection matrix

Medium Voltage
Accidental Feeder Application, use Switchgear

arc or type
classifi- switching
cation device
Access Compart-
control ment class
Interlocking PM4) IAC RK2) Ring-main unit for packaged 8DJ10

control (metal (IEC TR2) transformer substations,
partitions) 60298) LS13) standard type 1:
Tool- – for substations with
dependent very narrow widths
– transformer cable connection
at the top
Interlocking
control
Ring-main unit for packaged 8DJ20
transformer substations,
standard type 2:
– for compact substations,
substations with control aisle
– transformer cable connection
at the front (standard)
Interlocking PM4) IAC RK2)

control (metal (IEC TR2)
partitions) 60298) LS11)
Tool- LS21)
dependent LTx1)
LST3)
SE2) Switchgear for substations, 8DH10
Tool- ME1 customer transfer substations,
dependent ME2 distribution and switching
ME32) substations, circuit-breaker
switchgear up to 630 A
Interlocking
control
PM4) IAC LS111)2)

Tool- (metal (IEC LS321)2)
dependent partitions) 60298)
Interlocking
control
Interlocking
control
Switchgear for substations, SIMOSEC

customer transfer substations,
distribution and switching
substations, circuit-breaker
Tool- PM4) IAC RK1) switchgear up to 1,250 A
dependent (metal (IEC TR1)
partitions) 60298) LS12)
SE1)
Interlocking
control ME1
ME31)
HF
4/47 4
Switchgear Technical data

type
Rated lightning surge Rated Maximum rated short- Rated operating

withstand voltage Up voltage Ur time withstand current current
7.2/12 17.5/24 [kV] [kA] [kA] for busbar for feeder
[kV] [kV] 1s 3s [A] [A]
8DJ10
60/75 95/125 7.2–17.5 25 20 630 up to 630

60/75 95/125 7.2– 24 20 20 630 up to 630
8DJ20
60/75 95/125 7.2–17.5 25 20 630 up to 630

60/75 95/125 7.2– 24 20 20 630 up to 630
8DH10 630 1)
60/75 95/125 7.2–17.5 25 20 max. 1,250 up to 630
60/75 95/125 7.2– 24 20 20 630 1) up to 630
max. 1,250
SIMOSEC
60/75 95/125 7.2–17.5 25 11.5 max. 1,250 up to 1,250
60/75 95/125 7.2– 24 20 20 max. 1,250 up to 1,250
1)
Standard
Table 21b Secondary distribution systems – selection matrix / technical data

Medium Voltage
Operational reliability / Maximum environmental

no maintenance required independence
C Non-corrosive, hermetically tight C Robust, non-corrosive, no-mainte-
welded, stainless steel vessel nance operating mechanisms
without gaskets, stable under vari- C No-maintenance, climate-inde-
able pressures pendent and safe-to-touch cable
C Insulating gas which complies with connections
the requirements to insulating and C Free from leakage currents and
extinguishing tasks throughout the partial discharges
entire service life C No-maintenance, safe-to-touch
C Single-pole enclosure outside the HV HRC fuse assembly that is
vessel not affected by climatic impacts
C Clear ‘ready-for-service’ indicator
Environmental compatibility
independent of temperature and
site altitude C Continuous and integrated
C Complete protection zone of environmental management from
switch-disconnector/fuse assem- manufacture to disposal
bly even with thermal overload of C Tightly sealed vessel, virtually
the HV HRC fuse (thermal protec- no loss of gas
tion function) C Easy installation and
C Easy replacement of HV HRC commissioning
fuses without tools
Quality and environment
C Reliable electrical and mechanical
switching device that requires no Quality and environmental mange-
maintenance ment systems in compliance with
DIN EN ISO.
Cost-efficiency
The switchgear is cost-effient not
only in purchase but also in service
due to its compactness and minimum
space requirements as well as its
no-maintenance, climate independ-
ent-design.
4/49 4
2 ring-main feeders 3 ring-main feeders 4 ring-main feeders

1 transformer feeder 1 transformer feeder 2 transformer feeders
Scheme 10 Scheme 71 Scheme 62
Photo 4/12 Ring-main transformer block versions
8DJ10 secondary distribu- Specific features of the standard – for ground cables via adapter
tion switchgear: standard type 8DJ10, the narrowest type systems
type 1 by Siemens C Easy installation
C 2 heights available C Detachable lever mechanism (op-
7.2–24 kV, gas-insulated, – 1,360 mm tional: rotary operating mechanism)
non-extendable – block-type – 1,650 mm C With capacitive voltage detection
construction C Switchgear design with up to system at ring-main feeders
6 feeders C Optional motor operating mecha-
8DJ10 secondary distribution C Three-pole primary enclosure, nism for switch-disconnector
switchgear is factory-assembled, metal-enclosed (24 V DC up to 230 V AC for
type-tested and metal-enclosed C Insulating gas SF6 remote control)
switchgear for indoor installation. C Gas-tight, welded switchgear ves-
Cost-efficiency
Application areas sel made of stainless steel, with
Extremely low ”life-cycle costs”
8DJ10 secondary distribution welded-in bushings for electrical
and maximum availability due to:
switchgear is used for power distri- connections and mechanical com-
C Maintenance-free concept
bution in substations – also for se- ponents
C Climatic independence
vere ambient conditions – e.g. in: C No maintenance required
C Minimum space requirements
C Industry C Independent of climate
C Damp, sandy or dusty areas C Three-position switch-disconnector
C Simple outdoor substations with switch-disconnector and
make-proof grounding switch
Main fields of application function
C Compact substations C Cable connection for bushings with
C Compact transformer substations, outside cone
e.g. for wind power stations C Connection with cable plugs
C Garage and vault substations – in ring-main feeders with bolted
C Low-lying and underfloor contact (M16)
substations – in transformer feeders with
C Pavement substations plug- in contact
C Accessible substations C Connection of conventional cable
C Extremely narrow designs sealing ends (cable feeders)
More than 80,000 8DJ10 secondary – for thermo-plastic-insulated
distribution switchgear is in operation cables via AKE 20/630 elbow
worldwide. adapter (by Siemens)

Medium Voltage
8DJ10 switchgear
Rated voltage Ur kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

Rated insulation level:
Rated short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28 36 38 50
withstand voltage Ud
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up kV 60 75 95 95 125
Rated frequency fr Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated normal current Ir
for ring-main feeders A 400 or 630 400 or 630 400 or 630 400 or 630 400 or 630
for transformer feeders depending on the A 200 200 200 200 200
HV HRC fuse link
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 1 s kA – – – 16 16
20 20 20 20 20
25 25 25 25 –
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 3 s (option) kA 20 20 20 20 20
Rated peak withstand current Ip kA – – – 40 40

50 50 50 50 50
63 63 63 63 –
Rated short-circuit making current Ima 1)
for transformer feeder kA 25 25 25 25 25
for ring-main feeder kA – – – 40 40
50 50 50 50 50
63 63 63 63 –
Ambient temperature T °C – 40 to +70
Pressure values for insulation:
Rated filling pressure pre (at 20°C) hPa (absolute) 1,500
1) Depending on HV HRC fuse set; please observe the max. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse elements
Table 4/22 Electrical data, temperature, filling pressure
Supply overview Scheme 10 Scheme 71 Scheme 62
2 ring-main feeders and 3 ring-main feeders and 4 ring-main feeders and

1 transformer feeder 1 transformer feeder 2 transformer feeder
(identification symbols 2RK + 1T) (identification symbols 3RK + 1T) (identification symbols 4RK + 2T)
Width mm 710 1,060 1,410
Depth 1) mm 775 775 775
Height mm 1,360 1,650 1,360 650 1,360 650
Weight 2) 270 300 340 390 500 580

net weight approx. kg
RK = ring-main feeder
T = transformer feeder
1) Additional wall distance required: ≥ 15 mm
2) Depending on the equipment, e.g. motor operating mechanism
Table 4/23 Dimensions and weights: block versions consisting of ring-main and transformer feeders
For further technical data: please refer to the catalog HA 45.11 8DJ10 switch-disconnector system
4/51 4
Ring-main transformer block Transformer feeder Ring-main feeder

Section A-A Section B-B
A B 17
11
24
1 18
2 12
25
3
13
20
4
5 14
30
6
15 20
7 10
8 19
26
L1 L2 L3
9 21 26 21
2
10 31
16
32
22 22
27 29
Standard Cable connection with screw contact

B A Cable connection for cable (M 16), optionally for:
elbow plug with plug-in contact, – cable T-plugs or right-angle cable plugs
Scheme 10
cable routing to the back – AKE 20/630 right-angle adapter
(by Siemens) for conventional cable
sealing ends
1 Feeder designation 23 10 Lock for cable compartment cover

label 11 HV HRC fuse assembly, cover
2 Sockets for voltage removed
detection system 18 12 Lock for HV HRC fuse assembly
3 Ready-for-service 14 Rating and type plate
indicator
16 Arrangement of cable connections
4 Switch position indi-
cation for grounding 17 Cable elbow plug with plug-in
function ”OPEN – contact
Option
GROUNDED” Cable connection for straight 18 Transformer cable connection
5 Switch position indi- cable plugs with plug-in contact, 20 Three-position switch-disconnector
cation for switch-dis- cable routing to the top
21 Switchgear vessel, filled with
connecting function SF6 gas
”CLOSED – OPEN”
22 Cable connection compartment
6 Locking device
(option for three- 17 23 Straight cable plug with plug-in
position switch- contact
disconnector) 24 Cover of the HV HRC fuse
7 Manual operating 18 compartment
mechanism for the 25 Spring-operated/stored-energy
grounding function mechanism
8 Manual operating 26 Cover of cable connection
mechanism for the compartment
switch-disconnecting Option
27 Grounding connection M12
function (only for schemes 10 and 71)
cable connection for elbow 29 Cable support rail
9 Short-circuit/ground-
plug with plug-in contact, 30 Spring-operated mechanism
fault indicator (option)
cable routing to the right
31 Ring-main cable connection
32 Option: Elbow adapter AKE 20/630
Personnel safety with conventional cable sealing end
All feeder covers can only be opened when (M16 bolted contact)
the respective three-position switch-discon-
nector is switched to ”GROUNDED”.
Fig. 4/28 Switching panel design – example

Medium Voltage
Radial transformer panel Ring-main transformer block Ring-main transformer block

1 transformer feeder 2 ring-main feeders 3 ring-main feeders
1 radial cable connection 1 transformer feeder 2 transformer feeders
Scheme 01 Scheme 10 Scheme 82
Photo 4/13 Typical versions
8DJ20 secondary distribu- Specific features of the standard – for ground cables via adapter
tion switchgear: standard type 8DJ20, the most diverse type systems
type 2 by Siemens C Easy installation
C 3 heights available C Detachable lever mechanism (op-
7.2–24 kV, gas-insulated, – 1,200 mm tional: rotary operating mechanism)
non-extendable – block-type – 1,400 mm C With capacitive voltage detection
construction – 1,760 mm system at ring-main feeders
C Switchgear design with up to C Optional motor operating mecha-
8DJ20 ring-main units are factory- 5 feeders nism for switch-disconnector
assembled, type-tested and metal- C Three-pole primary enclosure, (24 V DC up to 230 V AC for
enclosed switchgear for indoor metal-enclosed remote control)
installation. C Insulating gas SF6 C Various possibilities for transformer
Typical uses C Gas-tight, welded switchgear ves- cable connection:
8DJ20 secondary distribution sel made of stainless steel, with – Standard: front
switchgear is used for power distri- welded-in bushings for electrical – Option: bottom, for cable routing
bution in substations – also for se- connections and mechanical to the rear
vere ambient conditions – e.g. in: components
Cost-efficiency
C Industry C Maintenance-free
Extremely low ”life-cycle costs”
C Damp, sandy or dusty areas C Independent of climate
and maximum availability due to:
C Simple outdoor substations C Three-position switch-disconnector
C Maintenance-free concept
with switch-disconnector and
Main fields of application C Independence of climate
C Integrated substations C Minimum space requirements
function
C Integrated transformer substations, C Cable connection for bushings
e.g. for wind power stations with outside cone
C Garage and vault substations C Connection with cable plugs
C Low-lying and underfloor – in ring-main feeders with bolted
substations contact (M16)
C Pavement substations – in transformer feeders with
C Accessible substations plug-in contact
C Connection of conventional cable
sealing ends
– for thermo-plastic-insulated
cables via AKE 20/630 elbow
adapter (by Siemens)
4/53 4
8DJ20 switchgear
Rated voltage Ur kV 7.2 12 15 17. 5 24
Rated insulation level:

Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud kV 20 28 36 38 50
Rated normal current Ir

for ring-main feeders A 400 or 630 400 or 630 400 or 630 400 or 630 400 or 630
for transformer feeders depending on the A 200 200 200 200 200
HV HRC fuse link
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 1 s kA – – – 16 16

20 20 20 20 20
25 25 25 25 –
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 3 s (option) kA 20 20 20 20 20

50 50 50 50 50
63 63 63 63 –
Rated short-circuit making current Ima 1)

for transformer feeder kA 25 25 25 25 25
for ring-main feeder kA – – – 40 40
50 50 50 50 50
63 63 63 63 63
Ambient temperature T °C – 40 to +70

Rated filling pressure pre (at 20°C) hPa (absolute) 1,500
1) Depending on HV HRC fuse set; please observe the max. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse elements
Ring-main/transformer block Transformer feeder Ring-main feeder

B A Section A-A Section B-B
L1 L2 L3
4 5
B A
Standard Cable connection with bolted contact (M16):
Scheme 10 Cable connection for elbow plug – for cable T-plug or cable elbow plug
(option: for cable T-plug), cable – for conventional cable sealing ends via
routing to the bottom AKE 20/630 elbow adapter (by Siemens)
1 Switchgear vessel, filled with SF6 gas 4 Transformer cable connection: 6 HV HRC fuse assembly
2 Three-position switch-disconnector Cable elbow plug with plug-in
contact (option) For further technical data:
3 Operating mechanism for three-position
switch-disconnector 5 Ring-main connection: cable T-plug please refer to the catalog HA 45.31,
with bolted contact (option) 8DJ20 switch-disconnector system
Fig. 4/29 Panel design – Example

Medium Voltage
Scheme Dimensions Weight1) Scheme Dimensions Weight1)

Components shown Width Depth2) Height net weight Components shown Width Depth2) Height net weight
with dashes are approx. with dashes are approx.
optional mm mm**) mm kg optional mm mm**) mm kg
Radial transformer panels

Scheme 01 1 transformer feeder and Scheme 21 1 ring-main connection and
K Radial cable 1 ring-main connection Radial cable con 1 transformer feeder
connection in- (identification symbol 1T) nection K(E) (with (identification symbols 1K(E) + 1T)
coming feeder 510 775 1,200 140 make-proof grounding 710 775 1,200 200
1,400 160 switch) 1,400 210
1,760 200 K(E) T 1,760 250
K T
Single panel
Scheme 02 1 ring-main feeder with
a) Ring-main radial cable connection
connection (identification symbol 1RK)
b) Radial cable 710 775 1,200 150
connection 1,400 170
RK K 1,760 210
Block versions, consisting of ring-main and transformer feeders (with HV HRC fuse assembly)
Scheme 10*) 2 ring-main feeders and Scheme 20 1 ring-main feeder and
1 transformer feeder 1 transformer feeder
(identification symbol 2RK + 1T) (identification symbol 1RK + 1T)
1,060 775 1,200 280 710 775 1,200 200
1,400 300 1,400 210
1,760 340 T 1,760 250
T
Scheme 71*) 3 ring-main feeders and Scheme 72 4 ring-main feeders and

1,410 775 1,200 340 1,760 775 1,200 420
1,400 360 1,400 440
T 1,760 400 T 1,760 480
Scheme 81*) 3 ring-main feeders and Scheme 82 4 ring-main feeders and

1,410 775 1,200 400 1,760 775 1,200 470
1,400 420 1,400 500
RV RV RV T 1,760 460 T 1,760 540
Block versions, consisting of ring-main feeders (without HV HRC fuse installation)

Scheme 11 2 ring-main feeders Scheme 32*) 3 ring-main feeders
(identification symbol 2RK) (identification symbol 3RK)
710 775 1,200 160 1,060 775 1,200 210
1,400 170 1,400 230
1,760 210 1,760 270
Scheme 70* 4 ring-main feeders Scheme 84 5 ring-main feeders

(identification symbol 4RK) (identification symbol 5RK)
1,410 775 1,200 280 1,760 775 1,200 350
1,400 300 1,400 380
1,760 340 1,760 420
1) Depending on the equipment, e.g. motor operating mechanism Identification symbol: RK = ring-main feeder
2) With transformer cable routing to the bottom K = cable feeder
*) Scheme also suitable for outdoor enclosures T = transformer feeder
**) Additional wall distance required: ≥ 15 mm K(E) = cable feeder for radial cable connection
with make-proof grounding switch
Fig. 4/30 8DJ20 switchgear, up to 24 kV, SF6-insulated, supply overview, schemes
4/55 4
8DH10 switchgear up to
24 kV, gas-insulated,
extendable
Modular design for consumer

substations
Application
8DH10 switchgear is factory-assem-
bled, type-tested and three-phase
metal-enclosed single-busbar
switchgear for indoor installation:
C Up to 24 kV
C Feeder currents up to 630 A
C Busbar currents up to 1250 A
Photo 4/14 8DH10 extensible switchgear in modular construction
Typical uses
8DH10 switchgear is used – even un-
Reliability C Busbar arrangement for panel
der severe environmental conditions
C Type- and routine-tested blocks within the switchgear
– for power distribution in secondary
C Standardized and manufactured vessel filled with SF6 gas
distribution systems, e.g. in:
using numerically controlled C Single-phase, cast-resin-insulated,
C Substations, customer transfer sub-
machines enclosed, air-insulated HV HRC
stations, distribution substations
C Quality management system fuse assembly.
and switching substations of power
according to DIN EN ISO 9001 Fuse assembly arranged at the top,
supply and public utilities
C More than 400,000 8DJ/8DH pan- outside the switchgear vessel
C Industrial plants
els have been in service for many C All live parts are protected against
Examples years all over the world humidity, pollution, dust and small
C Wind power stations animals
The 8DH10 switchgear complies with
C High-rise buildings C Connection of cable T-plugs or ca-
the requirements for medium-voltage
C Airports ble elbow plugs for thermo-plastic-
switchgear, e.g.:
C Lignite open-cast mines insulated cables up to 300 mm2
C High degree of security of opera-
C Underground stations C All switching devices are accom-
tion, reliability and availability
C Sewage treatment plants modated safe-to-touch in earthed
C No gas work at site
C Port facilities enclosure, HV HRC fuse assembly
C Easy installation and extension
C and many other applications and cable sealing ends safe-to-
C Operation not influenced by
touch in grounded enclosure
Modular design environmental conditions
C Access to HV HRC fuses and to
C Individual panels and panel blocks C Minimum space requirements
cable connection compartment only
can be freely combined and C Fully insulated, single-pole, plug-in
possible in grounded state
extended – without the need busbars for interconnection of
C Hermetically sealed switchgear
for work involving SF6 gas at site individual panels and panel blocks
vessel; all bushings for electrical
C Low-voltage cubicles can be sup-
connections and operating mecha-
plied in two overall heights and are
nism welded gas-tight – without
wired to the panel by means of
seals
plug-in connections

Medium Voltage
8DH10 switchgear station
Rated insulation level

Rated voltage Ur kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud kV 20 28 35 38 50
Rated normal current Ir for:

– ring-main feeders A 400 or 630
– transformer feeders depending on the A 200
HV HRC fuse link
– circuit-breaker feeders A 400 or 630
– section sectionaliser panels (type LT1, LT2) A 400 or 630
Rated normal current Ir for

– busbar A 630 (standard), 1,250 (option)
– metering panels A up to 630
Rated short-time withstand current Ik kA – – – 16 16

for switchgear with tk = 1 s 20 20 20 20 20
25 25 25 25 –
Rated short-time withstand current Ik kA 20 20 20 20 20

for switchgear with tk = 1 s (option)

50 50 50 50 50
63 63 63 63 –
Rated short-circuit making current Ima kA – – – 40 40

– ring-main feeders 50 50 50 50 40
– circuit-breaker feeders 63 63 63 63 –
– transformer feeders, depending on the 25 25 25 25 25
cut-off current of the HV HRC fuse
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc kA – – – 16 16

for circuit-breaker feeders 20 20 20 20 20
25 25 25 25 –
Ambient temperature T
without secondary equipment Class “Minus 25 indoor“ (-25 °C up to +70 °C)
Panels with secondary equipment
and circuit-breaker panels Class “Minus 5 indoor“ (-5 °C up to +55 °C)

Rated filling pressure pre (at 20 °C) hPa (absolute) 1,500
Minimum operating pressure pme for insulation hPa (absolute) 1,300
C Three-position switch-disconnector One panel block can comprise C The 8DH10 switchgear requires
with switch positions: CLOSED – up to 4 feeders. no maintenance (VDE 0670
OPEN – GROUNDED. Operation as C Circuit-breaker panels are supplied Part 1000/IEC 60694)
multi-purpose switch-disconnector with an integrated three-phase
with the functions: current transformer at the cable
– switch-disconnector and connection for connection of
– make-proof grounding switch protection systems, optionally for
C Each 8DH10 switchgear can digital protection systems or
consist of individual panels CT-operated protection systems.
(preferably) or panel blocks – For further technical data:
depending on the requirements. please refer to the catalog
HA 41.11 8DH10 switchgear
4/57 4
Ring-main feeder Section Transformer feeder Section
61 1 61
1
2 31
32 34
33
3 23 3
11 11
4 38 23
12 12
5 24 5 35
13 13
6 6
14 7 14
7 15 15
15 15
8
9 25 9 36
16 16
17 17 37
26
18 18
10 27 10 27
19 28 19 28
20 20
29 29
21 21
22 22
Type RK Type TR
Circuit-breaker feeder Section

1 Option: low-voltage cubicle
2 Niche for customer-side low-voltage equipment,
with swing-out cover
3 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting
function “CLOSED – OPEN”
4 Switch position indication for grounding function
43 “OPEN – GROUNDED”
44 61 5 Ready-for-service indicator
6 Rating and type plate
45 7 Mimic diagram
46
47 8 Option: short-circuit/ground-fault indicator
48 7 9 Sockets for voltage detection system
46
49 51 10 Arrangement of busbars
50 52 11 Feeder designation label
11 12
12 Option: locking device for three-position
5 13 switch-disconnector
6 63 24
13 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding function
8 3
15 14 Manual operating mechanism for the
9 4
switch-disconnecting function
53 25
15 15 Lock for cable compartment cover
14
23 16 Arrangement of cable connections
26
16 17 Busbar system
54
10 17 18 Switchgear vessel, filled with SF6 gas
27
18 19 Busbar connection
28
19 20 Pressure relief device
29
20 21 Busbar compartment
55
21 22 Ground busbar with ground connection
22
Type LS1 (without voltage transformer)
Fig. 4/31 Switchgear panel design (example)

Medium Voltage
Billing metering panel, air-insulated Section
61
1
2 2
40
11
39
39
6
41
7 42
62
22
30
Type ME1
23 Three-position switch-disconnector Vacuum circuit-breaker:

24 Spring-operated mechanism 45 Opening for the operating crank handle
– for closing with manual operation
25 Bushing for cable plug with screw contact (M16) – for emergency stop with motor operation
26 Option: cable T-plug 46 Operating mechanism box with operating mechanism
27 Cable compartment cover 47 Mechanical ON pushbutton (not applicable with
28 Cable connection compartment spring-operated mechanism)
29 Cable support rail 48 Mechanical OFF pushbutton
30 Grounding connection for grounding set 49 Operations counter
31 HV HRC fuse assembly, cover removed 50 “Spring charged“ indication
32 Handle for exchanging the HV HRC fuse insert 51 Vacuum interrupter
33 Lock for HV HRC fuse assembly 52 Switch position indication
34 Cover for the HV HRC fuse compartment 53 Option: lock between vacuum circuit-breaker and
35 Spring-operated / stored-energy mechanism three-position switch-disconnector
36 Bushing for cable plug with bolted contact 54 Option: three-phase current transformer
(protective transformer)
37 Cable elbow plug with plug-in contact
55 Cable-type slip-on current transformer
38 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting
function “CLOSED – OPEN“ with “HV HRC fuse 56 Pluggable 4MT3 voltage transformer on the busbar
tripped“ or “f-release tripped“, if applicable 57 Bushing for connecting the pluggable voltage
39 Cover for access to the busbar connection and to transformers
the instrument transformers, screwed 58 Plug connection acc. to EN 50181/DIN EN 50181
40 Voltage transformer type 4MR as connection type “A“
41 Current transformer type 4MA7 59 Option: pluggable 4MT8 voltage transformer

at the connection
42 Cover to busbar connection compartment, screwed
60 Depth cable compartment cover
43 Option: SIPROTEC bay control unit
61 Cable duct, withdrawable, for control cables
44 Low-voltage cubicle (standard) and/or bus wires
62 Screwed cover
63 Option: lock between three-position switch-
disconnector and circuit-breaker
4/59 4
Busbars
Features
C Safe-to-touch due to metallic
covers
C Plug-in design
C Consisting of round-bar copper,
insulated by means of silicone-
rubber
C Busbar connection with cross and
end adapters, insulated with
silicon rubber
C Insensitive to pollution and
condensation
C Switchgear extension or panel
replacement is possible without
the need to carry out gas works
C Busbar arrangement for the panel Fig. 4/32 Combination of individual panels with plug-in, silicone-insulated busbar.
blocks within the switchgear vessel No SF6 gas work is required for installation or extension.
filled with gas

C Option: screened busbar
– Field control with the aid of 7
conductive layers on the silicone-
rubber insulation 8
– Installation of 4MC7032 current 9

transformers is possible
– Independent of the installation 1 10
height 2
C No gas work 3
C To be installed from the front
4
C Replacement of individual panels
5
possible to the front without having
to move panels
C Groups of up to 5 panels can be 6
pre-assembled at the factory
C Fast installation on site Busbar system Switchgear container
1 End adapter 7 Primary enclosure panel 1
2 Cross adapter 8 Primary enclosure panel 2
3 Busbar insulation of silicone rubber 9 Bushing
4 Threaded bolt M12/M16 10 Capacitive tap at the bushings,
5 Busbar, Cu, ∅ 32 mm grounded (standard)
6 Stopper
Fig. 4/33 Plug-in busbar, insulated, single-pole,

unscreened version (plan view)

Medium Voltage
SIMOSEC modular Reliability

switchgear up to 24 kV, air- C Type- and routine-tested
insulated, extendable C Standardized and manufactured us-
ing numerically controlled machines
Modular design for consumer C Quality management system
substations according to DIN EN ISO 9001 Photo 4/15 SIMOSEC extensible switchgear
Application C More than 400,000 switchgear in modular construction
SIMOSEC switchgear is factory-as- components have been in service

sembled, type-tested and three- for many years all over the world. – and thus no cross-insulation from
phase metal-enclosed switchgear C Without cross-insulation of the in- phase to phase
for indoor installation: sulating distances from phase to – with welded bushings for cable
C Up to 2 kV phase connection, busbar and driving
C Feeder currents up to 1,250 A mechanics
The SIMOSEC switchgear complies
C Busbar currents up to 1,250 A with the requirements for medium- Re-availability
C Up to 25 kA voltage switchgear, e.g.:
C Three-position switch-disconnector
Typical uses with gas-insulated, maintenance-
Personal safety
SIMOSEC switchgear is used for free arc quenching principle
power distribution in distribution C All switching operations executable C Metallic partition between busbar
systems with feeder currents up with the panel front closed compartment and switching de-
to 1,250 A, e.g. in: C Metal-enclosed, metal-clad or vices as well as the cable
C Substations, customer transfer cubicle-type switchgear connection compartment
substations, distribution substa- C HV HRC fuses and cable sealing C Separate pressure relief for each
tions and switching substations of ends only accessible with compartment
power supply and public utilities grounded feeders C Cable test without isolation of
C Public buildings such as, for C Logic interlock the busbar
example, high-rise buildings, train C Capacitive voltage detection C Three-phase current transformer
stations, hospitals system to verify the isolation installation location for selective
C Industrial plants from supply disconnection of circuit-breaker
C Grounding of feeders via make- feeders
Typical applications proof grounding switches possible
C Wind power stations Cost-efficiency
C High-rise buildings Operational reliability
Low “life-cycle costs“ and high avail-
C Airports C Components – such as , for exam- ability during the complete product
C Underground stations ple, operating mechanisms, three- service life due to:
C Sewage treatment plants position switches, vacuum circuit- C Three-position switch with gas-
C Port facilities breakers – proven for many years insulated arc quenching principle
C and many other applications C Metal-clad panels (metallic partition C 3AH vacuum circuit-breaker
Modular design between busbar and switchgear as C Minimum space requirements
well as between switchgear and C Simple extendability of the
C Individual panels can be freely cable connection compartment) switchgear
combined and extended C Cubicle-type panels with metallic C Standard protective devices,
C Option: low-voltage cubicle in partition between switchgear and e.g. SIPROTEC 4 multifunction
two overall heights busbar compartment protection
C Metal-enclosed three-position
switch with gas-insulated switching
functions
– sealed by welding in the switchgear For further information and data,
please refer to the catalog HA 41.21,
container for life
SIMOSEC Switchgear
4/61 4
Common details on electrical data, filling pressure and temperature
Rated insulation level Rated voltage Ur kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

Rated short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28 35 38 50
withstand voltage Ud
Rated lightning surge withstand voltage Up kV 60 75 95 95 125
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ir 1) Standard 630 A

of the busbar Option 1,250 A
Rated short-time withstand current Ik for switchgear with tk = 1 s up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20

for switchgear with tk = 3 s up to kA 20 – 20 – – 20 – – 20 – – 20
Rated peak withstand current Ip up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
Rated filling pressure pre 2) for insulation 1,500 hPa (absolute) at 20 °C
Minimum operating pressure pme 2) for insulation 1,300 hPa (absolute) at 20 °C
Ambient temperature T for panels without sedoncary equipment Class „Minus 25 indoor“ (–25 °C up to +55 °C)
for panels with sedoncary equipment Class „Minus 5 indoor“ (–5 °C up to +55 °C)
Ring-main panel type RK and cable connection panel type K, K-E
Rated operating current Ir 1) for feeder and transfer, panel tpye RK 630 A (standard), (400 A on request)
for feeder, panel type K, K-E 630 A (standard), (400 A on request)
for feeder, panel type K1, K1-E 630 A (standard), 1,250 A
Rated short-circuit making up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50

current Ima
Transformer panel type TR
Rated operating current Ir 1) for feeder 3) 200 A
Rated peak withstand current Ip 3) up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50

current Ima 3)
Inside dimension “e“ for HV HRC fuse-links mm 292 4) 292 442 442 442
Circuit-breaker panel type LS for feeder for transfer with
Rated operating current Ir 1) for panel type LS1 and LS1-U 3AH5* 630 A
for panel type LS11 and LS11-U 3AH6* 630 A
for panel type LS31, LS32 and LS31-U 3AH6* 1,250 A

current Ima
Rated short-circuit breaking for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20

current Isc
1) Rated operating currents are defined for ambient temperatures of 3) Withpanels of type TR and ME31-F depending on the max. * Type designation of the
40 °C. The average value over 24 hours is 35 °C max. (acc. to let-through current of the HV HRC fuse-link (ID ≤ 25 kA) vacuum circuit-breaker
IEC 60694/VDE 0670 Part 1000) 4) Withinside dimension e = 192 mm, a 100 mm long extension
2) Pressure values for gas-insulated containers pipe is additionally required for the 292 mm fuse-link
Table 4/26 Elecrical data of the switchgear panels, pressure values, temperature

Medium Voltage
7.2 12 15 17.5 24
Busbar grounding panel type SE

current Ima
Busbar voltage metering panels type ME3 and type ME31-F
Rated peak withstand current Ip 3) up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50

current Ima 3)
Inside dimension “e“ in the panel type ME31-F for HV HRC fuse-links 292 mm
Billing metering panels type ME1
Rated operating current Ir 1) for transfer, panel type ME1 and ME1-H 630 A, 1,250 A
for feeder as cable connection panel type 630 A, 1,250 A
ME1-K
for busbar connection, panel type 630 A, 1,250 A
ME1-S
for riser panel, type HF 630 A, 1,250 A
Sectionalizer panels type LT
Rated operating current Ir 1) for panel types LT10 and HF, with 3AH5 * 630 A
for panel type LT1, with 3AH5 *: on request 630 A
for panel types LT11 and HF, with 3AH6 * 630 A
for panel types LT2 and LT22 630 A 630 A
for panel types LT31 and HF, with 3AH6 * 1,250 A

current Ima
Rated short-circuit breaking for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20

current Isc
Electrical service life for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers:

at rated operating current Ir 1) 10,000 operating cycles
at rated short-circuit breaking 50 breaking operations
current Isc 35 breaking operations with 3AH6* with 25 kA
1) Rated operating currents are defined for ambient temperatures 3) With panels of type TR and ME31-F depending on the max. * Type designation of the
of 40 °C. The average value over 24 hours is 35 °C max. (acc. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse-link (ID ≤ 25 kA) vacuum circuit-breaker
to IEC 60694/VDE 0670 Part 1000) 4) With inside dimension e = 192 mm, a 100 mm long extension
2) Pressure values for gas-insulated containers pipe is additionally required for the 292 mm fuse-link
Table 4/27 Electrical data of the switchgear panels, pressure values, temperature
4/63 4
Ring-main and cable panels, transformer, riser and busbar grounding panels
Ring-main panels Transformer panels

as feeder panels as feeder panels
Type RK, Type TR

Option 375 mm wide Option 375 mm wide
Option *
Option * Option
alternatively
3)
Option *
Option Option *
1) 1)
Type LS1, 500 mm wide Type TR1

Option Option 500 mm wide
Option
6) 8)
Option
Option
2)
Option Option *
Option
1) 1)
3)
Ring-main panels Riser panels

as transfer panels for mounting to 630 A and 1,250 A
panels of type ME1… or ME1-H Option
Type RK-U, Type HF BB
Option 500 mm wide 375 mm wide
Standard:
Option *
for bus-sectionalization
to the right
Option
Option:
3) for bus-sectionalization Option
to the left P2
P1 2)
Option
Cable panels Cable panels Busbar

as feeder panels, 630 A as feeder panels, 630 A, with grounding panels
Type K, Type K-E, Type SE1
Option 375 mm wide Option 375 mm wide 375 mm wide
Option** Option**
Option** Option
alternatively
alternatively
alternatively
3)
Option** Option**
Option Option
1) 1)
Fig. 4/34 Product range (basic range, further types available)

Medium Voltage
Billing metering panels 3AH5 HV HRC fuse

630 and 1,250 A 4) vacuum
standard circuit-breaker
Type ME1
Option 375 mm wide
Standard **: 3AH6 Grounding switch
for bus section- vacuum
5)
P2 alization to the circuit-breaker
Option
right
P1 2)
Make-proof
Three-position grounding switch
switch-disconnector
Capacitive voltage Fixed point

detection system for grounding
Billing metering panels
630 and 1,250 A
for busbar connection
Option Fixed point
Type ME1-S Insulator-type current
2) transformer 4MA, for busbar grounding
500 mm wide 2) 2)
cast-resin-insulated
Standard **:
Option
for bus section-
alternatively *
alization to the Cable (not included

right Voltage transformer, in the scope of
P1 P2
e.g. 4MR, single-pole, delivery)
Option
2)
Option 2nd cable (not

included in the
scope of supply)
Billing metering panels

630 and 1,250 A **
for cable connection Surge arrester
Type ME1-K BB
Option 375 mm wide
Standard B:
for bus section-
P2 alization to the
Option
right
P1 2)
P1 and P2
are terminal
markings of the
Billing metering panels current transformer
630 and 1,250 A **
for busbar connection
* Up to 12 kV
Type ME1-KS
on request
Option 375 mm wide
** Connection of 3
as right- or left-
hand end panel
cables possible
B Option: bus
Option P2
sectionalization to the left
P1 2)
BB For mounting to
left- or right-hand
ring-main panels
of type RK-U
4/65 4
Circuit-breaker panels
Circuit-breaker panels 630 A Circuit-breaker panels 1,250 A

as feeder panels as feeder panels
Option Option
Type LS1 Type LS31
alternatively
Option Option 750 mm wide 750 mm wide
alternatively alternatively
6) 7)
with 3AH5 vacuum with 3AH6 vacuum
Option Option**
circuit-breaker, circuit-breaker,
4) fixed-mounted withdrawable
Option Option 3)
for the connection
3) Option 5) Option of 2 cables max.
Option
alternatively
2)
alternatively
P1 Option Option
P2 2) Option
1) 6) Option
1)
Type LS32
875 mm wide
Option Option Option Option with 3AH6 vacuum
Type LS11
circuit-breaker,
alternatively
750 mm wide
alternatively
withdrawable
with 3AH6 vacuum
Option Option** Option Option** for the connection
circuit-breaker,
of 3 cables max.
withdrawable
3) 3) (4 cables*)
Option 5) Option Option 5) Option Option

alternatively
2)
alternatively
2)
alternatively
1)
l
Option Option
i
6)
Option Option 6) Option
l
1) 1)
as transfer panels for mounting to as transfer panels for mounting to

panels of type ME1... or ME1-H panels of type ME1... or ME1-H
Type LS1-U Type LS31-U
Option Option 750 mm wide Option Option 750 mm wide
with 3AH5 vacuum with 3AH6 vacuum
3) circuit-breaker, 3) circuit-breaker,
4) fixed-mounted withdrawable
Option Option Option B Option
P1 Standard: P1 Bus section-
alternatively
P2 2) for bus section- 2) 5) alization only

P2
alization to possible to
Option the right Option the right
6) 7) 6)
Option:
for bus section-
alization to the left
Type LS11-U
with 3AH6 vacuum
3) circuit-breaker,
withdrawable
Option B Option
P1 Bus section-
alternatively
2) 5) alization only
P2
possible to
Option the right
6)
Fig. 4/35 Product range (basic range, further types available)

Medium Voltage
Bus sectionalizer panels 630 A Three-position Capacitive voltage

with 1 three-position switch-disconnector switch-disconnector detection system
Type LT2
corresponds to type Three-position Make-proof
RK-U with type RK-U switch-disconnector grounding switch
Insulator-type current Fixed point for

transformer 4MA, grounding
2)
Three-phase Cable (not

current transformer included in the
3)
4MC63 . . . scope of supply)
with 2 three-position switch-disconnectors
Type LT22 6) Voltage transformer, 2nd cable (not

Option Option 750 mm wide e.g. 4MR, single-pole, included in the
corresponds to type cast-resin-insulated scope of supply)
RK-U with type RK-U
Option
7) Voltage transformer, Surge arrester
e.g. 4MR, double-
pole, cast-resin-insu-
lated
Option
Type LT22-W
Option 750 mm wide
corresponds to type
Option
RK-U with type RK-U
alternatively
Option 3)
3) Option
P2
2) P1
Option
6) 7)
P1 and P2
are terminal
markings of the
current transformer
* Up to 12 kV
on request
** Connection of 3
cables possible
B Option: bus
sectionalization to
the left
BB For mounting to
left- or right-hand
ring-main panels of
type RK-U
4/67 4
Ring-main panel as feeder Transformer panel as feeder
HA41-2393d eps
HA41-2394d eps
1 60 1 60
2 2 2 2
3 23 23
4 24 24
5 11 19 5 11 19
6 12 58 6 12 58
7 13 7 13
26
8 14 25 8 14
15 15 27
9 9
10 16 18 10 16 18
17 17
27
18 18
59 57 59
20 20 57
21 21 34 34
61 28 35 35
61 31
29 31 33
22
22 32 29
33
61
56 22 22
23
30
30
Type RK Section Type RT Section
Billing metering panel

HA41-2395e eps
1 Option: low-voltage cubicle

2 Niche for customer-side low-voltage equipment,
cover can be screwed off
1 60 3 Option: CAPDIS voltage indication system
4 Option: short-circuit/ground-fault indicator
37 2
5 Option: Ready-for-service indicator for switchgear
23
2 24 6 Switch position indication for switch-disconnect-
ing function “CLOSED – OPEN“
10 33 7 Switch position indication for grounding function
“OPEN – GROUNDED“
38 8 Feeder designation label
38
9 Mimic diagram
8 10 Option: sockets for capacitive voltage detection
16
57 system (depending on arrangement)
9 11 Option: “ON – OFF“ momentary-contact rotary
control switch for motor drive with local-remote
33 33 changeover switch for the three-position switch-
disconnector
12 Option: Locking device for three-position
13 Pressure relief device for switchgear
14 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding
65 function
15 Manual operating mechanism for the switch-
disconnecting function
39
39 16 Rating and type plate
17 Gas-insulated container for switchgear
30 18 Lock for cable compartment cover
19 Bushing-type insulator for the busbar
Type ME1 Section 20 Bushing-type insulator for the feeder
Fig. 4/36 Switchgear panel design (example)

Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel (with 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker)

21 Insulating collar (e.g. for Up > 95 kV)
HA41-2396e eps
22 Cable mounting rail with cable clamps (option) for
cable fixing
23 Busbar
1 60 24 Insulating cap * on the busbar
2 2 25 Spring-operated mechanism for three-position
24
5 26 Spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism for
51 three-position switch-disconnector
45
11 19
46 27 Three-position switch-disconnector
12 58
44 13 28 Cable connection
8 14 25
47 29 Cable compartment cover
6 43
10 7 30 Ground terminal (for position, see dimension drawing)
48 15 64 31 Grounding switch for the cable connection
16 41 32 Inspection window
17
64 57 33 Insulators
59 34 Insulating collar
50
49 35 Option: HV HRC fuse-link
20
9 20
36 Option for panel types LS11... and LT11... only: logic
21 interlocks between circuit-breaker “OPEN” and three-
21
position switch-disconnector as well as locking device
28 for three-position switch-disconnector
61 29 37 Option: part of the low-voltage equipment
61 38 Cover, screwed
22 39 4MR current transformer
22
40 4MA7 insulator-type current transformer, vacuum
circuit-breaker
30 41 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker, fixed-mounted
42 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker, withdrawable
Type LS1 Section 43 Operating mechanism box
44 Manual operation
– for closing with manual operation
Circuit-breaker panel (with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker)
– for emergency stop with motor operation
HA41-2397d eps
45 Mechanical “OFF” pushbutton

46 Mechanical “ON” pushbutton (not applicable with
spring-operated mechanism)
1
60 47 “Spring charged” indication
55
48 Operations counter
2
3 23 49 Switch position indication
2 24 50 Option: 4MC63 53 three-phase current transformer
52 52 51 Option: SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 time-overcurrent
11 19 protection
5 36 58
6 17 52 Option: SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 multifunction protection
7 25
14 53 Cover* for cable connection glands
8 27 54 Insulating cap* on the bushing-type insulator
15
9
10 16 64 55 Option: Cable duct, withdrawable, for control cables
54 13 and/or bus wires
50
20 64 56 Logic interlock for three-position switch-disconnector
56 57
59 57 Grounding busbar
50 54
36 58 Metal cladding of the busbar compartment
43
43 59 Metal cladding of the cable connection compartment
44
29 60 Cover of the busbar compartment for panel expansion
45
53 61 Cable sealing end (not included in the scope of supply)
46 42
33 62 Option: feeder grounding via make-proof grounding
47
62 switch
48 33 63 or feeder grounding via the vacuum circuit-breaker
49 63 (= locking device for feeder grounded when circuit-
61
61 breaker “CLOSED”)
22 64 Lock for cable compartment cover in circuit-breaker
panels
56 30
65 Cover of the transformer connection compartment
Type LS11 Section
* For example for Up ≥ 95 kV, Ur ≥ 15 kV
4/69 4
Busbars
C Shock-hazard protection by means 1 Busbar
of metallic encapsulation
2 Insulating cap (e.g. for Ur > 17,5 kV)
C Metal-clad busbar compartment on the busbar
C 3-pole version, can be screwed
from panel to panel 3 Bushing-type insulator for
C Simple switchgear expansion the busbar
possible
C Consisting of copper:
– Fl E-Cu for 630 A
– Rd E-Cu for > 630 A up to 1,250 A
Photo 4/16 Busbar compartments over 3 panels (example), side view
HV HRC fuse-link
C For transformer panels of type TR
and TR1 “CLOSED“ indication,
hand- or motor-operated
C For busbar voltage metering panel
type ME31-F “HV HRC fuse tripped“ or
C HV HRC fuse-links acc. to “f-release tripped“ indication
DIN 43625 (main dimensions) with
striker pin; version “medium“ acc. “OPEN“ indication
to IEC 60282/ VDE 0670 Part 4*)

– as short-circuit protection in front
of transformers,
– with selectivity – when selected
correctly – to upstream and down-
stream devices
C Requirements met as high-voltage
Photo 4/17 Masking frame of a transformer feeder
switch fuse combination
C Selection of HV HRC fuses for
transformers
C Fuse replacement only possible 4 Insulating collar
with a grounded feeder
C Option: shunt release at the
operating mechanism of the 5 HV HRC fuse (not included in the
scope of supply)
three-position switch-disconnector
6 Grounding switch (rated short-circuit

breaking current Ima = 4 kA)
for the cable connection
7 Cover for cable lug connection (e.g.
for rated voltage Ur = 24 kV)
8 Cable sealing end (not included in

the scope of supply)
*) For standards, please refer to page Photo 4/18 HV HRC fuses in the transformer panel type TR, side view
4/43 and catalog HA 41.21

Medium Voltage
C Option: “Tripped signal“ of the

three-position switch-disconnector
in the transformer feeder (trans-
former switch) for electrical remote
signaling with 1 normally open
contact (1NO)
“HV HRC fuse tripped”
When a HV HRC fuse-link has
tripped, the operating mechanism
has to be switched to the “OPEN”
position to charge the spring.
Then, the equipment can be
grounded using the three-position
switch-disconnector and the fuse
can, for example, be replaced.
Replacement of HV HRC fuse-links
C Isolation and grounding of the
transformer feeder
C Then, manual replacement of the
HV HRC fuse-link
4/71 4
4.3 Medium Voltage Device Type Rated Rated- Rated
Equipment, Product voltage short-circuit

current
short-time
current (3 s)
Range
Devices for medium-voltage kV kA kA
switchgear
Indoor vacuum 3AH 7.2…36 13.1…72 13.1…72
The comprehensive switchgear circuit-breaker
device range enables Siemens to
supply almost any type of device re- NXACT 12…24 31.5 31.5
quired for the medium-voltage range
Components for 3AY2 12…24 16…40 16…40 (1 s)
of 7.2 to 36 kV. Table 4/28 presents
3AH VCB
an overview of products and their
main properties.
Outdoor vacuum 3AF 12…40.5 25…31.5 25…31.5
All components and equipment com-
circuit-breaker 3AG
ply with international and national
standards as follows: Indoor 3CG 7.2…24 – 16…20
vacuum switch
Vacuum circuit-breakers
C IEC 60056,
partially IEC 62271-100
C IEC 60694
C BS 5311 Vacuum circuit-breaker/ 3AH58 12 13.1…25 13.1…25
disconnector unit
Vacuum switches
C IEC 60265-1 Indoor vacuum 3TL 7.2…24 – 8 (1 s)
contactors
Vacuum switch/fuse
combinations
C IEC 60420 Indoor vacuum VS 7.2…24 12.5…80 12.5…80
switching tube
Vacuum contactors
C IEC 60470
C UL 347 Indoor switch- 3CJ 12…36 – 20…25 (1 s)
disconnector
Switch disconnectors
C IEC 60129
C IEC 60265-1 Indoor disconnector 3D 12…40.5 – 16…63 (1 s)
and grounding switch
HV HRC fuses
C IEC 60282
HV HRC fuses 3GD 7.2…36 31.5…80 –
Current and voltage transformers
C IEC 60044-1; 60044-2
C BS 7625, 7626 Fuse base 3GH 7.2…36 44 –
C ANSI C57.13 urge current
strength
Further information can be obtained
at fax no.: +49 9131/73 46 54 Current and voltage 4M 12…36 – –
transformers for indoor
and outdoor installations
Table 4/28 Equipment range for medium-voltage switchgear

Medium Voltage
Rated Switching operations Fields of application /

operating mechanical with rated with rated comment
current operating fault
800…12,000 10,000… 10,000… 25…100 All fields of application, such as overhead lines,
12,0000 30,000 cables, transformers, motors, generators, capacitors,
filter circuits, arc furnaces
1,250…2,500 10,000 10,000 25…50
1,250…2,500 – – – Equipment manufacturers and retrofitters
1,000…2,000 10,000 10,000 25…50 Operation at power supply company for almost
any switching task
800 10,000 10,000 – All fields of application, such as overhead lines,

cables, transformers, motors, capacitors;
many operating modes; short-circuit protection
required, fuses
800…1,250 10,000 10,000 25 In partially enclosed circuit-breaker switchgear
400…800 1 x 106…3 x 106 0,25 x 106…2 x 106 – All fields of application, mainly motors
with a high rate of operating cycles
630…4,000 10,000… 10,000… 25…100 For circuit-breakers, switches and gas-insulated

30,000 30,000 switchgear
630 1,000 ... 2,500 20 – Cables and overhead lines, transformers
630…3,000 1,000... 5,000 – – Protection of personnel during maintenance

work at the equipment by creating an isolating gap
6.3…250 – – – Short-circuit protection,

short-circuit limiting
400 – – – Placement of HV HRC fuse-links
– – – – Measuring and protecting
4/73 4
3AH1-6 vacuum circuit- 3AH2

breakers – for universal use Circuit-breaker for frequent switching
operations, e.g. for industrial
Suitable circuit-breakers for every applications.
application:
3AH3
3AH5 High-performance circuit-breaker,
No-maintenance allrounder for most e.g. for power generation.
standard applications
3AH4
Circuit-breakers of type 3AH1, 2, 3, 4 Circuit-breaker for extremely
and 6 round off the total product frequent switching operations,
range. e.g. in steelworks.
3AH1 3AH6
Standard circuit-breaker for power Circuit-breaker with switching poles
utilities and industrial applications arranged in line one behind the other. Photo 4/19 3AH5 allround circuit-breaker
to complement the 3AH5 range. 24 kV / 16 kA
Rated Vacuum circuit-breaker (type)

voltage For rated short-circuit breaking current1) (rated short-circuit making current)
kV kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA
13.1 16 20 25 31.5 40 50 63
(32.8) (40) (50) (63) (80) (100) (125) (160)
7.2 3AH1 3AH3 3AH3

3AH2 3AH2
12 3AH5 3AH5 3AH53) 3AH5 3AH5 3AH1 3AH3 3AH3

3AH2 3AH2
15 3AH1 3AH3 3AH3

3AH2 3AH2
17.5 3AH6 4) 3AH6 3AH6 3AH6 3AH5 3AH5 3AH1 3AH3 3AH3
3AH2 3AH2
24 3AH6 4) 3AH6 3AH6 3AH6 3AH3

3AH5 3AH5 3AH5 5) 3AH4
3AH2
36 3AH5 3AH5 3) 3AH3 3AH3

3AH4 3AH4
800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 1,250 A 2,500 A 1,250 A 1,250 A 1,250 A
to to to to to to2) to to to
1,250 A 1,250 A 2,500 A 1,250 A 2,500 A 2,500 A 3,150 A 3,150 A 4,000 A
Rated operating current

1) DC current proportion is 36% (higher values on request) 4) 12.5 kA instead of 13.1 kA for 3AH6
2) 3,150 A at 17.5 kV rated voltage for 3AH2 5) 1,250 A to 2,500 A for 24 kV / 25 kV
3) Up to 2,000 A
Table 4/29 The complete 3AH range: electrical values and products

Medium Voltage
Applications
C Power supply installations with
long service life
C Industrial installations with high
short-circuit currents and frequent Photo 4/20 3AH38 high-current and Photo 4/21 3AH47 single-pole circuit-breaker
switching operations generator circuit-breaker
C Switchgear installation companies
C Special switching tasks, as applica- 3AH3 818 17.5 kV / 63 kA / 175 kA / 3,150 A and 4,000 A
ble in capacitors, reactor coils and
3AH3 819 17.5 kV / 72 kA / 200 kA / 3,150 A and 4,000 A
filter circuits
C Steelworks 3AH3 838 17.5 kV / 63 kA / 175 kA / 8,000 A and 12,000 A
Features 3AH3 838 17.5 kV / 72 kA / 200 kA / 8,000 A and 12,000 A

C Proven vacuum switching principle
Table 4/30 Technical data for 3AH38 types
C Universal use
C Long service life
C No maintenance up to 10,000 UN 27.5 kV / C C C C C
operating cycles 50 and 60 Hz
C Compact design
17.5 kV / C C C C
Customer benefit 16.7 Hz
C Cost-saving in the long run due to
ISC kA 25 31.5 40 50
its long service life and the fact
that it requires no maintenance IN A 1,250 2,000 2,500 2,000 2,500 2,500 2,500
C Space saving due to its compact
design Table 4/31 Product range of 3AH47 for single-pole applications
C Highly reliable, thus ensuring the
utmost availability of power supply
C Flexible use thanks to short deliv- Customer benefit 3AH7 – single-pole
ery times for standard breakers C Small dimensions, making its instal- circuit-breaker
lation more flexible
Circuit-breakers for special Applications
C Easy handling thanks to low weight
applications C Railway applications
C Long service life
C Neutral point switch (grounding
C Low life cycle costs
3AH8 – high current and transformer, ground-fault
generator circuit-breaker Thanks to their compact design and neutralizer)
high performance features, high-cur-
Applications Features
rent and generator circuit-breakers of
C High operating and fault currents C High operating cycle rates
type 3AH8 and IEEE C37.013 are per-
C Switching of generators in hy- C Low maintenance
fectly suited both for modernizing
dropower, coal, natural gas and C Low wear and tear even at
existing power plants and for initially
steam power plants frequencies of 16 2/3 Hz
equipping new power plants.
C Tested and approved in
Features They can be easily installed in accordance with EN 50152-1
C High switching cycles switchgear systems. C Circuit voltage class acc. to EN
C No maintenance 50163 or IEC 60850
C Tested in accordance with
IEEE C37.013 Customer benefit
C Optimized life cycle costs
C High reliability
4/75 4
Components for 12 kV
Up to 2,500 A / up to 40 kA / 1s. For cubicle widths of 800 mm:

With 3AH1 circuit-breaker – 7.2/12 kV 210 mm pole center distance
With 3AH5 circuit-breaker – 12 kV 210 mm pole center distance
Components for 24 kV
Up to 2,500 A / up to 25 kA / 1s. For cubicle widths of 1,000 mm:

Photo 4/22 Switchgear 12 kV, 25 kA, 1,250 A Table 4/32 Technical data and product range
Components for 3AH vacuum

Rated voltage ISC Ima Pole center distance Ir
circuit-breakers
kV kA kA mm A
Applications
12 13.1 32.8 160 800 to 1,250
C As cartridge or truck for switchgear
C Components for the switchgear in- 16 40 160 800 to 1,250
stallation company
20 50 160 800 to 1,250
Features
25 63 160 800 to 1,250
C Components based on 3AH
circuit-breaker Table 4/33 Technical data of the 3AH58 vacuum circuit-breaker/disconnector unit
C Free choice of components ranging
from counter-contacts and bush-
ings to truck and complete
cartridge
C Tested components
Customer benefit
Photo 4/23b Disconnector counter-contacts
C Everything from a single source
C Quick to use
C Compact design makes room for
3AH58 vacuum circuit-breaker/
cable connections and instrument
disconnector unit – a powerful
transformer in the switchgear cubicle
combination
C All operating elements arranged at
Applications an ergonomic height
C In partially enclosed circuit-breaker C Circuit-breaker and disconnector
installations drive can be accessed from the
front
Features
C Combined switching and discon- Disconnector counter-contacts
necting function using a 3AH5 Photo 4/23a 3AH5 804-2, 12 kV/25 C Included in the scope of delivery
vacuum circuit-breaker and 3DC kA/1,250 A C Lightning surge withstand voltage
disconnector 75 kV / 85 kV*
C Disconnector mechanically Customer benefit C Short-time AC withstand voltage
interlocked with the circuit-breaker C Time savings due to less installa- 28 kV / 32 kV*
C Compact design in fixed mounted tion work required compared with C Short-circuit time 3s
installations installing single components
C Factory-tested circuit-breaker/ C Disconnector counter-contacts * Across the isolating gap
disconnector unit included in the scope of delivery

Medium Voltage
Photo 4/24 NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module, type 3AJ Photo 4/25 NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module, type 3AK
NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker

NXACT 3AJ NXACT 3AK
module
Rated voltage kV 12 – 24 to 15
NXACT combines the advantages of
vacuum switching technology with Rated short-time AC voltage kV 28 – 50 to 38
additionally integrated functions.
Rated lightning surge voltage kV 75 – 125 to 110
Applications
Rated frequencyz Hz 50 / 60 to 50 / 60
C For switchgear installation
companies Rated short-circuit breaking current (max.) kA to 31.5 to 50
Features Rated short-circuit making current (max.) kA to 80 to 125

C Combination of vacuum switching
Rated short-time current, 3 seconds (max.) kA to 31.5 to 50
technology with further advanced
functions Rated operating current A 1,250 / 2,500 to 4,000
C Disconnector, grounding switch
Table 4/34 Technical data
drive, locks and operating panel
integrated in the module
C Pre-tested and ready-to-install Customer benefit C Minimum mounting and commis-
delivery Increased productivity due to sioning expense
C All operating elements located at C Immediately ready to use after
C Easy planning
the switchgear front panel delivery
C Easy installation
C Clear and transparent operating
front panel
4/77 4
3AF01 3AG01
Rated voltage kV to 40.5 12
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60 50 / 60
Rated lightning surge withstand voltage kV 170 75
Rated AC withstand voltage kV 70 28
Rated short-circuit breaking current kA 25 / 31.5 25
Rated short-circuit making current kA 63 / 80 63
Rated operating current A 1,600 / 2,000 1,600
3AF0/3AG0 vacuum circuit-breaker

Photo 4/27 3TL8 vacuum contactor
for outdoor installations up
to 40.5 kV
Applications
C In particular for use in power
supply companies
C Can be used even in difficult
climatic environments
C For almost every switching task
Features
C Proven vacuum switching tubes
in porcelain insulators
C High electrical and mechanical
service life
C Suitable for short-time interruptions
C Gas- or air-insulated versions
available
Photo 4/28 3TL6 vacuum contactor
Customer benefit
Optimized life cycle costs due to
3TL vacuum contactors –
C Low mounting and commissioning
designed for continuous operation
expense
C Minimum maintenance expense Vacuum contactors are 3-pole contac-
C Installation possible at any location tors for medium-voltage installations
with an electromagnetic drive that
features high switching frequencies
and unlimited ON periods.
Photo 4/26 3AF/3AG vacuum circuit-breakers
Applications
C Switching of three-phase motors
C Switching of capacitors
C Switching of ohmic loads
(e.g. arc furnaces)

Medium Voltage
Vacuum contactor type 3TL81 3TL61 3TL65 3TL71
Rated voltage kV 7.2 7.2 12 24
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60
Rated operating current A 400 450 400 800
Switching capacity acc. to utilization category AC-4

(cos ϕ = 0,35)
Rated making current A 4,000 4,500 4,000 4,500
Rated breaking current A 3,200 3,600 3,200 3,600
Mechanical life of the contactor operating cycles 1 · 10 6 3 · 10 6 1 · 10 6 1 · 10 6
Mechanical life of the vacuum operating cycles 0.25 · 106 2 · 106 1 · 10 6 1 · 10 6

switching tube
Electrical life of the vacuum switching operating cycles 0.25 · 10 6 1 · 10 6 0.5 · 10 6 0.5 · 10 6
tube (nominal current)
Features
C Small dimensions
C High electrical service life up
to 1 million operating cycles
C No maintenance required
Customer benefit
Increased productivity due to
C High reliability and availability
C Flexible mounting positions,
vertical or horizontal
Vacuum switching tubes – utmost
switching capacity in extremely
compact designs
Vacuum switching tubes for medium
voltage are supplied by Siemens for Photo 4/29 Vacuum switching tubes in seal-soldering technology
all applications on the international
power market ranging from 1 kV to
Tubes for vacuum circuit-breakers
40.5 kV. On demand, we are pleased
to complement our comprehensive Rated voltage kV 7.2 to 40.5
standard product range with tailor-
Rated operating current A 630 to 4,000
made, specific customer solutions.
Rated short-circuit breaking current kA 12.5 to 80
Applications
C Vacuum circuit-breakers Tubes for vacuum contactors
C Vacuum load interrupters
Rated voltage kV 1 to 24
C Vacuum contactors
C Transformer tap changers Rated operating current A 400 to 800
C Circuit-breakers for railway
applications Table 4/37 Product range (extract) – Tube ratings for circuit-breakers/contactors
C Auto-reclosers
C Special applications, such as
nuclear fusion
Features Customer benefit
C Small designs C A suitable solution for every
C High breaking and operating application
currents C Long-term supply security
C High operating cycle rates
4/79 4
Rated voltageg kV 7.2 12 15 24
Rated lightning surge kV 60 75 95 125

withstand voltage, list 2
Rated short-circuit kA 50 50 50 40
making current
Rated short-time kA 20 20 20 16
current (3s)
Rated closed-loop A 800 800 800 800

breaking current
Photo 4/30 3CG vacuum switch for 12 kV,
800 A Rated no-load transformer A 10 10 10 10
breaking current
3CG vacuum load interrupter
suited for very high operating Rated no-load capacitor A 800 800 800 800
cycle rates breaking current
3CG vacuum switches are multi- Rated cable-charging A 63 63 63 63

purpose load interrupters. breaking current
Applications Rated breaking current A 2,500 1,600 1,250 –

C Frequent switching of electric loads for locked motors
C In particular for switching trans-
Transfer current acc. to A 5,000 3,000 2,000 2,000
formers, motors or capacitors in
IEC 60420, inductive switching
industrial applications
capacity (cos ϕ ≤ 0.15)
Features
Induktives Switching capacity A 2,500 1,600 1,250 1,250
C In compliance with IEC 60265-1,
(cos ϕ ≤ 0.15)
IEC 60420 and VDE 0670 Part 301,
tested in combination with Switching capacity under
HV HRC fuses ground fault conditions:
C Rated currents up to 800 A – Rated ground fault A 630 630 630 630
C Up to 10,000 electrical operating breaking current
cycles – Rated cable-charging A 63 63 63 63
C No maintenance required breaking current under
ground fault conditions
Customer benefit
– Rated cable-charging A 63 + 800 63 + 800 63 + 800 63 + 800
C Optimization of operating costs
breaking current under
due to high operating cycle rates
ground fault conditions with
C Very economical
with superimposed load current
C High availability
C Highly reliable due to proven Operating cycles with rated 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
vacuum switching technology operating current
Table 4/38 3CG vacuum circuit-breaker ratings

Medium Voltage
3CJ2 switch disconnector for daily

use
Indoor switch disconnectors, type
3CJ2, are multi-purpose switch dis-
connectors that comply with the rele-
vant standards in their basic versions
and when combined with (make-
proof) grounding switches.
Applications
C In power distribution, for rare
switching of loads Photo 4/31 3CJ1 switch disconnector Photo 4/32 3DC disconnector
C Switching of distribution
transformers
Rated voltage kV 12 17.5 24 36
Features
Rated short-time current (1s) kA 25 25 25 20
C Multi-purpose switch disconnectors
complying with the relevant stan- Rated short-circuit making kA 63 63 50 25
dards current
C Can be combined with make-proof
grounding switches
C Welded basic frame Table 4/39 Ratings for 3CJ2 switch disconnectors
C Isolating blades
C Robust arc quenching chambers
Rated voltage kV 12 24 36 40.5
C Switching angle is always 90°
C Can also be supplied as Class B Rated short-time kA 20 – 63 20 – 31.5 20 – 31.5 20 – 31.5
and acc. to IEC 60420 current (1s)
Customer benefit Rated surge kA 40 – 160 40 – 80 50 – 80 80

C High operator safety current
C Easy installation
Rated operating A 630 – 3,000 630 – 2,500 630 – 3,000 1,250 – 2,500
C Easy handling
current
C Reliability and safety
Table 4/40 Ratings for disconnectors and grounding switches
3D grounding switch and
disconnector
Applications C Mechanical service life up
3D grounding switches and discon-
C To protect personnel when to 5,000 operating cycles
nectors are well suited for indoor in-
working at equipment
stallations up to 40.5 kV. In addition, Customer benefit
our product range includes make- Features C Utmost safety for works at
proof grounding switches for 12 kV C Utmost reliability and switchgear installations
and 24 kV with a rated short-circuit operating safety C Easy handling
making current of 50 kA or 40 kA. C Simple, robust construction
C Can be used in difficult climatic
environments
4/81 4
3GD high-voltage high-rupturing-

capacity fuses
High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity
(HV HRC) fuses are used for short-
circuit protection.
Applications
C Short-circuit protection in
medium-voltage installations
C Protection of transformers, motors
and capacitors for example
C Can be combined with load
interrupter switches
Features
C Fuse base for fuse-link, can be
Photo 4/33 HV HRC fuse, type 3GD Photo 4/34 3GH fuse base with HV
supplied as 1-pole or 3-pole version
HRC fuse-links
C Cuts short-circuit currents to low
values
3GD HV HRC fuse-link
Customer benefit
Rated voltageg kV 7.2 12 24 36
C Reliable protection of connected
consumers Rated short-circuit kA 63 – 80 40 – 63 31.5 – 40 31.5
C Thanks to its current-limiting func- breaking current
tion, more inexpensive consumers Rated operating kA 6.3 – 250 6,3 – 160 6.3 – 100 6.3 – 40
can be used current
4M instrument transformers 3GH fuse base

for safe measurements
Rated voltage kV 3.6 / 7.2 12 24 36
Applications
Surge current kA 44 44 44 44
C In all types of electrical installations
withstand strength
Features Rated current A 400 400 400 400
C Measurement of electrical quanti-
ties in electrical installations Table 4/41 Product range and rating data
C Transformation of currents or volt-
ages into quantities that are better
suited for protective devices Customer benefit high-voltage motors, dry-type
C Disconnection of high or low C Provides safety due to reliable de- transformers and cable networks
voltage tection of fault currents up to 15 kV
C For indoor and outdoor installations C Special arrester to protect rotating
C Comprehensive product range: 3E surge arrester machines and furnaces up to 42 kV
can be supplied in compliance with C Plastic or porcelain enclosure
Applications
every relevant standard C Very high energy absorption
C Industry
C Manufactured using state-of-the capacity
C Power plants
art cast-resin technologies C Stable and self-contained
C Partial discharge level is below Features construction for type 3EE2
the test values required by IEC C Protects the insulators of plants or C Extremely high short-circuit
plant sections against excessive strength (types 3EF3 and 3EE2)
voltage stress
C Overvoltage limiter to protect

Medium Voltage
Current transformers Ur (kV) Ir (A) Changeover option No. of cores
4MA7 12 10 – 2,500 Primary or 3

insulator-type current 24 secondary
transformer 36 changeover
4MB1 insulator-type 12 1,500 – 6,000 Secondary 3

current transformer 24 changeover
4MC2 12 150 – 3,000 Secondary 4

bushing-type current 24 changeover
transformers 36
4MC3 12 1,000 – 10,000 Secondary 4

bushing-type current 24 changeover
transformers 36
Photo 4/35 4MA block-type current
4ME1 12 5 – 1,200 Primary or 3
transformer
current transformer 24 secondary
for outdoor 36 changeover
installations 52
Voltage transformers Ur (kV) Rating of the Thermal limit rating of

measuring winding ground-fault detection
(VA)/class winding
(VA / A)
4MR1, 4MR2 12 20/0.2; 50/0.5; 100/1 230/4*

indoor, single and 24 20/0.2; 50/0.5; 100/1
two-pole,
small model
4MR5, 4MR6 12 30/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1

indoor, single and 24 45/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1 350/6*
two-pole, 36 50/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1
Photo 4/36 3EE2 surge arrester
large model
4MS 12 30/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1 230/4*

Customer benefit
outdoor, single-pole 24 30/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1 230/4*
C Lower protective level than in
36 25/0.2; 75/0.5; 150/1 230/4*
traditional arresters
52 60/0.2; 180/0.5; 400/1 500/9
C Universal solution for an effective
protection of high-voltage motors, 4MS4 36 60/0.2; 150/0.5; 400/1
because the protective characteris- * Higher values on request
tics of arresters are relatively un-
Table 4/42 Product range of current and voltage transformers
susceptible to steep-edge surges
3EF 3EH2 3EE2
For networks kV 3.6 to 15 4.7 to 42 4.5 to 42
Rated discharge surge current kA 1 10 10
Short-circuit current kA 1 to 40 16 50 to 300
Table 4/43 Surge arresters – technical data and product range
4/83 4
4.4 PQM®– Power

Quality Management
and Load Flow Control
The future of the rapidly changing
global power distribution markets lies
in the form of power grid operations.
Switching high currents, measures to
be taken by power quality manage-
ment and handling short circuits re-
main the major tasks in this context.
New technologies, such as static and
dynamic compensation equipment and
network couplings based on power
electronic components, are the logical
choice to meet these challenges.
POWERCOMP are products and sys-
tems that ensure high power quality
of an industrial or public medium-volt- Photo 4/37 2-MW SIPLINK system at the municipal utilities of Ulm in Germany
age supply grid. By utilizing systems
for reactive power compensation that modularly designed and can be used Innovative solutions for power
are tailored to meet customer re- in the voltage range of 3 kV to 36 kV. supply
quirements, the price of the power
Most consumers don’t just draw ac-
quantities delivered will be reduced. SIPLINK, the medium-voltage DC
tive power from the grid but also re-
Return of investment can often be transmission system, allows econom-
active power which is somewhat er-
achieved within less than two years. ical power exchange at the medium
ratically transmitted to the consumer.
In the event of significant load fluctu- voltage level by using power elec-
For this reason, in their supply con-
ations, dynamic compensation sys- tronics. Power supply systems with
tracts, power supply companies de-
tems using thyristor valves or IGBT differing parameters can thus be
fine the exact power factor as the ra-
modules ensure a stable supply volt- coupled, costs can be saved by opti-
tio between active power to be trans-
age. Powerful filter circuit systems mizing power procurement, the load
mitted and the apparent power. Any
reduce effective harmonic currents of flow during power transmission is
deviation is on account of the cus-
speed-controlled large drives, and controlled and a constant supply of
tomer. This makes power quality
thus, operating permits for the con- voltage is maintained through the
management a very interesting topic.
nection of such plants can be ob- provision of reactive power.
tained. POWERCOMP systems are

Medium Voltage
Input power supplied by the power

supply company, to be paid by the
customer
Input power
from the tuning
capacitor
Active Reactive
power power
P Q
Required
apparent power
S
Fig. 4/37 Definition of electric power types Photo 4/38 Outdoor installation
– compensation
are gaining ground in the context of simulates real conditions, taking nu-
growing cost pressure and the wide- merous consumer and load require-
spread use of electronic modules and ments into account.
power electronics for automating and
This analysis helps to develop and
control tasks.
implement the proper PQM solution
Thanks to the use of intelligent load even for highly complex and sensitive
flow controls, performance- and cost- networks.
optimized power procurement is now
attainable. Subnetworks with deviat- POWERCOMP
ing parameters can also be con- compensation systems for
nected, which means that their volt- medium voltage
age stability and quality can thus be
Compact, intelligent and expandable
positively influenced.
– this characterizes POCOS®, a sys-
Applications in the field of power tem which is, above all, suitable for
quality management initially require use in medium-voltage installations
Photo 4/39 Compact compensation unit
comprehensive measurements of that require a compensation system
power and harmonic ratios, which are for a certain technical process or for
State-of-the art power electronics taken using high-tech measuring in- reasons of ambitious customer speci-
provide efficient and cost-effective struments. By means of a specially fications. Extensive experience from
options for optimizing power supply developed program, these data are use of this system the world over is
and power quality. Such applications evaluated in a network analysis that continually being channeled into its
further development.
4/85 4
Wherever fast load changes result in cally isolated. In this case, the con-
a dynamic impact on the voltage at nected networks may even feature
the point of connection, or wherever different voltage levels, neutral point
a highly sensitive voltage control is connections, frequencies and phase
required, dynamic compensation sys- angles.
tems do the job. Their dynamic reac-
The SIPLINK can also be used to sup-
tive-power compensation function
ply a separate network without a
can be combined with an active-
power generating set of its own, in
power filtering function. Fast chang-
particular if network parameters that
ing load characteristics of arc fur-
differ from the distribution system
naces and mill trains affect the sys-
are required. Typical examples are
tem voltage as much as, for example,
test bays (for 60 Hz or surge voltage
the dynamic load characteristics in
Photo 4/40 SIPLINK ship generation), or shipyards and connec-
traction systems.
tion points in harbors for the supply
Long-standing experience and com- of on-board networks of ships. Indi-
prehensive process knowledge about vidual plant sections with different
industrial power supply systems requirements to power quality and
guarantee economical solutions that safety of supply can also be operated
take customer needs into account. isolated from the general power sup-
ply using SIPLINK.
For further information please con-
tact: For further information please
POWERCOMP@ptd.siemens.com contact:
SIPLINK@ptd.siemens.com
SIPLINK
Photo 4/41 Transformer/container model
Closed-loop controlled load flow
for power systems with special re-
As required, several units can be op- quirements
erated side by side. Choked or non-
With SIPLINK (Siemens Multifunc-
choked options are feasible. Despite
tional Power Link), Siemens has de-
the extremely compact design, a high
veloped a technology for medium-
compensation effect is achieved ow-
voltage direct current transmission
ing to the use of vacuum switchgear,
that – depending on the application
optimized capacitors and iron-core re-
and configuration of an existing sup-
actors. Besides the basic model for
ply system – can be utilized by power
indoor installation, systems for out-
supply companies and industrial plant
door installation are also available.
operators alike to make tremendous
Compact compensation systems are savings in terms of costs of invest-
not necessarily suited to every type ment, operation and total plant serv-
of application. In some cases, it may ice life.
be more reasonable to use conven-
SIPLINK controls the load flow during
tional systems with capacitors or fil-
power transmission and ensures opti-
ter circuits. For the primary industry
mal voltage stability by a controlled
(including paper, cement, steel,
output of reactive power.
chemical and glass), this type of com-
pensation system has been installed In order to do so, SIPLINK uses tech-
at every voltage level all over the nology that is based on self-commu-
world. tated IGBTs, which allows networks
to be linked that still remain electri-

Medium Voltage
4.5 Planning of Systems sive know-how about the equipment

and systems under consideration.
mum fulfillment of requirements
placed on the power supply of a car
for Primary and Sec- This know-how will be detailed on manufacturing plant will be demon-
ondary Power Distribu- the basis of process-related power
supply planning for a car manufactur-
strated here.
tion Exemplified by the ing plant. Requirements to the power supply

Automotive Industry During the planning of a power sup-
system set by the process
ply system, decisions must be made The process flow in an automotive
When power supply systems are
regarding the power system design, manufacturing plant determines the
planned, each individual problem can
ratings and operating mode. These requirements to the electric power
be faced in various ways: by means
decisions must focus on the specific system.
of technical solutions that feature
process requirements of the press
specific technical advantages. This The following requirements shall be
shop, body shop, paint shop and the
means that both a thorough knowl- met:
final car assembly. Network and plant
edge of the relevant industrial tech- C Covering a process-oriented power
engineering solutions for the opti-
nology is required and comprehen- demand
Process flow Auxiliary facilities

Press Store Body shop Paint shop Store Final Store Compressor Heating and Social &
shop PR BS PS assembly FA system CS boiler system administrative
HB building AB
Transformer Main Paint shop

substation switchgear switchgear
BS
PR PS /
System 1
110/20 kV
0.4 kV AB
CS 0.4 kV
M1 HB
M5
0.4 kV
PS /
M6
System 2
UPS
M10
6 kV FA 0.4 kV
110/20 kV G
3~
0.4 kV
0.4 kV
0.4 kV
20 kV 20 kV 20 kV
Fig. 4/38 Model network (110/20/6/0.4 kV) to supply production processes in an automotive manufacturing plant
4/87 4
MV
TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4
C Ensuring a high degree of supply

safety by mastering the (n-1)
principle MEB MEB MEB MEB
C Ensuring high power quality in accor-
dance with DIN EN 50160:2000-03 3 3 3 3
(properties of the supply voltage)

L1-L3
and DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE 0839
Parts 2-4):2003-05 (EMC level)
C Ensuring a high degree of safety
for man and machinery under nor- PEN
mal operating conditions as well
as under fault conditions LV High-current busbar system
C High adaptability to changing 3 3
N
manufacturing processes
C Reduction of operating costs due
to low maintenance expense and 5 A“≤ 16 mm2 3 A ≥ 25 mm2
low power losses
C Simple operatability and operator-
friendly systems alike Busbar trunking system
L1-L3 L1-L3
N
In automotive manufacturing plants, N
PE PE
a network configuration as shown in
Fig. 4/38 has proved its worth with TS1…TS4 Load center substations distributed in the production area
regard to technically and economi- MEB Main equipotential bonding
cally efficient implementation of
these requirements. Fig. 4/39 Load center network in combination with a TN-C-S system built from busbar trunking
systems
Optimum power system and plant
configuration accordance with DIN EN 61330 (VDE Most favorable operating mode
0670 Part 611):1997-08, has proven from the point of view of power
The power supply for the production
itself as an economical and safe ele- engineering – medium voltage
halls in a car manufacturing plant is
ment in distributed power supply. (MV)
distributed by means of medium-volt-
age load center systems. Every MV Protection for the TS stations, which The operating mode of the MV
load center system is operated in are equipped with cast-resin trans- power system is determined by the
combination with a low-voltage sys- formers, is provided by a load-switch- type of neutral point connection. The
tem built from high-current busbars fuse combination which is rated and most important types of neutral point
and busbar trunking systems (Fig. selected according to the criteria given connection in MV systems according
4/39 and 4/40). These high-current in IEC 62271-105:2002-08 or DIN EN to DIN VDE 0101 (VDE 0101):2000-01
busbars and busbar trunking systems 60420 (VDE Part 303):1994-09. The are as follows:
replace the typical line network and relevant standard for the selection C Isolated neutral
its main and subdistributions that of the high-voltage high rupturing C Ground fault compensation or reso-
used to supply the consumers. The capacity fuses (HV HRC fuses) is nant neutral grounding (RESPE)
PEHLA-tested transformer load cen- DIN VDE 0670-402 (VDE 0670 Part C Low-resistant neutral grounding
ter substation (TS station), tested in 402):1998-05. (NOSPE)

Medium Voltage
There is a general tendency towards MV

replacing resonant grounding of the
neutral point by low-resistant neutral
grounding in MV cable networks in
the automotive industry. The follow-
ing advantages are decisive for this
TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4
trend:
C (n-1)-redundant network design al-
lows selective disconnection of
1-pole faults MEB MEB MEB MEB
C Protective disconnection of the

fault location is carried out without
interrupting the power supply TL TL TL TL
3 3 3 3
C Clearly defined protective trippings
and changes of the switching L1-L3
status enable integrated power
automation
C Low-resistant grounded neutral
operation (resistance) prevents PE
PEN
high transient long-term operating
overvoltages LV High-current busbar system
C Danger of fault expansion and dou- 3 3
ble ground faults is eliminated
C Short tripping times limit follow-up
damages of ground faults at the
fault location
The operating experience gathered
with NOSPE networks used in plants L1-L3 L1-L3 Busbar trunking system
of Volkswagen AG, Adam Opel AG N N
and DaimlerChrysler AG confirms the PE PE
advantages of low-resistant neutral TS1…TS4 Load center substations distributed in the production area
grounding. BMW AG is another auto- MEB Main equipotential bonding
motive manufacturer that has de- TLPE/PEN Isolating link (bridge only in one load center substation)
cided in favor of low-resistant neutral
Fig. 4/40 Load center network in combination with a TN-S system built from busbar trunking
grounding of the 20-kV power sys- systems
tem to be installed in their new plant
at Leipzig.
Most favorable operating mode of the system power source and the
from the point of view of power type of connection to ground of the
engineering – low voltage (LV) conductive parts in the electric con-
sumer system are concerned, distinc-
The system types suitable for opera-
tions can be made between IT, TT
tion as LV systems are defined in IEC
and TN systems.
60364-1:2001-08 or DIN VDE 0100-300
(VDE 0100 Part 300):1996-01. As far
as the type of connection to ground
4/89 4
The TN system is the preferred

20/0.4kV 20/0.4kV 20/0.4kV
system type for supplying power to
TS2 1250kVA TS2 1250kVA TS3 1250kVA automotive manufacturing plants. For
6% 6% 6% distributed transformer infeeds (high-
current busbar), an LV system con-
forming to VDE can only be designed
UN = 400 V as TN-C system with common neu-
S“k = 55 MVA tral and protective conductor (PEN
∆u‘ = 1.2 %
conductor). Only at a lower level can
a TN-S system be built with a sepa-
rate neutral conductor (N conductor)
~ ~ and protective ground conductor
(PE conductor). Consequently, LV
systems for the automotive industry
M5 M1 M2 M4 M6 M1 M2 M5 have so far been designed exclu-
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
sively as TN-C-S systems.
160 kW 250 kW 160 kW 160 kW 115 kW 280 kW 160 kW 160 kW
Press 5 Special Press 2 Press 4 Try-out Special Press 2 Press 5 In a modern automotive manufactur-
press press press ing plant, too, higher requirements
Press line 1 Press line 2
are placed on electromagnetic com-
patibility in order to prevent any
Average cycle time for pressing the body parts negative impact on the production
T = 4s (n = load operations/min)
process by electromagnetic interfer-
101 ence of communication and informa-
tion technology systems. An EMC-
∆u‘zul suitable LV system with a continu-
[%]
ously de-energized PE conductor
3 must be designed as TN-S system. In
2
multiple-supply LV systems, a TN-S
system is only feasible if the PEN
∆u‘ = 1.2 % conductors or the individual supply
100
circuits can be grounded at a central
0.8
0.6
point.
0.4 At present, the form of design repre-

0.3 sented in Fig. 4/40 is not backed up
by national or international standards.
0.2
Until a valid standard has been
adopted, it is the sole responsibility
10-1 of the switchgear installer or plant
10-1 100 101 102 103 [min-1] 104
15 Load operations/min n operator. So far, only Adam Opel AG
has operated a multiple-supply LV
system as TN-S system.
Fig. 4/41 LV system rating in a press shop according to the voltage changes ∆u’perm as a func-
tion of the frequency n

Medium Voltage
Process-dependent particularities Body shop What is vital for quality-responsive

for the design of subsystems – welding of the body parts is the pres-
Connection of the welders in the
press shop ence of voltage dips that do not ex-
400-V system of the body shop is
ceed a limit ∆u’ = 10% in the statistic
In the press shop, a large number of carried out in groups by a symmetric
mean. Another quality indicator is the
motorized press drives are installed distribution to the phase conductors
scrap rate for voltage-related faulty
for forming metal sheets into body L1-L2, L1-L3, L2-L3 (Fig. 4/42). Due
weldings λ(∆u’perm. > 10%). The per-
parts. The individual power output of to their intermittent operating mode,
missible limit value for this scrap rate
these drives is relatively high com- the machines for welding the body
is λperm = 1‰.
pared to the total power demand of parts connected in the circuit do not
the press shop and it puts a surge- constitute a continuous load. There- In the body shop, compensation can
type, intermittent burden on the fore, the equipment in the welding normally be made non-choked. For
power system. Another system per- circuit must be rated according to its the non-choked compensation
turbation is caused by the thyristor thermal equivalent current. The ther- method, observance of the permissi-
controllers of the press drives, as mal equivalent current must be calcu- ble compatibility level for harmonic
they generate harmonics of the vth lated as a sequence of accidentally contents has been verified by meas-
order. overlapping welding pulses. The cal- urements in several 400-V welding
culation is performed by means of networks in the automotive industry.
Owing to the short-circuit power of
the thermal equivalent current A favorable solution in terms of
the network, voltage changes due to
method by establishing the square power engineering proves to be the
surge-type loads must be limited in
average, a probability calculation use of capacitors with a rated voltage
such a way that the operational
based on binomially distributed weld- of 480 V ≤ Um ≤ 525 V.
safety of consumers is not endan-
ing currents.
gered and the optical stress on the Paint shop
human eye by current fluctuations in For rating the welding network, the
Paint shop processes are character-
the lighting system remains within thermal equivalent current is, how-
ized by high load densities and long
reasonable limits. An example of how ever, merely of minor importance.
ON periods of the consumers. What
to meet this power quality require- What is more important are the volt-
is particularly typical is the negative
ment is shown in Fig. 4/41. age dips caused by the accidentally
impact on power quality caused by
overlapping welding pulses. The
Another requirement for the LV sys- the rectifiers for the electro-dipcoat-
probability calculation of these volt-
tem in the press shop is for the per- ing or cataphoretic painting process.
age dips is again based on the bino-
missible compatibility levels for har-
mial distribution. To apply the In order to relieve the LV system
monic contents to be observed as
Bernoulli formula, the different weld- from harmonic impact, these recti-
defined in DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE
ing machine types are combined into fiers are preferably supplied directly
Parts 2-4):2003-05. To maintain these
one uniform equivalent welding ma- from the MV system via separate
levels, the compensation system of
chine with an identical peak welding transformers.
the switchgear substations must nor-
current Iw, the identical power factor
mally be inductor-type. The optimum As important as the observance of
cosϕ and the same relative ON pe-
degree of choking p depends on the the permissible compatibility levels
riod OP. This probability peak load
harmonic contents of the vth order for harmonic contents according to
calculation provides the required indi-
(v = 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23 and 25 DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE 0839 Parts 2-
cator for evaluating the power supply
for 3-phase bridge circuits) that are 4): 2003-05 is the strict fulfillment of
quality in the body shop.
mostly present. In practice, inductor- safety-of-supply requirements set by
capacitor units with a choking degree the painting process itself.
between p = 6% and p = 7% are
mainly used.
4/91 4
nected between phase conductor

(L1vL2vL3) and neutral conductor (N).
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
In this type of connection, all current
L1 harmonics of the order v that can be
L2
L3
divided by 3 add up in the neutral
PEN conductor N. The current harmonic
PE
whereby v = 3 is particularly distinc-
L1 2,500 A high-current busbar tive. To prevent thermal overload
L2
L3
caused by current harmonics, the
PEN phase conductors (L1, L2, L3), neu-
PE
tral conductor (N) and PEN conductor
of the TN-C-S system (Fig. 4/39) or
L1 800 A busbar trunking systemsi TN-S system are designed with iden-
L2 tical cross sections as a matter of
L3
N principle.
PE
Summary
The load center network in combina-
tion with a TN system consisting of
busbar trunking systems is the ideal
network configuration for the power
Welding machine group i L1–L2 i L1–L3 i L2–L3
supply of production halls in an auto-
Number of welders 90 90 90 motive manufacturing plant. Low-re-
sistant neutral point grounding is
Peak welding current is 800 A
most advantageous for MV system
Relative ON period OP 8% operation. An EMC-suitable LV sys-
tem with a continuously de-energized
ts
OP = 100, with welding time ts and cycle time T protective conductor (PE) must be
T
designed as TN-S system.
Fig. 4/42 Operation of welding machines arranged in groups in the 0.4 kV power system of the Currently, there is no binding stan-
body shop (TN-S system) dard for the design of a multiple-in-
feed LV system as TN-S system.
There is only a unanimously optimum
This includes the uninterruptible han- Final assembly
solution for the design and operation
dling of the single fault by a protec-
The connected power of the con- of the supply networks. The rating of
tive disconnection of the fault loca-
sumers in the final car assembly is the supply networks for the
tion from supply.
relatively low as compared to the processes handled in the production
Cast-resin transformers at the TS sta- nominal power of the supplying halls results in engineering differ-
tion provide an instantaneous transformers. For this reason, the ences such as the number and size
standby or “hot” redundancy to han- maximum power demand of all con- of the supplying transformers and the
dle such single faults. In addition, a sumers in the grid is important for method of compensation.
standby supply is provided for sensi- system rating. Power demand is
tive and fail-critical consumers. largely influenced by the simultaneity
factor g, the degree of utilization a,
the power factor cos ϕ and the effi-
ciency η. In the final assembly plant
section, a large proportion of the non-
linear consumers is single-phase con-

Medium Voltage
4/93 4
TIP_Kap_05_Engl 11.08.2005 19:05 Uhr Seite B
TIP_Kap_05_Engl 11.08.2005 19:05 Uhr Seite C
Transformers
chapter 5
5 Transformers
Transformers are one of the primary
Rated power Max. operating voltage
components for the transmission and
MVA kV
distribution of electrical energy. Their
design mainly results from the range Oil distribution 0.05 – 2.5 ≤ 36
of application, construction, rated transformers
power and voltage level.
GEAFOL cast-resin 0.10 – 40 ≤ 36
The scope of transformer types ex- transformers
tends from generator transformers to
distribution transformers. Table 5/1 Transformer types
Distribution transformers are within

the range from 50 to 2,500 kVA and General standards and Important additional standards
max. 36 kV. In the last stage, they specifications
distribute the electrical energy to the C DIN 42500, HD 428: oil-immersed
consumers by feeding from the high- The transformers comply with the three-phase distribution transform-
voltage into the low-voltage distribu- relevant VDE specifications, i.e. ers 50–2500 kVA
tion network. These are designed ei- DIN VDE 0532 “Transformers and C DIN 42523, HD 538:
ther as liquid-filled or as dry-type reactors” and the “Technical condi- three-phase dry-type transformers
transformers. tions of supply for three-phase trans- 100–2500 kVA
formers” issued by VDEW and ZVEI. C DIN 45635 T30: noise level
Transformers with a rated power up C IEC 60289: reactance coils and
to 2.5 MVA and a voltage up to 36 kV Therefore they also satisfy the re-
neutral grounding transformers
are referred to as distribution trans- quirements of IEC Publication 60076,
C IEC 60076-10: measurement of
formers; all transformers of higher Parts 1 to 5, together with the
noise level
ratings are classified as power trans- standards and specifications (HD and
C IEC 60076-11: dry-type transformers
formers. EN) of the European Union (EU).
C RAL: coating/varnish
Enquiries should be directed to the
manufacturer where other standards
and specifications are concerned.
Only the US (ANSI/NEMA) and Cana-
dian (CSA) standards differ from IEC
by any substantial degree.

Transformers
Electrical Design
I
Dy1 1 Yd1 I
Power ratings and type of cooling
1
iii i
All power ratings in this guide are i
iii
the product of rated voltage (no- III ii II
load voltage times phase-factor III ii II
for three-phase transformers) and
rated current of the line side winding
I
(at center tap, if several taps are Dy5 Yd5 I
provided), expressed in kVA or MVA,
as defined in IEC 60076-1. If only one ii iii iii
power rating and no cooling method i ii
III II
are shown, natural oil-air cooling 5 III i II
(ONAN or OA) is implied for oil- 5
immersed transformers. If two
ratings are shown, forced-air cooling 11 I
Dy11 Yd11 I
(ONAF or FA) in one or two steps is
i 11
applicable.
ii i
For cast-resin transformers, natural iii ii
III II
air cooling (AN) is standard. Forced- III iii II
air cooling (AF) is also applicable.
Temperature rise Fig. 5/1 Most commonly used vector groups
In accordance with IEC 60076, the

standard temperature rise for oil-im- Whereby the standard ambient tem- These adjustment factors are applica-
mersed power and distribution trans- peratures are defined as follows: ble up to 15 K above standard tem-
formers is: C 40 °C maximum temperature, perature conditions.
C 30 °C average on any one day,
C 65 K (average winding temperature
C 20 °C average in any one year, Altitude of installation
measured by the resistance meth-
C –25 °C lowest temperature out-
od) The transformers are suitable for op-
doors,
C 60 K maximum oil temperature eration at altitudes up to 1000 me-
C –5 °C lowest temperature indoors.
(measured by thermometer) tres above sea level. Site altitudes
Higher ambient temperatures require above 1000 m necessitate the use of
The standard temperature rise for
a corresponding reduction in temper- special designs. For every 100 m
Siemens cast-resin transformers is
ature rise, and thus affect price or above the permissible altitude of in-
C 100 K (insulation class F) at HV and rated power as follows: stallation, the rated power for oil-im-
LV winding. C 1.5% surcharge for each 1 K above mersed transformers is to be re-
standard temperature conditions, duced by approx. 0.4% and for dry-
or type transformers for approx. 0.5%.
C 1.0% reduction of rated power for
each 1 K above standard tempera-
ture conditions.
5/3 5
Transformer losses and Test voltages Routine and special tests

efficiencies
Power-frequency withstand voltages All transformers are subjected to the
Losses and efficiencies stated in this and lightning-impulse withstand following routine tests in the factory:
manual are average values for guid- voltages are in accordance with C Measurement of winding resist-
ance only. They are applicable if no IEC 60076-3, Paragraph 5, Table II, as ance
loss evaluation figure is stated in the follows: C Measurement of voltage ratio and
inquiry (see following chapter) and check of polarity or vector group
they are subject to the tolerances Conversion to 60 Hz – possibilities C Measurement of impedance volt-
stated in IEC 60076-1, namely +10% age
All ratings in the selection tables of
of the total losses, or +15% of each C Measurement of load loss
this guide are based on 50 Hz opera-
component loss, provided that the C Measurement of no-load loss and
tion. For 60 Hz operation, the follow-
tolerance for the total losses is not no-load current
ing options apply:
exceeded. C Induced overvoltage withstand test
C Rated power and impedance volt-
(windings test)
If optimized and/or guaranteed losses age are increased by 10%, all other
C Separate-source voltage withstand
without tolerances are required, this parameters remain identical.
test (AC test voltage)
must be stated in the inquiry. C Rated power increases by 20%,
C Partial discharge test (only GEAFOL
but no-load losses increase by 30%
cast-resin transformers).
Connections and vector groups and noise level increases by 3 dB,
all other parameters remain identi- The following special tests are op-
Distribution transformers
cal (this layout is not possible for tional and must be specified further
The transformers listed in this man-
cast-resin transformers). in the enquiry:
ual are all three-phase transformers
C All technical data remain identical, C Lightning-impulse voltage test
with one set of windings connected
price is reduced by 5%. (LI test), full-wave and chopped-
in star (wye) and the other one in
C Temperature rise is reduced by wave (to be specified)
delta, whereby the neutral of the
10 K, load losses are reduced by C Partial discharge test
star-connected winding is fully rated
15%, all other parameters remain C Heat-run test at natural or forced
and brought to the outside.
identical. cooling (to be specified)
The primary winding (HV) is normally C Noise level test
Overloading
connected in delta, the secondary C Peak short-circuit test.
winding (LV) in wye. The electrical Overloading of Siemens transformers
Test certificates are issued for all of
offset of the windings in respect to is guided by the relevant IEC 60354
the above tests on request.
each other is either 30, 150 or 330 “Loading guide for oil-immersed
degrees standard (Dy1, Dy5, Dy11). transformers” and the (similar) ANSI
Other vector groups as well as sin- C57.92 “Guide for loading mineral-oil-
gle-phase transformers and auto- immersed power transformers.”
transformers on request.
Overloading of GEAFOL cast-resin
transformers according to IEC 60905
"Loading guide."

Transformers
Transformer cell
A. Capital cost
(indoor installation)
Cp · r amount
The transformer cell must have the CC = –––––– –––––––
100 year
necessary electrical clearances when
an open-air connection is used. The Cp = purchase price
ventilation system must be large p · qn
enough to fulfil the recommendations r= –––––– = depreciation factor
qn – 1
for the maximum temperatures ac- p
cording to IEC. q= –––– + 1 = interest factor
100
Transformer loss evaluation p = interest rate in % p.a.
The sharply increased costs of elec- n = depreciation period in years

trical energy have made it almost
mandatory for buyers of electrical B. Cost of no-load loss
machinery to carefully evaluate the
amount
inherent losses of this equipment. In CP0 = Ce · 8760 h / year · P0 –––––––
case of distribution and power trans- year
formers, which operate continuously amount
and most frequently in loaded condi- Ce = energy charges –––––––
kWh
tion, this is especially important. As
an example, the added cost of loss- P0 = no-load loss [kW]
optimized transformers can in most
cases be counterbalanced by savings C. Cost of load loss
in power consumption in less than
amount
three years. CPk = Ce · 8760 h / year · α2 · Pk –––––––
year
Low-loss transformers use more and
constant operating load
better materials for their construction, α = ––––––––––––––––––––––––
therefore their purchase price is rated load
higher. By stipulating loss evaluation Pk = copper loss [kW]
figures in the transformer enquiry, the
manufacturer receives the necessary
D. Cost resulting from demand charges
information to offer a loss-optimized
transformer rather than the low-cost amount
CD = Cd (P0 + Pk) –––––––
model. year
Detailed loss evaluation methods for amount
transformers have been developed Cd = demand charges ––––––––
kW · year
and are described accurately in the
literature, taking the project-specific
Table 5/2 Cost examination for transformer selection
evaluation factors of a given cus-
tomer into account.
Table 5/2 gives a simplified method C Additional cost and inflation factors
for a quick evaluation of different are not considered
quoted transformer losses, making C Demand charges are based on
the following assumptions: 100% load.
C The transformers are operated con-
tinuously
C The transformers operate at partial
load, but this partial load is constant
5/5 5
The total cost of owning and operat-

Depreciation period................................. n = 20 years Depreciation factor
ing a transformer for one year is thus
Interest rate ............................................ p = 12 % p.a. r = 13.99
defined as follows:
Energy charge ......................................... Ce = 0.13 €/kWh
A. Capital cost (CC)
€
taking into account the purchase Demand charge....................................... Cd = 179 –––––––
kW · year
price (Cp), the interest rate (p), and
Equivalent annual load factor .................. α = 0.8
the depreciation period (n)
B. Cost of no-load loss (CP0)
based on the no-load loss (P0), and A. Low-cost transformer B. Loss-optimized transformer
energy cost (Ce)
P0 = 2.6 kW no-load loss P0 = 1.7 kW no-load loss
C. Cost of load loss (CPk) Pk = 20 kW load loss Pk = 17 kW load loss
based on the copper loss (Pk), the Cp = € 12800 purchase price Cp = € 14300 purchase price
equivalent annual load factor (α),
12,800 · 13.99 14,300 · 13.99
and energy cost (Ce) Cd = –––––––––––––– Cd = ––––––––––––––
100 100
D. Demand charges (Cd) = € 1,790/year = € 2,000/year
based on the power demand set
CP0 = 0.13 · 8760 · 2.6 CP0 = 0.13 · 8760 · 1.7
by the power supply company,
= € 2,961/year = € 1,936/year
and the total power loss.
CPk = 0.13 · 8760 · 0.64 ·20 CPk = 0.13 · 8760 · 0.64 ·17
These individual costs are calculated
= € 14,580/year = € 12,390/year
as shown in Table 5/2.
C0 = 179 · (2.6 + 20) C0 = 179 · (1.7 + 17)
To demonstrate the usefulness of
= € 4,045/year = € 3,350/year
such calculations, the following arbi-
trary examples are shown, using fac-
Total cost of owning and operating this Total cost of owning and operating this
tors that can be considered typical in
transformer is thus: transformer is thus:
Germany, and neglecting the effects
of inflation on the rate assumed. € 23,376/year € 19,676/year
The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of € 3,700 per year
pays for the increased purchase price in less than one year.
Table 5/3 Example: 1,600 kVA distribution transformer

Transformers
Mechanical Design operating pressure remains at only a

fraction of the usual. These trans-
General mechanical design for oil- formers are always shipped com-
immersed transformers pletely filled with oil and sealed
for their lifetime. Bushings can be
C Iron core made of grain-oriented exchanged from the outside without
electrical sheet steel insulated on draining the oil below the top of the
both sides, core-type active part.
C Windings consisting of copper sec-
tion wire, copper band or aluminum The hermetically sealed system pre- Photo 5/1 Cross section of a TUMETIC
vents oxygen, nitrogen, or humidity three-phase distribution
band. The insulation has a high dis- transformer
ruptive strength and is tempera- from contact with the insulating oil.
ture-resistant, thus guaranteeing a This improves the ageing properties
long service life of the oil to the extent that no main-
C Designed to withstand short circuit tenance is required on these trans-
for at least 2 seconds (IEC) formers for their lifetime. Generally,
C Oil-filled tank designed as tank with the TUMETIC transformer is lower
strong corrugated walls or as radia- than the TUNORMA®transformer.
tor tank This design has been in successful
C Transformer base with plain or service since 1973. A special
flanged wheels (skid base avail- TUMETIC protection device has been
able) developed for this transformer.
C Cooling/insulation liquid: Mineral oil TUNORMA distribution transform-
according to VDE 0370/IEC 60296(3). ers with conservator
Silicone oil or synthetic liquids are This is the standard distribution trans-
available (on request) former design in all ratings. The oil
C Standard coating for outdoor instal- level in the tank and the top-mounted
lation. Coatings for special applica- bushings is kept constant by a con- Photo 5/2 630 kVA, three-phase, TUNORMA
tions (e.g. in aggressive environ- servator vessel or expansion tank 20 kV ± 2.5 %/0.4 kV distribution
ments) are available transformer
mounted at the highest point of the
transformer. Oil level changes due to
Tank design and oil preservation thermal cycling affect the conserva- Tanks from 50 kVA to approximately
system tor only. The ambient air is prevented 6,000 kVA are preferably of the cor-
TUMETIC® sealed-tank distribution from direct contact with the insulat- rugated steel design, whereby the
transformers ing oil through oil traps and dehydrat- sidewalls are formed on automatic
In ratings up to 2,500 kVA and 170 kV ing breathers. machines into integral cooling pock-
LI this is the standard sealed-tank ets. Suitable spot welds and braces
distribution transformer without render the required mechanical
conservator and gas cushion. The stability. Tank bottom and cover are
TUMETIC transformer is always fabricated from rolled and welded
completely filled with oil; oil expan- steel plate.
sion is taken up by the flexible corru-
gated steel tank (variable volume
tank design), whereby the maximum
5/7 5
Connection Systems
Distribution transformers
All Siemens transformers have top-
mounted HV and LV bushings accord- Photo 5/3 Fully enclosed cable connection box
ing to DIN in their standard version.
Besides the open bushing arrange-
ment for direct connection of bare or
insulated wires, three basic insulated
terminal systems are available.
Fully enclosed terminal box for

cables (Photo 5/3)
Available for either HV or LV side, or
for both. Horizontally split design in
degree of protection IP 44 or IP 54
(totally enclosed and fully protected
against contact with live parts, plus
protection against drip, splash or Photo 5/4 Grounded metal elbow plug connection
spray water).
Cable installation through split cable HV LV
glands and removable plates facing
diagonally downwards. Suitable for Cable box Cable box
single-core or three-phase cables Cable box Flange
with solid dielectric insulation, with
or without stress cones. Multiple ca- Flange Cable box
bles per phase are terminated on Flange Flange connection
auxiliary bus structures attached to boxes
the bushings. Removal of trans-
former by simply bending back the Elbow Cable box
cables. connector
Elbow Flange
Insulated plug connectors connector
(Photo 5/4)
Table 5/4 Possible combinations of Photo 5/5 Flange connection for switchgear
For substation installations, suitable connection systems and bus ducts
HV can be applied using insulated
elbow connectors in LI ratings up to
170 kV. Flange connection (Photo 5/5) partitions are available between HV
and LV bushings if flange/flange
Air-insulated bus ducts, insulated
arrangements are chosen.
busbars or throat-connected
switchgear cubicles are connected Apart from open-type arrangements
via standardized flanges on steel ter- of the bushings, all terminal system
minal enclosures. These can accom- combinations listed in Table 5/4 are
modate either HV, LV or both bush- possible.
ings. Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy

Transformers
Accessories and Protective

Devices
Accessories not listed completely.
Deviations are possible.
Double-float Buchholz relay

(Photo 5/6)
For sudden pressure rise and gas de-
tection in oil-immersed transformer
tanks with conservator. Installed in
the connecting pipe between tank
and conservator and responding to in-
ternal arcing faults and slow decom-
position of insulating materials. Addi- Photo 5/6 Double-float Buchholz relay Photo 5/7 Dial-type contact thermometer
tionally, backup function of oil alarm.
The relay is actuated either by pres-
sure waves or gas accumulation or
by loss of oil below the relay level.
Separate contacts are installed for
alarm and tripping.
In case of a gas accumulation alarm,
gas samples can be drawn directly at
the relay with a small chemical test-
ing kit. Discoloring of two liquids indi-
cates either arcing by-products or in-
sulation decomposition products in
the oil. No change in color indicates
an air bubble.
Photo 5/8 Magnetic oil level indicator
Dial-type contact thermometer Magnetic oil level indicator

(Photo 5/7) (Photo 5/8)
Indicates actual top-oil temperature. The float position inside of the con-
Sensor mounted in well in tank servator is transmitted magnetically
cover. Up to four separately ad- through the tank wall to the indicator.
justable alarm contacts and one maxi- Devices supplied with limit (position)
mum pointer are available. Installed switches for high- and low-level
to be readable from the ground. alarm are available. Readable from
These instruments can also be used the ground.
to control forced-cooling equipment.
5/9 5
Photo 5/9 Protective device for Photo 5/10 Dehydrating breather Photo 5/11 Dehydrating breather
hermetically sealed
transformers (TUMETIC)
Protective device for hermetically Pressure relief device (Photo 5/12)

sealed transformers (TUMETIC)
Relieves abnormally high internal
(Photo 5/9)
pressure shock waves. Easily visible
For use on hermetically sealed operation pointer and alarm contact.
TUMETIC distribution transformers. Reseals positively after operation and
Gives alarm upon loss of oil and gas continues to function without opera-
accumulation. Mounted directly at tor action.
the (permanently sealed) filler pipe of
these transformers. Dehydrating breather
(Photos 5/10, 5/11)
Photo 5/12 Pressure relief device
A dehydrating breather removes
most of the moisture from the air
which is drawn into the conservator
as the transformer cools down. The
dehydrating breather contributes to
safe and reliable operation of the
transformer.

Transformers
Technical Data of Standard DIN 42500

TUNORMA and TUMETIC
Distribution Transformers Rated power 50–2500 kVA
Note: The tank with strong corru- Rated frequency 50 Hz

gated walls represented in Fig. 5/3 is HV rating up to 36 kV
the preferred design. For high volt-
ages up to 24 kV and a rating up to Taps on HV side ± 2.5 % or 2 x ± 2.5 %
2,500 kVA (and with high voltages > LV rating 400 – 720 V (special designs for up to 12 kV
24–36 kV and a rating up to 800 kVA), can be built)
the conservator is fitted at the verti-
cal side just above the low-voltage Connection HV winding: delta
bushings. LV winding: star
(up to 100 kVA: zigzag)
Losses
Impedance voltage at 6 % at (4 % only up to 630 kVA rated
The standard HD 428.1.S1 (= DIN rated current power and HV rating
42500, Part 1) applies to three-phase up to 24 kV)
oil-immersed distribution transform-
ers 50 Hz, from 50 kVA to 2,500 kVA, Cooling ONAN
Um to 24 kV. Protection class IP 00
For load losses (Pk), three different Final coating RAL 7033 (other colors are available)
listings (A, B and C) were specified.
There were also three listings (A’, B’
Table 5/5 TUMETIC and TUNORMA three-phase oil-immersed distribution transformers
and C’) for no-load losses (P0) and
corresponding sound levels.
Due to the different requirements, Um Lightning impulse test voltage AC test voltage
pairs of values were proposed which, kV kV kV
in the national standard, permit one 1.1 – 3
or several combinations of losses.
12 75 28
DIN 42500 specifies the combina-
tions A-C’, C-C’ and B-A’ as being 24 125 50
most suitable. 36 170 70
The combinations B-A’ (normal
losses) and A-C’ (reduced losses) are Table 5/6 Insulation level (IP 00)
approximately in line with previous
standards. In addition, there is the
for no-load losses, the listings D’ and
C-C’ combination. Transformers of
E’ were specified. In order to find the
this kind with additionally reduced
most efficient transformer, please
impedance especially economical
see the aforementioned section on
(maximum efficiency > 99%). The
“Transformer loss evaluation.”
higher costs of these transformers
are counteracted by the energy sav-
ings which they make.
Standard HD 428.3.S1 (= DIN 42500-3)
specifies the losses for oil distribu-
tion transformers up to Um = 36 kV.
For load losses, the listings D and E,
5/11 5
12
11
10 3 8
2N 2U 2V 2W
H1 1U 2U 1W B1
7
9 6
2 8
E A1
2 Oil drain plug 9 Towing eye, 30 mm dia.

3 Thermometer pocket 10 Lashing lug
6 Adjustment for off-load tap changer 11 Oil filler neck
7 Rating plate (relocatable) 12 Provision for mounting
8 Grounding terminals protective device
Fig. 5/2 TUMETIC distribution transformer (sealed tank)
5
4 1
10 3 8
H1 2N 2U 2V 2W
1U 2U 1W B1
7
9 6
2 8
E A1
1 Oil level indicator 6 Adjustment for off-load tap changer

2 Oil drain plug 7 Rating plate (relocatable)
3 Thermometer pocket 8 Grounding terminals
4 Buchholz relay (optional extra) 9 Towing eye, 30 mm dia.
5 Dehydrating breather (optional extra) 10 Lashing lug
Notes: Tank with strong corrugated walls shown in illustration is the preferred design. With
HV ratings up to 24 kV and rated power up to 2,500 kVA (and with HV ratings > 24–36 kV and
rated power up to 800 kVA), the conservator is fitted on the long side just above the LV bushings.
Fig. 5/3 TUNORMA distribution transformer (with conservator)

Rated Max. Imped- Type Combi- No-load Load Sound Sound Total Dimensions Roller-
power rated ance nation of losses losses pressure power weight Length Width Height to-roller
voltage voltage losses level 1 m level distance
HV side acc. to tolerance (centers)
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
CENELEC + 3 dB
Sn Um Uz P0 Pk 75* LPA LWA A1 B1 H1 E

kVA kV % 4JB.. 4HB.. W W dB dB kg mm mm mm mm
50 12 4 ..4744-3LB B-A' 190 1350 42 55 340 350 860 980 660 660 1210 1085 520
4 ..4744-3RB A-C' 125 1100 34 47 400 430 825 1045 660 660 1210 1085 520
4 ..4744-3TB C-C' 125 875 34 47 420 440 835 985 660 660 1220 1095 520
24 4 ..4767-3LB B-A' 190 1350 42 55 370 380 760 860 660 660 1315 1235 520
4 ..4767-3RB A-C' 125 1100 34 47 430 460 860 860 660 660 1300 1220 520
4 ..4767-3TB C-C' 125 875 33 47 480 510 880 1100 685 685 1385 1265 520
36 6 ..4780-3CB E-D´ 230 1450 x 52 500 x 1000 x 710 710 1530 x 520
100 12 4 ..5044-3LB B-A' 320 2150 45 59 500 500 1090 1020 660 660 1275 1110 520
4 ..5044-3RB A-C' 210 1750 35 49 570 570 980 980 660 660 1315 1145 520
4 ..5044-3TB C-C' 210 1475 35 49 600 620 1030 930 660 660 1320 1150 520
24 4 ..5067-3LB B-A' 320 2150 45 59 520 530 1020 1140 685 685 1360 1245 520
4 ..5067-3RB A-C' 210 1750 35 49 600 610 1030 1030 690 690 1400 1280 520
4 ..5067-3TB C-C' 210 1475 35 49 640 680 960 1060 695 695 1425 1305 520
36 6 ..5080-3CB E-D´ 380 2350 x 56 660 x 1050 x 780 780 1600 x 520
160 12 4 ..5244-3LA B-A' 460 3100 47 62 620 610 1140 1140 710 710 1350 1185 520
4 ..5244-3RA A-C' 300 2350 37 52 700 690 1130 1010 660 660 1390 1220 520
4 ..5244-3TA C-C' 300 2000 38 52 760 780 985 1085 660 660 1380 1215 520
24 4 ..5267-3LA B-A' 460 3100 47 62 660 640 1150 1150 695 695 1440 1320 520
4 ..5267-3RA A-C' 300 2350 37 52 730 730 1030 930 695 695 1540 1420 520
4 ..5267-3TA C-C' 300 2000 37 52 800 820 1120 1120 710 710 1475 1355 520
36 6 ..5280-3CA E-D´ 520 3350 x 59 900 x 1120 x 800 800 1700 x 520
(200) 12 4 ..5344-3LA B-A' 550 3600 48 63 720 710 1190 1190 680 680 1450 1285 520
4 ..5344-3RA A-C' 360 2760 38 53 840 830 1070 1120 660 660 1470 1300 520
4 ..5344-3TA C-C' 360 2350 38 53 900 920 1130 1130 660 660 1450 1285 520
24 4 ..5367-3LA B-A' 550 3600 48 63 800 780 1290 1290 820 820 1595 1425 520
4 ..5367-3RA A-C' 360 2760 38 53 890 910 1110 1230 755 755 1630 1460 520
4 ..5367-3TA C-C' 360 2350 38 53 950 980 1080 1180 705 705 1595 1430 520
36 6 ..5380-3CA E-D´ 600 3800 x 61 1000 x 1250 x 800 800 1700 x 520
Dimensions and weights are approximate values.

Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.
x: On request
* Related to 75 °C
Table 5/7 Selection table for oil-immersed distribution transformers from 50 to 2,500 kVA
5/13 5
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
CENELEC + 3 dB

250 12 4 ..5444-3LA B-A' 650 4200 50 65 830 820 1300 1300 810 810 1450 1285 520
4 ..5444-3RA A-C' 425 3250 40 55 940 920 1260 1260 670 820 1480 1415 520
4 ..5444-3TA C-C' 425 2750 40 55 1050 1070 1220 1220 690 700 1530 1310 520
24 4 ..5467-3LA B-A' 650 4200 49 65 920 900 1340 1340 800 760 1620 1450 520
4 ..5467-3RA A-C' 425 3250 39 55 1010 1010 1140 1190 760 680 1675 1510 520
4 ..5467-3TA C-C' 425 2750 40 55 1120 1140 1220 1340 715 710 1640 1475 520
36 6 ..5480-3CA E-E´ 650 4250 x 62 1100 x 1350 x 800 x 1680 x 520
(315) 12 4 ..5544-3LA B-A' 780 5000 50 66 980 960 1440 1330 820 820 1655 1385 670
4 ..5544-3RA A-C' 510 3850 40 56 1120 1100 1400 1250 820 820 1690 1415 670
4 ..5544-3TA C-C' 510 3250 40 56 1240 1260 1380 1260 820 820 1665 1390 670
24 4 ..5567-3LA B-A' 780 5000 50 66 1050 1030 1450 1350 840 840 1655 1510 670
4 ..5567-3RA A-C' 510 3850 40 56 1170 1150 1410 1270 820 820 1755 1610 670
4 ..5567-3TA C-C' 510 3250 40 56 1250 1280 1395 1290 820 820 1675 1540 670
36 6 ..5580-3CA E-E´ 760 5400 x 64 1220 x 1420 x 960 x 1700 x 670
400 12 4 ..5644-3LA B-A' 930 6000 52 68 1180 1160 1470 1390 930 930 1700 1425 670
4 ..5644-3RA A-C' 610 4600 42 58 1320 1310 1400 1360 820 820 1700 1430 670
4 ..5644-3TA C-C' 610 3850 42 58 1470 1470 1410 1390 820 820 1695 1420 670
24 4 ..5667-3LA B-A' 930 6000 52 68 1240 1220 1570 1570 940 940 1655 1510 670
4 ..5667-3RA A-C' 610 4600 42 58 1370 1350 1475 1400 820 820 1760 1615 670
4 ..5667-3TA C-C' 610 3850 42 58 1490 1520 1440 1400 820 820 1765 1540 670
36 6 ..5580-3CA E-E´ 930 6200 x 65 1480 x 1470 x 990 x 1830 x 670
(500) 12 4 ..5744-3LA B-A' 1100 7100 53 69 1410 1380 1500 1430 840 840 1710 1440 670
4 ..5744-3RA A-C' 720 5450 42 59 1650 1620 1560 1550 890 890 1745 1470 670
4 ..5744-3TA C-C' 720 4550 43 59 1700 1710 1500 1470 820 820 1745 1470 670
24 4 ..5767-3LA B-A' 1100 7100 53 69 1460 1440 1470 1530 835 850 1755 1610 670
4 ..5767-3RA A-C' 720 5450 42 59 1650 1620 1495 1420 835 820 1815 1665 670
4 ..5767-3TA C-C' 720 4550 43 59 1860 1910 1535 1500 820 820 1860 1645 670
36 6 ..5780-3CA E-E´ 1050 7800 x 66 1680 x 1510 x 1030 x 1900 x 670

x: On request
* Related to 75 °C

Transformers
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
CENELEC + 3 dB

630 12 4 ..5844-3LA B-A' 1300 8400 53 70 1660 1660 1680 1480 880 880 1755 1585 670
4 ..5844-3RA A-C' 860 6500 43 60 1850 1810 1495 1420 835 820 1785 1510 670
4 ..5844-3TA C-C' 860 5400 43 60 2000 1990 1535 1380 820 820 1860 1520 670
6 ..5844-3PA B-A' 1200 8700 53 70 1750 1760 1720 1560 890 890 1920 1685 670
6 ..5844-3SA A-C' 800 6750 43 60 1950 1920 1665 1600 870 870 1740 1400 670
6 ..5844-3UA C-C' 800 5600 43 60 2160 2130 1670 1560 830 830 1840 1500 670
24 4 ..5867-3LA B-A' 1300 8400 53 70 1690 1650 1665 1640 860 860 1810 1595 670
4 ..5867-3RA A-C' 860 6500 43 60 1940 1920 1685 1680 870 870 1910 1695 670
4 ..5867-3TA C-C' 860 5400 43 60 2100 2130 1600 1490 820 820 1940 1725 670
6 ..5867-3PA B-A' 1200 8700 53 70 1730 1720 1780 1580 880 880 1760 1610 670
6 ..5867-3SA A-C' 800 6750 43 60 1970 1960 1645 1640 830 830 1810 1595 670
6 ..5867-3UA C-C' 800 5600 43 60 2240 2210 1740 1670 880 880 1840 1625 670
36 6 ..5880-3CA E-E´ 1300 8800 x 67 1950 x 1740 x 1080 x 1940 x 670
800 12 6 ..5944-3PA B-A' 1450 10700 55 72 1990 1960 1780 1540 1000 1000 1905 1660 670
6 ..5944-3SA A-C' 950 8500 45 62 2210 2290 1720 1830 900 960 1935 1630 670
6 ..5944-3UA C-C' 950 7400 44 62 2520 2490 1760 1710 920 920 1975 1730 670
24 6 ..5967-3PA B-A' 1450 10700 55 72 2000 1950 1720 1710 1000 1000 1885 1670 670
6 ..5967-3SA A-C' 950 8500 45 62 2390 2340 1760 1710 960 960 1945 1730 670
6 ..5967-3UA C-C' 950 7400 44 62 2590 2550 1770 1700 930 930 1985 1780 670
36 6 ..5980-3CA E-E´ 1520 11000 x 68 2400 x 1800 x 1100 x 2030 x 670
1000 12 6 ..6044-3PA B-A' 1700 13000 55 73 2450 2640 1790 1630 1000 1000 2095 2070 820
6 ..6044-3SA A-C' 1100 10500 45 63 2660 2610 1830 1830 1040 1040 2025 1770 820
6 ..6044-3UA C-C' 1100 9500 45 63 2800 2750 1830 1830 1040 1040 2105 1840 820
24 6 ..6067-3PA B-A' 1700 13000 55 73 2530 2720 1830 1670 1090 1010 2095 2120 820
6 ..6067-3SA A-C' 1100 10500 45 63 2750 2690 1790 1740 1050 1050 2055 1840 820
6 ..6067-3UA C-C' 1100 9500 45 63 2830 2810 1725 1770 990 990 2065 1850 820
36 6 ..6080-3CA E-E´ 1700 13000 x 68 2850 x 2120 x 1160 x 2220 x 820

x: On request
* Related to 75 °C
5/15 5
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
CENELEC + 3 dB

(1 250) 12 6 ..6144-3PA B-A' 2100 16000 56 74 2900 3080 1930 1850 1260 1100 2110 2070 820
6 ..6144-3SA A-C' 1300 13200 46 64 3100 3040 1810 1780 990 990 2145 1880 820
6 ..6144-3UA C-C' 1300 11400 46 64 3340 3040 1755 1720 1015 1000 2235 1970 820
24 6 ..6167-3PA B-A' 2100 16000 56 74 2950 3200 2020 1780 1260 1100 2110 2220 820
6 ..6167-3SA A-C' 1300 13200 46 64 3190 3120 1840 1810 1060 1060 2115 1900 820
6 ..6167-3UA C-C' 1300 11400 46 64 3390 3330 1810 1780 1015 990 2245 2030 820
36 6 ..6180-3CA E-E´ 2150 16400 x 70 3360 x 2150 x 1250 x 2350 x 820
1 600 12 6 ..6244-3PA B-A' 2600 20000 57 76 3450 3590 1970 1870 1220 1140 2315 2095 820
6 ..6244-3SA A-C' 1700 17000 47 66 3640 3590 2030 1760 1080 1090 2315 2010 820
6 ..6244-3UA C-C' 1700 14000 47 66 3930 3880 2020 1900 1110 1100 2395 2070 820
24 6 ..6267-3PA B-A' 2600 20000 57 76 3470 3690 2070 1830 1280 1120 2335 2320 820
6 ..6267-3SA A-C' 1700 17000 47 66 3670 3850 2030 2000 1230 1070 2265 2120 820
6 ..6267-3UA C-C' 1700 14000 47 66 4010 3950 2000 1850 1030 1030 2305 2010 820
36 6 ..6280-3CA E-E´ 2600 19200 x 71 3930 x 2170 x 1340 x 2480 x 820
(2 000) 12 6 ..6344-3PA B-A' 2900 25300 58 78 4390 4450 2100 1890 1330 1330 2555 2540 1070
6 ..6344-3SA A-C' 2050 21200 49 68 4270 4430 2080 1840 1330 1330 2455 2250 1070
6 ..6344-3UA C-C' 2050 17500 49 68 4730 4710 2020 1730 1330 1330 2495 2170 1070
24 6 ..6367-3PA B-A' 2900 25300 58 78 4480 4500 2020 1860 1330 1330 2655 2660 1070
6 ..6367-3SA A-C' 2050 21200 49 68 4290 4490 2190 2030 1330 1330 2425 2280 1070
6 ..6367-3UA C-C' 2050 17500 49 68 4910 4840 2110 1980 1330 1330 2475 2180 1070
36 6 ..6380-3CA E-E´ 3200 22000 x 75 5100 x 2260 x 1380 x 2560 x 1070
2 500 12 6 ..6444-3PA B-A' 3500 29000 61 81 5200 5090 2115 2030 1345 1330 2685 2550 1070
6 ..6444-3SA A-C' 2500 26500 51 71 5150 5110 2195 1950 1345 1330 2535 2450 1070
6 ..6444-3UA C-C' 2500 22000 51 71 5790 5660 2190 2190 1330 1330 2565 2240 1070
24 6 ..6467-3PA B-A' 3500 29000 61 81 5420 5220 2115 2030 1335 1330 2785 2675 1070
6 ..6467-3SA A-C' 2500 26500 51 71 5260 5220 2195 2030 1335 1335 2585 2580 1070
6 ..6467-3UA C-C' 2500 22000 51 71 5640 5470 2160 2080 1330 1330 2605 2305 1070
36 6 ..6480-3CA E-E´ 3800 29400 x 76 5900 x 2320 x 1390 x 2790 x 1070

x: On request
* Related to 75 °C

Transformers
LV terminals Three-leg core

Normal arrangement: Top or, Made of grain-oriented,
Bottom at LV side. low-loss electrolaminations
Special version: available insulated on both sides
on request at extra charge
Resilient spacers
HV terminals To insulate core and
Variable arrangements, for windings from mechanical
optimal station design. HV vibrations, resulting in low
tapping links on low-voltage noise emissions
side for adjustment to system
conditions, reconnectable in HV winding
de-energized state
Consisting of vacuum-potted
single foil-type aluminum
coils. See enlarged detail in
Fig. 5/5
Cross-flow fans
LV winding
Permitting up to 50% increase
in the rated power Made of aluminum band.
Turns firmly glued together
by means of insulating
sheet wrapper material
Temperature monitoring
By PTC thermistor detectors Insulation: Mixture of
in the LV winding epoxy resin and quartz
Paint finish on steel parts powder
Multiple coating, RAL 5009. Makes the transformer

On request: Two-component maintenance-free,
varnish or hot-dip galvanizing moisture-proof, tropicalized,
(for particularly aggressive flame-resistant and self-
environments) extinguishing
Environmental category E2
Climatic category C2 Clamping frame
and truck
(If the transformer is installed
outdoors, degree of protection Rollers can be swung
IP 23 must be assured) around for lengthways or
sideways travel
Fire class F1
Fig. 5/4 GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformer
GEAFOL Cast-Resin Advantages and applications insulating materials are used through-
out, so that all restrictions applying
Dry-Type Transformers GEAFOL distribution and power
to oil-filled electrical equipment,
transformers in ratings from 100 to
such as oil-collecting pits, fire walls,
approx. 40,000 kVA and LI values of
Standards and regulations fire-extinguishing equipment, etc.,
over 200 kV are full substitutes for
are omitted.
GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type oil-immersed transformers with com-
transformers comply with parable electrical and mechanical
IEC 60076-11, CENELEC HD 464, data.
HD 538 and DIN 42523.
GEAFOL transformers are designed
for indoor installation close to their
point of use, which is often at the
load center. Flame-retardant inorganic
5/17 5
GEAFOL transformers are also in-

stalled where oil-filled transformers
must not be used: inside buildings, in
tunnels, on ships, on offshore cranes
and platforms, in wind power sta-
tions, in groundwater protection ar-
eas, in food processing plants etc.
Often they are combined with their
primary and secondary switchgear
and distribution boards into compact
substations that are installed directly
at their point of use. As con-
verter transformers for
variable-speed drives
they can be installed
together with the con-
verters at the drive location. This re- Runddrahtwicklung
8
duces civil works, cable costs, trans-
mission losses, and installation costs. 8
GEAFOL transformers are fully LI- U
7
rated. They have similar noise levels 1
to comparable oil-filled transformers. 7 2 8
Taking the above indirect cost reduc- 7
6 3
tions into account, they are also fre-
quently cost-competitive. 6 4 6
5
By virtue of their design, GEAFOL 5
4 4 3 3 2 2 1
transformers are almost completely
maintenance-free for their lifetime.
Folienwicklung
GEAFOL transformers have been in
successful service since 1965. A lot
of licences have been granted to ma-
jor manufacturers throughout the U
2 4 6 8
world since.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 5/5 High-voltage encapsulated winding design of GEAFOL cast-resin transformer

and voltage stress of a conventional round-wire winding (above) and the foil
winding (below)

Transformers
HV winding Why aluminum? The thermal expan- This design has been approved by
sion coefficients of aluminum and fire safety officers in many countries
The high-voltage windings are wound
cast-resin are so similar that thermal for installation in buildings where
from aluminum foil, interleaved with
stresses resulting from load changes people are generally present and in
high-grade polypropylene insulating
are kept to a minimum (see Fig. 5/5). other areas.
foil. The assembled and connected
individual coils are placed in a heated The environmental safety of the com-
LV winding
mold, and are potted in a vacuum bustion residues has been proven in
furnace with a mixture of pure silica The standard low-voltage winding many tests.
(quartz sand) and specially blended with its considerably reduced dielec-
epoxy resins. The only connections tric stress is wound from single alu- Categorization of cast-resin trans-
to the outside are copper bushings, minum sheets with interleaved cast- formers
which are internally bonded to the resin impregnated fiberglass fabric.
Dry-type transformers have to be cat-
aluminum winding connections.
The assembled coils are then oven- egorized under the sections listed
The external star or delta connections cured to form uniformly bonded solid below:
are made of insulated copper connec- cylinders that are impervious to mois- C Environmental category
tors to ensure an optimal installation ture. Through the single-sheet wind- C Climatic category
design. The resulting high-voltage ing design, excellent dynamic stabil- C Fire category
windings are fire-resistant, moisture- ity under short-circuit conditions is
These categories have to be shown
proof, corrosion-proof, and show ex- achieved. Connections are sub-
on the rating plate of each dry-type
cellent ageing properties under all in- merged-arc-welded to the aluminum
transformer.
door operating conditions. For out- sheets and are extended as alu-
door use, specially designed minum busbars to the secondary ter- Product conformity to the properties
sheet-metal enclosures are available. minals. laid down in the standards for ratings
within the approximate category
The foil windings combine a simple
Fire safety relating to environment, humidity,
winding technique with a high degree
climate and fire behavior has to be
of electrical safety. The insulation is GEAFOL transformers use only
proven by means of tests.
subjected to less electrical stress flame-retardant and self-extinguishing
than in other types of windings. In a materials in their construction. No ad- These tests are described for the en-
conventional round-wire winding, the ditional substances, such as alu- vironmental category (code number
interturn voltage can add up to twice minum oxide trihydrate, which could E0, E1 and E2) and for the climatic
the interlayer voltage, while in a foil negatively influence the mechanical category (code number C1, C2) in
winding it never exceeds the voltage stability of the cast-resin molding DIN VDE 0532, Part 6 (corresponding
per turn because a layer consists of material, are used. Internal arcing to HD 464). According to this stan-
only one winding turn. Result: a high from electrical faults and externally dard, they are to be carried out on
AC voltage and impulse-voltage with- applied flames do not cause the complete transformers.
stand capacity. transformers to burst or burn. After
The tests of fire behavior (fire class
the source of ignition is removed, the
code numbers F0 and F1) are limited
transformer is self-extinguishing.
to tests on a duplication of a com-
plete transformer. It consists of
a core leg, a low-voltage winding and
a high-voltage winding. The specifica-
tions for fire class F2 are determined
by agreement between the manufac-
turer and the customer.
5/19 5
ing temperatures are not exceeded

for extended periods of time.
Temperature monitoring
Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted
with three temperature sensors
which are installed in the LV winding.
Solid-state tripping devices can be
supplied separately on order. The
PTC thermistors used for sensing are
selected for the hot-spot winding
temperature. Additional sets of sen-
sors can be installed for them and for
fan control purposes. Additional dial-
type thermometers and Pt100 are
available too. Special versions can be
provided for 3.6 kV operating volt-
ages of the LV winding and higher.
Auxiliary wiring is run in a protective
conduit and terminated in a central
LV terminal box (optional). Each wire
and terminal is identified and a wiring
diagram is permanently attached to
the inside cover of this terminal box.
Photo 5/13 Flammability test of cast-resin transformer
Installation and enclosures
Indoor installation in electrical operat-
Siemens has carried out a lot of Insulation class and temperature ing rooms or in various protective en-
tests. rise closures is the preferred method of
The results for our GEAFOL trans- The high-voltage winding and the installation. The transformers need to
formers are something to be proud low-voltage winding utilise class F be protected against direct sunlight,
of: insulating materials with a mean tem- sandstorms and against water. Suffi-
C Environmental category E2 perature rise of 100 K (standard de- cient ventilation must be provided by
C Climatic category C2 sign). the installation location or the enclo-
C Fire class F1 sure. Otherwise forced-air cooling
Overload capability must be provided by other equip-
This good behavior is solely due to ment.
the GEAFOL cast-resin mix which GEAFOL transformers can be over-
has been used successfully for loaded permanently up to 50% (with
decades. a corresponding increase in imped-
ance voltage and impedance losses)
if additional cross-flow fans are in-
stalled. (Dimensions increase by
approximately 200 mm in length and
width.) Short-time overloads are un-
critical as long as the maximum wind-

Transformers
Photo 5/14 GEAFOL transformer with plug- Photo 5/15 Radial cooling fans on Photo 5/16 GEAFOL transformer in protective
type cable connections GEAFOL transformer for AF housing to IP 20/40
cooling
Instead of the standard open termi- Recycling of GEAFOL transformers

nals, insulated plug-type elbow con- In GEAFOL cast-resin transformer
nectors can be supplied for the high- types, the high-voltage and low-volt-
voltage side with LI ratings up to age coils form firm tubes owing to
170 kV. Primary cables are usually electrical and mechanical advantages
fed to the transformer from trenches and production-specific requirements.
below, but can also be connected In order to recycle these valuable ma-
from above. terials, these parts can normally be
Secondary connections can be made removed and post-processed with
by multiple insulated cables or by little effort, once the upper clamping
busbars, from either below or above. structure has been dismantled and
Secondary terminals are aluminum the top core yoke has been pulled
flat pad connections with bores. out. It is common practice to recycle
the main mass portions consisting of
A variety of indoor and outdoor enclo- iron core, frame and truck.
sures in different safety classes are
available for the transformers alone,
or for indoor compact substations in
conjunction with high- and low-volt-
age switchgear cabinets.
5/21 5
GEAFOL Cast-Resin Standard DIN 42 523

Selection Tables, Technical
Data, Dimensions and Rated power 100–20,000 kVA*
Weights Rated frequency 50 Hz
HV rating up to 36 kV
LV rating up to 780 V
(special designs for up to 20 kV are possible)
Tappings on HV side ± 2.5 % or 2 x ± 2.5 %
Connection HV winding: delta

LV winding: star
Impedance voltage at rated 4– 8 %

current
Insulation class HV/ LV = F / F
Temperature rise HV/ LV = 100/100 K
Color of metal parts RAL 5009
Table 5/11 GEAFOL three-phase transformers
Um Lightning impulse test voltage AC test voltage

kV kV kV
1.1 – 3
12 75 28
24 95** 50
36 145** 70
Table 5/12 Insulation level
2U 2V 2W 2N
H1
E
A1 B1
* Power ratings > 2.5 MVA upon request Fig. 5/6 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer
** Other levels upon request

Transformers
Rated Max. Imped- Type No-load Load Load Sound Sound Total Dimensions Roller-
power rated ance losses losses losses pressure power weight Length Width Height to-roller
voltage voltage level 1 m level distance
HV side tolerance (centers)
+ 3 dB
Sn Um Uz P0 Pk 75* Pk 120** LPA LWA GGES A1 B1 H1 E

kVA kV % 4GB.. W W W dB dB kg mm mm mm mm
100 12 4 .5044-3CA 440 1600 1900 45 59 630 1210 705 835 without wheels
4 .5044-3GA 320 1600 1900 37 51 760 1230 710 890 without wheels
6 .5044-3DA 360 2000 2300 45 59 590 1190 705 860 without wheels
6 .5044-3HA 300 2000 2300 37 51 660 1230 710 855 without wheels
24 4 .5064-3CA 600 1500 1750 45 59 750 1310 755 935 without wheels
4 .5064-3GA 400 1500 1750 37 51 830 1300 755 940 without wheels
6 .5064-3DA 420 1800 2050 45 59 660 1250 750 915 without wheels
6 .5064-3HA 330 1800 2050 37 51 770 1300 755 930 without wheels
160 12 4 .5244-3CA 610 2300 2600 47 62 770 1220 710 1040 520
4 .5244-3GA 440 2300 2600 39 54 920 1290 720 1050 520
6 .5244-3DA 500 2300 2700 47 62 750 1270 720 990 520
6 .5244-3HA 400 2300 2700 39 54 850 1300 725 985 520
24 4 .5264-3CA 800 2200 2500 47 62 910 1330 725 1090 520
4 .5264-3GA 580 2200 2500 39 54 940 1310 720 1095 520
6 .5264-3DA 600 2500 2900 47 62 820 1310 725 1075 520
6 .5264-3HA 480 2500 2900 39 54 900 1350 765 1060 520
250 12 4 .5444-3CA 820 3000 3500 50 65 1040 1330 730 1110 520
4 .5444-3GA 600 3000 3400 42 57 1170 1330 730 1135 520
6 .5444-3DA 700 2900 3300 50 65 990 1350 740 1065 520
6 .5444-3HA 570 2900 3300 42 57 1120 1390 745 1090 520
24 4 .5464-3CA 1050 2900 3300 50 65 1190 1390 735 1120 520
4 .5464-3GA 800 2900 3300 41 57 1230 1400 735 1150 520
6 .5464-3DA 880 3100 3600 50 65 990 1360 735 1140 520
6 .5464-3HA 650 3100 3600 41 57 1180 1430 745 1160 520
36 6 .5475-3DA 1300 3800 4370 50 65 1700 1900 900 1350 520
Dimensions and weights are approximate values, valid for 400 V at the secondary side.
The vector group is either Dyn 5 or Dyn 11. Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.
* Related to 75 °C
** Related to 120 °C
Table 5/13 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2,500 kVA
5/23 5
+ 3 dB

(315) 12 4 .5544-3CA 980 3300 3800 52 67 1160 1370 820 1125 670
4 .5544-3GA 720 3300 3800 43 59 1320 1380 820 1195 670
6 .5544-3DA 850 3400 3900 51 67 1150 1380 830 1140 670
6 .5544-3HA 680 3400 3900 43 59 1290 1410 830 1165 670
24 4 .5564-3CA 1250 3400 3900 51 67 1250 1410 820 1195 670
4 .5564-3GA 930 3400 3900 43 59 1400 1440 825 1205 670
6 .5564-3DA 1000 3600 4100 51 67 1190 1410 825 1185 670
6 .5564-3HA 780 3600 4100 43 59 1300 1460 830 1195 670
36 6 .5575-3DA 1450 4500 5170 51 67 1900 1950 920 1400 670
400 12 4 .5644-3CA 1150 4300 4900 52 68 1310 1380 820 1265 670
4 .5644-3GA 880 4300 4900 44 60 1430 1380 820 1290 670
6 .5644-3DA 1000 4300 4900 52 68 1250 1410 825 1195 670
6 .5644-3HA 820 4300 4900 44 60 1350 1430 830 1195 670
24 4 .5664-3CA 1450 3900 4500 52 68 1410 1440 825 1280 670
4 .5664-3GA 1100 3900 4500 44 60 1570 1460 830 1280 670
6 .5664-3DA 1200 4100 4700 52 68 1350 1480 835 1275 670
6 .5664-3HA 940 4100 4700 44 60 1460 1480 835 1280 670
36 6 .5675-3DA 1700 5100 5860 52 68 2100 2000 920 1440 670
(500) 12 4 .5744-3CA 1350 4900 5600 53 69 1520 1410 830 1320 670
4 .5744-3GA 1000 4900 5600 45 61 1740 1450 835 1345 670
6 .5744-3DA 1200 5600 6400 53 69 1470 1460 845 1275 670
6 .5744-3HA 980 5600 6400 45 61 1620 1490 845 1290 670
24 4 .5764-3CA 1700 4800 5500 53 69 1620 1500 835 1330 670
4 .5764-3GA 1270 4800 5500 44 61 1830 1540 840 1350 670
6 .5764-3DA 1400 5000 5700 53 69 1580 1540 850 1305 670
6 .5764-3HA 1100 5000 5700 45 61 1720 1560 850 1320 670
36 6 .5775-3DA 1900 6000 6900 53 69 2600 2050 940 1500 670
* Related to 75 °C

Transformers
+ 3 dB

630 12 4 .5844-3CA 1500 6400 7300 54 70 1830 1510 840 1345 670
4 .5844-3GA 1150 6400 7300 45 62 2070 1470 835 1505 670
6 .5844-3DA 1370 6400 7400 54 70 1770 1550 860 1295 670
6 .5844-3HA 1150 6400 7400 45 62 1990 1590 865 1310 670
24 4 .5864-3CA 1950 6000 6900 53 70 1860 1550 845 1380 670
4 .5864-3GA 1500 6000 6900 45 62 2100 1600 850 1400 670
6 .5864-3DA 1650 6400 7300 53 70 1810 1580 855 1345 670
6 .5864-3HA 1250 6400 7300 45 62 2050 1620 860 1370 670
36 6 .5875-3DA 2200 7000 8000 53 70 2900 2070 940 1650 670
(800) 12 4 .5944-3CA 1850 7800 9000 55 72 2080 1570 850 1560 670
4 .5944-3GA 1450 7800 9000 47 64 2430 1590 855 1640 670
6 .5944-3DA 1700 7600 8700 55 72 2060 1560 865 1490 670
6 .5944-3HA 1350 7600 8700 47 64 2330 1600 870 1530 670
24 4 .5964-3CA 2100 7500 8600 55 72 2150 1610 845 1580 670
4 .5964-3GA 1600 7500 8600 47 64 2550 1650 855 1620 670
6 .5964-3DA 1900 7900 9100 55 71 2110 1610 860 1590 670
6 .5964-3HA 1450 7900 9100 47 64 2390 1630 865 1595 670
36 6 .5975-3DA 2600 8200 9400 55 72 3300 2140 950 1850 670
1000 12 4 .6044-3CA 2200 2200 10200 55 73 2480 1590 990 1775 820
4 .6044-3GA 1650 1650 10200 47 65 2850 1620 990 1795 820
6 .6044-3DA 2000 2000 9700 56 73 2420 1620 990 1560 820
6 .6044-3HA 1500 1500 9700 47 65 2750 1660 990 1560 820
24 4 .6064-3CA 2400 2400 10000 55 73 2570 1660 990 1730 820
4 .6064-3GA 1850 1850 10000 47 65 3060 1680 990 1815 820
6 .6064-3DA 2300 2300 10500 55 73 2510 1680 990 1620 820
6 .6064-3HA 1750 1750 11000 47 65 2910 1730 990 1645 820
36 6 .6075-3DA 3000 3000 10900 55 73 3900 2200 1050 1900 820
* Related to 75 °C
5/25 5
+ 3 dB

(1250) 12 6 .6144-3DA 2400 9600 11000 57 75 2900 1780 990 1605 820
6 .6144-3HA 1850 10500 12000 49 67 3370 1790 990 1705 820
24 6 .6164-3DA 2700 10000 11500 57 75 3020 1820 990 1635 820
6 .6164-3HA 2100 10500 12000 49 67 3490 1850 990 1675 820
36 6 .6175-3DA 3500 11000 12600 57 75 4500 2300 1060 2000 520
1600 12 6 .6244-3DA 2800 11000 12500 58 76 3550 1840 995 2025 1070
6 .6244-3HA 2100 11400 13000 50 68 4170 1880 1005 2065 1070
24 6 .6264-3DA 3100 11800 13500 58 76 3640 1880 995 2035 1070
6 .6264-3HA 2400 12300 14000 49 68 4080 1900 1005 2035 1070
36 6 .6275-3DA 4300 12700 14600 58 76 5600 2500 1100 2400 1070
(2000) 12 6 .6344-3DA 3600 14000 16000 59 78 4380 1950 1280 2150 1070
6 .6344-3HA 2650 14500 16500 51 70 5140 1990 1280 2205 1070
24 6 .6364-3DA 4000 14500 16500 59 78 4410 2020 1280 2160 1070
6 .6364-3HA 3000 14900 17000 51 70 4920 2040 1280 2180 1070
36 6 .6375-3DA 5100 15400 17700 59 78 6300 2500 1280 2400 1070
2500 12 6 .6444-3DA 4300 17600 20000 62 81 5130 2110 1280 2150 1070
6 .6444-3HA 3000 18400 21000 51 71 6230 2170 1280 2205 1070
24 6 .6464-3DA 5000 17600 20000 61 81 5280 2170 1280 2160 1070
6 .6464-3HA 3600 18000 20500 51 71 6220 2220 1280 2180 1070
36 6 .6475-3DA 6400 18700 21500 61 81 7900 2700 1280 2400 1070
* Related to 75 °C

Transformers
5/27 5
TIP_Kap06_Engl 11.08.2005 19:30 Uhr Seite B2
6 Low Voltage
6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and 6.5 Switches, Outlets and Electronic

Distribution Systems Products
6.2 Protective Switching Devices and 6.6 SIMOCODE pro – Motor Management
Fuse Systems Systems for Constant-Speed Motors
6.3 Modular Devices in the Low-Voltage Range
6.4 Maximum-Demand Monitors

TIP_Kap06_Engl 11.08.2005 19:30 Uhr Seite B3
Low Voltage
chapter 6
TIP_Kap06_Engl 11.08.2005 19:30 Uhr Seite 2
6 Low Voltage
One important element of the Totally Components of the integrated
Integrated Power philosophy for Siemens protection scheme
power distribution by Siemens (see
C Low-voltage switchgear and distri-
Chapter 3) is its comprehensive
bution systems from 6,300 A (e.g.
protection scheme. Especially in
SIVACON®, ALPHA) down to 63 A
commercial or institutional buildings,
(e.g. SIMBOX®)
in industry and in infrastructural proj-
C SIVACON busbar trunking systems
ects, i.e. in production sites and ad-
for safe power distribution from
ministrative buildings, the highest
25 A up to 6,300 A
safety requirements for systems and
C Protective switching devices and
persons have to be met. Examples
fuse systems for overload, short-
for this are airports or railway stations.
circuit and fire protection by way of
Only an integrated protection scheme circuit- breakers (e.g. SENTRON®
with systems and products from one 3VL), fuse systems (LV HRC,
manufacturer, with a guaranteed uni- DIAZED® and NEOZED®) and
form quality standard, based on na- miniature circuit-breakers
tional and international standards, C Residual-current-operated circuit-
provides this high safety level. breakers for personnel and fire
protection
A protection system whose compo-
C Lightning current and surge ar-
nents are coordinated in an optimal
rester of the Classes B, C and D
way has been part of the Siemens
C Monitoring systems for undervolt-
product philosophy for a long time.
age and overvoltage protection
These products that stand for
C Fuse switch-disconnectors for safe
reliable Siemens high-performance
isolation and disconnection
technology have been included in the
C Switching operations handled
Totally Integrated Power system. The
safely with conventional techniques
result is an integrated protection
or automated processes via main
scheme from the main distribution
and EMERGENCY stop switches,
board to the consumer.
operator units, modular, switching,
The high reliability and availability of control and signaling devices
the system ensures a faultless opera- C Optimization of the power distribu-
tion on an economical basis. The tion by way of remote signaling,
components have been certified in communication and control via bus
accordance with all international stan- systems
dards and can therefore be used all
over the world. As a leading manufac-
turer of technology, Siemens is set-
ting new standards with respect to
safety.

Low Voltage
6.1 Low-Voltage An overview of the available program

of the Siemens low-voltage
Degree of protection and installation
C Degree of protection
Switchgear and switchgear and distribution systems C Protection against electric shock
Distribution System is shown in Fig. 6/1. (safety class)
C Material of the enclosure
In Table 6/2, the essential selection
C Type of mounting (wall-mounting,
General criteria are summarised in the follow-
stand-alone)
ing four areas:
Low-voltage switchgear and distribution C Number of front operating panels
boards form the link between the equip- Currents
Type of device installation
ment for the generation (generators), C Rated currents of the busbars
C Fixed installation
transmission (cables, overhead lines) C Rated currents of the power supply
C Plug-in
and transformation (transformers) of C Rated currents of the feeders
C Withdrawable unit
electrical energy on the one hand, and C Rated peak withstand current Ipk of
C Snap-on mounting on standard
the loads, e.g. motors, solenoid valves, the busbars
mounting rail
actuators and devices for heating, light-
ing and air conditioning, and information Application
technology on the other hand. C Eight different types of application
Medium voltage Distribution system Enclosures Busbar trunking

Low voltage e.g systems
230/ 400 V
6300 A
3200 A
M
630 A
M M
400 A
160 A
M M
63 A
Fig. 6/1 Product range of low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems (European technology)
6/3 6
Types of construction DIN VDE NF CEI BS

Small distribution board SIMBOX 63 SIMBOX LC, SIMBOX Universal
Wall-mounted distribution board ALPHA 160 / 400, ALPHA ALPHA Universal ALPHA 400
Floor-mounted distribution cabinet < 630 A ALPHA 630 ALPHA Universal
High-power distribution board > 630 A SIVACON SIKUS Universal SIVACON
Power Center SIVACON SIKUS Universal HC SIVACON
Busbar trunking system SIVACON SIVACON SIVACON
Table 6/1 Low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems in compliance with EN 60439 / IEC 60439
The low-voltage switchgear and distri- strict discrimination features. There- Busbars (point-to-point distribution)
bution systems described comply fore, the manufacturer and the opera-
With ”busbar trunking systems”,
with the following standards: tor use different terms for the same
power is transmitted to the immedi-
product. In most cases, the opera-
EN 60 439-1/IEC 60 439-1/ ate vicinity of the consumers. The
tor’s type of application will be deci-
VDE 0660 Part 500 consumers are connected to the bus-
sive for the designation.
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies; bar trunking system via tap-off units
type-tested and partially type-tested with or without fuse protection and
Main or subdistribution board
assemblies. short spur lines or cables.
In order to prevent these problems with
EN 60 439-2/IEC 60 439-2/ Busbar trunking systems supply and
regard to the definition of terms, only
VDE 0660 Part 502 distribute electrical power in indus-
the two terms “main distribution board”
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies; trial facilities and buildings. Tap-off
and ”subdistribution board” are used to
special requirements for busbar units can be installed at suitable posi-
give an example of a low-voltage sys-
trunking systems. tions in the trunking, which makes
tem in an industrial plant (Table 6/2).
these systems most suitable for con-
EN 60 439-3/IEC 60 439-3/
Here, the main distribution board is sumers which need to be reinstalled
VDE 0660 Part 504
supplied directly via one transformer at different locations frequently.
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies;
per busbar section. The downstream
special requirements for low-voltage They are also used as rising mains in
motor control centers, control sys-
switchgear assemblies which can be high-rise buildings to supply the floor
tems, distribution boards for lighting,
operated by non-specialists distribution boards.
heating, air conditioning, workshops,
EN 60 439-3/IEC 60 439-3/ etc., which are again supplied by the Busbar trunking systems can commu-
VDE 0660 Part 504 main distribution board, are part of nicate. In these applications, the tap-
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies the subdistribution boards. off units include the appropriate com-
(point-to-point distribution boards); munications equipment in addition to
Point-to-point distribution board
special requirements for low-volt- the required protective devices. In this
ageswitchgear assemblies which can ”Point-to-point distribution board” is combination, power distribution and
be operated by non-specialists. the designation for all switchgear and automation are implemented in an ob-
distribution boards which supply the ject-oriented, decentralized manner.
EN 60 439-4/IEC 60 439-4/
electrical energy radially via cables and
VDE 0660 Part 501 Types of construction
leads from the ”point-to-point” distri-
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies All distribution boards in accordance
bution board to the remotely arranged
(point-to-point distribution boards); with IEC 60 439; EN 60 439 in a locally
consumers. The necessary switching,
special requirements for construction preferred type in accordance with
protective and measuring devices are
site distribution boards. The various DIN/VDE, NF/CEI and BS.
combined centrally in the switchgear
construction types of switchgear and
or distribution board for that.
distribution boards do not show any

Low Voltage
Type of Switchgear Distribution systems
distribution board Point-to-point distribution board Point-to-point Line
Max. rated current 2,0005)/ 630

of busbars 7,400 A 6,300 A 3,200 A 2000 A A, 1,000 A 630 A 6,300 A
Max. rated current 2,0005)/ 630

of supply 6,300 A 6,300 A 3,200 A 2,000 A A, 2,000 A 630 A 6,300 A
Max. rated current of

outgoing feeders 5,000 A 5,000 A 3,200 A 630 A 2,000/630 A 630 A 6,300 A
Rated peak current Ipk

of busbars up to 375 kA 250 kA 187 kA 80 kA 68 kA 80 kA 286 kA
Degree of protection Max. IP54 IP54 IP30, IP41 bis IP656) IP651) IP34– IP68
IP54
Device mounting type Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Tap-off units
ted2), plug-in, ted2), plug-in, ted2), plug-in ted2), snap-on ted2), snap-on ted2), snap-on with plug-in
withdrawable withdrawable mounting mounting mounting technology
Outgoing feeders with Option

or without fuses
Mounting type Wall Wall, stand- Wall Floor- or wall- Wall Wall Suspended
(indoors) or alone or mounted, or from ceiling,
stand-alone or stand-alone flush- or stand-alone wall-mounted,
double front surface- sub-floor
mounted mounted
Operating front panels 1 1 or 2 1 1 1 1 1 or 2

(quantity)
Protection against SK 1 SK 1 SK 1 SK 1 SK 2 SK 2
electric shock3) SK 1 SK1
Enclosure Metal Metal Metal Metal Molded Molded plastic Molded plastic
material plastic Aluminum
Metal Metal
Type of application4) 1, 2, 4, 6, 7 1, 2, 4, 6, 7 2, 4, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 3, 8 1, 2, 3, 4,
6, 8 5, 6, 8
System type SIVACON 8PT, SIVACON 8PV SIVACON 8PT, 8HU 8GK, 8GB, 8HP SIVACON 8PS
SIKUS SIKUS 8GD, 8GS…, Systeme CD-K,
Universal HC Universal ALPHA, BD01, BD2,
ALPHA LD, LX, PEC
Stratum
1) Special version for shipbuilding IP66 4) 1 Main switchgear station 2 Main distribution board
2) Option: withdrawable circuit-breaker 3 Light and energy distribution system 4 Subdistribution board
3)
5 Distribution cabinet 6 Motor distribution board
Safety class: SK 1 = Protective ground connection;
7 Reactive power compensation 8 Control
SK 2 = Protective insulation; SK 3= Safety extra-low
5) SIKUS Klassik
voltage
6) SIMBOX Universal WP
Table 6/2 Selection criteria for low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems
6/5 6
6.1.1 SIVACON 8PS –

Busbar Trunking Systems
What are busbar trunking

systems?
Busbar trunking systems are the link-
ing element between transformer
and power consumer. They are used
for power transmission and distribu-
tion.
The new SIVACON 8PS busbar trunk-
ing system is a well proven system
and the market leader in its field. It
covers a current range of 25 A to
6,300 A, meaning it is suitable for any
given application. The system is di-
vided into 6 subsystems:
CD-K (25 A – 40 A)
Photo 6/1 SIVACON 8PS – the right solution for every application
BD01 (40 A – 160 A)
BD2 (160 A – 1,250 A)
LD (1,100 A – 5,000 A, ventilated) ports, this type of cable laying is both Power distribution
LX (800 A – 6,300 A, sandwich-type) costly and time-consuming, not to
In terms of pictorial projection, bus-
and PEC (800 A – 6,000 A, cast) mention problematic on account of
bar trunking systems are an elon-
the imbalanced power distribution.
gated busbar system (line distribu-
Power transmission Moreover, the installation of cable
tion) of a point-to-point distribution
trays is expensive, too.
Between the transformer and the board. Here, individual consumer taps
low-voltage switchgear, busbar trunk- In contrast to this, busbar trunking are no longer connected rigidly to the
ing systems transmit electrical power systems are power transmission sys- system of busbars, as is the case
by means of system components. tems which constitute a type-tested with point-to-point distribution, but
They are installed between the trans- system even when used as com- can be flexibly adjusted to changing
formers and the main distribution bined systems. They have been prop- tasks via appropriate tap-off units.
boards, and also connect the subdis- erly designed for this task as speci- This adjustment can be carried out as
tribution boards, including the feeder fied in their technical data. They can required within a system-related grid.
lines for power distribution to the be used economically and ensure This way, a variable line distribution
consumer locations – busbar trunking safe and reliable power transmission. system is created for line supply
systems with flexible tap-off units are Busbar trunking systems have proved and/or area-wide power supply.
used here. their worth in power transmission
The traditional, radial power installa-
over decades. Today, they are the first
Busbar trunking systems are increas- tion with fixed wired cables and lines
choice in this field of application, with
ingly replacing connecting cables in is no longer up to the state of the art.
almost no other system being a real
the field of power transmission. With It is far too rigid for automated pro-
alternative.
high currents in particular, cables duction sites. Cable laying in ducts,
must be connected in parallel. Owing on trays, in walls or ceilings is an im-
to the high short-circuit power and re- pediment to flexibility requirements.
sulting short distances of cable sup-

Low Voltage
Readjustment made easy

Readjustments are indispensable in
modern production sites, in particular
in automated production. Rearrange-
ments of machinery and restructuring
of existing plant facilities call for a
flexible adjustment of the power sup-
ply installation systems.
Busbar trunking systems are particu-
larly geared to these requirements.
An area-wide power supply can be Photo 6/2 Lighting control with BD01 and CD-K systems
planned ahead. When modifications
have been scheduled, the consumer
tap-off units are taken to the new lo-
cation of the machinery and simply
readjusted at the existing system of
busbars. Even completely new sup-
ply lines can be built up by reutilizing
existing system components. This
makes busbar trunking system an in-
teresting investment into the future.
Retrofitting and re-equipping without
interrupting the production process is
not only important for a continuous
supply of electricity, but is also cru-
cial for production sites that work in
multi-shifts around the clock. Here,
an interruption is only feasible, if at
all, in very narrow time slots. Any
modification must be achievable
quickly and cost-saving.
Photo 6/3 Control of supply with the BD01 system
Consumer tap-off units must there-
fore be designed that allow for power
Communication-capable busbar
tapping, relocation and extension un-
trunking systems
der voltage, i.e. with a busbar track SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking sys-
that has not been isolated from sup- The growing requirements to the eco- tems supply and protect consumers
ply. This way, expensive interruptions nomic efficiency, flexibility and trans- in a distributed manner, which means
of operation are avoided. parency of automated systems for right on the spot. A recent develop-
building power supply and industrial ment is the concept of combined, de-
applications make the trend towards centralized power distribution and
decentralized power distribution and distributed automation – in an inte-
automation an irreversible process. In grated range of products: system net-
this electrifying context, intelligent working results in a high degree of
power distribution concepts open up transparency on the one hand, and in
new savings potential and reduce the central processing of recorded con-
number of interfaces to the automa- sumption and operating data on the
tion world. other hand.
6/7 6
Photo 6/4 CD-K system Photo 6/5 BD2 system Photo 6/6 LX system
Photo 6/7 BD01 system Photo 6/8 LD system Photo 6/9 PEC system
The concept of communication-capa- CD-K C Degrees of protection: IP54, IP55

ble busbar trunking systems is based C Rated current: 30 A, 40 A, 2 x 25 A, C Spacing of consumer taps: either
on tap-off units which are comple- 2 x 40 A 0.5 m or 1 m from one side
mented by communication-capable C Conductor material: copper C Rated current of the consumer tap-
device units. The bus systems C Rated operating voltage: 400 V off units up to 63 A
PROBUS-DP, AS-Interface and C Degrees of protection: IP54, IP55
instabus EIB constitute the communi- C Spacing between consumer taps: BD2
cations basis. 0.5 m each, 1 m from one side or C Rated current: 160 A, 250 A, 315 A
both sides 400 A, 500 A, 630 A, 800 A
These flexible modules enable the
C Rated current of the consumer taps 1,000 A, 1,250 A
combination of different solution
up to 16 A, with or without fuse C Conductor material: aluminum,
packages for specific customer re-
C Codeable tapping points copper
quirements. Short planning and con-
C Degrees of protection: IP52/54,
figuration times, fast installation of
BD01 IP55 for power transmission
the power distribution and automa-
C Rated current: 40 A, 63 A, 100 A, C Spacing of consumer tap-off units:
tion system, easy commissioning and
125 A, 160 A 0.5 m each from both sides
a high degree of flexibility in terms of
C Aluminum as conductor material for C Rated current of the consumer
modified area utilization are measura-
up to 125 A, and copper for 160 A tap-off units up to 630 A
ble advantages of communication-ca-
C Rated operating voltage: 400 A
pable busbar trunking systems.

Low Voltage
Ratings Conductors Trunking unit, degree of protection Tap-off unit, live adjustment
CD-K (25 A – 40 A) 2, 3, 4, 6, 2 x 4, copper, IP54, IP55 up to 16 A

PE enclosure
BD01 (40 A – 160 A) 4, aluminum, copper, IP54, IP55 up to 63 A

PE enclosure
BD2 (160 A – 1250 A) 5, aluminum, copper IP52, IP54 with additional unit, up to 630 A
IP55
LD (1100 A – 5000 A) 4, 5, aluminum, copper IP34, IP54 up to 1,250 A
LX (800 A – 6300 A) 3, 4, 5, aluminum, copper, IP54, IP55 up to 630 A

Clean Earth, optionally (up to 1,250 A no live
200% conductor adjustment)
PEC (800 A – 6000 A) 4, 5, copper IP66, IP68 (140 h)
LD LX Every element of the SIVACON 8PS

C Rated current for degree of protec- C Rated current: 800 A, 1,000 A, busbar trunking system is tested
tion IP34 and Al conductors: 1,100 1,250 A, 1,400 A, 1,600 A, 2,000 A, prior to delivery. This test includes
A, 1,250 A, 1,600 A, 2,000 A, 2,500 2,500 A, 3,200 A, 4,000 A, 4,500 A, dielectric tests which are performed
A, 3,000 A, 3,700 A, 4,000 A 5,000 A, 6,300 A to ensure proper insulation. The entire
C Rated current for degree of protec- C Conductor material: aluminum, SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking sys-
tion IP54 and Al conductors: 900 A, copper tem is manufactured and tested in
1,000 A, 1,200 A, 1,500 A, 1,800 A, C Rated operating voltage: 690 V compliance with ISO 9001.
2,000 A, 2,400 A, 2,700 A C Degrees of protection: IP54, IP55 for
C Rated current for degree of protec- power transmission up to 3,200 A Standards
tion IP34 and Cu conductors: 2,000 C Tap-off units with circuit-breakers
All SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking
A, 2,600 A, 3,400 A, 4,400 A, 5,000A up to 1,250 A
systems constitute type-tested
C Rated current for degree of protec- C Tap-off units with fuse switch-
switchgear assemblies (TTA) in com-
tion IP54 and Cu conductors: 1,600 disconnectors up to 630 A
pliance with IEC 60439-1 and -2.
A, 2,000 A, 2,600 A, 3,200 A, 3,600A PEC
C Rated operating voltage: 1,000 V C Rated current: 800 A, 1,000 A, 1,200
Approvals (system-specific)
C Degrees of protection: IP34, IP54 A, 1,400 A, 1,750 A, 2,000 A, 2,500
C Tap-off units with circuit-breakers A, 3,000 A, as parallel systems GL – Germanischer Lloyd
up to 1,250 A 3,500 A, 4,000 A, 5,000 A, 6,000 A LR – Lloyd's Register Of Shipping
C Tap-off units with switch disconnec- C Conductor material: copper ABS – American Bureau Of Shipping
tors with fuse up to 630 A C Rated operating voltage: 1,000 V BV – Bureau Veritas
C Degrees of protection: IP66, IP68 DNV – Dansk Norske Veritas
type-tested for a duration of RINA – Registro Italiano Navale
140 days SABS – South Africa
C Tapping points feasible for the GOST-R – Russia
installation of customer-specific
tap-off units
6/9 6
Photo 6/10 tap-off unit Photo 6/11 BD2 angular element Photo 6/12 Communication-capable
BD2 tap-off unit
1: Straight trunking unit

2: Tap-off unit
3: Transformer infeed
4: Connection to SIVACON 8PT/8PV
5: Directional change element
6: Clamp connection, fastener
Photo 6/13 Block diagram of busbar trunking systems

Low Voltage
≤ 4 MVA
≤ 690 V
Cable or busbar system
≤ 6,300 A Power supply
3 AC 50 Hz LT
Main distribution board
Circuit-breakers as
≤ 5,000 A feeders tho the
subdistribution boards
Connecting cables
ET ST FT
≤ 630 A ≤ 100 A
≤ 630 A
≤ 630 A ≤ 100 A Subdistribution boards

for auxiliary system
(lighting, heating
M M M M M M M M air conditioning,
workshops, etc.)
Motor control center Motor control center ≤ 100 A
1 in withdrable 2 in withdrable
design for design for Control unit
Photo 6/14 SIVACON 8PV low-voltage production/manufact- production/manufact-
switchgear uring plants uring plants
CBS Circuit-breaker design WS Withdrawable design

6.1.2 SIVACON Low-Voltage PS Plug-in design FS Fixed-mounted design
Switchgear – Economical,
Flexible and Safe Fig. 6/2 Example for the structure of a low-voltage system in an industrial company
Introduction
SIVACON 8PV for the All modules used are type-tested
Low-voltage switchgear forms the
process industry (TTA*), i.e. they comply with the re-
link between the equipment for the quirements of
generation (generators), transmission The SIVACON® 8PV low-voltage C IEC 60439-1
(cables, overhead lines) and transfor- switchgear is an economical, de- C DIN EN 60439-1
mation (transformers) of electrical en- mand- meeting and type-tested C VDE 0660 Part 500
ergy on the one hand, and the con- switchgear assembly (see Photo and additionally
sumers, e.g. motors, solenoid valves, 6/14) which is used in power distribu- C DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660 Part 514),
actuators and devices for heating, tion, in the chemical, mineral oil and IEC 61641, VDE 0660 Part 500
lighting and air conditioning on the capital goods industry as well as in Supplement 2 (arcing fault), DIN EN
other hand. public and private buildings. ISO 9001/14001 certification.
It is characterized by a high degree of
Since the majority of the applications
personnel and system safety and can
is supplied with low voltage, the low-
be used on all power levels up to
voltage switchgear is especially im-
6,300 A:
portant both for public supply sys-
C as main switchgear (power center
tems and for industrial plants. The
or main distribution board)
prerequisite for a reliable supply sys-
C as motor control center
tem is high availability, flexibility for
C as subdistribution board
process-related adaptations and high
control and operating reliability of the
Thanks to the many options to com-
switchgear.
bine SIVACON 8PV boards due to
The power distribution in a system is their modular design, all requirements
usually implemented via a main can be met with fixed-mounted and
switchgear station (power center or plug-in as well as with withdrawable
main distribution board) and a num- designs.
ber of sub- or motor control centers
(see Fig. 6/5).
* Type-tested switchgear assembly
6/11 6
Features of a SIVACON 8PV

Rated insulation voltage Ul 1,000 V
switchgear station
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V C Type-tested standard modules
C Space-saving base areas starting
Rated currents for busbars (3- and 4-pole):
from 400 x 400 mm
Main horizontal busbars
C Solid wall design for safe
Rated current up to 6,300 A
panel-to-panel separation
Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 250 kA
C Highest packing density with up
Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 100 kA
to 40 feeders per panel
Vertical busbars C Standard operator interface for
for circuit-breaker design all withdrawable units
Rated current up to 6,300 A C Test and disconnected position
Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 250 kA with door closed
Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 100 kA C Visible isolating gaps and points
of contact
for fixed-mounted and plug-in design
C Variable busbar positions at the
top or at the rear
Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 110 kA
C Cable/busbar connection from
Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 50 kA
above or below
for withdrawable design
Description
Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 143 kA Panel structure
Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 65 kA The cabinet is structured in a modular
grid based on one modular spacing
Switchgear rated currents
(1 M) corresponding to 175 mm. The
Circuit-breakers up to 6,300 A
effective device installation space has
Outgoing feeders up to 1,600 A
a height of 1,750 mm = 10 M.
Motor feeders up to 630 A
Degree of protection Basically, a panel is subdivided into

in acc. with IEC 60 529, EN 60 529: IP 20 up to IP 54 four functional compartments (see
Fig. 6/3):
Tabl 6/4 Technical data C Busbar compartment
C Device compartment
C Cable/busbar connection
400 compartment
400 400
600 600 400
C Cross-wiring compartment
400
Main busbar system

The main busbar system with busbar
cross sections for rated currents up
to 6,300 A can be used variably (see
Fig. 6/7) and consists of the three
phase conductors L1 to L3 and the
[mm]
PE, N or PEN conductors.
Busbar compartment Cable/busbar connection compartment

Device compartment Cross-wiring compartment
Fig. 6/3 Panel structure

Low Voltage
Position of the main Position of the main

busbar system: at the top busbar system: center
Busbar current: In up to 2,000 A, (top and/or bottom)
Icw up to 50 kA Busbar current: In up to 4,000 A,
2200
2200
Mounting: on the wall or G Icw up to 100 kA G G
stand-alone Mounting: stand-alone, double front
Cable entry: from below Cable entry: from below and/or above
Use: motor control centre Use: main/sub-distribution board
sub-distribution board or integrated motor control
400 centre in double-front 1000
version
Position of the main Position of the main

busbar system: at the rear (top and/or busbar system: center top
bottom) Busbar current: In up to 6,300 A,
Busbar current: In up to 4,000 A, Icw up to 100 kA
2200
2200
Icw up to 100 kA G Mounting: stand-alone, double front G G
Mounting: on the wall or stand- Cable entry: from below and/or above
alone
Use: power center
Cable entry: from below and/or
above
Use: main/sub-distribution 600 1200
board or integrated mo-
tor control center
G Device installation space Operating side Busbar
Fig. 6/4 Construction variants of SIVACON 8PV low-voltage switchgear stations by

virtue of the variable position of the main busbar system
Rated breaker current Panel width
In up to 1,000 A 400 mm
In up to 1,600 A 500 mm
In up to 2,500 A 600 mm
In up to 3,200 A 800 mm
In up to 6,300 A 1,000 mm
Table 6/5 Ciruit-breaker panel width
Circuit-breaker design
The circuit-breaker panels have sepa-
rate functional areas for the device
compartment, cross-wiring compart-
ment and cable/busbar connection
compartment (Photo 6/15).
The cross-wiring compartment is lo- Photo 6/15 Circuit-breaker panel with with- Photo 6/16 Panel with motor assemblies
cated above the device compart- drawable type SENTRON 3WL,
1,600 A rated current
ment, the cable/busbar connection
compartment below. Supply from
above results in a mirror-image Withdrawable design from supply (Photo 6/16).
arrangement. The panel width is de-
If requirements change frequently, as Withrawable units equipped with the
termined by the rated current of the
often demanded by industrial communication-capable SIMOCODE
SENTRON WL circuit-breaker (Table
processes, such as changes in the motor protection and control units en-
6/5).
motor power or switching new con- able a cost-effective interfacing to the
sumers into supply, a withdrawable worlds of automation.
circuit-breaker technology offers the
These withdrawable units are
optimum for plant availability.
available in sizes 1/4 (11 kW),
Consumer or motor feeders can be 1/2 (18.5 kW), 1 (37 kW), 2 (75 kW)
replaced or whole compartments can 3 (160 kW), 4 (250 kW).
even be rearranged without that the
switchgear must be disconnected
6/13 6
Photo 6/17 Panel with pluggable in-line Photo 6/18 Fixed-mounted panel with modu- Photo 6/19 Reactive power control unit,
switch disconnectors and plug-in lar functional units 250 kvar, choked
modules
Owing to the plug contacts at the In such cases, the fixed-mounted
feeder side (Photo 6/21 Plug-in mod- design (Photo 6/18) offers excellent
ule), this technology enables fast re- economy, high reliability and suffi-
placement without the switchgear cient flexibility.
having to be isolated from supply. Modular functional units can be com-
In-line technology, plugged bined in the panel as required and
In-line switch-disconnectors with if necessary, they can easily be re-
fuses for outgoing cables up to placed once the equipment has been
630 A. The banks are 50 mm (125 A), disconnected from supply.
100 mm (250 A) or 200 mm (400 A /
630 A) high. Reactive power compensation
Photo 6/20 Withdrawable unit equipped Plug-in technology Depending on the type of load,
with SIMOCODE
Consumer feeders up to 45 kW and choked or non-choked control units
outgoing circuit-breaker units up to (i.e. with or without reactors) are
100 A. The plug-in modules are provided for reactive power compen-
50 mm (11 kW) and 100 mm sation.
(45 kW) high.
Depending on the power installed
Fixed-mounted design and the ambient temperature, it may
be necessary to mount a fan assem-
In certain applications, e.g. in building bly (reinforcement of convection).
Photo 6/21 Plug-in module
installation systems, there is no need The capacitor units are designed
to replace components when the with fuse switch-disconnectors
Plug-in technology switchgear has not been discon- (Photo 6/19).
nected from supply, or short stand-
Thanks to their compact design, plug-
still times do not result in exceptional
gable banks and plug-in modules
costs.
make it possible to construct a panel
at low costs and save space (see
Photo 6/17).

Low Voltage
SIVACON 8PT for the

infrastructure market
Introduction
The SIVACON 8PT low-voltage
switchgear is the standard solution
for building and industrial installa-
tions.
Photo 6/22 SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear, busbar at the rear, up to 3,200 A
SIVACON 8PT is tailored to the needs
of the world market, i.e. it takes into
account the demand for standard so- Busbar system Rear Top
lutions from one manufacturer and for (top, bottom)
local production and the resulting ad-
vantages in terms of financing and Rated insulation voltage Ul 1,000 V 1,000 V
procurement close to the plant. Rated operating voltage Ue up to 690 V up to 690 V
As a power distribution board, Rated currents for busbars
SIVACON 8PT is available throughout Main horizontal busbars
the world and can be used at all Rated current up to 3,200 A up to 7,400 A
power levels up to 7,400 A, as a fixed- Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 187 kA up to 375 kA
mounted unit as well as a plug-in and Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 85 kA up to 150 kA
withdrawable unit design.
For circuit-breaker technology
Your advantage: Vertical busbars
”SIVACON Technology Partner” Rated current up to 3,200 A up to 6,300 A
Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 187 kA up to 250 kA
These are qualified and permanently Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 85 kA up to 100 kA
audited switchgear manufacturers
close to your company who were For fixed-mounted design
chosen by Siemens. This way, you Rated current up to 1,150 A up to 1,400 A
will always benefit from Siemens Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 110 kA up to 163 kA
know-how on conditions that can only Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 50 kA up to 65 kA
be offered by a local sales partner. For in-line plug-in design
This is a fast, flexible and cost-effec- Rated current up to 2,100 A up to 2,100 A
tive solution for you. Rated peak withstand current Ipk up to 110 kA up to 163 kA
Rated short-time withstand current Icw up to 50 kA up to 50 kA
Rated currents switchgear

Circuit-breakers up to 3,200 A up to 6,300 A
The exclusive use of high-quality Outgoing feeders up to 630 A up to 630 A
Siemens switchgear ensures a long
service life and reliable operation. Degree of protection
C Safety and proven quality for in acc. with IEC 60529, EN 60529: IP30 to IP54 IP30 to IP54
every system by type testing Dimensions (mm)
C Siemens switchgear for reliable Height 2,000, 2,200 2,200
operation Depth 600 600 to 1,200
C Worldwide presence through
“SIVACON Technology Partner“
C High flexibility for economical
solutions
6/15 6
All of the modules used are type-tested

(TTA), i.e. they comply with the
requirements of
C IEC 60439-1
C DIN EN 60439-1, VDE 0660, Part 500
C IEC 61641, VDE 0660 Part 500,
Supplement 2 (arcing fault)
C Quality management
DIN EN ISO 9001
C Environmental management
DIN EN ISO 14001
Features of a SIVACON 8PT
switchgear, busbar at the top,
up to 7,400 A
C Type-tested standard modules
C (TTA)
C Standardized busbar position at
Photo 6/23 SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear, busbar at the top, up to 7,400 A the top of the panel
C 3- and 4-pole busbar system
up to 7,400 A
/
C Rated withstand current Ipk up
00 0 to 375 kA
1,0 ,20
1
/ C Deep switchgear compartment
0/ 00 0 0
80 000 1,0 ,20 80 for universal installation
1, 1
0
C Modular structure of device
0
60 80 compartments
C Single-front and back-to-back
installation
C Cable/busbar entry from above
2,600
or below
2,200
C Cable connection from the front or rear

Description
Panel structure
[mm] Generally, a panel is divided into
five functional units (Fig. 6/5):
Busbar compartment Cross-wiring compartment (for control C Busbar compartment
cables and contact conductors) C Device compartment
Device compartment
Cable/busbar connection Cable routing compartment C Cable/busbar connection compartment
compartment for cables from above C Cross-wiring compartment
C Cable routing compartment
Fig. 6/5 Panel structure
Main busbar system
The main busbar system with busbar
cross sections for rated currents up to
7,400 A can be used in various ways
(Fig. 6/6) and consists of the three
phase conductors L1 to L3 and the PE,
N or PEN conductors.

Low Voltage
Busbar system up to 3,200 A 800/

The frames are 600 mm deep and suitable for wall or rear 1000
mounting. 600
L1 L2 L3 N/PEN
Max. rated current (35 °C):

Ventilated 3,200 A
Unventilated 2,400 A
2200
1700
Bedien-
front
Max. short-circuit strength:
Ipk 200 kA
Icw 80 kA
With cable connection from above, the depth PE
of the frame is 800 mm or 1,000 mm.
Busbar system up to 4,000 A 200

1000/
The frames are 800 mm deep and suitable for wall or 1200
rear mounting. 800
L1 L2 L3 N/PEN
Max. rated current (35 °C): Photo 6/24 Circuit-breaker panel with with-
Ventilated 4,000 A drawable type circuit-breakers
2200
1700
Max. short-circuit strength:

Bedienfront Circuit-breaker technology
Ipk 250 kA Circuit-breaker technology (Photo
Icw 100 kA 6/24) comprises panel types which
With cable connection from above, the depth PE
are exclusively used for the supply of
of the frame is 1,000 mm or 1,200 mm. the switchgear and for outgoing feed-
200
ers and couplings.
Busbar system up to 7,400 A Various panel versions are available

1000/
The frames are 800 mm deep and suitable for wall or 1200 depending on function, switchgear
rear mounting. 800 rated current and necessary short-
300
L1 L2 L3 N/PEN
circuit strength.
Max. rated current (35 °C): L1 L2 L3 N/PEN
Ventilated 7,400 A Fixed-mounted design

Depending on the requirements, the
2600
Max. short-circuit strength: panels for outgoing feeders in fixed-

1700
Bedienfront
Ipk 375 kA mounted design are equipped with
Icw 150 kA circuit-breakers, fuse switch-discon-
With cable connection from above, the depth nectors or switchable fuse switch-
of the frame is 1,000 mm or 1,200 mm. PE disconnectors.
200
Modular feeders
The modular outgoing feeders enable
efficient installation (Photo 6/25).
Fig. 6/6 Location of the main busbar system
Modifications and adjustments nec-
essary for operation can be easily
performed.
6/17 6
Photo 6/25 Fixed-mounted panel with outgo- Photo 6/26 Fixed-mounted panel with outgo- Photo 6/27 Fixed-mounted panel with switch-
ing feeders, modular design ing feeder cables, compartment able in-line fuse switch-disconnec-
design tors
Outgoing cable feeders in

compartment design
This technology, which provides sin-
gle compartments for each circuit-
breaker, ensures a higher degree
of operator and system safety
(Photo 6/26).
Switchable in-line fuse switch-
disconnectors
The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors
make for optimum packing density
thanks to their compact design and
their modular structure (Photo 6/27).
In-line plug-in design

Panels that provide for outgoing feed-
ers (Photo 6/28) to be plugged in and
arranged in line represent a low- Photo 6/28 3NJ6 fuse switch disconnectors, Photo 6/29 Reactive power control unit,
priced alternative to the withdrawable in-line plug-in design 500 kvar, non-choked
design. By virtue of the supply-side
plug-in contact and their compact de- Reactive power compensation and cables, reduce transmission
sign, these panels facilitate easy and losses and save electricity costs.
quick retrofitting or replacement with- The panels for central reactive power
Depending on the load structure,
out switchgear shutdown. compensation (Photo 6/29) ease the
they are equipped with choked or
load on transformers
non-choked capacitor modules.

Low Voltage
Bild 6/30 SIKUS Universal HC Bild 6/31 SIKUS Universal
6.1.3 SIKUS Universal and coated sheet steel and meets the re- The busbars can be arranged verti-
SIKUS Universal HC quirements of safety class 1 (protec- cally or horizontally in the cabinets.
Systems for the Switchgear tive earth conductor). The enclosure
A fully developed and harmonized
Manufacturer can be equipped as required with
product range of assembly kits for
matching assemblies, components
fixed mounting and withdrawable
Product and system description and doors.
units is available. The cabinets can be
Product description With assembled doors, the enclo- equipped with Siemens circuit-break-
The single and modular distribution sures have the degree of protection ers and modular devices on mounting
boards of the SIKUS® system com- IP 55 as a standard. When individual rails.
ply with the relevant regulations. cabinets are lined up, a sealing be-
Available designs and assemblies
tween the frames is required to attain
They can for instance be used as All cabinet versions are available in
IP 55. Doors which feature four-point
main and subdistribution boards in safety class 1, with protective earth
locking and door lock can be
administrative and functional build- conductor, and in degree of protec-
mounted on all sides of the individual
ings, in industrial plants and commer- tion IP 55 with protective cover and
cabinets as well as of the cabinet as-
cial buildings as well as in public sealed door, or in IP 30 with protec-
semblies. Doors can optionally be
buildings such as schools or hospitals. tive cover without door.
hinged left or right.
All cabinet versions are modularly de- Cabinets in component kits
The door opening angle is 180°, im-
signed. Their enclosure consists of a The cabinet has not been assembled
proving escape ways in narrow opera-
robust frame with holes, including and is put together by the switchgear
tor rooms.
roof, base and rear plate, and side cabinet installer.
parts, and depending on their width, The enclosures can be matched with
a single or double door. The cabinet is busbar systems for rated currents up
made of electroplated, powder- to 6,300 A.
6/19 6
Design and test requirements Cabinet panel versions Type testing

SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal C Unequipped panels The type-tested modular SIKUS distri-
HC distribution boards have been C Panel with mounting plate for any bution boards meet the requirements
approved as type-tested low-voltage devices with regard to
switchgear assemblies (TTA) in accor- C Panel with assembly kit for C Temperature-rise limit
dance with IEC 60439-1, DIN EN circuit-breakers C Dielectric strength
60439 Part 1 (VDE 0660 Part 500). C Panel with standard mounting rails C Short-circuit strength
The constructor of a switchgear for modular devices C Effectiveness of the protective
station is normally the switchgear in- C Panel with assembly kit for switch earth conductor
staller. He has to observe the specific disconnector C Clearance in air and creepage dis-
instructions for the Siemens C Panel with assembly kit for LV HRC tances
switchgear to be built in when he fuse switch-disconnector C Mechanical functions
performs an installation. C Panel with assembly kit for LV HRC C Degree of protection
in-line fuse switch-disconnectors
Environmental aspects C Panel with assembly kit for When installing an electrical system,
compensation modules the switchgear installer as the manu-
The plastic materials used are free C Panel with assembly kit for 19” facturer has to observe the standards
of halogen and PVC and can be recy- system expansion IEC 60439-1, DIN EN 60 439 Part 1
cled. The paints used don’t contain (VDE 0660 Part 500) and the instruc-
Features at a glance
any solvents, cadmium or lead. tions of the system supplier.
C Modular component principle for
Routine testing for
Modular system and component the creation of a great variety of
C wiring, electrical functions,
design cabinet combinations for stand-
C insulation,
alone and line-up installation
Stable cabinet frames with 25-mm C protective measures
C High quality and safety standards
hole grid in accordance with DIN has then to be performed by the
C Flexible expansion with manifold
43660 including manufacturer (switchgear installer).
assembly kits and accessories
C System-specific frame coverings He is obliged to sign the correspon-
C Easy to install due to modular kit
C Cable entry from top or bottom ding test record.
system
C Vertical or horizontal busbar
C Safe contacting due to grounding
arrangement Interior compartmentalization
scheme and thread-forming screws
C Base frame accessible from four
C The matching design for every Partitions
sides
requirement C prevent any contact between the
C Cabinet-high doors with espagno-
C Appealing design energized parts of adjacent func-
lette lock, four-point locking and
tional switching panels,
double-bit key with 3-mm pin
C limit the possibility of accidental
C Door-opening angle 180°, doors to
arc flashover and
be hinged left or right
C protect the equipment from the
C Doors to be mounted at all cabinet
transition of solid objects from one
sides
panel to another.
C Fixing with thread-forming screws.
All parts mounted with this fixing
method are thus included in the
protective measure.

Low Voltage
Technical data STRATUM 3200

SIKUS Universal
SIKUS 3200 SIKUS Universal HC
Overvoltage category V 1,000/III, 600/IV 1,000/III, 600/IV
Rated impulse withstand kV 8 8

voltage Uimp
Clearances in air and creepage distances DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0110
Rated insulation voltage Ul V 1,000 1,000
Rated operational voltageUe V 690 690
Rated current, A 3,200 6,300

main busbars
Short-circuit strength
Main busbars Ipk kA up to 220 220
Icw (1 s) kA up to 100 100
Multi-terminal busbars Ipk kA up to 176

Icw (1 s) kA up to 80
Protective measure degree of protection 1 (protective ground conductor) safety class 1
Number of conductors 3, AC 3, AC
in the busbar run 4, AC 4, AC
2 and 3, DC 2 and 3, DC
Degree of protection acc. to DIN EN 60 529 IP 30 with protective cover IP 30

without door;
IP 55 with protective cover and sealed door
Level of pollution 3 3
Ambient temperature °C 35 (24-h average) 40
Relative humidity % 50 at 40 °C 50 at 40 °C
Altitude of installation m max. 2000 (above sea level) 2,000
Enclosure frame and doors made of 2-mm sheet steel
Plastic parts without halogens and PVC
Surface of metal parts electroplated and powder-coated
Color RAL 7035, light gray (other RAL color on request)
Locking system 2-/4-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock and

double-bit key 3-mm pin
6/21 6
6.1.4 Floor-Mounted ALPHA

630 Universal, ALPHA 630
DIN Distribution Boards
Description
The ALPHA floor-mounted distribution
board can be used as main and sub-
distribution board in administrative,
functional, commercial and industrial
buildings.
The distribution boards and compo-
nents are modularly designed and
constructed. The system components
and assemblies can also be supplied
in kit form for individual distribution
board construction.
With just a few standard compo-
nents, a great variety of configura-
Photo 6/32 ALPHA Universal, Photo 6/33 ALPHA 630 DIN,
tions is possible. design standard: NF, CEI design standard: BS
The standard mounting rail tier spac-

ing amounts to 125 + 150 mm. De- The materials used are environmen- breaker series, 63 A up to 630 A, are
gree of protection IP 55 can be at- tally compatible, free of halogens and available.
tained. The rated current maximum recyclable.
Application
amounts to 630 A System As main and subdistribution boards in
40 mm or 60 mm busbar systems A distribution board system com- functional, commercial and industrial
with dimensions up to 30 x 10 mm prises an enclosure, assemblies for buildings. Can be used as control
can be installed. mounting the switchgear and modu- cabinet with cabinet-high mounting
lar devices, system components and plate (see accessories).
The construction is based on interna- accessories.
tional specifications and installation Features
preferences. All components are type- Enclosure C System design conforms to rele-
tested (TTA). Material: Sheet steel, electroplated, vant DIN, EN and VDE specifica-
powder-coated and in safety class 2 tions
The transparent system design en- with total insulation. C Type-tested cabinets in accordance
ables easy planning, configuration, with DIN EN 60 439-1/3
calculation, ordering and installation. Color: RAL 7035 light gray (further
C Degree of protection IP 55 can be
RAL colors on request).
The distribution board components are attained with door
designed in such a way that all Assembly kits C Safety class 1 (protective ground
switchgear and modular devices can Made of sendzimir-galvanized sheet conductor) or safety class 2 (total
be installed using only a screwdriver. steel for a wide range of configura- insulation) are available
tions, e.g. for switchgear, modular de- C High-quality surface finish: Cabi-
We recommend using a battery- vices or terminal blocks. The largest nets and enclosures made of elec-
driven screwdriver. A pre-assembled switchgear that can be installed are troplated and powder-coated sheet
kit consists of an equipment rack, the LV HRC fuse switch-disconnec- steel; system components made of
supports and the corresponding front tors, of size NH3, 630 A. For fuseless sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel;
cover. incoming/outgoing circuits, assem- small parts and screws chromated
blies of the 3VL molded-case circuit-

Low Voltage
Technical data ALPHA 630 DIN ALPHA 630 Universal
Overvoltage category III III
Rated impulse withstand kV 6 6

voltage Uimp
Clearances in air and DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0110

creepage distances
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 69
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690
Rated voltage V AC 690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in devices 690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in devices
Rated current A 630 630
Rated peak short-circuit kA up to 61.3 (3-pole)1), current flow time 30 ms 53

current Ipk
Rated short-time kA 20 25
current Icw/1s
Protective measure safety class 1 with protective ground conductor, safety class 1 with protective ground
or safety class 2 with total insulation connection
Degree of protection acc. IP43 / 55 IP30 / 43 / 55

to DIN EN 60529
Tier spacing of mounting rail mm 125, 150 150, 200
Modular width 18 mm is 1 MW 18 mm is 1 MW
Level of pollution 3 3
Ambient temperature 35 (24-h average) 35 (24-h average)
Relative humidity % 50 at 40°C 50 at 40°C
Altitude of installation m max. 2,000 above sea level max. 2,000 above sea level
Type-tested switchgear acc. to DIN EN 60439-1 (VDE 0660 Part 500) EN 60439-1
assembly (TTA) and DIN EN 60439-3 (VDE 0660 Part 504)
Enclosure sheet steel sheet steel
Plastic parts environmentally compatible, recyclable environmentally compatible, recyclable
Surface of metal parts electroplated and powder-coated electroplated and powder-coated
Color RAL 7035 light gray RAL 7035 light gray
Locking system 3-point locking with built-in espagnolette 3-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock
and double-bit key with 3-mm pin lock and double-bit key with 3-mm pin
Packing in impact-proof, environmentally in impact-proof, environmentally

compatible packing compatible packing
1) Busbar holder spacing: 400 mm; busbar 30 mm x 10 mm
6/23 6
C Replaceable locking systems 6.1.5 Wall-Mounted ALPHA

(accessories) 400/600, ALPHA Universal
C Built-in double-bit key with and ALPHA 400 Stratum Dis-
3-mm pin tribution Boards
C Doors can be hinged on the right
Description
or left
The wall-mounted distribution board
C Door opening angle 180°
system for a rated current of up to
C Modular design allows transparent
400 A can be used as a main or sub-
planning
distribution board in industrial, admin-
C 125 and 150 mm tier spacing of the
istrative, functional, commercial and
mounting rail in accordance with
residential buildings.
DIN 43870
C Ample wiring space behind the The distribution boards and compo-
mounting rail nents are modularly designed. The
C Distortion-resistant equipment system components and assemblies
racks and front covers can also be supplied in kit form for in-
C Environmentally compatible, with- dividual board construction.
out PVC and halogens, fully
With just a few standard compo-
recyclable plastics Photo 6/34 ALPHA Universal
nents, a variety of configurations is
C Sturdy sheet-steel stays in the design standard: NF, CEI
possible. Several assembly kits from
scope of supply
the SIKUS floor-mounted product
C Comprehensive range of pre- The transparent system design of the
range are identical in design.
ssembled kits Siemens distribution board range en-
C Front cover with sealable 90° Being a complete product system, ables easy planning, configuration,
quick-release locks the wall-mounted distribution board calculation, order processing and in-
C Doors with foamed sealing as range includes cabinets with 6 to 9 stallation. All components to be inte-
standard rows. The mounting rail tier spacing is grated into the cabinet are designed
125, 150 or 200 mm. in such a way that their installation
merely requires a screwdriver.
Enclosures are available both for sur-
face mounting and for flush mount- The materials used are environmen-
ing. The product range comprises tally compatible and recyclable.
cabinets designed as safety class 1
System
with PE connection or safety class 2
A distribution board system com-
with total insulation. Cabinets with
prises an enclosure, assembly kits for
doors feature degree of protection
mounting the switchgear and modu-
IP43.
lar equipment, system components
The construction is based on interna- and accessories. 40-mm/60-mm bus-
tional standards. All components are bar systems can be mounted.
type-tested (TTA).

Low Voltage
steel; small parts and screws

chromated
C Replaceable locking systems
(accessories)
C Doors can be hinged on the right
or left
C Door opening angle 180°
C Modular design allows transparent
planning
C Ample wiring space behind the
mounting rail
C 2 cable entries top and bottom
per panel width
C Distortion-resistant equipment
racks and front covers
C Environmentally compatible,
without PVC and halogens, fully
recyclable plastics
Photo 6/35 ALPHA 400 Photo 6/35 ALPHA 400 stratum C Sturdy sheet-steel stays
design standard: DIN VDE design standard: BS C Comprehensive program of pre-
assembled kits
Enclosure Application C Front cover with sealable 90°
Material: Electroplated sheet steel, The SIKUS wall-mounted distribution quick-release locks
powder-coated and, in safety class 2, board can be used as main and sub- C Assemblies can be installed and
with total insulation distribution board in industrial, admin- removed over entire height
Color: light gray, RAL 7035 istrative, functional, commercial and C Kits mounted on stays can be
(ALPHA Universal), residential buildings. With its cabinet- removed for configuration and
traffic white, RAL 9016 high mounting plate, the wall- wiring purposes
(ALPHA 160/400) mounted distribution boards can also C Installation facilitated by compo-
be used as control cabinets. nents with keyhole fixing and
Installation using auxiliary frames
quick-release locks
and kits Features
C Doors with foamed sealing as
Sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel for a C System design conforms to rele-
standard
wide range of configurations, e.g. for vant DIN, EN and VDE specifica-
switchgear, modular devices or termi- tions.
nal blocks. The largest switchgear C Type-tested cabinets according to
that can be mounted are LV HRC DIN EN 60 439-1 (VDE 0660 Part
fuse switch-disconnectors of size 500) and DIN EN 60439-3
NH2, 400 A. Additionally, 3VL circuit- (DIN VDE 0660 Part 504)
breakers up to 400 A can be C Robust sheet-steel enclosure
mounted. C Available in safety class 1 (protec-
tive ground conductor connection)
or safety class 2 (total insulation)
C High-quality surface finish: distribu-
tion boards and enclosure made of
electroplated sheet steel with pow-
der coating; system components
made of sendzimir galvanized sheet
6/25 6
Technical data ALPHA 400/160 DIN ALPHA 125 Universal ALPHA 400 STRATUM
Overvoltage category III III III
Rated impulse withstand kV 6 6 6

voltage Uimp
Clearances in air and DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0110 DIN VDE 0110
creepage distances
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690 690
Rated voltage V AC 690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in 690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in 690, 40 to 60 Hz; for
devices devices built-in devices
Rated current A up to 400 up to 400 up to 400
Rated peak short-circuit kA up to 61.3 (3-pole)1), current, 17 17

current Ipk flow time 30 ms
Rated short-time kA 20 – 10 / 0,1s

current Icw /1s
Protective measure safety class 1 with protective safety class 1 with protective safety class 1 with protective
ground connection ground connection ground connection
or safety class 2 with
total insulation
Number of conductors 4/5 4/5 4/5

on the busbar track
Degree of protection acc. IP43 IP30 / 43 IP40

to DIN EN 60529
Tier spacing of mounting rail mm 125/150 200 –
Modular width 18 mm is 1 MW 18 mm is 1 MW 18 mm is 1 MW
Level of pollution 3 3 3
Ambient temperature 35 (24-h average) 35 (24-h average) 35 (24-h average)
Relative humidity % 50 at 40°C 50 at 40°C 50 at 40°C
Altitude of installation m max. 2,000 above sea level max. 2,000 above sea level max. 2,000 above sea level
Type-tested switchgear assembly acc. to DIN EN 60439-1 EN 60439-1 EN 60439-1

(TTA) (VDE 0660 Part 500) EN 60439-3
and DIN EN 60439-3
(VDE 0660 Part 504)
Enclosure sheet steel sheet steel sheet steel
Surface of metal parts electroplated and electroplated and electroplated and

powder-coated powder-coated powder-coated
Color RAL 9016 traffic white RAL 7035 light gray RAL 7035 light gray
Locking system 2-point locking with built-in 2-point locking with built-in 2-point locking with built-in
espagnolette lock and double- espagnolette lock and double- espagnolette lock and double-
bit key with 3-mm pin bit key with 3-mm pin bit key with 3-mm pin
Packing in impact-proof, environmentally in impact-proof, environmentally in impact-proof, environ-

compatible packing compatible packing mentally compatible packing
1) Busbar holder spacing: 400 mm; busbar 30 mm x 10 mm

Low Voltage
6.1.6 ALPHA-ZS Meter and

Distribution Cabinets for
Germany
Overview
For universal use in residential and
non-residential buildings, Siemens of-
fers the new ALPHA 400-ZS meter
cabinets. Based on the wall-mounted
ALPHA 400-DIN, an identical modular
system has been created that con-
forms to all of the current technical
supply conditions and provides a
great variety of options in terms of
enclosure design, scope of delivery,
degree of protection and equipment
to be integrated.
A special emphasis has been placed on
meeting regionally differing require-
Photo 6/37 Meter cabinet with three panels
ments of power distribution system op-
erators and local installation practice.
cabinets and installation examples specific mounting and equipping options.
The system includes empty cabinets
that meets the given requirements.
as flat packs for surface mounting Besides the customary meter cabi-
In addition, individual combinations
(delivered in components for self-as- nets, which are offered in degree of
of empty cabinets and rapid mount-
sembly), preassembled empty cabi- protection IP43, the system also in-
ing kits can be planned.
nets for flush and surface mounting, cludes meter cabinets for damp
cabinet-high rapid mounting kits Benefit rooms featuring IP55.
(RMK) for extremely fast equipping C Identical with ALPHA 400-DIN dis-
Design
and wiring, and a comprehensive tribution board
Modular meter cabinets of the
range of accessories. C Planning conforms to current tech-
ALPHA 400-ZS series consist of the
nical supply conditions and require-
The transparent system design en- following system components: empty
ments of power distribution system
ables easy planning, calculation, or- cabinets in four heights and five
operators
dering, delivery, transportation, equip- widths, RMKs in three different
C Short installation times
ping and installation of components widths, accessories.
C Low storage expense
and complete cabinets.
Thanks to the universal system de-
ALPHA SELECT is available as a plan- Field of application sign and numerous combination pos-
ning tool for electricians, planning en- ALPHA 400-ZS meter cabinets can be sibilities with the distribution board
gineers and electrical wholesalers. It used wherever electric energy is to be system ALPHA 400-DIN, the options
helps to speed up planning and supplied, measured and distributed. for planning and erecting larger me-
quickly determines prices for distribu- tering and distribution cabinet sys-
Meter cabinets and their components
tion boards and meter cabinets. The tems are manifold.
are modularly designed, so that few
search criteria town, postal code and
standard components are sufficient to To complete these systems, ALPHA
responsible power distribution sys-
create an optimum of diverse, project- cable inlet boxes and cable connec-
tem operator can be used to find a
tion boxes are provided. For internal
product range of complete meter
measurements, metering kits can be
mounted in any Siemens installation
system featuring a depth of 210 mm.
6/27 6
Fig. 6/7 ALPHA meter cabinet, assembly drawing

Low Voltage
6.1.7 SIMBOX Small Selection criteria Size

Distribution Boards Installation
Depending on your space require-
ments for built-in devices and wiring,
Small distribution boards are offered
Application you may choose from 1- to 4-row ver-
for flush and surface mounting.
sions of small distribution boards.
Small distribution boards are suitable According to different requirements
Mounting rail spacing can vary be-
for all types of applications in electri- to their fire safety, they can be cate-
tween 125 mm and 150 mm.
cal buildings installations as subdistri- gorized as suitable for flush-mounting
bution boards or floor distribution as wall distribution boards (filament Mounting depth
boards. testing up to 650°C) and for hollow- The distribution boards can be
wall installation (filament testing up equipped with modular devices such
Thanks to their low mounting depth, to 850°C). as MCBs and RCCBs, up to a 70 mm
they can be used close to the load
center both in residential and institu-
tional buildings, such as schools, or
in commercial buildings and shops.
Standards
SIMBOX small distribution boards
comply with DIN VDE 0603, DIN
43871 and IEC 60439-3 standards.
This ensures the compliance with
standard measures and, above all,
safe operation due to the observance
of fire safety regulations (e.g. fila-
ment testing at temperatures from
650° to 950°C) or the protection
against non-permissible voltages on
the enclosures (safety class III). Photo 3/38 SIMBOX 63 for flush-mounting / hollow-wall installation
Photo 6/39 SIMBOX 63 hood-type small Photo 6/40 SIMBOX WP Photo 6/41 SIMBOX Universal LC
distribution board
6/29 6
or 55 mm device mounting depth for

snap-on fixing on the 35 mm x 7.5
mm standard mounting rails in accor-
dance with DIN EN 50022.
Degree of protection
You may choose between small distri-
bution boards for a variety of applica-
tions, ranging from degree of protec-
tion IP30 (residential buildings) to IP 55
(splash-water protected – industrial,
commercial and functional buildings)
System advantages
Easy installation
”Comb”: The soft and flexible teeth
at the sliding flange help to make
wiring a quick and convenient action. Photo 6/42 Comb Photo 6/43 Door frame in low relief
The cables are simply inserted and
you can do without the cumbersome
150 mm mounting rail spacing Low in relief
and imprecise knocking out of the
SIMBOX LC and SIMBOX WP provide Flush-mounted SIMBOX 63 types al-
cable entry glands.
for additional wiring space owing to a most disappear in the wall and can
Terminal block mounting rail spacing of 150 mm. be concealed by a picture if desired.
The terminal block with an inclination
Appealing design
of 20° is easily visible and allows un-
Designed by Guigiaro: SIMBOX LC
complicated cable entry. Above that,
owes its attractive look to the Italian
strain relief clamps ensure perfect
designer Giugiaro, who is one of the
control and secure seating of the
best known industrial and consumer
N and PE conductors.
goods designers.

Low Voltage
6.1.8 SMS Rapid Wiring In contrast to conventional electrical C For installations in false and cellular
System installations, it is no longer necessary floors, skirting-boards, furniture ...
to cut the cables to length, to strip C Temporary design installations,
Application them and to make the terminal con- trade fairs, camping ...
nections at the construction site. You
As the components of the SMS Uni- Supply connection
only have to make the initial connec-
versal rapid wiring system are already System power is supplied via a feeder,
tions of the system infeed.
pre-assembled at the factory, the sys- for example NYM 5 x 2.5 mm2,
tem provides rapid and efficient Plugging in saves considerable instal- 230/400 V or 3 x 2.5 mm2, 230 V.
wiring in ceiling plenums, hollow lation time. Compared to conven-
The 5-pole first connection with strain
walls, cellular floors as well as in tional installations, this system is less
relief (socket version) is designed for
ductings for electrical installations. expensive. Furthermore, there is no
screw connection. Solid or stranded
waste and the cables can always be
It facilitates the installation at the conductors of 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 can be
used again for later modifications.
construction site and saves time and connected.
costs. Depending on the requirements and
The 3-pole first connection with
the application intended, the SMS
Since all of the cables are equipped strain relief can be made with screw-
Universal rapid wiring system is avail-
with plug-in connectors at the con- less terminals. Solid conductors of
able for many types of application:
nection and distribution points, the 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 or finely stranded
installation of a line network is com- C For the installation of luminaires, ones of 1.5 mm2 with end sleeves
pletely flexible; the installation can be e.g. in false ceilings, operated via can be connected.
designed, modified or retrofitted sim- conventional switches/pushbuttons
C For the installation of shielded con- Plug-in connectors
ply by plugging in the components.
tact outlets in sill-type trunkings The housings of the screw-type plug-
in connectors can be opened by re-
APM 610 switching devices
SMS Universal Kombi

(instabus EIB)
SMS Universal
Fig. 6/8 Overview of SMS rapid wiring system
6/31 6
leasing two locating levers (opposite Extension cables Locking

each other) with a screwdriver. Open- They consist of 3-, 4- or 5-pole pre- The socket and plug parts of extension
ing up the hinged housing parts will fabricated cables similar to H05VV-F, and connection cables have a locking
make the shock-hazard protected with factory-crimped plug and socket. device to form a fixed connection in
screw terminals accessible for con- They are available in standard lengths accordance with DIN VDE 0628.
ductor connection. (2, 4, 6 and 8 m).
Cover
On the upper half of the housing, you Connecting cables The covers can be used to seal out-
will find the identification of the con- 3 x 1.5 mm2/2.5 mm2 going terminals (socket parts) which
ductors, for example: for the 5-pole They consist of a 3-pole pre-fabri- are not used in order to raise the de-
plug-in connector 1, 2, 3, N, and the cated H05VV-F cable, with factory- gree of protection of the plug-in sys-
grounding sign U. The construction crimped plug or socket and free ultra- tem from IP 20 to IP 40, if necessary.
of the plug-in connector guarantees sonically compacted core ends for
Features
non-interchangeability so that it is im- further fabrication.
C Suitable for wiring in all types of
possible to connect other plug-in sys-
Device connection without screws structural hollow spaces
tems.
(snap-in) C Easy and straightforward planning
Distribution blocks Can be snapped into the device C Fast, simple and time-saving instal-
It is possible to through-connect and cutouts of the consumer devices, lation (simply plug in)
branch off to the electricity consumers e.g. luminaires for sheet strengths of C Flexible with regard to modification
via plug-in distribution blocks with 0.5 to 1.5 mm. and retrofitting
one incoming and several outgoing C All of the plug connectors can be
Available as 3-pole socket (output) or
terminals. 2 x 5-pole and 6 x 3-pole plugged and unplugged while the
plug (input). Connection for finely
distribution blocks are suitable for system is energised in acc. with
stranded conductor 0.5 to 1.5 mm2.
5-pole through-wiring and have DIN VDE 0625, EN 60 320, IEC 320
Two connections per pole are possi-
3-pole outgoing terminals. The 5-pole C Cost-saving wiring and therefore
ble. All of the device terminals are
through-wiring is marked as phase less expensive than the conven-
lockable.
conductor with the terminal designa- tional installation
tion 1, 2, 3. The N conductor is a lead- Distribution box C To be used in ambient tempera-
ing conductor with regard to the The distribution box consists of a tures of up to 45°C
phase conductors, the PE conductor housing with an integrated circuit ei- C Connectors are non-interchange-
in turn is a leading conductor with ther for 1 series circuit or 1 pushbut- able through coding
regard to the N conductor. The outgo- ton circuit with 2 connected outputs C Reusable
ing terminals are designed as socket for luminaires and 1 output for a C Cutting to length and termination
parts (coupling). With the exception power outlet. can be performed at the device
of the T-distribution, every 3- and C The system is also available for an
5-pole distribution block has an inte- instabus EIB installation with inte-
grated provision for fixing. T-distributors grated bus line.
are suitable for 3-pole through-wiring
of luminaires, for example, and have
two outgoing 3-pole conductors.

Low Voltage
SMS Universal installation

with central ON/OFF
20
3 11
20
6 11
20 11
10 20
11
10
11
15 7
20
11
14
20
11
11
8 20
Through-wiring,
direct connection 15
8 20
Luminaires with snap-in

connector for T-distribution 11
Through-wiring, with
snap-in plugs/sockets
integrated in the luminaire
NYM 3 x 2,5-mm2-Einspeiseleitung geschaltet
3 Plug-in connector, socket-type, 3-pole, without screws 11 Extension cable 3 x 1.5 mm2, plug and socket
6 Distribution block, 6 x 3-pole 14 Connection cable 3 x 1.5 mm2, socket
7 Distribution block, 4 x 3-pole 15 Connection cable, 3 x 1.5 mm2, plug
8 T-distributor, 4 x 3-pole 20 Snap-in connector, 3-pole, without screws
10 Extension cable 3 x 2.5 mm2, plug and socket
Fig. 6/9 Installation of luminaires with SMS Universal in false ceilings, circuitry with central ON/OFF, 230 V AC plug-in connector, 16 A
6/33 6
6.1.9 8HP Insulated

Distribution System –
High Performance due to
Modular Design
Brief description
The 8HP insulated distribution sys-
tem is a type-tested modular system
for the fast and efficient construction
of totally insulated power distribu-
tions.
Minimum space requirements due
to high density of assemblies and a
flexible adaptation to constructive re-
quirements at the site of installation
allow customer requirements to be
met perfectly.
Areas of application
The type-tested (TTA) insulated 8HP
distribution system is used as a low-
voltage main and sub-distribution
board in industrial, functional and res-
idential buildings.
The modularly designed system is
suitable as a housing for small distri-
bution boards and controls (e.g.
garage door controls with LOGO!®
mini control). Photo 6/44 8HP insulated distribution system
The high degree of protection IP 65

(special version in IP 66) allows the Product range – fuse switch-disconnectors, 100 A
distribution board to be used in damp to 630 A (e.g. 3NP)
Any combination of five enclosure
or dusty environment (e.g. on ships, – switch-disconnectors with fuses,
sizes, with transparent or non-trans-
in building-site power distributions, 63 A to 250 A (e.g. 3KL)
parent cover.
steelworks and quarries). Resistance – switch-disconnectors, 63 A to
C Uneqiupped enclosure with mount-
against corrosive atmosphere makes 800 A (e.g. 3KA, 3KE)
ing plate for any kind of device
it perfectly suitable for use in the – load transfer switches, 250 A to
installation
chemical industry, in paper factories, 630 A (e.g. 3KE)
C Molded-plastic enclosure with
or sewage plants. – parallel switches, 400 A to 1000 A
assembly kits for:
(e.g. 3KE)
The fireproofing test also permits use – modular devices with snap-on
– circuit-breakers, 63 A to 630 A
in coal mines and lignite open strip fixing (e.g. 5SY miniature circuit-
(e.g. 3VF)
mines. breaker)
C Special design for use on ships
– DIAZED and NEOZED fuse links
(e.g. 5SB, 5SE)
– NH00 to NH3 fuse bases
(e.g. 3NA)

Low Voltage
614
460,5
307
307
153,5
307 307 307 614 614

[mm]
Fig. 6/10 Delivery range: 5 housing sizes in any combination, with transparent or non-transparent cover
C Type-tested switchgear assembly (TTA) Creation of TTA-tested power distributions
C High degree of protection IP 65 (IP 66) Use in dusty or humid environment

(also on ships)
C Resistant against corrosion and contaminants Suitable for use in corrosive atmosphere
(e.g. chemical industry)
C Total insulation High degree of personnel protection and system availability
C UL approval Use as system component for export to USA
C IAB and BfZ test Also suitable for use in areas with earthquake hazard and in civil
emergency rooms
Table 6/10 Features
6/35 6
6.2 Circuit-Breaker This is only possible if all individual

products and systems are well coor-
Personnel protection and fire
protection with residual-current-
Devices and Fuse dinated and are able to exchange im- operated circuit-breakers
Systems portant information. This is carried out
via a device-internal bus interface or
Personnel protection
Damages to the insulation might re-
Due to increasingly complex by mountable accessories and binary
sult in fault states which require addi-
processes, safety for human beings inputs.
tional measures according to DIN
and machines is becoming more and
VDE 0100 against excessive shock
more important. Siemens circuit- Individual system components
currents. Siemens residual-current-
breaker devices and fuse systems
Circuit-breakers are responsible for operated circuit-breakers provide op-
provide optimum prerequisites for
the protection against overload and timum protection against hazardous
complete system protection and thus
short circuits in systems, motors, shock currents in case of indirect
for safe and reliable operation in mod-
generators and transformers when contact, and the best possible protec-
ern power supply systems. The de-
faults occur. They can also be used as tion in case of direct contact (with
mands on electrical power supply in
incoming and outgoing feeder circuits rated fault current ≤ 30 mA).
industry, residential and functional
in distribution boards as well as main
buildings are increasing. The demand Fire protection
and EMERGENCY STOP switches in
for more comfort is combined with Short circuits and ground faults are
connection with lockable rotary oper-
the desire for improved security and especially fire-hazardous if relatively
ating mechanisms.
reduced downtimes. Only perfectly high resistances occur in the fault cir-
adjusted components and products The SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers can cuit at the arc. A fault clearance by
from a single source, i.e. with the be used in every country all over the line-side overcurrent protective de-
guarantee of a uniform quality stand- world and work reliably in accordance vices such as fuses or circuit-break-
ard based on national and interna- with every electrical standard. Thanks ers is not always guaranteed at rela-
tional regulations and standards can to their modular design and modular tively low currents. In combination
ensure this high safety level. The high accessories, they can be easily ad- with oxygen or air, a thermal load of
reliability and availability of the indi- justed to changing requirements at only 60 W might lead to an ignition.
vidual components, and thus the any time. Via PROFIBUS-DP, they can Here too, the residual-current-oper-
whole system, ensures an economic also be connected to a power man- ated circuit-breaker with a rated fault
and fault-free operation for many agement system. current of ≤ 300 mA ensures exten-
years. sive protection.

Low Voltage
Cable and line protection with System protection

circuit-breakers and fuses The well coordinated combination of
Due to their excellent product fea- circuit-breakers, fuses, miniature cir-
tures and the fact that the product cuit-breakers and residual-current-op-
range is optimally designed for the erated circuit-breakers ensures com-
wide range of applications in the prehensive system protection as re-
fields of industry, or commercial, gards short-circuit, overload and fire
institutional and residential buildings, protection. Moreover, the coordinated
Siemens circuit-breakers and fuses use of lightning current and surge
provide the best conditions for pro- arresters can protect the electrical
tecting cables and lines against system against overvoltages resulting
overload and short circuit. The new from electrostatic discharges, switch-
5SY circuit-breaker product range ing overvoltages and overvoltages
with its components based on the caused by strikes of lightning. Match-
complete breaker range for all impor- ing all individual components ensures
tant functions really offers you many optimum system protection in all
advantages, e.g., increased operator areas of application. This prevents
safety, installation safety and ex- damage to increasingly expensive
tremely reduced installation times. and sensitive devices and systems.
The circuit-breaker product range is Disconnecting and isolating
rounded off by mountable residual- The available disconnectors guaran-
current-operated circuit-breaker tee a safe isolation of downstream
blocks which integrate the residual- system components and devices.
current protective function into the They are used, for example, as
device as a whole. EMERGENCY STOP and repair
switches in distribution boards. Thus,
personnel protection has highest pri-
ority. In the open position they com-
ply with the conditions determined
for disconnection.
6/37 6
6.2.1 Circuit-Breakers
Brief description
Circuit-breakers serve as incoming
and outgoing circuit-breakers for
power distribution in low-voltage
switchgear. They are responsible for
overload and short-circuit protection
in systems, motors, generators and
transformers.
SENTRON 3WL
Air Circuit-Breakers
C As an incoming, distribution, cou-
pling and outgoing circuit-breaker Photo 6/45 SENTRON 3WL Photo 6/46 SENTRON 3VL (250A)
in electric installations
C As a switching and protecting
device for motors, capacitors, gen- Features SENTRON VL
erators, transformers, busbars and Compact Circuit-Breakers
C Modular design for an easy retro-
cables fitting of functions and components Areas of application
C As an Emergency OFF circuit- C Communication-capable via
breaker in connection with Emer- C As incoming and outgoing circuit-
PROFIBUS-DP (transmission of cir-
gency OFF equipment breakers in distribution systems
cuit-breaker states, current values,
C As switching and protective de-
tripped signals, power manage-
Product range vices for motors, generators, trans-
ment functions)
formers and capacitors
C 3 sizes from 630 A to 6,300 A C Remote diagnosis via Ethernet / In-
C As main and EMERGENCY STOP
C Fixed-mounted and withdrawable ternet possible with BDA (Breaker
switches in connection with lock-
design, 3- and 4-pole Data Adapter)
able rotary operating mechanisms
C Short-circuit breaking capacity from C Space saving: up to 1,600 A in
50 kA to 100 kA (at 440 V AC) switchgear only 400 mm wide
Product range
C Rated operational voltages up to C State-of-the-art microprocessor-
1,000 V controlled overcurrent release for C Rated currents from 16 to 1,600 A;
C No derating (i.e. full rated current) every application rated operational voltage up to
up to 55 °C (up to 5,000 A) 690 V AC
C Wide range of accessories such as Further versions C Three versions with short-circuit
locking devices, mechanical mutu- breaking capacity 40, 70, 100 kA at
C SENTRON 3WL circuit-breaker with
ally interlocking devices, Switch ES 415 V AC
UL489 approval
operator control and monitoring C No derating up to 50°C, i.e. full
C Versions with ANSI, CSA or CCC
software rated current at same size up to
approval
C External digital and analog output 50°C
C SENTRON 3WL switch-disconnec-
modules, digital input module C Complete range of modular acces-
tor for DC applications
sories, same accessories for sev-
eral sizes

Low Voltage
Features Standards
SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers work
Modular design
reliably no matter where they are
Due to the compact dimensions and
used, in accordance with every elec-
the modular accessories, it is extra- trical standard.
ordinarily easy to adjust the device to
Economical operation in all cases
changing requirements.
Graded switching capacities make it
Easy connection and installation possible to economically adjust the
No matter whether you are using circuit-breakers to short-circuit cur-
front or rear terminals, integrated rents up to 100 kA at the mounting
wrap-around terminals, a plug-in sys- position.
tem, withdrawable design or busbar
connection – the high versatility of SIRIUS 3RV
SENTRON 3VL guarantees easy Circuit-Breakers
installation.
Quality
3RV1 circuit-breakers are compact,
Quality management according to Photo 6/47 SIRIUS 3RV10 circuit-breakers
current-limiting circuit-breakers opti-
ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art produc-
mized for load feeders. The circuit-
tion methods ensure consistently
breakers are used for switching and
high quality. Operating conditions
protecting AC motors up to 45 kW at
Universal accessories 400 V AC or for other loads with rated The 3RV1 circuit-breakers are climate-
No matter whether you are using mo- currents up to 100 A. proof. They are designed for indoor
torized operating mechanisms, plug- operation in which there are no se-
in sockets or guide frames, a compre- Product range vere operating conditions (e.g. dust,
hensive range of accessories even corrosive vapors, destructive gases).
The circuit-breakers are available in
meets special requirements. Two in- For installation in dusty and damp
4 sizes:
ternal accessory product lines are rooms, suitable encapsulations have
C Size S00 – 45 mm wide, max. rated
available for different voltage levels to be provided. The 3RV circuit-breakers
current 12 A, at 400 V AC suitable
and can be easily snapped into place. can be power supplied from the bot-
for AC motors up to 5.5 kW
tom or top. The permissible ambient
Easy configuration C Size S0 – 45 mm wide, max. rated
temperatures, maximum switching
Dimensioning programs such as current 25 A, at 400 V AC suitable
capacity, tripping currents and other
SIMARIS design provide you with for AC motors up to 11 kW
boundary conditions for the applica-
support for calculations and dimen- C Size S2 – 55 mm wide, max. rated
tion are to be found in the technical
sioning processes. current 50 A, at 400 V AC suitable
data and tripping characteristics. The
for AC motors up to 22 kW
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP 3RV1 circuit-breakers are suitable for
C Size S3 – 70 mm wide, max. rated
Independent of the selected overcur- use in IT systems (IT networks). The
current 100 A, at 400 V AC suitable
rent release, thermal/magnetic or different short-circuit breaking capac-
for AC motors up to 45 kW
electronic, every SENTRON 3VL can ity in the IT system has to be ob-
communicate via PROFIBUS or other served for that.
internationally used bus protocols.
Power Management offers the user
an economic method to visualize
system states.
6/39 6
Since the operational currents, starting Motor protection with overload re-
currents and current peaks can even lay function (automatic reset)
be different in motors with the same
The circuit-breakers for motor protec-
power rating due to the inrush cur-
tion with overload relay function are
rent that is present, the motor power
designed for the protection of AC mo-
values given in the selection tables
tors. They have the same short-circuit
are only guide values. Decisive for the
release and overload release as the
correct selection of circuit-breakers is
circuit-breakers for motor protection
always the precise starting and rating
without overload relay function. The
data for the motor to be protected.
circuit-breaker always remains active
The same applies to the circuit-breakers
in the case of an overload. The over-
for transformer protection.
load release just activates two auxil-
iary contacts (1NC + 1NO). Overload
tripping can be signaled to a higher-
The tripping characteristics of the level controller via the auxiliary con-
3RV10 /3RV11 circuit-breakers are tacts. It is also possible to directly
mainly designed for the protection of deactivate a downstream contactor.
AC motors. The circuit-breakers are The overload signal is reset automati-
therefore also called motor circuit- cally. The circuit-breaker itself only
breakers. The rated current In of the trips in case of a downstream short
motor to be protected is to be set on circuit.
the setting scale. The factory setting
of the short-circuit release is a value System protection
thirteen times the rated current of
The 3RV10 / 3RV11 circuit-breakers
the circuit-breaker. This ensures a
for motor protection are also suitable
trouble-free start-up and safe protec-
for system protection. In order to pre-
tion of the motor. The phase-failure
vent premature trippings due to the
sensitivity of the circuit-breaker ensures
phase-failure sensitivity, the three cur-
that the circuit-breaker is tripped in
rent paths are always to be loaded
time in case of the failure of a phase
uniformly. With single-phase loads,
and the resulting overcurrents in the
the current paths are to be connected
other phases. Circuit-breakers with
in series.
thermal overload releases are usually
designed in tripping class 10 (CLASS
Transformer protection
10). The circuit-breakers of sizes S2
and S3 are also available in tripping The 3RV14 circuit-breakers are also
class 20 (CLASS 20), thus making the suitable for transformer protection.
start-up of motors under aggravated Due to the high excitation values for
start-up conditions possible. the instantaneous short-circuit release
of >20 x In, even high peak inrush
currents of the transformers do not
lead to trippings upon closure.

Low Voltage
6.2.2 Fuse Systems
General
Low-voltage fuses are space-saving,
high-quality switch- and controlgear
which reliably break overload and
short-circuit currents.
They provide secure protection for
electric systems, cables and lines as
well as for electric devices. Flush-mounting Protective Adapter Fuse link Screw cap
fuse base cover sleeve
They comply with the requirements
concerning high operating safety, low
power loss, optimum selectivity con- Photo 6/47 Design of a NEOZED fuse (screw-in fuse system)
ditions among themselves as well as
in combination with miniature circuit-
breakers, and accurate current limit-
ing with a high resistance to aging.
The following low-voltage fuse sys-
tems are classified according to their
application:
C NEOZED® fuses D0 system
ranging from the standard version
to MINIZED circuit-breakers
C DIAZED fuses D system with
DIAZED and SILIZED® fuse links
C LV HRC fuse system LV HRC fuse Protective cover Cover LV HRC fuse
base link
C Cylindrical fuses
A fuse always consists of several
components (at least one fuse base Photo 6/48 Design of a LV HRC fuse (plug-in fuse system)
and one fuse link).
Fuse systems C Fuses that can only be handled by
Within the low-voltage range of up to specialists (mainly plug-in type)
1000 V, fuse systems are distin- LV HRC fuse systems size 00 (size
guished as follows: 000), size 0, size 1, size 2, size 3,
size 4, size 4a, where neither a
C Fuses that can be handled by non-
rated current non-interchangeability
specialists (mainly screw-in type)
as a result of the design, nor
NEOZED D01/E14, D02/E18,
adequate shock-hazard protection
D03/M30 x 1
is required.
DIAZED NDZ/E16, DII/E27, DIII/E33,
Siemens offers an appropriate
DIV/R11/4“,
range of covers and phase barriers
where it is impossible to inter-
to also provide these LV HRC fuses
change fuses having different rated
with shock-hazard protection.
currents due to their design, and
where shock-hazard protection is
ensured for the user.
6/41 6
Selection C Wide range of matched acces-

The following parameters are impor- sories, especially to enhance
tant when choosing a fuse for circuit shock-hazard protection
protection: C Approved in many countries
C Rated voltage Volt (V) throughout the world
AC voltage1)
Selectivity
DC voltage2)
Usually, several fuses are connected
C Rated current Ampere (A)
in series in an installation. Selectivity
C Utilization category
ensures that only the faulted circuit is
(as time-current characteristic)
broken and not the entire process in
C Design (type and sizes)
operation.
Features
Siemens fuses of the utilization cate-
C NEOZED, DIAZED, SILIZED, LV
gory gL/gG are interselective in the
HRC, SITOR® fuses and cylindrical
ratio 1:1.25 at a rated voltage of up to
fuses have a consistently high
230 V AC, i.e. from one rated current
quality
level to the other. This is due to the
C Low power loss output for high
fact that the tolerance ranges of ±5%
economy and minimal heating
of the time/current characteristics are Photo 6/49 Fast arcing and an accurate
C Safe rated breaking capacity from extinction are the prerequisites
considerably lower. Here, the require-
the lowest inadmissible overload for a safe breaking capacity
ment of a ratio of 1:1.6 given in the
current up to the highest short-
standard is distinctly exceeded. Ow-
circuit current
ing to smaller rated currents, conduc-
C Fuses have full selectivity in
tor cross-sections can be reduced in g =ˆ General-purpose fuses: Fuse
accordance with the standard at
size. links which must, at least, con-
a rated current ratio of 1:1.6
tinuously conduct currents up to
C High current limiting to protect all Utilization categories
the specified rated current and
system components According to their functions, fuses
break currents from the lowest
C Reliable long-term, continuous are divided into utilization categories:
fusing current up to the breaking
operation the first letter indicates the functional
current. Overload and short-cir-
C High resistance towards aging to class, the second the object to be
cuit protection.
avoid unnecessary system malfunc- protected:
tions 2nd letter: Object
1st letter: Functional class
C Constant characteristics even G =ˆ Cable and conductor protection
a =ˆ Accompanied fuses: Fuse links
under different temperature condi- (general applications)
which must, at least, continu-
tions
ously conduct currents up to M =ˆ Switchgear/motor protection (for
C Safe replacement of fuse links and
their specified rated current and protection of motor circuits)
switching with the MINIZED®
which must be able to break
switch-disconnector R =ˆ Semiconductor/thyristor protec-
currents above a specific multi-
C Extensive product range for all tion (for protection of rectifiers)
ple of the rated current up to the
applications
rated breaking current. L =ˆ Cable and conductor protection
(acc. to DIN VDE)
B =ˆ Protection of mines
Tr =ˆ Transformer protection
1) European notation for alternating voltage e.g.
500 V AC, German notation e.g. ~ 500V
2) European notation for direct voltage e.g. 440 V
DC, German notation e.g. 440V

Low Voltage
Furthermore, DIAZED fuses are Breaking capacity The rated breaking capacity for AC is
marked with the designations ”slow” The fuses distinguish themselves 50 kA for NEOZED and most of the
and ”quick”. These designations are with their high rated current breaking DIAZED fuses. For LV HRC fuses it is
defined in IEC/CEE and DIN VDE. capacity and minimum space require- even 120 kA AC.
ments. The basic requirements and
Under short-circuit conditions, the Current limiting
circuit data for tests – voltages, per-
fuse with the ”quick” characteristic Besides a safe rated breaking capac-
formance factor, switching angle, etc.
interrupts more quickly than one in ity, the current limiting effect of a
– are defined in the national (DIN VDE
the utilization class gL/gG. The char- fuse link has a significant impact on
0636) and international (IEC 60 269)
acteristic ”slow” of the DIAZED the cost-effectiveness of an installa-
standards.
fuses for the protection of DC traction. When a fuse blows because of a
tion systems is particularly suitable For a consistently safe interruption of short circuit, the short-circuit current
for breaking direct currents with a any current, ranging from the lowest continues to be fed into the network
high inductance. Both characteristics inadmissible overload current to the until the fuse breaks the circuit. The
can also be used for cable and con- highest short-circuit current, many short-circuit current is only limited by
ductor protection. quality features have to be consid- the network impedance.
ered during construction and manu-
General-purpose fuses (gL/gG, gR, When all of the narrow parts of a
facture. For example, besides design-
quick, slow) safely interrupt inadmis- fuse element melt at the same time,
ing the dimensions, punched profile
sible overload and short-circuit cur- partial electrical arcs in series result,
and position in the fuse body of the
rents. ensuring that the current is quickly in-
fuse element, the resistance to pres-
terrupted with significant current lim-
Accompanied fuses (aM, aR) are sure and temperature change of the
iting. The current limiting, too, is sig-
used exclusively for short-circuit pro- fuse body as well as the chemical pu-
nificantly influenced by the manufac-
tection. rity, grain size and density of the
turing quality. For Siemens fuses it is
quartz sand are of great importance.
The following utilization categories excellent. For example, an LV HRC
are available in the Siemens product fuse link of size 2 with In = 224 A
range: reduces a short-circuit current with a
gL (DIN VDE)/gG (IEC) =ˆ General-pur- potential rms value of approx. 50 to a
pose cable and conductor protection cut-off current with a peak value of
aM (DIN VDE/IEC) =ˆ Accompanied approx. 18 kA.
switchgear protection
aR (DIN VDE/IEC) =ˆ Accompanied
semiconductor protection
gR (DIN VDE/IEC) =ˆ General-purpose “gB”
Mining
semiconductor protection HV HRC fuse
quick (DIN VDE/IEC/CEE) =ˆ General- switch-fuse
combination
purpose cable and conductor protec- “gR/aR”
LV HRC fuse
tion switch-disconnector semicon-
ductor
slow (DIN VDE) =ˆ General-purpose ca- protection
ble and conductor protection Overcurrent
relay > I
“gTr” “aM”
transformer M switchgear
protection protection
“gL/gG” cable
and conductor
protection
Fig. 6/11 Fuse application with regard to the utilization category
6/43 6
Photo 6/50 MINIZED switch-disconnector and Photo 6/51 LV HRC fuse links with center Photo 6/52 NEOZED and DIAZED bus-mount-
NEOZED fuses in a SIMBOX 63 indicator in a 3NP fuse switched fuses of the 60 mm SR busbar
small distribution board disconnector system integrated in an ALPHA
distribution board
This strong current limitation protects I z: Permissible current load capacity

the system from excessive load at all under given operating conditions
”Interruption with I2 = 1.45 x In for
time. I2: Tripping current of protective de-
the conventional test duration under
vice under specified conditions
Fuse assignment for cable and specific test conditions according to
(”high test current”).
conductor protection the supplementary sections of DIN
In the meantime, factor 1.45 is an in-
When assigning fuses to cable and VDE 0636”.
ternationally accepted compromise
conductor protection against overload,
between utilization and level of pro- Rated power loss
the following requirements have to
tection for a conductor when consid- The cost-effectiveness of a fuse de-
be met in accordance with DIN VDE
ering the interrupting performance of pends considerably on the rated
0100, Part 430:
the possible protective device (e.g. power loss. This should be kept as
(1) IB ≤ In ≤ Iz fuses). low as possible and only manifest a
(Nominal current rule) low self-heating characteristic. How-
Siemens fuse links of the utilization
(2) I2 ≤ 1.45 x In ever, when evaluating the intrinsic
category gL/gG meet the following
(Tripping rule) losses of a fuse, the physical interde-
requirement in accordance with the
IB: Circuit operating current pendence between the rated break-
supplementary sections of DIN VDE
In: Rated current of the selected ing capacity and rated power losses
0636:
protective device should be taken into consideration. In
order to achieve a low resistance
value, the fuse element should be as
thick as possible. To ensure a high
rated breaking capacity, however, a
thin fuse element is required.
Considering the high breaking safety,
Siemens fuses have the lowest pos-
sible rated loss.

Low Voltage
Photo 6/53 DIAZED fuses and LV HRC Photo 6/54 LV HRC fuse links in fuse bases Photo 6/55 LV HRC fuse links with center
fuses in a building-site distribution and fuse switch-disconnectors, indicator in a 3KL fuse switch-dis-
board assembled in an ALPHA distribu- connector
tion board
These values lie far below the limits Load capacity at higher ambient
specified in the relevant regulations. temperatures 120
This means minimal heating, safe According to DIN VDE 0636, the %
100
Load capacity
breaking capacity and high cost-effec- course of the time/current character- 90
tiveness. istics of NEOZED/DIAZED and LV HRC 80
fuses refers to an ambient tempera- 60

ture of 20°C ± 5°C. When used at 40
higher ambient temperatures of
20
50°C, the fuse should be loaded
with 90% of the rated current. The 0
0 20 40 50 60 80 100 °C 120
short-circuit breaking capacity is Ambient temperature
not affected by higher ambient tem-
peratures.
Fig. 6/12 Load capacity at higher ambient
Application examples temperatures
Fuses are primarily used to protect
cables and conductors against over- C A high degree of selectivity require-
load and short-circuit currents regard- ments in radial and meshed net-
less of the current’s strength, and works to avoid unnecessary system
they are also suited to protect equip- failures
ment and devices.
Amongst the many tasks and differ-
ent use conditions for fuses, the fol-
lowing are included:
6/45 6
C Back-up protection of miniature Environmental protection How are fuses recycled in

circuit-breakers Germany?
Environmental protection is a contin-
C Protection of motor circuits, in Only LV HRC and HV HRC fuse links
uing task for modern industrial soci-
which short-term overloads and will be accepted for recycling, with-
ety and demands action!
short circuits may occur during op- out packaging. Euro pallet boxes are
eration Environmentally compatible recy- available from your wholesaler. If you
C Short-circuit protection of switch- cling of LV HRC/HV HRC fuses accumulate large quantities of old
and controlgear such as contactors National and global environmental fuses, you can also have a Euro pallet
and automatic circuit-breakers problems – for example, changes in box on your premises. For further in-
C In TN and TT networks where dis- the climate and the atmosphere of formation, contact your regional
connection is operated by overcur- the earth, the destruction of the Siemens sales office.
rent protective devices, fuses addi- ozone layer, the deterioration of the
The disconnected fuse links are com-
tionally prevent unduly high contact ground and water resources, prob-
pletely melted down by an officially
voltages from being maintained in lems in dealing with waste and raw
certified recycler. The silver and cop-
the event of a fault. materials – have all proven the neces-
per gained are put back into the ma-
sity of common action. The recycling
Fuses are used in a wide range of terials cycle. Residues such as inor-
law, which was enacted in Germany
applications, extending from resi- ganic waste are used, for example, in
at the end of 1996, requires compa-
dential installations to installations road and dam building. Profits made
nies to recycle materials and thus to
in commercial buildings and from herewith will be assigned to environ-
save resources. Industry is requested
industrial installations to installations mental research for public interest by
to be aware of its responsibility – also
in power supply companies. the ”NH/HH-Recycling e.V.” commit-
towards future generations – and to
tee. The fuses are labeled with the
The MINIZED switch-disconnector take the initiative.
following symbols
allows NEOZED fuse links to be re-
We, as a manufacturer of low-voltage
placed in no-voltage conditions, and
and high-voltage HRC fuses, are
the safe switching of overload and
aware of this responsibility and are
short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA.
determined to focus more than ever
Here, the MINIZED fuse switch-dis-
on protecting the environment and
connector is particularly suitable for
taking care of our natural resources.
use in meter cabinets as the main
switch, and for selective duties in Initiated by Siemens AG, various Ger-
control and industrial applications man manufacturers of LV/HV HRC
where high switching capacity, safe fuses have formed a committee
operation, selectivity and minimum ”NH/HH-Recycling e.V.”, which has
space are required. been recognised as beneficial to
common interests. The purpose of
this committee is to duly recycle fuse
links, taking into account the prevail-
ing legal regulations, and in doing so
actively contribute to the protection
of the environment and natural re-
sources.

Low Voltage
MINIZED switch-disconnectors, draw-out assembly

Standards DIN VDE 0638, EN 60947-3
Dimensions DIN 43880
Utilization categories gL/gG
Rated voltage 400 /415 V AC, 48 /110 V DC
Rated current range 2 to 63 A
Rated breaking capacity 50 kA AC, 8 kA DC
Mounting position any, preferably vertical
Resistance to climate1) up to 45 °C, at 95% rel. humidity
Non-interchangeability achieved with adapter sleeves
1)
e.g. with regard to corrosion
NEOZED fuse
Standards: DIN VDE 0636, DIN VDE 0680,
EC 60269, EN 60269
Dimensions: DIN VDE 49522, DIN VDE 49523,
DIN VDE 49524, DIN VDE 49525
Rated voltage: 400 V AC, 250 V DC
Rated current range: 2 to 100 A
Mounting position: any, preferably vertical
Non-interchangeability: achieved with adapter sleeves
DIAZED fuse, SILIZED fuse link

Standards: DIN VDE 0635, DIN VDE 0636, DIN VDE 0680,
IEC 60269, IEC 60241, CEE 16, EN 60269
Dimensions: DIN VDE 49510, DIN VDE 49511, DIN VDE 49514,
DIN VDE 49515, DIN VDE 49516
Utilization categories: gL/gG, aR, slow, quick
Rated voltage: 500/690/750 V AC, 500/600/750 V DC
Rated breaking capacity: 50 kA AC (E16), 40 kA AC (E16),
8 kA DC (E16), 1.6 kA DC (E16)
Non-interchangeability: achieved with screw adapters or ring adapter
Table 6/11 Overview 1: fuse systems
6/47 6
LV HRC fuse
Standards: DIN VDE 0636, DIN VDE 0680
IEC 60269, EN 60269
Dimensions: DIN VDE 43620, DIN VDE 43623
Utilization categories: gL / gG, aM
Rated voltage: 500/690 V AC, 250/440 V DC
Rated current range: 2 to 1,250 A
Rated breaking capacity: 120 kA AC, 50 kA DC
Resistance to climate1): –30°C to 50 °C, at 95% rel. humidity
Non-interchangeability: not required
1)
SITOR fuse link

Standards: DIN VDE 0636, IEC 60 269, EN 60269
Dimensions: DIN 43620, DIN 43623
Utilization categories: aR, gR
Rated voltage: 600/690/1,000 V AC
Rated breaking capacity: > 50 kA AC
Cylindrical fuse
Standards: IEC 60269, NF C 60200, NF C 63210, NF C 63211,
NBN C 63269-, 2-EN-2-1, CEI 32-4
Dimensions: IEC 60 269-2-1
Utilization categories: gG, aM
Rated voltage: 400/500 V AC
Rated current range: 0.5 to 100 A
Resistance to climate1): up to 45 °C, at 95% rel. humidity
1)
Table 6/12 Overview 2: fuse systems

Low Voltage
6.2.3 Fuse Switch- Areas of application

Disconnectors Switch-disconnectors 3KA and 3KE
are used as main, EMERGENCY
3K Switch-disconnectors – STOP, repair, system selector and sys-
High-Level Safety and tem disconnection switches in distri-
Performance bution board construction for residen-
tial and functional buildings as well as
Brief description in industrial switchgear.
3KA and 3KE switch-disconnectors Switch-disconnectors 3KL and 3KM
are able to make, conduct and break with fuses
the specified rated current (incl. a also provide overload and short-circuit
predetermined degree of overload). If protection as main and EMERGENCY
a short circuit occurs, the switch- STOP switches for switchgear, distri-
disconnector must be able to con- bution boards, power supply and mo-
duct a specified short-circuit current tor feeders. In combination with
during the time indicated. semiconductor fuses (SITOR), they
Switch-disconnectors 3KL and 3KM can be used as effective protection in Photo 6/56 3KL switch-disconnector with
with fuses frequency converters, UPS systems fuses
are able to make, conduct and break and soft starters. In the 3KM version,
the specified rated current (incl. a the switch-disconnector can be easily
predetermined degree of overload). mounted, without tools, on a busbar
Use in aggressive atmosphere
If a short circuit occurs, the switch- system.
This special version of the switch-
disconnector must be able to con- The 3KA and 3KL switch disconnectors disconnector can be used under
duct a specified short-circuit current are available as special versions for extreme ambient conditions
during the time indicated. Addition- use in aggressive atmospheres (hy- (e.g. hydrogen sulfide).
ally, the fuses fitted to the circuit- drogen sulfide in the chemical indus-
breaker also provide overload and IP 65 enclosure
try, paper mills, sewage plants, lignite
short-circuit protection for down- Safety switch philosophy up to 1,000 A
open strip mining).
stream system components, cables realized with 8HP molded-plastic
and loads. enclosure.
Features
High level of safety for user and
High rated short-circuit current
system
(up to 100/80/50 kA)
Lockable to prevent reclosure, de-
Easy configuration, as calculation of
energized fuses in OFF position by
short-circuit current is not required.
means of double contact seaparation
Unlimited selectivity of the switching contacts.
Selectivity to a line-side fuse can
Quality
be easily attained using the factor
Quality management according to
K = 1.6.
ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art produc-
High switching capacity tion methods guarantee consistently
AC 23 A at 690 V AC high quality.
A standard series meets highest de-
mands as to power distribution and
motor switching capacity.
6/49 6
3KA and 3KE miniature circuit-breakers without fuses
Switch type: 3KA50 3KA51 3KA52 3KA53 3KA55 3KA57 3KA58
Rated continuous current: 63 A 80 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A
Rated operational voltage: 690 V AC, 440 V DC
Switch type: 3KE42 3KE43 3KE44 3KE45
Rated continuous current: 250 A 400 A 630 A 1000 A
Customers can combine two 3KE miniature

circuit-breakers to a transfer control device
3KL and 3KM miniature circuit-breakers with fuses
Switch type: 3KL/M50 3KL/M52 3KL/M53 3KL/M55 3KL/M57 3KL61
Rated continuous current: 63 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A
C Available with LV HRC and BS88 fuse-switches for the IEC and British Standard Market
C 3KL miniature circuit-breakers available as protective switches with high-quality 8HP (IP 65) molded plastic enclosure, 63 A to 400 A
Table 6/13 Range of delivery 3K switch-disconnectors

Low Voltage
3NP4 Fuse Switch-Discon- (SITOR) they can be used to protect,

nectors – Compact and Safe for example, frequency converters
Isolation and Protection and soft starters. Due to the open
isolating gap they are perfectly suited
Brief description for isolating systems and, thus, for
personnel protection.
3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are
able to make, conduct and break the Range of delivery
specified rated current (including a
certain degree of overload). If a short 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are
circuit occurs, the fuse switch-discon- available
nector must be able to conduct a C up to a rated continuous current of
specified short-circuit current during 630 A in size 000 to 3 for mount-
a predefined time. The switch-discon- ing/installation
nector is opened (OFF) and closed C for mounting onto standard mount-
(ON) by operating the handle unit. In ing rails (up to 250 A) and snapping
the ”open position”, it meets the re- onto busbar systems (up to 630 A)
quirements for an isolating function. C with or without fuse monitoring
Photo 6/57 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnector
C Accessories:
Overload and short-circuit protection Terminals and terminal covers,
of downstream system components feeder terminals and busbars,
and devices is provided by the size Various fields of application
auxiliary switches, masking frames
NH000 to NH3 (630 A), (630 A) Semiconductor protection by the
and mounting sets for various
LV HRC fuses integrated in the tested use of SITOR fuses, capacitor
cabinet/distribution board systems
handle unit. protection via tested capacitor
such as STAB-SIKUS, SIKUS-3200,
switching capacity. Free selection of
SIPRO, 8HP.
Areas of application distribution boards due to a wide
range of accessories and covers.
3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are Features
used in power distribution and infeed Quick and easy installation
High safety for users and system
for occasional manual switching/iso- ensured by snap-on mechanism or
Overreaching protection and laterally
lating of load feeders and cable distri- quick mounting plates for installation
fingerproof, quick opening due to an
bution cabinets. The fuses effectively on standard mounting rails and ver-
artificial point of force, no arc in case
protect downstream electric devices sions for mounting onto busbar
of short-circuit breaking via fuse,
and system components from short systems (40 mm and 60 mm).
sealable, degree of protection
circuits and overloads. IP 30/IP 20. Fuse monitoring
The fuse switch-disconnectors are by built-on 3RV circuit-breakers.
suitable for distribution board con- Electronic fuse monitoring by
struction for residential and functional 5TT3 170 fuse monitor.
buildings, as well as in industrial Quality
switchgear. They protect and switch Quality management in accordance
downstream system components with ISO 9001, and state-of-the-art
and devices on an all-pole basis. production methods guarantee con-
Together with semiconductor fuses sistently high quality.
6/51 6
3NP5 Fuse Switch-Discon- (SITOR) they can be used to protect,

nectors – Isolation and for example, frequency converters
Protection, Sturdy, Compact and soft starters. Due to the open
and Safe With High Switch- isolating gap they are perfectly suited
ing Capacity for isolating systems and, thus, for
personnel protection.
Brief description 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors are
3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors have especially suitable for industrial
a high switching capacity and are plants and distribution systems with
able to make, conduct and break the high demands on switching capacity
indicated rated current (including a and material resistance, such as ship
certain degree of overload). If a short installations, chemistry and paper
circuit occurs, the fuse switch-dis- industry.
connector must be able to conduct a
specified short-circuit current during Range of delivery
a predefined time. The switch-discon- 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors are
nector is opened (OFF) and closed available Photo 6/58 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnector
(ON) by operating the handle unit. In C up to a rated continuous current of
the ”open position”, it meets the 630 A for size LV HRC 00 to
requirements for an isolating function. LV HRC 3 Various fields of application
Overload and short-circuit protection C for mounting/installation and for Semiconductor protection by the
of downstream system components affixing to busbar systems tested use of SITOR fuses; capacitor
and devices is provided by the size C with or without fuse monitoring protection via tested capacitor
NH00 to NH3 (630 A), LV HRC fuses C Accessories: switching capacity; free selection of
integrated in the handle unit. Terminals and terminal covers, distribution boards due to a wide
busbar adapters, auxiliary switches, range of accessories and covers.
Areas of application masking frames and mounting
Quick and easy installation
sets for numerous cabinet/distribu-
3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors are due to easy mounting/installation and
tion board systems such as
used in power distribution and infeed adapter for busbar systems (40 mm
STAB-SIKUS, SIKUS-3200, SIPRO,
for occasional manual switching/isola- and 60 mm).
8HP and switchboard installation.
tion of load feeders and cable distri- Use in aggressive atmosphere
bution cabinets. The integrated fuses Features The special version can be also used
efficiently protect downstream loads under extreme ambient conditions
and system components against High degree of safety for user and
(e.g. hydrogen sulfide).
short circuit and overload. system
High rated breaking capacity, 23 A AC Fuse monitoring
The fuse switch-disconnectors are switching capacity of up to 690 V AC, due to integrated 3RV circuit-breakers.
used in distribution board construc- overreaching protection and laterally Solid-state fuse monitoring by self-
tion for residential and functional fingerproof, fully compartmented, supplied, integrated fuse monitor.
buildings, as well as in industrial high-speed closing prevents arc
switchgear. They protect and switch Quality
standstill, no arcing in case of short-
downstream system components Quality management in accordance
circuit breaking by fuse, sealable, de-
and devices on an all-pole basis. with ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art
gree of protection IP 30/IP 20.
Together with semiconductor fuses production methods guarantee
consistently high quality.

Low Voltage
3NJ4/3NJ5 Fuse The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors

Switch-Disconnectors, are used in distribution board con-
In-Line Type struction for residential and functional
– Isolation and Protection, buildings. As a result of the narrow
Compact and Safe in design, they are mainly used in low-
Narrow Design voltage distribution boards, network
and transformer substations, and in
Brief description cable distribution cabinets used in
power supply companies and in indus-
3NJ4/ 3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-dis- try. They protect and switch down-
connectors are able to make, conduct stream system components and con-
and break the rated current (including sumers in one- and all-pole operation.
a certain degree of overload). If a Due to the open isolating gap they are
short circuit occurs, the fuse switch- perfectly suited for isolating systems
disconnector must be able to conduct and, thus, for personnel protection.
a specified short-circuit current during
a predefined time. The switch-discon- 3NJ4/3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-dis-
nector is opened (OFF) and closed connectors are fed via the 185 mm
Photo 6/59 3NJ4 fuse switch-disconnector,
(ON) by operating the handle unit. In busbar system, disconnectors of in-line type
the ”open position”, they meet the size NH00 via a 100 mm busbar
requirements for an isolating function. system.
lockable in OFF position, inspection
Overload and short-circuit protection holes for voltage testing in ON posi-
Range of delivery
of downstream system components tion, TTA testing in connection with
and devices is provided by the size 3NJ4/3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-discon- SIKUS-3200 and SIVACON cabinet
NH00 to NH4a (1,250 A), LV HRC nectors are available system.
fuses integrated in the handle unit. C up to a rated continuous current of
Easy current pick-off
1,250 A in sizes NH00 to NH4a
Measuring fuses for current measure-
Areas of application C switchable in one- and three-pole
ment as well as piggyback for con-
mode
3NJ4/3NJ5 fuse switch-disconnec- struction site supply pick-off can be
C for affixing to 185 mm busbar
tors are used in power distribution inserted via a window in the grip lug.
system, for size NH00 on 100 mm
and infeed for occasional manual C Accessories: Quick and easy installation
switching/isolation of load feeders Terminals and terminal covers, By direct mounting on busbar sys-
and cable distribution cabinets. The auxiliary switches, masking frame, tems, mechanical fixing and electrical
integrated fuses efficiently protect adapter for adjusting size NH00 to contact in one work operation, cable
downstream loads and system com- NH1-3. connection from top or bottom.
ponents against short circuit and
overload. Quality
Features
Quality management in accordance
High degree of safety for user and with ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art
system production methods guarantee
No arcing in case of short-circuit consistently high quality.
breaking by fuse, parking position of
the handle unit, visible isolating gap,
6/53 6
6.2.4 Miniature Circuit-

Breakers
Miniature circuit-breakers are mainly
used to protect cables and lines
against overload and short circuit.
Thus, they also protect electrical
Photo 6/60 5SP4 miniature circuit-breaker Photo 6/61 5SY miniature circuit-breaker
equipment against overheating ac- single-pole single-pole
cording to DIN VDE 0100 Part 430.
Under certain conditions, in accord-
ance with DIN VDE 0100, Part 410,
miniature circuit-breakers also ensure
protection against hazardous shock
currents in case of an excessive
touch voltage caused by insulation
failures.
Further, due to the fixed rated current
settings of the miniature circuit-
breakers, it is also possible to protect
motors in a limited form.
For the respective application, differ-
ent tripping characteristics are avail-
able. EN 60 898, DIN VDE 0641 Part
11 and IEC 60 898 are the underlying
standards for construction and ap-
proval. For application in industry and
system engineering, circuit-breakers Photo 6/62 5SY miniature circuit-breaker with versatile additional components
are supplemented by the following
add-on accessories:
Functional design, mode of Due to the ultra-fast separation of the
C Auxiliary circuit switches
operation contacts in case of faults and the
C Fault signal contacts
quick quenching of the arc in the arc
C Open-circuit shunt releases Circuit-breakers have a time-delayed
chamber, miniature circuit-breakers
C Undervoltage releases overload current/time-dependent
significantly and safely limit the cur-
C Remote control thermal release (thermal bimetal) for
rent when breaking.
C RCCB blocks low overcurrents, and an instanta-
neous electromagnetic release for Generally, the admissible I2t limit
higher overload and short-circuit cur- values of energy limitation class 3,
rents. specified in DIN VDE 0641 Part 11,
are underranged by 50%. This
The special contact materials ensure
guarantees excellent selectivity
a long service life and offer a high
with the upstream overcurrent
level of protection against contact
protective devices.
welding.

Low Voltage
Rated cross section Rated current Iz (conductor)

miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) Continuous current in A acc. to
DIN VDE 0298 T4 and
DIN VDE 0100 T430 Supplement 1
Two-conductor Three-conductor Two-conductor Three-conductor
mm2 A A A A
1.5 16 16 19.5 17.5

2.5 25 20 26 24
4 32 32 35 32
6 40 40 46 41
10 63 50 63 57
16 80 63 85 76
25 100 80 112 96
35 125 100 138 119
Table 6/14 Conductor cross-sections: Allocation of miniature circuit-breakers to copper wires with PVC insulation for installation type C1) and R=30°C.
1)
Example: Rising main busbar, multi-core wires on/in the wall.
Cable and line protection

Ib Iz
The actual task of miniature circuit- Ib Operating current: load-determined
current during uninterrupted operation
breakers is to protect cables and In I2 1,45 x I z I
Iz Permissible continuous current for a
lines against thermal overload of the
conductor whereby the continuous
insulation caused by overcurrents Time t
limit temperature of the insulation is
and short-circuits. Thus, the tripping I1 I2 not exceeded
characteristics of the miniature cir- 1.45 x Iz Maximum permissible, temporary over-
cuit-breakers are adjusted to the load load current which does not result in a
safety-relevant reduction of the insulation
withstand curves of the cables and properties when the continuous limit
lines. temperature is temporarily exceeded
I3 In Rated current: current which the MCB is
In the opposite chart, the relative val- suitable for and which other rated values
ues of the lines and of the miniature refer to
circuit-breakers are assigned to each I1 Conventional non-tripping current:
other. The tripping characteristics are current which does not lead to a
switch-off under defined conditions
in accordance with the standards
I3 I2 Conventional tripping current: current
EN 60 898, IEC 60 898 and
which leads to a switch-off within one
DIN VDE 0641 Part 11. hour (In ≤ 63 A) under defined conditions
I3 Tolerance limit
I4 Holding current of the instantaneous
release (short-circuit release)
I5 Tripping current of the instantaneous
release (short-circuit release)
I4 I5
Current I
Fig. 6/13 Schematic drawing of the relative values of lines and protective device
6/55 6
1,13 1,45 1,131,45

120 I2_06663b 120 I2_06352c
60 60
40 40
Minutes
20 20
Minutes
10 10
6 6
Tripping time
4 4
Tripping time
2 2
1 1
40 40
20 20
Thus, the three characteristics B, C 10 10

6 6
and D can be certified. Characteristic 4 4
B replaces the previous characteristic
Seconds
Seconds
2 2
L. Characteristic G in accordance with 1 1
CEE 19, 1st edition is still defined, 0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
however, it is replaced by characteris- 0.2 0.2
tic C. 0.1 0.1
0.06 0.06
In practice, the new tripping charac- 0.04 0.04
teristics with a thermal tripping of 0.02 0.02
I2 = 1.45 x In have the advantage of a 0.01 0.01
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
more simple and obvious assignment Multiple of rated current Multiple of rated current
of miniature circuit-breakers for cable
Tripping characteristic A Tripping characteristic B
and line protection in case of over-
C For limited semiconductor protection Cable protection mainly in residential
load. The only condition is now:
C Protection of measuring circuits with building installations, no proof regard-
I n ≤ I z.
transformers ing personnel protection required
C Protection of circuits with long cable
Features of miniature circuit-
lengths which require tripping within
breakers
0.4 sec. acc. to DIN VDE 0100
C High rated breaking capacity up to Part 410
15,000 A according to EN 60 898
and 25 kA according to EN 60947-2 120
1,13 1,45
120
1,13 1,45
I2_06353c I2_06354c
C Excellent current limiting and 60 60
selectivity 40 40
C Tripping characteristics A, B, C 20
Minutes
Minutes
20
and D 10 10
6 6
C Terminals are safe from finger
Tripping time
4
Tripping time
4
touch and touch by the back of the 2 2
hand 1 1
40 40
C Uniform additional components, 20
20
quick mounting using snap-on and 10
10
snap-in mechanism on site 6 6
4
C Separate switch position indication 4
Seconds
Seconds
2 2
C Variable labeling system
1 1
C Handle locking device effectively 0.6 0.6
prevents unauthorized operation of 0.4 0.4
the handle 0.2 0.2
C Disconnector characteristics acc. to 0.1 0.1

0.06 0.06
DIN VDE 0660 Part 107 0.04 0.04
C Main switch characteristics acc. to 0.02 0.02
EN 60204 0.01 0.01
1.5 2
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
Multiple of rated current Multiple of rated current
Tripping characteristic C Tripping characteristic D

C Cable protection, advantageous for C Application area is adapted to
controlling higher making currents, strongly pulsating equipment, e.g.
e.g. with lamps, motors transformers, solenoid valves, capaci-
ties
Fig. 6/14 Tripping characteristics according to EN 60 898, DIN VDE 0641 Part 11

Low Voltage
Photo 6/63 Flexible and without tools Photo 6/64 Shock-hazard protection with Photo 6/65 Easier, faster, more wiring space
obvious advantages
Features of 5SY Flexible and without tools

Easier, faster, more wiring space C Integrated, movable terminal
C Identical terminals at the top and covers in the area of the feeder
bottom cable entries
C Connection of the feeder cable in C With tightened screws, the termi-
front of the busbar nals are completely enclosed
C Larger and more easily accessible C Effective shock-hazard protection
wiring space for the feeder cable even if fully grabbed
C Comfortable insertion of the feeder C VBG 4/BGV A2 requirements are
cables into the busbar greatly exceeded
C Clear, visible and verifiable
Shock-hazard protection with clear
connection of the feeder cables Photo 6/66 Removal from the assembly
advantages
C Universal infeed with busbar
C Manual rapid mounting and
mounting at the top or bottom
dismounting system – no need Removal from the assembly
for tools As a result of the combination of the
C Rapid mounting and dismounting of various features, the 5SY miniature
the MCB onto and from the stan- circuit-breakers can easily and rapidly
dard mounting rails in accordance be removed from the assembly when
with DIN EN 60715 circuits have to be changed: It is no
C Devices can be replaced easily and longer necessary to remove the bus-
comfortably at any time bar. It just takes a moment to replace
a 5SY miniature circuit-breaker.
6/57 6
Product overview
Version Tripping Device Rated Standards Rated breaking Type of application
characte- mounting currents In capacity
Residential
Functional
ristic depth Energy limitation
buildings
buildings
Industry
[mm] class
Standard product range
5SJ6 B 70 6 ... 32 A EN 60898 6 000 C C C

3
5SY6 B 6 ... 80 A C C C
C 0.3 ... 80 A C C C
D 0.3 ... 63 A C C C
High-performance
product range
5SY4 A 70 1 ... 80 A EN 60898 10 000 C C

3
B 6 ... 80 A C C
C 0.3 ... 80 A C C
D 0.3 ... 63 A C C
5SY7 B 6 ... 63 A 15 000 C C
3
C 0.3 ... 63 A C C
D 0.3 ... 63 A C C
5SY8 C 0.3 ... 63 A EN 60947-2 25 kA C C
D 0.3 ... 63 A C C
AC/DC product range
5SY5 B 70 6 ... 63 A EN 60898 10 000 C

3
C 0.3 ... 63 A C
High current product range
5SP4 B 70 80 ... 125 A EN 60898 10 000 C C

C 80 ... 125 A C C
D 80 ... 100 A C C
Power supply company
product range
5SP3 E 92 16 ... 100 A DIN VDE 0645 25 000 C C
Table 6/15 Overview of miniature circuit-breaker product ranges

Low Voltage
Technical data 5SY4 5SY5 5SY6 5SY7 5SY8 5SP4

Number of poles 1 C C C C C C
1+N C C C C
2 C C C C C C
3 C C C C C
3+N C C C C
4 C C C C C
Rated voltage V AC 230 / 400
V DC – 220 / 440 –
Operational voltage min. V AC / DC 24
max. V/Pol DC 60 1) 220 60 1)
max. V AC 440
Rated breaking capacity
acc. to EN 60898 kA AC 10 6 15 10
kA DC – 15 –
acc. to EN 60947-2 kA AC – 25 –
Coordination of insulation
Rated insulation voltage V AC 250/440
Degree of pollution with
overvoltage category III 2 3
Shock-hazard protection C C C C C C
acc. to DIN EN 50274
Main switch characteristics C C C C C C
acc. to EN 60204
Sealable in the final handle position C C C C C C
Device depth mm 70
acc. to DIN 43880
Degree of protection IP00 acc. to DIN 40050, IP20 acc. to DIN 40050 for 5SY, IP40
when mounted in distribution board
Free of CFC and silicone yes
Mounting can be snapped onto 35 mm standard mounting rail (DIN EN 60715); additionally for
C 5SY: rapid mounting system operable without tools
C 5SP4: also screw mounting
Terminals 5SY combined terminals on both sides for simultaneous connection of bus-
bars (pin-type version) and conductors
5SP4 tunnel terminals on both sides
Terminal tightening torque
recommended Nm 2.5 ... 3 3 ... 3.5
Conductor cross sections
solid and stranded
C upper terminal mm2 0.75 ... 35 0.75 ... 50
C lower terminal mm2 0.75 ... 35 0.75 ... 50
finely stranded with end sleeve
C upper terminal mm2 0.75 ... 25 0.75 ... 35
C lower terminal mm2 0.75 ... 25 0.75 ... 35
Different cable cross sections can be clamped
simultaneously; details available on request
Supply connection any, adhere to the specified polarity for DC applications
Mounting position any
Service life average of 20,000 operations at rated load 2)
Ambient temperature °C –25 ... +45, temporarily +55, max. 95% humidity, storage temperature: –40 ... +75
Resistance to climate 6 cycles acc. to IEC 60068-2-30
Resistance to vibration m/s2 60 at 10 Hz ... 150 Hz acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
1) Battery charging voltage 72 V
2) 10,000 operations for 5SY5, 40 A, 50 A and 63 A at rated load
Table 6/16 Technical data for miniature circuit-breakers
6/59 6
Technical data 5SJ6 5SY6 …-.KV 5SP3

Number of poles 1 C C
1+N C
Rated voltage V AC 230 / 400 230 220 / 440
Operational voltage min. V AC / DC 24
max. V DC / Pol 60
max. V AC 250 440
Rated breaking capacity
acc. to EN 60898 kA AC 6
acc. to DIN VDE 0645 kA AC 25
Coordination of insulation
Rated insulation voltage V AC 250 690
Degree of pollution
with overvoltage category III 2 / III 3 / IV
Shock-hazard protection C C –
acc. to DIN EN 50274
Main switch characteristics – – C
acc. to EN 60204
Sealable in the final handle position C C C
Device depth mm 70 92
acc. to DIN 43880
Degree of protection IP20 acc. to DIN 40050 for 5SP3, IP40 when mounted in distribution board
Mounting can be snapped onto 35 mm (DIN EN 60715) standard mounting rail;
additionally for 5SP3: also screw mounting
Terminals 5SP3 saddle terminals on both sides, 5SJ6, 5SY6 ...-.KV tunnel terminals on both sides
Conductor cross sections
Solid and stranded
C upper terminal mm2 0.75 ... 25 0.75 ... 16 max. 70
C lower terminal mm2 0.75 ... 25 0.75 ... 16 max. 70
Finely stranded with end sleeve
C upper terminal mm2 0.75 ... 25 0.75 ... 16 max. 50
C lower terminal mm2 0.75 ... 25 0.75 ... 16 max. 50
Supply connection any
Service life average of 20,000 operations at rated load 2)
Ambient temperature °C –25 ... +45, temporarily +55, max. 95% humidity, storage temperature: –40 ... +75
Resistance to climate 6 cycles acc. to IEC 60068-2-30
Resistance to vibration m/ s2 60 at 10 Hz ... 150 Hz acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Tabelle 6/17 Technical data for miniature circuit-breakers

Low Voltage
6.2.5 Residual-Current- Figure 6/15 shows the physiological Thus, a current can only flow through
Operated Circuit-Breakers responses of the human body when a human body if two faults are pres-
current flows through it, classified ent or if the person accidentally
Protection against hazardous into current ranges. Current/time val- touches live parts.
shock currents according to DIN ues in range 4 are dangerous, as they
If a person directly touches live parts,
VDE 0100 Part 410 can initiate heart fibrillation which can
two resistances determine the level
result in death.
Application of the current flowing through the hu-
C Protection against indirect contact The RCCB tripping range with a rated man body, i.e. the internal resistance
(indirect personnel protection). Pro- fault current of 10 mA and 30 mA is of the person RM and the local ground
tection is provided by disconnect- indicated. The average release time leakage resistance RSt (see Fig. 6/17).
ing hazardous high contact voltages lies between 10 ms and 30 ms. The For the purpose of accident preven-
caused by a short circuit to ex- admissible tripping time in accord- tion, the worst case must be assumed
posed conductive parts of equip- ance with DIN VDE 0664 or EN 61 008 which means that the local ground
ment. or IEC 1008 of max. 0.3 s (300 ms) is leakage resistance is almost zero.
C When using RCCBs with I∆n ≤ 30 mA. not required. Residual-current-oper-
The resistance of the human body is
extensive protection from direct ated circuit-breakers with a rated fault
dependent on the current path. Mea-
contact (direct personnel protec- current of 10 mA or 30 mA provide
surements resulted, for example, in a
tion) is given – as supplementary reliable protection even if current
resistance of 1000 Ω for a hand-to-
protection via disconnection when flows through a person as a result of
hand or hand-to-foot current path.
live parts are touched. unintentional direct contact with live
parts. This level of protection cannot A fault voltage of 230 V AC results in
Protective action be achieved by any other comparable a current of 230 mA for a hand-to-
While RCCBs for rated fault current means of protection against indirect hand current path.
I∆n ≥ 30 mA provide protection contact.
against indirect contact, the installa-
tion of RCCBs with I∆n ≤ 30 mA pro- Wherever RCCBs are used, an appro-
vides a high level of supplementary priate earth terminal must also be
protection against unintentional direct provided and connected to all of the
contact with live parts. equipment and parts of the system.
Photo 6/67 RCCB 4-pole Photo 6/68 RCCB-protected outlet for a Photo 6/69 RCCB 2-pole
higher protective level
6/61 6
10 mA 30 mA Range a
10000
Usually, the
ms effect is not
t perceived.
2000
1000 Range s
Usually, there
500 are no noxious
1 2 3 4 effects.
200
100
Range d
50
Usually, no
Fire protection according to danger of
20
DIN VDE 0100-482 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 mA 10000 heart fibrillation.
IM
Application IM
: Shock current Range f
When using residual-current-operated Heart fibrillation
t : Duration
circuit-breakers with I∆n ≤ 300 mA, danger.
protection against electrically ignited
fires caused by insulation faults. Fig. 6/15 Rated current range according to IEC 60479
Protective action
For ”locations exposed to the hazards
of fire”, DIN VDE 0100-482 specifies L1 L1 L1
FI N FI FI
N N
measures to prevent fires that might PE PE PE
RA RA RA
result from insulation failures.
Taking into account all external influ-
ences, the electrical equipment must
be selected and mounted in such a
way that their heating during normal Damaged
PE conductor Conductors
interrupted interchanged
operation and the predictable in- insulation and insulation
failure in the
crease of temperature in case of a equipment
fault cannot cause a fire.
This may be achieved by a suitable
type of equipment or by additional
protective measures during the in-
stallation.
In TN and TT systems, there are
R St R St R St
therefore RCCBs with a rated fault
current of 300 mA maximum addi-
tionally requested for “locations ex- Fig. 6/16 Examples for unintentional direct contact
posed to the hazards of fire”. Where
resistive faults can cause a fire (e.g.
in the case of overhead radiation L1
heatings with surface heating ele- L2
L3
ments), the rated fault current must N
not exceed 30 mA.
The additional protection against fire FI
provided by RCCBs should be used

not only at locations with increased
fire hazard but in general.
RM
IM
R St
Photo 6/70 RCCB Fig. 6/17 Schematic drawing: Additional

AC/DC current sensitive protection when directly touching
live parts

Low Voltage
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 N 1 3 5 N
2 4 6 N 2 4 6 N
3 x 230 V AC + N 3 x 230 V AC
3 x 400 V AC + N 3 x 400 V AC
Fig. 6/18 Connection of RCCBs
Design and mode of operation of Test button

residual-current-operated circuit- Each RCCB has a test button which TN system
L1
breakers can be used to check its operability. L2
L3
When the test button is pressed, an N
An RCCB essentially comprises 3 PEN PE
artificial fault current is produced and
major functional groups:
RCCB
RCCB
the RCCB must trip.
1. Summation current transformer
for fault current detection We recommend that the functionality
N PE
2. Release to convert the electrical of the RCCB is tested after installa-
measured value into a mechanical tion and at regular intervals (about TN-C TN-S
release twice a year).
3. Contact-latching mechanism with
Furthermore, other standards or regu- TT system L1
the contacts L2
lations (e.g. accident prevention regu- L3
The summation current involves all of lations) which specify test intervals N
RCCB
RCCB
the conductors, i.e. also the neutral must also be met. The minimum op-
conductor, which are necessary for erating voltage for the test function is
current conduction. typically 100 V AC (5SM series). L1
L2
L3
In a fault-free system, the magnetiz- 3-pole connection N
ing effects of current carrying con- 4-pole RCCBs (Fig. 6/18) can also be
ductors in the summation current used in 3-pole supply networks. In this PE PE
transformer cancel each other out in case, the device must be connected at
accordance with Kirchhoff’s law. the terminals 1, 3, 5 and 2, 4, 6 (Fig. IT system (limited application) L1
There is no residual magnetic field 6/18). The functionality of the test facil- L2
L3
which could induce a voltage in the ity is only ensured if a jumper is in-
RCCB
RCCB
secondary winding. serted between the terminals 3 and N.
However, if an insulation fault causes a Application
fault current to flow, this balance is dis- RCCBs can be used in all three
PE PE
turbed and a residual magnetic field re- distribution network types
mains in the transformer core. This pro- (DIN VDE 0100-410) (Fig. 6 /19).
duces a voltage in the secondary wind- Fig. 6/19 RCCB; possible application in all
In the IT system, a tripping upon the
ing, which, via the release and the three network types
first fault is not required since this can
contact latching mechanism, discon-
not yet cause a dangerous touch volt-
nects the circuit with the insulation
age. An insulation monitoring device Current types
fault. This tripping principle works inde-
has to be provided so that the first fault When using electronic components
pendently of the supply voltage or an
is signaled by an audible or visual signal in household appliances and in indus-
auxiliary supply. This is the prerequisite
and the fault cleared as quickly as pos- trial plants for equipment with an
for the high level of protection which
sible. The tripping is only requested in ground terminal (protection class I),
RCCBs provide according to IEC/EN
the case of a second fault. Depending non-sinusoidal fault currents may
61008 (VDE 0664). Only this ensures
on the grounding, the tripping condi- flow through an RCCB in case of an
that the full protective function of the
tions of the TN orTT system must be insulation fault.
RCCB is maintained, even in case of a
observed. The RCCB can also be used
network fault, e.g. if a phase conductor
as a suitable circuit-breaker here; each
fails or the neutral conductor is inter-
current-using equipment must then be
rupted.
equipped with its own RCCB.
6/63 6
Current type Current Proper functioning of Tripping current 1)

waveform RCCBs type
AC A B
AC fault currents C C C 0.5 … 1.0 I∆n
pulsating DC fault currents – C C 0.35 … 1.4 I∆n

(pos. and neg. half-waves)
Phased half-wave currents

Phase control angle 90°el – C C 0.25 … 1.4 I∆n
135°el C C 0.11 … 1.4 I∆n
Half-wave current with super- – C C max. 1.4 I∆n+ 6 mA

imposed smooth 6 mA DC current
Smooth DC current – – C 0.5 … 2.0 I∆n

1) Tripping currents acc. to IEC /EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10); for smooth DC currents acc. to VDE 0664, Part 100.
Table 6/18 Tripping currents for RCCBs
The standards for RCCBs include

additional requirements and test Three-phase bridge Three-phase star Load current
connection 6-pulse connection
specifications for fault currents which IB
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
become zero or almost zero within
one period of the supply frequency. IB IB
RCCBs which trip on both sinusoidal

AC fault currents as well as on t
Fault current
pulsating DC fault currents have
I
the symbol .
RCCBs which additionally trip on I∆ I∆
smooth DC currents (type B) have
the symbol . t
DC fault currents Fig. 6/20 Block diagram with fault location

In industrial electrical equipment, cir-
cuits are being increasingly used
A protective measure would be protec- The W1 summation current trans-
where smooth DC fault currents or
tive separation, which, however, can former monitors, as before, the elec-
fault currents with a low residual rip-
only be implemented using heavy and trical system or plant for AC and pul-
ple may flow in the event of a fault
expensive transformers. A technically sating fault currents. The summation
condition. This is shown in Fig. 6/20
optimum and cost-effective solution is current transformer W2 senses the
with the example of a piece of elec-
obtained by using the new AC/DC sen- smooth DC fault currents, and trans-
trical equipment with a three-phase
sitive RCCBs. This RCCB type (type B) mits a disconnection command to re-
rectifier circuit. Electrical equipment
is specified in DIN EN 50178 (DIN VDE lease A via electronic unit E when a
includes devices such as frequency
0160) ”Electronic equipment for use in fault occurs.
converters, medical devices (e.g.
power installations”.
x-ray generators, CT systems) and Operating principle
UPS systems. In order to ensure a highly reliable
AC/DC sensitive protective device
supply, the power for the electronic
Pulse current sensitive RCCBs cannot
Design unit is tapped from all of the three
detect such DC fault currents and
The basis for the AC/DC sensitive phase conductors and the neutral
cannot trip. Furthermore, this has a
protective device is a pulse-current- conductor. Furthermore, it is dimen-
negative impact on their tripping
sensitive protective switching unit sioned to ensure that the electronics
function.
with a release which operates inde- still operate when the voltage is re-
This is why electrical equipment which pendently of the line supply, supple- duced to 70% (e.g. between phase
generates such fault currents when mented by an additional unit which conductors and neutral conductor).
faults occur may not be operated to- senses smooth DC fault currents.
gether with pulse current sensitive Figure 6/21 shows the basic design.
RCCBs on electrical supply networks.

Low Voltage
L1
A Release
L2
L3 M Mechanical system
N of the protective device
PE
1 3 5 N E Electronics to trip in the event
of smooth DC fault currents
M
T Test facility
A W1 n Secondary winding
n
This consequently ensures tripping
W1 Summation CT to
whenever a smooth DC fault current
sense sinusoidal fault
is present; this also applies in case of n W2
T currents
faults in the supply network, e.g. E
when the neutral conductor is inter- W2 Summation CT to
rupted. Even in the extremely im- sense smooth DC fault
probable case of a failure of the two currents
phase conductors and the neutral
2 4 6 N
conductor, and if the remaining intact
phase conductor represents a fire
hazard due to a ground fault, protec-
tion is still provided by the pulse-cur-
rent-sensitive breaker part, which reli-
ably trips due to its supply-independ- Fig. 6/21 Block diagram of an AC/DC current sensitive RCCB
ent release.
RCCBs of type B are suitable for use Based on these facts, protection for bility characteristics according to
in an AC system with 50/60 Hz ahead the case that a person directly IEC 60479 for the range 0.5- to 2.0-
of input circuits with rectifiers. They touches live parts is only possible for times the rated fault current.
are not designed for use in DC sys- frequencies up to 100 Hz. For higher AC/DC sensitive RCCBs have the
tems and in systems with operating frequencies, the method of protec- symbols .
frequencies deviating from 50/60 Hz. tion to be implemented is protection
Note:
against indirect contact with live
They can be used for the detection Using the available auxiliary current
parts.
and tripping of fault currents which switches, the RCCBs can be inte-
might arise in the power supply Configuration grated into the building management
units (e.g. frequency converters, When designing and installing electri- system via an instabus EIB or
computer tomographs) of three- cal systems, it must be ensured that AS-Interface® bus or PROFIBUS®.
phase loads with electronic compo- electrical devices which can generate
Selective tripping
nents (rectifiers). smooth DC fault currents when a
Residual-current-operated circuit-
fault occurs have their own circuit
In this electronic equipment, apart breakers normally have an instanta-
with an AC/DC sensitive RCCB (see
from the described fault current neous release. As a consequence, an
Fig. 6 /22).
forms (AC fault currents, pulsating RCCB series connection which is to
and smooth DC fault currents), there It is not permissible to branch circuits selectively disconnect in case of
might also arise AC fault currents of with these types of electrical devices faults will not work. To achieve selec-
very different frequencies as, for ex- to pulse-current-sensitive RCCBs. tivity when RCCBs are connected in
ample, on the outgoing side of a fre- Consumers which can generate series, the serially connected devices
quency converter. smooth DC fault currents under fault must be graded both with regard to
conditions would then adversely af- the release time as well as to the
For RCCBs of type B, the device regula- fect pulse-current-sensitive RCCB rated fault current. Selective RCCBs
tion VDE 0664 Part 100 defines require- tripping. have a tripping delay.
ments for frequencies up to 2 kHz.
The tripping conditions are defined Furthermore, selective RCCBs must
At the moment, statements as to the according to DIN VDE 0664 Part 100 have an increased surge withstand
danger of heart fibrillation (up to 1 kHz) (for RCCBs of type B) and correspond strength of at least 3 kA according to
for frequencies exceeding 100 Hz can to those of type A for AC and pulsat- IEC /EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10).
only be made in a very limited way. Safe ing fault currents. The tripping values Siemens devices have a surge with-
statements as to further effects and the for smooth DC fault currents were stand strength of ≥ 5 kA.
influence on the human organism (ther- defined in this device regulation tak-
mal, electrolytic) are not possible. Selective RCCBs have the symbol S .
ing into account the current compati-
6/65 6
Wh
I n = 300 mA
FI
S
SIGRES RCCBs for aggravated

I n = 30 mA I n = 30 mA I n = 30 mA I n = 30 mA I n = 300 mA ambient conditions i
FI FI FI FI FI S Our SIGRES RCCBs have been devel-
oped for the use of RCCBs in environ-
ments with an increased impact of
corrosive gas such as, for example,
C indoor swimming pools:
chloric gas atmosphere;
Fig. 6/22 Configuration of circuits C agriculture: ammonia;
C building site distribution boards,
Main distribution Sub-distribution chem. industry: nitrogen oxides
board board FI [NOx], sulfur dioxide [SO2]
SIGRES RCCBs are marked with

S FI the symbol i .
With the patented active condensa-
FI tion protection, a clear increase of
the service life is achieved.
selective version instantaneous/short-time delayed K The following points have to be
taken into account when using
Upstream RCCB Downstream RCCB
for selective tripping or the SIGRES RCCBs:
S instantaneous short-time C The must always be supplied from
delayed K
the bottom at the terminals 2/N or
I∆n Tripping time I∆n Tripping time Tripping time
(at 5 I∆n) (at 5 I∆n) (at 5 I∆n) 2/4/6/N.
C Prior to insulation tests of the in-
300 mA 60…110 ms 10, 30 or 100 mA < 20 ms 1) 20…< 40 ms
500 mA 10, 30 or 100 mA
stallation system with voltages ex-
1000 mA 10, 30, 100, 300 or 500 mA ceeding 500 V, the SIGRES RCCB
1)
must be deactivated or the cables
for RCCBs of type AC: < 40 ms
on the supply side (bottom) have to
Table 6/19 Allocation of RCCBs be disconnected.
Table 6 /19 shows a possible grading For applications such as these, where
of RCCBs for selective tripping when it is either not possible or only par-
the RCCBs are connected in series tially possible to eliminate such fault
without or with short-time delay. sources, short-time delayed RCCBs
can be used. These devices have a
Short-time delayed tripping minimum tripping time of 10 ms, i.e.
they will not trip in case of a 10 ms
Electrical devices which cause high
fault current impulse. Here, the
leakage currents at switch-on (e.g.
tripping conditions according to
as a result of transient fault currents
IEC/EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10)
which flow between the phase con-
are maintained. The devices have an
ductor and PE via noise suppression
increased surge withstand strength
capacitors) can cause instantaneous
of 3kA.
RCCBs to trip when they should not
if the leakage current exceeds the Short-time delayed RCCBs are
rated fault current I∆n of the RCCB. marked with the symbol K .

Low Voltage
Rated current Rated breaking Maximum permissible

of RCCB capacity Im acc. short-circuit back-up
to IEC/EN 61008 fuse LV HRC, DIAZED,
(VDE 0664) at a 35 mm NEOZED, utilization ca-
grid clearance tegory gL/gG for RCCB
125 V … 500 V AC
400 V AC
A A A A
Versions for 50 to 400 Hz Type A

Due to their mode of operation, the
16 ... 40 2 MW 500 63 –
standard versions of the RCCBs are 63 2.5 MW 800 100 –
designed for the maximum efficiency 80 2.5 MW 800 100 –
in the 50/60 Hz system. The device 25 4 MW 800 100 63
specifications and tripping conditions 40 4 MW 800 100 63
also refer to this frequency. With an 63 4 MW 800 100 63
increasing frequency the sensitivity 80 4 MW 800 100 –
decreases. To be able to realize an ef- 125 4 MW 1250 125 –
fective residual-current protection for
Type B
applications in systems up to 400 Hz
(e.g. industry), suitable devices have 25 ... 63 8 MW 630 63 –
to be used. Such RCCBs fulfill the
Table 6/20 Rated breaking capacity/short-circuit strength
tripping conditions up to the stated
frequency and offer appropriate
protection. % Scheitel Kenngrößen eines Stromstoßes nach
100 DIN VDE 0432 Teil 2
RCCBs with N-connection 90 TS Stirnzeit in s
Stirn Rücken T r Rückenhalbwertzeit in s
on the left side I 0 1 Nennbeginn
Since the RCCBs are usually located Im Scheitelwert
on the left side of the miniature cir- 50 Im

cuit-breakers but have the N-conduc-
tor connection on the right side, the
continuous busbar connection is dis- 10
0
turbed. RCCBs in connection with 01 TS t
MCBs therefore require a special Tr
busbar. To enable the customer to al-
Fig. 6/23 Surge current wave 8/20 µs (8 µs front time; 20 µs time to half-value on tail)
ways use standard busbars, four-pole
RCCBs are also offered with an N-
an appropriate short-circuit strength. Surge strength
connection on the left side. The in-
Tests have been defined for this pur- During thunderstorms, atmospheric-
stallation habit with the RCCB on the
pose. The short-circuit strength of the related overvoltage conditions may
left side of the MCB using standard
combination must be specified on enter a system or electric installation
busbar connections can thus be
the devices. via the overhead power lines in the
retained.
form of travelling waves and thus the
Siemens RCCBs have, together with
Breaking capacity, short-circuit RCCBs are tripped. To prevent unin-
an appropriate back-up fuse, a short-
capacity tended disconnections, pulse-current-
circuit strength of 10,000 A. In accor-
According to the regulations for insensitive RCCBs must pass special
dance with the VDE standards, this
stallation, which are specified in DIN tests to prove surge withstand
corresponds to the highest possible
VDE 0100 Part 410 (protection against strength. A surge current of the stan-
level of short-circuit strength.
hazardous shock currents), RCCBs dardized surge current wave 8/20 µs
may be used in all three network Details about the rated breaking ca- is used for testing. Siemens pulse-
types (TN, TT and IT systems). If the pacity in accordance with IEC /EN current-sensitive RCCBs have a surge
neutral conductor is used as protec- 61008 and the maximum permissible withstand strength of ≥ 1000 A.
tive conductor in TN systems, short- short- circuit back-up fuse for RCCBs
circuit-type fault currents may flow in are shown in Table 6/20.
the event of a fault. Thus, RCCBs to-
gether with a back-up fuse must have
6/67 6
RCCBs Number Rated Rated fault MW Auxiliary N-connection on the

of poles current In current I∆n switch, right left
A mA mountable
RCCB, type A1 1), 16 ... 125 A

instantaneous tripping, 2 16 10, 30 2 • • –
surge strength > 1 kA 25 30, 100, 300 • • –
40 • • –
63 30, 100, 300 2.5 • • –
80 • • –
4 25 30, 300 4 • • •
500 • • –
40 30, 300 • • •
100, 500 • • –
63 30, 300 • • •
100, 500 • • –
80 30, 300 • • •
125 30, 100, 300, 500 • • –
K short-time delayed, 4 25 30 4 • • –
surge strength > 3 kA 40 • • –
63 30, 100 • • –
S selective, 2 63 100, 300 2.5 • • –
surge strength > 5 kA 4 40 100, 300 4 • • –
63 100, 1000 • • –
300 • • •
125 300, 500 • • –
SIGRES RCCB, type A1), for aggravated ambient conditions
instantaneous tripping, 2 25 30 2 • • –
63 30 2.5 • • –
80 • •
4 25 30 4 • • –
40 30, 300 • • –
63 • • –
80 30 • • –
S selective, 4 63 300 4 • • –
surge strength > 5 kA
RCCB, type A1), 500 V
instantaneous tripping, 4 25 30, 300 4 • • –
63 • • –
RCCB, type A1), 50 ... 400 Hz
instantaneous tripping, 4 25 30 4 • • –
>N<, AC/DC sensitive, type B2)
surge strength > 1 kA 4 25 30, 300 8 fixed mounted •
40 fixed mounted •
63 fixed mounted •
S selective, surge strength > 5 kA 63 300 fixed mounted •
1) = Type A for AC and pulsating fault currents

2) = Type B for AC fault currents, pulsating and smooth DC fault currents
Table 6/21 Overview of RCCB product range *1 MW = modular width 18 mm

>N< = device mounting depth 55 mm
70 mm mounting depth = 70 mm device mounting depth

Low Voltage
RCCBs Number Rated Rated fault MW Additional Type

of poles current In current I∆n components,
A mA mountable (Typ A)1)
RCCB modules for 5SY4, 5SY6, 5SY7, 5SY8 MCBs

instantaneous tripping, 2 0.3 ... 16 10 2 at MCB •
surge strength > 1 kA 2 0.3 ... 40 30, 300 2 at MCB •
0.3 ... 63 30, 300, 500 at MCB •
3 0.3 ... 40 30, 300 3 at MCB •
0.3 ... 63 30, 300, 500 at MCB •
4 0.3 ... 40 30, 300 3 at MCB •
0.3 ... 63 30, 300, 500 at MCB •
K short-time delayed, 4 0.3 ... 40 30 3 at MCB •
surge strength > 3 kA 0.3 ... 63 at MCB •
S selective, 2 0.3 ... 40 300 2 at MCB •
surge strength > 5 kA 0.3 ... 63 at MCB •
3 0.3 ... 63 300, 500, 1000 3 at MCB •
4 0.3 ... 63 300, 500, 1000 3 at MCB •
RCCB modules for 5SP4 MCBs2)
instantaneous tripping, 2 80 ... 100 30, 300 3.5 at MCB •
surge strength > 1 kA 4 80 ... 100 30, 300 5 at MCB •
S selective, 2 80 ... 100 300 3.5 at MCB •
surge strength > 5 kA 4 80 ... 100 300, 1000 5 at MCB •
RCCB protected outlets
for installation on mounting box, 2 16 10, 30 •
equipped with RCCB and 2 SCHUKO outlets
Molded-plastic enclosure, equipped 2 16 10 •
with RCCB and SCHUKO outlet
RCCB protected outlet for an increased protection level
SCHUKO outlet DELTA profil titanium white 2 16 10, 30 •
RCCB/MCB 6 ... 40 A; type A1)
instantaneous tripping,
surge strength > 250 kA
Rated breaking capacity 6 kA 2 6 10, 30, 300 2 •
Characteristics B and C 6 000 10 •
3 13 •
16 •
20 30, 300 •
25 •
32 •
40 •
Rated breaking capacity 10 kA 2 6 10, 30, 300 2 •
Characteristics B and C 10 000 10 •
3 13 •
16 •
20 30, 300 •
25 •
32 •
40 •
1) = Type A for AC and pulsating fault currents
Table 6/22 Overview of RCCB product range *1 MW = modular width 18 mm

6/69 6
Technical data
Standards IEC / EN 61008, VDE 0664 Part 10; IEC / EN 61543, VDE 0664 Part 30
IEC / EN 61009, VDE 0664 Part 20
Versions 2-pole and 4-pole
Rated voltages Un AC V 125–230 50–60 Hz

230–400 50–60 Hz
500 50–60 Hz
Rated currents In A 16, 25, 40, 63, 80, 125
Rated fault currents I∆n mA 10, 30, 100, 300, 500, 1000
Enclosure gray molded plastic (RAL 7035)
Terminals Cable cross Terminal

section tightening torque,
mm2 recommended Nm
5SM3, tunnel terminals with wire at 2 MW at In = 16 A, 25 A, 40 A 1.0 ... 16 2.5 ... 3,0
protection on both sides, lower at 2.5 MW at In = 63 A, 80 A 1.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 3,0
combined terminal for simultaneous at 4 MW at In = 25 A, 40 A, 63 A, 80 A 1.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 3,0
connection of busbars and conductors at In = 125 A 2.5 ... 50 3.0 ... 3,5
5SZ, tunnel terminals with wire In = 25 A, 40 A, 63 A 1.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 3,0
protection on both sides Screw terminals with auxiliary switch 0.75 ... 2,5 0.6 ... 0,8
5SM2, tunnel terminals with wire protection up to In = 63 A 1.0 ... 25 2.5 ... 3,0
In = 80 / 100 A 6.0 ... 35 3.0 ... 3,5
5SU1, tunnel terminals with wire 1.0 ... 25 2.5 ... 3,0
protection on both sides
Supply connection optionally top or bottom (SIGRES: supplied from the bottom)
Degree of protection IP20 acc. to DIN VDE 0470 Part 1

IP40 when mounted in distribution board
IP54 when mounted in molded-plastic enclosure
Minimum operating voltage for AC V with RCCB 16 A ... 80 A: 100,

test facility function 125 A: 195
RCCB module 0,3...63 A 2- and 3-pole: 195,

4-pole: 100
80...100 A: 100
RCCB/MCB in two modular widths: 195
Device service life > 10,000 operating cycles (electrical and mechanical)
Storage temperature °C – 40 to + 75
Ambient temperature °C – 5 to +45,

-25
for versions marked : – 25 to + 45
Resistance to climate acc. to IEC 60068-2-30 28 cycles (55 °C; 95% rel. humidity)
Table 6/23 Technical data for RCCBs *1 MW = modular width 18 mm


Low Voltage
6.2.6 Lightning Current and Causes of overvoltages

Surge Arresters According to their causes, overvolt-
ages are filed in two categories:
Lightning current and overvoltage
protection – why? C LEMP (lightning electromagnetic
impulse) – overvoltages that are
Today, high-performance information caused by atmospheric impact (e.g.
systems are the backbone of modern direct lightning strike, electromag-
industrial society. Any malfunction or Lightning current arrester –
netic lightning fields) Class I (B)
system breakdown could have far-
reaching consequences. This may • SEMP (switching electromagnetic
even result in the bankruptcy of an in- impulse) – overvoltages that are
dustrial enterprise or service provider. caused by switching operations
(e.g. breaking short circuits, opera-
The causes of faults can be manifold, tional switching of loads).
with electromagnetic interferences
playing an important part here. Con- Overvoltages due to a thunderstorm
sidering our highly technologized, are caused by direct/close strikes or Combi-arrester –
electromagnetic environment, how- remote strikes of lightning (Fig. 6/26). Class I (B) and II (C)
ever, it is no longer wise to wait for Direct or close strikes of lightning
the mutual interference of electric are lightning strikes into the lightning
and electronic equipment and sys- protection system of a building or the
tems and then take action to remedy electrically conductive systems lead-
the fault at considerable expense. It ing into the building (e.g. low-voltage
is necessary to plan and implement supply, telecommunications and con-
preventive measures in advance that trol lines). The resulting surge cur-
reduce the risk of interferences, rents and surge voltages are particu- Surge arrester –
faults and destruction. larly dangerous for the system to be Class II (C)
Nevertheless, damage statistics of protected, with regard to the cur-

electronics insurance companies rent/voltage amplitude and energy
show worrying figures: more than a content involved.
quarter of all damage cases are In the event of a direct or close light-
caused by overvoltages due to elec- ning strike, overvoltages (Fig. 6/26)
tromagnetic interference (see Fig. are caused by the voltage drop at the
6/24). surge grounding resistor and the re- Surge arrester –
Class III (D)
sulting raise of the ground potential
of the building in relation to the far
surroundings. This means the highest
stressing for electric systems in
buildings.
Accessories
Photo 6/71 Product overview
6/71 6
The characteristic parameters of the

surge current present (peak value, Negligence
current rise speed, load content, spe- 36.1 %
cific energy) can be described by the
Other 16.7 % 12.9 % Theft,
surge current waveform 10/350 µs vandalism
(Fig. 6/25). They have been defined in
1.2 % 5.7 %
international and national standards
as the test current for components Elementary Water,
27.4 %
and equipment protecting against di- fire
rect lightning strikes.
In addition to the voltage drop at the Overvoltage,
surge grounding resistor, overvolt- lightning discharge,
switching operations
ages are generated in the electric
building installation and the systems
and equipment connected to it by the Fig. 6/24 Damage causes to electronic equipment in the year 2000, analysis of 8,400 damage
inductive effect of the electromag- cases
netic lightning field (Fig. 6/26, case
1b). 80
The energy of these induced over-
i [kA]
voltages and of the resulting pulse 60

currents is far lower than the one of
the direct lightning surge current, it is
40
therefore described by the surge cur- 1
rent waveform 8/20 µs (Fig. 6/25).
Components and equipment that 20
need not conduct currents resulting 2
from direct lightning strikes are there- 0
fore tested with such 8/20 µs surge 0 80 200 400 600 800
350 t [µs]
currents.
Lightning strikes are called remote if fmax [kA] Waveform [µs] Q [As] W/R [J/Ω]
they occur at a farer distance to the Test surge current for
1 lightning current arrester 75 10/350 37.5 1.5 x 106
object to be protected, or strike
medium-voltage overhead lines, or Test surge current for
2 surge arrester 75 8/20 0.27 2.75 x 103
occur as cloud-to-cloud lightning dis-
charges in the immediate vicinity of
such overhead lines (Fig. 6/26, cases Fig. 6/25 Test surge currents
2a, 2b and 2c). Similar to induced
overvoltages, the effects of remote
Overvoltages caused by switching • Arc initiation and interruption (e.g.
strikes of lightning to the electric
operations are, for example, gener- arc welding equipment)
building installation are handled by
ated by: • Fuse tripping
components and equipment which
• The disconnection of inductive
have been dimensioned according to
loads (e.g. transformers, reactors,
the surge current waveform 8/20 µs.
motors)

Low Voltage
The effects of switching operations in

Lightning Definition
the electrical installation are also sim-
protection zone
ulated by surge currents of the wave-
form 8/20 µs under test conditions. 0A Zone in which objects are exposed to direct lightning strikes and
must therefore be capable of carrying the entire lightning current.
Protection scheme The undamped electromagnetic field is present here.
To ensure continuous availability of 0B Zone in which objects are not exposed to direct lightning strikes,
complex electric and IT systems even in which, however the undamped electromagnetic field is
in the event of a direct impact of present.
lightning, further measures for the
1 Zone in which objects are not exposed to direct lightning strikes
protection of electric and electronic
and currents are reduced as compared to zone 0A. In this zone,
systems against overvoltage, based
the electromagnetic field may be damped dependent on the
on a lightning protection system for
shielding measures taken.
the building, are required. It is impor-
tant to take all causes of overvoltages 2, 3 If a large-scale reduction of the conducted currents and/or the
into account. To do so, the concept of electromagnetic field is required, subsequent zones must be
lightning protection zones, as de- established. Requirements to these zones must comply with
scribed in IEC 61312-1 (DIN VDE 0185 the required ambient zones of the system to be protected.
Part 103), is applied (Fig. 6/27). The
Table 6/24 Definition of lightning protection zones
building is divided into endangered
zones. According to the degree of
endangerment of these zones, the Definition of lightning protection or downstream of the lightning cur-
equipment and components neces- zones rent arrester at zone transition point
sary for lightning and overvoltage 1 to 2 and higher, surge arresters are
In accordance with the requirements
protection can then be determined used to protect against overvoltages.
and burdens placed on surge protec-
properly. Their task is both to reduce the resid-
tive devices, they are categorized as
ual current/voltage quantities of the
Part of an EMC-suitable lightning lightning current arresters, surge ar-
upstream protective levels even fur-
protection zone concept is the outer resters and combined arresters.
ther and to suppress the overvolt-
protection against lightning (including
The highest requirements are placed ages induced or generated in the
lightning rods, roof conductors or air
on the arresting capability of lightning installation itself.
termination network, arrester,
current arresters and combined ar-
grounding), the equal potential bond- The above described lightning and
resters, which perform the transition
ing, the room shield and the overvolt- overvoltage protective measure at
from lightning protection zone 0A to 1
age protection for the electrical and the borders of the lightning protec-
or 0A to 2. These arresters must be
IT network. Definitions apply as clas- tion zones equally applies to the elec-
capable of conducting partial light-
sified in the Table “Definition of light- trical and the IT network. By summa-
ning currents of waveform 10/350 µs
ning protection zones.” tion of the measures defined in the
several times without being de-
EMC-compatible concept of lightning
stroyed in order to prevent the
protection zones, continuous avail-
ingress of destructive partial lightning
ability of modern infrastructure sys-
currents into the electrical building in-
tems can be achieved.
stallation. At the transition point of
lightning protection zone 0B to 1,
6/73 6
Direkt/close lightning strike 2b

1 Strike into outer lightning
protection system, process frame 2a
(in industrial plants), cables etc.
1a Voltage drop at the surge
grounding resistor RS 20 kV
1b Induced voltage in loop L1
L2
1 L3
PEN
2c
Remote lightning strike

2a Lightning strike into medium-
voltage overhead lines
1b
2b Traveling surge waves
in overhead lines due
to cloud-to-cloud
1b RS lightnings
IT network Power
network 2c Fields of the lightning channel
Fig. 6/26 Causes for overvoltages during lightning discharges
LPZ 0A
LEMP
LPZ 0B M
LPZ 1
LEMP
Room shield
Terminal
Ventilation LPZ 2
LPZ 3
LEMP
LPZ 2
LPZ 0B LPZ 0B
IT network
SEMP
Equipotential bonding as lightning

protection, lightning current arrester
Power Local equipotential bonding,
network surge arrester
Fig. 6/27 The concept of lightning protection zones

Low Voltage
Requirement classes of arresters

(SPD = surge protective devices: Rated surge voltage and overvoltage categories
lightning current/overvoltage
protective devices) 6 kV 4 kV 2.5 kV 1.5 kV
IV III II I
Lightning current and overvoltage pro-
tection is only effective if the stipu-
HA Z
lated insulation strength of installation
230/400 V
sections is also taken into account
here. To do this, the withstand surge
voltage of the different overvoltage cat-
egories is matched with the protective
level Up of the different SPDs.
B C D none
The international standard IEC 60664-1 Protection <4 kV <1.5 kV <1.3 kV
level Requirement classes acc. to E DIN part 6/A1
(EN 60664-1) distinguishes four with-
stand surge voltage categories for low-
voltage equipment. The categories Fig. 6/28 Requirement classes
listed in Table 6/25 apply to low-voltage
installations with nominal voltages of
230/400 V in particular. Category Withstand Description
surge voltage
The circuit diagram shown in Fig. 6/28,
Table 6/25 respectively, demonstrates IV 6 kV For devices connected upstream of the distribution board
that the lightning current arresters and
III 4 kV For devices which are an integral part of the installation
surge arresters are divided into re-
(e.g. distribution cabinets)
quirement classes dependent on their
location within the power system. II 2.5 kV For equipment withstanding normal impulse voltages
(e.g. household appliances)
Siemens SPDs comply with the
following product standards: I 1.5 kV For very sensitive equipment (e.g. electronic equipment)
C Germany (VDE 0675-6, 1996)
Table 6/25 Stoßspannungskategorien
C International (IEC 61643-1, 1998)
C Italy (CEI EN 61643-11)
C Austria (ÖVE/ÖNORM E 8001) German Draft International European Designation
Co-ordinated use of lightning Standard Standard Standard
current and overvoltage arresters VDE 0675-6 IEC 61643-1 EN 61643-11
In practice, arresters of the different Class B Class I Type 1 Lightning current arrester
requirement classes are virtually con- Class C Class II Type 2 Surge arrester for power
nected in parallel. Owing to the differ- distribution
ent response characteristics, dis-
charge capacity and protective tasks, Class D Class III Type 3 Surge arrester for consumer
Table 6/26 Product standards: Categorization of surge protective devices (SPD)
6/75 6
kWh
Service Electricity Lightning current Interaction-limiting Surge Surge

entry meter arrester reactor arrester 1 arrester n
Fig. 6/29 Co-ordinated use of lightning current and surge arresters
the different arrester types must be

installed in the network in such a way Lightning current arrester Surge arrester
that the ratings of the individual L1
devices are not exceeded, which L2
ensures comprehensive protection. L3
To do so, an energetic evaluation is N
required to ensure that a surge cur-
rent always goes to the next up- Minimum cable lengths:
stream arrester if the affected ar- ≥ 5 m for PE conductor not integrated in the cable
rester might be overloaded by this ≥ 15 m for PE conductor integrated in the cable
surge current. This approach is called l
“energetic co-ordination”. It must be Alternative:
provided between arresters of Class I Use of an interaction-limiting reactor
(B) and II (C), and between arresters
of Class II and III (D). In the latter
case, energetic co-ordination has al-
ready been established if there is a
Mounting diagram Circuit diagram
cable length of ≥ 5 m between the Interaction-limiting reactor
Class II arrester and the Class III ar- Interaction-limiting
rester. The co-ordination of SPDs of reactor
Classes I and II will be discussed in
the following.
Lightning Surge
If an installation is stressed by light- current arrester
ning current, the surge arrester of arrester
Class II (C) will respond first due to Lightning
its low protective level. These ar- current
arrester
resters provide a protective level of
< 1.5 kV. This voltage value does not
suffice to make the series gap of the Surge arrester
Class I lightning current arrester re-
spond, which is connected in parallel,
Fig. 6/30 Energetic co-ordination
as its response value is in the range
of 3.5 kV.

Low Voltage
In order not to overload the Class II the PE conductor. If the PE conductor Follow current extinction capacity
arrester, an additional voltage drop of is wired in a common cable together
This characterizes the height of the
approx. 2 kV must be induced on the with L1, L2, L3 and N, a cable length
maximum system follow current that
line between the B arrester and the C of ≥ 15 m and more is required to at-
the arrester itself is capable of break-
arrester, which shall reach the re- tain a sufficient level of inductivity
ing without the aid of an upstream
sponse value of the series gap of the and the respective voltage drop. If
protective device, such as a miniature
lightning current arrester, when the PE conductor is wired separate
circuit-breaker or fuse. The system fol-
added up to the protective level of from the other conductors at a dis-
low current is caused by a deliberate
the surge arrester. tance of 1 m or more, a cable length
short-term short circuit that the light-
of ≥ 5 m is sufficient. If these cable
In high-current networks, the voltage ning current arrester produces in order
lengths cannot be realized, additional
drop is attained by utilizing the exist- to discharge the lightning current. This
interaction-limiting reactors (5SD7
ing cable impedances or by applying means, the system follow current is a
390-0/-1) must be used between ar-
bundled inductivities, so-called inter- short-circuit current with a frequency
resters of Class I and Class II.
action-limiting reactors. Line inductiv- of 50 Hz.
ity depends on the cable routing of
If the maximum possible system short
circuit current is lower than the maxi-
mum system follow current that can
be extinguished by the SPD, an up-
stream protective device is not neces-
Line arrangement / Conductor distribution Interaction-limiting reactor
sary. Otherwise, a fuse or miniature
connection to ground must be built in if
circuit-breaker must be installed. Rat-
L1 - L2 - L3 - N L1 - L2 - L3 - N l<5m ing information for the protective de-
PE built into vice is provided in the following sec-
PE
different line tions.
L1 - L2 - L3 - N L1 - L2 - L3 - N - PE l < 15 m The single-pole lightning current ar-
PE built into rester 5SD7 315-0 and the combi-ar-
same line resters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 341-1 and
5SD7 344-0 have a follow current ex-
Table 6/27 Energetic co-ordination of lightning current arresters and surge arresters
tinction capacity of 50 kA.
Co-ordination of SPDs with minia-

F1 F1
ture-circuit breakers and fuses
F M Co-ordinating an SPD with overcur-
rent protective devices shall
S S C protect the SPD against overload
P P
D D when excessive currents are
present
C ensure system availability
Fig. 6/31 Protection of surge arresters
C support the extinction of system
follow currents
6/77 6
Description Requirement Product designation Max. permissible Max. permissible Comment

class energy value peak current
I2tmax ip max
Combi-arrester I and II 5SD7 343-0, 600 kA s 2
18 kA No protection nec-
5SD7 344-0, essary up to a short-
5SD7 343-1 circuit current of 50 kA
1-pole lightning current I 5SD7 315-0 600 kA2s 18 kA No protection nec

arrester with high follow essary up to a short-
current extinction capacity circuit current of 50 kA
Encapsulated lightning I 5SD7 311-1, 5SD7 313-1 120 kA2s 10 kA

current arrester
Open lightning I 5SD7 311-0 80 kA2s 13 kA

current arrester
Surge arrester II 5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 100 kA2s 10 kA

5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 303-2,
5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 325-2,
5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 324-2,
5SD7 326-2
Table 6/28 Maximum permissible energy values and peak current values of surge protective devices
A co-ordination of the SPDs and fuse been isolated from supply and is Flow chart for the co-ordination of
or miniature circuit-breaker shall en- therefore not effective. the SPD with the overvoltage
sure that protective device
C As standard, protection is effected
C the maximum permissible peak cur- by the standard protective device Power distribution within the installa-
rent Ipmax and integrated in the power distribution tion is effected by circuit-breakers
system (e.g. service fuse). In this and fuses in accordance with relevant
C the maximum permissible energy
case, the SPDs are only protected installation standards. If required,
value I2tmax
by the system fuse. If this fuse lightning current or surge arresters
of the SPD are not exceeded. This trips due to an SPD overload, the shall ensure protection against over-
way, damage to the SPD and hence, installation is isolated from supply. voltages by means of fuses or mag-
danger for persons or property, is pre- The fuse or miniature circuit- neto-thermal switches.
vented. breaker to be used must be rated in
The planning engineer may utilize the
accordance with the line cross sec-
Basically, two connection methods system protection situated upstream
tions in the installation.
can be distinguished: of the SPD or provide a series circuit
Maximum permissible arrester back- for the arrester.
C The protective device is integrated
up fuse ratings must always be taken
in the connection line of the SPD. The following flow chart describes
into account.
When a miniature circuit-breaker or the procedure for choosing between
fuse trips, power supply is main- fuse and miniature circuit-breaker as
tained. We recommend using a sig- an overvoltage protective device: if a
naling device to indicate that the fuse is used (recommended use), you
overvoltage protective function has may directly refer to Tables 6/29 and
6/30 and ignore the flow chart.

Low Voltage
A Characteristic values of miniature circuit-breaker A

Icc eff
B
Establish effective short-circuit current Icc eff
S
P Establish maximum value of ip and I2t
D
limited by protective device A
A = Protective device for network

B = Protective device for SPD
Icc eff = Short-circuit current ip ≤ ip max3)
No Yes
and
I2t and I2tmax3)
1)
Protection B required for the SPD No additional surge arrester

fuse required
A
S
P
D
Back-up fuse
Miniature circuit-breaker Back-up fuse Solution 1
or
MCB?
2)
Breaker selection B with very high Fuse selection B with very high In
In and isolating capacity so that and isolating capacity. Observe
ip ≤ ip max3) and maximum fuse values. Take
selectivity between protective
I2t and I2tmax3) device A and fuse F (B) into account.
SPD protected by MCB (B) SPD protected by back-up fuse F (B)
A A
MCB (B) F (B)
S
P S
D P
D
Solution 3 Solution 2
1) Owing to an allocated cross-sectional element, line power supply can be quickly restored in case of a replacement of the surge protective device.
2) Recommended, because fuses generate a lower voltage drop and ensure better protection.
3) Please refer to Table 6/28 for values.
Fig. 6/32 Flow chart for the co-ordination of the SPD with an overvoltage protective device
6/79 6
Installation protected by miniature mum currents, and the maximum because fuses ensure a lower voltage
circuit-breaker rated current of the fuse matching the drop and better protection.
SPD. We recommend using fuses in-
The following tables list the conditions
stead of magneto-thermal switches
required for protection against maxi-
Surge arrester 1-pole and multi-pole surge arresters

5SD7 315-01) 5SD7 313-1, 5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 302-4, 5SD7 303-2,
5SD7 311-1 5SD7 303-4, 5SD7 303-5, 5SD7 308-0, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2,
Upstream Lq1 Lq2 Lq3 Fuse F Fuse F 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
MCB [gL/gG] Upstream Lq1 Lq2 Fuse FLq3
[A] [mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [gL/gG]
2 2 2
[A] MCB [gL/gG]
16 2.5 2.5 16 / / [A] [mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [A]
2 2 2
25 6 6 16 / / 10 1.5 1.5 6 /
32 10 10 16 / / 16 2.5 2.5 6 /
50 16 16 16 / up to 125 25 6 6 6 /
63 25 25 25 / up to 160 32 10 10 10 /
80 35 35 35 / up to 160 50 16 16 16 /
100 50 35 35 / up to 160 63 25 25 25 up to 125
125 50 35 35 / up to 160 80 35 25 25 up to 125
160 95 35 35 / up to 160 100 50 25 25 up to 125
200 120 35 35 / up to 160 125 50 25 25 up to 125
250 / 35 35 / up to 160 160 95 25 25 up to 125
> 250 / 35 35 / up to 160 200 120 25 25 up to 125
250 / 25 25 up to 125
1) Up to 50 kA, surge arrester 5SD7 315-0 does not require a fuse. > 250 / 25 25 up to 125
MCB Lq1 MCB Lq1 Lq2
Lq2
S
P
F D
Lq3
S
P
D
Lq3
F Fuse Lq2 Discharge-line cross section to arrester

Lq1 Line cross section of the installation Lq3 Line cross section with connection to ground
Combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 343-1, 5SD7 344-0

Feed-through connection Discharge connection 2)
Upstream Lq1 = Lq2 Lq3 Upstream Lq1 Lq2 Lq3 Fuse F

MCB MCB
[gL/gG] [mm2] [mm2] [gL/gG] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [gL/gG]
16 2,5 16 16 2,5 2,5 16 /
25 6 16 25 6 6 16 /
35 10 16 32 10 10 16 /
50 16 16 50 16 16 16 /
63 25 25 63 25 25 25 /
80 35 35 80 35 25 35 /
100 50 50 100 50 25 35 /
125 50 50 125 50 25 35 /
– – – 160 95 25 35 /
– – – 200 120 25 35 /
– – – 250 / 25 35 /
– – – >250 / 25 35 /
2) Follow current extinction capacity 50 kA.
/ = No discharge protection necessary.

Low Voltage
Installation protected by fuse
Surge arrester 1-pole and multi-pole surge arresters

5SD7 315-01) 5SD7 313-1, 5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 302-4, 5SD7 303-2,
5SD7 311-1 5SD7 303-4, 5SD7 303-5, 5SD7 308-0, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2,
Upstream Lq1 Lq2 Lq3 Fuse F Fuse F 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
fuse [gL / gG] Upstream Lq1 Lq2 Lq3
Fuse F
[A] [mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [gL / gG]
2 2 2
[A] fuse [gL / gG]
16 2.5 2.5 16 / / [A] [mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [A]
2 2 2
25 6 6 16 / / 10 1.5 1.5 6 /
32 10 10 16 / / 16 2.5 2.5 6 /
50 16 16 16 / / 25 6 6 6 /
63 25 25 25 / / 32 10 10 10 /
80 35 35 35 / / 50 16 16 16 /
100 50 35 35 / / 63 25 25 25 /
125 50 35 35 / / 80 35 25 25 /
160 95 35 35 / / 100 50 25 25 /
200 120 35 35 / up to 160 125 50 25 25 /
250 / 35 35 / up to 160 160 95 25 25 up to 125
250 / 35 35 / up to 160 200 120 25 25 up to 125
250 / 25 25 up to 125
1) Up to 50 kA, surge arrester 5SD7 315-0 does not require any
fuses. 250 / 25 25 up to 125
Lq1 Lq1 Lq2
F1 Lq2 F1
S
P
F D
Lq3
S
P
D
Lq3
F Fuse Lq2 Discharge-line cross section to arrester

Lq1 Line cross section of the installation Lq3 Line cross section with connection to ground
Combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 343-1, 5SD7 344-0

Feed-through connection Discharge connection 2)
Upstream Lq1 = Lq2 Lq3 Upstream Lq1 Lq2 Lq3 Fuse F

MCB MCB
[gL / gG] [mm2] [mm2] [gL / gG] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [gL / gG]
16 2.5 16 16 2.5 2.5 16 /
25 6 16 25 6 6 16 /
35 10 16 32 10 10 16 /
50 16 16 50 16 16 16 /
63 25 25 63 25 25 25 /
80 35 35 80 35 25 35 /
100 50 50 100 50 25 35 /
125 50 50 125 50 25 35 /
– – – 160 95 25 35 /
– – – 200 120 25 35 /
– – – 250 / 25 35 /
– – – >250 / 25 50 /
2) Follow current extinction capacity 50 kA.
/ = No discharge protection necessary.
6/81 6
TN-S system
L1 F1
L2
L3 L
N N
F3
F2
Wh I∆ Con-
sumer
*
PE
PE
• 4 arresters, • 4 arresters, Power outlet with integrated

Class B Class C overvoltage protection,
Class D
* For feeding with a TN-C system,

the arrester between N and PE is omitted
TT system “3+1 wiring“1)
L1 F1
L2
L3 L
F2 F3
Wh I∆ Con-
sumer
N N
PE
PE
• 3 arresters, • 3 arresters, Power outlet with integrated

Class B Class C overvoltage protection,
•1 N/PE arrester, Class D
Class B
• 1 N/PE arrester,
Class C
For rating the protective devices F2 and F3, please refer to Tables 6/28 to 6/30.
If the lightning current and surge arrester are installed upstream of the RCCB,
an S differential must be provided.
1) In the single-phase TT system, the circuit diagram is called “1+1 wiring”
Fig. 6/33 Circuit diagrams – overview

Low Voltage
Combi-arrester – range of protection
Caution: The protection range of the combi-arrester covers

5 m! If the consumer is located more than 5 m (cable
length) away from the combi-arrester, an additional
overvoltage protection device must be provided for the
consumer.
MD
SD
Con Consumer
Con MD = Main distribution
Combi-arrester system
SD = Subdistribution
Surge arrester system
Combi-arrester – application in a combined main and subdistribution system
SD
Con
Con Power outlet with

integrated overvoltage
Surge arrester protection
SD
Con
Power outlet with

MD
SD
Con Consumer
Con
Combi-arrester MD = Main distribution
system
Surge arrester SD = Subdistribution
multi-pole system
Conventional installation using an interaction-limiting reactor
SD
Con
Con Power outlet with

SD
Con
Power outlet with

MD + SD
Con
Con
MD = Main distribution
system
Lightning Surge arrester Power outlet with
current Interaction-limiting reactor integrated overvoltage SD = Subdistribution
arrester protection system
Fig. 6/34 Circuit diagrams – combi-arresters (application notes)
6/83 6
TN-C system
Version featuring 1-pole arresters 3-pole version
L3 L1
L2 L2
L1 L3
s PEN
PE
a 3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 a 3 arresters, type 5SD7 313-1
s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 (cut at 6-pole)
TN-S system
N N
L3 L1
L2 L2
L1 L3
a a a a a s
PE s PE d
a 4 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 a Arrester, type 5SD7 313-4
s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 s Arrester, type 5SD7 311-1
d Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0
TT system
N N
L3 L1
L2 L2
L1 L3
f
a s d
a a a s d
PE f
g
PE
a 3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1 a Arrester, type 5SD7 313-1
s through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0 s Through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
d N/PE arrester, type 5SD7 318-1 d N/PE arrester, type 5SD7 318-1
f Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 (cut at 2-pole) f Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0
g Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1
Fig. 6/35 Circuit diagrams – lightning current arresters, Class I (B)

Low Voltage
TT system
“3+1 wiring” (with interaction-limiting reactors)
3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1
L2 L2˛ L3 L3’
L1 L1’ 1 arrester, type 5SD7 318-1
N PE’ 4 interaction-limiting reactors
= =’
3 arresters, type 5SD7 300-2
1 arrester, type 5SD7 308-0
1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
1 busbar, type 5ST2 147
2 combs, type 5SD7 361-1
2 combs, type 5SD7 361-0
Caution!
N’ The design of the combi-arrester ensures an energetic
N N’ co-ordination with the class II arresters without that an
interaction-limiting reactor would be required.
See solution shown in Fig. 6/39.
Note: To simplify these circuit diagrams, the fuses or magneto-
thermal switches have not been represented: for their use and
ratings please refer to co-ordination tables 6/29 and 6/30.
PE
Fig. 6/36 Circuit diagrams – lightning current arresters, Class I (B)
TN-S system
Version featuring 1-pole surge arrester Version featuring multi-pole surge arrester
N PE
• Fault alarm
L1
a a a a
L1
L2
L3
N
PE s
a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-2 TN system:

s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 Surge arrester for a TN system
Austria: (type 5SD7 325-2 or
a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-4 5SD7 326-2)
s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0
a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 326-2
Austria:
a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 326-4
Fig. 6/37 Circuit diagrams – lightning current arresters, Class II (C)
6/85 6
TT system
Version featuring 1-pole surge arrester Version featuring multi-pole surge arrester
L3 PE
L2 Fault alarm
L1
N
PE
a s d d d
L1
L2
L3
N
f
a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 308-0 TN system:

a 1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
d 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 302-2 Surge arrester for a TN system
f 1 busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 (cut at 5-pole) (type 5SD7 325-2 or
5SD7 326-2)
Austria:
a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 308-0 a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 328-2
s 1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
& 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-4 Austria:
f 1 busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 (cut at 5-pole) a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 328-4
5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 303-2, 5SD7 323-2,
5SD7 324-2, 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
F1 F1 >125 A gL/gG
Miniature circuit-breaker
F3 =125 A gL/gG
F3 F1 >125 A gL/gG
On the arrester line
F3
Note:
To simplify these circuit diagrams, the fuses or magneto-
thermal switches have not been represented: for their use
and ratings please refer to co-ordination tables 6/29 and 6/30.
Fig. 6/38 Circuit diagrams – surge arresters, Class II (C)

Low Voltage
L1’
L2’
L3’
N’
SEC PE
F4 F5 F6
F1F2F3
L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ N N’ F1 - F3
H1 H2 H3 >125 A gL/gG
N PE 5SD7 344-0
F4 - F6
5SD7 348-3
PE ≤125 A gL/gG
1 2 3 4 (s = 50 mm2 Cu)
PAS
L1 L2 L3 N
Service entrance cable
L1’
L2’
L3’
N’
SEC PE
F4 F5 F6
s s s s
F1F2F3
L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ N N’ F1 - F3
H1 H2 H3 >315 A gL/gG
5SD7 343-1
F4 - F6
5SD7 348-3
PE ≤ 315 A gL/gG
1 2 3 4 (s = 50 mm2 Cu)
PE
L1 L2 L3 N PAS
Service entrance cable
Fig. 6/39 Circuit diagrams – combi-arresters, Class I (B) and II (C)
6/87 6
6.2.7 3LD2 Main Control and

EMERGENCY STOP Switches
Brief description
Three- or four-pole switch-disconnect-
ors with manual operation (network
disconnecting devices) for switching
main and auxiliary circuits of three-
phase motors and other devices of
up to 45 kW (e.g. machine tools and
processing machines). The lockable
rotary operating mechanism guaran-
tees optimum use as maintenance or
repair switch from 16 to 125 A.
Photo 6/72 6-pole main and EMERGENCY Photo 6/73 Main and EMERGENCY STOP
Main switches (network disconnect- STOP switch switch in a molded-plastic
ing devices) or EMERGENCY STOP enclosure
switches
C In molded-plastic enclosure with
C of individual machine tools or proc-
rotary operating mechanism
essing machines, direct switching
C For base mounting with rotary
C for switching off machine or device
operating mechanism, 300 mm
groups, encapsulated in a molded-
shaft, detachable door coupling
plastic enclosure for wall mounting
and door locking in ON position
C of switchgear and control cabinets
(center- or four-hole fixing)
for maintenance or repair purposes
C For mounting in distribution boards,
mountable on 35 mm standard
Product range
mounting rail, lockable with two
Main control and EMERGENCY STOP padlocks, cap dimensions 45 mm
switches from 16 A to 125 A, lockable C As 6-pole changeover and parallel
in OFF position with three padlocks. switches
C For front mounting with rotary op-
erating mechanism (center- or four- Advantages at a glance
hole fixing)
C Plugged on – accessories installed
C For front mounting with masking
(convertible from three-pole to four- Photo 6/74 Main and EMERGENCY STOP
frame and knob, lockable with two switch with door-coupling rotary
pole switches; 2 auxiliary contact
padlocks operating mechanism
blocks can be mounted; N and PE
conductor can be mounted)
C Rapid mounting with center-hole
fixing ø 22.5 mm
C Snap-on terminal covers and safe-
to-touch terminals
C Captive terminal screws accessible
from mounting perspective

Low Voltage
6.3 Modular Devices power distribution boards and distribu-

tion boards. In Germany, the design
and is therefore also the reason for an
increase in device development.
The term modular devices, as a col- and with it the dimensions of the
The following list provides an
lective name, refers to all installation modular devices are constructed to
overview of the currently available
equipment which is used for switch- conform with DIN 43880, also defined
product groups mainly used in func-
ing, monitoring, indicating, controlling in the CENELEC Report R 023- 001.
tional, i.e. in commercial, administra-
and signaling. Together with the This standardization has led to an
tive and institutional buildings and in
instabus EIB devices, modular de- enormous simplification regarding the
industry.
vices provide maximum functionality planning, construction and installation
for low-voltage switchgear as well as of switchgear and distribution boards
Switch Application Standards Use in buil-

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
5TE8 control switch
C Changeover switch 5TE8, Switching of lighting, motors IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3 C C C
20 A and other electrical (VDE 0660 Part 107)
C Group switch with equipment IEC 60669-1, DIN EN 60669-1 C C C
center position (VDE 0632 Part 1)
5TE8, 20 A
C Control switch 5TE8, For use in logic operations in C C C
20 A control cabinets
5TE4 8 pushbutton As pushbutton in control systems, IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3 C C

With/without latching e.g. to switch on sealed-in circuits, (VDE 0660 Part 107)
function or as pushbutton with latching IEC 60669-1, DIN EN 60669-1
function for manual operation, (VDE 0632 Part 1)
as control switch or for
load switching
5TE8 ON/OFF switch For use in logic operations 16–25 A and 40 –100 A: C C C
20 A to 125 A in control cabinets IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3
(VDE 0660 Part 107)
IEC 60669-1, DIN EN 60669-1
(VDE 0632 Part 1)
32 A and 125 A:
IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3
(VDE 0660 Part 107)
5TE1 switch-disconnector Switching of plant sections IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3, C C

100 A to 200 A KEMA-certified acc. to UL 508
Table 6/31 Product overview
6/89 6
Switching devices
Switching of lighting, ohmic and in-
ductive load, switching of small loads
and contact multiplications in con-
trollers, protection of motor-driven
mechanical drive parts and pumps,
rotational speed setting of 1-phase
AC motors.

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Remote-control switch
C Without central switching Switching of lighting with DIN EN 61095 (VDE 0637) C C
C With central switching pushbuttons DIN EN 60669 (VDE 0632)
C With central and group C
switching C
Venetian blinds and remote
series switch C C
Electronic remote series switch
Remote-control switch, C
flush-mounted C C
System remote-control switch
C Without central switching C C
C With central switching C
C With central and C
group switching
Relay
C For controllers Switching of small loads, or DIN EN 60255 (VDE 0435) C C
use in control circuits, especially
C For capacitive loads to switch lights, such as fluorescent C C
lamps or high-pressure metal-vapor
lamps and metal-halide lamps,
with capacitive properties
Insta contactors Switching of motors, heaters EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, C C C

or lighting, such as fluorescent or EN 61095
glow lamps, ohmic and
inductive loads

Low Voltage

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Soft-starter
C 5TT3 441, 230 V AC Protection of machinery with gear, DIN EN 60947-4-2, C
belt or chain drives, conveyor belts, (VDE 0660 Part 117)
C 5TT3 440, 400 V AC fans, pumps, compressors, packing C
machines and door-opening drives
EMERGENCY OFF module >N< EMERGENCY OFF switch for In compliance with the EC C C
5TT5 200, 10 A in industry, trade and private Directive for Machinery
households 98/37/EC, DIN EN 954-1
Electric switching Some general requirements to operation, in particular to the switching of

lighting systems are to be taken into account for planning. The technical
information presented here is intended to provide background information
and to prevent planning errors and early system failures that would result in
time-consuming trouble shooting.
6/91 6
Timers lighting for ECG dynamic® electronic mode, automatic startup without the
controlgear, run-on operation for fans necessity to enter the time, time
Power saving in stairwell lighting, pre-
in toilets, for time sequence control monitoring for accuracy. Creates,
warned off-switching of stairwell
in control systems. modifies and documents switching
lighting in multiple dwellings, power
programs.
saving in rarely used rooms or rooms 30-minute accurate switching in day
that are frequented with a varying or week cycles, 1-minute accurate
intensity, timer-controlled stairwell switching in day, week and year
Timers Application Standards Use in buil-

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Timers for buildings
C Stairwell lighting timer, Power saving for staircase lighting; DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699 C C
7LF6 110, 7LF6 111
C Stairwell lighting timer Flashes to warn before the stairwell DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699, C C
with pre-warning lights are switched off in multiple DIN 18015
function, 7LF6 113 dwellings;
C Stairwell lighting To trigger electronic control gear in DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699, C C
timer ECG, fluorescent lamps, warns by DIN 18015
5TT1 303 dimming the stairwell light before it
is switched off on multi-apartment
floors and landings; DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699, C C
C Lighting timer with Power saving in rarely used rooms, DIN 18015
pre-warning function, or rooms that are frequented with a
7LF6 114 varying intensity, flashes to warn C C
C Power-save timer with before the lights are switched off
pre-warning function,
7LF6 115
C Fan timer, Power saving in toilets DIN EN 60699, IEC 60699 C C
7LF6 112
Industrial timers
C Multi-function timer, For time sequence control in DIN EN 60255, IEC 60255 C
5TT3 185 control systems
C Delay timer, C
5TT3 181
C Wiper timer, C
5TT3 182
C Flashing timer, C
5TT3 183
C Off-delay timer, C
5TT3 184

Low Voltage
Timers Application Standards Use in buil-

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Mechanical and digital 1-second accuracy of switching DIN EN 60730, IEC 60730 C C C
clock timers in day, week or year mode
Table6/35 Product overview
Monitoring devices power supply, disconnecting of un- dential buildings, thermal protection
used lines, monitoring of power sup- of motor windings in heating or cool-
Monitoring of the emergency light-
ply, monitoring of a network’s direc- ing equipment, remote display of
ing’s power supply in public build-
tion of rotation, monitoring of operat- room temperatures, controlling and
ings, monitoring of the power supply
ing hours and switching-on of devices limiting of temperatures, controlling
to ensure the compliance with opera-
or systems, overcurrent release for of liquid levels in containers, switch-
tional parameters for devices or sys-
the protection of motors, monitoring ing of lighting according to daytime
tem parts, monitoring of the neutral
of emergency and signal lighting and brightness.
conductor for breakage, monitoring of
motors, monitoring of luminaries and
all types of fuses, monitoring of the
transformers for halogen lighting,
power supply for short-time interrup-
switching of network loads in resi-
tions of 20 ms, monitoring of 24 V DC
Monitoring devices Application Standards Use in buil-

dings of type
residential
functional
Light indicator Optical signaling in plants and DIN VDE 0710-1 C industrial
C
5TE5 8 control circuits to indicate switching
states or faults
Bell, buzzer Bell or buzzer with 230 V AC DIN EN 61558-2-8 C

With power supply unit connection in one device, that can
4AC3 004, 4AC3 104 also be pushbutton-operated with
12 V AC safety extra voltage
6/93 6

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Fault signaling units
5TTE5 8
C Centralized fault indicator Evaluation and display of faults or IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435-303 C C
5TT3 460 alarms to monitor industrial plants
C Expansion fault indicator footpaths, for cost saving purposes C C
5TT3 461
Dusk switches On-demand switching of lighting EN 60730 C C

7LQ2 1, 5TT3 3 systems for shop windows or
sidewalks to save costs.
Temperature controller Temperature control and limiting EN 60730 C C C

7LQ2 0
Fuse monitor Monitoring of all types of fuses IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C C
5TT3 170
Power-off switch Disconnection of unused IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C

5TT3 171 supply lines
Phase-sequence/direction Monitoring of the phase sequence IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C
of rotation monitors of a network or power supply
5TT3 421 / 5TT3 423

Low Voltage

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Voltage relays
C Undervoltage relay, Power supply monitoring of IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435-303, C
5TT3 400 to 5TT3 403 the emergency lighting in DIN VDE 0108
C Undervoltage relay, public buildings C
5TT3 404 to 5TT3 406
C Short-time voltage relay, Power supply monitoring for C
5TT3 407 short-time failures of 20 ms
C Under-/overvoltage relay Power supply monitoring to IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C
5TT3 408 maintain operative
parameters for equipment or
plant sections
C Under-/overvoltage relay Monitoring of neutral DIN VDE 0633 C C
5TT3 410 conductor for breakage
C Overvoltage relay, Power supply monitoring to IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C
5TT3 19 maintain operative
parameters for equipment or
plant sections
Current relay To monitor emergency and IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435-303 C C
5TT6 1 signal lighting and motors
Priority switch Switching of network loads IEC 60669 (VDE 0632), C

5TT6 10 in residential buildings BTO § 6 Section 4
Isolation monitor for To monitor the dielectric IEC 60255, IEC 61557 C
industrial applications resistance in ungrounded
5TT3 4 networks
Cosϕ monitor To monitor low loads of IEC 60255, IEC 61557 C

5TT3 472 motors up to approx. 5 A
alternating current by cosϕ
measurements
Level relay Control of liquid levels in IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C C
5TT3 430/5TT3 435 containers
Thermistor motor Thermal protection of motor IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435 C
protection relay windings
5TT3 43
6/95 6
Power supply units

Voltage/current supply up to 63 VA
as safety extra-low voltage, DC cur-
rent/voltage supply up to 24 VA as
safety extra-low voltage, for power
supply during maintenance.
Power supply units Application Standards Use in buil-

dings of type
residential
functional
industrial
Bell transformers Alternating current/voltage supply up DIN EN 61558-2-8 C C
4AC3 0, 4AC3 1 to 40 VA, as safety extra-low voltage,
for gongs, buzzers, bells, door-
openers, intercoms, remote-control
switches and AC power supply for
safety-extra-low-voltage systems
intended for short-term operation
Transformers for Alternating current/voltage supply up DIN EN 61558-2-2 C C

continuous load to 63 VA, as safety extra-low voltage,
4AC3 4, 4AC3 5, 4AC3 6 for control circuits, relays, Insta
contactors and AC power supply
for safety-extra-low-voltage systems
intended for permanent operation
Power supply units Direct current/voltage supply up DIN EN 61558-2-6 C C C

for DC voltage to 40 VA, as safety extra-low voltage,
4AC2 4 for gongs, buzzers, bells, door-
openers, relays, Insta contactors
and DC power supply for safety-
extra-low-voltage systems intended
for permanent operation
Outlets Power supply for maintenance DIN VDE 0620, C C C

5TE6 7 purposes in distribution boards CEE 7 Standard Sheet V

Low Voltage
instabus binary inputs
N260 binary input Standards

For four independent switching or pushbutton signals, EN 50090
input voltage 230 V AC,
contacting via data bus.
N261 binary input

For four independent switching or pushbutton signals,
input voltage 24 V AC/DC,
contacting via data bus.
6/97 6
instabus clock timers
REG371 2-channel clock timer Standards

Can be used in day, week or year mode. 36 switching times can be EN 50090
permanently saved. Holiday timing to interrupt the automatic program EN 60730-2-7
for 1…99 days with pre-selection of 1…99 days.
Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover.
Switching, priority, dimming or value frames can be sent on every
channel. Bus contacting via bus terminal.
REG372 4-channel clock timer

Can be used in day, week or year mode. 324 switching times can
be permanently saved. Besides the standard week program, up to
9 more week programs can be entered in each channel and called
up with reference to a certain period (e.g. 12-24 to 01-06). Every
week program can be complemented by date switching commands
and single-date switching commands. A random switching program
can be enabled. Temporary or permanent manual operation is possi-
ble. Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover.
Bus contacting via bus terminal. Date and time can be transmitted.
REG372/02 4-channel clock timer

In addition to the functions featured by the REG372 clock timer,
REG372/02, when used in connection with a DCF77 antenna,
type AP390, can perform an automatic time synchronization and
summertime/wintertime changeover triggered by a DCF77 signal.
REG373 16-channel clock timer

Can be used in day, week or year mode. 500 switching times can
be permanently saved. Besides the standard week program, up to
9 more week programs can be entered in each channel and called
up with reference to a certain period (e.g. 12-24 to 01-06). Every
week program can be complemented by date switching commands
and single-date switching commands. A random switching program
can be enabled. Temporary or permanent manual operation is possi-
ble. Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover.
In connection with a DCF77 antenna, type AP390, an automatic
time synchronization and summertime/wintertime changeover
triggered by a DCF77 signal can be performed. Bus contacting via
bus terminal. Date and time can be transmitted.
AP390 DCF77 antenna

To receive DCF77 signals for REG372/02 and REG373 clock timers.

Low Voltage
instabus actuators
N512 load switch Standards

By means of eight floating contacts (bi-stable relays, contact rating EN 50090
for 230 V AC, 16 A at cosϕ = 1), the load switch controls eight inde-
pendent groups of electric consumers. No supply voltage neces-
sary. Manual operation and switch position indicator. Bus connec-
tion via data bus and/or bus terminal. Terminal may be used as
connector.
N522/02 Venetian blinds switch

The N22/02 Venetian blinds switch can independently drive four
230 V AC sun shield or window drives and their integrated end posi-
tion switches. This easy-to install Venetian blinds switch has 4 termi-
nals per output to connect all of the 4 conductors (Up, Down, N, PE)
of a drive line.
Functions for manual and automatic operation can be configured
separately. Slat angles or blinds position can be controlled at any
angle/position between 0 and 100%.
In connection with a higher-level time, brightness or sun-follow-on
controller, the Venetian blinds switch can be used for shading with
an optimum daylight incidence. Contacting is made via bus terminal.
N523/02 Venetian blinds switch

The N523/02 Venetian blinds switch can independently control four
sun shields (Venetian blinds, roller shutters, sunshade blinds). The
sun shield drives must have end position switches.
A pushbutton with LED enables changeover between manual and
automatic mode. In manual mode, the sun shield can be reposi-
tioned by the actuator, using two pushbuttons per channel if a
230 V AC supply and bus voltage are available.
Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. Terminal may
be used as connector.
Tabele 6/42 Product overview
6/99 6
N527 universal dimmer Standards

Dimming of glow lamps and LV halogen lamps (with electronic or EN 50090
conventional transformers) from 20 W to 500 W. Automatically oper-
ates according to general phase control principle. Short-circuiting
protection by means of electronic fuse.
N526E switching/dimming actuator

The switching/dimming actuator switches or dims eight independ-
ent groups (channels) of fluorescent lamps with dimmable elec-
tronic control gear. Each channel is assigned to a 1…10 V control
output and a contact output with a switching power of 230 V AC,
16 A at cosϕ = 1.
The switching contact output has a mechanical switching position
indicator which can also be used for direct manual operation of the
contact outputs.
N670 universal I/O module

The module is equipped with two universal inputs/outputs, either
of them to be used as binary or anolog input or output, so that four
completely different functionalities are available for each universal
input/output: binary input or output, analog input or output.
For temperature measurements, two inputs are provided for
Pt 1000 sensors in two-wire connection. In addition, two power re-
lays are provided with corresponding switching and forced-guidance
objects.
The device requires an external 24 V AC/DC supply.

Low Voltage
instabus function modules
N341 event module Standards

It can process up to 200 event programs with a maximum of 200 EN 50090
event tasks for up to 255 communication objects. The event module
handles up to 125 calendar entries / day programs together with a
maximum of 400 time-scheduling tasks. For the timing function,
the event module requires a date/time source.
Contacting is made via the data bus.
N343 operating hours and switching operations counter

It records operating hours and switching operations for a maximum
of 36 sensor/actuator channels with 1-bit switching objects. Limit
values can be defined for all counter values, so that an alarm can be
output to the instabus EIB if a limit is exceeded or undershot.
The maximum runtime of the operating hours counter is 136 years,
a maximum of 4.3 billion switching operations can be recorded.
N350 event, time-scheduling and logic module

In a compact module unit
10 event programs,
100 timing programs (week clock timer) and
10 logic gates (AND; OR; NAND; NOR) with up to six inputs
are offered.
The module can process up to 10 event programs with a maximum
of 10 event tasks each.
The week clock timer provides 100 timing tasks for 20 timer chan-
nels. For the timing function, the event module requires a date/time
source. Contacting is made via the data bus.
6/101 6
6.4 Maximum-Demand Technical data

Up to 120 channels are available for
Monitors control. Channels 1 to 8 directly dis-
play the current state via LEDs at the
Product and functional description device. For all of the 120 channels
available, the following parameters
Description
can be set during start-up via the EIB
The maximum-demand monitor is a
Tool Software (ETS):
modular device with a width of 4 MW
C Switching-off priority (1 to 10)
and is able to suppress peak loads
C Minimum switching-on time
and thus noticeably lower the users’
C Minimum switching-off time
costs for power and energy supply.
C Maximum switching-off time
Based on a defined maximum average
C Number of permissible switching
power supply value, loads/consumers
cycles per 24 h.
are switched off or switched back on.
Here, as a rule, the operational The power range limit to be observed
Photo 6/75 Maximum-demand monitor
switching carried out by the operator by the maximum-demand monitor
is handled with priority and therefore can be parametrized between 30 and
the maximum-demand monitor can 1,000 kW. Additionally, a warning limit The maximum-demand monitor is
only switch loads that are operationally between 25 and 1,000 kW can be parametrized via the ETS and can be
switched on. Each load can be disabled set. Exceeding of this warning limit is run without any additional software.
and released by the assigned bus indicated via an LED. This is possible To visualize performance statistics, a
sensor, i.e. this load is not subject to for 2 rates (high rate and low rate). software is available that can be used
switching by the maximum-demand to draw up demand integration peri-
The demand integration period re-
monitor in disabled state. ods, day/month and year statistics,
quired for the determination of the
which can then be exported to Excel
Power is supplied via the bus line and average power value can be set to
for further evaluation. This offers the
via a 230 V supply. 15, 30 and 60 minutes. In coordina-
possibility to create a consumption
tion with this, the cycle time for the
Connection to the bus can be made statistic. This enables the customer
load projection intervals can be para-
via an EIB bus terminal or optionally to negotiate better and more eco-
meterised with 15, 30, 60, 120 and
via a data rail. nomical supply contracts with the
240 seconds. LEDs indicate the de-
respective power supply companies.
vice’s position within the demand
integration period in terms of time.

Low Voltage
Synchronous pulse
Changeover by the power supply company
high/low
rate Visualization
software
S0 interface
PC
Maximum
demand instabus EIB
monitor
Meter
Actuator
technology
Electrical heater
Sensor Lighting
technology Fan
Electrical heater Loads available for
load management
Lighting
Fan
ON/OFF, disabling or releasing
via pushbutton, binary inputs,
sensors os sontrol modules
Fig. 6/40 Application example
The software is available as part of C Consumption pulses:

the EIB visualization and as stand- The valency of the pulses to be
alone version. read in can be determined depend-
ing on the respective meter to be
The maximum-demand monitor can
connected. Thus, all conventional
also be operated exclusively as regis-
meters with S0 interface can be
tration unit during a recording period.
used.
This offers the possibility to save load
C Power supply company synchro-
curves and consumption values with-
nous pulse
out the parameterization of the indi-
C Changeover high/low rate:
vidual channels.
The high/low rate changeover can
The maximum-demand monitor has also be carried out via bus.
the following inputs to which floating
contacts or an S0 interface can op-
tionally be connected according to
DIN 43 864 and 62 053-31:
6/103 6
6.5 Switches, Outlets

and Electronic
Products 60 mm
Application 71 mm
The application of electrical installa-

tion equipment in residential, public,
commercial and industrial buildings
offers ever more diverse solutions for 71 mm
operating, switching, controlling and Box Insert Frame Rocker
signaling operations as well as for in-
formation and monitoring in electrical
building installation.
Influences on device construction

Fig 6/41 CEE/VDE techniques for devices in southern Europe, type A
The construction of operation ele-
ments as well as the actual device
construction with the required addi- Standards
tional functions is subject to the dif-
fering national techniques and cus- The technical requirements are laid
toms. The following criteria have an down in standards EN 60669-1 / IEC
influence on device construction: 60669-1 / DIN VDE 0632-1 for
C Voltage level switches and in IEC 60884-1 / DIN
C Plug configuration VDE 0620-1 for power outlets, and
C Mounting box dimensions EN 669-2-1 / IEC 60669-2-1 / VDE
C Modular size for side-by-side 0632-2-1 for electronic products. In Box Device
arrangements accordance with these standards,
C Conductor connection uniform performance features have
Fig. 6/42 Country-specific monoblock
C Supplementary functions been specified which, however, also technology for type B devices
C Design allow for country-specific values for with a switching function
the rated current as well as types of
construction and versions.
Modular technology
Various installation techniques In the south of Europe, a “modular
technology” (Fig. 6/43) is applied.
Due to the various country-specific
With this technology, individual de-
plug configurations, different national
vice inserts are arranged side-by-side
techniques developed worldwide.
within a supporting frame with a
CEE/VDE technology masking frame or a cover. The modu-
In Europe, the most commonly used lar technology comprises manufac-
technique is the circular box system turer-specific device inserts and coun-
(Fig. 6/41), made up of a 60 mm di- try-specific mounting boxes with
ameter mounting box and a modular varying dimensions.
size of 71 mm for side-by-side
arrangements.

Low Voltage
Monoblock technology
“Monoblock technology” is mainly 83.5
applied in South-East Europe. With mm
this technology, complete devices
which can also comprise several
switching or plugging functions, can
be inserted into mounting boxes. The
device dimensions are not standard-
ized and only designed to comply Box
with the dimensions of the respec-
tive country-specific mounting boxes
Device insert
(Fig. 6/40).
Type B
Type A
Higher and ever changing demands
result in a permanent modification of Type A Cover
the touch elements’ surface design.
The international standardized type A
takes this into consideration and thus Supporting Type A
ensures that the covers which ac- frame
count for the devices’ stylish design
can be replaced without detaching Masking frame
the connected conductors.
Fig. 6/43 Modular technology for devices used in Southern Europe, South America and Asia,
CEE/VDE technology design types A and B
Uniform device inserts
The Siemens DELTA product range
(Photo 6/77) meets these require- connections in correct order further available which must simply be
ments as it uses uniform device in- ease conductor connection. plugged onto the conventional device
serts (Photo 6/79). The device inserts The device inserts are equipped with claws.
are very easy to mount as they have an overall shock-hazard protection, i.e.
When mounted, the device inserts
very small base dimensions, provid- live parts have finger-proof covers.
can be tested for voltage from the
ing more space for the conductors in
Furthermore, they come with return- front.
the 60 mm diameter mounting box. A
ing claws and are fixed to the mount-
screwless terminal connection tech-
ing box with captive +/– screws. For
nique as well as a circuit diagram on
insertion into deeper wall-recessed
the back of the base illustrating the
mounting boxes, extension claws are
6/105 6
DELTA line DELTA line DELTA vita DELTA vita

titan white aluminum metallic gold carbon metallic
DELTA miro DELTA miro DELTA style DELTA style

titan white aluminum titan white titan white/ silver
DELTA profil DELTA profil DELTA natur DELTA ambiente

tobacco bronze cherry tree arctic white/ steel
Surface-mounted range IP20 Surface-mounted range IP44 Surface-mounted range IP55 Surface-mounted range IP68
Photo 6/76 DELTA product range in CEE/VDE technology, design type A
Photo 6/77 DELTA product range in CEE/VDE technology, device insert and SCHUKO outlet (without stylish part)

Low Voltage
a) Plug-on technique b)
Frame and Switching reliability: Practical Frame: Horizontal and vertical mounting for
rocker with practical solution for leveling ring: flush-type boxes and trunking installations
bearing block badly fitting inserts 3 mm Thermoplast molded plastic: resistant to
impact and breakage
1 mm 3 mm
Fig. 6/44 Leveling and switching reliability for DELTA device inserts in CEE/VDE design as well as rapid frame mounting with plug-on technology
Leveling ring Frame Environmentally compatible

The design of the touch elements The frame is mounted together with materials
and the switching device inserts al- the rocker by plugging them onto the The contact material of the DELTA
lows leveling which is needed in device insert horizontally and verti- device inserts is free of cadmium and
practice. Thus, even with badly fitting cally (Fig. 6/44). nickel and the electroplatings are free
device inserts, switching reliability of chrome-6 deadening agents. All
Orientation light
can be attained (Fig. 6/44). plastics are free of halogens and pig-
The DELTA device inserts have been
ments containing heavy metals.
Rocker, bearing block designed in such a way that an orien-
Rocker and bearing block have been tation or pilot lamp can be retrofitted
constructed to form one single part, without having to remove the inserts.
preventing the rocker from being ac- An inspection window integrated in
cidentally removed separately. the rocker leads to an optimum
brightness, this fulfills the German
Ordinance on Workplaces criteria for
commercial and public buildings.
6/107 6
Photo 6/77 DELTA Venetian blinds control, Photo 6/78 DELTA Universal switch for two- Photo 6/79 DELTA rotary dimmer switch
conventional type way switch
Device insert versions

The various device insert versions of
the Siemens DELTA product range
can be distinguished as follows:
Operator units:
C Pushbuttons for various
applications
C Double pushbuttons for various
applications
C Venetian blinds pushbuttons
Switching devices: Photo 6/80 DELTA reflex smoke detector Photo 6/81 DELTA connection box, category 45
C ON/OFF switches, 1-, 2- and 3-pole
C Two-way switches
C Pushbutton-type dimmers for Communication devices and
C Double two-way switches
various applications sockets for data/voice networks:
C Intermediate switches
C Regulating switches for various C Aerial sockets for various
C Two-circuit switches
applications applications
C Control switches for various
C Volume control buttons C Telephone sockets for various
applications
C Speed-regulating rheostats applications
C Venetian blinds switches
C Room temperature controllers for C Loudspeaker sockets
C Venetian blinds key-operated
various applications C Telecommunications connection
switches
C Motion detectors units
C Timers
C Universal connection box and
C Delay timers Signaling devices:
specific device inserts for data
C Light signals
Control devices: and voice networks (Photo 6/81)
C Information displays
C Rotary dimmers for various
C Smoke detectors
applications
C Sensor dimmers for various
applications

Low Voltage
Plug-in equipment for power

supply:
C ‚®-outlets for various
applications
C ‚-outlets with operation
indicator
C ‚-outlets with overvoltage
protection
C Child-proof ‚-outlets
(shutter)
C ‚-outlets with integrated
fault current protection, childproof
Photo 6/82 ‚-outlet Photo 6/83 ‚-outlets with center
(shutter)
ground contact, child-proof
C Outlets with center ground
contact, 2-pole, according to CEE 7
C Outlets with center ground
contact, 2-pole, according to CEE 7
and child-proof
C Outlets, 2-pole, according to
US standard C73
The various DELTA product ranges

The DELTA product ranges meet the
quality of design required from an
architectural point of view and come
in different materials, shapes,
dimensions, surfaces and colors.
Photo 6/84 DELTA bus coupling unit Photo 6/85 DELTA Venetian blinds control,
The operating rockers of the DELTA radio controlled
product ranges can also be plugged
onto the instabus KNX/EIB DELTA Universal application
bus coupling units (Photo 6/87).
The module technology implemented
Depending on the type of insert and
in the DELTA flush-mounting device
application, various functions can be
insert system allows for a universal
controlled via the instabus KNX/EIB
application of these devices. The
in its Twisted-Pair, Powerline or radio-
functionality of the DELTA SCHUKO
control version.
outlets can, for example, be
extended with modular accessories
for various applications (Photos
6/83, 6/85). The standard mounting
depth of 32 mm is still observed.
6/109 6
6.6 SIMOCODE pro –

Motor Management
System for Constant-
Speed Motors in the
Low-Voltage Range
Description
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular
motor management system for con-
stant-speed motors in the low-volt-
age range. It optimizes the interfacing
between the instrumentation and
control system and the motor feeder,
while increasing plant availability and
rendering substantial savings during
the construction, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of a plant
at the same time.
When integrated in the low-voltage
switchgear, SIMCODE pro is an
intelligent interface between the Photo 6/86 The SIMOCODE pro motor management system
higher-level automation system and
the motor feeder, combining:
Fields of application Another field of application is the
C Full, multi-functional, electronic
protection and control of motors
motor protection, independent of SIMOCODE pro is often used in auto-
C in hazardous, potentially explosive
the automation system mated processes where a plant
locations (chemical, oil and gas
C Flexible software instead of hard- standstill would be extremely costly
industry)
ware for motor control and where it is important to prevent
C featuring heavy duty start-up
C Detailed operating, service and plant standstills by an analysis of de-
(paper, cement, metal industry)
diagnostic data tailed operating, service and diagnos-
C in high-availability plants (chemical,
C Power management capability tic data. SIMOCODE pro is modular
oil refinery, materials processing
C Open communication via and space saving in its design, which
industry, power plants)
PROFIBUS-DP, the standard among makes it especially suitable for appli-
the field bus systems cation in Motor Control Centers
(MCC), as used in the process indus-
try and power engineering.

Low Voltage
SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V
Basic component 1 Basic component 2

Current measuring module Current measuring module
or current/voltage measuring
Operating module
module1*)
(optional)
Operating module
(optional)
Various expansion modules
(optional)
Tabele 6/45 SIMOCODE hardware components
Design
SIMOCODE pro is a modularly de-
signed motor management system
which can be divided into two func-
tionally graded component series.
Both series (systems) consist of
different hardware components
(modules):
C SIMOCODE pro C
C SIMOCODE pro V
Photo 6/89 SIMOCODE pro C
Photo 6/90 SIMOCODE pro V (fully extended)
6/111 6
Every system consists of one basic

component per feeder and a separate
current detection module. Both mod-
ules are linked through a connecting
cable via the system interface, they
can either be mechanically coupled
as a unit (in series) or mounted sepa-
rately (side by side). The motor cur-
rent to be monitored determines the
selection of the current detection
module.
Optionally, an operating module can
be connected to the basic compo-
nent via a second system interface.
The operating module can either be Bild 6/91 Current detection module Bild 6/92 Operating module
installed in the control cabinet door or
in a front plate. Both the current
measuring module and the operating
module are power supplied by the
basic component. In addition to the
inputs/outputs integrated in the basic
component, basic component 2
(SIMOCODE pro V) can be comple-
mented by further expansion mod-
ules providing more inputs/outputs
and functions. To detect and monitor
voltage, power output and the power
factor and any other related monitor-
ing function, basic component 2 must
be equipped with a combined cur-
rent/voltage detection module 1*)
instead of a mere current detection
module.
All modules are linked by connecting
cables, which are available in different
lengths. The maximum distance
between the modules (e.g. between
the basic component and the current
detection module) may be up to 2 m.
Photo 6/93 Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V

Low Voltage
Functions
Full electronic motor protection for Software based motor control (instead of
motor current ratings of 0.3 to 820 A comprehensive hardware interlocks)
Protective functions: Control functions:
C Current-dependent electronic overload protection C Direct-on-line and reverse starter
(Class 5 – 40) C Star-delta starter also with reversal of rotational
C Phase failure/imbalance protection direction
C Stall protection C Two speeds; motors with separate windings (pole
C Thermistor motor protection reversing) also with reversal of rotational direction
C Ground fault monitoring C Two speeds; motors with separated Dahlander
C Monitoring of settable limit values for motor current windings also with reversal of rotational direction
C Monitoring of operating hours, standstill times and C Solenoid valve actuation
number of starts C Valve control
C Control of a circuit-breaker
Extended monitoring functions*):
C Control of a soft starter also with reversal of
C Temperature monitoring via up to 3 analog sensor rotational direction
circuits
In addition, these control functions can be customized
C Voltage monitoring
with parameterizable logic modules (truth tables,
C Power monitoring
counter, timer, edge evaluation…), and by using standard
C Cos-ϕ-monitoring (no-load monitoring and load-
functions (supply line failure, emergency start, external
discharge monitoring of motor)
faults…), they can be flexibly adapted to any customer-
C Input, output and monitoring of analog signals
specific motor feeder version.
(e.g. level/flow monitoring)
etc.
Recording of measuring curves *)
Operating, service and diagnostic data Communication via PROFIBUS-DP

Operating data SIMOCODE pro supports:
C Motor switching state, deducted from the current flow C Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s
in the main circuit C Automatic baud rate detection
C All phase currents C Time stamping in device/clock synchronization *)
C All line voltages *) via PROFIBUS-DP
C Active power, apparent power, and power factor *) C Cyclical services (DPV0) and acyclical services (DPV1)
C Phase imbalance etc.
C Phase sequence *)
C Time till triggering
C Remaining cooling time
C Temperature (e.g. motor temperature) *)
etc.
Service data Power management
C Motor operating hours SIMOCODE pro also monitors current, voltage,
C Motor standstill times power output and power factor independent of the
C Number of motor starts automation system, makes all necessary data available
C Number of overload tripping events and enables an optimal integration of the motor feeder
C Internal comments saved in the device into the higher-level power management systems via
etc. PROFIBUS-DP.
Diagnostic data
C Numerous detailed early warning alarms and fault
messages
C Device-internal fault logging with time stamp
etc.
*) available as of mid 2005
Table 6/46 function overview
6/113 6
Autonomous operation C SIMOCODE ES for “totally inte- C Communication via PROFIBUS-DP:

grated” commissioning and service – Control of the motor feeder
An important feature of SIMOCODE
C Object manager OM SIMOCODE – Transmission of binary and analog
pro is the autonomous execution of
pro for “total integration” in signals
all protective and control tasks even
SIMATIC S7 – Transmission of operating, service
when the communication to the con-
C PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro for and diagnostic data
trol system has been interrupted. This
“total integration” in PCS 7 *)
means, even in the event of a bus Recording of measuring curves
system failure or automation system
Features C Current detection/monitoring in the
failure, the full functional perform-
range of 0.3 – 820 A
ance capability of the motor feeder is C Modular design:
maintained, or a defined response to – Expansion modules for retrofitting C Voltage detection/monitoring up to
such a failure can be configured, for of inputs/outputs and functions as 690 V *)
example, a targeted disconnection of desired C Safe isolation
the feeder, or the execution of certain – Maximum module spacing up to 2 m C Power management *)
parameterized control mechanisms C Supply voltages:
C Compact, space saving design
(such as the reversal of the rotational C 24 V DC or
types:
direction). C 110 – 240 V AC/DC
– Basic components, 45 mm wide
(wide voltage range)
Integration – Expansion modules, 22.5 mm wide
C Easy installation and
– DIN mounting rail installation or
Besides the device function and the commissioning:
directly on mounting plate
hardware design, a high degree of – Removable terminals
user friendliness of the parameteriza- C Removable current measuring – Memory module for parameteriza-
tion software is also important for modules (current transformers): tion without PC/PD
communication-capable switching – Motor rated currents of 0.3 A – 820 A – Address plug to assign a
devices together with a good system – Busbar connection, or straight- PROFIBUS address without PC/PD
integration, i.e. an optimum and fast through current transformer C Typical certifications and approvals
integratability to the most diverse – 45 mm – 145 mm width
system configurations and process – Installation on DIN mounting rail,
automation systems. For this reason, directly on mounting plate, or at
SIMOCODE pro offers matching soft- contactor
ware tools for integrated, fast para-
meterization, configuration and
diagnosis:
*) Available as of mid 2005.

Low Voltage
6/115 6
Communications in Power Distribution
chapter 7
7 Communications in Power Distribution

From electrical power distribution the basis for comprehensive power energy demand is forecasted. All
to power management within the management (see Chapter 9). information and actions focus on
corporation smooth-free operation, fast fault
Power management in clearance, and the expedient
Power management as part of Totally
electrical power distribution execution of maintenance work.
Integrated Power implements the
connection of various energies A visualisation for event-oriented op- Bus systems are used for the data
(electricity, gas, water, heating, cool- erating and monitoring is used at the transmission and communication in
ing, etc.) to various software pack- level of low and medium voltage the electrical energy distribution.
ages. Applications such as status electrical power distribution. All This communication is not only used
visualization, consumption recording information about faults and events to record switch position, messages
with the corresponding load curve aids in troubleshooting. Complete and measurements, but also to per-
presentations and assignment to cost and detailed maintenance information form switching operations. The com-
centers, load management, prog- is important for the execution of munication with modern circuit-
noses, as well as reporting and con- maintenance works. The electrical breakers allows a direct online para-
trol functions, recording and manag- power supply is monitored only with meterisation of the setting values.
ing of maintenance information can regard to observance of limits and Furthermore, all recorded measured
be implemented. A consistent oper- the switching of equipment (on- values can be read out.
ating and monitoring concept forms and off-switching). The electrical
Visualization Load curve Events Archive

Operating Energy flow
and monitoring History
U
Motor 1 Service Bearing replacement Operating and
I Motor 2 Service Completion of monitoring level
cos
ϕ operating hours
p Tank cv Technical Tank test
W
Inspectorate
Bus systems
Substation control and
protection systems
(Chapter 8)
Processing level
Bus systems
Acquisition and
control level
Contactors Meters Analogue SIMEAS Energy SENTRON SIMOCODE SIPROTEC

Switches Pulses signals multifunction meter circuit- medium-voltage
measuring breaker protection
device
Fig. 7/1 System structure for the communication in the energy distribution

Power Management Power Management Power Management

in within within the corporation
Functions energy distribution the site
Visualization Event-oriented operating Event-oriented operating Demand-oriented

and monitoring and monitoring reports
Faults Correction Correction Analysis
Maintenance Execution Execution Planning/evaluation
Energy import Monitoring Monitoring Dispatch/monitoring
Energy Demand forecasts Demand forecasts Load forecasts (base,

procurement average, peak load)
Electrical Site 1
energy
Extending energy Gas Taking account of Bundling all
distribution by bus-capable all energy types of corporation-wide
Compressed air
data acquisition and control the on-site energy Site 2 energy services
Water provider
Steam
etc. Site n
Fig. 7/2 From energy distribution to power management within the corporation
In the new installation business, Power management within the to the individual sites and updated
system integrators, such as switch- corporation cyclically. The corporation goal is the
gear cabinet and assembly manufac- In the highest level of functionality, optimum utilization of existing energy
turers, must provide the hardware the power management view is ex- supply contracts. The energy pro-
and software requirements, whereas tended to satisfy the corporation re- curement combines the forecasts of
in the retrofit market (for retrofitting quirements. Executive department, the individual sites to produce total
existing installations), this demand corporate department, head office quantities. The base, average and
is placed on electrical fitting and can also be used as synonym for cor- peak load are each satisfied with the
maintenance departments. poration. The power management in appropriate purchases at the energy
the corporation covers all sites. In the exchanges. These purchases then
Power management within the site
individual sites, the recorded data is form the stipulations for dispatch.
In addition to electricity, the require-
documented in reports according to Although the individual functionality
ments of power management within
the requirements; any faults that oc- levels must build on each other,
the site take account of all of the
cur are analyzed and plannable main- there is the option to focus all of the
other energies that an in-house sup-
tenance work scheduled. The results three levels of power management
plier provides for smooth operation
and stipulations are transferred to the merely on a single type of energy.
within the site. The software satisfies
individual sites; such data can be The following discussion refers to
all requirements of site management,
used for optimum fault clearance or electrical energy.
such as internal energy providers, el-
preventive maintenance.
ectrical departments or maintenance
Within the dispatch (see Chapter 9),
departments.
the quantities of corporation-wide
energy supply contracts are allocated
7/3 7
Transducers
The communication transfers the
transducer’s measured values. After
being scaled, the measured value can
Conven-
tional be used for the actual-value display.
Limit-value monitoring for editable
– Switching
– Indication values provide additional information
– Signaling about the plant state as superposed
functions.
Bus systems
Load curves
Measurements are transparently
– Operating visualized by means of graphic dis-
– Monitoring
play of the measured values or load
– Fault messages
– Parameterizing curves. The load curve shows the
– Analyzing measured value over time. The ca-
In future – Documenting pacity measurement display provides
for a rapid and transparent analysis
of demand/consumption fluctuations.
Fig. 7/3 Modern power distribution with connection to bus systems
Operating cycles list
Most information in the event log
Modern power distribution with operating and monitoring, three refers to position changes of the
connection to bus systems basic types/classes result: switches and disconnectors. The op-
C Switches, circuit-breakers erating cycles list shows these
In a conventional power distribution status changes over time. This imme-
C Disconnectors
system, analog measuring instru- diately demonstrates the cause and
C Transducers
ments for voltage, current, capacity, time interdependencies of switching
frequencies etc. are often equipped Switches operations. The operating cycles list
with the appropriate transducers. Using the communications, the precisely indicates the cause that
However, only limited use is made of switch state – ON/OFF, tripped, triggered a switch operation, the
this information. – is queried and displayed in the control room or a local event.
operator control and monitoring
In future, the automatic acquisition
system. This allows the status of the
via devices that can be connected to
energy distribution to be uniformly
the bus will permit a central display
visualized.
and evaluation. The same bus will
also be used to switch the power The operating and monitoring communi-
distribution. cations level permits off-switching using
the voltage or undervoltage coil. If the
Newly designed power distribution
switch has a motor drive, in addition to
systems are equipped with bus
off-switching, on-switching and reset
systems by default.
can be performed on initiation from the
operating and monitoring level.
Operating and monitoring in an
electrical power distribution Disconnectors
system The actual disconnector setting
(ON or OFF) and, using the fuse
When power distribution is
monitoring, the triggering of a
considered from the viewpoint of
fuse can be displayed.

Power distribution Monitoring status Operating cycles list

- ON/OFF remote ON
- tripped OFF
Operating switching local ON

OFF OFF
- OFF
ON tripped
- ON/OFF/ Reset t
Monitoring measured value Load curves

Q1.0 G
- Actual-value display P [kW]
T7.3 - Limit value display 110 A
Monitoring status Operating cycles list

Q12.4 - ON/OFF
- Fuse tripped local ON
OFF
tripped
t
Event log
Date ident. Time ident. Site ident. Plant ident. Device ident. Function ident. Event text
2000.01.14 22:59:03 Hall B Infeed Q1.0 local OFF Infeed switch switched off locally
2000.01.14 23:16:24 Hall B Infeed Q1.0 local ON Infeed switch switched on locally
2000.01.20 01:12:45 Hall B Outgoing circuit T7.3 UG2 Current > 20 A
2000.01.20 01:17:13 Hall B Outgoing circuit T7.3 UG1 Current > 50 A
2000.01.15 20:59:33 Hall F Outgoing circuit Q12.1 local OFF Switch disconnector switched off locally
Fig. 7/4 Operating and monitoring in an electrical power distribution system
Event log Manual switching records are re- using SMS services and, in future,
placed by this electronic variant. The to mobile telephones using WAP.
The event log documents all status entries are logged automatically, This initiates a faster fault clearance
changes of the distribution and limit- every switching operation of a circuit- and the personnel receives a detailed
value violations. Each event consists breaker, either initiated from the con- cause description. The maintenance
of date/time, site identification, plant trol room or by manual operation on personnel can then also be contacted
identification, device identification, site or by tripping is recorded. directly when it does not have any
function identification, and a detailed access to the control room terminal.
Information flow
event text. Each event can be subject The actual status of measurements
Control-room monitoring shows on-
to various forms of acknowledge- is displayed directly as a measured
line the status of the electrical power
ment. An archiving is performed in value in the control room.
distribution; remote switching can be
parallel to the message display.
performed from here. The event log
The event log permits the long-term
is archived in a database and can be
tracking of the distribution status.
analysed using additional programs/
This provides a transparent display
third-party systems. The weak-point
of all switching operations and
analysis must be mentioned here as
limit-value violations.
being of particular interest. Selected
messages can be transferred directly
7/5 7
Notification Archiving Third-party systems

– SMS / mobile telephone – SQL database – Cost centres
– WAP – Maintenance
– Weakpoint analysis
– Forecast
Control room Operating Monitoring Event log Graphical display

– Switching – Status – Test plus – Operating cycles list
– Measured value date / time – Load curve
Power
distribution
U<
Fig. 7/5 Information flow
Limit-value violations are stored with The limit-value violations and load
date/time in the event log. The graph- curves are stored in archives and can
ical display shows the measured be used for cost center assignments
value information as a load curve. of the energy flows, utilization profiles,
The limit-value monitoring and load assessment of reserves, etc. The
curve display makes the measured acquisition of all data of the electrical
value transparent. Thus, information power distribution represents the
can be obtained about the time-re- first step towards power manage-
lated utilization. The information ment. The display and archiving of
recorded in this manner is very the power distribution information
important for plant extensions and is derived from this acquisition.
energy optimization.

Benefits
Transition from local operation to central operating and monitoring
Central control room
C Quick overview of the current status of the plant
C Immediate response to limit-value violations
C Documentation/archiving of the distribution status
C Weakpoint analysis using the event log
Q Preventive supervision of the energy distributions and thus avoidance of plant standstills
Q Generation of SMS messages (mobile telephone). This permits a faster response to faults/events. Personnel can
undertake additional work (personnel costs 30,000 – 60,000 € per man-year)
Load curves
C Documentation of the utilisation, e.g. of the infeeds (according to the design, the interpretation is the total of the
outgoing circuits)
Q Plant extensions can be made specifically within the existing possibilities; saving of additional infeeds
(cost >> 5,000 € per infeed panel)
Q Energy consumption becomes transparent. Purchasing contracts can be signed to meet actual demand.
Power Management
Liberalized energy market
C Utilizing offer advantages
Q Reduction of the energy costs by up to 20% possible
Summary
Transition from local operation to central operating and monitoring
C Central control room Display of the actual distribution state
C Graphical display Graphical display of measurements and operating cycles
C Events Documentation and archiving, forwarding as SMS services (mobile telephone)
Preparations for power management have been made

C Maximum-demand monitoring Making optimum use of energy purchasing contract
C Load curves Documenting energy consumption
C Assignment to cost centers Assigning energy consumption to the consumer
C Forecasts Determining future energy requirement
C Power quality Monitoring and documenting energy quality criteria
7/7 7
8 Protection and Substation Control

8.1 Power System Protection
8.2 Relay Design and Operation
8.3 Relay Selection Guide
8.4 Typical Protection Schemes
Protection and Substation Control
chapter 8
8 Protection and
Substation Control
General overview
Three trends have emerged in the
Corporate
sphere of power automation: distrib- Network TCP/IP
uted intelligent electronic devices Power system
control center
(IED’s), open communication and HMI
Station unit IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-104
PC-assisted HMI’s. Numerical relays “Full server“
and computerized substation control
are now state-of-the-art.
Station bus Ethernet TCP/IP
The multitude of conventional, indi-
vidual devices prevalent in the past Serial Hub
as well as comprehensive parallel
wiring are being replaced by a small IEC 61850
number of multifunctional devices
with serial connections.
One design for all applications

In this respect, Siemens offers a
uniform, universal technology for the Fig. 8/1 The digital SICAM substation control system implements all of the control,
entire functional scope of power au- measurement and automation functions of a substation. Protective relays
are connected serially.
tomation equipment, both in the con-
struction and connection of the de-
vices and in their operation and com-
munication. This results in uniformity
of design, coordinated interfaces and
the same operating concept being
established throughout, whether in
power system and generator protec-
tion, in measurement and recording
systems, in substation control and
protection or in telecontrol.
All devices are highly compact and
immune to interference, and are
therefore also suitable for direct in-
stallation in switchgear cells. Further-
more, all devices and systems are
self-monitoring, which means that
previously costly maintenance can
be reduced considerably.
Photo 8/1 Protection and control in medium-voltage substations

Numerical measurement techniques

by means of SCADA-like control and ensure precise operation and require
Rationalization of operation high-performance PC terminals that less maintenance thanks to their
can all be operated in the same way
continuous self-monitoring capability.
Savings in terms of space by means of integration of many functions
and costs into one unit and compact equipment design The integration of additional protec-
tive and other functions, such as
Simplified planning by means of uniform design,
and operational coordinated interfaces and universally real-time operational measurements,
reliability identical operating software event and fault recording, all in one
unit economizes on space, configura-
Efficient parameterization thanks to PC terminals with uniform operator
interfaces tion and wiring costs.
and operation
High levels of reliability by means of type-tested system technology, complete Setting and programming of the de-
and availability self-monitoring and the use of proven technology vices can be performed through the
– 20 years of practical experience with digital protection, integral, plain-text, menu-guided op-
more than 350,00 devices in operation (in 2004)
– 15 years of practical experience with substation erator display or by using the com-
automation (SINAUT LSA and SICAM), over fortable DIGSI 4® PC software.
3,000 substations in operation (in 2004)
For communication at the telecontrol
or substation control level, devices of
the SIPROTEC 4 group can be equipped
Fig. 8/2 For the user, the “entire technology from one partner” has many advantages
with exchangeable communications
modules. Besides an optimal integra-
Entire technology from one This uniform technology ”from a single tion into the SICAM PAS substation
partner source“ saves the customer time and control system in compliance with
money in the planning, installation IEC 61850, the following protocols
The Siemens Power Transmission are supported: PROFIBUS FMS, IEC
and operation of his substations.
and Distribution Group supplies 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, DNP
devices and systems for: V3.00 and Modbus.
SIPROTEC protective relays
C Power plant protection Thus, the on-line measurements and
Siemens offers a complete spectrum
C Substation control / power fault data recorded in the protective
of multifunctional, numerical relays
system control relays can be used for local and re-
for all applications in the field of
C Remote control (RTU’s) mote control or can be transmitted
power system and machine
C Current measurement and via telephone modem connections to
protection.
recording the workplace of the circuit engineer.
C Measurement and monitoring Uniform design and a metal-enclosed
of power quality construction with conventional con- Siemens supplies individual devices
nection terminals which is free from as well as complete protection sys-
This covers all of the measurement, tems in factory-assembled cabinets.
electromagnetic interference in ac-
control, automation and protection For complex applications, type and
cordance with public utility require-
functions for substations. design test facilities are available to-
ments assure simple system design
Furthermore, our activities cover: gether with extensive network mod-
and usage just as with conventional
C Consulting els using the most modern simula-
relays.
C Planning tion and evaluation techniques.
C Design
C Commissioning and Service
8/3 8
Protection and substation

automation
SICAM SIPROTEC SIMEAS

power automation substation protection power quality
SICAM PAS 7SJ4 and 7SJ6 SIMEAS R

power automation systems Feeder protection disturbance recorder
overcurrent/overload relays
SICAM RTU 7SA5 and 7SA6 SIMEAS Q

SICAM miniRTU feeder protection power quality recorders
SICAM microRTU overcurrent/overload relays
Remote terminal units
7SD5 and 7SD610 SIMEAS T

power system protection, measuring transducers
differential protection and
communication
7UT6 SIMEAS P
transformer protection power meter
7UM6
generator/motor protection
7SS60 and 7VH60

busbar protection
Fig. 8/3 Product range for protection and substation control systems by Siemens
Substation control SICAM PAS engineering tools are In contrast to conventional substation
based on Microsoft operating sys- control systems, digital technology
The digital substation control sys-
tems, and thanks to their Windows saves enormously on space and
tems of the SICAM family provide all
look & feel they are easy to use. The wiring. SICAM systems are subjected
control, measurement and automa-
PC-based SICAM PAS UI – Configura- to full factory tests and are delivered
tion functions (e.g. transformer tap
tion software is used for system ready for operation. Furthermore,
changing) required by a switching
configuration and parameterization. SICAM PAS has a system-wide time
station. They operate with distributed
SICAM PAS UI – Operation and resolution of 1 ms.
intelligence. Communication between
SICAM Value Viewer support the
devices in branch circuits and the Due to the special requirements of
user during configuration and com-
central unit is made via fiber-optic medium- and high-voltage systems,
missioning and provide diagnostic
connections which are immune to bay units and I/O modules withstand
functions for the system in operation.
interference. voltages up to 2 kV.
The operator interface is menu-
Devices are extremely compact and
guided, with SCADA-comparable
can be built directly into medium-
functions, that is, with a level of con-
and high-voltage switchgear.
venience which was previously only
available in a power system control
center. Optional telecontrol functions
can be added to allow coupling of the
system to one or more power sys-
tem control centers.

Remote Terminal Units Switchgear interlocking measuring transducers with analog

and digital outputs.
Siemens RTU’s fulfill all the classic The distributed substation control
functions of remote measurement system SICAM PAS provides the
Advantages for the user
and control. Furthermore, they pro- option to implement bay-specific and
vide comprehensive data pre-pro- ‘inter-bay’ interlocking by means of The concept of the “entire technol-
cessing of operational and fault infor- on-screen graphic planning. The ogy from one partner” offers the
mation, and automating functions substation topology as well as in- user many advantages:
that are based on powerful micro- feed conditions are taken into C High-level security for his systems
processors. consideration. It prevents false and operational rationalization
switching, thus enhancing the possibilities
In the classic case, connections to
safety of operating personnel C Powerful system solutions with
the switchgear are made through
and equipment considerably. the most modern technology
coupling relays and transducers. This
C Compliance with international
method allows an economically favor-
Power quality standards
able solution when modernizing or
(measuring and recording) C Integration in the overall system
renewing control systems in older
SIPROTEC®– SICAM®– SIMATIC®
installations. Alternatively, especially The SIMEAS® product range offers
C Space and cost savings
for new installations, direct connec- equipment for the monitoring of
C Integration of many functions into
tion is also possible. Digital protec- power supply quality (harmonic
one unit and compact equipment
tion devices can be connected by content, distortion factor, peak loads,
packaging
serial links through fiber-optic power factor, etc.), fault recorders
C Simple planning and safe operation
conductors or bus systems. (oscillostores), and measuring
C Homogeneous design, matched
transducers.
interfaces and EMI security
Stored data can be transmitted throughout
manually or automatically to PC C Rationalized programming and
evaluation systems where they can handling
be analyzed by intelligent programs.
Expert systems are also applied here.
This leads to rapid fault analysis and
valuable indicators for the improve-
ment of network reliability.
For local bulk data storage and
transmission, the central processor
DAKON can be installed at substation
level. Data transmission circuits for
analog telephone or digital ISDN net-
works are incorporated as standard.
Connection to local or wide-area net-
works (LAN, WAN) is equally possi-
ble. We can also offer the SIMEAS T
series of compact and powerful
8/5 8
C Windows-based PC tools and Reliable operation of the devices is

standardized displays not affected by the usual interference
C Fast, flexible mounting and from the switchgear, even when the
reduced wiring device is mounted directly in a low-
C Simple, fast commissioning voltage compartment of a medium-
C Efficient spare part stocking, voltage switchgear panel. It must,
high flexibility however, be ensured that the coils
C High-level operational safety of auxiliary relays located on the
and availability same panel, or in the same cubicle,
C Continuous self-monitoring and are fitted with suitable spike-quench-
proven technology: ing elements (e.g. free-wheeling
C 20 years of digital relay diodes).
experience (more than 350,000
When used in conjunction with
units in operation)
switchgear for up to 1 kV or above,
C 15 years of digital substation
all external connection cables should
control (more than 3,000
be fitted with a screen grounded at
systems in operation)
both ends and capable of carrying
C Rapid problem solving
currents. That means that the cross
C Comprehensive support and
section of the screen should be at
fast response from local sales
least 4 mm2 for a single cable and
and workshop facilities worldwide
2.5 mm2 for multiple cables in one Photo 8/2 Installation of the numerical pro-
cable duct. tection in the door of the low-volt-
Application notes age compartment of a medium-
All devices and systems for protec- All equipment proposed in this guide voltage switchgear panel
tion, metering and control mentioned is built up either in enclosures (type
herein are designed to be used in the 7XP20) or switchgear cabinets with
degree of protection IP51 according Climatic withstand features
arduous environment of electrical
substations, power plants and the to IEC 60529: C Permissible temperature
various industrial application areas. C Protected against access to during service –5 °C to +55 °C
dangerous parts with a wire storage –25 °C to +55 °C
When the devices were developed,
C Sealed against dust transport –25 °C to +70 °C
special emphasis was placed on the
C Protected against dripping water C Permissible humidity
design of electromechanical interfer-
Mean value per year ≤ 75% relative
ence (EMI). The devices are in accor-
humidity; on 56 days per year 95%
dance with IEC 60255 standards.
relative humidity; condensation not
Detailed information is contained in
permissible
the device manuals.
We recommend that units be in-
stalled in such a way that they are
not subjected to direct sunlight, nor
to large temperature variations which
may give rise to condensation.

Mechanical stress Insulation tests C High-frequency electromagnetic

field, amplitude-modulated;
Vibration and shock during C Standards:
ENV 50140, class III
operation IEC 60255-5
– 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1,000 MHz,
C Standards: – High-voltage test (routine test)
80%; 1 kHz; AM
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 2 kV (rms), 50 Hz
C High-frequency electromagnetic
C Vibration – Impulse voltage withstand test
field, pulse-modulated;
– sinusoidal IEC 60255-21-1, class 1 (type test)
ENV 50140/ENV 50204, class III
10 Hz to 60 Hz: all circuits, class III
– 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
± 0.035 mm amplitude; 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J;
frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50%
IEC 60068-2-6 3 positive and 3 negative shots
C Fast transients
60 Hz to 150 Hz: at intervals of 5 s
IEC 60255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4,
0.5 g acceleration
class III
sweep rate 10 octaves/min Electromagnetic compatibility
– 2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
EU conformity declaration length 15 ms; repetition rate
(CE mark) 300 ms; both polarities;
Vibration and shock during
All Siemens protection and control Ri = 50 ohm; duration 1 min
transport
products recommended in this man- C Conducted disturbances induced
C Standards:
ual comply with the EMC Directive by radio-frequency fields HF,
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
99/336/EEC of the Council of the amplitude-modulated ENV 50141,
C Vibration
European Community and further class III
– sinusoidal
relevant IEC 255 standards on – 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
electromagnetic compatibility. 80%; 1 kHz; AM
5 Hz to 8 Hz:
C Power-frequency magnetic field
± 7.5 mm amplitude; All products carry the CE mark.
EN 61000-4-8, class IV
IEC 60068-2-6
– 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m
8 Hz to 150 Hz: EMC tests; immunity
for 3 s; 50 Hz
2 g acceleration (type tests)
sweep rate 1 octave/min
C Standards:
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes EMC tests; emission
IEC 60255-22 (product standard)
C Shock (type tests)
EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
C High frequency C Standard:
IEC 60068-2-27
IEC 60255-22-1 class III EN 50081-2 (generic standard)
– 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 µs; C Interference field strength CISPR
400 shots/s; duration 2 s 11, EN 55011, class A 30 MHz to
C Electrostatic discharge 100 MHz
IEC 60255-22-2 class III and C Conducted interference voltage,
EN 61000-4-2 class III aux. voltage CISPR 22, EN 55022,
– 4 kV contact discharge; 8 kV air class B
discharge; both polarities; – 150 kHz to 30 MHz
150 pF; Ri = 330 ohm
C High-frequency electromagnetic
field, non-modulated;
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III
– 10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
8/7 8
Instrument transformers The current transformer classification This results, as a rule, in rated accu-
code of IEC is used in the following: racy limiting factors of 10 or 20 de-
Instrument transformers must comply
pendent on the rated burden of the
with the applicable IEC recommenda- Measuring cores
current transformer in relation to the
tions IEC 60044, formerly IEC 60185 They are normally specified with
connected burden. A typical specifi-
(current transformers) and 186 0.5 % or 1.0 % accuracy (class 0.5 M
cation for protection cores for distri-
(potential transformers), ANSI/IEEE or 1.0 M), and an accuracy limiting
bution feeders is 5P10, 15 VA or
C57.13 or other comparable factor of 5 or 10. The required output
5P20, 10 VA.
standards. power (rated burden) must be higher
than the actually connected burden. The requirements for protective cur-
Potential transformers Typical values are 5, 10, 15 VA. rent transformers for transient per-
Higher values are normally not neces- formance are specified in IEC 60044-6.
Potential transformers (p.t.) in single
sary when only electronic meters and
or double-pole design for all primary In many practical cases, the current
recorders are connected.
voltages have single or dual second- transformers cannot be designed to
ary windings of 100, 110 or 120 V/KL 3, A typical specification could be: avoid saturation under all circum-
with output ratings between 10 and 0.5 M 10, 15 VA. stances because of cost and space
300 VA, and accuracies of 0.2, 0.5 or reasons, particularly with metal-en-
Cores revenue metering
1 % to suit the particular application. closed switchgear.
In this case, class 0.2 M is normally
required. The Siemens relays are therefore de-
Current transformers
signed to tolerate current transformer
Protection cores
Current transformers (c.t.) are usually saturation to a large extent. The nu-
The size of the protection core de-
of the single-ratio type with wound or merical relays proposed in this guide
pends mainly on the maximum short-
bar-type primaries of adequate ther- are particularly stable in this case due
circuit current and the total burden
mal rating. Single, dual or triple sec- to their integral saturation detection
(internal c.t. burden, plus burden of
ondary windings of 1 or 5 A are stan- function.
connecting leads, plus relay burden).
dard.
The required current transformer
Further, an overdimensioning factor
1 A rating, however, should be pre- accuracy- limiting factor K’ssc can be
has to be considered to cover the in-
ferred, particularly in HV and EHV sta- determined by calculation, as shown
fluence of the DC component in the
tions, to reduce the burden of the in Table 8/4.
short-circuit current.
connecting leads. Output power
The transient rated dimensioning
(rated burden in VA), accuracy and In general, an accuracy of 1% (class
factor Ktd depends on the type of
saturation characteristics (accuracy- 5 P) is specified. The accuracy limit-
relay and the primary DC time con-
limiting factor) of the cores and sec- ing factor KSSC should normally be
stant. For the normal case, with
ondary windings must meet the par- designed so that at least the maxi-
short-circuit time constants lower
ticular application. mum short-circuit current can be
than 100 ms, the necessary value for
transmitted without saturation
K’ssc can be taken from Table 8/1.
(DC component not considered).

R’b + Rct Relay type Minimum K’ssc

Kssc > K’ssc
Rb + Rct
Kssc : Factor of the symmetrical rated Overcurrent protection
short-circuit current I>>-Setting
7SJ60, 61, 62, 63, 64 = , minimum is 20
K’ssc : Rms factor of the symmetrical Ipn
rated short-circuit current
Rb : Ohmic burden (rated)
R’b : Connected burden Transformer Iscc. max. (external fault)
Rct : Resistance of secondary winding protection ≥4 for Tp ≤ 100 ms
7UT6 Ipn
And:
Issc. max. Iscc. max. (external fault)
K’ssc > Ktd
Ipn ≥5 for Tp > 100 ms
Ipn
Issc. max. = Max. short-circuit current
Ipn = Rated primary current
Ktd = Transient dimensioning factor Optical waveguide Iscc. max. (external fault)
line differential = and K’ssc ≥ 30
protection 7SD52/610 Ipn
Table 8/1 Current transformer dimensioning
formulae
Line differential Iscc. max. (external fault) (K’ssc • Ipn) Line-end 1
(pilot wire) = and 3 ≤ ≤4
(Rb + Rct) • Isn • Kssc protection 7SD600 Ipn 4 (K’ssc • Ipn) Line-end 2 3
UK =
1.3
Isn = Nominal secondary current
Numerical busbar
Example: 1 Iscc. max. (external fault)
protection ≤ 100 Measuring range
IEC60044: 600/1, 15 VA, 5 P 10, Rct = 4 Ω 2 Ipn
(low-resistance) 7SS5
(15 + 4) • 1 • 10
BS: UK = V = 146 V
1.3
Rct = 4 Ω Distance protection Iscc. max. (close-in fault) Tp > 30 ms: Tp < 50 ms:
7SA522, 7SA6 = a
Table 8/2 Current transformer definition Ipn a=1 a=2
b=4 b=5
and
Kssc Iscc. max. (line-end fault) Tp < 200 ms:
Us.t. max = 20 • 5 A • Rb • = b
20 Ipn a=4
b=5
Pb
Rb = b and Isn = 5 A results in
Isn2 Tp : Primary time constant (system time constant)
Pb • Kssc Table 8/4 Current transformer requirements

Us.t. max =
5A
Example:
IEC 60044: 600/5, 5 P 20, 25 VA
ANSI
25 VA • 20
C57.13: Us.t. max = =
5A
= 100 V corresponding
to Class C100
Table 8/3 ANSI definition of current

transformers
8/9 8
Relay burden Burden of the connection leads Example: Stability test of the
The current transformer burdens of The resistance of the current loop 7SS52 numerical busbar protection
system
the numerical relays of Siemens are from the current transformer to the
below 0.1 VA and can therefore be relay has to be considered as fol- Assuming:
neglected for a practical estimation. lows:
Exceptions are the 7SS60 busbar
protection (2 VA) and the pilot wire
2 ρ l
relays, 7SD600 (4 VA). Rl = ohm
A
Normally, intermediate current trans-
formers needn't be used any more, l = Length of the single conductor
as the ratio adaptation for busbar and from the current transformer 600/1, l = 50 m
to the relay in m 7SS52
transformer protection is numerically 5 P 10, A = 6 mm2
performed in the relay. 15 VA,
Specific resistance
Rct = 4 Ohm
I scc.max. = 30 kA
Analog static relays in general also ρ = 0.0179 ohm mm2 (copper wire)
have burdens below about 1 VA. m
A = Conductor cross section in mm2
Mechanical relays, however, have a
much higher burden, up to the order
Iscc.max.
of 10 VA. This has to be considered Table 8/5 Resistance of current loop = 30,000 A = 50
when older relays are connected to Ipn 600 A
the same current transformer circuit.
According to Table 8/4
In any case, the relevant relay manu-
als should always be consulted for 1
K’ssc > 50 = 25
the actual burden values. 2
15 VA
Rb = = 15 Ω
1 A2
RRelais = 0.1 Ω
2 0.0179 50
Rl = = 0.3 Ω
6
R’b = Rl + RRelais =
= 0.3 Ω + 0.1 Ω = 0.4 Ω
Rct + Rb 4 Ω + 15 Ω
K’ssc = Kssc = =
Rct + R’b 4 Ω + 0.4 Ω
4 Ω + 15 Ω
= 10 = 43.2
4 Ω + 0.4 Ω
Result:
Rating factor K’ssc (43.2) is greater
than the calculated value (25). The
stability criterion has therefore been met.
Fig. 8/4 Example: stability verification

8.1 Power System Meanwhile, the innovative SIPROTEC 4

series has been launched, incorporat-
Protection ing the many years of operational
experience with thousands of relays
Introduction as well as the awareness of user
requirements (power company rec-
Siemens is one of the world‘s leading
ommendations).
suppliers of protective equipment for
power systems. State of the art
Thousands of relays ensure first-class Mechanical and solid-state (static)
performance in the transmission and relays have been almost completely
distribution networks on all voltage phased out of our production be-
levels all over the world, in countries cause numerical relays are now
of tropical heat and arctic frost. preferred by the users.
For many years, Siemens has also
Advantages
significantly influenced the develop-
Photo 8/3 SIPROTEC 4 numerical relays by
ment of protection technology. C Compact design and lower cost Siemens
due to the integration of many
In 1976, the first minicomputer
functions into one relay
(process-computer)-based protection C Easy and secure reading of
C High availability even with less
system was commissioned: A total information via serial interfaces
maintenance owing to integrated
of 10 systems for 110/20-kV substa- with a PC, locally or by remote
self-monitoring
tions were supplied that are still access
C No drift (ageing) of the measuring
working at their customers' full C Possibility to communicate with
characteristics because of their
satisfaction today. higher-level control systems
complete digital processing
using standardized protocols
In 1985, we were the first to produce C High availability even with less
(open communication)
a series of fully numerically con- maintenance due to digital
trolled relays with standardized com- filtering and optimized measuring Modern protection management
munication interfaces. algorithms
All the functions, for example, of a
C Many integrated add-on functions,
Today, Siemens offers a complete power system protection scheme
for example for load monitoring
program of protective relays for all can be incorporated in one unit:
and event/fault recording
applications including numerical C Distance protection with associated
C Local operation keypad and display
busbar protection. add-on and monitoring functions
designed to modern ergonomic
C Universal teleprotection interface
To date, more than 350,000 numeri- criteria
C Auto-reclose and synchro-check
cal protection relays from Siemens
are providing successful service, as
stand-alone devices in traditional
systems or as components of coordi-
nated protection and substation
control.
8/11 8
52
21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM
85
Serial link to station – or personal computer

to remote line end kA,
kV,
ANSI-No.*) Hz, 01.10.93
52 Circuit-breaker MW,
21 Distance protection Load MVAr,
monitor MVA
67N Directional ground-fault protection
FL Distance-to-fault locator Fault report
79 Autoreclosure
Fault record
25 Synchro-check
85 Carrier interface (teleprotection) Relay monitor
SM Self-monitoring
Breaker
ER Event recording monitor
FR Fault recording Supervisory
BM Breaker monitor control
*) see Table 8/6 cont.
Fig. 8/5 Numerical relays, increased availability of information
Protection-related information can be All relays can stand fully alone. Thus, has significantly lowered the costs of
called up on-line or off-line, such as: the traditional protection concept of engineering, assembly, panel wiring,
C Distance to fault separate main and alternate protec- testing and commissioning. The relia-
C Fault currents and voltages tion as well as the external connec- bility of the protection scheme has
C Relay operation and data tion to the outdoor switchyard remain been highly increased.
(fault-detector pickup, unchanged.
Engineering has moved from
operating times etc.)
schematic diagrams towards a pa-
C Set values “One feeder, one relay” concept
rameter definition procedure. The
C Line load data (kV, A, MW, kVAr)
Analog protection schemes have documentation is provided by the re-
been engineered and assembled lay itself. Free allocation of LED oper-
To fulfill vital protection redundancy
from individual relays. Interwiring ation indicators and output contacts
requirements, only those functions
between these relays and scheme provides more application design
which are interdependent and di-
testing have been carried out flexibility.
rectly associated with each other
manually in the workshop.
are integrated in the same unit. For
backup protection, one or more Data sharing now allows for the
additional units have to be provided. integration of several protection tasks
into one single numerical relay.
Only a small number of external de-
vices may be required for completion
of the overall design concept. This

Measuring function included

The additional transducer was rather Personal computer Recording
used for protecting measuring instru- DIGSI
ments under system fault conditions.
Due to the low thermal withstand ca-
pability of the measuring instruments,
they could not be connected to the Assigning
protective current transformer directly.
When numerical protection technol-
ogy is employed, protective current
transformers are in many cases accu- Protection Laptop
rate enough to take operational
measurements. Consequently, addi-
tional transducers and measuring in- DIGSI
struments are now only necessary Recording and
where high accuracy is required, e.g. confirmation
for metering used for electricity bills.
Online remote data exchange

Fig. 8/6 PC-aided setting procedure of numerical protection relays
A powerful serial data link provides
for interrogation of digitized meas-
ured values and other information
stored in the protection units, for System level to remote control
printout and further processing at the
substation or system control level.
Substation level Coordinated
In the opposite direction, settings
protection and
may be altered or test routines initi- control
Modem
ated from a remote control center.
(option)
For greater distances, especially in ERTU RTU
outdoor switchyards, fiber-optic ca-
bles are preferably used. This tech- Data collection
device
nique has the advantage that it is to-
tally unaffected by electromagnetic Bay level
interference.
52
Offline communication with
numerical relays
Relay Control
A simple built-in operator keypad
which requires no special software
knowledge or code word tables is
used for parameter input and
readout.
Fig. 8/7 Communication options
8/13 8
This allows operator dialog with the

protective relay. Answers appear Setpoints Relay operations
largely in plain text on the display of
the operator panel. Dialog is divided
into three main stages: 300 faults p. a.
10,000 1,200 approx. 6,000 km
C Input, alteration and readout of setpoints flags OHL (fault rate:
settings p. a. 5 p. a. and
1 100 km)
C Testing the functions of the system
approx.
protective device and 500 system
C Readout of relay operation data 200 relays
for the three last system faults setpoints
and the auto-reclose counter
Modern power system 1
20 bay 4
protection management setpoints flags
A notebook PC may be used for

upgraded protection management. 1 substation
substation
OH line
The MS Windows-compatible relay
operation program DIGSI 4 is avail-
able for entering and readout of set-
Fig.8/8 System-wide setting and relay operation library
points and archiving of protection
data.
The relays may be set in 2 steps.
First, all relay settings are prepared 1000 Parameter
in the office with the aid of a local PC D
1000 Parameter
1100
and stored on a diskette or the hard Line data C
1000 Parameter
disk. On site, the settings can then 1100 Line data B
1200 O/C Phase settings
be downloaded from a PC into the 1000 Parameter
1100 Line data A
1200 O/C Phase
relay. The relay confirms the settings 1500settings
O/C Ground settings
1100 Line data
1200
and thus provides an unquestionable O/C Phase
1500settings
O/C Ground
280 settings
Fault recording
record. 1200 O/C phase
1500settings
O/C Ground
280 settings
Fault recording
3900 Breaker fail
Vice versa, after a system fault, the 1500 O/C earth
280settings
Fault recording
3900
relay memory can be uploaded to a Breaker fail
280 Fault recording
PC, and comprehensive fault analysis 3900 Breaker fail
can then take place in the engineer’s 3900 Breaker fail
office.
Alternatively, the entire relay dialog
can be guided from any remote loca- Fig. 8/9 Alternate parameter groups
tion through a modem-telephone
connection (Fig. 8/7).

Relay data management Adaptive relaying d) For auto-reclose programs, i.e.

instantaneous operation for first
Analog distribution-type relays have Numerical relays now offer secure,
trip and delayed operation after
some 20–30 setpoints. If we con- convenient and comprehensive ad-
unsuccessful reclosure.
sider a power system with about 500 justment to changing conditions.
relays, then the number adds up to Adjustments may be initiated either e) For cold load pickup problems
10,000 settings. This requires consid- by the relay’s own intelligence or where high starting currents may
erable expenditure in setting the from outside via contacts or serial cause relay operation.
relays and filing retrieval setpoints. telegrams. Modern numerical relays
f) For ”ring open“ or ”ring closed“
contain a number of parameter sets
A personal computer-aided man-ma- operation.
that can be pre-tested during com-
chine dialog and archiving program,
missioning of the scheme (Fig. 8/9).
e.g. DIGSI 4, assists the relay engi-
One set is normally operative. Trans-
neer in data filing and retrieval.
fer to the other sets can be con-
The program files all settings system- trolled via binary inputs or serial data
atically in substation-feeder-relay order. link. There are a number of applica-
tions for which multiple setting
Corrective rather than preventive
groups can upgrade the scheme
maintenance
performance, for example:
Numerical relays monitor their own
a) For use as a voltage-dependent
hardware and software. Exhaustive
control of o/c relay pickup values
self-monitoring and failure diagnostic
to overcome alternator fault current
routines are not restricted to the pro-
decrement to below normal load
tective relay itself, but are methodi-
current when the AVR is not in
cally carried through from current
automatic operation.
transformer circuits to tripping relay
coils. b) For maintaining short operation
times with lower fault currents,
Equipment failures and faults in the
e.g. automatic change of settings
current transformer circuits are im-
if one supply transformer is taken
mediately recorded and signaled.
out of service.
Thus, the service personnel are now
c) For “switch-onto-fault” protection
able to correct the failure upon occur-
to provide shorter time settings
rence, resulting in a significantly up-
when energizing a circuit after
graded availability of the protection
maintenance. The normal settings
system.
can be restored automatically after
a time delay.
8/15 8
8.2 Relay Design and The protection principle is based on

a cyclic calculation algorithm, utilizing
C High measurement accuracy: The
high utilization of adaptive algo-
Operation the sampled current and voltage ana- rithms produce accurate results
log measured values. The fault detec- even during problematic conditions
Mode of operation tion determined by this process must C Good long-term stability: Due to
be established in several sequential the digital mode of operation, drift
Numerical protective relays operate
calculations before protection phenomena at components due to
on the basis of numerical measuring
reactions can follow. ageing do not lead to changes in
principles. The analog measured val-
accuracy of measurement or time
ues of current and voltage are decou- A trip command is transferred to the
delays
pled electrically from the system's command relay by the processor, uti-
C Security against over- and under-
secondary circuits via input transduc- lizing a dual-channel control.
functioning: With this concept, the
ers (Fig. 8/10). After analog filtering,
The numerical protection concept of- danger of an undetected defect or
the sampling and the analog-to-digital
fers a multitude of advantages, espe- malfunction in the device causing
conversion take place. The sampling
cially with regard to higher security, protection failure in the event of a
rate is, depending on the different
reliability and user friendliness, such line fault is clearly reduced when
protection principles, between 12
as: compared to conventional protec-
and 20 samples per period. With cer-
tion technology. Cyclical and pre-
tain devices (e.g. generator protec-
ventive maintenance services have
tion) a continuous adjustment of the
therefore become largely obsolete.
sampling rate takes place depending
on the actual system frequency.
PC interface, substation control interface
Meas. Input V.24 FO Input/ Binary

inputs filter serial output inputs
interfaces ports
Alarm
relay
Current Amplifier
inputs
(100 x /N,
1 s)
Com-
mand
relay
Voltage A/D Processor Memory:
inputs converter system RAM Input/
(140 V LED
EEPROM output dis-
continuous) 0001 EPROM units plays
0101
0011
100 V/1 A, 10 V digital Input/output

5 A analog analog contacts
Fig. 8/10 Block diagram of numerical protection

Plausibility check of input quantities

e. g.iL1 + iL2 + iL3 = iE
uL1 + uL2 + uL3 = uE
Check of analog-to-digital conversion

A by comparison with
converted reference quantities
D
The integrated self-monitoring
system (Fig. 8/11) encompasses
Hardware and software monitoring of
the following areas: Micro- the microprocessor system incl. memory,
C Analog inputs processor e.g. by watchdog and
system cyclic memory checks
C Microprocessor system
C Command relays
Implemented functions Monitoring of the tripping relays
Relay operated via dual channels
SIPROTEC relays are available with
a variety of protective functions (see
Tripping check or test reclosure by local
relay charts, page 25 cont.). The high or remote operation (not automatic)
processing power of modern numeri-
cal devices allow further integration
of non-protective add-on functions.
The question as to whether separate
or combined relays should be used
for protection and control cannot be
uniformly answered. In transmission- Fig. 8/11 Self-monitoring system
type substations, separation into
independent hardware units is still
preferred, whereas on the distribu-
tion level, a trend towards higher
function integration can be observed.
Here, combined feeder relays for
protection, monitoring and control
are gaining ground (Photo 8/4).
With the SIPROTEC 4 series (types
7SJ61, 62 and 63), Siemens supports
both stand-alone and combined solu-
tions on the basis of a single hard-
ware and software platform.
The user can decide within wide lim-
its on the configuration of the control
and protection functions in the
feeder, without compromising the
reliability of the protection functions
(Fig. 8/12).
Photo 8/4 Switchgear with numerical Switchgear with combined protection

relay (7SJ62) and traditional control and control relay (7SJ63)
8/17 8
Busbar
52 7SJ61/62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64
Local, remote control CFC logic Measurements during operation Synchronization
Command/checkback (only 7SJ64)
Limit values,
Motor mean values, U, f, P element
control min/max memory
(only Trip Final
7SJ63/64) monitor OFF
Thermobox Energy counter values calcu-
connection as count pulses lated (only 7SJ64)
Operation Communications Fault Motor protection element

modules recording logic Bearing Fault
RS232/485/LWL temp. I< Startup time detector
IEC 61850 Directional element
ICE 60870-5-103 Phase-sequence
PROFIBUS FMS/DP monitoring
DNP3.0 Locked Switch-
MODBUS RTU rotor on
lock
Inrush Interm.
lock ground fault
Ground fault
Switch failure detection element
protection
High-imp.
diff. Auto- Directional ground fault
reclosure detection element
Fig. 8/12 SIPROTEC 4 relay types 7SJ61/62/63/64, implemented functions
The following solutions are available

within one relay family: DIGSI 4
C Separate control and protection
relays Telephone SICAM PAS
C Protective relays including remote connection
control of the feeder breaker via
IEC 61850 or IEC 60870-5-103
the serial communication link
C Combined feeder relays for Modem IEC 6870-5
protection, monitoring and control
DIGSI 4
Mixed use of the different relay
types is easily possible on account of
the uniform operation and communi-
cation procedures.
IEC 60870-5-103
Fig. 8/13 SIPROTEC 4 relays, options for communication

Integration of relays into

substation control
Basically, all Siemens numerical 1
relays are equipped with an an inter- 1
face acc. to IEC 60870-5-103 for
open communication with substation 2
control systems either by Siemens 2
(SICAM) or by any other supplier. The
relays of the latest SIPROTEC 4 se- 3 3
ries, however, are even more flexible
and equipped with several communi- 4
cation options. SIPROTEC 4 relays 4 5
can still be connected to the SICAM 6
system or to a communications 7
6
system of another supplier via 7
IEC 60870-5-103.
SIPROTEC 4 protection systems and 1 Large illuminated display 4 Control (7SJ61/62 uses 6 Freely programmable
2 Cursor keys function keys) function keys
SICAM substation control technology 3 LED with reset key 5 Key switches 7 Numerical keypad
have a uniform design. Communica-
tion is based on the PROFIBUS Photo 8/5 Front view of the Front view of the 7SJ63 relay
standard. 7SJ62 protective relay combining protection, monitoring
and control functions
IEC 61850 has been established as
a global standard by users and manu-
SICAM PAS, the new substation C Large non-reflective back-lit display
facturers. The agreed objective of
control system by Siemens has been C Programmable (freely assignable)
this standard is to create a compre-
designed as an open system which LED's for important messages
hensive communications solution for
employs IEC 61580 as communica- C Arrows arrangement of the keys
substations. Thus, the user is pro-
tion standard between the bay and for easy navigation in the
vided with open communication sys-
station control level. IEC 61580 sup- function tree
tems which are based on Ethernet
ports interoperability and integration C Operator-friendly input of the set-
technology.
of substation control systems which ting values via the numeric keys or
SIPROTEC protective relays and bay facilitates system engineering inde- with a PC by using the DIGSI 4
control units are the first devices re- pendent of the manufacturer and software
leased in mid 2004 which use a com- reduces the planning expense at C Command input protected by
munications protocol in compliance the same time. key lock (6MD63/7SJ63 only)
with IEC 61850. The station configu- or password
rator, which is part of the DIGSI 4 Direct operation of a C Four programmable keys for
operating software, can be used to SIPROTEC 4 relay frequently used functions
configure SIPROTEC relays as well “at the touch of a button”
All operator actions can be executed
as non-Siemens relays via IEC 61850.
and information displayed on an
integrated user interface.
Many advantages are already to be
found on the clear and user-friendly
front panel:
C Ergonomic arrangement and
grouping of the keys
8/19 8
DIGSI 4 – the operating soft- C When configuring the operator en- Display editor (Photo 8/10)
ware for all SIPROTEC relays vironment and interfaces, we have
A display editor is available to design
attached importance to continuity
For the user, DIGSI is synonymous the display of SIPROTEC 4 units. The
with the SICAM automation sys-
with convenient, user-friendly para- predefined symbol sets can be ex-
tem. This means that you can
meterizing and operation of numeri- panded to suit the user. The drawing
readily use DIGSI 4 on the station
cal protection relays. DIGSI 4 is a log- of a one-line diagram is extremely
control level in conjunction with
ical innovation for operation of pro- simple. Load monitoring values (ana-
SICAM.
tection and bay control units of the log values) can be set, if required.
SIPROTEC 4 family. Configuration matrix (routing)
Commissioning
The PC software DIGSI 4 is the hu- The DIGSI 4 matrix allows the user to
man-machine interface between the see the overall view of the relay con- Special attention has been paid to
user and the SIPROTEC 4 units. It figuration at a glance. For example, commissioning. All binary inputs and
features modern, intuitive operating you can display all the LED's that are outputs can be read and set directly.
procedures. With DIGSI 4, the linked to binary inputs or show exter- This can simplify the wire checking
SIPROTEC 4 units can be configured nal signals that are connected to the process significantly for the user.
and queried. relay. And with one mouse click,
connections can be switched. CFC: graphic configuration
C The interface provides you only
with what is really necessary, With the help of the graphical CFC
irrespective of which unit you (Continuous Function Chart) Tool, you
are currently configuring. can configure interlocks and switch-
C Contextual menus for every situa- ing sequences simply by drawing the
tion provide you with made-to- logic sequences; no special knowl-
measure functionality – searching edge of software is required. Logical
through menu hierarchies is a elements such as AND, OR and time
thing of the past. elements are available.
C Explorer operation on the MS
Windows standard shows the Hardware and software platform
options in logically structured form. C Pentium 1,6 GHz or better,
C Even with routing, you have the with at least 128 Mbytes RAM
overall picture – a matrix shows C DIGSI 4 requires more than
you at a glance, for example, which 500 Mbytes hard disk space
LED's are linked to which protec- C One free serial interface to the
tion control function(s). It just takes protection device
a click with the mouse to establish (COM 1 or COM 4)
these links by a fingertip. C One DVD/CD-ROM drive
C Thus, you can also use the PC to (required for installation)
link up with the relay via star cou- C WINDOWS 2000, or
pler or channel switch, as well as XP Professional
via the PROFIBUS® of a substation
control system. The integrated ad-
ministrating system ensures clear
addressing of the feeders and re-
lays of a substation.
C Access authorization by means of
passwords protects the individual
functions, such as parameterizing,
commissioning and control, from
unauthorized access.

Photo 8/9 DIGSI 4 routing matrix
Photo 8/6 DIGSI 4 Manager
Photo 8/7 Functional scope
Photo 8/10 Display editor
Photo 8/8 The device with all its parameters and process data
Photo 8/11 CFC logic with module library
8/21 8
Fault analysis The time tag attached to the fault

records is the relative time of fault
The evaluation of faults is simplified
detection with a resolution of 1 ms.
by numerical protection technology.
Devices with integrated battery back-
In the event of a fault in the power
up clock store operational events and
system, all events as well as the ana-
fault detection events with the inter-
log traces of the measured voltages
nal clock time and a data stamp.
and currents are recorded.
The memory for operational events
The following types of memory have
and fault record events is protected
been integrated in the numerical
against failure of auxiliary supply with
protection relay:
battery back-up supply. The inte-
C 1 operational event memory. Alarms Photo 8/12 Display and evaluation of a fault
grated operator interface or a PC sup- record using DIGSI 4 software
that are not directly assigned to a
ported by the DIGSI 4 programming
fault in the network (e.g. monitoring
tool is used to retrieve fault reports
alarms, alternation of a set value,
as well as for the input of settings Real-time presentation of analog
blocking of the automatic reclosure
and routing. disturbance records, overlaying and
function).
C 5 fault-event histories. Alarms that zooming of curves and visualization
Evaluation of fault records of binary tracks (e.g. trip command,
occurred during the last 3 faults on
the network (e.g. type of fault de- Readout of the fault record by DIGSI 4 reclose command, etc.) are also part
tection, trip commands, fault loca- is done by fault-proof scanning proce- of the extensive graphical functional-
tion, auto-reclose commands). A dures in accordance with the stan- ity, as are setting of measurement
reclose cycle with one or more dard recommendations for transmis- cursors, spectrum analysis and fault
reclosures is treated as one fault sion of fault records. resistance derivation.
history. Each new fault in the
A fault record can also be read out re- Data security, data interfaces
network overrides the oldest
peatedly. In addition to analog values,
fault history. DIGSI 4 is a closed system as far as
such as voltage and current, binary
C A memory for the fault recordings protection parameter security is con-
tracks can also be transferred and
for voltage and current. Up to 8 cerned. The security of the stored
presented.
fault recordings are stored. The data of the operating PC is ensured
fault recording memory is organized DIGSI 4 is supplied together with the by checksums. This means that it is
as a ring buffer, i.e. a new fault SIGRA® (DIGSI 4 Graphic) program, only possible to change data with
entry overrides the oldest fault which provides the customer with DIGSI 4, which subsequently calcu-
record. full graphical operating and evaluation lates a checksum for the changed
C 1 ground-fault event memory (op- functionality like that of the digital data and stores it with the data.
tional for isolated or impedance fault recorders (oscillostores) by Changes in the data and thus in
grounded networks). Event record- Siemens (see Photo 8/12). safety-related protection data are
ing of the sensitive ground fault reliably recorded.
detector (e.g. faulty phase, real
component of residual current).

DIGSI 4 is, however, also an open

system. The data export function
Office
supports export of parameterization
and routing data in standard ASCII
Analog
format. This permits simple access to ISDN
these data by other programs, such
DIGSI Modem
as test programs, without endanger- PC, remotely located
ing the security of data within the
DIGSI 4 program system.
With the import and export of fault Substation
records in IEEE standard format
COMTRADE (ANSI), a high-perform- Star coupler
ance data interface is produced
which supports import and export of DIGSI 7XV53
PC, centrally located Modem,
fault records into the DIGSI 4 partner in the substation optionally with
program SIGRA. (option) call-back function
This enables the export of fault RS232

records from Siemens protection
Signal converter
units to customer-specific programs RS232
via the COMTRADE format. RS485 bus
Remote relay interrogation RS485
The numerical relay range of Siemens

can also be operated from a remotely
located PC via modem-telephone
connection.
Up to 254 relays can be addressed 7SJ60 7RW60 7SD60 7**5 7**6
via one modem connection if the
7XV53 star coupler is used as a
Fig. 8/14 Remote relay communication
communication node (Fig. 8/14).
The relays are connected to the star
coupler via optical fiber links. Every The relays are always listening, but This way, secure and time-saving re-
protection device which belongs to only the addressed one answers the mote setting and readout of data are
a DIGSI 4 substation structure has operator command which comes possible.
a unique address. from the central PC.
Remote diagnostics and control of
If the relay located in a station is to test routines are also possible with-
be operated from a remote office, out the need of on-site checks of
then a device file is opened in DIGSI 4 the substation.
and the protection dialog is chosen
via modem.
After password input, DIGSI 4 estab-
lishes a connection to the protection
device after receiving a call-back
from the system.
8/23 8
Enclosures and terminal systems Ring tongue connectors and forked special precautions are to be taken.
cable lugs can be used for connec- In the housing version for surface
The protection devices and the corre-
tion. To meet the insulation path re- mounting, the terminals are wired up
sponding supplementary devices are
quirements, insulated cable lugs on terminal strips on the top and bot-
available mainly in 7XP20 housings.
must be used. Or else, the crimping tom of the device. For this purpose
Installation of the modules in a cabi-
zone must be insulated by other suit- two-tier terminal blocks are used to
net without the enclosure is not
able means (e.g. by covering it with attain the required number of terminals.
permissible.
shrinkdown plastic tubing).
According to IEC 60529, the degree
The width of the housing conforms
The following requirements must of protection is indicated by the identi-
to the 19" system with the divisions
be observed: fying IP, followed by a number for the
1/6, 1/3, 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19" rack. The
degree of protection. The first digit
termination module is located at the Cable lugs
indicates the protection against acci-
rear of devices for panel flush mount- Bolt diameter is 4 mm; maximum
dental contact and ingress of solid
ing or cabinet mounting. outer diameter is 10 mm;
foreign bodies, the second digit indi-
for cable cross sections of 1.0 mm
Screw terminals are available for cates the protection against water.
to 2.6 mm AWG 16 to 14 accordingly.
devices intended for: 7XP20 housings are protected
Only use copper conductors!
C Panel and cabinet mounting against ingress of dangerous parts,
and Direct connection dust and dripping water (IP 51).
C Devices with a separate operator Solid conductors or litz conductors
For mounting of devices into
station with end sleeves; for cable cross
switchgear cabinets, 8MC switchgear
sections of 0.5 mm to 2.6 mm AWG
The following screw-connection cabinets are recommended.
20 to 14 accordingly.
types are to be distinguished:
The terminating end of the single The standard cabinet has the
C Connector modules for voltage con-
strand or conductor must be pushed following dimensions:
nection and
into the terminal compartment in
C Connector modules for current con- 2,200 mm x 900 mm x 600 mm
such a way that it will be pulled into
nection (H x W x D). These cabinets are pro-
it when the clamping screw is tight-
vided with a 44 U high mounting rack
Clamping screws are slotted screws ened. Only use copper conductors!
(standard height unit U = 44.45 mm).
which shall be tightened with a
Wire stripping length It can swivel as much as 180° in a
screw driver. A simple, 6 x 1 slotted
9 mm to 10 mm for solid conductors. swing frame. The rack provides for a
screw driver is suitable for this type
mounting width of 19", allowing, for
of screw heads. Tightening torque
example, 2 devices with a width of
Max. 1.8 Nm.
1/2 x 19" to be mounted. The devices
The heavy-duty current plug connec- in the 7XP20 housing are secured to
tors provide automatic short-circuit- rails by screws. Module racks are not
ing of the current transformer circuits required.
when the modules are withdrawn.
Whenever secondary circuits of
current transformers are concerned,

8.3 Relay Selection Guide
Pilot wire differential
current comparison
Distance protection
Optical waveguide
Overcurrent
Differential
7SD600
7SD610
7UT612
7UT613
7SJ600
7SJ602
7VH60
7UT63
7SS60
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SA6
Type
Protective functions
ANSI No.1) Description
14 Locked rotor – – – – – – – V V V V – – – – –
21 Distance protection, phase C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
21N Distance protection, ground C – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
21FL Fault locator C – – – – – – – V V V – – – – –
24 Overfluxing ( U/f) – – – – – – – – – – – – V V – –
25 Synchro-check V – – – – – – – – – V – – – – –
27 Undervoltage V – – – – – – – V V V – – – – –
27/34 U/f protection – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
voltage/frequency protection
32 Directional power – – – – – – – – – – V – – – – –
32F Forward power – – – – – – – – – – V – – – – –
32R Reverse power – – – – – – – – – – V – – – – –
37 Undercurrent or underpower – – – – – – V C C C C – – – – –
40 Protection against under-excitation – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
46 Load unbalance protection – – – – – – C C C C C V – V – –
47 Phase sequence monitoring C – – – – – – – C C C – – – – –
48 Start-up current-time monitoring – – – – – – V V V V V – – – – –
49 Thermal overload V – C – – C C C C C C C C C – –
49R Rotor overload protection – – – – – C C C C C C – – – – –
49S Stator overload protection – – – – – C C C C C C – – – – –
50 Instantaneous overcurrent C C C C C C C C C C C – C C C –
50N Instantaneous ground fault overcurrent C – C – – C C C C C C – C C C –
50BF Breaker failure V – V – – – C C C C C V V V V –
51GN Stator ground-fault overcurrent – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
51 Overcurrent with time delay C C C C C C C C C C C – C C C –
C Standard function V Option

1) ANSI (American National Standards Institute) /IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers)
C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers
Table 8/6 Relay selection guide
8/25 8
Pilot wire differential
current comparison
Distance protection
Optical waveguide
Overcurrent
Differential
7SD600
7SD610
7UT612
7UT613
7SJ600
7SJ602
7VH60
7UT63
7SS60
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SA6
Type
51N Ground-fault overcurrent C – C C C C C C C C C – C C C –
with time delay
51V Voltage-dependent – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
overcurrent-time protection
59 Overvoltage V – – – – – – – V V V – – – – –
59N Residual voltage ground-fault protection V – – – – – C – C C C – – – – –
64 100% rotor ground fault protection (20 Hz) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––
64R Rotor ground fault – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
67 Directional overcurrent – – – – – – – – C C C – – – – –
67N Directional ground-fault overcurrent V – – – – – C – C C C – – – – –
67G Stator ground fault, – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
directional overcurrent
68 Oscillation detection (Block Z <) V – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
74TC Trip circuit monitoring C – C – – – C – – – – – V V V –
78 Out-of-step protection – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
79 Autoreclose V – V – – V V V V V V – – – – –
81 Frequency relay C – – – – – – – V V V – – – – –
81R Frequency change protection – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––
85 Carrier interface C V C – – – – – – – – – – – – –
86 Lockout C C C – – – – C C C C – C C C C
87G Differential protection, generator – – – – – – – – – – – – C C C –
87T Differential protection, transformer – C V – – – – – – – – C C C C –
87BB Differential protection, busbar – – – – – – – – – – – – C C C C
87M Differential protection, motor – – – – – – – – – – – – C C C –
87L Differential protection, line – C C – – – – – – – – – C C C –
87N Ground-fault differential protection – – – – – – – C C C C C V V V –


Generator and motor
7RW600 Voltage, frequency

Synchronization
Breaker failure
protection
7SV600
7UM61
7UM62
7VE6
Type
14 Locked rotor C C – – –
21 Distance protection, phase V V – – –
21N Distance protection, ground – – – – –
21FL Fault locator – – – – –
24 Overfluxing ( U/f) C C – – V
25 Synchro-check – – C – –
27 Undervoltage C C V – C
27/34 U/f protection C C – – –
voltage/frequency protection
32 Directional power – C – – –
32F Forward power V C – – –
32R Reverse power C C – – –
37 Undercurrent or underpower – C – – –
40 Protection against under-excitation V C – – –
46 Load unbalance protection V V – – –
47 Phase sequence monitoring C C – – –
48 Start-up current-time monitoring V V – – –
49 Thermal overload C C – – –
49R Rotor overload protection – – – – –
49S Stator overload protection C C – – –
50 Instantaneous overcurrent C C – – –
50N Instantaneous ground fault overcurrent C C – – –
50BF Breaker failure C C – C –
51GN Stator ground-fault overcurrent – C – – –
51 Overcurrent with time delay C C – – –

8/27 8
Generator and motor
7RW600 Voltage, frequency

Synchronization
Breaker failure
protection
7SV600
7UM61
7UM62
7VE6
Type
51N Ground-fault overcurrent C C – – –
with time delay
51V Voltage-dependent C C – – –
overcurrent-time protection
59 Overvoltage C C V – C
59N Residual voltage ground-fault protection C C – – –
64 100% rotor ground fault protection (20 Hz) – V V – –
64R Rotor ground fault C C – – –
67 Directional overcurrent C C – – –
67N Directional ground-fault overcurrent C C – – –
67G Stator ground fault, C C – – –
directional overcurrent
68 Oscillation detection (Block Z <) – V – – –
74TC Trip circuit monitoring C C – – –
78 Out-of-step protection – V – – –
79 Autoreclose – – – – –
81 Frequency relay C C V – C
81R Frequency change protection V V V – V
Vector jump relay V V V – –
85 Carrier interface – – – – –
86 Lockout C C V – –
87G Differential protection, generator – C – – –
87T Differential protection, transformer – C – – –
87BB Differential protection, busbar – – – – –
87M Differential protection, motor – C – – –
87L Differential protection, line – – – – –
87N Ground-fault differential protection – V – – –


Infeed
Transformer
protection,
see Fig. 8/20
B I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ARC

Further 51 51N 46 79 7SJ60
feeders
2) 1)
8.4 Typical Protection
Schemes C I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
51 51N 46 7SJ60
Radial systems
Notes on Fig. 8/15 Load
1)ANSI no. 79 only for reclosure with
overhead lines. D I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
2)Negative sequence o/c protection 51 51N 46 7SJ60
46 as back-up protection against * Alternatives:
asymmetrical faults. 7SJ45/46, 7SJ61
General notes: Load Load
C The relay (D) with the largest dis-
tance from the infeed point has the Fig. 8/15 Protection scheme with definite-time overcurrent-time protection
shortest tripping time. Relays fur-
ther upstream have to be time-
graded against the next down- Infeed
stream relay in steps of about 0.3 Transformer protection,
seconds. see Fig. 8/22
C Dependent curves can be selected
according to the following criteria: 52 52
C Definite time:
7SJ60* 7SJ60*
Source impedance is large com-
pared to the line impedance, i.e. 52 I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ϑ> 52 I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ϑ>
small current variation between 51 51N 46 49 51 51N 46 49
near and far end faults
C Inverse time:
Longer lines, where the fault cur
rent is much less at the end of the
line than at the local end.
C Highly or extremely inverse time:
Lines where the line impedance is
large compared to the source im-
pedance (high difference for close-
in and remote faults) or lines,
where coordination with fuses or
reclosers is necessary. Steeper * Alternatives:
characteristics also provide higher 7SJ45/46, 7SJ61
stability on service restoration
(probes for cold load pickup and Fig. 8/16 Protection scheme for ring circuit
transformer inrush currents).
Ring circuits with about 0.2 s grading-time delay

to be preferred)
General notes on Fig. 8/16
C Thermal overload protection for the
C Tripping times of overcurrent relays cables (option)
must be coordinated with down- C Negative sequence o/c protection
stream fuses of load transformers. 46 as sensitive protection against
(Highly inverse time characteristic unsymmetrical faults (option)
8/29 8
Infeed
52 I>>, IE>>, I2>, t 52

I>, t IE>, t
50/ 50N/ 7SJ60
51 46
51N 7SJ61
Distribution feeder with reclosers
General notes on Fig. 8/17: 79 Autoreclose Further
C The feeder relay operating charac- feeders
teristics, delay times and autoreclo- Recloser
sure cycles must be carefully coor-
dinated with downstream reclosers,
switch disconnectors and fuses.
Sectionalizers
The instantaneous zone 50/50N is
normally set to reach out to the first
main feeder sectionalizing point. It Fuses
has to ensure fast clearing of close-
in faults and prevent blowing of
fuses in this area (“fuse saving”).
Fig. 8/17 Protection scheme for distribution feeder
Fast autoreclosure is initiated in this
case. Further time-delayed tripping
and reclosure steps (normally 2 or 3)
have to be graded against the Infeed
recloser. 52
C The o/c relay should automatically
switch over to less sensitive charac- 52 I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t 52
teristics after longer load interrup- 51 51N 49 46 7SJ60
tion times to enable overriding of
subsequent cold load pickup and
OH line or OH line or Protection
transformer inrush currents. cable 1 cable 2 same as
line or cable 1
67 67N 51 51N 7SJ62
52
52
52
52 52
Load Load
Fig. 8/18 Protection concept for parallel lines
Parallel lines faults on the protected line. This

allows the saving of one time-
General notes on Fig. 8/18:
grading interval for the o/c relays
C This configuration is preferably
at the infeed.
used for the uninterrupted supply
C The o/c relay functions 51/51N
of important consumers without
have each to be time-graded
significant backfeed.
against the relays located
C The directional o/c protection
upstream.
67/67N trips instantaneously for

Infeed
52
52
52 7SJ60 1) 52
79
2)
51N/ 7SD600
87L 49 or 4)
51N
7SD610
Same
Line or 7SJ60 3) protection
Cables or short overhead lines cable for parallel line,
if applicable
with infeed from both ends 7SD600
51N/ 87L 49
51N or 4)
Notes on Fig. 8/19: 7SD610
2)
1) Auto-reclosure only with
52 79 52
overhead lines 1)
2) Overload protection only 52

with cables
52 52 52 52
3) Differential protection options:
C Type 7SD610 with direct fiber-optic Load Backfeed
connection up to about 35 km (ap-
prox. 22 miles) or via a 64 kbit/s Fig. 8/19 Protection scheme using differential protection
channel of a general purpose PCM
connection (optical waveguide,
microwave) HV infeed
C Type 7SD600 with 2-wire pilot
cables up to about 12 km 52 I>> I>, t IE> ϑ> I2>, t
(approx. 7.5 miles)
50 51 50N 49 46 7SJ60
4) Functions 49 and 79 only with re-
lays of type 7SD610. 7SD600 is a
Optional resistor or
cost-effective solution where only 63 reactor
RN
the function 87L is required (exter-
nal 4AM4930 current summation
transformer to be installed I>>
separately).
87N
51G
52 7VH60 7SJ60
IE>
Distribution bus
52
Fuse
o/c relay
Load Load
Fig. 8/20 Protection scheme for small transformers
Small transformer infeed 7VH80 is of the high-impedance

type and requires class X current
General notes on Fig. 8/20:
transformers with similar transfor-
C Ground faults on the secondary
mation ratio.
side are detected by current relay
51G which, however, has to be C Primary breaker and relay may be
time-graded against downstream replaced by fuses.
feeder protection relays. The re-
stricted ground-fault relay 87N may
additionally be used to achieve fast
clearance of earth faults in the sec-
ondary transformer winding. Relay
8/31 8
Dual infeed with single

transformer Protection line 1 Protection line 2
same as line 2 21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
Notes on Fig. 8/21:
52 52
1) Line current transformers are to be
connected to isolate stabilizing in- 7SJ60 oder
puts of the differential relay 87T in 7SJ61
order to assure stability in case of I>> I>, t IE>, t
line-through-fault currents. 50 51 51N
2) Relay 7UT613 provides numerical
ratio and vector group adaptation. 46 49
Matching transformers, as used I2> ϑ>
with traditional relays, are there- 63 87N 87T 7UT613
fore no longer necessary.
Parallel incoming to transformer 7SJ60 51G

feeders
I>> IE>
Note on Fig. 8/22: 7SJ60
The directional functions 67 and 51 51N
67N do not apply for cases where 52
the transformers are equipped with Load
transformer differential relays 87T. bus
52 52 52
Load
Fig. 8/21 Transformer protection scheme
HV infeed 1 7SJ60 or HV infeed 2

7SJ61
52 I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t 52
50 51 51N 49 46
Protection
same as
infeed 1
63 7SJ62
I>, t IE>, t I> IE>

51G IE>, t
51 51N 67 67N
7SJ60
1)
52 52
Load
bus
52 52 52
Load Load Load
Fig. 8/22 Protection scheme for transformers connected in parallel

Small and medium-sized motors

< 1 MW I>> IE> ϑ> Locked I2>
52
rotor
With effective or low-resistance
49
grounded infeed 50 51N 49 CR 46 7SJ60
(IIE ≥ IN Motor)
General note on Fig. 8/23:
Applicable to low-voltage motors and
M
high-voltage motors with low-resist-
Fig. 8/23 Protection scheme for small motors
ance grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor).
With high-resistance grounded in-

feed (IIE ≤ IN Motor)
52 I>> ϑ> I2> I<
Notes on Fig. 8/24: 1)
1) Window-type zero-sequence 7SJ62
50 49 46 37 or
current transformer. 7SJ602
2) Sensitive directional earth-fault IE> 2) 3)
protection 67N only applicable 7XR96
1) 51G 67N
with infeed from isolated or Peter- 60/1A
son-coil-grounded network. (For di-
mensioning of the sensitive direc-
tional ground-fault protection, also
M
see application circuit No. 24)
Fig. 8/24 Protection scheme for medium-sized motors
3) Relay type 7SJ602 may be used
for power systems with isolated
neutral or compensated neutral
52 I>> ϑ> U<
Large HV motors > 1 MW I2>
Notes on Fig. 8/25: 50 49 46 27

1) Window-type zero-sequence
current transformer. optionally
IE> 2) I< 37
7XR96
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault 1) 51N 67N
protection 67N only applicable 60/1A
with infeed from isolated or Monitoring of
Peterson-coil-grounded network. the start-up 49T 87M 7UM62
stage 3) 5)
3) This function is only needed for
motors where the start-up time is 3)
Speed
longer than the safe stall time tE.
According to IEC 79-7,tE is the
switch M Option:
thermistor
4)
time needed to heat up AC wind-

ings, when carrying the starting
current IA, from the temperature
reached in rated service and at
maximum ambient temperature
Fig. 8/25 Protection scheme for large motors
to the limiting temperature.
8/33 8
A separate speed switch is used to

monitor actual starting of the motor. MS
The motor breaker is tripped if the
motor does not reach speed in the
preset time. The speed switch is part
of the motor delivery itself. G I>, IE>, t I2> ϑ>
51 7SJ60
4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120 51N 46 49
5) 49T can only be implemented

using 7XV5662 thermobox
Fig 8/26 Protection scheme for smallest generators with solidly grounded neutral conductor
Smallest generators < 500 kW
Note on Fig. 8/26 and 8/27:
If a window-type zero-sequence cur- MS
rent transformer is provided for sen-
sitive ground-fault protection, relay
7SJ602 with separate ground current G1 I>, IE>, t I2> ϑ>
input can be used (similar to Fig. Generator 2 51
46 49 7SJ60
8/24). 51N
1)
Small generator up to 1 MW
VN
Note on Fig. 8/28: RN =
√3 • (0.5 to 1) • Irated
Two current transformers in
V-connection are sufficient.
Fig. 8/27 Protection scheme for smallest generators with a resistance-grounded
neutral conductor
52
1)
Field
f>
<
G 81
I>, t ϑ> I2> P> U>
51 49 46 32 59 7UM61
IE>, t
51N
Fig. 8/28 Protection scheme for generators > 1 MW

Generators > 1 MW
MS
Notes on Fig. 8/29: 52
1) Functions 81 and 59 only required
where drives can assume excess
speed and voltage controller may 50 I>/U<
permit rise of output voltage above 27
upper threshold.
2) The integrated differential protec- 59 U<
1) 2)
tion function may be used as longi-
tudinal or transverse differential ∆I 87
protection for the generator. 1)
RE field< 81 f>
<
7UM62
G 64R
Field
I2> ϑ> I>t, U< L.O.F. -P>
46 49 51V 40 32
IE>, t
51N 87N
Fig. 8/29 Protection scheme for generators > 1 MW
8/35 8
Busbar protection by o/c relays

with reverse interlocking Infeed
General note on Fig. 8/30:

Applicable to busbars without sub-
stantial (< 0,25 x IN) backfeed from
the outgoing feeders. Reverse interlocking
7SS60 busbar protection I>, t0 I>, t

General note on Fig. 8/31 50 51 7SJ60
50N 51N
C Applicable for single and double
busbars
52
C Different current transformer ratios
t0 = 50 ms
are balanced by intermediate-circuit
transformers
C Unrestricted number of feeders
C Feeder protection may be con-
nected to the same current 52 52 52
I> I>, t I> I>, t I> I>, t
transformer core
50 51 50 51 50 51
50N 51N 50N 51N 50N 51N
7SJ60 7SJ60 7SJ60
Fig. 8/30 Busbar protection with reverse interlocking
7MT70 7SS601
87
BB
52
86
52 52 52
7SV60 7SV60 7SV60 1)
50 50 50
BF BF BF
Load G 7SS60
Fig. 8/31 S 7SS60 busbar protection

8/37 8
Power Management
chapter 9
9 Power Management
Power management is the special en- An efficiency improvement of the amounts actually used to those stipu-
ergy point of view of an industrial equipment/consumer devices saves lated in the existing continuous pur-
plant, a commercial building, or other energy and reduces cost directly. This chasing contracts. If the amount
piece of property. The view begins optimization is carried out by retro- used threatens to exceed the latter,
with the energy import, expands to fitting. When making invitations to ten- import monitoring will influence the
its distribution and ends at the supply der for new equipment, an optimal ef- power consumption. This can occur
to the devices themselves. ficiency should be demanded. within the power management via
priorities-list controls, planning or, if
All functions are directed towards the In addition to the ideal way of reduc-
possible, by involving in-plant genera-
operator with the goal of enabling an ing power costs through limiting
tion of power.
economical operation. power consumption, power manage-
ment aims, on the one hand, at an The use of several types of power in
To minimize the energy costs, one
optimal use of the existing contracts interrelation takes the cogeneration
can
– not exceeding the import quantity – optimization into consideration.
C directly influence the power con-
and on the other hand at concluding
sumption, In a turbine, process heat and elec-
the most advantageous new continu-
C modify the general specifications tricity are generated from gas. Costs
ous purchasing contracts – buying
for energy import through the best arising from this can be clearly allo-
neither too much nor too little.
possible use of stipulated provi- cated to the corresponding power
sions in the contract as well as The optimal use of existing contracts types.
through avoids penalties for exceeding the
C optimally negotiating new con- agreed-upon import quantities. Im-
tracts. port monitoring compares the
Energy purchasing Electricity, gas, district heat, diesel, water

Optimizing purchased quantities/prices
Import monitoring
Avoiding penalties
In-plant generation
Optimization of the energy mix Energy cost
Coordination of all energy types involved savings
Energy flow representation

Transparency of energy consumption
Efficiency improvement Energy

savings
Optimal energy exploitation
Fig. 9/1 Power management: the special energy point of view of an industrial plant, a commercial building, or other piece of property, etc.

Power Management
Electricity costs for in-plant genera-

tion are comparable to those of the Industry
energy market. As power costs on Infrastructure
the market change daily, this compar- Building automation Power distribution Process automation/
ison is not necessarily always favor- and control automated manufacturing
technology
able to in-plant generation. The same
considerations must be made when Heating Batches
Ventilation Sequential control systems
using the primary energy sources oil, Air conditioning Sequence processors
gas or coal. Time controllers
The energy flow representation via

load curves depicts the power con-
Feeder G
sumption over the course of time. It circuit- Busbar coupler
unit
visualizes the power consumption breaker Q1.0
behavior and provides transparency. Outgoing circuit-breaker

to sub-distribution board Transformer
Load curves make the most effective T7.3
Incoming circuit-breaker
statements if there is a direct refer- to sub-distribution board
ence to the technological process. By Switch-disconnector
Q12.4
evaluating the load curves, those re-
sponsible for the process can influ-
ence the power consumption behav-
ior in such a way that peaks are Fig. 9/2 Power distribution interfaces in industry and infrastructure
clipped and valleys are filled. If no
peaks appear in the lowest level of
power consumption, the import will Composition of power costs and the equipment in use. Another lever-
also – as sum of all power con- options for influencing them age is a change of that process that
sumers – have no peaks; a leveling is would yield an optimized degree of
The cost of (electrical) energy is com-
achieved. efficiency. If power consumption is
posed of quantity-based costs and
reduced by down-sizing production,
Energy flow representation, maxi- basic fees. At any time, quantity-
this is irrelevant for consideration.
mum-demand monitoring and the op- based energy costs can be employed
timization of the energy mix serve to as a lever to influence total energy
optimize energy purchasing. Only cost by improving the efficiency of
when the customer knows his re-
quirements exactly, can he use the
offer from the various power suppli- Energy costs
ers to his best advantage.
Energy savings Energy cost savings
Kilowatt-hour rate (electricity) Demand rate (electricity)
quantity costs basic fees
Influence Influence when negotiating new

contracts
via via
Efficiency improvement Continuous purchasing quantities
Benefit of liberalization
Optimization of power import and
in-plant generation
Fig. 9/3 Composition of power costs and options for influencing them
9/3 9
A reduction of basic fees by influenc-

ing demand charges can only be ef-
Purchasing associations Basis for
fected when a contract is changed. energy market
Considering regular contract terms of Energy Energy Dispatch Prognosis
5 years, this leverage is unsuitable purchasing transmission
Optimizing Virtual Default Broker
for immediate success. Contract contract setting for
purchased
Strategy: First, continuously monitor quantities/prices monitoring monitoring limit per site > 24 h, > 48 h
energy import, cut off peak supplies (per minute)
and level consumption. These new

Import Priorities- Planning In-plant
import load curves can be used as a monitoring list control power
basis for negotiating a new, lower im- Avoiding penalties generation
port limit at the next contract change.
Cross-connection Schedules Energy Inspection
Power distribution at the industry optimisation operation planning
and infrastructure level Coordination plans
of all energies
The distribution of power, whether involved
electricity, gas or water – as a connec-
tion of the energy import with the Energy flow Load curves Cost center Quality
representation assignment
power consumers – is set up for infra- Harmonics cos ϕ
Transparency
structure projects and industrial plants of energy Identical, different Automatic Overvoltages
consumption types of energy Manual input
with the same components. Electrical Transients Flicker
power distribution comprises medium
Efficiency Optimizing Thermodynamic
and low voltage. The interfaces from improvement equipment control systems
Totally Integrated Power for building Optimal energy
services automation and automated exploitation
manufacturing technology are storey Evaluations Reports Data Maintenance
distribution boards or motor control validation
centers. The multitude of devices
used in power distribution comprise
the components: Fig. 9/4 9/4 Power management modules
C circuit-breakers,
C isolators, switch-disconnectors, Transducers generate measurements power distribution is in the dimension-
fuses, with standardized interfaces; 1/5 A for ing of the individual elements and
C transducers, current transformers and 100 V for their interconnection with cables, bus-
C meters and measuring instruments; voltage transformers. These measure- bar trunking systems and switchgear
in the expansion, ments are placed on-site on display cabinets, in accordance with the local
C generators and units. A remote display requires a con- country standards.
C transformers version to 4- to 20-mA interfaces.
are also used. The planning tool SIMARIS design®
Generators transform mechanical en- supports this work when dimension-
Circuit-breakers switch and protect ergy into electrical energy. They are ing new systems or new designs.
the electrical power flow. They can be started and stopped, as well as having
When retrofitting systems in existing
switched and monitored both locally their power output regulated, either
power distribution systems, the cir-
and remotely. locally or remotely.
cuit-breakers, isolators, measure-
Disconnectors protect electrical in- Transformers reduce the voltage lev- ments for voltage, current, output, fre-
stallations. They can be switched on- els. They can be monitored and quencies, etc., along with the corre-
site and monitored both on-site and switched either locally or remotely. sponding transformers are often
remotely. already on hand.
The know-how of system-specific

Power Management
Neither new nor retrofitted systems

use the information available in the
distribution systems consistently. An Entire site
P
automatic recording via bus-capable Maximum-demand
devices is the prerequisite for a cen- monitoring
tralized display and evaluation. The of total import
same bus is also used for switching t
within the power distribution system.
See also Chapter 7 “Communications Sub-site Electricity
in Power Distribution.” If one further P
Maximum-demand
develops the initially described view monitoring
of power management as the special of sub-site
energy point of view of an industrial t
plant, a commercial building, or other
piece of property, modules will result
which describe power management
from the operator’s point of view.
Energy purchasing
In future, energy purchasing will tend
to move away from governmentally
stipulated standard contracts towards
market-oriented individual contracts.
Grafik 9/5 Einkaufsgemeinschaften – Energiedurchleitung
The maximum-demand contract is a
government-oriented standard con-
tract. Customer requirements will Purchasing associations – ergy supplier amongst the individual
play a much more important role, yet energy transmission companies. If a sub-site exceeds the
this will not cause the energy sup- maximum demand, this does not
plier’s interests to be neglected. Cus- If within an existing area several
necessarily lead to an exceeding of
tomers with insufficient knowledge of companies are formed out of one
the maximum demand of the entire
their requirement profile are, under company through restructuring, each
site: Thus no penalties will be
such market conditions, at a disad- one of these must be considered in-
charged. Since the total continuous
vantage from the very beginning. dividually with regard to its energy
purchasing contract does not repre-
Documenting the requirement profile import. The existing supply struc-
sent the sum of the maximum peak
in the form of a load curve over a tures cannot be adapted to the new
imports, the situation could arise in
lengthy period of time forms the ba- premises/building. Rather, the power
which the total maximum demand is
sis to advantageously structure con- infeed is assigned to one company.
exceeded, but each individual sub-
tractual negotiations. This company then assumes the role
site does not exceed its maximum
of the energy supplier for all of the
The liberalization of the energy mar- demand. An advanced warning and a
other companies formed on the
ket also provides the possibility to ex- purposeful reduction of the import
premises. Every company in the area
plicitly order base load, medium load limit of all the sub-sites reduces an
receives a maximum-demand con-
and peak load. Knowing the require- exceeding of the total maximum de-
tract. The energy supplier of the area,
ments exactly is an absolute must in mand. The skilled use of the total
as the representative of a purchasing
order to optimally use the energy continuous energy purchasing con-
association, concludes an external
market for the medium load and to tract results in cost advantages for all
continuous energy purchasing con-
avoid the spot market for the peak companies in the purchasing associa-
tract that includes the consumption
load. tion. Inside buildings there are com-
quantity of the entire area. This quan-
parable supply structures.
tity is then divided by the area’s en-
9/5 9
Purchasing associations –
dispatch
Dispatch is about a purchasing asso- Total import
ciation whose members are located P
at various sites. Examples of this are

companies with their branches or
amalgamations of several independ- t
ent companies. A virtual total contin-
Allocation of maximum
uous purchasing contract is formed imported energy
that represents the sum of all sites.
The virtual total continuous purchas- Return of available
switch-off power
ing contract monitors the maximum
demand and within the period – e.g.
15 minutes – distributes the energy
Pdefault ∆P Pdefault ∆P Pdefault ∆P
to the sites in such a way that the to-
tal continuous purchasing contract is
not violated. The trick with dispatch
Site A Site B Site C
is to combine consumption valleys of P P P
some sites with the consumption
peaks of other sites in such a way
that a continuous total import results.
t t t
Thus, the total import can be consid-
erably smaller than that which would
result from the sum of the individual Fig. 9/6 Purchasing associations – dispatch
sites. The goal of dispatch is on the
one hand, by pooling large quantities
of energy, to get a better import Basis for the energy market – For every day of the week, week-
price, and on the other hand to gen- prognosis ends, days taken off between a holi-
erate a continuous total import load The liberalized energy market allows day and the weekend to lengthen the
curve and thus enable a better ex- the purchase of energy via energy weekend, etc., that have a signifi-
ploitation of the continuous purchas- markets in addition to the usual im- cantly different power consumption,
ing contract. port of energy from the local power there is a standard load curve that is
supply company. In Leipzig (EEX), super-elevated/ adapted with the
Oslo (NordPool) and in Amsterdam daily temperature at 06:00 a.m. and
(APX), there are energy markets. the expected temperature at 12:00
Since quantities of energy that have noon. The procedures are proven and
to be ordered at least 24 h in ad- in use in many municipalities. In in-
vance are traded on these energy dustry, energy consumption is mainly
markets, only those customers/ con- linked to production; prognoses are
sumers who know their requirements to be structured in correspondence
in the future can bid on these mar- with this information.
kets. Consequently, a prognosis tool
is absolutely necessary for the load
side. The daily load curves have
proven themselves as prognoses in
the municipalities.

Power Management
Defined energy quantities can be ordered at fixed prices 24 h in advance.

Demand is established via prognosis procedures.
... A new contract will On the Internet,

be required due to the an amount is
peak established in the agreed upon with
prognosis. a broker.
Fig. 9/7 Basis for the energy market (Leipzig, Amsterdam) – prognoses
Site x Priorities list Consumption control
1 Consumer a ON OFF
block
P 2 Consumer b
3 Consumer c
release
Release
Blocking
n Consumer x
Feed-
back
M
0 t 15 Forced
ON
Fig. 9/8 Demand monitoring – priorities-list control
Import monitoring Import monitoring – with the imported energy limit. If the
priority-list control value rises too high, the loads will be
Every type of energy – electricity,
Power shifts are performed by loads either switched off or controlled
gas, sometimes water – has its own
that, without negatively influencing down, depending on their position in
continuous purchasing contract. On-
the production process, can be the priority list. If the period monitor-
line energy measurement generates
switched on and off or controlled ing shows that too little power is be-
a load curve, a curve trace as a
when required. These defined power ing consumed, the priority list’s loads
mountain range with peaks and val-
loads will be placed in a priorities list. will be released either for switching
leys. An ideal power import is charac-
Monitoring refers to the contractually on or controlling up. A priorities-list
terized by a curve trace that is as
agreed-upon imported energy limit, control reacts to the momentary ac-
level as possible. The goal is to re-
which should not be exceeded. This tual state of the energy import. Loads
duce peaks – higher energy con-
is a case of a period average, i.e., in are switched or controlled according
sumption – and to fill valleys – not
the period, the average of the actu- to the priorities list, however, only in
fully utilized power reserves.
ally imported power will be calcu- accordance with demand and not as
lated and permanently compared a result of direct planning.
9/7 9
Import monitoring – By carefully shifting individual batch starting points, peak load situation can be
detected in advance and prevented.
planning
Careful planning and control of en-
ergy consumption is an additional Characteristic
way to exploit the energy supply con- P
tract as much as possible. It is espe-
cially used where batch products are 100
created or processed that show typi-
cal energy requirement curves in reg-
Product A
ularly recurring intervals, because 55
their typical shape enables the prog-
nostication of load behavior. After the
analysis of the production require-
ments it is possible to time the pro- 0
duction processes in such a way that 10 20 30 40 t
an addition of load peaks is avoided
and thus the energy import curve is
leveled. An optimal envelope curve
Aggregated load curve
results that remains below the import
P Product is started in parallel
limit. Only in exceptional situations at the same point in time
will the priority control, that is now 110
subordinated to the control by plan- 100
ning, intervene. Regarding maximum-
demand monitoring for the measure-
ment of the energy types, the rele-
vant hardware (metrology), the
affiliated wiring, and a corresponding
software package for monitoring
must be installed. For the open-loop 0
control and closed-loop control of the 10 20 30 40 t
loads, the relevant wiring from the
maximum-demand monitoring into
the load control must be installed.
P Product is started within a
time shift of 8 time units
100
80
0
10 20 30 40 50 t
Fig. 9/9 Import monitoring – planning

Power Management
Import limit P
4.5 MW
Continuous energy
purchasing contract
Demand rate referred to €/kW
135
import limit 4.5 MW
Work
Kilowatt-hour rate 0.06 €/kWh 1.125 MWh
Period 15 minutes
15-minute 0 15 30 45 t
period
Fig. 9/10 Components of the continuous energy purchasing contract
Import monitoring – A demand rate is set for such an im- Example for costs in Fig. 9/10
in-plant power generation port limit. This demand rate, multi- Demand rate of 607,500 €
In-plant power generation within the plied with the imported energy limit, at 135 € /kW demand rate and
framework of import monitoring is is the monetary value to be paid an- 4,500 kW import limit.
another possibility to prevent energy nually. Such costs arise whether en-
Kilowatt-hour rate of 1,296,000 € at
import levels from being exceeded. ergy is used or not; they correspond
21,600,000 kWh power consumption
For example, existing emergency to the connection costs for domestic
and 0.06 € /kWh costs.
power units can be used to generate power supply.
operating current. (Power consumption at 360 days/
The quantity of energy actually used
24 h a day and medium power
Example of an electricity is calculated with the kilowatt-hour
requirements of 2,500 kW).
purchasing contract rate. The sum of the demand rate
The continuous energy purchasing and kilowatt-hour rate is then the to- Total costs of 1,903,500 € per year.
contract contains the parameters de- tal electricity cost. By clipping the im-
Clipping the import limit, e.g. by
mand rate, kilowatt-hour rate and pe- port peaks, a lower import limit can
10% (450 kW) corresponds to
riod. The supplier supplies a defined be agreed upon and the costs re-
60,750 € per year.
amount of electrical energy in a de- duced.
fined period. It doesn’t matter to him
when the agreed-upon amount of
electrical energy is used within this
period. When this is exceeded, how-
ever, penalties are assessed. The im-
ported energy limit is calculated from
the defined amount of energy within
the period and is an average value.
9/9 9
AIn the boilers B1 and B2, live steam

is generated using the primary ener-
External Water
purchase power gies coal or oil. This live steam is lead
Boiler Turbine unit to turbines T1 and T5. Inside of the
unit Air
B1
turbine, the live steam is flashed; it
powers the generation of electricity
T1 G in the generator and at the same
time generates heat for thermal
Oil Air
B2 loads.
The sum of the electricity from the
Coal
generators, the energy import from
T5 G power supply companies and other
in-plant generation, such as from wa-
ter power, generates the energy that
is made available for the electrical
Feed-water
storage tank loads. If one proceeds from the as-
sumption that electrical energy can-
Condensate
tank not be stored but must always be
available when it is needed, then this
aspect cannot be used as a control
Customers Thermal loads Electrical value. To control the entire system,
Return-flow Loads loads only the thermal load or the genera-
tion of live steam remains.
Fig. 9/11 Correlations (combined heat and power) The dependencies inside of the tur-
bine, including the non-linear correla-
tions, are documented in the turbine
Optimization of the energy mix The system differentiates between diagram.
two control possibilities. The fast
Cogeneration optimization stands for
control possibility of this system con- Energy flow representation
the dependencies of the transforma-
sists in using live steam to generate
tion of one type of energy into one or In the energy flow representation, the
a great deal of electricity and little
several others. We will use a com- measured values are represented over
heat, or a great deal of heat and little
bined heat and power plant as an ex- a period of time. These load curves
electricity. The slow control possibil-
ample here, which generates live demonstrate which energy was con-
ity consists in generating more or
steam from the primary energies oil sumed and when it was consumed.
less live steam. The exploitation of
and coal. This live steam is used to Using these load curves, a history can
this optimization potential is mathe-
generate steam in a turbine; the be displayed in the consumption pro-
matically a very demanding matter
flashed steam is made available for file up to the current time. The combi-
and is only worthwhile after an exact
the provision of heat (district heating, nation of the load curves with the
assessment. Cogeneration optimiza-
process heat). process knowledge represents the
tions can be interpreted along the
lines of cost, but also according to savings potential.
other criteria, e.g. ecological aspects.
For the measurement of the energy
types, the relevant hardware (metrol-
ogy), the affiliated wiring, and a cor-
responding software package for
monitoring must be installed.

Power Management
An expert interprets the load curves

and makes changes in the technical, Identical types of energy
technological or organizational levels. P
Effects, positive as well as negative, 1
can be checked immediately with the 1
help of the new load curves; a feed-
back arises in the shortest time, so 2
that an optimization of consumption 2
by clipping the peaks and filling in the 3 3
valleys can begin immediately. t
The load curve is an irreplaceable
measure in a modern company for Different types of energy
the continual energy monitoring and P
the optimization resulting thereof. 1
The load curves are always a repre- 1
sentation of the power output over a T G
period of time. If meters are in-
2
stalled, measurements are recorded 3
in the accompanying hardware and 2 3
converted to power values in the
software. To measure these ener- t
gies, the appropriate hardware
(metrology), the affiliated wiring and Fig. 9/12 Energy flow representation – load curves
a corresponding software package
must be installed.
Energy flow representation – Normal measurements are only de-
For the energy analysis, various load cost center assignment signed for expense distribution. To
curves are simultaneously displayed Every measurement inside of a sys- better use the measurements, each
one above the other. Via this repre- tem can be used for cost center as- measurement can be assigned sev-
sentation, correlations can be seen. signment. A differentiation is made eral different cost center via a % key.
These types of power engineering between certified measurements,
correlations and the various depend- In many cases, there is a meter read-
non-certified measurements and sim-
encies within a system are generally ing by means of receipts. These data
ple measurements. Only certified
not known to the operator. This rep- are transferred to the power manage-
measurements can be used as a ba-
resentation works out the complex ment system via screen mask input.
sis for invoicing.
interconnections. Documentation of The documentation of the data ac-
these is of great importance as one For expense distribution, the total
quired via reading receipts uses the
of the most important bases for proof power costs are distributed on the
same types of representation as the
of cost-cutting measures. basis of consumption to cost center.
automatic meter readings.
All measurements may be used for
in-house expense distribution.
9/11 9
Measurement
% Cost center Sum
per
cost
center
Rate 1 Total kWh
Transformer 1 Σ Rate 2 Total kWh
Rate 3 Total kWh
180
160
Transformer 2 140
120
100
Virtual measurement 80
Sum 60
% Cost center per

40
20
cost 0
1st quarter 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter
center
Rate 1 Difference kWh
Transformer 1 ∆ Rate 2 Difference kWh
Rate 3 Difference kWh
BD-350A
Fig. 9/13 Energy flow representation – cost center assignment (automatic)
Input 180
160
140
Measuring 120
100
Receipt point % Cost center Sum 80
Estimated per 60
40
value cost 20
0
Actual center
value
Rate 1 Total kWh
Time Σ Rate 2 Total kWh
Date Rate 3 Total kWh
Load curves
Fig. 9/14 Energy flow representation – cost center assignment (manual input)

Power Management
Measuring Documenting Influencing SIPCON

energy quality energy quality energy quality
1 Compensation
1
2
2
3 3
Grafik 9/15 Energieflussdarstellung – Qualität (cos ϕ, Oberwellen, Überspannungen, Flicker, Transienten)
Quality Flicker: Flickers are temporary net- Apparent power

Power quality stands for reactive work interruptions in the millisecond Reactive power
power, harmonics and flicker. range. The more flickers appear, the ϕ
poorer the network quality will be. Active power
In future continuous energy purchas-
Flickers can, within limits, be com-
ing contracts, these parameters will
pensated for with the appropriate de- cos ϕ = 0.9
play an increasingly important role.
vices.
Examples: Apparent power = 100 kVA
Reactive power: Every motor gener- Efficiency improvement Active power = 90 kW
ates a reactive-power component Reactive power = 43.6 kVAr
The efficiency improvement is al- ϕ = 25.8 degrees
(cos j = ratio of active power to ap-
ways directed towards the existing
parent power, see Fig. 9/16). Reac-
equipment. Through the use of con- Power types and cos ϕ
tive- power compensation systems Fig. 9/16
trollable drives, ECO motors, etc., an
adjust the generated reactive-power
energy saving is feasible from the
component to the default setting.
electrical point of view. Better insula- A constant workplace illumination
Harmonics: Electronic power loads,
tion improves the thermal efficiency. can be guaranteed by using a mix of
e.g. converters, generate harmonics.
Through full use of the control range daylight and fluorescent light. Energy
These harmonics are modulated up
– an adaptation to demand – or, by saving via new equipment requires
to the normal network frequency of
avoiding starts and stops – avoiding the latest technology and an optimal
50 Hz. A network voltage that is not a
start and stop losses – a further total design (power output always at the
pure sine wave arises. The higher the
efficiency improvement of the gener- optimal efficiency). This point of view
share of the harmonics (x % of the
ator is possible. In addition to the ef- is first of all generator-oriented, in the
fundamental component) is, the
ficiency improvement, these meas- second step the applied energy or
poorer the network quality will be.
ures also have a positive effect on type of energy plays a role.
The harmonics are measured and fil-
the mechanical service life of the
tered by the appropriate devices.
generator: it is increased. Through
the use of controllable fluorescent
lamps, only the amount of light
needed to illuminate the work area is
generated.
9/13 9
Efficiency improvement – thermo-

dynamic closed-loop controllers
The optimization of the start and
shut-down processes of thermody-
namic power loads (boilers) is not
only interesting from an energy point
of view, it also affects the mainte-
nance intervals and service life. The
MICROMASTER ECO Motors
lesser the start and shut-down times,
the lower the power loss. Because of Photo 9/1 Efficiency improvement – optimizing equipment
this, every operator attempts to ap-
proach the gradients (e.g. tempera-
ture) rated by the manufacturer, but
not to exceed them. Further advan-
tages are longer maintenance inter-
vals and a longer service life.
Evaluation –
reports
All information in the database is
compiled in reports and presented in
a customer-oriented manner. Shift Reduced start-up time
protocols, daily protocols, weekly sta-
Additionally,
tistics and monthly statistics serve as smoother, faster start-up,
examples here. Instant gradient violation
longer maintenance intervals,
longer service life
Maximum permissible
Reports present the data graphically, temperature gradient
as a list, or include both types of rep-
resentation in one.
Fig. 9/17 Efficiency improvement – thermodynamic closed-loop controllers
Evaluation –
data validation
Data validation forms characteristic Evaluation – Operating hours and operating cycle
values that allow a comparison with maintenance meters are integrated in the system,
other projects. The thermal energy The maintenance of a technical instal- however, they can be realized in the
consumption per square meter in an lation comprises, acc. to DIN 31051, automation systems. The mainte-
office building serves as an example the activities inspection (determina- nance schedule resulting from or rec-
here. The collected values of various tion of the actual condition), mainte- ommended by this forms the basis
items of real-estate (xx kJoule/m2 nance (maintaining the desired condi- for an efficient maintenance planning.
per month) serve as the comparative tion) and corrective maintenance The goal with this is the reduction of
figure. The lower the value is, e.g., (restoring the desired state). maintenance costs. The performance
the better the thermal insulation will of inspections and maintenance is
be. Via data validation, inter-site com- In addition to regularly scheduled
viewed realistically; it is done neither
parisons are made that reveal the maintenance, the system can be con-
too early nor too late. A system fail-
savings potentials that a point of nected online to the process in order
ure, which is usually associated with
view restricted to one locality cannot to cyclically calculate the actual run-
high repair and down-time expenses,
detect. time (operating hours) and/or the op-
is avoided.
erating cycles of the objects on the
basis of the status signals (ON/OFF).

Power Management
Daily load curve – total import
7000
6500
High rate
6000
Low rate
5500
5000
t
0:15
1:00
1:45
2:30
3:15
4:00
4:45
5:30
6:15
7:00
7:45
8:30
9:15
10:00
10:45
11:30
12:15
13:00
13:45
14:30
15:15
16:00
16:45
17:30
18:15
19:00
19:45
20:30
21:15
22:00
22:45
23:30
Fig. 9/18 Evaluation - reports
Comparison
180 Evaluation
160
140
Site A t 120
100 Feedback
80 to the
60 sites
40
P 20
0
Site B t
Fig. 9/19 Data validation – comparison of two sites with identical processes
9/15 9
The automatic calculation of the

maintenance schedule refers to the
earliest calculated time. In the exam- M-interval M-interval Recommended
data counter M-date
ple (Fig. 9/20 Maintenance orders), Runtime
1500 h 317 h 31. 07. 2000 10:05
the runtime determines the mainte- Operating cycles
nance order, operating cycles and 20.000 3108 31. 08. 2000 08:45
Calendar
maintenance schedule are of lesser 8 M 10. 11. 2000 12:15
importance. When the runtimes or Process signal
operating cycles are exceeded, the
represented value will continue to be Recommended M-date for your M-order 31. 07. 2000 10:05
counted with a negative sign up to
Data manager
the completion notice. A mainte-
nance order can be automatically acti-
vated when the recommended date
Process bus
is reached or manually at any time by
the operator.
The status display of the maintenance
shows all scheduled orders in tables.
Important data, such as operating
hours and operating cycles of the
object, recommended maintenance
Fig. 9/20 Maintenance orders
schedule, remaining runtime until the
next scheduled maintenance date,
check-control indicator and much
more are cyclically updated. Further
detailed information can be simply
called up by a “mouse click” on the
“Tabs”.
The check-control indicator breaks
down the maintenance time via 5
symbolic LED’s in 20% intervals. The
progress within the maintenance is
highlighted in color.
Fig. 9/21 Maintenance status

Power Management
Example of maximum-
demand monitoring Synchronous pulse from
with instabus EIB Switchover the power station
high
rate/low Visualization
Power costs are becoming rate software
increasingly important,
especially for process control. S0 inter-
face
In systems that are not monitored,
PC
power reserves, for example, must Maximum-
demand monitor instabus EIB
be kept ready in order to avoid
load over ranges, because these Meter
make themselves noticeably felt in
the calculation: expenses rise.
Actuators
This is where the maximum-demand
monitor steps in: It effectively sup- Electric heating
presses peak loads and thus unnec- Sensors Lighting
Fan
essary expenses. The only require-
Electric heating Loads available for load
ment is, to set up the process corre- management
Lighting
spondingly and create possibilities of Fan
temporally staggering the power con- ON/OFF, blocking or release
sumption. via pushbutton, binary inputs,
sensors or control modules
The result: One can reduce the or-
dered power reserves and further
Fig. 9/22 Schematic diagram of maximum-demand monitoring
save expenses.
Simple, transparent, efficient:

the maximum-demand monitor’s
work. On the basis of a defined maxi-
mum average power, the maximum-
demand monitor switches loads and
devices off or on again. In so doing,
operational switching by the operator
always has the highest priority. The
maximum-demand monitor only inter-
feres with operationally connected
loads in correspondence to the set
priority (1 to 10). Each of these loads
can be blocked from the correspond-
ingly assigned switch and released
again, i.e.: If the load is blocked, the
maximum-demand monitor is not
available for switching.
Photo 9/2 Maximum-demand monitor
9/17 9
Up to 120 channels
Up to 120 channels are available for
control. The device shows the actual
switching status of channels 1–8 via
LED’s. Special LED’s indicate if a
warning limit is exceeded during the
high or low rates, and a further dis-
play shows where the maximum-de-
mand monitor within the integration
period is temporally located.
Fig. 9/23 System-specific information and limit values are
entered in the general section
Easy commissioning
The maximum-demand monitor is
commissioned with the EIB-Tool soft-
ware for instabus®EIB®. The parame-
ters required for load control can be
set for all available 120 channels.
Fig. 9/24 Time delays for the restart function can be entered
Fig. 9/25 Specific statements about the switching

performance are made for the 120 channels

Power Management
Software for power statistics

The software for power statistics en-
ables the compilation of demand inte-
gration periods and daily, monthly
and annual statistics which can then
be exported to Excel for further eval-
uation. Through this, one can compile
statistics – the basis for the cus-
tomer’s negotiation of better and less
expensive supply contracts with the
power supply company.
The software for power statistics is
part of the instabus EIB EIB visualiza-
tion software and is also available as
a stand-alone version. It facilitates
online tracking of the switching priori-
ties with a PC and allows them to be
changed. The current switching sta-
tus and the important system param-
eters are displayed.
Fig. 9/26 Depiction of the maximum-demand monitor in the instabus EIB visualization software
Basically, however, the maximum-de-
mand monitor can also be operated
as a mere detection unit during a
recording phase. In this case, it
records load curves and consumption
values. The individual channels need
not be parameterized for this.
Integration period
The power statistics of an integration
period over 15 minutes are displayed
in minutes. Green and red: the re-
spective power demanded; red: the
released power; green: the switched-
off power.
Typical of this: The low power under-
range at the beginning and the low
power overrange at the end of the
integration period. Over the entire
cycle of the integration period, this
results in an even balance.
Fig. 9/27 Integration period
9/19 9
Daily profile
The evaluation of daily statistics
shows the individual integration peri-
ods. Switched-off and released
power outputs represent the de-
manded power of all loads. When
manually switching the loads, power
overranges are unavoidable. In spite
of changing the power demand, the
maximum-demand monitor limits the
released power and thus prevents an
exceeding of the admissible limit
value.
History database
In the instabus EIB visualization soft-
ware’s history database, the switch-
ing states of the channels are de-
picted in their temporal course – just
as they result from the priority as-
signment and requirements. Fig. 9/28 Power statistics as software tool with daily statistics
Fig 9/29 Switching states of the channels – history database

Power Management
Fig. 9/30 Power statistics
9/21 9
10 Measuring and Recording Power Quality

10.1 Overview
10.2 SIMEAS Q
10.3 SIMEAS R
Measuring and Recording Power Quality
chapter 10
10 Measuring and Recording Power Quality

10.1 Overview Power quality standards ergy at lower prices and to take cost
saving measures. These demands
The specific characteristics of supply
result in the following consequences
Introduction voltage have been defined in stan-
for the supplier:
dards which are used to determine
For more than 100 years, electrical C The energy rates will have to
the level of quality with reference to
energy has been a product, meas- reflect the quality supplied.
C Frequency
ured, for example, in kilowatt-hours, C Customers polluting the grid with
C Voltage level
and its value was determined by the negative effects on power quality
C Waveshape
amount of energy supplied. In addi- will have to expect higher power
C Symmetry of the three-phase
tion, the time of day could be consid- rates – “polluter-must-pay”
voltages
ered in the price calculation (cheap principle.
night current, expensive peak time These characteristics are permanently C Cost-saving through network plan-
rates) and agreements could be influenced by accidental changes ning and distribution (being differ-
made on the maximum and minimum resulting from load variations, distur- ent from today’s practice in power
power consumption within defined bances from other machines and by systems, which is oriented towards
periods. The latest development the occurrence of insulation faults. the customers with the highest
shows an increased tendency to in- In contrast to usual commodity trade, power requirements).
clude the aspect of voltage quality the quality of voltage depends not
The significant aspect for the cus-
into the purchase orders and cost cal- only on the individual supplier but,
tomer is that non-satisfying quality
culations. Previously, the term “qual- to an even larger degree, on the
and availability of power supply may
ity” was associated mainly with the customers.
cause production losses resulting in
reliable availability of energy and the
The IEC series 1000 and the stan- high costs or leading to poor product
prevention of major deviations from
dards IEEE 519 and EN 50160 de- quality.
the rated voltage. Over the last few
scribe the compatibility level required
years, however, the term of voltage Examples are in particular
by equipment connected to the
quality has gained a completely new C Semiconductor industry
power grid, as well as the limits of
significance. On the one hand, de- C Paper industry
emissions from these devices. This
vices have become more and more C Automotive industry (welding
requires the use of suitable measur-
sensitive and depend on the adher- processes)
ing instruments in order to verify
ence to certain limit values in volt- C Industries with high energy
compliance with the limits defined
age, frequency and waveshape; on requirements
for the individual characteristics as
the other hand, these quantities are
laid down in the relevant standards. Siemens offers a wide range of
increasingly affected by extreme load
equipment for the recording, archiv-
variations (e.g. in steelworks) and If these limit values are exceeded,
ing and evaluation of voltage quality.
non-linear consumers (electronic the polluter may be requested to
devices, fluorescent lamps). provide for corrective action.
Competitive advantage through

power quality
In addition to the requirements
stated in standards, the liberalization
of the energy markets forces the utili-
ties to make themselves stand out
against their competitors, to offer en-

10.2 SIMEAS Q Front view
The SIMEAS Q quality recorder

SIMEAS®Q is a is a measuring instru- PROFIBUS-DP 20 21 22 23 24 25
ment for recording electrical parame- SIMEAS Q RUN BF DIA
ters in power distribution systems, 7KG-8000-8AB/BB 75
which are utilized for power quality

analyses with regard to compliance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
to standards EN 50160 and IEC 61000,

for example.
90
Photo 10/1 SIMEAS Q power quality recorder
Application
The growing use of non-linear or un- Side view
balanced loads is increasingly having Special features Terminal block
an effect on power quality in supply
systems. However, many electronic C Cost-effective solution
consumers require a defined power C Interfacing to the SICAM®
quality in order to work properly. In- PAS power automation
adequate power quality has an ad- system possible
verse effect on the operating safety C Comprehensive measuring func-
of consumers within the power sup- tions which can also be used in
ply system and can cause outages the field of automatic control
with serious consequences. Com- engineering
plete recording and evaluation of C Function modules for
90
power quality according to interna- SIMATIC® S7-300/400
105
tional standards is imperative. C Minimum dimensions
C Communication Connection terminals
Functions C PROFIBUS-DP
SIMEAS Q is a cost-effective measur- C RS 232/modem 20 21 22 23 24 25
ing and recording instrument for qual- C RS 485 PROFIBUS-DP Aux. Volt.
ity monitoring of electrical power sup-
ply (low voltage / medium voltage). Measuring inputs SIMEAS Q
7KG-8000-8AB/BB
Besides a continuous recording of all 3 voltage inputs, 0–280 V
relevant parameters, the device is also 3 current inputs, 0–6 A
Input: Current AC Input: Volt. AC
capable of recording faults. In this Outputs/display IL1 IL1 IL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 ULN UL1 UL2 UL3
mode, measured values will only be C 2 relays as signaling outputs, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
recorded if one or several limit values available either for

All dimensions in mm
are exceeded. This enables the regis- – Device in operation
tration of all characteristics of voltage – Energy pulse
Fig. 10/1 SIMEAS Q power quality
quality according to the relevant stan- – Signaling the direction of energy recorder, dimension drawings
dards. The measured values can be flow (import, export),
automatically transferred to a central – Value below min. limit for cos ϕ Auxiliary power
computer system at freely definable – Pulse indicating a voltage dip
intervals via a standardized – 3 LED's indicating the operating Two types: 24 to 60 V DC and 110
PROFIBUS®-DP interface and at a status and PROFIBUS activity to 250 V DC, as well as 100 to
transmission rate of up to 1.5 Mbit/s. 230 V AC.
10/3 10
Two different connection methods

or system configurations are possi-
ble, depending on the application
and existing infrastructure. One is to
use a central PC as the master. It is Telecommunications
then possible to set up a system for network
SIMEAS Q
measured value acquisition and eval-
uation using the SICARO Q Manager
software. The other possibility is to
link up to a PLC system where the
SIMEAS Q is connected to the central
master as a slave.
SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q with PC as a master

Fig. 10/2 Using the SICARO Q Manager software and a PC with several SIMEAS Q units
The SIMEAS Q units are installed
at various points to record series
of electrical quantities in order to
analyze power quality. The measured
values stored in the device memory
are called up with a personal com-
puter via one of 3 possible communi-
cation interfaces and can then be
evaluated. For connection to a PC,
the following communication
interfaces are available:
C PROFIBUS-DP interface
C Modem-capable, serial SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q SIMEAS Q
RS232 interface
C Serial RS485 interface Fig. 10/3 SIMATIC S7 PLC as the master station with various PROFIBUS-DP slaves
SIMEAS Q with PLC systems as Detailed information on how to Function blocks are available for the
master retrieve measurement data from SIMATIC S7-300 and -400 PLC sys-
The SIMEAS Q version with a SIMEAS P via PROFIBUS is available tems, with an internal or external
PROFIBUS-DP interface opens up a to everyone in the SIMEAS Q user DP interface. They permit fast config-
further field of application. Together description. The open communication uration of customer-specific PLC
with programmable control systems interface permits data transmission programs for applications combining
(PLC), the SIMEAS Q can be used as between SIMEAS Q units and all SIMEAS Q with these PLC systems.
a ”sensor for electrical quantities“. types of PROFIBUS-DP Masters,
The PROFIBUS interface, imple- such as programmable controllers or
mented and certified according personal computers (with integrated
to standard EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS-DP hardware).
enables fast adaptation to PLC
systems. That way, measured
values acquired with the SIMEAS Q
can be used for control tasks.

Recording of measured values is

Measured variable Possible averaging time Max./min.
possible in two modes, which can
possible
be used simultaneously.
C Continuous recording Rms values phase-to-ground voltages 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
C Fault recording or phase-to-phase voltages 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Rms values phase currents 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
Continuous recording 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
In continuous recording, depending System frequency (always measured 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
on the setting for each measured at input UL1) 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
variable, the rms values are acquired Active power per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
and stored in the memory along with and total active power 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
the relevant time and date informa- Reactive power per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
tion. This records a “chain of meas- and total reactive power 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
ured values” whose resolution can
Apparent power per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
range from low to very high, depend-
and total apparent power 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
ing on the averaging time set.
Power factor per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
In “continuous recording” mode, the and total power factor 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
SIMEAS Q can record measured vari-
Voltage unbalance 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
ables as defined in the standards
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
(e.g. EN 50160). Acquisition of maxi-
mum and minimum values of meas- Current unbalance 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
ured variables within the measure- 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
ment period (averaging time) is also Flicker factor short-term 10 min fixed acc. to IEC 60868 and no
possible. Table 10/1 shows which per phase voltage (Ast or Pst) IEC 60868 A – Flicker meters
measured variables can be acquired Flicker factor long-term 120 min fixed acc. to IEC 60868 and no
by continuous recording, depending per phase voltage (Ast or Pst) IEC 60868 A1 – Flicker meters
on the type of power system.
1st to 40th harmonic voltage per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Fault recording
1st to 40th harmonic current per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
“Fault recording” means that meas- 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
urement data are recorded when the
Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec yes
average measured value violates one
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
or more defined upper or lower limits
(thresholds). When a limit is reached, Active energy – import / active energy – export 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min no
the current time and date information Reactive energy inductive / reactive energy capacitive
and the mean value since the last Apparent energy
limit violation of that measured vari-
Table 10/1 Possible measured variables for continuous recording
able are stored in the memory.
This type of recording is primarily corresponds to the rms value, with

used for recording voltage dips. To the set thresholds and is thus able to
record voltage dips, the lowest possi- record very short voltage dips. Table
ble averaging time of 10 ms is se- 10/2 shows the measured variables
lected. During measurement, the for which fault recording can be para-
SIMEAS Q compares the half period meterized.
measurement of a variable, which
10/5 10
Data memory and data

Measured variable Possible averaging time Number of
transmission
thresholds
The SIMEAS Q has a measurement Rms values phase-to-ground voltages 10, 20, 50, 100, 500 ms 5
memory with a capacity for 70,000 or phase-to-phase voltages 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec
measured values. The information on 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
time and date of the measurement
Rms values phase currents 10, 20, 50, 100, 500 ms 5
are stored along with each measured
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec
value.
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
In normal measurement mode, the System frequency 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2
capacity of the data memory indi- (always measured at input UL1) 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
rectly defines the intervals at which
Active power per phase and 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2
the PC must retrieve measurement
total active power 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
data in order to obtain an unbroken
chain of values. Retrieving measure- Reactive power per phase and 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2
ment data frees capacity in the total reactive power 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
SIMEAS Q, which is then available Apparent power per phase and 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2
again for new measurement data. total apparent power 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
If the measurement data are not Power factor per phase and 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2
retrieved, the SIMEAS Q goes into total power factor 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
memory overflow / ring buffer mode, Voltage balance 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 5
which causes loss of data and gaps 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
in the measured value chain. Current balance 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 5
It must therefore be ensured that the 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
measured data are always retrieved 1st to 40th harmonic voltage per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2 per
before memory overflow / ring buffer 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min harmonic
mode occurs. 1st to 40th harmonic current per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2 per
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min harmonic
Relay outputs
Total harmonic distortion (THD) 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec 2
The SIMEAS Q is fitted with 2 relay per phase 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
outputs (opto-relays). One of the fol-
lowing functions can be assigned to Table 10/2 Possible measured variables for fault recording
these outputs:
C Indication device active C Pulses on voltage dips (contact Information on SIMEAS Q
(switched on) closed for 500 ms if violation of the configuration
C Energy metering pulse per settable first threshold below rated voltage
energy value for: Up to 400 V (L-L), the device is con-
detected)
– Active energy, energy import nected directly, or, if higher voltages
– Active energy, energy export The relay outputs enable the are applied, via an external trans-
– Reactive energy, capacitive SIMEAS Q to be used for acquisition former. The rated current values
– Reactive energy, inductive of measured values and for energy are 1 and 5 A (max. 6 A can be
– Apparent energy metering. measured) without switchover.
C Indication active power import
(contact open) or active power
export (contact closed)
C Limit cos ϕ
((contact closed for as long as cos ϕ
is lower than a settable limit value)

Single-phase AC current 4-wire 3-phase current, identical load
SIMEAS Q connection terminals SIMEAS Q connection terminals
3-wire 3-phase current, identical load 3-wire 3-phase current, any load
4-wire 3-phase current, identical load (low-voltage network) 4-wire 3-phase current, any load (high-voltage network)
Photo 10/2 SIMEAS Q connection examples
The above listed input circuitries are can also be connected in star or
merely examples. Up to the maxi- V topology. All of the input/output
mum permissible current and voltage terminals not required for measure-
values, the device may also be con- ments remain unassigned.
nected without current or voltage
transformers. Voltage transformers
10/7 10
10.3 SIMEAS R
Recording units
The SIMEAS R fault recorder and

PQ recorder
Application
C “All-in-one” recorder for extra-high-,
high- and medium-voltage systems.
C Component of secondary equip-
ment of power plants and substa-
Photo 10/2 SIMEAS R systems are used in Photo 10/3 … and to monitor overhead
tions or industrial plants. power plants … transmission lines
Functions
Digital fault recording system.
All functions can be performed simul-
taneously and are combined in one
unit with no need for additional de-
vices to carry out the different tasks.
Special features
C The modular design enables the
implementation of different config-
urations starting from systems with
8 analog and 16 binary inputs up to
the acquisition of data from any
number of analog and binary chan-
nels
C Clock with time synchronization
using GPS or DCF77
C Data output via postscript printer,
remote data transmission with a
modem via the telephone line,
connection to LAN and WAN
Photo 10/4 Fault recording
Fault recording
This function is used for the continu- Fault detection is effected with the Monitoring of the binary signals
ous monitoring of the AC voltages help of trigger functions. includes
and currents, binary signals and di- C Signal status (high, low)
With analog quantities this refers to
rect voltages or currents with a high C Status changes
C Exceeding the limit values for volt-
time resolution. If a fault event, e.g. age, current and unbalanced load
a short circuit, occurs, the specific (positive and negative phase
fault will be registered including its sequence system)
history. The recorded data are then C Falling below the limit values for
archived and can either be printed voltage, current and unbalanced
directly in the form of graphics or load (positive and negative phase
be transferred to a diagnosis system sequence system)
which can, for example, be used to C Limiting values for sudden changes
identify the fault location. in up- or downward direction.

Logic triggers Binary signals Depending on the individual network

Logic triggers can be defined by The sampling frequency at the binary configuration, a three- or four-wire
combining any types of trigger event inputs is 2 kHz. connection is used.
(analog or binary). They are used to
Data compression
avoid undesired recording by increas- Frequency/power recording (F/PR)
For best utilization of the memory
ing the selectivity of the trigger func-
space and for high-speed remote This function continuously monitors
tion. The device can distinguish be-
transmission, the data can be com- the gradient of the frequency and/or
tween different causes of a fault, e.g.
pressed to as little as 2% of their power of one or more three-phase
between a voltage dip caused by a
original size. feeders. If major deviations are de-
short circuit (low voltage, high cur-
tected, e.g. caused by the outage of
rent) which needs to be recorded, Fault diagnosis
a power plant or when high loads are
and the disconnection of a feeder Performed with the SICARO®
applied, the profile of the measured
(voltage low, current low) which software package.
values will be recorded including
does not need to be recorded.
their history. The recorder is also
Digital recording
Sequential control used for the registration of power
An intelligent logic operation is used This function is used for the continu- swings.
to make sure that each record refers ous registration of the mean values
Measured variables
to the actual duration of the fault of the measured values at intervals
C Frequency of one of the voltages,
event. This is to prevent continuous which can be freely defined.
(limit of error ±1 mHz)
violation of a limit value (e.g. under-
In single-phase and three-phase C Active power, reactive power
voltage) from causing permanent
systems, the following measured (reactive displacement power),
recording and blocking of the device.
variables are recorded: (limit of error ≤ 0.2%)
Analog measured values C Power factor
C R.m.s. values of voltages and
16-bit resolution for voltages and
currents Averaging interval
DC quantities and 2 x 16-bit resolu-
C Active power A value between 1 and 250 periods
tion for AC voltages. The sampling
C Reactive power of the network frequency can be
frequency is 256 times the network
C Power factor selected.
frequency, i.e. 12.8 kHz at 50 Hz and
C Frequency
15.36 kHz at 60 Hz for each channel. History
C Positive and negative sequence
Depends on the averaging interval;
A new current transformer concept voltage and current
10 s times the averaging periods.
enables a measuring range between C Weighted and unweighted total
0.5 mA and 400 Arms with tolerance harmonic distortion (THD) Automatic power analysis
ranges of < 0.2% at < 7 Arms and C 5th to 50th harmonics (depending With the help of the SICARO soft-
< 1% at > 7 Arms. Furthermore, di- on the averaging time) ware package (see SICARO page 08),
rect current is registered in the range C DC signals, e.g. from transducers a power analysis of a station can be
above 7 A; this enables a true image created automatically.
of the transient DC component in
the short-circuit current.
10/9 10
Load dispatch Office

center
R.m.s. values Spontaneous Spontaneous Containerized

and diagnosis print print Configuration Evaluation
database
WAN
ISDN Office
X.25 LAN
Telephone
Station level Decentralized database
Configuration Diagnostic system
Evaluation DAKON XP Data compression
Printer Remote control, automatic mode
Stations
LAN
Bay level SIMEAS R

8 analog/
16 binary inputs
Fig 10/3 Example of a distributed recording system realized with SIMEAS R recorders and a DAKON XP data central unit
“Sequence of Event” (SOE) approx. 120,000 status changes). The SICARO PQ evaluation
recording Modules are available for signal program
voltages between 24 and 250 V.
Each status change occurring at the The SICARO PQ software package
binary inputs is registered with a The time-synchronous power output is suitable for use in personal com-
resolution of 0.5 ms and is then enables the combined representation puters provided with the operating
provided with a time stamp indicating with analog curves, e.g. of alarm and systems MS WINDOWS 2000 or
the time information from the year command signals together with the WINDOWS XP. It is used for remote
down to the millisecond. course of relay voltages and currents. transmission, evaluation and
With the help of the SICARO pro- archiving (database system) of the
200 status changes per second
gram, the event signals can be dis- data received from a SIMEAS R or
can be stored for each group of 32
played in the form of a text list in OSCILLOSTORE® and from digital
inputs. The mass memory of the
chronological order. The use of a protection devices. The program in-
device can be configured according
separate SOE recorder will no cludes a parameterization function for
to requirements (a 5 MB memory,
longer be required. remote configuration of SIMEAS R
for example, enables the storage of
and OSCILLOSTORE units.

The program enables fully-automated Information for project planning

data transmission of all recorded with SIMEAS R
events from the acquisition units to
The secondary components of high
one or more evaluation stations via
or medium-voltage systems can ei-
dedicated line, switched line or a net-
ther be accommodated in a central
work; the received data can then be
relay room or in the feeder-dedicated
immediately displayed on a monitor
low-voltage compartments of
and/or printed (Fig. 10/3).
switchgear panels. For this reason,
The SICARO PQ program is provided the SIMEAS R system has been
with a very convenient graphical eval- designed in such a way as to allow
uation program for the creation of a both centralized or decentralized
time diagram with the curve profiles, installation.
diagrams of the rms values or vector
The recording unit can be delivered in
diagrams (Photo 10/7). The individual
two different widths, either 1/2 19" or
diagrams can, of course, be adjusted Photo 10/5 SIMEAS R for 8 analog and
19" (full width). The first version is fa-
to individual requirements with the 16 binary inputs, 1/2 19" design
vorable if measured values of only
help of variable scaling and zoom
one feeder line are to be considered
functions. Records from different
(8 analog and 16 binary signals). Of-
devices can be combined in one
ten, this also applies to high-voltage
diagram. The different quantities
stations where each feeder is pro-
measured can be immediately calcu-
vided with an extra relay kiosk for the
lated by marking a specific point in a
secondary equipment. In all other
diagram with the cursor (impedance,
cases, the full-width version of 19"
reactance, active and reactive power,
is more economical, since it enables
harmonics, peak value, rms value,
the processing of up to 32 analog and
symmetry, etc.).
64 binary signals. The modular struc-
Additional diagnosis modules can be ture with a variety of interface mod-
used to perform an automatic analy- ules (DAU’s) provides a maximum of
sis of fault events and to identify the flexibility. The number of DAU’s
fault location. The program also which can be integrated in the
supports server/client structures. recording system is unlimited.
With the help of a DAKON XP unit Photo 10/6 Rear view of a SIMEAS R unit
(see Fig. 10/3), several devices can with terminals for the signals and
interfaces for data transmission
be interlinked and automatically con-
trolled. In addition, digital protection
devices of different make can be
connected to the DAKON XP.
10/11 10
The voltage inputs are designed for

DAU version Measured values Application
direct connection to low-voltage
transformers. Current inputs are VCDAU 4 AC voltages Monitoring of voltages and currents
suitable for direct connection to 4 AC currents of three-phase feeders or
current transformers (IN = 1 or 5 A). 16 binary signals transformers including the signals
All inputs comply with the relevant from protective equipment.
requirements for protection devices
VDAU 8 AC voltages Monitoring of busbar voltages
acc. to IEC 60255. The binary inputs
16 binary signals
are connected to floating contacts.
CDAU 8 AC voltages Monitoring of supply lines and
Data transmission is preferably
16 binary signals transformer currents or currents
effected via telephone network or
at the incoming feeders and
WAN (Wide Area Network). If more
busbar couplings
than one SIMEAS R is installed, we
recommend the use of a DAKON XP DDAU 8 DC currents For monitoring of current quantities
unit (data collection platform). The or 16 binary signals supplied by transducers and
DAKON XP creates a link with the telecontrol units, 20 mA or
SICARO evaluation program, e.g. via 1 and 10 V
the telephone network. Moreover, the
BDAU 16 binary signals Event acquisition of alarm signals,
DAKON XP automatically collects all
disconnector status signals,
information registered by the devices
circuit-breaker monitoring
connected and stores these data on a
decentralized basis. The DAKON XP
performs a great variety of different Table 10/1 Use of the data acquisition units (DAU's)
functions, e.g. it supports the auto-
matic fax transmission of the data.
A database management system dis-
tributes the recorded data to different
stations either automatically or on
command.
Photo 10/7 SICARO program, evaluation and fault recording

10/13 10
11 Meters and Measuring Instruments

11.1 SIMEAS P Power Meter
11.2 SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities
11.3 Meters/Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices
11.4 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers
Meters and Measuring Instruments
chapter 11
11 Meters and Measuring Instruments

Today, it is standard procedure to
monitor currents, voltages and power
values in distributions in order to
know the system utilization so that
overloads do not occur. However, the
possibility to measure currents, volta-
ges and power values to increase sy-
stem availability has by far not been
exhausted. When using the measure-
ment results, this availability can be
better planned in relation to the uti-
lization level. There is a high potential
in this option. Prerequisite to this are
suitable measuring instruments, trans-
ducers and transformers.
If you have detailed information on
the consumption of the devices
connected to the power system and
use these data appropriately, a furt-
her great opportunity opens up: sa-
ving potentials and cost optimization
can be utilized in a target-specific
way. To do so, we offer you our po-
wer meters.
Photo 11/1 SIMEAS P power meter
Those who go one step further can
even save money when purchasing
energy and reduce the cost for the 11.1 SIMEAS P There is a wide range of industrial
and commercial applications. To
energy purchase. This potential bene-
fits those who analyze the load cur-
Power Meter match every requirement with the
ves of the actual power consump- most suitable device, devices are
SIMEAS P is a power meter for pa-
tion. For this we can also offer you available in different basic and exten-
nelboard mounting or DIN rail moun-
solutions up the online recording ded versions:
ting. It is used for the recording
via PC and an integration into our and/or display of measurements in el-
Power Management System (see Standard versions
ectric power supply systems. More
Chapter 9). than 80 measuring parameters, such C SIMEAS P500/P550 (with graphic
There is a high cost saving potential as phase voltages and currents, ac- display)
in the monitoring and selective con- tive, reactive and apparent power,
C SIMEAS P100 with the same func-
trol of the energy flow in complex po- symmetry factor, harmonic voltages
tionality as SIMEAS P500 but with-
wer networks and processes – in in- and currents, energy and external
out display
dustry as much as in functional and measuring parameters and operating
commercial buildings like bakeries states can be viewed at the graphic
and workshops. display and transferred to a central
computer system for further proces-
sing using the PROFIBUS-DP or Mod-
bus RTU/ASCII standards.

Extended versions C Harmonic voltages and harmonic Functionality

currents up to the 21st order
C SIMEAS P600/ P650 (with graphic Input voltages and input currents are
C Total harmonic distortion (THD)
display, memory, battery and clock scanned and used to generate the
C Constant high measuring accuracy
module) rms values. All derived quantities are
over many years, CE mark, UL li-
then calculated by a processor and
C SIMEAS P200 with the same func- sting, EMC proof
available for display on the screens
tionality as SIMEAS P600 but with- C Complies with all relevant national
and transfer via a serial interface.
out display and international standards
SIMEAS P also offers the possibility
C SIMEAS P610/ P660 has the same Connection to parameterize several limit groups
functionality as SIMEAS P600, but with the limit values of the measured
SIMEAS P can be connected to all ty-
it can additionally be equipped with quantities. They can be linked with
pes of power systems (up to 690-V
a maximum of 8 different analog AND/OR and their violation can be in-
systems) ranging from the single-
and digital input/output modules dicated at the meters or output at the
phase type to the 4-wire type, the
binary outputs. An oscilloscope trig-
connection is made either directly or
P500/P550 standard version gering is thus also possible.
via transformers. A universal power
C Suitable for connection to 3-phase unit with ratings from 24 to 250 V DC
Quality
systems in 3-wire and 4-wire de- and 100 to 250 V AC makes it truly
sign with identical or different universal. Development and production of the
loads, or to single-phase systems device in our Berlin plant which is
Operation ISO 9001-certified ensure the highest
C Large graphic display with back-
possible quality standard. For the
ground lighting Besides the graphic display, 3 push-
user this means a high degree of sys-
buttons have been integrated in the
C Very easy parameterization and ca- tem protection, reliability and a long
device front for device operation.
libration via panel front keys or service life of the devices. Further
Clear designations and texts and an
using a PC-based parameterization quality features are their high preci-
uncomplicated, menu-guided para-
software sion which remains constant over the
meterization make SIMEAS P opera-
years, CE mark, EMC proof and the
C The number and contents of the tion simple and easy to understand.
fulfillment of all relevant national and
measurement display screens can
Measurement display international standards.
be configured by the user as desi-
The user can adapt the representa-
red
tion of measured quantities on the Safety
C Relay outputs can be parameteri- graphic display screens of the
Electrical isolation between the
zed for energy pulses, limit-value SIMEAS P to suit his requirements.
inputs and outputs with high test vol-
violations or status messages Up to 20 screens can be addressed
tages ensures the greatest possible
via the front panel keys. Their num-
safety. Parameterization and calibra-
Measured quantities: ber, type, content and sequence can
tion are secured against unauthorized
be parameterized. On the measure-
C Rms values of the phase voltages use via parameterizable password
ment screens, there is a status line
C Rms values of the phase currents protection.
which shows the status, interfacing
C System frequency
and diagnostic messages of the
C Active, reactive and apparent po-
SIMEAS P. The display is refreshed
wer
in intervals of 1 s.
C Active, reactive and apparent
energy per phase and for the entire
system
C Power factor per phase and for the
entire system
C Symmetry factor of currents and
voltages
11/3 11
SIMEAS P 7KG7
RS485/Modbus
1 Protective Ground
3A
4 RTS
5 GND
6 +5V
8B
PROFIBUS-DP
1 Protective Ground
Measurement Auxiliary voltage Communication 3B
4 CTRL-A
5 GND
6 +5V
8A
Voltage Current Communication

R 1 2
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 PE N/- L/+
PG
Terminal F Terminal E Terminal H Terminal G J
24 – 250 V DC
100 – 230 V AC RS485
L1 k l k l k l
RS232
L2
L3
N
Fig. 11/1 Inputs and outputs
Service
SIMEAS P devices require no mainte- Counters 1 to 4
nance and thanks to their modular Limit-value group 1
design, they are easily serviceable. UL1 < 690 V
Binary output 1/2
They can easily be calibrated using or UL2 < 690 V
the panel front keys or a PC and the or UL3 < 690 V
corresponding parameterization soft- Oscilloscope trigger
ware.
Fig. 11/2 Limit values

Inputs/Outputs
Fig. 11/1 shows the input/output cir- Limit values Binary outputs
cuitry of the SIMEAS P. Depending
Several limit-value groups with up to SIMEAS P has 2 binary outputs for
on the type of network, inputs which
6 measuring parameters can be set free parameterization as follows:
are not required are not allocated.
at the SIMEAS P. The measurements C Status messages
can be linked with AND/OR and C Energy quantities from the mea-
Communication
counted in counters if limits are viola- sured quantities table
Every SIMEAS P features 2 standard ted, or output to binary outputs and C Limit-value violations
protocols, PROFIBUS-DP and Mod- used for triggering the oscilloscope.
Pulse output time, hysteresis, ampli-
bus RTU/ASCII, as well as an internal
tudes of the energy quantities per
protocol for the SIMEAS P software.
pulse can also be parameterized.
Protocols are selected via the para-
meterization functions. The basis for Device versions
this is an RS485 interface with stan- SIMEAS P500 is also available with
dardized 9-pole D-SUB connector. UL listing.

Screens
Up to 20 screens can be selected on
the SIMEAS P display via the front
panel keys. If desired, this executive
routine can also be performed auto-
matically.
C The number, type and sequence of
the screens can be freely parame- Oscilloscope for sinusoidal values
terized.
Photo 11/2 Screens
C 9 screen types can be selected:
– 4 types of measured-value screens
– 1 list screen for min-ø-max values
– 2 screens for harmonics
– 1 screen for the oscilloscope
function
– 1 screen as vector diagram Oscilloscope for rms values
Measured-value screens Photo 11/4 Oscilloscope

C Number and content of the measu-
2 digital measured values
red-value screen with the measu- C The recording can either be started
red quantities can be individually manually or triggered by a limit vio-
designed lation
C In the default setting, the designa- C When the cursor measuring func-
tion of the measuring quantities is tion has been enabled, the cursor
additionally available: UL1, UL2, can be moved to the recorded sig-
UL3, cos ϕ or Va, Vb, Vc, PF etc. nals with the front panel keys and
C In the bar chart, the start and end the measurements can be read
2 digital/analogue measured values range can be parameterized from the cursor position
C Measured-value screens may be C When rms values are recorded, a
used any number of times maximum of any 3 parameters can
C The status line contained in the also be selected from the mea-
measurement screen shows the sured-quantities table
status and diagnostic messages of C Optimal peak value representation
the device of the measured quantities in the
C Screens are refreshed in intervals screen is conducted automatically
of 1 s C In the lower part of the screen,
4 digital measured values
there is a display which represents
Oscilloscope
the displayed part of the recording
C 3 parameters, voltage or current
can be selected from the measu- Vector diagram
red-quantities table (on page 11/11, In the Vector Diagram screen, the
Table 11/2) and recorded together amplitudes and phase angles of the
with their history currents and voltages can be read at
a glance.
4 digital/analogue measured values
Photo 11/3 Measurement screens
11/5 11
Master station
GSD file
Photo 11/5 Vector diagram
S SIMEAS P S SIMEAS P S SIMEAS P S SIMEAS P

Further field
devices
Photo 11/6 Harmonics

Fig. 11/3 SIMEAS P at the PROFIBUS-DP
List screens PROFIBUS-DP

C List screens show the minimum, SIMEAS P works in the slave mode
maximum and average values of the in PROFIBUS-DP. With the aid of the
measured quantities since the be- GSD file, the parameters relevant to
ginning of the recording communication are loaded into the
C The start of the recording and reset master station.
is executed with the front panel Here, SIMEAS P supports transfer ra-
keys tes within the range of 9.6 kbit/s to
C The number of the measured quan- 12 Mbit/s. In order to transfer mea-
Photo 11/7 List displays for Maximum – Aver- tities and screens, as well as their sured values to the master station,
age – Minimum order can be freely parameterized the user can choose from 4 transfer
Parameterization types.
C The user can conduct the parame-
C Type 1: transfer of 3 measured
terization of the SIMEAS P very ea-
quantities
sily
C Detailed key words, operation with
quantities
cursor and Enter key as in Win-
dows make a parameterization as
quantities
easy as can be even without a ma-
nual
quantities
C Parameterization and calibration are
This type selection ensures an easy
Photo 11/8 Parameterization secured against unauthorized use
and efficient data transfer between
via parameterizable password pro-
SIMEAS P and the master station in
Harmonics tection
the fastest possible way. For types 1
2 screens can be selected for the
to 4, the 3, 6, 12 or 32 measured va-
harmonics: Communication
lues to be transferred can be taken
C Harmonic voltages
SIMEAS P has a communication in- from the measured quantities table.
C Harmonic currents
terface according to the EIA RS485
C The representation in the screens The current GSD-File is available at
standard with 9-pole D-SUB plug for
shows all 3 conductors with all un- the homepage www.simeas.com
connection to the RS485 field bus sy-
even harmonics up to the 21st or-
stems.
der.
The following can be parameterized:
C In the top right corner of the
C PROFIBUS-DP V1 protocol accor-
screen, there is a window with the
ding to EN 50170 Volume 2
digital display of the individual har-
C Modbus RTU/ASCII
monics which can be selected via
Thus SIMEAS P supports the most
the front panel keys.
common communication protocols.

Memory management
Due to an extended recording capa-
city (1 Mbyte) and the new memory
management, the memory may be
segmented to record the following:
C Mean values
C Mean values of power records (e.g.
mean value of power over the pe-
riod of 15 min) Photo 11/10 Memory management
C Oscilloscope measurements
C Limit-value violations
C Binary states
Next to the percentage value, the
corresponding memory time is also
Photo 11/9 SIMEAS P 7KG7600 displayed. For limit-value violations
and binary states, the maximum
SIMEAS P600/P650 number of entries will be shown in-
extended version stead.
Photo 11/11 Recording of limit-value violations
SIMEAS P600 has the same functio- Recording of limit-value violations
nality as SIMEAS P500 (7KG7500), in
addition it features the following: This screen shows all limit-value vio-
C Battery buffering: lations in their time sequence.
Recordings, such as limit-value vio-
lations, meter values (energy va- Screen for log entries
lues), will not be lost during a fai- The "Log Entries" screen shows the
lure of the auxiliary power supply, date and time of the last status
but will be stored in the measure- change for every log entry on display.
ment memory for up to 3 months
C Clock module: Reading the measurement me- Photo 11/12 Log entries screen
Measured values are recorded with mory
time stamp or transmitted to the
master stations The measured values and items of in- Device versions
C Extended measurement memory formation stored in the device me-
SIMEAS P600 is also available with
including memory management mory can be read, displayed and ana-
UL listing.
C Recording of limit-value violations lyzed using the RS485 interface and
C Log entries the SIMEAS P parameterization soft-
ware.
These additional functionalities can
be set in the parameterization soft- For more information, please refer to
ware. the Section SIMEAS P parameteriza-
tion package.
11/7 11
SIMEAS P610/P660 extended

version, with analog and di-
Slots
gital input/output modules
A to D
Input/output modules
SIMEAS P610 or P660 have the
same functionality as SIMEAS P600
(7KG7600), but they can be ordered
with additional analog and digital
input/output modules. For this func-
tionality, they have been fitted with Photo 11/13 SIMEAS P610/P660
4 slots which can be equipped with
5 different modules.
Analog inputs Analog outputs
Via transducers 0-20 mA Electrical quantities: U, I,
Application Water cos ϕ, f etc. (0–20 mA)
flow rate, pressure, pH etc.
The input modules at the SIMEAS P Binary outputs
Gas Pulses for energy
are used for recording, display and flow rate, pressure etc. metering
post-processing of external measu- Messages, limit-value
Oil
ring parameters (0 – 20 mADC). flow rate, pressure etc. violations
All of the acquired measured quanti- District heating Relay outputs

ties can be displayed on the device Switching in case of
limit-value violations
together with their units of measure- Measured electrical quantities
ment and/or transmitted to a central of other branch circuits Communication
computer system for further proces- Like the electrical
quantities, measured
sing. Transmission is made, as with quantities can be All measured quantities can
the standard versions, by using the displayed on the be sent to a master station
screens and stored via PROFIBUS-DP, Modbus.
communication protocols PROFIBUS- in the memory.
DP V1 and Modbus RTU/ ASCII. Digital inputs
Messages, switch
In addition, the external measured va- positions, status
lues can be saved in the device me- Time synchronization
mory including their time stamp. Records of measured
With the help of the read function quantities can be read out and
displayed at the PC using the
which is integrated in the paramete- SIMEAS PAR software.
rization software, they can be trans-
mitted to the SIMEAS P paramete- Fig. 11/4 SIMEAS P610/P660 - Examples of application
rization tool and displayed and analy-
zed there. Slot assignment ned to the slots as desired. Slots
Output modules may be used for the which have not been equipped re-
The exact module configuration of
output of electrical quantities ranging main unassigned.
the SIMEAS P, i.e. the combination
from 0 – 20 mADC or 4–20mADC , of the different input and output mo-
intended for energy metering, mes- Device versions
dules, must be specified on order.
sage generation and switching. SIMEAS P610 with input/output mo-
Replacement or retrofitting of modu-
dules can also be ordered as type
les is not possible. With the excep-
P660 with UL listing.
tion of the relay module and the
binary outputs, modules can be assig-

Module description and options for application Terminal Assignment

Analog inputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 analog input modules. Each
of these modules has 2 analog inputs which are rated for a nominal measuring
range of 0 to 20 mADC. Both analog inputs form a common circuit, therefore 1 AI1+
they are not isolated. The 2 analog inputs are, however, electrically isolated
2 AI1–
against the internal circuit.
Analog inputs may be used for: 3 AI2+
C Recording and display of measuring signals in the range of 0 to 20 mADC 4 AI2–
C Recording of limit-value violations
C Storage of external measuring signals
Binary inputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 binary input modules. Each
of these modules has 2 electrically isolated, rooted binary inputs which work
according to the current source principle, i.e. the input voltage applied is trans- 1 BI1+
formed into a constant current. Therefore, the binary inputs do not require any
2 BIR
auxiliary supply voltage.
Binary inputs may be used for: 3 BIR
C Metering external measured quantities 4 BI2+
C Status/message logging
C Clock synchronization of the SIMEAS P with minute pulses (sets seconds to 00)
Analog outputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 analog output modules.
Each of these modules has 2 analog outputs which are rated for a nominal out-
put current of 0 to 20 mADC. Both analog outputs form a common circuit, there- 1 AO1+
fore they are not isolated. The 2 analog outputs are, however, electrically isola-
2 AO1–
ted against the internal circuit.
Analog outputs may be used for: 3 AO2+
C Output of measured quantities (current, voltage, power ϕ, cos ϕ, frequency 4 AO2–
etc.) in the range 0 – 20 mADC or 4–20mADC
Binary outputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 binary output modules. Each
of these modules has 2 rooted binary outputs, which have been implemented
through semiconductor relays. 1 BOR
Like the internal binary outputs, these binary outputs may be used for:
2 BO1+
C Output of energy pulses
C Display of limit-value violations 3 BO2+
C Display of device status 4 free
C Display of the rotational direction of the phase voltages L1-L2-L3
Relay outputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with one relay module as a maximum. This mo-
dule has 3 rooted, electro-mechanical relays. The relay outputs can be used to
switch loads, which cannot be handled by the semiconductor relays of the 1 RO1
binary outputs any more.
2 RO2
These relay outputs are parameterized like binary outputs and can be used for:
C Switching in the event of limit-value violations, e.g. for reactive power com- 3 RO3
pensation 4 ROR
Table 11/1 Module description and options for application
11/9 11
Power meter without dis-

play
SIMEAS P without display is used
wherever a display is not absolutely
necessary.
SIMEAS P100 – 7KG7100

SIMEAS P100 is a power meter with-
out display or front panel keys for
snapping onto a 35-mm standard
mounting rail according to DIN EN
50022. It features the same functio-
nality as SIMEAS P500 but without a
graphic display.
Device parameterization is performed
with the parameterization software
only.
SIMEAS P200 – 7KG7200

SIMEAS P200 is a power meter
without display or front panel keys
Photo 11/14 SIMEAS P100/P200 – 7KG7100/7KG7200
for snapping onto a 35-mm standard
mounting rail according to DIN EN
50022. It features the same functio-
nality as SIMEAS P600 but without a
graphic display.
Device parameterization is performed
with the parameterization software
only.

Measured quantity Measuring path1) Selection Fault limits2)
Voltage L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, (N-E) ▼ ■ ● ± 0.1 % 2) /± 0.13 % 7)
Voltage L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1, ∑3) ▼ ■ ● ± 0.1 % 2) /± 0.13 % 7)
Current L1, L2, L3, N, ∑3) ▼ ■ ● ± 0.1 % 2) /± 0.13 % 7)
Active power P + purchase, - supply L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Reactive power Q + cap., – ind. L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Apparent power S L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Power factor |cos ϕ|4) L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Active power factor cos ϕ4) L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Phase angle4) L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ● ± 2°
System frequency5) L1-L2 ▼ ■ ● ± 10 mHz
Active energy E, purchase L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Active energy E, supply L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Active energy, absolute L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Active energy, sum ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Reactive energy Q cap. L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Reactive energy Q ind. L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Reactive energy Q, absolute L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Apparent energy L1, L2, L3, ∑ ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Unsymmetrical condition of voltage 4-wire system ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Unsymmetrie Strom 4-wire system ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
THD voltage L1, L2, L3 ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
THD current L1, L2, L3 ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Harmonics U5,7,11,13,17,19 L1, L2, L3 ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Harmonics I5,7,11,13,17,19 L1, L2, L3 ▼ ■ ● ± 0.5 %
Limit-value violations counters 1 to 4 ▼ ■
Analog inputs6) external ▼ ■ ± 0.5 %
Binary inputs6) external ▼ ■
1) Conductor representation depends on the type of connection 7)Fault limits over the entire temperature range related to: 0.1 to 0.2 x
2) Fault limits under reference conditions related to 0.1 to 0.2 x nominal nominal range
range ▼ Measured quantities to be represented on the screens (only for types
3) Mean value of all conductor circuits 7KG75 and 7KG76)
4) Measurement starting at 2% of internal apparent power ■ Measured quantities to be selected via communications
5) Measurement starting at 30% of input voltage L1-N ● Measured quantities selection for list screens and oscilloscope (only
6) 7KG7610 and 7KG7660 only for types 7KG75 and 7KG76)
Table 11/2 Measured quantities
11/11 11
SIMEAS P parameterization This enables the user to configure se- Display and analysis
package veral SIMEAS P simultaneously.
The measured values transmitted by
When devices are replaced, stored
the device are automatically dis-
Application parameter sets can easily be uploa-
played on screen as graphs and ta-
ded to the new devices. Another op-
With the SIMEAS P parameterization bles including time stamps. The con-
tion is the upload of communication
software package, the user benefits text menu offers various functions,
protocols and firmware updates.
from a low-cost tool for an even such as showing/hiding signals, copy,
more efficient utilization of the The parameterization software sup- zoom and measurement functions.
SIMEAS P functionality. The package ports all SIMEAS P devices. It is man-
The following measured quantities
comprises the Windows paramete- datory for parameterizing SIMEAS
can be displayed as graphs:
rization software, a connection lead, P100/200 and P600.
C Mean values
an RS232/RS485 converter and a C Mean values of power
plug-in power supply unit. The con- Parameterization of the memory
C Oscilloscope recordings
verter is used to connect the SIMEAS function
C Binary channel status
P to a customary Notebook or PC Memory-equipped devices (SIMEAS
using a 9-pole D-SUB connector. The following information is shown in
P600 and SIMEAS P200) offer the
tables:
The software is executable with the possibility to record measured values
operating systems WIN95, WIN98, and states together with a time
C Log entries
Windows NT, WIN2000 and Win- stamp. The parameterization soft-
dows XP Professional. ware helps to define which measu-
Export functions
red values and which status shall be
The parameterization software ena- recorded. An ASCII interface can be used to ex-
bles the user to configure SIMEAS P port transmitted measurements and
devices even faster. Parameters can Memory reading information to other programs, the
be set and saved without directly data is made available in CSV format
operating the device. The function An additional function in the parame-
for further processing.
"Send to device" transfers the para- terization software enables the follo-
Oscilloscope recordings can be ex-
meters to the SIMEAS P. wing information to be read from the
ported via a COMTRADE interface.
device memory:
C Mean values
C Mean values of power
C Oscilloscope recordings
C Binary channel status
C Log entries

S SIMEAS P
RS485
RS232
Fig. 11/5 Parameterization
Photo 11/17 Parameterization and recording of measured values
Photo 11/15 Parameterization
Photo 11/18 Display and analysis
Photo 11/16 Parameterization
Photo 11/19 Display and analysis
11/13 11
11.2 SIMEAS T configuration of the transducer for its

measuring task is performed via a
Performance features of the
SIMEAS T multi-purpose transdu-
Transducer for High- commercial PC or laptop. A connec- cer for power quantities with
Current Power Quanti- tion cable to the PC and an installa-
tion disk named SIMEAS T PAR is
RS232 interface
C Minimum dimensions
ties optionally available. It can be used to
individually configure the transducer C Short delivery times, ex works
Description
in a Windows desktop in an easy
All measured quantities in any type C CE mark
way.
of high-current network can be detec-
C EMC immunity
ted with one device by using the Set data and a specific connection
SIMEAS T multi-purpose transducer. diagram are included in the delivery C In accordance with all relevant na-
of factory-configured devices. Or tional and international standards
The device has 3 analog outputs.
they can be printed out together with
Every output can be assigned to one C High quality, long service life
a device label when you are doing
variable (current, voltage, active or re-
the parameterization yourself. C Electric isolation with high test vol-
active power, frequency etc.) and any
tage
measuring range. The transducer can be re-parameteri-
zed during normal operation; measu- C High measuring accuracy
The output signal (e.g. –10 to 0 to
red values can be displayed online or
10 mA, ±20 mA, 4 to 20 A, 0 to 10 V C True rms measurement
recorded on graphical instruments
etc.) can be parameterized as requi-
(contained in the software) on the PC C Powerful output signal circuits
red for every output.
or laptop.
C One device for all applications
The binary output can be used as an
All measured quantities and parame-
energy meter, to measure work C All data can be freely parameteri-
ters may be read out and displayed at
quantities or as limit value indicator. zed
the PC with the help of the communi-
Input currents of up to 10 A, or input cation interface, independent of the C High system safety and reliability
voltages up to a maximum of 600 V analog outputs. Measured values can
C High ease of servicing
with nominal frequencies of 50, 60 or be transmitted through an RS232 or
16 2/3 Hz can be connected. Depen- RS485 interface. Devices with an
ding on the measuring task, unused RS485 interface are additionally pro-
input terminals will remain unassig- vided with the IEC 60870-5-103 pro-
ned. tocol which enables the transducers
to be connected to an I&C network
The measurement is a true rms mea-
and measured values to be sent to
surement which also allows distorted
the host processor via an RS485 bus.
curves up to the 32nd harmonic order
Via a serial interface, all measured
to be measured. The transducer can
quantities and parameters can be
be ordered fully parameterized or for
read out and displayed on the PC in-
individual parameterization via PC or
dependently of the analog outputs.
notebook.
The devices require an auxiliary po-
Fully configured devices can be orde-
wer source. A version for the DC
red by specifying a parameterization
range of 24 V to 60 V and a version
key with clear-text information as illu-
for the AC/DC range of 100 to 230 V
strated in the order example. These
are available.
devices can be re-parameterized
using the SIMEAS T PAR software. Inputs and outputs are electrically
isolated.
Orders for devices to be individually
parameterized merely have to contain
Photo 11/20 SIMEAS T
the corresponding order number. The

SICAM SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 SICAM

PCC PAS
CP CP CP CP
441 340 521 523
RS323 OWG
RS485 RS485
SIMEAS T transducers with inter-
face according to IEC 60870-5-103
RS485 bus acc. to IEC 60870-5-103
Design, type of connection and tech-
nical data of these transducers are
identical to those of a transducer
with RS232 interface. Instead of an Other field
devices
RS232 interface, however, they have
a built-in EAI RS485 interface for bus
operation in compliance with IEC
60870-5-103. This enables the trans-
Fig. 11/6 Example: application programs for SIMATIC for interfacing
ducers to be operated at a bus, thus transducers with RS485 interface (on request)
they can be networked as shown in
the example.
ASDU 140 Standard with a maximum of 16 measured values ASDU 9 ASDU 140
The output of analog measured quan-
with 9 mea- with 9 mea-
tities through the analog outputs will
sured values sured values
not be affected by bus operation. De-
vices are parameterized with the SI- No.1) Single-phase 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire 4-wire 4-wire 4-wire
MEAS T PAR software. system any load identical any load identical any load identical
load load load
Measured-value transmission
1 IL1 IL1 IL1 IL1 IL1 IL1 PL1-N
The measuring points to be acquired
2 UL1-N IL3 f IL2 UL1-N IL2 PL2-N
by the converter and transmitted
with the ASDU depend on the selec- 3 f f UL1-L2 IL3 f IL3 PL2-N
ted mode of operation. They are li-
4 cosϕ UL1-L2 UL1-L3 UL1-LN cosϕ UL1-LN QL1-N
sted in Table 11/3. Data representa-
tion corresponds to DIN 19244 and 5 ϕ UL2-L3 UL3-L1 UL2-LN ϕ UL2-LN QL2-N
VDEW.
6 S UL3-L1 cosϕ UL3-LN S UL3-LN QL3-N
Data transmission with 7 P cosϕ ϕ U0 P P cosϕL1-N

IEC 60870-5-103 file transfer
8 Q ϕ S f Q Q cosϕL2-N
The content of file transfer protocols
9 – S P UL1-L2 – f cosϕL3-N
according to IEC 60870 is fully trans-
parent for the user. All of the availa- 10 – P Q UL2-L3 –
ble measured values can be integra-
11 – Q – UL3-L1 –
ted in such a file. The application pro-
gram determines which data shall be 12 – – – cosϕ –
selected.
13 – – – ϕ –
14 – – – S –
15 – – – P –
16 – – – Q –
1) No. corresponds to the measuring point in the telegram,
units of measured quantities: V, A, Hz, W, Var, VA
Table 11/3 Transmission of measured values
11/15 11
Types of connection Single- 3-wire 3-wire

phase any load identical
AC current load
Measured quantities
Voltage UL1-N ▼ ■ ●
Voltage UL2-N
Voltage UL3-N
Voltage UL1-L2 ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Voltage UL2-L3 ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Parameterization
Voltage UL3-L1 ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Selection of measuring and mete- Voltage UE-N
ring quantities
Current IL1 ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Depending on the type of connec-
tion, the transducer will calculate all Current IL2 ▼ ■ ●
measured quantities or count values Current IL3 ▼ ■ ●
marked with ●. Current IL0
Any 3 of these measured quantities Frequency fL1 ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
▼ can be switched onto the 3 analog Phase angle ϕ ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
outputs and any one measured quan- Active power Ptotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
tity ■ may be switched onto the
Active power PL1
binary output for limit-value signaling
or energy metering. Active power PL2
Active power PL3
The serial interface transmits all mea-
Reactive power Qtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
sured quantities marked with ●.
Reactive power QL1
Reactive power QL2
Reactive power QL3
Power factor cos ϕtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Power factor cos ϕL1
Apparent power Stotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Energy quantities
Active power, purchase kWhtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●

Active power, purchase kWhL1
Active power, supply kWhtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Active power, supply kWhL1
▼ Measured quantities that can be switched Reactive power, purchase kvarhtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
onto the analog outputs. Reactive power, purchase kvarhL1
■ Measured quantities that can be switched Reactive power, purchase kvarhL2
onto a binary output as count values for li-
Reactive power, purchase kvarhL3
mit-value signaling or energy metering.
Reactive power, supply kvarhtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
● Measured quantities or count values to be
transmitted via a serial interface of type Reactive power, supply kvarhL1
RS232 or RS485, they can be displayed Reactive power, supply kvarhL2
and/or recorded at a PC or Notebook with
the help of the SIMEAS T PAR software. Reactive power, supply kvarhL3
Apparent power kVAhtotal ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ●
Table 11/4 Selection of quantities for measuring and metering


4-wire 4-wire Units
any load identical
load
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● V, kV
▼ ■ ● V, kV
▼ ■ ● V, kV
▼ ■ ● V, kV
▼ ■ ● V, kV
▼ ■ ● V, kV The following parameters can be ente- Measuring range
red with the SIMEAS T PAR software: C Enter primary measuring
▼ ■ ● V, kV
range with start/end range
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● A, kA Operating mode e.g. –100 to +100 MW
▼ ■ ● A, kA
C Direct connection without Output signal
▼ ■ ● A, kA
transformer C Enter output signal with start/end
▼ ■ ● A, kA C Single-phase AC current range –20 to +20 mA or –10 to
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● Hz C 3-wire, 3-phase current with identi- +10 V, e.g. 4 to 20 mA
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● ° cal load
Output signal limitation
C 3-wire, 3-phase current with any
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● W, kW, MW C Enter output signal limitation with
load
▼ ■ ● W, kW, MW the lower/upper range, e.g. lower
C 4-wire, 3-phase current with identi-
▼ ■ ● W, kW, MW
range +4 mA/upper range +22 mA
cal load
▼ ■ ● W, kW, MW C 4-wire, three phase current with Characteristic curve
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● var, kvar, Mvar any load C Linear curve
C With knee-point in the measuring
▼ ■ ● var, kvar, Mvar
System frequency range/in the output signal, e.g.
▼ ■ ● var, kvar, Mvar sharp bend at +50 MW and +2 mA
C 50 Hz
▼ ■ ● var, kvar, Mvar
C 60 Hz
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● – Analog output 2 and 3 same as
C 16 2/3 Hz
▼ ■ ● –
analog output 1
▼ ■ ● – Voltage inputs
Binary output
▼ ■ ● – C Without transformer L-N in the
C No signal
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● VA, kVA, MVA range of 0 to 90 V
C Unit in operation, signal in the
C Without transformer L-N in the
event of a malfunction of the
range of 0 to180 V
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse transducer
C Without transformer L-N in the
C Limit value signaling
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse range of 0 to 450 V
Select quantity from Table 11/2,
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse C With transformer via clear-text in-
define limit value of the measuring
formation: prim./sec. example:
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse range.
10/0.1 kV
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse Choose whether signal is given
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse when values exceed/fall below a
Current inputs
given point, e.g. limit value for
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse
C Without transformer in the measured quantity “Voltage”:
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse range of 0 to 2 A Signal if value is below 9.9 kV
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse C Without transformer in the C Energy metering
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse range of 0 to 4 A Select energy quantity from Table
C Without transformer in the 11/2, define pulse rate of the
range of 0 to 10 A energy quantity e.g. energy quan-
C With transformer via clear-text tity: Active power-purchase-total;
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse information: prim./sec. example: pulse rate: 10 Imp/kWh.
▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse 100/1 kV
Analog output 1
▼ ■ ● ▼ ■ ● kWh/pulse Measured quantity
C Select measured quantity from
Table 11/2, e.g. Active power total
11/17 11
Transformer Sequential/ Multi- ~/ Processor Output

Hold circuit plexer Transformer modules
UL1
A1
~
UL2 A2
~
~ A3
UL3 ~
UN Binary output
IL1 Serial
RS232 interface,
optionally RS485
IL2
UH
IL3 Auxiliary
~ power supply
Fig. 11/7 Block diagram
Design 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25
GND
RXD
The transducers are permanently wi- + –

TXD
3+ 3– 2+ 2– 1+ 1–
~ ~
red and tested functional units. They
have a snap fixing for a 35 mm stan- Interface Outputs Aux. volt.
dard mounting rail in accordance with
DIN EN 50 022. Inputs and outputs
can be safely connected with screw
SIMEAS T transducer
terminals. The transducers are flame-
retardant and free of silicone and
halogens.
AC inputs: current AC inputs: voltage
IL1 IL1 IL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 ULN UL1 UL2 UL3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 11/8 Electrical connection

Inputs and outputs which are not required are not assigned

Other technical data Safety acc. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1
Basic standard acc. to IEC 60888 Overvoltage category III
Electric strength acc. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1 Pollution severity 2
Input 3.7 kV, 50 Hz, sin Electromagnetic compatibility

(current against current 6.8 kV impulse voltage:
Emitted interference acc. to DIN EN 50081-1
and against voltages) 1.2/50 µs, R1 = 500 W
and IEC/C ISPR 22
(type test)
Interference field strength acc. to DIN EN 55022 Class B
Inputs against outputs 5.5 kV, 50 Hz, sin
Interface 10.2 kV impulse voltage: Interference immunity acc. to EN 50082-1,
and auxiliary energy 1.2/50 µs, R1 = 500 W EN 50082-2
(type test)
Immunity against electro- acc. to IEC 255-22-3
Auxiliary voltage against 3.7 kV, 50 Hz, sin magnetic fields 10 V/m
outputs and interface 6.8 kV impulse voltage:
Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 1000-4-2
1.2/50 µs, R1 = 500 W
ESD 8 kV IEC 255-22-2
(type test)
Fast transients, asym. acc. to IEC 1000-4-4
Outputs and interface 700 V DC
2 kV burst with capacitive link IEC 255-22-4
against each other, where
analogue output 1 is electrically Weight approx. 0.65 kg
connected with the interface
Degree of protection DIN VDE 0470 T 1 / EN 60529
Ambient temperature acc. to IEC 68-2/1-3
Working temperature range –10°C to +50°C e.g. Housing IP 40
(depending on measured at input voltage
Terminals IP 20
voltage, output load and 3 x 100 V and sum of
type of installation) continuously Type of connection screw terminals
applied output loads of
Current inputs 4 mm2
≤ 40 mA
Voltage 2.5 mm2
Storage temperature range –40°C to +85°C
Outputs/interface 2.5 mm2
Climatic application EN 60721-3-3 temperature
class 3K8H humidity 3K5
Fire resistance class V0

Connection level: terminals
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25
75
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
90
105 [mm]
Table 11/5 Technical data and dimensions
11/19 11
11.3 Measuring Instru- There is a great potential in this. The

measuring instruments, which are
the distribution board onto the stan-
dard mounting rail without the use of
ments/Meters as designed as modular devices, are cat- tools and make the connection.
Modular Devices ching on because their planning and
installation is so easy.
Measuring instruments by Siemens
have proven themselves many times in
Measuring power consumption is When configuring these modular de- this situation. Apart from the fact that
the first step to cost saving vices, it is merely the modular widths they are reliable and safe, they are also
and the mounting tier which have to small, which means they save space
This advantage is secured by using
be defined. The installation itself is and make the device arrangement with-
the measurements for a better plan-
very simple: just snap the devices in in the distribution board transparent.
ning in relation to system utilization.
Devices Application Standards Use in building
Commercial
Residential
Industrial
Time and pulse counters Monitoring of operating hours IEC 60255-6, C C C
• Time counters and switch-on operations of devices DIN EN 60255-6
7KT5 80 and 7KT5 82 or installations (VDE 0435 T 301)
• Pulse counters C C C
7KT5 81 and 7KT5 83
Time counter for front Monitoring of operating hours IEC 60255-6, C C C

panel mounting of devices or installations DIN EN 60255-6
7KT5 5 and 7KT5 6 (VDE 0435 T 301)
Analog measuring devices Voltage and current measurements, IEC 60051-2, C C

7KT1 0 to monitor incoming or outgoing DIN EN 60051-2
currents or device currents
Digital measuring devices Voltage and current measurements, DIN 43751-1, C C

7KT1 1 to monitor incoming or outgoing DIN 43751-2
currents or device currents
Multimeter Display and analysis of 23 electrical IEC 60051-2, C C

7KT1 30 measured values in switchgear DIN EN 60051-2
stations, incoming or outgoing IEC 61010-1,
feeders DIN EN 61010-1
(VDE 0411 T 1)

Devices Application Standards Use in building
Commercial
Residential
Industrial
Multicounter Display and analysis of 35 electrical IEC 60051-2, C C
7KT1 31, 7KT1 34, 7KT1 35 measured values in switchgear DIN EN 60051-2
stations, incoming or outgoing feeders IEC 61010-1,
DIN EN 61010-1
(VDE 0411 T 1)
IEC 62053-21,
DIN EN 62053-21
(VDE 0418 T 3-21)
Energy meter, For kWh metering in single-phase IEC 62053-11, C C C

single-phase power supply systems, e.g. in industrial DIN EN 62053-11
7KT1 14 plants, offices and apartments in (VDE 0418 T 3-11)
apartment complexes IEC 62053-21,
DIN EN 62053-21
(VDE 0418 T 3-21)
Energy meter, For kWh metering in single-phase or IEC 61010-1, C C C

three-phase three-phase power supply systems, e.g. DIN EN 61010-1
7KT1 50, 7KT1 51, 7KT1 52 in industrial plants, offices and (VDE 0411 T 1)
apartments in apartment complexes IEC 62053-11,
DIN EN 62053-11
(VDE 0418 T 3-11)
IEC 62053-21,
DIN EN 62053-21
(VDE 0418 T 3-21)
Energy meter, With instabus KNX EIB interface, IEC 61036 C C

three-phase for kWh metering in single-phase DIN EN 61036
instabus KNX EIB or three-phase power supply systems, (VDE 0418 T7)
7KT1 16 e.g. in industrial plants, offices and
apartments in apartment complexes
LAN coupler For connection of multimeters, IEEE 802 C C

3KT1 390 multicounters and energy meters
7KT15 to LAN networks
Current transformer For non-contact acquisition of IEC 60044-1, C C

7KT1 2 primary currents in three-phase DIN EN 60044-1
power supply networks (VDE 0414 T 44-1)
11/21 11
7KT1 30 multimeter Measured value Display Unit Assignment
Overview 1 Active power D1 W L1

2 Voltage D1 V L1
• All of the required measured values
of the power supply system can be 3 Current D1 A L1
viewed at a glance 4 Apparent power D1 VA L1
• Innovative matrix selection to 5 cosϕ D1 cosϕ L1
assign measurement values to 6 Voltage D1 V L1 – L2
the display tabs
• For direct connection of 63 A or for 7 Active power D2 W L2
current transformer /1A or /5A 8 Voltage D2 V L2
• For primary currents of a current 9 Current D2 A L2
transformer of 10 to 5,000 A. Input 10 Apparent power D2 VA L2
is made in increments of 5 A 11 cosϕ D2 cosϕ L2
• Large, 11 mm high, green 7-seg- 12 Voltage D2 V L2 – L3
ment measurement display which
is friendly on the eye 13 Active power D3 W L3
• Clearly distinct orange text display 14 Voltage D3 V L3
of the measuring units assigned to 15 Current D3 A L3
the displays which show the mea- 16 Apparent power D3 VA L3
sured value
17 cosϕ D3 cosϕ L3
• Representation of measured values
18 Voltage D3 V L3 – L1
at 5 triple 7-segment displays and
one auxiliary 7-segment display for 19 Active power D5 W ∑L
input of the primary current 20 Apparent power D1, D2, D3, D5 VA ∑L
• Detection of connection mistakes
21 Reactive power D5 var ∑L
(interchanged phases)
22 Frequency D4 Hz ∑L
• Measuring accuracy for voltage,
current and power: ± 2 % ± 1 digit 23 cosϕ D1, D2, D3, D4 cosϕ ∑L
2 set values will be displayed in addition

Application
24 Current transformer setting D5 CT/A /1 or /5
Very compact multi-functional display 25 Current transformer setting D5 CT/A 10 ... 5,000
for direct or current transformer
connection in a three-phase network, Table 11/6 Display values of the multimeter
with Wye (Y) and Delta (∆) measure-
ments to display a maximum of 23 Function ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system
different electrical values at a switch- This emphasizes that all units of mea-
gear station, incoming or outgoing Voltage measurement
surement shown under this symbol
feeders. The multimeter either measures the
always refer to all of the 3 phases.
delta voltages L1 to L2; L2 to L3 and
The analysis of differing phase loads L3 to L1 or the Wye voltages L1, L2,
is a special feature of this instru- L3 to N.
ment. Phase displacement and load
unbalances may result in partial over-
loads. The multimeter provides va- Display values
rious options for the compilation and 5 out of these 23 options can be con-
analysis of measured values. tinuously displayed.

L1
D1 D2 D3
L1-N
M k W V A COS M k W V A COS M k W V A COS OK
L1 L2 L3
ϕ1 L1-2 L2-3 L3-1
L1-L1 L1-L2 L L L
I1
I3 MkW VAR H Z COS
CT/A
ϕ3
ϕ2
L3-N I2 L
L2-N
D5 D4
L3 L1-L3 L2
Fig 11/9 ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system Fig. 11/10 Display
kW kW kW OK
Display
L1 L2 L3
The multimeter has a shaded,
brightly lit LED display. Measured va-
lues are displayed on 11 mm high,
A COS
green 7-segment LED's, units of
measurement are shown on orange
LED's. Both colors can be recognized L
more clearly than the previously used
red LED's. Capacitive loads are auto-
Fig. 11/11 Example of a matrix selection
matically marked with a capacitor
symbol and inductive loads with a
coil symbol. This means, each measured value in
the horizontal view can be assigned
Matrix selection
to a value in the vertical view. Letters
Traditional measuring instruments
M and k are automatically assigned
either provide voltage, current or
depending on the measuring range,
other comparable values for the 3
i.e. the measured value, for example:
phases. Thanks to its matrix selection
kW or MW. Capacitive loads are au-
function, the multimeter is much
tomatically marked with a capacitor
more flexible and universal.
symbol and inductive loads with a
Rotary keys select the triple displays, coil symbol.
the desired display is confirmed with
The resulting matrix selection might
OK. Then the horizontal selection is
look as shown in Fig. 11/11.
made, e.g. W – V – A or cos ϕ, follo-
wed by the vertical selection, e.g. L1
– L1-L2 – L. This defines the matrix
selection.
11/23 11
Measured value Display Unit Assignment
1 Active power D1 W L1
2 Voltage D1 V L1
3 Current D1 A L1
4 Apparent power D1 VA L1
5 cosϕ D1 cosϕ L1
6 Voltage D1 V L1 – L2
7 Active power D2 W L2
8 Voltage D2 V L2
7KT1 3 Multicounter 9 Current D2 A L2
10 Apparent power D2 VA L2
Overview 11 cosϕ D2 cosϕ L2
• All of the required measured values 12 Voltage D2 V L2 – L3
of the power supply system can be 13 Active power D3 W L3
viewed at a glance 14 Voltage D3 V L3
• Innovative matrix selection to 15 Current D3 A L3
assign measurement values to 16 Apparent power D3 VA L3
the display tabs 17 cosϕ D3 cosϕ L3
• For direct connection of 63 A or for 18 Voltage D3 V L3 – L1
current transformer /1A or /5A
• For primary currents of a current 19 Temperature D6 °C –
transformer of 10 to 5,000 A. Input 20 Current, N conductor D6 A ∑L
is made in increments of 5 A 21 Active power D4 W ∑L
• Large, 11 mm high, green 7-seg- 22 Reactive power D5 var ∑L
ment measurement display which 23 Apparent power D5 VA ∑L
is friendly on the eye 24 Frequency D6 Hz ∑L
• Clearly distinct orange text display 25 cosϕ D1, D2, D3, D6 cosϕ ∑L
of the measuring units assigned to 26 Active energy Rate 1 D4 Wh ∑L q
the displays which show the mea- 27 Active energy Rate 2 D4 Wh ∑L q
sured value 28 Active energy Rate 1 D4 Wh ∑L y
• Representation of measured values 29 Active energy Rate 2 D4 Wh ∑L y
at 4 triple 7-segment displays and 30 Reactive energy Rate 1 D5 varh ∑L, ind.
one seven-fold 7-segment display 31 Reactive energy Rate 2 D5 varh ∑L, ind.
• Display selection for active, reac- 32 Reactive energy Rate 1 D5 varh ∑L, kap.
tive and apparent power values, 3- 33 Reactive energy Rate 2 D5 varh ∑L, kap.
or 7-digit 34 Apparent energy Rate 1 D5 VAh ∑L
• Detection of connection mistakes 35 Apparent energy Rate 2 D5 VAh ∑L
• Accuracy class 2 according to IEC 2 set values will be displayed in addition
62053-21, -23 36 Current transformer setting D4 CT/A /1 or /5
• Device types with LAN interface 37 Current transformer setting D5 CT/A 10 ... 5,000
(via LAN coupler) and MS EXCEL
user interface Table 11/7 Display values of the multimeter
• Versions with PROFIBUS-DP V1
interface The analysis of differing phase loads Function
is a special feature of this instru-
Application Voltage measurement
ment. Phase displacement and load
The multicounter either measures the
Very compact multi-functional display imbalances may result in partial over-
delta voltages L1 to L2; L2 to L3 and
for direct or current transformer loads. The device provides various
L3 to L1 or the Wye voltages L1, L2,
connection in a three-phase network, options for the compilation and analy-
L3 to N.
with Wye (Y) and Delta (∆) measure- sis of measured values.
ments to display a maximum of 35 Display values
Information on LAN operation and
different electrical values at a switch- 5 out of these 35 options can be con-
the MS EXCEL user interface can be
gear station, incoming or outgoing tinuously displayed.
found at the LAN coupler section in
feeders. catalog ET B1, on page 10/12.

L1 D1 D2 D3
L1-N M k W V A COS M k W V A COS M k W V A COS OK

L1 L2 L3
L1-2 L2-3 L3-1
ϕ1 L L L
L1-L1 L1-L2
I1 M k W V A HZ COS Mk VARh MkWh
I3 °C CT/A
ϕ3
ϕ2
N N T12
L L
L3-N I2 L2-N
D6 D5 D4
L3 L1-L3 L2 oder D5 + D4
Fig. 11/12 ∑L symbol for the 3-phase system Fig. 11/13 Display
∑L symbol for the 3-phase system

This emphasizes that all units of mea-
surement shown under this symbol
V V V
always refer to all of the 3 phases.
Display
The multicounter has a shaded,
L1-2 L2-3 L3-1
brightly lit LED display. Measured va-
lues are displayed on 11 mm high, A
OK
green 7-segment LED's, units of
measurement are shown on orange
LED's. Both colors can be recognized
more clearly than the previously used N
red LED's.
kWh
Matrix selection
Traditional measuring instruments
either provide voltage, current or
T 2 ∑L
other comparable values for the 3
phases. Thanks to its matrix selection
function, the multicounter is much Fig. 11/14 Matrix selection
more flexible and universal.
Rotary keys select the triple displays, e.g. L1 – L1-L2 – L. This defines the symbol and inductive loads with a
the desired display is confirmed with matrix selection. coil symbol.
OK. Then the horizontal selection is
This means, each measured value in The resulting matrix selection might
made, e.g. W – V – A – VA or cosϕ,
the horizontal view can be assigned look as shown in Fig. 11/14.
followed by the vertical selection,
to a value in the vertical view. Letters
M and k are automatically assigned
depending on the measuring range,
i.e. the measured value, for example:
kW or MW. Capacitive loads are au-
tomatically marked with a capacitor
11/25 11
7KT1 5 Energy meter, Unit Identification

three-phase
Active energy Rate 1 kWh Arrow and T1
Overview Rate 2 kWh Arrow and T2
Features Reactive energy Rate 1 kvarh Arrow and T1

• 1- or 3-phase measurement for Rate 2 kvarh Arrow and T2
Delta or Wye connection and neu- Active power kW Utilization and
tral-point calculation for Delta momentary value
connection
• For direct connection of 63 A or for Reactive power kvar Utilization and
current transformer /5A momentary value
• For primary currents of a current Phase-sequence indicator 1–2–3 Blinking triangle indicates
transformer of 10 to 5,000 A. Input left-hand rotation
is made in increments of 5 A
• 7-fold 7-segment display for energy CT primary current 10 ... 5,000 A CT (current transformer)
values and additional functions
• Detection of connection mistakes Table 11/8 Data types shown on the display
• Device types with LAN interface
(via LAN coupler) and MS EXCEL
user interface kWh
• Accuracy class 2 according to IEC kvarh
61036 T1 T2
CT 1
Application 0 kM 3 2 T
W var
Energy meters are used for kWh
metering in single-phase and three-
phase systems, e.g. in industrial Fig. 11/15 Device display
plants, offices and apartments in
apartment complexes. LAN communication
Versions including LAN interface and 6 measured values are transmitted:
LCD display are used in industrial active energy Rate 1 and Rate 2,
plants and office buildings to analyze reactive energy Rate 1 and Rate 2,
consumption and minimize operating active power and reactive power.
costs. Information on LAN operation Current transformer setting
and the MS EXCEL user interface can The primary current of the CT is set
be found at the LAN coupler section at the device ridge. Depending on the
in catalog ET B1, on page 10/12. CT setting, values are internally con-
verted and displayed. This setting
can be sealed for certification purpo-
ses.

7KT1 162
7KT1 165
Active energy Rate 1/2 kWh x/x
Price per kWh, settable Rate 1/2 Cost/kWh x/x
Total cost Rate 1/2 Total cost x/x
Reactive energy Rate 1/2 kvarh x/x
Apparent energy Rate 1/2 kVAh –
Active power maximum Rate 1/2 kW –
Measurement periods, settable Rate 1/2 min –
7KT1 16 Energy meter, Momentary active power Sum total kW x
three-phase, Phase L1/L2/L3 kW x
instabus KNX EIB Momentary voltage Phase L1/L2/L3 V –
Momentary current purchase Sum total A –
Overview Phase L1/L2/L3 A –
Data for consumption Momentary current factor FA I x1)
analysis Momentary reactive power Sum total kvar –
Phase L1/L2/L3 kvar –
Manual reading:
Momentary apparent power Sum total kVA –
Data (see Fig. 11/16) can be called Phase L1/L2/L3 kVA –
up directly at the Energy meter and
Momentary cosϕ Phase L1/L2/L3 cos –
recorded manually by pressing the
Momentary frequency Hz –
Set/Reset button (5) and Display
button (3). The Energy meter will Device number, settable No. x
x = These data will be displayed 1) For CT meters only
calculate the consumption cost when
the price per kWh is entered. The op-
Table 11/9 Readings transmitted to the LCD display or via IR interface
tion for device number input facilita-
tes an assignment to a digit-code
system and cost allocation to diffe- 1 2
rent cost centers. 1 Large-size, 7-digit LCD display

with 8 x 4-mm digits
Read software for the IR measuring
2 IR reading interface to plug on the
head: reading head
The data of the above table are read 3 Display button
into a PC with the aid of the magnet- 4 IR test output LED (10 IMP./W)
adhesive IR measuring head and filed 5 Sealable Set/Reset button
in an ASCII file in compliance with IEC
61107. This ASCII file can be conver- 3 4 5
ted to an Excel or Access file. The pro-
gram is executable on Windows 95, 98 Fig. 11/16 Electricity meter with LCD display
and Windows NT.

The system does not distinguish bet- Benefit
Data transmission with instabus ween meters which were read online
KNX EIB • PTB-certified
or manually. A maximum-time analy-
7KT1 162 and 7KT1 165 meters are • Accuracy class 2
sis can be performed over several
intended for the following data trans- • LCD display
days on the PC in online mode. Se-
mission: • Short-circuit-proof pulse output
veral graphical evaluation modes are
Active energy (kWh) Rate 1 • With network analysis function
available.
Active energy (kWh) Rate 2 and direct cost indication
Device number Direction of energy flow
Active power (kW) Phase L1 Metering is only performed in the Application
Active power (kW) Phase L2 specified direction of energy flow.
For kWh metering in single-phase and
Active power (kW) Phase L3 For meters with current transformer
three-phase systems, e.g. in industrial
connection, the transformers' direc-
Visualization software plants, offices and apartments in
tion of energy flow (primary- and se-
"Recording of consumption data apartment complexes. Versions inclu-
condary-side) and the proper alloca-
and maximum-time analysis" ding an LCD display are used as net-
tion of the voltage and current paths
(in preparation) work analysis instruments in indu-
must be observed.
The software can read out and allo- strial plants and office buildings to
cate meter values, and prepare the analyze consumption and minimize
data for billing. operating costs.
11/27 11
Photo 11/18 Current transformers
11.4 4NC3 and 4NC5 Product range SIMOCODE-DP

4NC31, 4NC36 and 4NC37 current
C 4NC3: rated currents of 75 A to
Current Transformers 4,000 A
transformer sizes (75 A to 800 A) are
recommended for use together with
C 4NC5: rated currents of 5 A to
Brief description SIMOCODE-DP (external display via
1,500 A
ammeter) and allocated via selection
Current transformers enable currents C Accessories: terminal cover, stan-
tables so that the customer doesn’t
to be detected and measured. dard mounting rail and primary con-
require any additional configuration
ductor
and coordination expense.
Areas of application C All 4NC3 current transformers have
been approved for use in shipbuil-
Wherever currents in low-voltage
ding
switchgear and distribution board sy-
C Accuracy class 1 and overvoltage li-
stems are detected and measured.
miting factor FS5
The 4NC3 current transformer series C Secondary current 1 A and 5 A
has been optimally tuned to the
Features
phase center-to-center distance and
the conductor cross-section of the 3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers
3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers. The 4NC3 current transformer series
The current range is also perfectly has been optimally tuned to the
suited for use together with phase center-to-center distance and
SIMOCODE®-DP. the conductor cross section of the
3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers.
This allows for the installation of
three current transformers in series.

11/29 11
12 SIMARIS design – the Tool for

Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution
SIMARIS design – the Tool for

chapter 12
12 SIMARIS design – the Tool for

SIMARIS design supports Network calculations and automatic C Protection of human life in the
permissibility checks throughout event of indirect contact according
C Engineering companies
the whole power system to DIN VDE 0100 T410:
C Electrical fitters for installation – Will the circuit be definitely inter-
In order to meet the high expecta-
planning rupted within the specified time
tions of investors and plant opera-
interval by any switching device
C Switchgear manufacturers for tors, engineering companies and
under any fault condition?
dimensioning tasks planners spend a lot of time with the
– Has the type of connection to
routine work involved in dimension-
C Acceptance authorities such as the ground been taken into account in
ing installations and circuits.
German Technical Inspectorate the network configuration?
(TÜV) etc. All circuits in a power system must – Have minimum and maximum
be calculated to include the most short-circuit currents been taken
in implementing power supply con-
unfavorable, likely network conditions into account in dependency of al-
cepts for commercial and industrial
and verified to comply with country- ternative means of supply?
buildings from medium voltage
specific standards and installation – Will an additional equipotential
through to the power outlet in com-
practice. bonding become necessary?
pliance with accepted standards. This
As standard, this includes the verifi- – Have the limits for maximum con-
support already begins at the initial
cation of: tact voltage been complied with?
concept finding stage.
C Overload protection
SIMARIS design C Voltage drop (static/dynamic):
– Have the cables been dimen-
– Is the cumulated voltage drop
C Facilitates routine work sioned for the maximum operat-
down to the outlet circuits within
C Helps to ensure high planning and ing current to be transmitted?
the limits of the currently applica-
cost safety – Has the selected switching de-
ble standard?
C Leads to a holistic planning ap- vice been rated for the maximum
– Can all consumers be safely oper-
proach cable load current?
ated despite a voltage drop on the
C Designs cost-effective complete – Does the selected switching de-
supply path (motor start-up?)?
installations instead of “cheap” vice protect the cable against
individual products overload ?
C Selectivity:
– Have the tripping currents been
– Is the switching/protective device
taken into account for the se-
in use fully selective to all of its
lected switching device class ac-
upstream switching/protective
cording to DIN VDE 0100 T430
devices across the entire current-
(test currents, device characteris-
time range?
tics, tolerance ranges)?
– Can selectivity be documented
in terms of a TÜV-approved
C Short-circuit protection
selectivity proof according to
– Does the cable/busbar thermally
DIN VDE 0100 T710 (former
withstand the load under fault
DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108?
conditions until the fault has
eventually been cleared
(K2S2 > = I2t)?

SIMARIS design
SIMARIS design automatically per-

forms such calculations and checks
in compliance with the latest
Single-line
standards and regulations. The diagram view
DIN VDE 0100 series is based on
the harmonized IEC 364 (HD 384).
Extensive paging through regulations,
standard tables or product catalogs
Project structure tree
becomes obsolete. For the engineer-
ing company this means a sustained
work relief and at the same time a
risk minimization regarding planning
and cost safety.
Message window
The data-processing-compatible rep-
resentation of real power supply sys-
tems within SIMARIS design can be
Fig. 12/1 Project structure tree
implemented easily and quickly. Indi-
vidual power system components are
input in a circuit-related manner. Ba- In parallel to runtime, network calcula- Automatic device selection based
sically, the input of cable lengths and tions may be started at any time for: on an integrated, well matched
technical device data of the con- C Load flow device range
sumers is sufficient to start with the C Short circuit (1-/2-/3-pole minimum
SIMARIS design is not a traditional
network calculation. and 1-/3-pole maximum)
network calculation tool.
C Energy balance
Once the basic electrical data have
Based on the results of the network
been stored, comparable circuits, or
Calculation results are displayed and calculation, SIMARIS design automat-
even complete subdistributions can
evaluated in the project tree struc- ically dimensions the network com-
be duplicated by just a mouse-click
ture with the aid of the signal colors ponents which are required for safe
and assigned to a new subdistribu-
red/yellow/green for each circuit. supply of the specified consumers.
tion board, which speeds up the digi-
tizing process for the whole system. The project view, which is divided in This includes
3 sections (project tree structure / C besides the supply current sources
Mapping larger power supply sys-
single-line diagram / message win- (transformer(s)/generator(s)/neutral
tems, such as the supply for airport
dow) facilitates a quick overview of system infeed(s))
buildings or building power supply of
the network structure and the current C and the cables or busbars
a university hospital, is no problem
status of the calculation results. C mainly the switching/protective de-
either with SIMARIS design.
vices ranging from the medium-
Even subsequent (manual) modifica-
Such installations, including the voltage side of the supply current
tions of the network configuration or
whole range from the medium-volt- source down to the individual con-
individual components are supported
age substation down to the last out- sumer circuits.
by SIMARIS design. SIMARIS design
let circuit, can also be simulated, cal-
performs an automatic permissibility
culated and verified in the program
check for each modification in the
with comparatively little time ex-
background and immediately displays
pense.
relevant messages if necessary.
12/3 12
Integrated planning
Components as well as circuits within
the entire power system are techni-
cally matched right from the start.
The entire power supply system can
thus be designed in a technically and
economically optimized manner.
At the same time, the fire load can be
reduced to a minimum in the whole
installation while the protection of hu-
man life is ensured to a high degree
and supply safety can be guaranteed
in the entire installation under fault
conditions.
In this context, the planner doesn’t
need to have any special equipment
know-how.
The widest scope for decisions re-
garding the design of a complete in-
stallation is in the planning stage. Fig. 12/2 Switch combination, partially selective up to 48 kA
With the aid of SIMARIS design’s

own product database, integrated b) Selectivity – greatest possible Visualization and automatic evalua-
planning becomes easy and efficient. safety of supply for the entire in- tion of characteristic device curves
stallation: regarding fully selective behavior
Back-up protection or full selectivity
The upstream device which is clos-
The focus for dimensioning the switch- In existing installations, the switch-
est to the fault location as seen in
ing/protective devices may be on ing/protective devices in operation are
the direction of energy flow safely
checked for compliance with fully se-
a) Back-up protection – economical trips over the entire current-time
lective switching behavior according
device dimensioning: range. Those parts of the installation
to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (previously
The use of low-cost devices with a which are neither affected by, nor
DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108.
partially underdimensioned switch- caused the fault stay in operation.
Normally this check is performed by
ing capacity becomes feasible. In
If required: Expansion/extension of means of a visual comparison of char-
the event of a fault, the underdi-
the entire installation through device acteristic curves of upstream and
mensioned device will automati-
reparameterization is possible. downstream devices using so-called
cally be protected by one of the
current/time curve diagrams.
devices upstream in the direction The planner determines the criteria
of energy flow. for automatic device selection in According to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (for-
SIMARIS design. mer DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108,
certain supply sections, such as the
safety power supply, are subject to a
general proof of selective switching
behavior of the switching devices in
operation.

SIMARIS design
If this aspect has not been taken into

account at an early stage prior to
commissioning, it may cause the re-
sponsible party unscheduled, high fol-
low-up costs and extra expenditure.
SIMARIS design greatly facilitates
this highly responsible but tedious
planning task.
The program
– handles the compilation of device
parameters and characteristic trip-
ping curves
– filters out the most unsuitable de- Fig. 12/3 Selection of a suitable low-voltage switchgear station for LVMD from the integrated
database
vice combination in a power supply
line (grading path)
– performs a selectivity evaluation of
the device combination taking
those minimum and maximum
short-circuit currents into account
which would be unfavorable for this
combination
– and, besides the visual check of the
characteristic device curves, it also
takes manufacturer information on
the dynamic switching behavior of
tested device combinations in the
time range less than 100 ms into
account
Present device protection settings
can subsequently be adjusted via the
switchgear panels.
Here too, the integrated database in
SIMARIS design with real device data Fig. 12/4 Circuits can easily be parameterized
demonstrates its advantages.
Automatic selection of medium- The planner does not require any
Exactly those setting options will
voltage and low-voltage switchgear product-specific switchgear know-
be suggested which are permitted
stations and distribution boards in- how.
for the currently selected device.
cluding device equipping per panel
Selected protection settings will
automatically be checked for permis- SIMARIS design realizes a holistic
sibility in the background. planning approach covering device di-
mensioning as well as the layout of
the required switchgear panels and
subdistributions.
12/5 12
File generation for documentation

purposes, such as TÜV-approved
selectivity proofs, device settings,
calculation results, tender specifi-
cations, material price calcula-
tions, single-line diagrams / enclo-
sure views and panel equipping in
CAD format for further editing, e.g.
in AutoCAD
All data and planning results featuring
the entire installation, such as
C Calculation and input data
C Single-line diagram views
C Layout of the switchgear installa-
tion and distribution board panels
can be directly output to a printer or

viewed on screen, and can also be
exported to other programs, e.g.
AutoCAD for further editing.
File formats of the output files are Fig. 12/5 Comprehensive documentation with easy data transfer (Office, CAD etc.)
oriented to customary Office pro-
grams running in the various Win-
Text modules for tender specifica- Thanks to its high quality standards,
dows operating systems. If desired,
tions, so-called specifications of work SIMARIS design has been certified
all documents can also be output in
and services, can also be generated by the TÜV Berlin. The tool is also
English.
in the program and used for drawing used by public authorities for results
up a planning tender. For the compi- verification of submitted planning
lation of these texts, a great empha- concepts.
sis has been placed both on the
In addition to the software, licensed
adoption of relevant basic technical
users of SIMARIS design will also
data and the documentation of tech-
benefit from the free expert advice
nical highlights incorporated in the
for complex projects rendered by the
proposed devices and distribution
SIMARIS design Solution Support
boards.
Team.
With a panel-based material price cal-
culation, the planner receives a first
overview of the business volume in-
volved in the planned installation.

SIMARIS design
12/7 12
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite B
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite C
Appendix
chapter 13
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 2
13 Appendix
Contact Bibliography
Planners or switchgear manufacturers, A Electrical Installations Handbook, Power Quality;
investors or architects, electrician or by Günther G. Seip, Publicis Catalogs SR 10 ...
building operator – for institutional, KommunikationsAgentur, www.powerquality.com
commercial or industrial developments Corporate Publishing
K Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker
or other projects – everybody benefits
Switchgear up to 24 kV,
from Totally Integrated Power. B Switching, Protection, and Distri-
SF6-insulated, Catalog HA 35.41
bution in Low-Voltage Networks,
If you would like to know more about
Publicis KommunikationsAgentur, NXAIR, NXAIR M, NXAIR P
Totally Integrated Power, or if you
Corporate Publishing Circuit-Breakers up to 24 kV,
would like to get thorough support:
Catalog HA 25.71
We’re always there to help you!
C Totally Integrated Power
www.siemens.com/tip www.siemens.com/tip L Switch-Disconnectors up to
24 kV, SF6-insulated, Catalogs
D SIMARIS design HA 45.11 and HA 45.31
www.siemens.com/simaris
Switchgear up to 24 kV,
extendable, SF6-insulated,
E Low-Voltage Switch-
Catalog HA 41.11
gear and Controlgear
www.siemens.com/sivacon
M 3AH Vacuum-Circuit-Breakers
(also available as online catalog),
F Modular Devices:
Catalog HG 11.11
ALPHA: Catalog ET A1,
Catalog ET A5 NXACT, Type 3AJ Vacuum
BETA: Catalog ET B1, Circuit-Breaker Module,
Technical Information ET B1 T Catalog HG 11.51
GAMMA: Catalog ET G1
Vacuum Switches, Switch-
Disconnectors, HV HRC Fuses,
G Low-Voltage Switch-
Catalog HG 12
gear and Controlgear,
Catalog LV10 (as of October
N GEAFOL Cast-Resin
2005: LV1)
Transformers 100 to 2,500 kVA,
Catalog TV 1
H DELTA Product Range,
Catalog ET D1
I Products and Systems for

Power Distribution,
Catalog NS PS
J Numerical Protection
Catalogs SIP 2004
www.siprotec.com

TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 3
Appendix
Chapter Topic A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
1 Introduction
2 Power Distribution Planning for C C
2.1 Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
2.2 Power System Planning Module
3 System Protection/Safety Coordination C C
4 Medium Voltage
4.1 Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker C
Switchgear for Primary Power Distribution
4.2 Secondary Distribution Systems, C
Switchgear and Substations
4.3 Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range C
4.4 PQM® – Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control C
5 Transformers C C C
Control transformers
6 Low Voltage
6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and C C C C C C C
Distribution Systems
6.1.1 SIVACON 8PS – Busbar Trunking Systems C C C C
6.1.2 SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear – C C C C C C
Economical, Flexible and Safe
6.1.3 SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC Systems C C C C
for the Switchgear Manufacturer
6.1.4 Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal, C C C C
ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards
6.1.5 Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/160, ALPHA Universal and C C C C
ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards
6.1.6 ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution C C C
Cabinets for Germany
6.1.7 SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards C C C C
6.1.8 SMS Rapid Wiring System C C C
6.1.9 8HP Insulated Distribution System C C
6.2 Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems C C C C
6.2.1 Circuit-Breakers C C C C C
6.2.2 Fuse Systems C C C C C
6.2.3 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors C C C C C
6.2.4 Miniature Circuit-Breakers C C C C C C
6.2.5 Residual-Current-Operated Circuit-Breakers C C C C
6.2.6 Lightning Current and Surge Arresters C C C
6.2.7 3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches C C C
6.3 Modular Devices C C C
6.4 Maximum-Demand Monitors C C
6.5 Switches, Outlets and Electronic Products C C C
6.6 Motor Management with SIMOCODE pro C C
7 Communications in Power Distribution C C
8 Protection and Substation Control C C
9 Power Management C C C
10 Measuring and Recording Power Quality C C
10.1 Overview C C C
10.2 SIMEAS Q C C
10.3 SIMEAS R C
11 Meters and Measuring Instruments C C
11.1 SIMEAS P Power Meter C C
11.2 SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities C
11.3 Meters / Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices C C
11.4 4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers C C C
12 SIMARIS design – the Tool for C C C
13 Appendix
13/3 13
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 4
Keyword Index
A B C
Absolute selectivity 3/40 ff. Back-up protection 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., Cabinet panel versions 6/20
6/46 8/12,
Accessories 2/26, 3/13, 3/27, 5/9, 6/20 ff., Capacitors 3/2 ff., 4/73 ff., 6/38, 6/66
6/36, 6/38 ff., 6/42, 6/50 ff., 6/71, 6/88, Basic fees 9/3 ff.
Cascade-connected 3/18 ff.
6/109, 11/28
Bay controller family 4/4
Characteristic (curve) 2/8, 3/3 ff., 11/17
Active power 9/13, 10/5 ff., 10/9, 11/11,
Bay level 8/4, 8/13
11/14, 11/16 ff., 11/22 ff., 11/26 ff. Characteristic displacement factor 3/46
Billing metering panel 4/59 ff.
Air-insulated 4/2 ff. Characteristics 3/4 ff., 6/43 ff., 6/55 ff.,
Breaking capacity 3/2 ff. 6/69, 6/75, 9/8
Alarm relay 8/16
Breaking current 3/18 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/39, Circuit-breaker 1/6, 2/7 ff., 3/3 ff., 4/10 ff.,
Apparent power 9/13, 10/5 ff., 11/2 ff.,
6/42 ff., 6/52, 6/56, 6/59 ff. 7/2, 8/12, 9/4
11/11, 11/16, 11/22, 11/24, 11/27
Building services automation 9/3 ff. Circuit-breaker feeder 4/57 ff.
Archiving 7/4, 7/5 ff., 7/6 ff., 8/14, 10/2,
10/8, 10/10 Building substation control systems 1/3 Circuit-breaker panel 4/6 ff., 6/13, 6/17
Arcing 3/5 ff., 5/9, 6/11, 6/16, 6/20, 6/36, Burden 8/8 ff. Clearance time 3/5 ff., 6/102
6/42, 6/51 ff., 6/72
Bus interface 1/3 Clock timer 6/98
Arcing time 3/5
Bus sectionalizer 4/32, 4/35 Command time 3/8 ff.
Assembly kits, mounting sets 6/17, 6/19
Bus systems 3/12 ff., 6/2, 6/8, 7/2, 7/4, 8/5 Communication 2/3 ff., 3/3 ff., 6/2 ff., 6/13,
ff., 6/34, 6/51, 6/52
6/36 ff., 6/101, 6/108, 6/110, 6/113 ff.,
Busbar protection 8/4, 8/9, 8/36 ff.
Auxiliary switch 3/12, 3/28, 6/54, 6/65, 6/70 7/2 ff., 7/7, 8/2 ff., 8/12 ff., 8/19, 8/23, 9/5,
Busbar system 2/5, 4/2 ff., 6/6, 6/12, 10/3, 11/5 ff., 11/11, 11/26
6/16 ff., 6/49 ff.
Comparison of characteristics 3/18 ff.
Busbar trunking system 6/2 ff.
Compartmentalization 4/2, 6/20, 6/52
Busbars 2/5, 2/23, 2/25, 3/28, 4/2 ff., 5/8
Compensation 2/3, 6/5, 6/14, 6/18,
ff., 6/3 ff., 6/12 ff., 6/19 ff., 6/26, 6/38,
6/20, 9/13
6/44, 6/49 ff., 6/59, 6/67, 8/4, 8/9 ff.,
8/36 12/3 Conductor cross section 6/42, 6/59, 6/78
Configuration 8/3 ff., 8/12, 10/9 ff., 1/2 ff,

3/4, 4/76, 6/39, 6/49, 6/66, 6/8, 6/114
Consumption analyses 11/17
Consumption control 9/7 ff.
Consumption profile 9/10
Consumption recording 1/2, 7/2
Contactor 3/2 ff., 4/72 ff., 6/7, 6/20,

6/38 ff., 6/42, 6/46, 6/51 ff., 6/56, 6/61,
6/77, 6/90, 6/93, 7/2
Continuous operation 3/15, 6/42, 6/96

TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 5
Appendix
Control board 4/5 ff.

D Distribution cabinet 6/27, 6/75
Control level 7/2 Distribution circuit-breaker 3/25 ff.

Daily demand profile 9/20
Control range 3/6 Distribution system 6/34
Data compression 10/9 ff.
Control switch 6/89 Distribution transformer 3/52, 3/58, 5/2 ff.
Data interfaces 3/52, 8/22
Conversion factors 13/8 Documentation 1/3 ff., 4/4, 7/5, 7/7, 8/12,
Data networking 1/3 9/5, 9/11
Converter 3/51
Data validation 9/14 ff. Dry-type transformer 4/82, 5/2 ff.
Cost center 9/12
Decoupling reactor 6/76 ff., 6/83, 6/85 Dynamic selectivity 3/40 ff.
Cost center assignment 2/13 ff., 7/2,
7/6 ff., 9/4, 9/11 ff. Degree of protection 3/15, 3/30, 6/3, 6/5 Dynamic short-circuit strength 3/13
ff., 6/10, 6/13, 6/17 ff., 6/19 ff., 6/20 ff.,
Coupling switch 3/46 ff.
Cross-connection optimization 9/2 ff., 9/10

6/26 ff., 6/30 ff., 6/32, 6/34 ff., 6/51 ff.,
6/53 ff., 6/59 ff., 6/61, 6/70, 6/71, 6/74,
E
6/80, 8/15
Current carrying capacity 6/44 Efficiency 4/92, 5/4, 5/11, 9/2 ff., 9/13
Delay time 3/3 ff.
Current grading 3/4 ff. Efficiency improvement 9/2 ff., 9/13 ff.
Demand charge 5/6 ff.
Current limiter 3/9, 3/40 EMERGENCY STOP switch 6/2, 6/36, 6/38,
Demand integration period 6/102, 9/18 ff. 6/49, 6/88
Current limiting 2/9, 3/3 ff., 4/73, 4/82,
6/41 ff., 6/56 Demand-oriented energy reports 7/3 Encapsulation 3/30, 4/17 ff., 6/39, 6/49 ff.
Current limiting range 3/21 Differential protection 3/4 ff., 8/26, 8/28, Energy costs 5/5, 7/7, 9/2 ff., 9/17
8/31
Current quality 8/3 ff. Energy demand 1/6, 5/5 ff., 7/2, 7/7, 10/2
Digital protection 3/52
Current ratio 3/49 Energy flow representation 9/2 ff., 9/10 ff.
DIGSI 8/3, 8/13 ff., 8/18 ff.
Current selectivity 3/4 ff. Energy import 1/2, 7/2 ff., 9/2, 9/5 ff., 11/2
Directional protection 3/4
Current transformer 3/4 ff., 4/6 ff., 8/8 ff., Energy market 7/7, 9/3 ff.
8/13, 8/24, 8/31 ff., 8/36, 10/9, 10/12, Disconnector 3/39, 3/54, 7/4, 9/4
Energy procurement 1/6, 7/3, 9/2 ff.
11/21, 11/28
Disconnector panel 4/8 ff.
Energy transmission 9/2 ff.
Current types 6/65
Disengaging time 3/5
Environmental protection 6/46
Dispatch 7/3, 9/4, 9/6
Event log 1/6, 7/5 ff.
Distance protection 3/4, 8/9, 8/11 ff.,
Extinction time 3/17
8/25 ff.
Distribution blocks 6/32
Distribution board 1/2, 1/5, 2/2 ff., 3/22 ff.,

4/5 ff., 6/5, 6/22, 6/24, 6/27, 6/29, 6/32 ff.,
6/44 ff., 6/51 ff., 6/75, 6/89, 11/20, 12/6
Distribution box 6/32
13/5 13
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 6
F G K
Fault analysis 8/22 Gas insulation 4/3 ff. Kilowatt per hour rate 9/3, 9/96
Fault current 2/9, 3/3 ff., 2/2, 6/36 ff., Generator protection 3/12, 8/16
6/82, 6/109, 8/29
Grading diagram 3/5, 3/6 L
Fault detection 10/8
Grading time 3/5 ff. Large test current 3/27, 6/44, 6/55
Fault diagnosis 10/9
Ground-fault protection 3/3, 8/12, 8/34 ff. Let-through current 2/9, 3/16 ff.,
Fault recording 8/22 4/51 ff., 6/44
Grounding 6/20, 6/32, 6/63, 6/65, 6/71 ff.
Fault recording 8/3, 8/11 ff., 8/14, Lightning current arrester 6/83 ff.
Grounding switch 4/6 ff.
8/18, 8/22, 10/8
Limit value 3/33, 3/53, 10/3, 10/6, 11/3
Fault-current protection 3/3, 6/67
H Limit value monitoring 7/6
Fault-current protective switch 6/37
Line protection 3/3 ff., 6/2, 6/37, 6/46,
Harmonic currents 3/51, 11/3
Fault-current tripping 3/12 6/56 ff., 6/77 ff.
Harmonics 2/2, 2/3, 3/51, 4/85 ff., 9/4,
Faults 1/6, 2/17, 2/19, 3/6, 4/90, 5/19, Line-protection condition 3/40
9/13, 10/6, 10/9, 10/11
6/42, 6/71, 6/93, 7/2 ff., 7/7, 8/3, 8/13,
Load circuit-breaker 3/6, 3/22, 3/25 ff.
8/15, 8/22, 8/29 ff. High-current product range 6/58
Load curves 1/6, 9/3 ff., 9/6, 9/10 ff., 11/2
Fault-signal contact 3/27 ff., 6/54 HV HRC fuses 3/3 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/46
Load forecasts 7/3
Feeder circuit-breaker 1/6, 3/6 ff., 7/5, 9/3
Filter circuit 3/51

I Load management 1/2, 1/6, 6/103,
7/2, 9/17
Fire protection 2/11 ff., 5/17 ff., 6/2, Import limit 9/4, 9/9
Load monitoring 8/11 ff., 8/20
6/29, 6/36 ff., 6/62
Import monitoring 9/4, 9/7 ff.
Load peak 6/102, 9/8, 9/17
Fixed-mounted design 6/11 ff., 6/15 ff.
Infeed panel 7/7
Logic triggers 10/9
Flicker 9/4, 9/13
Infeeds 2/7, 3/4 ff., 7/7, 8/31, 10/12
Loss evaluation 5/5
Floor-mounted distribution boards 6/4,
Information technology 1/3, 6/3
6/22, 6/24 Losses (inherent to equipment) 5/5, 6/46
In-line fuse switch-disconnector 6/19, 6/55
Full-range fuse 3/3, 3/18 Low-voltage circuit-breaker 3/3 ff.
Insta contactor 6/90, 6/96
Functional category 3/18 ff., 6/42 Low-voltage cubicle 4/4 ff.
instabus EIB 3/28, 6/8, 6/31 ff., 6/65, 6/89,
Functional scope 8/21 Low-voltage fuses 6/41
6/97 ff., 6/103, 6/109, 9/17 ff., 11/21, 11/27
Fuse switch-disconnector 6/2, 6/17, Low-voltage power systems 2/8, 3/2 ff.,
Insulation failure 3/19, 3/27, 6/54, 6/62 ff.
6/34, 6/51 ff. 6/4, 6/11
Insulation monitor 6/95
Fuses 2/3 ff., 3/3 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/14, 6/34, Low-voltage switchgear 3/48, 3/49, 6/2 ff.,
6/37, 6/41 ff., 6/49 ff., 6/77 ff., 6/85 ff., Insulator 4/78 6/11 ff., 6/38, 6/89
6/93 ff., 8/29 ff., 9/4
Interlocking 4/2 ff., 6/21, 6/23, 6/26, 6/32, LV HRC fuse 3/3 ff., 6/45, 6/46, 6/51 ff.
8/5, 8/36
Isolating 4/26 ff., 6/2, 6/37, 6/51 ff.
Joulean heat value 3/40

TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 7
Appendix
M Modular design 6/19 ff.

O
Modular devices 6/12, 6/19 ff., 6/24 ff.,
Main busbar system 6/12, 6/16, 6/17 6/34, 6/89, 11/20 Oil-immersed transformer 5/3 ff.
Main distribution board 3/43 ff., 6/5, Molded-case circuit-breaker 3/16, 6/22 Open-circuit shunt release 3/27 ff., 6/54
6/11, 6/66
Monitoring equipment 6/72 Opening time 3/5 ff.
Main switch (main circuit-breaker) 3/18,
Monitoring level 7/2 Operating costs 1/3 ff., 2/2 ff., 5/6 ff.
3/28, 6/36, 6/38, 6/46, 6/56, 6/59 ff., 6/88
Motor management 6/110 ff. Operating current 3/8 ff.
Main switchgear 6/4 ff., 6/11
Motor protection 3/9 ff., 6/13, 6/40, 6/42, Operating time 3/5 ff.
Maintenance 1/5, 7/6, 9/4, 9/14, 9/16
6/54, 6/95, 6/113, 8/4, 8/27, 8/28, 8/34
Operating values 3/3 ff.
Maintenance 4/3 ff., 5/7, 5/17, 5/18, 3/23,
Motor starter 3/9 ff.
8/2, 8/11, 8/14 ff. Operator safety 4/4 ff., 6/37, 6/41
Mounting rail 6/3, 6/19 ff., 6/29 ff., 6/51,
Maintenance measures 1/6 Outgoing feeder panel 4/18 ff.
6/57, 6/59 ff., 6/88, 6/114, 11/10, 11/18
Making capacity – rated short-circuit Overcurrent protection 3/9 ff., 8/9, 8/30
current 6/49
N Overcurrent release 3/4 ff., 6/38 ff., 6/93
Maximum-demand monitoring 7/7, 9/3, 9/5,
Overcurrent-time protection 3/3 ff., 8/26,
9/8, 6/102 ff., 9/17 ff. Network analysis 4/85
8/28 ff.
Measured values display 7/4 Network circuit-breaker 3/49 ff.
Overload limit 3/45
Measuring cores 8/8 Network configuration 2/2 ff., 3/2, 12/3
Overload protection 2/7 ff., 3/3 ff., 8/25,
Measuring instruments 4/85, 6/4, 8/13, 9/4, Network master relay 3/10 ff. 8/27, 8/29, 8/31
10/2, 10/5, 11/2 ff., 11/5, 11/8, 11/9, 11/12
Node fuse 3/49 ff. Overload range 3/21 ff.
ff., 11/20 ff.
Nominal current rule 6/44 Overload relay 3/9 ff., 8/4
Measuring transducer 4/76, 4/82, 8/8, 8/13
Overload release 2/8, 3/3 ff.
Medium-voltage circuit-breaker 3/3, 3/4
Medium-voltage equipment 4/72 ff.
Medium-voltage switchgear 1/2, 4/2 ff., 8/2
Meshed system 2/4, 3/4, 3/48 ff.
Meter 1/6, 3/21, 6/27, 6/76, 6/103, 6/113,

7/2, 8/8, 9/4, 9/11, 9/17, 11/9, 11/11, 11/17,
11/19 ff., 11/23, 11/26 ff.
Meter cabinets 6/27 ff.
Metering panel 4/7 ff.
Mimic diagram 4/4 ff.
Miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) 3/3 ff., 6/2,

6/34 ff., 6/41, 6/46, 6/54 ff., 6/77 ff., 6/86
Modular design 6/11
13/7 13
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 8
P product range for ~ 6/58

R
Power system design 2/2, 2/4
Panel (coupling) 4/35 Radial system 8/29
Power system protection (also ➞ system
Panel control 4/60 protection) 2/2 ff., 3/9 ff., 8/2, 8/4, 8/11, Rated breaker current 6/13
8/14
Panel design 4/6 ff. Rated continuous current 3/15 ff., 6/50 ff.
Prearcing time 2/17 ff.
Panel versions 4/29 ff., 6/17 Rated cross section 6/55
Prearcing-time/current characteristic 2/18
Panels 4/4 ff. Rated current 3/3 ff., 4/82, 6/8 ff., 6/12,
Primary winding 5/4 6/15, 6/17, 6/21 ff., 6/26, 6/38 ff., 6/42,
Parameterization 8/3, 8/4, 8/20, 8/23,
6/44 ff., 6/55 ff., 6/67
10/10, 11/3 ff., 11/10, 11/12 ff. Priorities list 9/7 ff.
Rated current rule 3/30
Partial range protection 3/3, 3/18 PROFIBUS-DP 6/8, 6/36 ff., 6/110,
6/113 ff., 10/3 ff., 11/3 ff. Rated frequency 3/15 ff.
Partial selectivity 2/9, 3/2 ff.
Prognoses (➞ Load forecasts) 1/6, 2/2, Rated insulation voltage 3/13 ff., 6/12,
Peak short-circuit current 3/5 ff.
7/2, 7/7, 9/6 6/15, 6/21, 6/59
Period 9/9
Protection and substation control 3/2, Rated operating current 3/15 ff.
Personnel safety 4/3 ff. 8/2 ff.
Rated residual current 3/12
Planning 1/2 ff., 2/2 ff., 3/6, 4/2 ff., 6/8, Protection characteristics 3/21 ff.
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity 3/13 ff.
6/27, 6/89, 6/91, 7/3, 8/3, 8/5, 8/12, 8/19,
Protection cores 8/8
9/2, 9/4, 9/7, 9/8, 11/20 Rated short-circuit making capacity 3/13 ff.
Protection, level of ~ 3/9, 3/12
Planning result 1/5 Rated switching capacity 3/2 ff., 6/67, 6/69
Protective characteristics 3/3, 3/4
Planning software 1/5, 3/6 Rated voltage 3/13 ff., 4/91, 6/23, 6/26,
Protective devices 2/7 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/61, 6/42, 6/47 ff., 6/59 ff., 6/69, 10/2
Planning tool 1/2, 9/4
4/82, 5/9, 6/38, 6/73 ff., 8/3, 8/8, 8/11,
Rating 3/52 ff.
Plug-connectors 5/8, 6/32 ff. 8/13, 8/24, 10/10 ff., 12/3, 12/4
RCCB module 3/28, 6/70
Point-to-point distribution board 6/4 ff. Protective equipment 2/8 ff., 3/3 ff., 6/2,
6/36, 6/54, 6/99, 8/5 Reactive power 6/14, 6/18, 9/13, 10/6,
Power distribution 1/2 ff., 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff.,
10/11, 11/09, 11/11, 11/14, 11/16, 11/22 ff.
4/2 ff., 6/2, 6/4 ff., 6/11, 6,34 ff., 6/38, Protective measures 2/6, 3/21, 6/20, 6/63
6/49 ff., 6/78, 9/3, 12/2 ff. Reactive power compensation 6/5, 6/14,
Protective relay 3/52, 8/2 ff, 8/11, 8/13 ff.,
6/18
Power factor 2/10, 3/13, 3/15, 6/43, 8/18 ff., 8/31
6/112 ff., 8/5, 10/6, 10/9, 11/3, 11/11, Reactor 8/31
Protective switch 2/3, 3/2 ff., 6/2, 6/34,
11/16
6/36 ff., 6/40 ff., 6/54 ff., 6/66 ff., 6/77 ff., Reactor-connected capacitors 3/51
Power loss 5/5 ff., 6/41, 6/44 6/82, 6/86, 7/4
Relay burden 8/8, 8/10
Power management 6/38, 6/110, 6/113 ff.,
Relay interrogation 8/23
7/2 ff., 7/6 ff., 9/2, 9/4 ff.
Relay operation 8/19
Power meter 11/2
Relay selection 8/25 ff.
Power quality 4/2 ff., 7/7, 8/5, 9/13
Release 3/50 ff.
Power statistics 6/102, 9/2 ff.
Release time 3/8
Power supply 6/36, 10/3, 11/2
Reliability 4/3 ff., 6/2, 6/36, 8/3, 8/5, 8/12,
Power supply company,
8/16 ff., 11/3, 11/14

TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 9
Appendix
Remote control 8/3, 8/5, 8/13, 8/18, 10/10 Sequence of event recording, Starter circuit-breaker 3/9, 3/19
SOE recording 10/10
Remote-control switch 6/90, 6/96 Station level 8/5, 10/10
Sequential control 10/9
Residual current 3/11 ff. Subdistribution board 3/18 ff., 6/4 ff., 6/11,
Serviceability 4/3, 4/4 6/13, 6/19, 6/22, 6/24 ff., 6/29, 6/66
Residual current tripping 3/12 ff.
Setting ranges 3/3 ff. Substation control and protection system
Residual ripple 3/12
3/52
Settings 2/12 ff., 7/2, 8/12, 8/14, 8/19
Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker
Substation control systems 8/2, 8/6, 8/19
6/66 ff. SF6-insulated 4/26 ff.
Summation current transformer 6/64
Resistance to accidental arcs 4/5 ff. Shock-hazard protection 6/19, 6/21, 6/41,
6/57, 6/59 ff., 6/109 Supplementary protection 6/62 ff.
Resonance phenomena 3/51
Short circuit 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/2, Supply connection 6/31
Resonant circuit 3/51
6/6,6/11 ff., 6/20 ff., 6/26, 6/36 ff., 6/46,6/49
Supply quality 2/32, 2/9, 4/88, 4/91
Retrofitting 9/2 ff. ff., 6/55, 6/67, 6/77 ff., 6/100, 8/8 ff.,8/13 ff.
Surge arrester 4/33 ff., 6/2, 6/73 ff., 6/78,
Ring-main feeder 4/44 ff. Short-circuit breaking capacity 2/13, 6/38 ff.
6/80 ff., 4/60, 6/2, 6/72
Ring-main transformer 4/50 ff. Short-circuit current 2/7 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/73
Switch position indicator 3/28, 4/6 ff.,
ff.,6/23, 6/26, 6/42 ff., 6/49, 6/51 ff., 6/77
6/99 ff.
S ff.,8/8 ff.
Switch-disconnector 3/10 ff., 4/3 ff., 6/2,
Short-circuit making capacity 3/13
6/9, 6/14, 6/17, 6/20, 6/22, 6/25, 6/34, 6/41,
Safety class 5/21
Short-circuit protection 2/8, 3/3 ff., 4/70 ff., 6/88 ff., 7/5, 9/3 ff.
Safety margin (grading time) 3/5, 3/6 ff. 6/36, 6/38, 6/42 ff., 6/49, 6/51 ff., 6/100
Switch-disconnector panel 4/8
Safety margins 3/17, 3/53, 3/54 Short-circuit range 3/17 ff., 6/43
Switch-disconnector stations
Safety technology 1/3 Short-circuit reactance 3/51 (switchgear for secondary distribution) 4/55
Scatter band width 3/56 Short-circuit strength 2/10, 3/13, 3/23, 5/7, Switches 1/6, 2/3 ff., 3/3 ff., 4/2 ff., 5/9, 6/2,
6/16, 6/20 ff., 6/67 6/30 ff., 6/36 ff., 6/43, 6/49 ff., 6/67 ff., 6/78
Scatter bands 3/44 ff., 6/42
ff., 6/88, 6/92, 6/104, 8/12 ff., 8/18 ff., 8/31
Short-time grading control 3/42
Secondary winding 5/4 ff., 9/4, 9/17
Signaling devices 6/2, 6/94, 6/108
Selective behavior 3/40 Switchgear 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/2 ff., 6/2 ff.,
SIMARIS design 12/2 ff. 6/19, 6/38, 6/49 ff., 6/89, 6/110, 8/2 ff., 8/11
Selective tripping 6/65
ff., 8/15, 8/17 ff., 8/23 ff., 8/29 ff., 12/5
SIMARIS planning software 12/2 ff.
Selectivity 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/4, 4/70, 6/41 ff.,
Switchgear assemblies 3/9, 3/12, 3/16 ff.,
6/45 ff., 6/49, 6/54, 6/56, 6/79, 10/9, 12/4 SIMARIS SIVACON 12/2 ff.
6/4, 6/9, 6/11
Selectivity criteria 3/4 Single-line diagram 12/3 ff.
Switchgear manufacturer 1/5, 4/75 ff., 6/15,
Selectivity limit 3/32 ff. Small distribution board 6/4, 6/29 ff., 6/19 ff., 12/2
6/34, 6/44
Selectivity types 3/33 Switching capacity 2/8, 2/9, 3/2 ff., 4/79,
Small test current 3/27, 6/55 4/80, 6/38, 6/42 ff., 6/51 ff.
Selectivity, conditions 3/6 ff.
Spread of protection response time 3/8 Switching capacity category 3/15
Sentron (circuit-breaker) 6/2, 6/13, 6/36,
6/38 ff. Spur panel 4/7 ff. Switching devices 2/2, 2/7, 3/7 ff., 4/15 ff.,
5/8, 6/2 ff., 6/8, 6/15, 6/20 ff., 6/35 ff., 6/41
Standards 1/5, 2/4, 4/45 ff., 5/2 ff., 6/2, 6/9,
ff., 6/46, 6/90 ff., 8/4, 8/6, 12/2, 12/4 ff.
6/20, 6/36, 8/5 ff., 8/25, 6/39, 6/75, 11/2,
11/14, 12/2, 12/3
13/9 13
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 10
Switching-off priority 6/102 Tripping characteristic 2/27 ff., 6/56, 6/59

W
Switch-off power 9/6 Tripping characteristics ( ~ curves) 3/8 ff.
Wall-mounted distribution board 6/4 ff.,
System configuration 3/2, 4/44, 4/52 Tripping current rule 3/30
6/24 ff.
System protection 3/4 ff., 6/36 ff., 6/40 ff., Tripping delay 3/49
Weakpoint analysis 7/5 ff.
6/78, 8/4
Tripping rule 6/44
Withdrawable switchgear 4/4
System protection management 8/14
TTA (type-tested switchgear assembly)
System reactance 3/51 1/2, 3/4, 3/14, 6/9 ff., 6/16, 6/20 ff., 6/26,
6/33, 6/53
Z
T Type (of construction) 3/3 ff., 5/3 ff., 6/62, Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) 3/42
6/93 ff., 6/104 ff., 8/3
Technical supply conditions 6/27
Type-tested 4/2 ff., 6/16, 6/22, 6/24, 9/11
Temperature-rise limit 6/20
Terminal box for cables 5/8 U

Thermal fault withstand capability 3/13
Undervoltage 2/26, 3/4 ff., 6/54, 6/95, 8/25,
Thermistor motor protection device 3/19, 8/27
3/20
Undervoltage protection 3/47
Time grading 3/4 ff.
Undervoltage release 3/28, 3/49, 6/54
Time selectivity 3/6 ff.
Utilization category 3/3, 6/42 ff., 6/67
Time-current characteristics 3/17 ff.
Time-current threshold zone 3/29 V

Timer 6/92, 6/108
Vacuum circuit-breaker 4/6 ff.
Total (peak) short circuit 3/55
Vacuum contactor 4/72, 4/78, 4/79
Total clearance time 3/5 ff.
Vacuum switch 4/80
Touch voltage 3/27, 6/46, 6/54, 6/61,
Vacuum switching principle 4/75
6/63, 6/65
Vacuum switching tube 4/6 ff.
Transformer 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/44 ff., 5/2 ff.,
8/4, 8/9, 8/10, 8/15, 8/26, 10/12, 8/28 ff., Voltage levels 3/6, 3/56, 4/3, 4/26, 4/86,
9/12 6/104, 8/11, 9/4
Transformers (-> current ~, voltage ~, Voltage quality 10/5 ff.

transducer) 3/51, 4/4 ff., 7/4, 9/3 ff., 10/6
Voltage transformer 4/10 ff.
ff., 10/12, 11/3 ff., 11/17 ff., 11/22, 11/24,
11/26 ff.
Transmission range 3/53 ff.
Tree structure 12/3

TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 11
Appendix
Technical Information
Type of design NYM, NHXMH, NYBUY, NHYRUZY, NYIF, H07V-U, H07V-R, H07V-K
Wires under load 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Installation type B1 B2 C E
(Cable load rating in
On or in walls or flush-mounted
heat insulating walls
acc. to DIN VDE 0298 In pipes or ducts for electr. installations Direct installation Free in air
Part 4)
≥0.3d ≥0.3d
Single-core cables Multi-core cable in Multi-core cable on Multi-core cable
in the installation installation pipe on the wall or on the free in air with min.
pipe on the wall the wall or on the floor clearance from
floor wall of at least 0.3 x
the cable diameter
d and, if two cables
are laid side by side
or above each other,
with a spacing
Single-core cables Multi-core cable in Single-core of at least double
in a cable duct on a cable duct on the sheathed cables the cable diameter
the wall wall or on the floor on the wall or on
the floor
Single-core cables, Multi-core cable,

single-core flat-webbed cable
sheathed cables or in the wall, in the
multi-core cable in ceiling or concealed
the installation
pipe in the brickwork
Nominal cross section of Load rating in A

copper conductor in mm2
1.5 17.5 15.5 16.5 15 19.5 17.5 22 18.5

2,5 24 21 23 20 27 24 30 25
4 32 28 30 27 36 32 40 34
6 41 36 38 34 46 41 51 43
10 57 50 52 46 63 57 70 60
16 76 68 69 62 85 76 94 80
25 101 89 90 80 112 96 119 101
35 125 110 111 99 138 119 148 126
50 151 134 – – – – – –
70 192 171 – – – – – –
95 232 207 – – – – – –
120 269 239 – – – – – –
Table 13/1 Load rating of cables for building installations, suitable for continuous loading at 30 °C
ambient temperature, permissible operating temperature is 70 °C
(taken from DIN VDE 0298 Part 4)
13/11 13
TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 12
Classification of overcurrent Nominal Cable with Cable with

protection systems cross PVC insulation VPE insulation
According to DIN VDE 0100 Part 430 section *
To protect cables and lines in the event of
0.6/1 kv 3.6/6 kV 6/10 kV 6/10 kV 12/20 kV 18/30 kV
overloading, the following conditions must
be fulfilled: Load rating in A
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz mm2 Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al
I2 ≤ 1.45 Iz 1.5 19.5 – – – – – – – – – – –

2.5 25 – – – – – – – – – – –
Ib Operating current of the circuit
4 34 – – – – – – – – – – –
Iz Cable load rating following the load rating
6 43 – – – – – – – – – – –
tables and acc. to DIN VDE 0278 Part 2
10 59 – – – – – – – – – – –
or Part 4
16 79 – – – – – – – – – – –
In Nominal current of protective system
25 106 82 106 – 147 – 163 – – – – –
I2 Current which effects tripping of the 35 129 100 130 99 178 138 197 153 200 – – –
protective system under conditions 50 157 119 156 119 213 165 236 183 239 185 241 187
defined in the device standards (large
70 199 152 196 150 265 206 294 228 297 231 299 232
test current); e.g. DIN VDE 0636,
95 246 186 238 182 322 249 358 278 361 280 363 282
DIN VDE 0641 and DIN VDE 0660.
120 285 216 274 210 370 288 413 321 416 323 418 325
150 326 246 313 238 420 326 468 364 470 366 472 367
In the special case that the overcurrent
185 374 285 358 273 481 375 535 418 538 420 539 421
protection system fulfills the requirement
240 445 338 423 323 566 442 631 494 634 496 635 496
I2 ≤ 1.45, In may be selected as being equal
300 511 400 482 380 648 507 722 568 724 569 725 568
to the cable load rating Iz.
Protection against short circuits is ensured if
Three-core cable
the current breaking capacity of the overcur-
rent protection device is at least equal to the Three-core cable with single shield
short circuit present at the mounting location.
Single-core cable, laid in bunches
If this condition, which is normally fulfilled in
practice, is not true here, DIN VDE 0100 * Three or four-core, without concentric conductor, three loaded wires
Part 430/11.91 Section 6 must be observed.
If conditions are different, the table values must be multiplied with appropriate conversion
factors, for planning notes please refer to Heinhold/Stuppe “Cables and lines for high currents”
(ISBN 3-89578-088-X), DIN VDE 02771, DIN VDE 02776-603, DIN VDE 0276-620 and
DIN VDE 276-1000.
Table 13/2 Load rating of high-power cables for laying in air at 30 °C ambient temperature

TIP_Kap13 11.08.2005 19:42 Uhr Seite 13
Appendix
Imprint Concept, support, coordination,

production:
Totally Integrated Power – planning Uwe Wolf (A&D GC)
power distribution systems – the Ulrike Fleischmann (A&D CD TIP)
manual for Totally Integrated Gerhard Reinknecht (A&D GC)
Power is your assistant.
Layout:
Published by Publicis KommunikationsAgentur
Siemens AG Erlangen
Automation & Drives (A&D)
Printed by
Power Transmission and Distribution
Bollmann Druck, Zirndorf
(PTD)
Siemens Building Technologies (SBT) Production:
THALHOFER, D-71101 Schönaich
Authors:
ethabind cover
Stefan Auxel (PTD M)
patented
Bernhard Böckenfeld (PTD EA)
Ulrich Eckhoff (SBTS PM) ®2005 by Siemens AG,
Ingo Englert (SBT) 2nd revised edition
Ulrike Fleischmann (A&D CD TIP) Berlin and Munich
Jörg Flottemesch (PTD M)
All rights reserved.
Andreas Friese (SBTS PM)
Nominal charge 30.00 euro
Remo Gellert (A&D ET)
Faik Günaydin (A&D CD) We accept no responsibility for the
Harald Heil (A&D ET) information and typical circuit
Gerhard Hengstebeck (A&D CD) diagrams given in this manual.
Ina Hübel (PTD M)
Subject to change without prior
Hans-Joachim Langels (A&D ET)
notice.
Franz Kammerl (A&D ET)
Dr. Hartmut Kiank (PTD M)
Manfred Kleemeier (A&D ET)
Helmuth Kotulla (A&D CD)
Hans R. Kranz (SBT)
Dr. Winfried Kristen (A&D ET)
Hugo Mähner (PTD T)
Christoph Maul (PTD M)
Martin Moosburger (A&D CD)
Oliver Nöldner (PTD M)
Klaus Nonnen (A&D ET)
Norbert Pantenburg (A&D CD TIP)
Wolfgang Pilsl (A&D ET)
Claus Rohr (A&D CD)
Dr. Dieter Sämann (PTD M)
Tino Schuldt (A&D ET)
Gordon Schumann (A&D CD)
Herbert Soens (PTD M)
Manfred Weiß (A&D CD)
Astrid Werner (A&D CD TIP)
Harald Zieger (SBT)
13/13 13

Siemens Switchboard and Protection Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Switchboard and Protection Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Application Manual

Totally Integrated Power TM Application Manual

Volume Volume flow rate Pressure

Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric

SI unit Non-metric Energy, work, heat content

Conductor cross sections Temperature Linear measure

Metric cross American Wire Gauge °F °C Non-metric

Electrical power Examples of decimal multiples and

1 Btu/h 0.293 W 1 m3 = 1,000,000 cm3;

Specific steam consumption

1 We focus your energy…

1/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Totally Integrated Power makes Take advantage of our focused

C They make use of the evolution of optimization and operational man-

1/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

1.2 Life Safety and Differences from the user's

SIMARIS Planning Software

SIMARIS design and needn’t spend hours looking up

SIMARIS SIVACON SIMARIS design can also be used

1/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Perfect records by other programs. Selected status Status

recorded by the system. Regardless OFF

lowing faults to be rectified by the local ON

of whether they were remotely con-

trolled or were performed locally, all

event log created is archived in a 22:59:03

Maintenance planning Extensive information such as

2 Power Distribution Planning for

Power Distribution Planning for

2 Power Distribution Planning for

2/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts

2.1.1 Requirements on Investment Installation Operation

IEC 2.1.2 Network Configuration

2/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts

Simple radial network Radial network with changeover reserve

a) Partial load reserve b) Full load reserve

n.c. n.o. n.o.

Fig. 2/3 Radial topology variants

2/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts

Fig. 2/5 EMC-friendly power system, centrally installed (short distances)

Connection layout comprises the

2/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts

– Downtime after fault Generally speaking, a combined solu-

Fig. 2/10 Grading for a supply section of 800 kVA

Grading in the supply section

2/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts

2.1.6 Planning Aid

Separation into several

Central utilities Centralized MV Distributed MV

Fig. 2/11 Overview of power supply concept modules

2.2 Power System

Low building, type 1: SPS2.2

GPS General power supply

2/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts

Building type Low building

Ground area / total area 2,500 m2 / 10,000 m2

Segmentation of power 85% utilized area, 15% side area